compute bullock amp masters rsquo a acid test ratio and b days rsquo sales in averag 580331

(Learning Objective 5: Using the acid test ratio and days’ sales in receivables to evaluate a company) Bullock & Masters, Inc., reported the following items at December 31, 20X6 (amounts in millions):

Balance Sheets (Summarized)

Year End

Year End

20X6

20X5

20X6

20X5

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

$ 48

$ 48

Cash

$137

$136

Accounts payable

158

277

Marketable securities

30

83

Other current liabilities

11

10

Accounts receivable, net

37

42

Long term liabilities

Inventories

29

44

Other current assets

19

59

Stockholders’ equity

172

246

Long term assets

137

217

Total assets

$389

$581

Total liabilities and equity

$389

$581

Income Statement (partial):

20X6

Sales revenue

$450

Compute Bullock & Masters’ (a) acid test ratio and (b) days’ sales in average receivables for 20X6. Evaluate each ratio value as strong or weak. Bullock & Masters sells on terms of net 30 days.

compute best buy rsquo s average collection period during 2006 580332

Best Buy Co., Inc., the electronics and appliance chain, reported these figures in millions of dollars:

2006

2005

Net sales

$30,848

$27,433

Receivables at end of year

506

375

Required

1. Compute Best Buy’s average collection period during 2006.

2. Is Best Buy’s collection period long or short? Hewlett Packard takes 41 days to collect its average level of receivables. FedEx, the overnight shipper, takes 38 days. What causes Best Buy’s collection period to be so different? (Challenge)

should ripley shirt company start selling on bankcards show the computations of net 580333

Ripley Shirt Company sells on credit and manages its own receivables. Average experience for the past 3 years has been as follows:

Cash

Credit

Total

Sales

$300,000

$300,000

$600,000

Cost of goods sold

165,000

165,000

330,000

Uncollectible account expense

10,000

10,000

Other expenses

84,000

84,000

168,000

John Ripley, the owner, is considering whether to accept bankcards (VISA, MasterCard). Ripley expects total sales to increase by 10% but cash sales to remain unchanged. If Ripley switches to bankcards, the business can save $8,000 on other expenses, but VISA and MasterCard charge 2% on bankcard sales. Ripley figures that the increase in sales will be due to the increased volume of bankcard sales.

Required

Should Ripley Shirt Company start selling on bankcards? Show the computations of net income under the present plan and under the bankcard plan. (Challenge)

based on past experience snead estimates that the percentage of accounts that will p 580338

Snead Company uses the aging method to adjust the allowance for uncollectible accounts at the end of the period. At December 31, 20X1, the balance of accounts receivable is $210,000 and the allowance for uncollectible accounts has a credit balance of $3,000 (before adjustment). An analysis of accounts receivable produced the following age groups:

Current

$150,000

60 days past due

50,000

Over 60 days past due

10,000

$210,000

Based on past experience, Snead estimates that the percentage of accounts that will prove to be uncollectible within the 3 age groups is 2%, 8%, and 20%, respectively. Based on these facts, the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts should be made in the amount of

a. $3,000.

b. $6,000.

c. $9,000.

d. $13,000.

v based on your analysis you should be able to readily identify the effects of certa 580352

Computer Giant, Inc., makes all sales on account. Susan Phillips, accountant for the company, receives and opens incoming mail. Company procedure requires Phillips to separate customer checks from the remittance slips, which list the amounts that Phillips posts as credits to customer accounts receivable. Phillips deposits the checks in the bank. At the end of each day she computes the day’s total amount posted to customer accounts and matches this total to the bank deposit slip. This procedure ensures that all receipts are deposited in the bank.

Required

As a consultant hired by Computer Giant, Inc., write a memo to management evaluating the company’s internal controls over cash receipts from customers. If the system is effective, identify its strong features. If the system has flaws, propose a way to strengthen the controls.

prepare t accounts for accounts receivable and allowance for uncollectibles and inse 580353

This problem takes you through the accounting for sales, receivables, and uncollectibles for FedEx Corporation, the overnight shipper. By selling on credit, FedEx cannot expect to collect 100% of its accounts receivable. At May 31, 20X6, and 20X5, respectively, FedEx reported the following on its balance sheet (adapted and in millions of dollars):

May 31,

20X6

20X5

Accounts receivable

$3,660

$3,422

Less: Allowance for uncollectibles

$3,516

$3,297

Accounts receivable, net

(144)

(125)

During the year ended May 31, 20X6, FedEx earned service revenue and collected cash from customers. Assume uncollectible account expense for the year was 1% of service revenue and that FedEx wrote off uncollectible receivables. At year end FedEx ended with the foregoing May 31, 20X6, balances.

Required

1. Prepare T accounts for Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Uncollectibles and insert the May 31, 20X5, balances as given.

2. Journalize the following assumed transactions of FedEx, Inc., for the year ended May 31, 20X6 (explanations are not required).

a. Service revenue on account, $32,300 million.

b. Collections on account, $31,758 million.

c. Uncollectible account expense, 1% of service revenue.

d. Write offs of uncollectible accounts receivable, $304 million.

3. Post your entries to the Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Uncollectibles T accounts.

4. Compute the ending balances for the two T accounts and compare your balances to the actual May 31, 20X6, amounts. They should be the same.

5. Show what FedEx would report on its income statement for the year ended May 31, 20X6.

record the transactions in the journal explanations are not required 580354

The

September 30, 20X7, records of First Data Communications include these accounts:

Accounts Receivable

$230,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

(8,500)

During the year, First Data estimates doubtful account expense at 1% of credit sales. At year end, the company ages its receivables and adjusts the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to correspond to the aging schedule. During the last quarter of 20X7, the company completed the following selected transactions:

20X7

Nov. 30

Wrote off as uncollectible the $1,100 account receivable from Rainbow Carpets and the $600 account receivable from Show N Tell Antiques.

Dec. 31

Adjusted the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and recorded Doubtful Account Expense at year end, based on the aging of receivables, which follows.

Age of Accounts

Total Balance

1–30 Days

31–60 Days

61–90 days

Over 90 Days

$230,000

$150,000

$40,000

$14,000

$26,000

Estimated uncollectible

0.2%

0.5%

5.0%

30.0%

Required

1. Record the transactions in the journal. Explanations are not required.

2. Prepare a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and post to that account.

3. Show how First Data will report its accounts receivable on a comparative balance sheet for 20X7 and 20X6. At December 31, 20X6, the company’s Accounts Receivable balance was $212,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful

Accounts stood at $4,200.

determine pappadeaux rsquo s correct net income for 20×7 580355

Assume Deloitte & Touche, the accounting firm, advises Pappadeaux Seafood that Pappadeaux’s financial statements must be changed to conform to GAAP. At December 31, 20X7, Pappadeaux’s accounts include the following:

Cash

$ 51,000

Short term trading investments, at cost

19,000

Accounts receivable

37,000

Inventory

61,000

Prepaid expenses

14,000

Total current assets

$182,000

Accounts payable

$ 62,000

Other current liabilities

41,000

Total current liabilities

$103,000

Deloitte & Touche advised Pappadeaux that • Cash includes $20,000 that is deposited in a compensating balance account that is tied up until 20X9.

• The market value of the short term trading investments is $17,000. Pappadeaux purchased the investments a couple of weeks ago.

• Pappadeaux has been using the direct write off method to account for uncollectible receivables. During 20X7, Pappadeaux wrote off bad receivables of $7,000. Deloitte & Touche determines that uncollectible account expense should be 2.5% of sales revenue, which totaled $600,000 in 20X7. The aging of Pappadeaux’s receivables at year end indicated uncollectibles of $5,000.

• Pappadeaux reported net income of $92,000 in 20X7.

Required

1. Restate Pappadeaux’s current accounts to conform to GAAP. (Challenge)

2. Compute Pappadeaux’s current ratio and acid test ratio both before and after your corrections.

3. Determine Pappadeaux’s correct net income for 20X7. (Challenge)

show what kraft will report on its comparative classified balance sheet at december 580356

Assume that Kraft Foods, famous for cheese, Jell O, and Planters nuts, completed the following selected transactions.

20X7

Nov. 30

Sold goods to Safeway, Inc., receiving a $50,000, 3 month, 6% note.

Dec. 31

Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Safeway note.

20X8

Feb. 28

Collected the Safeway note.

Mar.1

Received a 90 day, 7%, $6,000 note from Pete’s Catering on account.

1

Sold the Pete’s Catering note to Lakewood Bank, receiving cash of $5,900.

Dec. 16

Loaned $25,000 cash to Nabisco Brands, receiving a 90 day, 12% note.

31

Accrued the interest on the Nabisco note.

Required

1. Record the transactions in Kraft’s journal. Round interest amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.

2. Show what Kraft will report on its comparative classified balance sheet at December 31, 20X8, and December 31, 20X7.

write a memo explaining to top management which ratio values improved from 2008 to 2 580357

The comparative financial statements of Sunset Pools, Inc., for 2009, 2008, and 2007 included the following selected data.

2009

2008

2007

(In millions)

Balance sheet:

Current assets:

Cash

$ 86

$ 80

$ 60

Short term investments

140

154

122

Receivables, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $27, $21, and $15, respectively

247

245

278

Inventories

319

381

342

Prepaid expenses

21

27

46

Total current assets

813

887

848

Total current liabilities

403

498

413

Income statement:

Net sales

$2,898

$2,727

$2,206

Required

1. Compute these ratios for 2009 and 2008:

a. Current ratio b. Acid test ratio c. Days’ sales in receivables

2. Write a memo explaining to top management which ratio values improved from 2008 to 2009 and which ratio values deteriorated. State whether the overall trend is favorable or unfavorable and give the reason for your evaluation.

journalize the foregoing transactions and post to the t accounts 580358

During the fourth quarter of 20X8, the operations of Norris Carpet Center generated excess cash, which the company invested in securities, as follows:

Dec. 10

Purchased 2,000 shares of common stock as a trading investment, paying $15 per share.

17

Received cash dividend of $0.60 per share on the trading investment.

31

Adjusted the trading investment to its market value of $34,000.

Required

1. Prepare T accounts for Cash, balance of $85,000; Short Term Investment; Dividend Revenue; and Unrealized Gain on Investment (or Unrealized Loss on Investment).

2. Journalize the foregoing transactions and post to the T accounts.

3. Show how to report the short term investment on Norris’s balance sheet at December 31.

4. Show how to report whatever should appear on Norris’s income statement.

5. On January 6, 20X9, Norris sold the trading investment for $29,000. Journalize the sale.

record the transactions in the journal explanations are not required 580361

The September 30, 20X4, records of Synetics Computers include these accounts:

Accounts Receivable

$109,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

(4,100)

At year end, Synetics ages its receivables and adjusts the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to correspond to the aging schedule. During the last quarter of 20X4, Synetics completed the following selected transactions:

20X4

Oct. 31

Wrote off the following accounts receivable as uncollectible: Cisco Foods $300; Tindall Storage, $400; and Tiffany Energy, $1,100.

Dec. 31

Adjusted the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and recorded doubtful account expense at year end, based on the aging of receivables, which follows.

Age of Accounts

Total Balance

1–30 Days

31–60 Days

61–90 days

Over 90 Days

$114,000

$80,000

$20,000

$4,000

$10,000

Estimated uncollectible

0.5%

1.0%

5.0%

40.0%

Required

1. Record the transactions in the journal. Explanations are not required.

2. Prepare a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and post to that account.

3. Show how Synetics Computers will report its accounts receivable in a comparative balance sheet for 20X4 and 20X3. Use the reporting format on page 272. At December 31, 20X3, the company’s Accounts Receivable balance was $111,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts stood at $3,700.

restate all current accounts to conform to gaap 580362

The top managers of Hobby Horse Stores seek the counsel of Ernst & Young, the accounting firm, and learn that Hobby Horse must make some changes to bring its financial statements into conformity with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). At December 31, 20X1, Hobby Horse’s accounts include the following:

Cash

$ 18,000

Short term trading investments, at cost

34,000

Accounts receivable

49,000

Inventory

54,000

Prepaid expenses

8,000

Total current assets

$163,000

Accounts payable

46,000

Other current liabilities

69,000

Total current liabilities

$115,000

Assume Ernst & Young drew the following conclusions:

• Cash includes $6,000 that is deposited in a compensating balance account that will be tied up until 20X4.

• The market value of the short term trading investments is $32,000. Hobby Horse purchased the investments in early December.

• Hobby Horse has been using the direct write off method to account for uncollectibles. During 20X1, the company wrote off bad receivables of $7,000. Ernst & Young determines that uncollectible account expense should be 3% of sales, which for 20X1 totaled $400,000. An aging of receivables at year end indicated uncollectibles of $5,000.

• Hobby Horse reported net income of $81,000 for 20X1.

Required

1. Restate all current accounts to conform to GAAP. (Challenge)

2. Compute Hobby Horse’s current ratio and acid test ratio both before and after your corrections.

3. Determine Hobby Horse’s correct net income for 20X1. (Challenge)

show what lilley amp taylor will report on its comparative classified balance sheet 580363

Lilley & Taylor, CPAs completed the following selected transactions:

20X7

Oct. 31

Performed service for Lifeway Catholic School, receiving a $30,000, 3 month, 8% note.

Dec. 31

Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Lifeway note.

20X8

Jan.31

Received a 90 day, 10%, $10,000 note from Fishbowl, Inc., on account.

Feb.18

Collected the Lifeway note.

19

Sold the Fishbowl note to First State Bank, receiving cash of $9,700.

Nov. 11

Loaned $20,000 cash to Diaz Insurance Agency, receiving a 90 day, 9% note.

Dec.31

Accrued the interest on the Diaz note.

Required

1. Record the transactions in Lilley & Taylor’s journal. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.

2. Show what Lilley & Taylor will report on its comparative classified balance sheet at December 31, 20X8, and December 31, 20X7.

compute these ratios for 20×3 and 20×2 580364

The comparative financial statements of New World Piano Company for 20X3,

20X2, and 20X1 included the following selected data:

20X3

20X2

20X1

(In millions)

Balance sheet:

Current assets:

Cash

$ 6 7

$ 66

$ 62

Short term investments Receivables, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $7, $6 and $4, respectively

93

101

69

Inventories

206

154

197

Prepaid expenses

408

383

341

Total current assets

32

31

25

Total current liabilities

806

735

694

Income statement:

440

416

388

Required

1. Compute these ratios for 20X3 and 20X2:

a. Current ratio b. Acid test ratio c. Days’ sales in receivables

2. Write a memo explaining to top management which ratio values showed improvement from 20X2 to 20X3 and which ratio values deteriorated. State whether the overall trend is favorable or unfavorable for the company and give the reason for your evaluation.

prepare a summary income statement for clearview cablevision inc for the year ended 580365

A fire during 2008 destroyed most of the accounting records of Clearview Cablevision, Inc. The only accounting data for 2008 that Clearview can come up with are the following balances at December 31, 2008. The general manager also knows that bad debt expense should be 5% of service revenue.

Accounts receivable

$180,000

Less: Allowance for bad debts

(22,000)

Total expenses, excluding bad debt expense

30,000

Collections from customers

110,000

Write offs of bad receivables

670,000

Accounts receivable, December 31, 2007

840,000

Prepare a summary income statement for Clearview Cablevision, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2008. The stockholders want to know whether the company was profitable in 2008. Use a T account for Accounts Receivable to compute service revenue.

v based on your analysis you should be able to readily identify the effects of certa 580366

Suppose you work in the loan department of Superior Bank. Dean Young, owner of Dean Young Beauty Aids, has come to you seeking a loan for $500,000 to expand operations. Young proposes to use accounts receivable as collateral for the loan and has provided you with the following information from the company’s most recent financial statements:

20X7

20X6

20X5

(In thousands)

Sales

$1,475

$1,001

$902

Cost of goods sold

876

647

605

Gross profit

$ 81

$ 67

$ 44

Other expenses

$ 128

$ 107

$ 94

Net profit or (loss) before taxes

13

11

9

Accounts receivable

599

354

297

Allowance for doubtful accounts

518

287

253

Required

Analyze the trends of sales, days’ sales in receivables, and cash collections from customers for 20X7 and 20X6. Would you make the loan to Young? Support you decision with facts and figures. Sunnyvale Loan Company is in the consumer loan business. Sunnyvale borrows from banks and loans out the money at higher interest rates. Sunnyvale’s bank requires Sunnyvale to submit quarterly financial statements to keep its line of credit. Sunnyvale’s main asset is Notes Receivable. Therefore, Uncollectible Account Expense and Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts are important accounts for the company. Kimberly Burnham, the company’s owner, prefers for net income to increase in smooth pattern, rather than increase in some periods and decrease in other periods. To report smoothly increasing net income, Burnham underestimates Uncollectible Account Expense in some periods. In other periods, Burnham overestimates the expense. She reasons that the income overstatements roughly offset the income understatements over time.

Required

Is Sunnyvale Loans’ practice of smoothing income ethical? Why or why not?

if necessary modify the loan request or the bank rsquo s reply in order to reach agr 580371

Jillian Michaels and Dee Childress worked for several years as sales representatives for Xerox Corporation. During this time, they became close friends as they acquired expertise with the company’s full range of copier equipment. Now they see an opportunity to put their expertise to work and fulfill lifelong desires to establish their own business. Navarro Community College, located in their city, is expanding, and there is no copy center within 5 miles of the campus. Business in the area is booming, office buildings and apartments are springing up, and the population of the Navarro section of the city is growing. Michaels and Childress want to open a copy center, similar to FedEx Kinko’s, near the Navarro campus. A small shopping center across the street from the college has a vacancy that would fit their needs. Michaels and Childress each have $35,000 to invest in the business, but they forecast the need for $200,000 to renovate the store and purchase some of the equipment they will need. Xerox Corporation will lease 2 large copiers to them at a total monthly rental of $6,000. With enough cash to see them through the first 6 months of operation, they are confident they can make the business succeed. The two women work very well together, and both have excellent credit ratings. Michaels and Childress must borrow $130,000 to start the business, advertise its opening, and keep it running for its first 6 months.

Required

Assume 2 roles: (1) Michaels and Childress, the partners who will own Navarro Copy Center; and (2) loan officers at Synergy Bank.

1. As a group, visit a copy center to familiarize yourselves with its operations. If possible, interview the manager or another employee. Then write a loan request that Michaels and Childress will submit to Synergy Bank with the intent of borrowing $130,000 to be paid back over 3 years. The loan will be a personal loan to the partnership of Michaels and Childress, not to Navarro Copy Center. The request should specify all the details of Michaels’ and Childress’s plan that will motivate the bank to grant the loan. Include a budget for each of the first 6 months of operation of the proposed copy center.

2. As a group, interview a loan officer in a bank. Write Synergy Bank’s reply to the loan request. Specify all the details that the bank should require as conditions for making the loan.

3. If necessary, modify the loan request or the bank’s reply in order to reach agreement between the 2 parties.

report inventory on the balance sheet at the most current cost 580372

Suppose a division of Texas Instruments that handles computer microchips has these inventory records for January 20X9:

Date

Item

Quantity

Unit Cost

Total cost

Jan. 1

Beginning inventory

100 units

$ 8

$ 800

6

Purchase

60 units

9

540

21

Purchase

150 units

9

1,350

27

Purchase

90 units

10

900

Company accounting records show sales of 310 units for revenue of $6,770. Operating expense for January was $1,900.

Required

1. Prepare the January income statement, showing amounts for FIFO, LIFO, and average cost. Label the bottom line “Operating income.” Round average cost per unit to 3 decimal places and all other figures to whole dollar amounts. Show your computations.

2. Suppose you are the financial vice president of Texas Instruments. Which inventory method will you use if your motive is to

a. Minimize income taxes?

b. Report the highest operating income?

c. Report operating income between the extremes of FIFO and LIFO?

d. Report inventory on the balance sheet at the most current cost?

e. Attain the best measure of net income for the income statement?

State the reason for each of your answers.

prepare the bank reconciliation of navajo products at september 30 20×5 2 describe h 580278

The cash data of Navajo Products for September 20X5 follow:

Cash

Date

Item

Jrnl. Ref.

Debit

Credit

Balance

Sept 1

Balance

7,078

30

CR10

9,106

16,184

30

CP16

11,353

4,831

Cash Receipts (CR)

Cash Payments (CP)

Date

Cash Debit

Check No.

Cash Credit

Sept. 1

$ 2,716

1413

$ 1,465

9

544

1414

1,004

14

1,655

1415

450

11

896

1416

8

17

367

1417

775

25

890

1418

88

30

2,038

1419

4,126

Total

$9,106

1420

970

1421

200

1422

2,267

Total

$11,353

On September 30, 20X5, Navajo received this bank statement:

Beginning balance

$ 7,078

Deposits and other additions:

Sept. 1

$ 625

EFT

5

2,716

10

544

11

1,655

15

896

18

367

25

890

30

1,400

BC

9,093

Checks and other deductions:

Sept. 8

$ 441

NSF

9

1,465

13

1,004

14

450

15

8

19

340

EFT

22

775

29

88

30

4,216

30

25

SC

(8,812)

Ending balance

$ 7,359

Additional data for the bank reconciliation:

a. The EFT deposit was for monthly rent revenue. The EFT deduction was for monthly insurance expense.

b. The NSF check was received from a customer.

c. The correct amount of check number 1419, a payment on account, is $4,216. (The Navajo accountant mistakenly recorded the check for $4,126.)

Required

1. Prepare the bank reconciliation of Navajo Products at September 30, 20X5. 2. Describe how a bank account and the bank reconciliation help managers control a firm’s cash.

journalize the transactions needed to update the cash account include an explanation 580279

The January 31 bank statement of Bed & Bath Accessories has just arrived from First National Bank. To prepare the Bed & Bath bank reconciliation, you gather the following data:

a. The January 31 bank balance is $8,400.82.

b. Bed & Bath’s Cash account shows a balance of $7,391.55 on January 31.

c. The following Bed & Bath checks are outstanding at January 31:

Check No.

Amount

616

$403.00

802

74.02

806

36.60

809

161.38

810

229.05

811

48.91

d. The bank statement includes 2 special deposits: $899.14, which is the amount of dividend revenue the bank collected from IBM on behalf of Bed & Bath, and $16.86, the interest revenue Bed & Bath earned on its bank balance during January.

e. The bank statement lists a $6.25 bank service charge.

f. On January 31 the Bed & Bath treasurer deposited $381.14, which will appear on the February bank statement.

g. The bank statement includes a $410.00 deduction for a check drawn by Bonjovi Music Company.

h. The bank statement includes 2 charges for returned checks from customers. One is a nonsufficient funds check in the amount of $67.50 received from a customer. The other is a $195.03 check received from another customer. It was returned by the customer’s bank with the imprint “Unauthorized Signature.”

i. A few customers pay monthly bills by EFT. The January bank statement lists an EFT deposit for sales revenue of $200.23.

Required

1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for Bed & Bath Accessories at January 31.

2. Journalize the transactions needed to update the Cash account. Include an explanation for each entry.

you are a new employee of nordhaus energy co write a memo to the company president i 580280

Nordhaus Energy Co. makes all sales on credit. Cash receipts arrive by mail, usually within 30 days of the sale. Dan Webster opens envelopes and separates the checks from the accompanying remittance advices. Webster forwards the checks to another employee, who makes the daily bank deposit but has no access to the accounting records. Webster sends the remittance advices, which show the amount of cash received, to the accounting department for entry in the accounts receivable. Webster’s only other duty is to grant allowances to customers. (An allowance decreases the amount that the customer must pay.) When Webster receives a customer check for less than the full amount of the invoice, he records the allowance in the accounting records and forwards the document to the accounting department.

Required

You are a new employee of Nordhaus Energy Co. Write a memo to the company president identifying the internal control weakness in this situation. Explain how to correct the weakness.

does the company rsquo s cash budget for 20×6 suggest that valero is growing holding 580281

Melissa Becker is chief financial officer of Valero Technology, and is responsible for the company’s budgeting process. Becker’s staff is preparing the Valero budget for 20X6. The starting point is the statement of cash flows of the current year, 20X5, which follows:

Valero Technology Statement of Cash Flows 20X5

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

$ 35,600

Collections from customers

100

Interest received

(11,000)

Purchases of inventory

(16,600)

Operating expenses

8,100

Net cash provided by operating activities

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

Purchases of property and equipment

(5,000)

Purchases of investments

(7,500)

Sales of investments

8,100

Net cash used by investing activities

(4,400)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

Payment of dividends

(2,700)

Payment of short term debt

(1,000)

Long term borrowings by issuing notes payable

1,200

Issuance of common stock

300

Net cash used by financing activities

(2,200)

Increase (decrease) in Cash

1,500

Cash, beginning of year

2,600

Cash, end of year

$ 4,100

Required

1. Prepare the Valero Technology cash budget for 20X6. Date the budget simply “20X6” and denote the beginning and ending cash balances as “beginning” and “ending.” Assume the company expects 20X6 to be the same as 20X5, but with the following changes:

a. In 20X6, the company expects a 10% increase in collections from customers, a 5% increase in purchases of inventory, and a doubling of additions to property and equipment.

b. Operating expenses will drop by $2,000.

c. There will be no sales of investments in 20X6.

d. Becker plans to end the year with a cash balance of $3,000.

2. Does the company’s cash budget for 20X6 suggest that Valero is growing, holding steady, or decreasing in size? (Challenge)

benz also asks you to evaluate the internal controls and to recommend any changes ne 580283

Environmentol Concerns, Inc., has poor internal control. Recently, Oscar Benz, the manager, has suspected the bookkeeper of stealing. Details of the business’s cash position at September 30 follow.

a. The Cash account shows a balance of $10,402. This amount includes a September 30 deposit of $3,794 that does not appear on the September 30 bank statement.

b. The September 30 bank statement shows a balance of $8,224. The bank statement lists a $200 bank collection, an $8 service charge, and a $36 NSF check. The accountant has not recorded any of these items.

c. At September 30, the following checks are outstanding:

Check No.

Amount

154

$116

256

150

278

853

291

990

292

206

293

145

d. The bookkeeper receives all incoming cash and makes the bank deposits. He also reconciles the monthly bank statement. Here is his September 30 reconciliation:

Balance per books, September 30

$10,402

Add: Outstanding checks

1,460

Bank collection

200

Subtotal

12,062

Less: Deposits in transit

$3,794

Service charge

8

NSF check

36

$ 8,224

Balance per bank, September 30

(3,838)

Required

Benz has requested that you determine whether the bookkeeper has stolen cash from the business and, if so, how much. He also asks you to explain how the bookkeeper attempted to conceal the theft. To make this determination, you perform a proper bank reconciliation. There are no bank or book errors. Benz also asks you to evaluate the internal controls and to recommend any changes needed to improve them.

identify 2 parties other than hobbs who can be harmed by this theft in what ways can 580284

This case is based on an actual situation experienced by one of the authors. Gilead Construction, headquartered in Topeka, Kansas, built a motel in Kansas City. The construction foreman, Slim Pickins, hired the workers for the project. Pickins had his workers fill out the necessary tax forms and sent the employment documents to the home office. Work on the motel began on May 1 and ended in December. Each Thursday evening, Pickins filled out a time card that listed the hours worked by each employee during the 5 day work week ended at 5 p.m. on Thursday. Pickins faxed the time sheets to the home office, which prepared the payroll checks on Friday morning. Pickins drove to the home office after lunch on Friday, picked up the payroll checks, and returned to the construction site. At 5 p.m. on Friday, Pickins distributed the paychecks to the workers.

a. Describe in detail the internal control weakness in this situation. Specify what negative result could occur because of the internal control weakness.

b. Describe what you would do to correct the internal control weakness.

Kurt Hobbs owns apartment complexes in Columbus, Ohio. Each property has a manager who collects rent, arranges for repairs, and runs advertisements in the local newspaper. The property managers transfer cash to Hobbs monthly and prepare their own bank reconciliations. The manager of one property has been stealing large sums of money. To cover the theft, he understates the amount of the outstanding checks on the monthly bank reconciliation. As a result, each monthly bank reconciliation appears to balance. However, the balance sheet reports more cash than Hobbs actually has in the bank. While negotiating the sale of this property, Hobbs shows the balance sheet to prospective investors.

Required

1. Identify 2 parties other than Hobbs who can be harmed by this theft. In what ways can they be harmed?

2. Discuss the role accounting plays in this situation.

describe all documents needed to account for and safeguard the business rsquo s asse 580285

Suppose YUM’s year end bank statement, dated December 30, 2006, has just arrived at company headquarters. Further assume the bank statement shows YUM’s cash balance at $324 million and that YUM’s Cash and Cash Equivalents account has a balance of $321 million on the books.

1. You must determine how much to report for cash and cash equivalents on the December 30, 2006, balance sheet. Suppose you uncover these reconciling items (all amounts are assumed and in millions):

a. Interest earned on bank balance, $1.

b. Outstanding checks, $8.

c. Bank collections of various items, $2.

d. Deposits in transit, $3.

e. Book error YUM overstated cash by $5.

Prepare a bank reconciliation to show how YUM arrived at the correct amount of cash and cash equivalents to report on its December 30, 2006, balance sheet. Prove that your answer is the actual amount YUM reported. Journal entries are not required.

2. Study YUM Brands’ Management Responsibility for Financial Statements and indicate how that report links to specific items of internal control discussed in this chapter. (Challenge) (Learning Objective 1, 5: Analyzing internal control and cash flows) Refer to the Pier 1 Imports financial statements in Appendix B at the end of this book.

1. Focus on Cash, Including Temporary Investments (this is the same as cash and cash equivalents). Why did cash change during 2006? The statement of cash flows holds the answer to this question. Analyze the 7 largest individual items on the statement of cash flows (not the summary subtotals such as “net cash provided by operating activities”). For each of the 7 individual items, state how Pier 1’s action affected cash. Show amounts in millions and round to the nearest 1/10 of $1 million. (Challenge)

2. Pier 1’s Report of Management describes the company’s internal controls. Show how the management report corresponds to 2 of the 4 elements in the definition of internal control. (Challenge) You are promoting a rock concert in your area. Assume you organize as a corporation, with each member of your group purchasing $10,000 of the corporation’s stock. Therefore, each of you is risking some hard earned money on this venture. Assume it is April 1 and that the concert will be performed on June 30. Your promotional activities begin immediately, and ticket sales start on May 1. You expect to sell all the firm’s assets, pay all the liabilities, and distribute all remaining cash to the group members by July 31.

Required

Write an internal control manual that will help to safeguard the assets of the business. The manual should address the following aspects of internal control:

1. Assign responsibilities among the group members.

2. Authorize individuals, including group members and any outsiders that you need to hire to perform specific jobs.

3. Separate duties among the group and any employees.

4. Describe all documents needed to account for and safeguard the business’s assets.

how much of the december 31 20×2 balance of accounts receivables did str expect to 580289

Superior Technical Resources’ (STR’s) balance sheet at December 31, 20X2, reported:

(In millions)

Accounts receivable

$382

Allowance for doubtful accounts

(52)

STR uses both the percent of sales and the aging approaches to account for uncollectible receivables.

Required

1. How much of the December 31, 20X2, balance of accounts receivables did STR expect to collect? Stated differently, what was the net realizable value of STR’s receivables?

2. Journalize, without explanations, 20X3 entries for STR:

a. Estimated doubtful account expense of $40 million, based on the percent of sales method, all during the year.

b. Write offs of uncollectible accounts receivable totaling $58 million. Prepare a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and post to this account. Show its unadjusted balance at December 31, 20X3.

c. December 31, 20X3, aging of receivables, which indicates that $47 million of the total receivables of $409 million is uncollectible at year end. Post to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, and show its adjusted balance at December 31, 20X3.

3. Show how STR’s receivables and the related allowance will appear on the December 31, 20X3, balance sheet.

4. Show what STR’s income statement will report for the foregoing transactions.

what should appear on the penick income statement for the year ended december 31 200 580291

Return to Harvey Penick Golf Academy in question 1. What should appear on the Penick income statement for the year ended December 31, 2008, for the trading investments?

a. $50,000

b. $55,000

c. $5,000 unrealized gain

d. Cannot be determined from the data given

Use the following information. Neal Company had the following information relating to credit sales in 20X3:

Accounts receivable12/31/X3

$ 8,000

Allowance for uncollectible accounts 12/31/X3 (before adjustment)

750

Credit sales during 20X3

38,000

Cash sales during 20X3

12,000

Collections from customers on account during 20X3

41,000

from the following list of accounts calculate the quick ratio 580303

From the following list of accounts, calculate the quick ratio.

Cash

$ 3,000

Accounts payable

$ 8,000

Accounts receivable

6,000

Salary payable

3,000

Inventory

10,000

Notes payable (due in 2 years)

8,000

Prepaid insurance

2,000

Short term investments

2,000

a. 2.1

b. 1.3

c. 1.0

d. 1.4

prepare a t account for allowance for uncollectible accounts to show your computatio 580311

Gulig and Durham, a law firm, started 20X8 with accounts receivable of $60,000 and an allowance for uncollectible accounts of $8,000. The 20X8 service revenue on account was $400,000, and cash collections on account totaled $410,000. During 20X8, Gulig & Durham wrote off uncollectible accounts receivable of $7,000. At December 31, 20X8, the aging of accounts receivable indicated that Gulig & Durham will not collect $10,000 of its accounts receivable. Journalize Gulig & Durham’s (a) service revenue, (b) cash collections on account, (c) write offs of uncollectible receivables, and (d) uncollectible account expense for the year. Explanations are not required. Prepare a T account for Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts to show your computation of uncollectible account expense for the year.

what are the ending balances of accounts receivable and allowance for uncollectible 580312

Perform the following accounting for the receivables of Patillo, Brown & Hill, an accounting firm, at December 31, 20X7. Start with the beginning balances for these T accounts: • Accounts Receivable, $80,000 • Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, $9,000 Post the following 20X7 transactions to the T accounts:

a. Service revenue of $700,000, all on account

b. Collections on account, $720,000

c. Write offs of uncollectible accounts, $7,000

d. Uncollectible account expense (allowance method), $8,000

2. What are the ending balances of Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts?

3. Show how Patillo, Brown & Hill will report accounts receivable on its balance sheet at December 31, 20X7.

compute botany rsquo s acid test ratio at the end of 20×6 round to 2 decimal places 580317

Botany Clothiers reported the following amounts in its 20X6 financial statements. The 20X5 figures are given for comparison.

20X6

20X5

Current assets:

Cash

$ 9,000

$ 9,000

Short term investments

15,000

11,000

Accounts receivable

$80,000

$74,000

Less allowance for

Uncollectibles

(7,000)

73,000

(6,000)

68,000

Inventory

188,000

189,000

Prepaid insurance

2,000

2,000

Total current assets

287,000

279,000

Total current liabilities

101,000

107,000

Net sales

803,000

732,000

Required

1. Compute Botany’s acid test ratio at the end of 20X6. Round to 2 decimal places. How does the acid test ratio compare with the industry average of 0.95?

2. Compare Botany’s days’ sales in receivables measure for 20X6 with the company’s credit terms of net 30 days.

how much net income or net loss did victoria earn for the year 580318

Victoria Medical Service reported the following selected items (amounts in thousands):

Unearned revenues (current)

$ 207

Service revenue

$8,613

Allowance for

Other assets

767

doubtful accounts

109

Property, plant, and equipment

3,316

Accounts receivable

2,569

Operating expense

1,620

Accounts payable

817

Cash

239

Other expenses

385

Notes payable (long term)

719

1. Classify each item as (a) income statement or balance sheet and as (b) debit balance or credit balance.

2. How much net income (or net loss) did Victoria earn for the year?

3. Compute Victoria’s current ratio. Round to 2 decimal places.

what type of investment is this to merrill lynch give the reason for your answer 580319

(Learning Objective 1: Accounting for a trading investment) Merrill Lynch, the investment banking company, often has extra cash to invest. Suppose Merrill Lynch buys 1,000 shares of Microsoft Corporation stock at $55 per share. Assume Merrill Lynch expects to hold the Microsoft stock for 1 month and then sell it. The purchase occurs on December 15, 20X4. At December 31, the market price of a share of Microsoft stock is $63 per share.

Required

1. What type of investment is this to Merrill Lynch? Give the reason for your answer.

2. Record Merrill Lynch’s purchase of the Microsoft stock on December 15 and the adjustment to market value on December 31.

3. Show how Merrill Lynch would report this investment on its balance sheet at December 31 and any gain or loss on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X4.

prepare t accounts for cash short term investment dividend revenue unrealized loss o 580321

(Learning Objective 1: Accounting for a trading investment) PepsiCo reports short term investments on its balance sheet. Suppose a division of PepsiCo completed the following short term investment transactions during 20X8:

20X8

Nov. 6

Purchased 1,000 shares of Starbucks stock for $35,000. PepsiCo plans to sell the stock at a profit in the near future.

27

Received a cash dividend of $0.85 per share on the Starbucks stock.

Dec. 31

Adjusted the investment in Starbucks stock. Current market value is $33,000. PepsiCo still plans to sell the stock in early 20X9.

20X9

Jan. 11

Sold the Starbucks stock for $36,000.

Required

1. Prepare T accounts for Cash; Short Term Investment; Dividend Revenue; Unrealized Loss on Investment or Unrealized Gain on Investment; and Gain on Sale of Investment. Show the effects of PepsiCo’s investment transactions. Start with a cash balance of $55,000; all the other accounts start at zero.

show how google will report accounts receivable on its october 31 balance sheet 580324

On September 30, Google Party Planners had a $40,000 balance in Accounts Receivable and a $3,000 credit balance in Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts. During October, Google made credit sales of $100,000. October collections on account were $94,000, and write offs of uncollectible receivables totaled $1,700. Uncollectible account expense is estimated as 2% of revenue. Required

1. Journalize sales, collections, write offs of uncollectibles, and uncollectible account expense by the allowance method during October. Explanations are not required.

2. Show the ending balances in Accounts Receivable, Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, and Net Accounts Receivable at October 31. How much does Google expect to collect?

3. Show how Google will report Accounts Receivable on its October 31 balance sheet.

show how sunset hills clinic will report accounts receivable on its december 31 bala 580326

At December 31, 20X7, before any year end adjustments, the accounts receivable balance of Sunset Hills Clinic is $235,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a $7,400 credit balance. Sunset Hills prepares the following aging schedule for accounts receivable:

Age of Accounts

Total Balance

1–30 Days

31–60 Days

61–90 days

Over 90 Days

$235,000

$110,000

$60,000

$50,000

$15,000

Estimated uncollectible

0.5%

1.0%

6.0%

40%

Required

1. Based on the aging of accounts receivable, is the unadjusted balance of the allowance account adequate? Too high? Too low?

2. Make the entry required by the aging schedule. Prepare a T account for the allowance.

3. Show how Sunset Hills Clinic will report Accounts Receivable on its December 31 balance sheet. Include the 2 accounts that come before receivables on the balance sheet, using assumed amounts.

university travel estimates that 2 of revenues will become uncollectible journalize 580327

University Travel experienced the following revenue and accounts receivable write offs.

Month

Service Revenue

January

February

March

Total

January

$ 6,800

$53

105

$139

February

7,000

$ 86

115

138

March

7,500

$148

115

$21,300

$53

$191

$ 33

$392

University Travel estimates that 2% of revenues will become uncollectible. Journalize service revenue (all on account), bad debt expense, and write offs during March. Include explanations.

record the following note receivable transactions in the journal of town amp country 580328

Record the following note receivable transactions in the journal of Town & Country Realty. How much interest revenue did Town & Country earn this year? Use a 365 day year for interest computations, and round interest amounts to the nearest dollar.

Nov. 1

Loaned $50,000 cash to Springfield Co. on a 1 year, 9% note.

Dec. 3

Performed service for Joplin Corporation, receiving a 90 day, 12% note for $10,000.

16

Received a $2,000, 6 month, 12% note on account from Afton, Inc.

31

Accrued interest revenue for the year.

this is from a corporate accounting system subject i just need to review the working 579865

this is from a Corporate accounting system subject.. i just need to review the working as i have the solution.. you guys need to fix whats wrong overall.. the totals doesn’t match in consolidation worksheet plus and others too.. i have submitted the solution and question file..

Document Preview:

300000 240000 125000 100000 21000 16800 470500 356800 28000 384800 440000 55200 240000 100000 16800 28000 55200 440000 30000 21000 9000 56520 56520 35000 35000 8640 6000 14640 4392 2592 1800 70200 70200 6720 2880 9600 2 5520 2760 8280 47000 40016 6984 2095 2095 1955 1955 587 587 35000 35000 4 88100 88100 3800 3800 1140 1140 1820 780 2600 6 22600 22600 68800 68800 40000 40000 60000 25000 9100 94100 1054 1054 17836 17836 17200 17200 9 1140 1140 1113639 1113639 1413500 978300 70200 2233500 88100 4 798000 508300 3800 70200 9600 88100 4 2600 1139600 615500 470000 1093900 22600 22600 6 0 69800 68800 1000 126200 49000 6000 56520 1955 126635 22600 22600 6 0 326100 263800 5520 2 6984 588436 255600 134600 379829 76680 40380 2095 587 780 1140 2880 1800 119288 178920 94220 260541 17836 17836 242705 59120 134320 100000 2592 8640 1054 2760 2 6720 1820 25000 52146 150000 86000 68800 150000 17200 88040 142450 144851 850000 300000 240000 60000 850000 88040 142540 144851 16800 21000 9100 4900 1054 94100 93682 17200 17836 191960 115860 307820 95900 66700 162600 75000 50000 40000 85000 950000 565100 35000 35000 1515100 21900 19400 41300 6900 587 9000 1140 9 28000 4392 2095 39876 2279700 1259600 3235329 276300 104100 380400 15500 7000 22500 40500 40000 500 112100 144200 3800 252500 800000 610800 1410800 901200 601200 30000 47000 1579400 294900 194400 56520 14640 40016 1955 489391 28000 28000 56000 700 1140 1140 9 700 55200 55200 8280 2 8280 440000 440000 0 20000 20000 2279700 1259600 1106639 1106639 3178629 2233500 1413500 1139600 798000 1093900 615500 22600 1000 69800 126635 126200 0 588436 326100 379829 255600 119288 76680 260541 178920 260541 178920 260541 178920 17836 242705 1789…

file localhost users rakeshshilpakar desktop hi6007 20assessment 2001 20due 20week 2 580077

file://localhost/Users/rakeshshilpakar/Desktop/HI6007%20Assessment%2001%20Due%20Week%2006(3).docx
Document Preview:

HOLMES INSTITUTE FACULTY OF HIGHER EDUCATION HI6007 Assessment One Business Research Report Proposal: Initial Research Proposal Due Friday Week 06 1000 words worth 10% The initial research proposal will consist of the following SIX (6) items: Identify a business research topic Define the research questions for the identified problem or opportunity Select the appropriate research methodologies and techniques to use for the research project Describe the research process Describe data collection and analysis methods Describe expected research outcomes Material on Research Methods will be presented in class from week 4 to 6. Initial Research Proposal due at the end of Week 6 Here are some questions to help you develop your business research proposal: PROBLEM STATEMENT: What exactly do I want to find out? What is a researchable problem? THEORY, ASSUMPTIONS, BACKGROUND LITERATURE: What does the relevant literature in the field indicate about this problem? VARIABLES AND HYPOTHESES: What will I take as given in the environment i.e. what is the starting point? Which are the independent and which are the dependent variables? OPERATIONAL DEFINITIONS AND MEASUREMENT Does the problem need scoping/simplifying to make it achievable? What and how will the variables be measured? What degree of error in the findings is tolerable?   RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODOLOGY What is my overall strategy for doing this research? Will this design permit me to answer the research question? What constraints will the approach place on the work?   INSTRUMENTATION/SAMPLING How will I get the data I need to test my hypothesis? What tools or devices will I use to make or record observations? How will I choose the sample? What degree of accuracy or level of confidence can I guarantee?   DATA ANALYSIS What combinations of analytical and statistical process will be applied to the data? Which of these will allow me to accept or reject my hypotheses?   CONCLUSIONS,…

Attachments:

sutton industrial is a diversified industrial cleaner processing co they produce 2 p 580110

Sutton Industrial is a diversified industrial cleaner processing Co. they produce 2 products: table cleaner and floor cleaner.? Add update Delete Question (TC) (TSR) TP Total

Production in oz 300,000 300000 300,000

Revenue 216,000 168,000 168k 336k

CDG Costs 70,000 52,500 52.5K 105k

TCP Costs 0 50,000 50k 100k

Total Costs 70,000 102,500 102.5k 205k

Weekly G.Profit 146,000 65,500 65.5k 131k

calculate the Co. Weekly gross profit assuming the TC is not processed.

calculate the Co. total weekly GP assuming the TC is processed further. compare and comment on mangers decision

using incremental analysis, determine if the TC should be processed further.”>Ea. week 900,000oz of chemical input r processed @ a cost of $210,000 into 600,000oz of floor cleaner and 300,000 oz of TC. FC has no market value until it is converted into a polish w/ the trade name FloorShine. The additional processing costs for this conversion amt to $240,000. FloorShine sells at $20 per 30 oz bottle. TC can be sold for $18per 25 oz bottle. TC can be converted into 2 other products by adding 300,000oz of another compound (TCP) to the 300,000oz of table cleaner. This joint process will yield 300,000oz ea of table stain remover (TSR) & table polish (TP). Additional processing costs for this process amount to $100,000. Both table products can be sold for $14 per 25 ounce bottle.The company decided not to process TC into TSR and TP based on the following.

(TC) (TSR) TP Total

Production in oz 300,000 300000 300,000

Revenue 216,000 168,000 168k 336k

CDG Costs 70,000 52,500 52.5K 105k

TCP Costs 0 50,000 50k 100k

Total Costs 70,000 102,500 102.5k 205k

Weekly G.Profit 146,000 65,500 65.5k 131k

calculate the Co. Weekly gross profit assuming the TC is not processed.

calculate the Co. total weekly GP assuming the TC is processed further. compare and comment on mangers decision

using incremental analysis, determine if the TC should be processed further.

what is break even point in number of flights 580167

Kangaroo Airlines

Kangaroo Airlines in small local carrier located in the Kimberly region of Western Australia. All seats are economy class and the following data is available:

Number of seats per plane

120

Average load factor (percentage of seats filled)

75%

Average full passenger fare

$70

Average variable cost per passenger

$30

Fixed operating costs per month

$1,200,000

1. What is the break even point in number of passengers per month?

2. What is the break even point in sales revenue dollars per month?

3. What is the break even point in number of flights per month (round up)?

4. If Kangaroo Airline currently has on average 40,000 passengers per month what is Kangaroo Airline’s margin of safety in number of passengers?

5. If Kangaroo Airlines raises its average full passenger fare to $85 and the average variable costs per passenger will remain at $30, it is estimated that the load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the break even point in number of flights (round up)?

6. The cost of aviation fuel is a significant variable cost to any airline. If fuel charges increase by $8 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will increase to $40 however that average full passenger fare will remain at the original $70 per passenger as will the original load factor of 75 percent. What will be the new break even point in number of passengers?

7. The cost of aviation fuel is a significant variable cost to any airline. If fuel charges increase by $8 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will increase to $40 however the average full passenger fare will remain at the original $70 per passenger as will the original load factor of 75%. What will be the new break even point in number of passengers? What will be the new break even point in number of flights (round up)?

8. Kangaroo Airlines has experienced an increase in average variable cost per passenger to $35 and an increase in fixed costs to $1,500,000. Kangaroo Airlines has decided to increase the average full passenger fare to $80. How many of passengers are needed to generate an after tax profit of $400,000, if the company tax rate is 30 percent (round up)?

9. Kangaroo Airlines is considering offering a discounted fare of $50 with the average variable costs per passenger remaining at the original $30 per passenger, Kangaroo feels that the discounted fare would increase the load factor from 75 percent to 80 percent. Only the additional seats arising from the increase in the load factor would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising costs promoting the discounted fares would be $80,000. How much pre tax profit per month would the discounted fare provide Kangaroo Airlines if the company has 40 flights per day, 30 days per month?

10. Kangaroo Airlines has an opportunity to obtain a new route. The company feels it can sell seats at an average full passenger fare of $75 on the new route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. The company will fly the new route 15 times per month. The increase in fixed costs for the additional crew, additional planes, landing fees, maintenance, etc., would total $100,000 per month. Variable costs per passenger would remain at $30. Should Kangaroo Airlines obtain the route? In the on line form, if you think that Kangaroo Airlines should obtain the new route answer True and if you think that Kangaroo Airlines should not obtain the route answer False.

11. Using the information in question 10, how many flights would Kangaroo Airlines need to earn a pre tax profit of $50,500 per month on this new route (round up)?

12. Using the information in question 10, how many flights would be needed to earn a pre tax profit of $50,500 per month on this route if the load factor increased to 75 percent (round up)?

Kangaroo Airlines

Kangaroo Airlines in small local carrier located in the Kimberly region of Western Australia. All seats are economy class and the following data is available:

Number of seats per plane

120

Average load factor (percentage of seats filled)

75%

Average full passenger fare

$70

Average variable cost per passenger

$30

Fixed operating costs per month

$1,200,000

1. What is the break even point in number of passengers per month?

2. What is the break even point in sales revenue dollars per month?

3. What is the break even point in number of flights per month (round up)?

4. If Kangaroo Airline currently has on average 40,000 passengers per month what is Kangaroo Airline’s margin of safety in number of passengers?

5. If Kangaroo Airlines raises its average full passenger fare to $85 and the average variable costs per passenger will remain at $30, it is estimated that the load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the break even point in number of flights (round up)?

6. The cost of aviation fuel is a significant variable cost to any airline. If fuel charges increase by $8 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will increase to $40 however that average full passenger fare will remain at the original $70 per passenger as will the original load factor of 75 percent. What will be the new break even point in number of passengers?

7. The cost of aviation fuel is a significant variable cost to any airline. If fuel charges increase by $8 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will increase to $40 however the average full passenger fare will remain at the original $70 per passenger as will the original load factor of 75%. What will be the new break even point in number of passengers? What will be the new break even point in number of flights (round up)?

8. Kangaroo Airlines has experienced an increase in average variable cost per passenger to $35 and an increase in fixed costs to $1,500,000. Kangaroo Airlines has decided to increase the average full passenger fare to $80. How many of passengers are needed to generate an after tax profit of $400,000, if the company tax rate is 30 percent (round up)?

9. Kangaroo Airlines is considering offering a discounted fare of $50 with the average variable costs per passenger remaining at the original $30 per passenger, Kangaroo feels that the discounted fare would increase the load factor from 75 percent to 80 percent. Only the additional seats arising from the increase in the load factor would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising costs promoting the discounted fares would be $80,000. How much pre tax profit per month would the discounted fare provide Kangaroo Airlines if the company has 40 flights per day, 30 days per month?

10. Kangaroo Airlines has an opportunity to obtain a new route. The company feels it can sell seats at an average full passenger fare of $75 on the new route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. The company will fly the new route 15 times per month. The increase in fixed costs for the additional crew, additional planes, landing fees, maintenance, etc., would total $100,000 per month. Variable costs per passenger would remain at $30. Should Kangaroo Airlines obtain the route? In the on line form, if you think that Kangaroo Airlines should obtain the new route answer True and if you think that Kangaroo Airlines should not obtain the route answer False.

11. Using the information in question 10, how many flights would Kangaroo Airlines need to earn a pre tax profit of $50,500 per month on this new route (round up)?

12. Using the information in question 10, how many flights would be needed to earn a pre tax profit of $50,500 per month on this route if the load factor increased to 75 percent (round up)?

which of the following terms relate to e commerce i b2b ii c2b iii b2c iv edi a 580177

SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE MARK YOUR ANSWERS TO QUESTONS IN SECTION A ON THE ANSWER SHEET PROVIDED AND RETURN THE SHEET WITH YOUR ANSWER BOOKLET Answer the questions by placing a circle around the letter on the ANSWER SHEET that you think is the correct answer. There are 30 questions in this Section. All questions carry 1 mark each. Answer ALL questions. Question 1.Which of the following terms relate to e commerce? i. B2B ii. C2B iii. B2C iv. EDI A. i, ii and iii B. ii, iii and iv C. i, ii and iv D. i, iii and iv Question 2. Which of the following are performance measures used by firms to assess their own performance in relation to suppliers? i. Percentage of orders processed by electronic means ii. Number of expedited orders iii. Response time to customer queries iv. Reduction in the number of suppliers A. i, ii and iii B. ii, iii and iv C. i, ii and iv D. All of the given answers Please Turnover 3 Question 3. Doron Ltd has just computed the supplier performance index (SPI) of the company’s two suppliers, Xema and Zetta. Xema’s SPI is 2.11 and Zetta’s SPI is 0.99. Which of the following statements is correct? A. Xema is a preferred supplier because it has a higher SPI than Zetta. B. Xema is a preferred supplier because its SPI is greater than 1.0. C. Both suppliers are considered poor quality suppliers, because their SPI is higher than 0.50. D. The SPI indices suggest that for every $1 purchase price, Doron has to incur $2.11 supplier activity costs for Xema and $0.99 activity costs for Zetta. Question 4. Customer response time may be defined as: A. time between receipt of the customer order and placing that order in production B. time between customer placing an order and customer receiving the completed order C. time between receipt of order and delivery to customer D. time between receipt of order and production commencing Question 5. Which of the following are customer costs at the customer level? i. Regular sales calls ii. Customer inquiries iii. Acceptance of sales order iv. Provision of samples to customers A. i, ii and iii B. i, iii and iv C. i, ii and iv D. All of the given answers Use GoG yea exp rela Que A. B B. B C. B D. B Que A. B B. C. B D. e the follow Go Furnitu ar GoGo Fu perience w ated inform estion 6. Th BolBol $10 BolBol $15 BolBol $50 BolBol $65 estion 7. Th BolBol 0.30 BolBol 1.20 BolBol 1.30 BolBol 1.51 wing data t re needs to urniture ha with these tw mation: he total co 050; TolTol 050; TolTol 300; TolTol 050; TolTol he supplie ; TolTol 0.05 0; TolTol 1.0 ; TolTol 1.05 1; TolTol 0.4 to answer Q o purchase s two supp wo supplie osts of own $4050 $6050 $120 600 $126 050 r performa 5 03 5 40 Questions e glass pan pliers, BolBo ers, GoGo p nership of B ance index 6 and 7. nes to mak ol and TolTo provides y BolBol and x of BolBol a Pl ke glass to ol. Based o ou with the TolTol are, and TolTol Please Turno p coffee ta on last yea e following respective are, respe over 4 ables. Last ar’s g supplier ely: ctively: t Use GoG Que A. $ B. $ C. $ D. $ Qu A. $ B. $ C. $ D. $ Que con A. r B. ir C. r D. r e the follow Go Furnitu estion 8. Th $8500 $18 500 $30 500 $35 500 uestion 9. T $6000 $16 000 $24 500 $29 000 estion 10. A nsidered to relevant fo rrelevant fo relevant on relevant on wing data t re has coll he total cu The total o A future co o be r all alterna or all altern nly for the nly for the l to answer Q ected the stomer lev rder level c ost that is th atives natives most likely least likely Questions following vel cost is: cost is: he same u alternative alternative 8 and 9. customer r nder differ e e Pl related inf rent alterna Please Turno ormation: tives is ver 5 Please Turnover 6 Question 11. Which of the following is NOT a sunk cost? A. depreciation on an existing asset B. acquisition cost of an asset purchased one year ago C. disposal value of an existing asset D. all of the above are sunk costs Question 12. Which of the following costs are relevant to a make or buy decision? A. the original cost of the production equipment B. the annual depreciation of the equipment C. the amount that would be received if the production equipment were sold D. the cost of direct materials purchased last month and used to manufacture the component Question 13. Galaxy Industries manufactures 15,000 components per year. The manufacturing costs of the components were determined to be as follows: Direct materials $150,000 Direct labor 240,000 Variable manufacturing overhead 90,000 Fixed manufacturing overhead 120,000 Total $600,000 Assume $40,000 of the fixed manufacturing overhead could be avoided if the components are purchased from an outside supplier. An outside supplier has offered to sell the component for $34. If Galaxy purchases the component from the supplier instead of manufacturing it, the effect on income (profit) would be a A. $60,000 increase B. $10,000 increase C. $100,000 decrease D. $140,000 increase Please Turnover 7 Question 14. Zandy Beverage Company plans to eliminate a branch that has a contribution margin of $50,000 and fixed costs of $75,000. Of the fixed costs, $55,000 cannot be eliminated. The effect of eliminating this branch on net income (profit) would be a(an) A. decrease of $25,000 B. increase of $25,000 C. decrease of $30,000 D. increase of $30,000

Attachments:

question 580236

QUESTION

Using the information below and on the next two pages, prepare the following as at 30th June 2014:
PART A: Adjustment/elimination journal entries for consolidation at that date; and

PART B:Detailed calculation of non controlling interest balance and consolidation worksheet; and

PART C:Consolidated financial statements and statements of changes in equity for the group and parent.

INFORMATION

For the year ended 30 June 2012:

1. On 1 July 2011 Harbour Ltd created a group entity when it purchased 80% of the issued capital of Bridge Ltd for $440,000 cash. On acquisition Bridge Ltd’s accounts showed: Share capital $300,000 and Retained earnings $125,000. All assets and liabilities appearing in Bridge Ltd’s financial statements were fairly valued, except:

· An item of Bridge Ltd’s plant, that had originally cost $157,000 and had a carrying value of $100,480, was undervalued by $30,000. The plant was still on hand at 30 June 2014.

· Bridge Ltd had an internally developed identifiable intangible asset, a patent, with a fair value of $35,000.

During the year Bridge Ltd made sales of inventory to Harbour Ltd of $70,200. Harbour Ltd’s closing inventories on 30 June 2012 included $33,600 bought from Bridge Ltd (which included the intragroup mark up on original cost price).

For the year ended 30 June 2013:

2. On 1 January 2013 it was decided that goodwill acquired in Bridge Ltd should be marked down at a rate of 10% per annum from this date forward (% based on the original value you calculated at acquisition).

3. Also on 1 January 2013 Harbour Ltd sold plant to Bridge Ltd for $35,000. This was financed by a short term interest free loan from Harbour Ltd. The plant had originally cost $82,000 when purchased on 1 January 2010.

Harbour Ltd declared and paid dividends of $50,000 for the year. Bridge Ltd did not declare or pay any dividends for the year.

For the year ended 30 June 2014:

4. During the year Bridge Ltd made sales of inventory to Harbour Ltd of $88,100.

5. Harbour Ltd’sinventories included the following amounts bought from Bridge Ltd (which included the intragroup mark up on original cost price): Closing inventory on 30 June 2014 was $13,300; and Opening inventory on 1 July 2013 was $9,100.

6. Harbour Ltd charged management fees to Bridge Ltd.

7. Dividends were declared/paid by both companies.

8. Non controlling interests to be recognized.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

· The company tax rate is currently 30% and it has been this rate for many years.

· Harbour has the following accounting policies for the group:

(i) Revaluation adjustments on acquisition are to be made on consolidation only, not in the books ofany subsidiary;

(ii) Non controlling interests are measured at the proportionate share of a subsidiary’s identifiable net assets;

(iii) Intragroup sales of inventory to be at a markup of 40% on cost;

(iv) Plant is depreciated using the diminishing value method at a rate of 20% p.a. (also known as thedeclining balance or diminishing balance method); and

(v) All calculated amounts to be rounded to the nearest whole dollar.

AT 30 JUNE 2014

HARBOUR LTD

BRIDGE LTD

$

$

INCOME STATEMENTS

Sales revenue

1,413,500

978,300

Cost of goods sold

798,000

508,300

Gross profit

615,500

470,000

Other income

Management fee revenue

22,600

Dividend revenue

69,800

Expenses

Depreciation expense

(126,200)

(49,000)

Management fee expense

(22,600)

Other expenses

(326,100)

(263,800)

Profit before tax

255,600

134,600

Income tax expense

(76,680)

(40,380)

Profit for the year after tax

178,920

94,220

Retained earnings at start of year

59,120

134,320

Dividend paid/declared

(150,000)

(86,000)

Retained earnings at year end

88,040

142,540

BALANCE SHEETS

Equity

Share capital

850,000

300,000

Retained earnings

88,040

142,540

Current Liabilities

Accounts payable

191,960

115,860

Income tax payable

95,900

66,700

Dividends payable

75,000

50,000

Non Current Liabilities

Loans

950,000

565,100

Provision for employee benefits

21,900

19,400

Deferred tax liability

6,900

2,279,700

1,259,600

Current Assets

Accounts receivable

276,300

104,100

Allowance for doubtful debts

(15,500)

(7,000)

Dividends receivable

40,500

Inventory

112,100

144,200

Non Current Assets

Land and buildings

800,000

610,800

Plant – at cost

901,200

601,200

Accumulated depreciation – plant

(294,900)

(194,400)

Deferred tax asset

700

Shares in Opera House Ltd

20,000

Investment in Bridge Ltd

440,000

2,279,700

1,259,600

NOTE:

· You MUST number your journal entries as they relate to the point numbers for each “event” as given in the information. Where more than one journal is needed for an “event” to be completely accounted for add the letters a,b,c,…etc to them as necessary. [For example, if three separate journal entries are required to fully record the information detailed in point number 1, then the first journal will be 1a and the second is to be 1b and the third 1c.] Short narrations are expected for each journal entry. Marks will be lost if journals are not presented in a clear and professional manner (i.e. poor or unclear presentation can include showing the debit entry on one page but the credit entry on another, or not clearly distinguishing between debit and credit entries).

· The required statements for both the group and the parent company are: the statement of comprehensive income, statement of financial position, and statement of changes in equity. Follow the formats shown in Chapter 29 of the textbook. Notes to the statements are not required. Marks will be lost if statements are not presented in a clear and professional manner (i.e. poor or unclear presentation can include splitting the reports over two pages, so start each statement on a new page!).

· You may “cut and paste” the financial information on the next page into your excel file, but no other information is to be copied into your file from anywhere else.

· You are expected to use at least the basic formula functions in Excel when preparing worksheets and financial statements (i.e. use Excel formulas to add totals and sub totals etc, rather than calculating values manually and then just typingthem in to the spreadsheet!).

prepare the bank reconciliation of baylor associates at february 28 2009 580237

The cash account of Baylor Associates at February 28, 2009, follows.

Cash

Feb. 1

Bal. 3,995

Feb. 3

400

6

800

12

3,100

15

1,800

19

1,100

23

1,100

25

500

28

2,400

27

900

Feb. 28

Bal. 4,095

Baylor Associates received the bank statement on February 28, 2009 (negative amounts are in parentheses):

Bank Statement for February 2009

Beginning balance

Deposits:

$3,995

Feb. 7

$ 800

15

1,800

24

1,100

3,700

Checks (total per day):

Feb. 8

$ 400

16

3,100

23

1,100

(4,600)

Other items:

Service charge

(10)

NSF check from M. E. Crown

(700)

Bank collection of note receivable for the company

1,000

EFT—monthly rent expense

(330)

Interest revenue earned on account balance

15

Ending balance

$3,070

Additional data:

Baylor deposits all cash receipts in the bank and makes all payments by check.

Required

1. Prepare the bank reconciliation of Baylor Associates at February 28, 2009.

2. Journalize the entries based on the bank reconciliation.

state how the person can hurt the company 580243

internal control weakness in the following situations. State how the person can hurt the company.

a. Jerry Miller works as a security guard at ALTEX parking in Denver. Miller has a master key to the cash box where commuters pay for parking. Each night Miller prepares the cash report that shows (a) the number of cars that parked on the lot and (b) the day’s cash receipts. Sandra Covington, the ALTEX treasurer, checks Miller’s figures by multiplying the number of cars by the parking fee per car. Covington then deposits the cash in the bank.

b. Sharon Fisher is the purchasing agent for Manatee Golf Equipment. Fisher prepares purchase orders based on requests from division managers of the company. Fisher faxes the purchase order to suppliers who then ship the goods to Manatee. Fisher receives each incoming shipment and checks it for agreement with the purchase order and the related invoice. She then routes the goods to the respective division managers and sends the receiving report and the invoice to the accounting department for payment. c. The external auditor for Mattson Financial Services takes a global view of the audit. To form his professional opinion of Mattson’s financial statements, the auditor runs no tests of Mattson’s financial statements or of the underlying transactions. Instead, the auditor computes a few ratios and compares the current year ratio values to the ratio values a year ago. If the ratio values appear reasonable, the auditor concludes that Mattson’s financial statements are okay.

where a mail clerk opens envelopes and totals the cash receipts for the day 580244

(Learning Objective 1: Identifying internal control strengths and weaknesses) The following situations describe 2 cash payment situations and 2 cash receipt situations. In each pair, one set of internal controls is better than the other. Evaluate the internal controls in each situation as strong or weak, and give the reason for your answer.

Cash payments:

a. Jim McCord Construction policy calls for construction supervisors to request the equipment needed for their jobs. The home office then purchases the equipment and has it shipped to the construction site.

b. Granite & Marble, Inc., policy calls for project supervisors to purchase the equipment needed for jobs.

The supervisors then submit the paid receipts to the home office for reimbursement. This policy enables supervisors to get the equipment quickly and keep construction jobs moving.

Cash receipts:

a. At McClaren Chevrolet, cash received by mail goes straight to the accountant, who debits Cash and credits Accounts Receivable to record the collections from customers. The McClaren accountant then deposits the cash in the bank.

b. Cash received by mail at Lone Star Orthopedic Clinic goes to the mail room, where a mail clerk opens envelopes and totals the cash receipts for the day. The mail clerk forwards customer checks to the cashier for deposit in the bank and forwards the remittance slips to the accounting department for posting credits to customer accounts.

leann bryant rsquo s check book lists the following 580247

(Learning Objective 2: Preparing a bank reconciliation) LeAnn Bryant’s check book lists the following:

Date

Check No.

Item

Check

Deposit

Balance

Nov. 1

$ 705

4

622

Consolidated Gas Co.

$19

686

9

Dividends

$116

802

13

623

General Tire Co.

43

759

14

624

Exxon Mobil Oil Co.

58

701

18

625

Cash

50

651

26

626

St. Mark’s Church

25

626

28

627

Bent Tree Apartments

275

351

30

Paycheck

846

1,197

The November bank statement shows

Balance

$705

Add: Deposits

116

Deduct checks:

Amount

622

$19

623

43

624

85*

625

50

(197)

Other charges:

NSF check

$ 8

Service charge

12

(20)

Balance

$604

Required

Prepare Bryant’s bank reconciliation at November 30, 20X6.

will the budgeted level of cash receipts leave cellular with the desired ending cash 580252

Cellular Communications, Inc., is preparing its cash budget for 20X8. Cellular ended 20X7 with cash of $81 million, and managers need to keep a cash balance of at least $75 million for operations. Collections from customers are expected to total $11,284 million during 20X8, and payments for the cost of services and products should reach $6,166 million. Operating expense payments are budgeted at $2,543 million. During 20X8, Cellular expects to invest $1,825 million in new equipment and sell older assets for $115 million. Debt payments scheduled for 20X8 will total $597 million. The company forecasts net income of $890 million for 20X8 and plans to pay dividends of $338 million. Prepare Cellular Communications’ cash budget for 20X8. Will the budgeted level of cash receipts leave Cellular with the desired ending cash balance of $75 million, or will the company need additional financing? If so, how much?

apply the decision guidelines for ethical judgments outlined to decide how the accou 580253

Sunbelt Bank recently appointed the accounting firm of Baker, Jackson, and Trent as the bank’s auditor. Sunbelt quickly became one of the Baker, Jackson, and Trent’s largest clients. Subject to banking regulations, Sunbelt must provide for any expected losses on notes receivable that Sunbelt may not collect in full. During the course of the audit, Baker, Jackson, and Trent determined that 3 large notes receivable of Sunbelt seem questionable. Baker, Jackson and Trent discussed these loans with Stephanie Carson, controller of Sunbelt. Carson assured the auditors that these notes were good and that the makers of the notes will be able to pay their notes after the economy improves.

Baker, Jackson, and Trent stated that Sunbelt must record a loss for a portion of these notes receivable to account for the likelihood that Sunbelt may never collect their full amount. Carson objected and threatened to dismiss Baker, Jackson, and Trent if the auditor demands that the bank record the loss. Baker, Jackson, and Trent want to keep Sunbelt as a client. In fact, Baker, Jackson, and Trent were counting on the revenue from the Sunbelt audit to finance an expansion of the firm. Apply the decision guidelines for ethical judgments outlined to decide how the accounting firm of Baker, Jackson, and Trent should proceed.

in each instance also identify how copeland can determine whether major rsquo s acti 580255

Jan Copeland, the owner of Jan’s Perfect Presents, has delegated management of the business to Lou Major, a friend. Copeland drops by to meet customers and check up on cash receipts, but Major buys the merchandise and handles cash payments. Business has been very good lately, and cash receipts have kept pace with the apparent level of sales. However, for a year or so, the amount of cash on hand has been too low. When asked about this, Major explains that suppliers are charging more for goods than in the past. During the past year, Major has taken 2 expensive vacations, and Copeland wonders how Major can afford these trips on her $60,000 annual salary and commissions. List at least 3 ways Major could be defrauding Copeland of cash. In each instance also identify how Copeland can determine whether Major’s actions are ethical. Limit your answers to the store’s cash payments. The business pays all suppliers by check

identify all the major internal control weaknesses in avant garde rsquo s system and 580269

Avant Garde Imports is an importer of silver, brass, and furniture items from Mexico. Kay Jones is the general manager of Avant Garde Imports. Jones employs 2 other people in the business. Marco Gonzalez serves as the buyer for Avant Garde. In his work Gonzalez travels throughout Mexico to find interesting new products. When Gonzalez finds a new product, he arranges for

Avant Garde to purchase and pay for the item. He helps the Mexican artisans prepare their invoices and then faxes the invoices to Jones in the company office. Jones operates out of an office in Tucson, Arizona. The office is managed by Rita Bowden, who handles the mail, keeps the accounting records, makes bank deposits, and prepares the monthly bank reconciliation. Virtually all of Avant Garde’s cash receipts arrive by mail—from sales, made to Target, Pier 1 Imports, and Wal Mart. Bowden also prepares checks for payment based on invoices that come in from the suppliers who have been contacted by Gonzalez. To maintain control over cash payments, Jones examines the paperwork and signs all checks.

Required

Identify all the major internal control weaknesses in Avant Garde’s system and how the resulting action could hurt Avant Garde. Also state how to correct each weakness.

identify the missing internal control characteristic in each situation 580270

Each of the following situations reveals an internal control weakness.

a. Accounting firms use paraprofessional employees to perform routine tasks. For example, an accounting paraprofessional might prepare routine tax returns for clients. In the firm of Dunham & Lee, Rodney Lee, one of the partners, turns over a significant portion of his high level accounting work to his paraprofessional staff.

b. In evaluating the internal control over cash payments of Butler Manufacturing, an auditor learns that the purchasing agent is responsible for purchasing diamonds for use in the company’s manufacturing process, approving the invoices for payment, and signing the checks. No supervisor reviews the purchasing agent’s work.

c. Charlotte James owns an architecture firm. James’s staff consists of 12 professional architects, and James manages the office. Often, James’s work requires her to travel to meet with clients. During the past 6 months, James has observed that when she returns from a business trip, the architecture jobs in the office have not progressed satisfactorily. James learns that when she is away, 2 of her senior architects take over office management and neglect their normal duties. One employee could manage the office.

d. B.J. Tanner has been an employee of the City of Marlin for many years. Because the city is small, Tanner performs all accounting duties, plus opening the mail, preparing the bank deposit, and preparing the bank reconciliation.

e. Part of an internal auditor’s job is to evaluate how efficiently the company is running. For example, is the company purchasing inventory from the least expensive supplier? After a particularly bad year, Long Photographic Products eliminates its internal audit department to reduce expenses.

Required

1. Identify the missing internal control characteristic in each situation.

2. Identify each firm’s possible problem.

3. Propose a solution to the problem.

prepare the alta vista toyota bank reconciliation at june 30 20×4 580271

The cash data of Alta Vista Toyota for June 20X4 follow:

Cash

Date

Item

Jrnl. Ref.

Debit

Credit

Balance

June 1

Balance

5,011

30

CR6

10,578

15,589

30

CP11

10,924

4,665

Cash Receipts (CR)

Cash Payments (CP)

Date

Cash Debit

Check No.

Cash Credit

June 2

$ 4,174

3113

$ 891

8

407

3114

147

10

559

3115

1,930

16

2,187

3116

664

22

1,854

3117

1,472

29

1,060

3118

1,000

30

337

3119

632

Total

$10,578

3120

1,675

3121

100

3122

2,413

Total

$10,924

Alta Vista received the following bank statement on June 30, 20X4:

Bank Statement for June 20X4

Beginning balance

$ 5,011

Deposits and other additions:

June 1

$ 326 EFT

4

4,174

9

407

12

559

17

2,187

22

1,701 BC

23

1,854

11,208

Checks and other deductions:

June 7

$ 891

13

1,390

14

903 US

15

147

18

664

21

219 EFT

26

1,472

30

1,000

30

20 SC

(6,706)

Ending balance

$ 9,513

Additional data for the bank reconciliation include the following:

a. The EFT deposit was a receipt of monthly rent. The EFT debit was a monthly insurance payment.

b. The unauthorized signature check was received from a customer.

c. The correct amount of check number 3115, a payment on account, is $1,390. (Alta Vista’s accountant mistakenly recorded the check for $1,930.)

Required

1. Prepare the Alta Vista Toyota bank reconciliation at June 30, 20X4.

2. Describe how a bank account and the bank reconciliation help the general manager control Alta Vista’s cash.

prepare the bank reconciliation for varian engineering associates 580272

The May 31 bank statement of Varian Engineering Associates has just arrived from Carolina First Bank. To prepare the Varian bank reconciliation, you gather the following data:

a. Varian’s Cash account shows a balance of $2,256.14 on May 31.

b. The May 31 bank balance is $3,374.22.

c. The bank statement shows that Varian earned $38.19 of interest on its bank balance during May. This amount was added to Varian’s bank balance.

d. Varian pays utilities ($750) and insurance ($290) by EFT.

e. The following Varian checks did not clear the bank by May 31:

Check No.

Amount

237

$ 46.10

288

141.00

291

578.05

293

11.87

294

609.51

295

8.88

296

101.63

f. The bank statement includes a deposit of $891.17, collected on account by the bank on behalf of Varian.

g. The bank statement lists a $10.50 bank service charge.

h. On May 31, the Varian treasurer deposited $16.15, which will appear on the June bank statement.

i. The bank statement includes a $300.00 deposit that Varian did not make. The bank added $300 to Varian’s account for another company’s deposit.

j. The bank statement includes 2 charges for returned checks from customers. One is a $395.00 check received from a customer with the imprint “Unauthorized Signature.” The other is a nonsufficient funds check in the amount of $146.67 received from another customer.

Required

1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for Varian Engineering Associates.

2. Journalize the May 31 transactions needed to update Varian’s Cash account. Include an explanation for each entry.

apply the ethical judgment framework outlined in the chapter to help raborn decide w 580275

(Learning Objective 5: Making an ethical judgment) Larry Raborn is executive vice president of Quality Bank. Active in community affairs, Raborn serves on the board of directors of The Salvation Army. The Salvation Army is expanding rapidly and is considering relocating. At a recent meeting, The Salvation Army decided to buy 200 acres of land on the edge of town. The owner of the property is Freda Rader, a major depositor in Quality Bank. Rader is completing a bitter divorce, and Raborn knows that Rader is eager to sell her property. In view of Rader’s difficult situation, Raborn believes Rader would accept a low offer for the land. Realtors have appraised the property at $2.2 million.

Required

Apply the ethical judgment framework outlined in the chapter to help Raborn decide what role he should play in The Salvation Army’s attempt to buy the land from Rader.

identify several combinations of duties that should not be performed by the same per 580276

Trey Osborne, administration of Valley View Clinic, seeks your advice. Valley View Clinic employs 2 people in the office, Jim Bates and Rhonda Clark. Osborne asks you how to assign the various office functions to the 3 people (including Osborne) to achieve good internal control. Here are the duties to be performed by the 2 office workers and Osborne:

a. Record cash payments d. Reconcile the bank account

b. Record cash receipts e. Deposit cash receipts

c. Receive incoming cash from patients f. Sign checks for payment

Required

1. Propose a plan that divides duties a. through f. to Bates, Clark, and Osborne. Your goal is to divide the duties so as to achieve good internal control for the clinic.

2. Identify several combinations of duties that should not be performed by the same person.

identify the missing internal control characteristics in each situation 580277

Each of the following situations has an internal control weakness: a. Retail stores such as Target and Best Buy receive a significant portion of their sales revenue in cash. At the end of each day, sales clerks compare the cash in their own register with the record of sales kept within the register. They then forward the cash to a Brinks security officer for deposit in the bank.

b. The office supply company from which Martin Audiology Service purchases cash receipt forms recently notified Martin that the last shipped sales receipts were not pre numbered. Derek Martin, the owner, replied that he did not use the receipt numbers, so the omission is unimportant to him.

c. Azbell Electronics specializes in programs with musical applications. The company’s most popular product prepares musical programs for large gatherings. In the company’s early days, the owner and 8 employees wrote the programs, lined up production of the programs, sold the products, and performed the general management of the company. As Azbell has grown, the number of employees has increased dramatically. Recently, the development of a new musical series stopped while the programmers redesigned Azbell’s sound system. Azbell could have hired outsiders to do this task.

d. Paul Allen, who has no known sources of outside income, has been a trusted employee of Chapparall Cosmetics for 20 years. Allen performs all cash handling and accounting duties, including opening the mail, preparing the bank deposit, accounting for cash and accounts receivable, and preparing the bank reconciliation. Allen has just purchased a new Lexus. Linda Altman, owner of the company, wonders how Allen can afford the new car on his salary.

e. Monica Wade employs 3 professional interior designers in her design studio. The studio is located in an area with a lot of new construction, and her business is booming. Ordinarily, Wade does all the purchasing of materials needed to complete jobs. During the summer, Wade takes a long vacation, and in her absence she allows each designer to purchase materials. On her return, Wade reviews operations and observes that expenses are higher and net income is lower than in the past.

Required

1. Identify the missing internal control characteristics in each situation.

2. Identify each firm’s possible problem.

3. Propose a solution to the problem.

prepare a balance sheet for the general fund of the city of orchard park at december 579619

Preparation of a general fund balance sheet

The unadjusted trial balance for the general fund of the City of Orchard Park at December 31, 2011, is as follows:

Debit

Credit

Accounts receivable

$ 25,000

Allowance for bad debts

$ 2,000

Allowance for uncollectible taxes

30,000

Appropriations

900,000

Cash

40,000

Due from agency fund

10,000

Due to utility fund

20,000

Encumbrances

50,000

Estimated revenues

910,000

Expenditures

858,000

Fund balance—unassigned

26,000

Reserve for encumbrances

50,000

Revenues

910,000

Taxes receivable—delinquent

210,000

Taxes received in advance

10,000

Vouchers payable

155,000

$2,103,000

$2,103,000

Supplies on hand at December 31, 2011, are $3,000. The $50,000 encumbrance relates to equipment ordered November 28 for the Department of Public Works but not received by year end. The equipment purchase was approved by the City Council.

REQUIRED: Prepare a balance sheet for the general fund of the City of Orchard Park at December 31, 2011.

prepare a statement of revenues expenditures and changes in total fund balance for t 579620

Preparation of general fund statements

The preclosing account balances of the general fund of the City of Batavia on June 30, 2012, were as follows:

Debits

Cash

$ 80,000

Taxes receivable—delinquent

160,000

Due from County

18,000

Estimated revenues

1,000,000

Expenditures

940,000

Nonreciprocal transfers out

10,000

Encumbrances

20,000

$2,228,000

Credits

$ 30,000

Allowance for uncollectible taxes—delinquent

58,000

Vouchers payable

60,000

Notes payable

20,000

Reserve for encumbrances

120,000

Fund balance—unassigned

980,000

Revenues

960,000

Appropriations

$2,228,000

The fund balance—unassigned at the beginning of the year was $80,000, and there were no carryover encumbrances at the beginning of the fiscal year. The end of year encumbrances are a result of enabling legislation.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in total fund balance for the year ended June 30, 2012.

2. Prepare a general fund balance sheet at June 30, 2012.

prepare a conversion worksheet to determine the change in net assets and the net ass 579621

Governmental fund conversion worksheet

The post closing trial balance for the City of Fort Collins governmental funds at June 30, 2011, shows the following ledger account balances:

DR

$5,542,420

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 541,100

Investments

520,000

Taxes receivable

520,000

Accounts receivable

187,500

Due from other governments

364,970

Supplies inventory

290,000

Vouchers payable

$ 379,500

Contracts payable

47,500

Deferred revenue

55,000

Fund balance/net assets, beginning

912,720

Revenues

3,507,450

Expenditures

3,043,600

OFS—Bond proceeds

500,000

OFS—Capital lease

65,000

OFS—Transfers in

75,250

OFU—Transfers out

75,250

$5,542,420

$5,542,420

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. During the year, Fort Collins purchased $9,000 in equipment, which was not depreciated.

2. Fort Collins also has other fixed assets with a historical cost of $95,000 and accumulated depreciation of $65,000.

3. Fort Collins has capital project fund construction expenditures totaling $20,000.

4. During the year, the city issued a bond at $500,000 par value.

5. During the year, the city entered into a lease agreement. The entire amount should be recognized as general long term debt.

6. The city’s deferred revenue would be treated as revenue under accrual accounting.

7. The transfers in and out were made between governmental funds.

8. The city does not report internal service funds.

REQUIRED: Prepare a conversion worksheet to determine the change in net assets and the net asset balance for the city’s governmental funds.

prepare a statement of revenues expenditures and changes in fund balance for the vol 579623

Preparation of a fund statement of revenues, expenditures and changes in fund balance

The following information regarding the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, was drawn from the accounts and records of the Volendam County general fund:

Revenues and Other Asset Infl ows

Taxes

$10,000,000

Licenses and permits

2,000,000

Intergovernmental grants

300,000

Proceeds of short term note issuances

1,000,000

Collection of interfund advance to other fund

450,000

Receipt of net assets of terminated fund

2,000,000

Expenditures and Other Asset Outfl ows

General government expenditures

8,000,000

Public safety expenditures

1,500,000

Judicial system expenditures

1,000,000

Health and welfare expenditures

1,200,000

Equipment purchases

600,000

Payment to debt service fund to cover future debt

service on general government bonds

320,000

Fund balance—unassigned, January 1, 2011

$ 3,130,000

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the Volendam County general fund for the year ended December 31, 2011.

prepare a statement of revenues expenditures and changes in fund balance for the tow 579624

Debt service fund journal entries

The Town of Lilehammar has $3,000,000 of 6 percent bonds outstanding. Interest on the general obligation, general government indebtedness is payable semiannually each March 31 and September 30. December 31 is the fiscal year end. Record the following transactions in the town’s debt service fund.

1. Received a transfer from the general fund to provide financing for the March 31, interest payment.

2. Paid the interest due on March 31.

3. Received a transfer from the general fund to provide financing for the September 30, interest payment and retirement of $1,000,000 of the bonds.

4. Paid the interest on September 31, and repaid $1,000,000 of the bonds.

5. December 31 is the fiscal year end. Record any appropriate adjustments.

6. Received a transfer from the general fund to provide financing for the March 31 interest payment for year two of the bond.

7. Paid the interest due on March 31 for year two of the bond.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the Town of Lilehammar debt service fund for the year ended December 31, 2011.

prepare journal entries for the capital projects fund and any other fund involved to 579625

Capital projects fund journal entries

The City of Stockholm authorized construction of a $600,000 addition to the municipal building in September 2011. The addition will be financed by $200,000 from the general fund and a $400,000 serial bond issue to be sold in April 2012.

REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries for the capital projects fund and any other fund involved to the extent of requiring journal entries to record the transactions described.

1. On October 1, 2011, the general fund transferred $200,000 to the capital projects fund.

2. On November 1, 2011, a contract for the addition was awarded to Crooked Construction for $580,000.

3. On April 15, 2012, the $400,000, 7% bonds were sold for $401,000 and the premium was transferred to the debt service fund.

4. On May 2, 2012, construction was completed and Crooked Construction submitted a bill for $580,000.

5. On May 12, 2012, the bill to Crooked Construction was paid in full. The CPF was closed, and the remaining cash was transferred to the general fund.

prepare all journal entries in the funds necessary to account for the transactions a 579628

Capital projects fund journal entries and financial statements

The City of Catalina authorized the construction of a new recreation center at a total cost of $1,000,000 on June 15, 2011. On the same date, the city approved a $1,000,000, 8 percent, 10 year general obligation serial bond issue to finance the project. During the year July 1, 2011, to June 30, 2012, the following transactions and events occurred relative to the recreation center project:

1. On July 1, 2011, the city sold $500,000 par of the authorized bonds, with interest payment dates on December 31 and June 30 and the first serial retirement to be made on June 30, 2009. The bonds were sold at 102.

2. On July 5, 2011, a construction contract for the recreation center was created in the amount of $960,000.

3. On December 15, 2011, the contractor’s bill for $320,000 was received based on certification that the work was one third completed.

4. The contractor was paid for one third of the contract less a 10% retained percentage to ensure performance.

5. On December 30, 2011, the GF transferred $30,000 to the fund responsible for servicing the serial bonds.

6. Interest on the serial bonds was paid on December 31, 2011, with the money transferred from the GF and the CPF.

7. On June 15, 2012, the contractor’s bill for $320,000 was received based on certification that the work was two thirds completed.

8. On June 28, 2012, the GF transferred $90,000 to the fund responsible for servicing the serial bonds: $40,000 for interest and $50,000 for principal.

9. Interest and principal on the serial bonds were paid on June 30, 2012.

10. On June 30, 2012, the city sold the remaining $500,000 par of authorized bonds at par.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare all journal entries in the funds necessary to account for the transactions and events given. (If amounts are not known, use xxx.)

2. Prepare financial statements for the CPF for the year ended June 30, 2012.

what amount of the forgoing revenues should be accounted for in arvida rsquo s gover 579658

Multiple choice

The following revenues were among those reported by Arvida Township in 2012:

Net rental revenue (after depreciation) from

$ 40,000

a parking garage owned by Arvida

Interest earned on investments held for

employees’ retirement benefits

100,000

Property taxes

6,000,000

What amount of the forgoing revenues should be accounted for in Arvida’s governmental funds?

a $6,140,000

b $6,100,000

c $6,040,000

d $6,000,000

prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets for the city of laramee tax agency fund 579664

Agency fund statement of net assets

The City of Laramee established a tax agency fund to collect property taxes for the City of Laramee, Bloomer County, and Bloomer School District. Total tax levies of the three governmental units were $200,000 for 2011, of which $60,000 was for the City of Laramee, $40,000 for Bloomer County, and $100,000 for Bloomer School District.

The tax agency fund charges Bloomer County and Bloomer School District a 2 percent collection fee that it transfers to the general fund of the City of Laramee in order to cover costs incurred for agency fund operations.

During 2011 the tax agency fund collected and remitted $150,000 of the 2011 levies to the various governmental units. The collection fees associated with the $150,000 were remitted to Laramee’s general fund before year end.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets for the City of Laramee Tax Agency Fund at December 31, 2011.

a county government offers to pool the cash available for investment from cities loc 579666

Identification of fund type

For each of the following events or transactions, identify the fund or funds that will be affected.

1. A governmental unit operates a municipal pool. Costs are intended to be recovered primarily from user charges.

2. A bond offering was issued at par to subsidize the construction of a new convention center.

3. A bond offering was issued at a premium to subsidize the construction of a new convention center.

4. A town receives a donation of cash that must be used for the benefit of the town’s bird sanctuary, which is not operated by the town.

5. A central computing center was established to handle the data processing needs of a municipality.

6. A local municipality provides water and sewer services to residents of nearby communities for a fee.

7. A village receives a grant from the state government. The funds are to be used solely for preserving wetlands.

8. Property taxes are levied by a city government.

9. A county government serves as a tax collection agency for all towns and cities located within the county.

10. A county government offers to pool the cash available for investment from cities located within its boundaries. A formal agreement exists, and income will be recognized in the fund.

a village is awarded a grant of 250 000 from the state government for highway beauti 579667

Journal entries—various funds

For each of the following events or transactions, prepare the necessary journal entry or entries and identify the fund or funds that will be affected.

1. A governmental unit collects fees totaling $4,500 at the municipal pool. The fees are charged to recover costs of pool operation and maintenance.

2. A county government that serves as a tax collection agency for all towns and cities located within the county collects county sales taxes totaling $125,000 for the month.

3. A $1,000,000 bond offering was issued, with a premium of $50,000, to subsidize the construction of a city visitor center.

4. A town receives a donation of $50,000 in bonds. The bonds should be held indefinitely, but bond income is to be donated to the local zoo. The zoo is not associated with the town.

5. A central printing shop is established with a $150,000 nonreciprocal transfer from the general fund.

6. A $1,000,000 revenue bond offering was issued at par by a fund that provides water and sewer services to residents of nearby communities for a fee. The funds are to be used for facility expansion.

7. A village is awarded a grant of $250,000 from the state government for highway beautification. The general fund provides a $50,000 loan, because grant funds will be disbursed after valid expenditures are documented.

8. Property taxes of $5,000,000 are levied by a city government. One percent is considered uncollectible, and the taxes will be used to fund current obligations.

prepare all necessary journal entries for the printing services internal service fun 579669

Internal service fund journal entries

The City of Thomasville established an internal service fund to provide printing services to all city offices and departments. The following transactions related to the fund took place in 2011:

1. On January 15 the general fund transferred equipment valued at $550,000 and provided a $500,000 loan to the internal service fund.

2. On February 1 the internal service fund acquired $200,000 worth of printing equipment and computers. The assets have a five year life with no salvage, and the city uses straight line depreciation. Assume half year depreciation in the year of acquisition.

3. Throughout the year, the internal service fund billed various departments $345,000 for service rendered and collected $300,000 of the amount billed.

4. Various expenses for the year were as follows: wages and salaries, $180,000; payroll taxes, $37,800; repayment to the general fund, $50,000; and other operating expenses, $120,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare all necessary journal entries for the printing services internal service fund for the year ended December 31, 2011.

prepare all necessary journal entries and an adjusted trial balance for the utility 579670

Enterprise fund journal entries and trial balance

The following transactions relate to the Fiedler County Utility Plant, a newly established municipal facility financed with debt secured solely by net revenue from fees and charges to external users.

1. The general fund made a $30,000,000 contribution to establish the working capital of the new utility enterprise fund.

2. The utility fund purchased a utility plant for $25,250,000.

3. The utility fund issued a $5,000,000 revenue bond for renovations to the facility.

4. Utility bills of $4,500,000 were mailed to customers.

5. Utility collections totaled $4,400,000.

6. Renovations of $3,500,000 were completed during the year and recorded as building improvements.

7. Salaries of $700,000 were paid to employees.

8. Interest expense of $300,000 related to the revenue bonds was paid during the year, and

$100,000 was accrued at year end.

9. Operating expenses totaling $1,000,000 were paid during the year, and an additional $100,000 of operating expenses was accrued at year end.

10. Depreciation of $1,050,000 was recorded.

REQUIRED: Prepare all necessary journal entries and an adjusted trial balance for the utility enterprise fund for the year.

prepare fund financial statements for the motor pool for the year ended june 30 2012 579671

Preparation of internal service fund statements

Comparative adjusted trial balances for the motor pool of Douwe County at June 30, 2011, and June 30, 2012, are as follows:

June 30, 2012

June 30, 2011

Cash

$ 37,000

$ 44,000

Due from general fund

8,000

Due from electric fund

4,000

3,000

Supplies on hand

14,000

12,000

Autos

99,000

80,000

Supplies used

68,000

60,000

Salaries expense

25,000

20,000

Utilities expense

9,000

8,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

15,000

Operating transfer to general fund

12,000

$284,000

$250,000

Accumulated depreciation—autos

$ 56,000

$ 40,000

Accounts payable

11,000

10,000

Advance from general fund (current)

5,000

5,000

Contribution from general fund

50,000

50,000

Net assets (beginning)

42,000

35,000

Revenue from billings

120,000

110,000

$284,000

$250,000

REQUIRED: Prepare fund financial statements for the motor pool for the year ended June 30, 2012. (The statement of cash flows is to be included.)

prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets and a statement of changes in fiduciary 579672

Preparation of trust fund statements

On January 1, 2011, J. G. Monee created a student aid trust fund to which he donated a building valued at $400,000 (his cost was $250,000), bonds having a market value of $500,000, and $100,000 cash. The trust agreement stipulated that principal was to be maintained intact and earnings were to be used to support needy students. Consider gains on investments and depreciation as adjustments of earnings rather than of trust fund principal. Activities for 2011

1. During the year, net rentals of $40,000 were collected for building rental.

2. The bonds were sold for $550,000 on June 30, 2011. Of the proceeds, $30,000 represented interest accrued from January 1 to June 30.

3. Stocks were purchased for $600,000 cash.

4. Depreciation on the building was calculated at $20,000 for the year.

5. Dividends receivable of $60,000 were recorded at December 31, 2011.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets and a statement of changes in fiduciary net assets for this private purpose trust fund at December 31, 2011.

prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets and a statement of changes in fiduciary 579673

Preparation of trust fund statements

On July 1, 2011, Duchy County receives a $500,000 contribution from the local chapter of Homeless No More. A trust agreement specifying that the income from the contribution be distributed each May 15 to the downtown homeless shelter accompanies the contribution. The principal amount is intended to remain intact indefinitely. The following transactions related to the contribution occur during the fiscal year:

1. On September 1, the county invests the contribution in bonds, which yield 4.5% annually (payable on March 1 and September 1).

2. On March 1, the county receives the first interest payment.

3. On May 15, the county distributes the interest to the homeless shelter.

4. On June 30, the county closes its accounts.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of fiduciary net assets and a statement of changes in fiduciary net assets for this private purpose trust fund at June 30, 2012.

prepare a statement of cash flows for the caleb county enterprise fund 579675

Enterprise fund statement of cash flows

Caleb County had a beginning cash balance in its enterprise fund of $714,525. During the year, the following transactions affecting cash flows occurred:

1. Acquired equity investments totaling $165,000

2. Receipts from sales of goods or services totaled $3,276,500

3. Payments for materials used in providing services were made in the amount of $2,694,500

4. A capital grant, whose proceeds of $750,000 are restricted for the acquisition of constructing or improving a fixed asset, was awarded (cash was received during the year).

5. Payments to employees for salaries amounted to $479,300

6. The fund’s allocated portion of property taxes was $217,000

7. Other cash expenses for operations were $819,200

8. Capital assets used in providing goods and services were sold for $522,000. They had a book value of $550,000

9. Long term debt payments totaled $515,000

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of cash flows for the Caleb County enterprise fund.

net present value 579775

Runway Apparel Inc. is considering two investment projects. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:

Each project requires an investment of $700,000. A rate of 15% has been selected for the net present value analysis.

Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest
Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%
1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833
2 0.890 0.826 0.797 0.756 0.694
3 0.840 0.751 0.712 0.658 0.579
4 0.792 0.683 0.636 0.572 0.482
5 0.747 0.621 0.567 0.497 0.402
6 0.705 0.564 0.507 0.432 0.335
7 0.665 0.513 0.452 0.376 0.279
8 0.627 0.467 0.404 0.327 0.233
9 0.592 0.424 0.361 0.284 0.194
10 0.558 0.386 0.322 0.247 0.162

Required:

1a.Compute the cash payback period for each project.

Cash Payback Period
Plant Expansion:
Retail Store Expansion:

1b.Compute the net present value. Use the present value of $1 table above. If required, round to the nearest dollar.

Plant Expansion Retail Store Expansion
Present value of net cash flow total: $ $
Less amount to be invested: $ $
Net present value: $ $

2.Prepare a brief report advising management on the relative merits of each project.

I have the correct answers, But I need an explanation as to how to calculate the Net Present Value for the Plant Expansion. I am confused because they have two years that will earn the same amount of cash flow…. Please Explain

federal taxation of individuals tax 650 mid term exam may 2014 579827

FEDERAL TAXATION OF INDIVIDUALS (TAX 650. MID TERM EXAM.: May, 2014

1) Please write your name on the exam paper.

2) If writing your exam, please write legibly. Do not cram your work on one or two sheets of paper if using your computer. Identify each problem clearly. Please CIRCLE your choice of the correct answer on the “Multiple Choice” problem,.

3) All exams must be turned in no later than May 15 (6:00 PM).

4) The exam should be your work. It should not be prepared in collaboration with anyone

5) Assume 2013 as the tax year for all problems.

6) If you cannot attend class on the due date, please e mail the exam to me. Use the e mail address shown on the syllabus, that iwarafarialaa.

Thank you,

Attachments:

please discuss why it is desirable for corporations charities and ngos to change the 579842

Holmes Institute HA3032 Memo 01 – Semester 01, 2014

Using a standard format memo (i.e. a short report of ½ to 1½ pages) please discuss the why it is desirable for corporations, charities, and NGOs to change their External Audit firms every 7 10 years. Include in your discussion such concepts as: Independence, “Moral Hazard”, and the Market for Lemons market failure.

Task Ranking
Task Description
Very poor under standing of task. Little or no value generated.
(0 20 %)
Poor understanding of task. Some value generated.
(20 40 %)
Acceptable under standing of task. Acceptable value
(40 60 %)
Good understanding of task. Good value given.
(60 80 %)
Excellent understanding of task. Excellent value given.
(80 100 %)
1) Headings
(5.0)
Missing a lot or all headings
0.0 1.0
Missing one or more essential features and/ /or poorly organised
1.0 2.0
All headings but poorly organised and/or difficult to read
2.0 3.0
All headings, well organised but some difficulty reading it.
3.0 4.0
All headings are clean & easy to read. e.g.
To: XXXXXX
From: YYYYYYYYY
Date: 27/04/2014
Re: Ideally 6 to 12 words
4.0 5.0
2) Context Line
(15.0)
Little or no insight on the issue with many irrelevancies.
0.0 3.0
A confused statement of the issue with some irrelevancies
3.0 6.0
A clear statement of the issue
6.0 9.0
A clear and concise statement of the issues
9.0 12.0
A clear and concise statement of the issues & consequences
12.0 15.0
2) Action Line
(25.0)
Generally confused with no request or conclusion.
0.0 5.0
A confused request or conclusion—may be poorly placed (e.g. at the end or blended with other parts).
5.0 10.0
An acceptable request or conclusion, given near the start.
10.0 15.0
A good clear concise request or conclusion, given near the start.
15.0 20.0
An excellent clear concise statement of how to resolve the issues.
15.0 25.0
4) Rest of the Memo
(25.0)
Generally confused discussion with little or no linkage to the issues and/or action line.
0.0 5.0
Confused and poorly linked to the issues and/or action line.
5.0 10.0
Acceptable insight plus clear support for the action line.
10.0 15.0
Good insight plus strong, clear, and concise support for the action line.
15.0 20.0
Excellent insight plus strong, clear, and concise support for the action line that is clearly tied to it.
15.0 25.0
Total Mark /70
Adj. to 7.0 /7.0 Student Numbers:

enter the balances at july 1 in the receivable accounts post the entries to all of t 579501

Marty Co. closes its books monthly. On June 30, selected ledger account balances are:

Notes Receivable

$57,000

Interest Receivable

420

Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face

Term

Interest

May 16

Rice Inc.

$12,000

60 days

10%

May 25

Smelter Co.

30,000

60 days

9%

June 30

Kupp Corp.

15,000

6 months

12%

During July, the following transactions were completed.

July 5

Made sales of $7,200 on Marty Co. credit cards.

14

Made sales of $1,000 on Visa credit cards.The credit card service charge is 3%.

14

Added $510 to Marty Co. credit card customer balances for finance charges on unpaid balances.

15

Received payment in full from Rice Inc. on the amount due.

25

Received notice that the Smelter Co. note has been dishonored. (Assume that Smelter Co. is expected to pay in the future.)

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions and the July 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable. (Interest is computed using 360 days.)

(b) Enter the balances at July 1 in the receivable accounts. Post the entries to all of the receivable accounts.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at July 31.

on january 1 2010 furball company had accounts receivable 98 000 and allowance for d 579502

On January 1, 2010, Furball Company had Accounts Receivable $98,000 and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $8,100. Furball Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5

Sold $10,800 of merchandise to Kandle Company, terms n/30.

Feb. 2

Accepted a $10,800, 4 month, 10% promissory note from Kandle Company for the balance due.

12

Sold $13,500 of merchandise to Lowe Company and accepted Lowe’s $13,500, 2 month, 10% note for the balance due.

26

Sold $7,000 of merchandise to Barrel Co., terms n/10.

Apr. 5

Accepted a $7,000, 3 month, 8% note from Barrel Co. for the balance due.

12

Collected Lowe Company note in full.

June 2

Collected Kandle Company note in full.

July 5

Barrel Co. dishonors its note of April 5. It is expected that Barrel will eventually pay the amount owed.

15

Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Bushel Co. and accepted Bushel’s $12,000, 3 month, 12% note for the amount due.

Oct. 15

Bushel Co.’s note was dishonored. Bushel Co. is bankrupt, and there is no hope of future settlement.

prepare an accounts receivable aging schedule for sek company using the age categori 579503

SEK Company sells office equipment and supplies to many organizations in the city and surrounding area on contract terms of 2/10, n/30. In the past, over 75% of the credit customers have taken advantage of the discount by paying within 10 days of the invoice date.

The number of customers taking the full 30 days to pay has increased within the last year.

Current indications are that less than 60% of the customers are now taking the discount. Bad debts as a percentage of gross credit sales have risen from the 2.5% provided in past years to about 4.5% in the current year.

The company’s Finance Committee has requested more information on the collections of accounts receivable. The controller responded to this request with the report reproduced below.

SEK COMPANY
Accounts Receivable Collections
May 31, 2010

Proportion of Total

Age Categories

Probability of Collection

62%

not yet due

98%

20%

less than 30 days past due

96%

9%

30 to 60 days past due

94%

5%

61 to 120 days past due

91%

21/2%

121 to 180 days past due

75%

11/2%

over 180 days past due

30%

The fact that some credit accounts will prove uncollectible is normal. Annual bad debts write offs have been 2.5% of gross credit sales over the past 5 years. During the last fiscal year, this percentage increased to slightly less than 4.5%. The current Accounts Receivable balance is $1,400,000. The condition of this balance in terms of age and probability of collection is as follows. The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $29,500 on June 1, 2009. SEK has provided for a monthly bad debts expense accrual during the current fiscal year based on the assumption that 4.5% of gross credit sales will be uncollectible.Total gross credit sales for the 2009–10 fiscal year amounted to $2,900,000. Write offs of bad accounts during the year totaled $102,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an accounts receivable aging schedule for SEK Company using the age categories identified in the controller’s report to the Finance Committee showing the following.

(1) The amount of accounts receivable outstanding for each age category and in total.

(2) The estimated amount that is uncollectible for each category and in total.

(b) Compute the amount of the year end adjustment necessary to bring Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to the balance indicated by the age analysis. Then prepare the necessary journal entry to adjust the accounting records.

(c) In a recessionary environment with tight credit and high interest rates:

(1) Identify steps SEK Company might consider to improve the accounts receivable situation.

(2) Then evaluate each step identified in terms of the risks and costs involved.

determine the net credit and collection expense in dollars and as a percentage of sa 579506

Molly and Joe Mayne own Campus Fashions. From its inception Campus Fashions has sold merchandise on either a cash or credit basis, but no credit cards have been accepted.

During the past several months, the Maynes have begun to question their sales policies. First, they have lost some sales because of refusing to accept credit cards. Second, representatives of two metropolitan banks have been persuasive in almost convincing them to accept their national credit cards. One bank, City National Bank, has stated that its credit card fee is 4%.

The Maynes decide that they should determine the cost of carrying their own credit sales.

From the accounting records of the past 3 years they accumulate the following data.

2010

2009

2008

Net credit sales

$500,000

$600,000

$400,000

Collection agency fees for slow paying

Customers

2,450

2,500

2,400

Salary of part time accounts receivable clerk

4,100

4,100

4,100

Credit and collection expenses as a percentage of net credit sales are: uncollectible accounts 1.6%, billing and mailing costs 0.5%, and credit investigation fee on new customers 0.15%. Molly and Joe also determine that the average accounts receivable balance outstanding during the year is 5% of net credit sales. The Maynes estimate that they could earn an average of 8% annually on cash invested in other business opportunities.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a table showing, for each year, total credit and collection expenses in dollars and as a percentage of net credit sales.

(b) Determine the net credit and collection expense in dollars and as a percentage of sales after considering the revenue not earned from other investment opportunities.

(c) Discuss both the financial and nonfinancial factors that are relevant to the decision.

a right to sell certain products or services or to use certain trademarks or trade n 579512

Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.

Copyright

Depletion

Intangible asset

Franchise

Research and development costs

1. _______ The allocation of the cost of a natural resource to expense in a rational and systematic manner.

2. _______ Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long lived assets that do not possess physical substance.

3. _______ An exclusive right granted by the federal government to reproduce and sell an artistic or published work.

4. ________ A right to sell certain products or services or to use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.

5. ________ Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products.

These costs must be expensed as incurred.

a fund used to report any activity that provides goods or services to other funds de 579563

Identification of fund type

Identify each of the fund types described.

1. A fund that is used to report assets held in a trustee capacity for others and that cannot be used to support the government’s own programs.

2. A fund used to report any activity for which a fee is charged to external users for goods and services.

3. A fund used to account for all financial resources except those required to be accounted for in another fund.

4. A fund used to account for the accumulation of resources for, and the payment of, general long term debt principal and interest.

5. A fund used to report resources that are legally restricted to the extent that only earnings, and not principal, may be used for purposes that support the reporting government’s programs—that is, for the benefit of the government or its citizenry.

6. A fund used to account for the proceeds of specific revenue sources (other than trusts for individuals, private organizations, or other governments or for major capital projects) that are legally restricted to expenditures for specified purposes.

7. A fund used to report any activity that provides goods or services to other funds, departments, or agencies of the primary government and its component units, or to other governments, on a cost reimbursement basis.

8. A fund used to account for financial resources to be used for the acquisition or construction of major capital facilities (other than those financed by proprietary funds or in trust funds for individuals, private organizations, or other governments).

determined that it is probable that a lawsuit involving a claim against a department 579564

Transaction analysis—governmental funds

Use transaction analysis to determine the effects of each of the following transactions in the general fund.

1. Salaries paid totaled $30,000. Additional salaries incurred, but not paid, totaled $2,500.

2. Levied property taxes of $100,000; $98,000 was collected during the year. The balance is expected to be uncollectible.

3. Borrowed $60,000 by issuing a nine month note bearing interest at 7%.

4. Repaid the note plus interest when due.

5. Borrowed $600,000 by issuing bonds at par. The bonds mature in 10 years.

6. Purchased equipment costing $25,000 with cash.

7. Sold equipment at the end of its expected useful life. The equipment had no expected residual value when acquired (at a cost of $13,000), but it sold for $1,200.

8. Determined that it is probable that a lawsuit involving a claim against a department will result in a settlement of at least $50,000. However, it is not expected that any payments will be required for two years or more.

the city of sioux falls entered into a number of transactions for the current fiscal 579569

Identification of fund type and transaction analysis

The City of Sioux Falls entered into a number of transactions for the current fiscal year. Identify the fund or funds affected by each transaction and determine how each transaction will affect the accounting equation of the particular fund.

1. Sioux Falls paid salaries to general government employees, $95,000.

2. Sioux Falls purchased an automobile by issuing a $25,000, 8% note to the vendor. The purchase occurred at midyear, and the note is a one year note.

3. The city sold general fixed assets with an original cost of $300,000 for $30,000 at the end of their useful life. The use of the resources received is not restricted.

4. In the second fiscal year, the city repaid the principal and interest on the note issued in transaction 2 at the due date of the note.

5. “Profits” of $500,000 from the airport enterprise fund were transferred to the general fund of the city to subsidize general fund operations.

6. Interest income collected on Sioux Falls’s general fund investments totaled $70,000 for the year.

perez county entered into a number of transactions for the current fiscal year ident 579570

Identification of fund type and transaction analysis

Perez County entered into a number of transactions for the current fiscal year. Identify the fund or funds affected by each transaction and determine how each transaction will affect the accounting equation of the particular fund.

1. Perez County issued $10 million of general obligation bonds at par to finance construction of a new county office building.

2. The county purchased a truck for a general governmental department. The cost of the truck, $22,000, was paid in cash.

3. The county owned and operated electric utility billed residents and businesses $500,000 for electricity sales.

4. The county paid $2 million to High Rise Construction Company during 2008 for work completed during the year.

5. The county paid general governmental employee salaries of $4,500. Another $500 of salaries accrued but has not been paid.

6. The county borrowed $7,500 on a six month note to finance general operating costs of the government.

for the year ended december 31 2011 walnut corners should recognize revenues of 579605

Multiple choice

The following information pertains to Walnut Corners:

2011 governmental fund revenues that became measurable and

available in time to be used for payment of 2011 liabilities

$16,000,000

Revenues earned in 2009 and 2010 and included in the

$16,000,000 indicated

2,000,000

Sales taxes collected by merchants in 2011 but not required to

be remitted to Walnut Corners until January 2012

3,000,000

For the year ended December 31, 2011, Walnut Corners should recognize revenues of:

a. $14,000,000

b. $16,000,000

c. $17,000,000

d. $19,000,000

what amount should coral city report for 2011 net property tax revenues 579607

The following information pertains to property taxes levied by Coral City for the calendar year 2011:

Collections during 2011

$500,000

Expected collections during the first 60 days of 2012

100,000

Expected collections during the balance of 2012

60,000

Expected collections during January 2013

30,000

Estimated to be uncollectible

10,000

Total levy

$700,000

What amount should Coral City report for 2011 net property tax revenues?

a. $700,000

b. $690,000

c. $600,000

d. $500,000

how will property taxes be presented in the december 31 2011 balance sheet 579610

General fund journal entries

The following events and transactions relate to the levy and collection of property taxes for Jedville Township: March 21, 2011—Property tax bills for $2,500,000 are sent to property owners. An estimated 2% of the property tax levies are uncollectible. The taxes are due on May 1. May 4, 2011—$1,900,000 in taxes have been collected. The remaining receivables are reclassified as delinquent. May 5 to December 31, 2011—An additional $150,000 of taxes are collected. November 1, 2011—A $5,000 tax receivable account is determined to be uncollectible and is written off. January 1, 2012, to February 28, 2012—An additional $87,750 of 2011 taxes are collected.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare summary journal entries for the events and transactions described for the Jedville general fund.

2. How will property taxes be presented in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?

3. What amount of property tax revenues should be reported for 2011?

a general ledger trial balance for any city contained the following balances at june 579611

Governmental fund closing entries

A general ledger trial balance for Any City contained the following balances at June 30, 2011, just before closing entries were made:

Due from other funds

$ 600

Fund balance—unassigned

3,000

Estimated revenues

18,000

Revenues

17,380

Appropriations

17,500

Expenditures—current year

16,450

Expenditures—prior year

1,900

Encumbrances

1,000

Nonreciprocal transfer in

3,200

Reserve for encumbrances

1,000

Reserve for encumbrances—prior year

2,000

REQUIRED: Prepare the necessary closing entries.

millar city uses a purchases basis in accounting for supplies open encumbrances are 579612

Preparation of fund balance sheet

A general ledger trial balance at June 30, 2011, for Millar City is as follows:

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 12,000

Taxes receivable

30,000

Allowance for uncollectible taxes

$ 2,000

Due from other funds

3,000

Supplies inventory, June 30, 2011

4,000

Estimated revenues

300,000

Expenditures

290,000

Expenditures—prior year

5,000

Encumbrances

6,000

Vouchers payable

13,000

Due to other funds

5,000

Reserve for encumbrances

6,000

Reserve for encumbrances—prior year

5,000

Fund balance—nonspendable

4,000

Fund balance—unassigned

10,000

Appropriations

300,000

Revenues

305,000

$650,000

$650,000

Millar City uses a purchases basis in accounting for supplies. Open encumbrances are considered constrained by the highest decision making level of the city.

REQUIRED: Prepare a fund balance sheet as of June 30, 2011.

prepare a statement of revenues expenditures and changes in total fund balance for m 579613

Preparation of a fund statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance

The trial balance of the general fund of Madelyn City before closing at December 31, 2011, contained the following accounts and balances:

Fund balance—unassigned

$ 25,000

Estimated revenues

100,000

Appropriations

95,000

Encumbrances

4,000

Reserve for encumbrances

4,000

Reserve for encumbrances—prior year

5,000

Revenues

101,000

Expenditures

94,000

Expenditures—prior year

4,800

Nonreciprocal transfers out

18,000

Reciprocal transfers in

27,000

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in (total) fund balance for Madelyn City’s general fund in 2011. (Details of revenue and expenditure accounts are omitted to simplify the requirement.)

delinquent taxes of 30 000 were collected before year end the remaining net realizab 579614

General fund journal entries

Prepare entries in the general fund to record the following transactions and events:

1. Estimated revenues for the fiscal year were $250,000 and appropriations were $248,000.

2. The tax levy for the fiscal year, of which 99% is believed to be collectible, was $200,000.

3. Taxes collected were $150,000.

4. A short term loan of $15,000 was made to the special revenue fund.

5. Orders for supplies were placed in the amount of $18,000.

6. The items ordered in transaction 5 were received. Actual cost was $18,150, and vouchers for that amount were prepared.

7. Materials were acquired from the stores fund (an internal service fund) in the amount of $800 (without encumbrance).

8. A $5,000 payment (transfer) was made to the debt service fund.

9. A cash payment of $15,000 was made for the purchase of equipment.

10. Licenses were collected in the amount of $3,000.

11. The balance of taxes receivable became delinquent.

12. Delinquent taxes of $30,000 were collected before year end. The remaining net realizable value of delinquent taxes is expected to be collected uniformly over the first four months of the next fiscal year.

prepare the journal entries required to record the following transactions in the gen 579615

General fund journal entries

Prepare the journal entries required to record the following transactions in the general fund of Rochester Township.

1. Borrowed $75,000 by issuing six month tax anticipation notes.

2. Ordered equipment with an estimated cost of $33,000.

3. Received the equipment along with an invoice for its actual cost, $33,250.

4. Transferred $200,000 of general fund resources to a debt service fund.

5. On January 1, the township levied property taxes of $1,000,000. The township expects to collect all except $100,000 by the end of the fiscal year or within not more than 60 days thereafter. Of the remaining $100,000, half is expected to prove uncollectible.

6. The township received a $100,000 restricted grant for certain library programs from another unit of government.

The grant will be accounted for in the general fund.

7. The township incurred $75,000 of expenditures for the programs covered by the library grant.

general obligation bonds with a par value of 750 000 are issued at 769 000 to financ 579616

Governmental fund journal entries

For each of the following transactions, note the fund(s) affected, and prepare appropriate journal entries.

1. General obligation bonds with a par value of $750,000 are issued at $769,000 to finance construction of a government office building.

2. A Community Block Development Grant in the amount of $450,000 is awarded for residential services within a city.

3. Upon approval of a new town band shell, the general fund transfers $500,000 to create a new fund.

4. A wealthy citizen donates $10,000,000 for city park maintenance. The principal cannot be spent.

5. Automobiles and vans for general governmental use are purchased for $375,000.

6. General fixed assets with an original cost of $300,000 sold for $30,000 at the end of their useful life.

7. Sold equipment at the end of its expected useful life. The equipment had no expected residual value when acquired (at a cost of $13,000), but it sold for $1,200.

8. The general fund transfers $50,000 for an interest payment on debt. The interest payment is made.

determine the village rsquo s general fund net assets that will appear on the govern 579617

Governmental fund reconciliation to total net assets

The postclosing trial balance for the Village of Alantown general fund at June 30, 2011, shows the following ledger account balances:

Debits

Cash

$410,000

Investments

300,000

Tax receivable—delinquent

150,000

Accounts receivable

30,000

Supplies inventory

60,000

Total debits

$950,000

Credits

$ 10,000

Allowances for uncollectible taxes—delinquent

Vouchers payable

140,000

Deferred revenue

40,000

Note payable (short term)

150,000

Fund balance—committed

90,000

Fund balance—unassigned

520,000

Total credits

$950,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. The village owns general fixed assets with a historical cost of $100,000 and accumulated depreciation totaling $65,000.

2. General long term debt recorded in the internal debt records is $100,000. This was recorded as an other financing source in the general fund.

3. A capital lease payable in the amount of $75,000 is noted in the internal debt records. This was recorded as an other financing source in the general fund.

4. Revenues reported as deferred on the fund balance sheet using the 60 day criteria are recognized as revenue in the government wide statement.

REQUIRED: Determine the village’s general fund net assets that will appear on the government wide statement of net assets.

determine the city rsquo s change in net assets of governmental activities that will 579618

Governmental fund reconciliation to total net assets

The following data are available from the City of Boulder’s financial records on September 30, 2011:

a. The net change in fund balance—total governmental funds for the city is $1,408,950.

b. The city purchased general fixed assets at a historical cost of $225,000 during the year. No depreciation is recorded in the year of purchase.

c. Grants receivable in the amount of $165,000 are recorded as deferred revenue in the fund statements but would be recognized as revenue under accrual accounting.

d. A capital lease payable in the amount of $75,000 has been recorded as expenditure in the general fund. The related long term debt at year end is $55,000.

e. General long term debt in the amount of $350,000 has been issued and recorded in the general fund.

REQUIRED: Determine the city’s change in net assets of governmental activities that will appear in the government wide statements.

what church policies should be changed to improve internal control 579427

The board of trustees of a local church is concerned about the internal accounting controls for the offering collections made at weekly services. The trustees ask you to serve on a three person audit team with the internal auditor of a local college and a CPA who has just joined the church.

At a meeting of the audit team and the board of trustees you learn the following.

1. The church’s board of trustees has delegated responsibility for the financial management and audit of the financial records to the finance committee.This group prepares the annual budget and approves major disbursements. It is not involved in collections or record keeping. No audit has been made in recent years because the same trusted employee has kept church records and served as financial secretary for 15 years. The church does not carry any fidelity insurance.

2. The collection at the weekly service is taken by a team of ushers who volunteer to serve one month. The ushers take the collection plates to a basement office at the rear of the church.

They hand their plates to the head usher and return to the church service. After all plates have been turned in, the head usher counts the cash received. The head usher then places the cash in the church safe along with a notation of the amount counted. The head usher volunteers to serve for 3 months.

3. The next morning the financial secretary opens the safe and recounts the collection. The secretary withholds $150–$200 in cash, depending on the cash expenditures expected for the week, and deposits the remainder of the collections in the bank.To facilitate the deposit, church members who contribute by check are asked to make their checks payable to “Cash.”

4. Each month, the financial secretary reconciles the bank statement and submits a copy of the reconciliation to the board of trustees. The reconciliations have rarely contained any bank errors and have never shown any errors per books.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal accounting control over the handling of collections.

(b) List the improvements in internal control procedures that you plan to make at the next meeting of the audit team for (1) the ushers, (2) the head usher, (3) the financial secretary, and (4) the finance committee.

(c) What church policies should be changed to improve internal control?

who will suffer negative effects if you do not comply with gena schmitt rsquo s inst 579429

You are the assistant controller in charge of general ledger accounting at Riverside Bottling Company.Your company has a large loan from an insurance company. The loan agreement requires that the company’s cash account balance be maintained at $200,000 or more, as reported monthly.

At June 30 the cash balance is $80,000, which you report to Gena Schmitt, the financial vice president. Gena excitedly instructs you to keep the cash receipts book open for one additional day for purposes of the June 30 report to the insurance company. Gena says, “If we don’t get that cash balance over $200,000, we’ll default on our loan agreement.They could close us down, put us all out of our jobs!” Gena continues, “I talked to Oconto Distributors (one of Riverside’s largest customers) this morning.They said they sent us a check for $150,000 yesterday.We should receive it tomorrow. If we include just that one check in our cash balance, we’ll be in the clear. It’s in the mail!”

Instructions

(a) Who will suffer negative effects if you do not comply with Gena Schmitt’s instructions? Who will suffer if you do comply?

(b) What are the ethical considerations in this case?

(c) What alternatives do you have?

prepare the journal entries for the transactions 579434

The following selected transactions relate to Falcetto Company.

Mar. 1

Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Potter Company, terms 2/10, n/30.

11

Received payment in full from Potter Company for balance due.

12

Accepted Juno Company’s $20,000, 6 month, 12% note for balance due.

13

Made Falcetto Company credit card sales for $13,200.

15

Made Visa credit card sales totaling $6,700. A 3% service fee is charged by Visa.

Apr. 11

Sold accounts receivable of $8,000 to Harcot Factor. Harcot Factor assesses a service charge of 2% of the amount of receivables sold.

13

Received collections of $8,200 on Falcetto Company credit card sales and added finance charges of 1.5% to the remaining balances.

May 10

Wrote off as uncollectible $16,000 of accounts receivable. Falcetto uses the percentage of sales basis to estimate bad debts.

June 30

Credit sales recorded during the first 6 months total $2,000,000.The bad debt percentage is 1% of credit sales. At June 30, the balance in the allowance account is $3,500.

July 16

One of the accounts receivable written off in May was from J. Simon, who pays the amount due, $4,000, in full.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries for the transactions.

blinka retailers accepted 50 000 of citibank visa credit card charges for merchandis 579445

Blinka Retailers accepted $50,000 of Citibank Visa credit card charges for merchandise sold on July 1. Citibank charges 4% for its credit card use.The entry to record this transaction by Blinka Retailers will include a credit to Sales of $50,000 and a debit(s) to:

a. Cash

$48,000

and Service Charge Expense

2,000

b. Accounts Receivable

$48,000

and Service Charge Expense

$2,000

c. Cash

$50,000

d. Accounts Receivable

$50,000

foti co accepts a 1 000 3 month 12 promissory note in settlement of an account with 579446

Foti Co. accepts a $1,000, 3 month, 12% promissory note in settlement of an account with Bartelt Co. The entry to record this transaction is as follows.

a. Notes Receivable

1,030

Accounts Receivable

1,030

b. Notes Receivable

1,000

Accounts Receivable

1,000

c. Notes Receivable

1,000

Sales

1,000

d. Notes Receivable

1,020

Accounts Receivable

1,020

ginter co holds kolar inc rsquo s 10 000 120 day 9 note the entry made by ginter co 579447

Ginter Co. holds Kolar Inc.’s $10,000, 120 day, 9% note. The entry made by Ginter Co. when the note is ollected, assuming no interest has been previously accrued, is:

a. Cash

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,300

b. Cash

10,000

Notes Receivable

10,000

c. Accounts Receivable

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Revenue

300

d. Cash

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Revenue

300

prepare journal entries for the transactions above 579480

Presented below are selected transactions of Pale Force Company. Pale Force sells in large quantities to other companies and also sells its product in a small retail outlet.

March 1

Sold merchandise on account to CC Company for $3,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

3

CC Company returned merchandise worth $500 to Pale Force.

9

Pale Force collected the amount due from CC Company from the March 1 sale.

15

Pale Force sold merchandise for $400 in its retail outlet.The customer used his Pale Force credit card.

31

Pale Force added 1.5% monthly interest to the customer’s credit card balance.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries for the transactions above.

prepare the entries on pierson co rsquo s books related to the transactions that occ 579481

Presented below are two independent situations.

(a) On January 6, Arneson Co. sells merchandise on account to Cortez Inc. for $9,000, terms 2/10, n/30. On January 16, Cortez Inc. pays the amount due. Prepare the entries on Arneson’s books to record the sale and related collection.

(b) On January 10, Mary Dawes uses her Pierson Co. credit card to purchase merchandise from Pierson Co. for $9,000. On February 10, Dawes is billed for the amount due of $9,000. On February 12, Dawes pays $5,000 on the balance due. On March 10, Dawes is billed for the amount due, including interest at 2% per month on the unpaid balance as of February 12.

Prepare the entries on Pierson Co.’s books related to the transactions that occurred on January 10, February 12, and March 10.

if allowance for doubtful accounts has a debit balance of 200 in the trial balance j 579482

The ledger of Hixson Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $120,000, Sales $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $30,000.

Instructions

(a) If Hixson uses the direct write off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Hixson determines that Fell’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.

(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.

(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.

prepare the adjusting entry at march 31 to record bad debts expense 579483

Ingles Company has accounts receivable of $93,100 at March 31. An analysis of the accounts shows the information on the page.

Month of Sale

Balance, March 31

March

$60,000

February

17,600

January

8,500

Prior to January

7,000

$93,100

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,200 prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company’s estimate of bad debts is as follows.

Estimated Percentage

Age of Accounts

Uncollectible

1–30 days

2.0%

31–60 days

5.0%

61–90 days

30.0%

Over 90 days

50.0%

Instructions

(a) Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31 to record bad debts expense.

indicate the statement presentation of the financing charges and the credit card ser 579488

Topeka Stores accepts both its own and national credit cards. During the year the following selected summary transactions occurred.

Jan. 15

Made Topeka credit card sales totaling $18,000.(There were no balances prior to January 15.)

20

Made Visa credit card sales (service charge fee 2%) totaling $4,300.

Feb. 10

Collected $10,000 on Topeka credit card sales.

15

Added finance charges of 1% to Topeka credit card balance.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for Topeka Stores.

(b) Indicate the statement presentation of the financing charges and the credit card service charge expense for Topeka Stores.

record the collection of the givens note at its maturity in 2011 579489

Orosco Supply Co. has the following transactions related to notes receivable during the last 2 months of 2010.

Nov. 1

Loaned $15,000 cash to Sally Givens on a 1 year, 10% note.

Dec. 11

Sold goods to John Countryman, Inc., receiving a $6,750, 90 day, 8% note.

16

Received a $4,000, 6 month, 9% note in exchange for Bob Reber’s outstanding accounts receivable.

31

Accrued interest revenue on all notes receivable.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for Orosco Supply Co.

(b) Record the collection of the Givens note at its maturity in 2011.

prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2010 assuming that an agin 579493

At December 31, 2009, Leis Co. reported the following information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$960,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

80,000

During 2010, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1. Sales on account

$3,200,000

2. Sales returns and allowances

50,000

3. Collections of accounts receivable

2,810,000

4. Write offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

90,000

5. Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

24,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions.Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.

(b) Enter the January 1, 2010, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2010, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that expected bad debts are $115,000.

(d) Compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2010.

what type of account is allowance for doubtful accounts how does it affect how accou 579495

At December 31, 2010, the trial balance of Worcester Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.

Debits

Credits

Accounts Receivable

$385,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 2,000

Sales

950,000

Instructions

(a) Based on the information given, which method of accounting for bad debts is Worcester Company using—the direct write off method or the allowance method? How can you tell?

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2010, for bad debts expense under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) An aging schedule indicates that $11,750 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(2) The company estimates that 1% of sales will be uncollectible.

(c) Repeat part (b) assuming that instead of a credit balance there is an $2,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(d) During the next month, January 2011, a $3,000 account receivable is written off as uncollectible.

Prepare the journal entry to record the write off.

(e) Repeat part (d) assuming that Worcester uses the direct write off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.

(f) What type of account is Allowance for Doubtful Accounts? How does it affect how accounts receivable is reported on the balance sheet at the end of the accounting period?

enter the balances at october 1 in the receivable accounts post the entries to all o 579496

Mendosa Company closes its books monthly. On September 30, selected ledger account balances are:

Notes Receivable

$33,000

Interest Receivable

170

Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face

Term

Interest

Aug. 16

Chang Inc.

$ 8,000

60 days

8%

Aug. 25

Hughey Co.

9,000

60 days

10%

Sept. 30

Skinner Corp.

16,000

6 months

9%

Interest is computed using a 360 day year. During October, the following transactions were completed.

Oct. 7

Made sales of $6,900 on Mendosa credit cards.

12

Made sales of $900 on MasterCard credit cards.The credit card service charge is 3%.

15

Added $460 to Mendosa customer balance for finance charges on unpaid balances.

15

Received payment in full from Chang Inc. on the amount due.

24

Received notice that the Hughey note has been dishonored. (Assume that Hughey is expected to pay in the future.)

Instructions

(a) Journalize the October transactions and the October 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable.

(b) Enter the balances at October 1 in the receivable accounts. Post the entries to all of the receivable accounts.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at October 31.

on january 1 2010 kloppenberg company had accounts receivable 139 000 notes receivab 579497

On January 1, 2010, Kloppenberg Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $25,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200.The note receivable is from Sara Rogers Company. It is a 4 month, 12% note dated December 31, 2009. Kloppenberg Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5

Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Dedonder Company, terms n/15.

20

Accepted Dedonder Company’s $20,000, 3 month, 9% note for balance due.

Feb. 18

Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Ludwig Company and accepted Ludwig’s $8,000, 6 month, 9% note for the amount due.

Apr. 20

Collected Dedonder Company note in full.

30

Received payment in full from Sara Rogers Company on the amount due.

May 25

Accepted Jenks Inc.’s $4,000, 3 month, 7% note in settlement of a past due balance on account.

Aug. 18

Received payment in full from Ludwig Company on note due.

25

The Jenks Inc. note was dishonored. Jenks Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.

Sept. 1

Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Lena Torme Company and accepted a $12,000, 6 month, 10% note for the amount due.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2010 assuming that an agin 579498

At December 31, 2009, Dill Imports reported the following information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$250,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

15,000

During 2010, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1. Sales on account

$2,400,000

2. Sales returns and allowances

45,000

3. Collections of accounts receivable

2,250,000

4. Write offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

12,000

5. Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

3,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.

(b) Enter the January 1, 2010, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. Post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2010, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that estimated bad debts are $22,000.

(d) Compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year 2010.

what is the weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense 579499

Information related to Bee Company for 2010 is summarized below.

Total credit sales

$1,100,000

Accounts receivable at December 31

369,000

Bad debts written off

22,150

Instructions

(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Bee Company report if it uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts?

(b) Assume that Bee Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense to be 2% of credit sales. What amount of bad debts expense will Bee record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $3,000?

(c) Assume that Bee Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense based on 6% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will Bee Company record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $4,000?

(d) Assume the same facts as in (c), except that there is a $2,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Bee record?

(e) What is the weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense?

what are the advantages of using the allowance method in accounting for uncollectibl 579500

At December 31, 2010, the trial balance of Liquid Snake Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.

Debits

Credits

Accounts Receivable

$250,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 1,100

Sales

600,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2010, to record bad debts expense under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,500 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(2) The company estimates that 2% of sales will be uncollectible.

(b) Repeat part (a) assuming that instead of a credit balance, there is a $1,100 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(c) During the next month, January 2011, a $3,200 account receivable is written off as uncollectible.

Prepare the journal entry to record the write off.

(d) Repeat part (c) assuming that Liquid Snake Company uses the direct write off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.

(e) What are the advantages of using the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts as compared to the direct write off method?

indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak in 579402

Listed below are five procedures followed by The Beat Company.

1. Several individuals operate the cash register using the same register drawer.

2. A monthly bank reconciliation is prepared by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.

3. Ellen May writes checks and also records cash payment journal entries.

4. One individual orders inventory, while a different individual authorizes payments.

5. Unnumbered sales invoices from credit sales are forwarded to the accounting department every four weeks for recording.

Instructions

Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control.

If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated. Use the table below.

Procedure

IC Good or Weak?

Related Internal Control Principle

1

2

3

4

5

Q

if it is an example of good internal control indicate which internal control princip 579403

Listed below are five procedures followed by Collins Company.

1. Employees are required to take vacations.

2. Any member of the sales department can approve credit sales.

3. Jethro Bodine ships goods to customers, bills customers, and receives payment from customers.

4. Total cash receipts are compared to bank deposits daily by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.

5. Time clocks are used for recording time worked by employees.

Instructions Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control.

If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated. Use the table below.

Procedure

IC Good or Weak?

Related Internal Control Principle

1

2

3

4

5

lincolnville company uses an imprest petty cash system the fund was established on m 579405

Lincolnville Company uses an imprest petty cash system. The fund was established on March 1 with a balance of $100. During March the following petty cash receipts were found in the petty cash box.

Receipt

Date

For

Amount

5 Mar

$1

Stamp Inventory

$39

7

2

Freight out

21

9

3

Miscellaneous Expense

6

11

4

Travel Expense

24

14

5

Miscellaneous Expense

5

The fund was replenished on March 15 when the fund contained $3 in cash. On March 20, the amount in the fund was increased to $150.

Instructions

Journalize the entries in March that pertain to the operation of the petty cash fund.

prepare a correct bank reconciliation 579406

Anna Pelo is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31.Anna’s reconciliation is as follows.

Cash balance per bank

$3,560.20

Add: NSF check

690.00

Less: Bank service charge

25.00

Adjusted balance per bank

$4,225.20

Cash balance per books

$3,875.20

Less: Deposits in transit

530.00

Add: Outstanding checks

930.00

Adjusted balance per books

$4,275.20

Instructions

(a) Prepare a correct bank reconciliation.

(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.

on april 30 the bank reconciliation of galena company shows three outstanding checks 579407

On April 30, the bank reconciliation of Galena Company shows three outstanding checks: no. 254, $650, no. 255, $820, and no. 257, $410.The May bank statement and the May cash payments journal show the following.

Bank Statement
Checks Paid

Date

Check No.

Amount

5/4

254

650

5/2

257

410

5/17

258

159

5/12

259

275

5/20

261

500

5/29

263

480

5/30

262

750

Cash Payments Journal
Checks Issued

Date

Check No.

Amount

5/2

258

159

5/5

259

275

5/10

260

890

5/15

261

500

5/22

262

750

5/24

263

480

5/29

264

560

Instructions

Using step 2 in the reconciliation procedure, list the outstanding checks at May 31.

prepare the adjusting entries at september 30 assuming 1 the nsf check was from a cu 579409

The information below relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Robertson Company.

Balance September 1—$17,150; Cash deposited—$64,000.

Balance September 30—$17,404; Checks written—$63,746.

The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,422 on September 30 and the following memoranda.

Credits

Debits

Collection of $1,500 note plus interest $30

$1,530

NSF check: J. E. Hoover

$425

Interest earned on checking account

$45

Safety deposit box rent

$65

At September 30, deposits in transit were $4,450, and outstanding checks totaled $2,383.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.

the cash records of givens company show the following four situations 579410

The cash records of Givens Company show the following four situations.

1. The June 30 bank reconciliation indicated that deposits in transit total $720. During July the general ledger account Cash shows deposits of $15,750, but the bank statement indicates that only $15,600 in deposits were received during the month.

2. The June 30 bank reconciliation also reported outstanding checks of $680. During the month of July, Givens Company books show that $17,200 of checks were issued.The bank statement showed that $16,400 of checks cleared the bank in July.

3. In September, deposits per the bank statement totaled $26,700, deposits per books were $25,400, and deposits in transit at September 30 were $2,100.

4. In September, cash disbursements per books were $23,700, checks clearing the bank were $25,000, and outstanding checks at September 30 were $2,100.

There were no bank debit or credit memoranda. No errors were made by either the bank or Givens Company.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) In situation (1), what were the deposits in transit at July 31?

(b) In situation (2), what were the outstanding checks at July 31?

(c) In situation (3), what were the deposits in transit at August 31?

(d) In situation (4), what were the outstanding checks at August 31?

what amount should lipkus report as ldquo cash and cash equivalents rdquo on its bal 579411

Lipkus Company has recorded the following items in its financial records.

Cash in bank

$ 47,000

Cash in plant expansion fund

100,000

Cash on hand

12,000

Highly liquid investments

34,000

Petty cash

500

Receivables from customers

89,000

Stock investments

61,000

The cash in bank is subject to a compensating balance of $5,000. The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased.The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months.The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.

Instructions

(a) What amount should Lipkus report as “Cash and cash equivalents” on its balance sheet?

(b) Where should the items not included in part (a) be reported on the balance sheet?

(c) What disclosures should Lipkus make in its financial statements concerning “cash and cash equivalents”?

identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements 579412

Luby Office Supply Company recently changed its system of internal control over cash disbursements.The system includes the following features.

Instead of being unnumbered and manually prepared, all checks must now be pren umbered and written by using the new checkwriting machine purchased by the company. Before a check can be issued, each invoice must have the approval of Sally Morgan, the purchasing agent, and John Countryman, the receiving department supervisor. Checks must be signed by either AnnLynn, the treasurer, or Bob Skabo, the assistant treasurer. Before signing a check, the signer is expected to compare the amount of the check with the amount on the invoice.

After signing a check, the signer stamps the invoice PAID and inserts within the stamp, the date, check number, and amount of the check.The “paid” invoice is then sent to the accounting department for recording. Blank checks are stored in a safe in the treasurer’s office. The combination to the safe is known only by the treasurer and assistant treasurer. Each month, the bank statement is reconciled with the bank balance per books by the assistant chief accountant. All employees who handle or account for cash are bonded.

Instructions

Identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements of Luby Office Supply Company.

what internal control features exist in a petty cash fund 579413

Winningham Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. The following transactions occurred over a 2 month period.

July 1

Established petty cash fund by writing a check on Cubs Bank for $200.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $196.00. On this date the fund consisted of $4.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $94.00, postage expense $42.40, entertainment expense $46.60, and miscellaneous expense $11.20.

31

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $192.00. At this date, the fund consisted of $8.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $82.10, charitable contributions expense $45.00, postage expense $25.50, and miscellaneous expense $39.40.

Aug. 15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $187.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $13.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $75.60, entertainment expense $43.00, postage expense $33.00, and miscellaneous expense $37.00.

16

Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $300 by writing a check for $100.

31

Replenished petty cash fund by writing a check for $284.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $16 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: postage expense $140.00, travel expense $95.60, and freight out $47.10.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.

(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.

(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?

prepare the necessary adjusting entries for logan company at may 31 2010 579414

On May 31, 2010, James Logan Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50.

The bank statement from Farmers State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,404.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.

2. Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank.The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Logan Company for the correct amount.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $576.25. Deposits in transit were $1,916.15.

4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Barry Trest, on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Logan Company for $658.

5. A $2,500 note receivable was collected by the bank for Logan Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.

6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Bridgetown Company to Tom Lujak for $800 that was incorrectly charged to Logan Company by the bank.

7. On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Sandy Grifton, a customer, to Logan Company on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2010.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Logan Company at May 31, 2010.

prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation hint the correction of any 579415

The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Backhaus Company at November 30, 2010, was as follows.

BACKHAUS COMPANY
Bank Reconciliation
November 30, 2010

Cash balance per bank

$14,367.90

Add: Deposits in transit

2,530.20

16,898.10

Less: Outstanding checks

Check Number

Check Amount

3451

$2,260.40

3470

720.10

3471

844.50

3472

1,426.80

3474

1,050.00

6,301.80

$10,596.30

The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at November 30.

The December bank statement showed the following checks and deposits.

Checks

Deposits

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

12 1

3451

$ 2,260.40

12 1

$ 2,530.20

12 2

3471

844.50

12 4

1,211.60

12 7

3472

1,426.80

12 8

2,365.10

12 4

3475

1,640.70

12 16

2,672.70

12 8

3476

1,300.00

12 21

2,945.00

12 10

3477

2,130.00

12 26

2,567.30

12 15

3479

3,080.00

12 29

2,836.00

12 27

3480

600.00

12 30

1,025.00

12 30

3482

475.50

Total

$18,152.90

12 29

3483

1,140.00

12 31

3485

540.80

Total

$15,438.70

The cash records per books for December showed the following.

Cash Payments Journal

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Number

Amount

12 1

3475

$1,640.70

12 20

3482

$ 475.50

12 2

3476

1,300.00

12 22

3483

1,140.00

12 2

3477

2,130.00

12 23

3484

798.00

12 4

3478

621.30

12 24

3485

450.80

12 8

3479

3,080.00

12 30

3486

1,889.50

12 10

3480

600.00

Total

$14,933.20

12 17

3481

807.40

Cash Receipts Journal

Date

Amount

12 3

$ 1,211.60

12 7

2,365.10

12 15

2,672.70

12 20

2,954.00

12 25

2,567.30

12 28

2,836.00

12 30

1,025.00

12 31

1,690.40

Total

$17,322.10

The bank statement contained two memoranda:

1. A credit of $4,145 for the collection of a $4,000 note for Backhaus Company plus interest of $160 and less a collection fee of $15. Backhaus Company has not accrued any interest on the note.

2. A debit of $572.80 for an NSF check written by D. Chagnon, a customer.At December 31, the check had not been redeposited in the bank.

At December 31 the cash balance per books was $12,485.20, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $20,154.30. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Backhaus Company.

Instructions

(a) Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure, prepare a bank reconciliation at December 31.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation. (Hint:The correction of any errors pertaining to recording checks should be made to Accounts Payable. The correction of any errors relating to recording cash receipts should be made to Accounts Receivable.)

journalize the adjusting entries to be made by haverman company at july 31 2010 assu 579416

Haverman Company maintains a checking account at the Commerce Bank. At July 31, selected data from the ledger balance and the bank statement are shown below.

Cash in Bank

Per Books

Per Bank

Balance, July 1

$17,600

$16,800

July receipts

81,400

July credits

82,470

July disbursements

77,150

July debits

74,756

Balance, July 31

$21,850

$24,514

Analysis of the bank data reveals that the credits consist of $79,000 of July deposits and a credit memorandum of $3,470 for the collection of a $3,400 note plus interest revenue of $70.The July debits per bank consist of checks cleared $74,700 and a debit memorandum of $56 for printing additional company checks.

You also discover the following errors involving July checks: (1) A check for $230 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in July was journalized and posted as $320. (2) A salary check to an employee for $255 was recorded by the bank for $155.

The June 30 bank reconciliation contained only two reconciling items: deposits in transit $7,000 and outstanding checks of $6,200.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at July 31.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries to be made by Haverman Company at July 31, 2010.Assume that interest on the note has not been accrued.

identify as many internal control weaknesses as you can in this scenario and suggest 579417

Emporia Middle School wants to raise money for a new sound system for its auditorium.

The primary fund raising event is a dance at which the famous disc jockey Obnoxious Ed will play classic and not so classic dance tunes.Tom Wickman, the music and theater instructor, has been given the responsibility for coordinating the fund raising efforts. This is Tom’s first experience with fund raising. He decides to put the eighth grade choir in charge of the event; he will be a relatively passive observer.

Tom had 500 unnumbered tickets printed for the dance. He left the tickets in a box on his desk and told the choir students to take as many tickets as they thought they could sell for $5 each. In order to ensure that no extra tickets would be floating around, he told them to dispose of any unsold tickets.When the students received payment for the tickets, they were to bring the cash back to Tom, and he would put it in a locked box in his desk drawer.

Some of the students were responsible for decorating the gymnasium for the dance. Tom gave each of them a key to the money box and told them that if they took money out to purchase materials, they should put a note in the box saying how much they took and what it was used for.

After 2 weeks the money box appeared to be getting full, so Tom asked Luke Gilmor to count the money, prepare a deposit slip, and deposit the money in a bank account Tom had opened. The day of the dance, Tom wrote a check from the account to pay the DJ. Obnoxious Ed, however, said that he accepted only cash and did not give receipts. So Tom took $200 out of thecash box and gave it to Ed.At the dance Tom had Mel Harris working at the entrance to the gymnasium, collecting tickets from students and selling tickets to those who had not prepurchased them.Tom estimated that 400 students attended the dance.

The following day Tom closed out the bank account, which had $250 in it, and gave that amount plus the $180 in the cash box to Principal Foran. Principal Foran seemed surprised that, after generating roughly $2,000 in sales, the dance netted only $430 in cash. Tom did not know how to respond.

Instructions

Identify as many internal control weaknesses as you can in this scenario, and suggest how each could be addressed.

identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts 579418

Discount Theater is located in the Mishawaka Mall. A cashier’s booth is located near the entrance to the theater.Three cashiers are employed. One works from 1–5 P.M., another from 5–9 P.M.The shifts are rotated among the three cashiers.The cashiers receive cash from customers and operate a machine that ejects serially numbered tickets.The rolls of tickets are inserted and locked into the machine by the theater manager at the beginning of each cashier’s shift.

After purchasing a ticket, the customer takes the ticket to an usher stationed at the entrance of the theater lobby some 60 feet from the cashier’s booth. The usher tears the ticket in half, admits the customer, and returns the ticket stub to the customer. The other half of the ticket is dropped into a locked box by the usher.

At the end of each cashier’s shift, the theater manager removes the ticket rolls from the machine and makes a cash count. The cash count sheet is initialed by the cashier. At the end of the day, the manager deposits the receipts in total in a bank night deposit vault located in the mall.The manager also sends copies of the deposit slip and the initialed cash count sheets to the theater company treasurer for verification and to the company’s accounting department. Receipts from the first shift are stored in a safe located in the manager’s office.

Instructions

(a) Identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts transactions of the Discount Theater.

(b) If the usher and cashier decide to collaborate to misappropriate cash, what actions might they take?

what internal control features exist in a petty cash fund 579419

Loganberry Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. The following transactions occurred over a 2 month period.

July 1

Established petty cash fund by writing a check on Rock Point Bank for $100.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $96.90. On this date the fund consisted of $3.10 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $51.00, postage xpense $20.50, entertainment expense $23.10, and miscellaneous expense $4.10.

31

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $95.90. At this date, the fund consisted of $4.10 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $43.50, charitable contributions expense $20.00, postage expense $20.10, and miscellaneous expense $12.30.

Aug. 15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $98.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $2.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $40.20, entertainment expense $21.00, postage expense $14.00, and miscellaneous expense $19.80.

16

Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $150 by writing a check for $50.

31

Replenished petty cash fund by writing a check for $137.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $13 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $74.00, entertainment expense $43.20, and postage expense $17.70.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.

(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.

(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?

prepare the necessary adjusting entries for wolverine genetics company at may 31 201 579420

Wolverine Genetics Company of Flint, Michigan, spreads herbicides and applies liquid fertilizer for local farmers. On May 31, 2010, the company’s cash account per its general ledger showed the following balance.

CASH

Date

Explanation

Ref

Debt

Credit

Balance

May 31

Balance

13,287

The bank statement from Flint State Bank on that date showed the following balance.

FLINT STATE BANK

Checks and Debits

Deposits and Credits

Daily Balance

XXX

XXX

5/31 13,332

A comparison of the details on the bank statement with the details in the cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The statement included a debit memo of $35 for the printing of additional company checks.

2. Cash sales of $1,720 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $1,820.The bank credited Wolverine Genetics Company for the correct amount.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $1,225, and deposits in transit were $2,100.

4. On May 18, the company issued check no. 1181 for $911 to G. Fischer, on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Wolverine Genetics Company for $119.

5. A $4,000 note receivable was collected by the bank for Wolverine Genetics Company on May 31 plus $80 interest.The bank charged a collection fee of $25.No interest has been accrued on the note.

6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Carr Company to Henry Ford for $900 that was incorrectly charged to Wolverine Genetics Company by the bank.

7. On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $1,308 for a check issued by Bo Sclembech, a customer, to Wolverine Genetics Company on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2010.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Wolverine Genetics Company at May 31, 2010.

prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation hint the correction of any 579421

The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Chapin Company at October 31, 2010, was as follows.

CHAPIN COMPANY
Bank Reconciliation
October 31, 2010

Cash balance per bank

$6,000

Add: Deposits in transit

842

6,842

Less: Outstanding checks

Check Number

Check Amount

2451

$700

2470

396

2471

464

2472

270

2474

578

2,408

Adjusted cash balance per bank

$4,434

The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at October 31. The November bank statement showed the following checks and deposits:

Bank Statement

Checks

Deposits

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

11 1

2470

$ 396

11 1

$ 842

11 2

2471

464

11 4

666

11 5

2474

578

11 8

545

11 4

2475

903

11 13

1,416

11 8

2476

1,556

11 18

810

11 10

2477

330

11 21

1,624

11 15

2479

980

11 25

1,412

11 18

2480

714

11 28

908

11 27

2481

382

11 30

652

11 30

2483

317

Total

$8,875

11 29

2486

495

Total

$7,115

The cash records per books for November showed the following.

Cash Payments Journal

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Number

Amount

11 1

2475

$ 903

11 20

2483

$ 317

11 2

2476

1,556

11 22

2484

460

11 2

2477

330

11 23

2485

525

11 4

2478

300

11 24

2486

495

11 8

2479

890

11 29

2487

210

11 10

2480

714

11 30

2488

635

11 15

2481

382

Total

$8,067

11 18

2482

350

Cash Receipts Journal

Date

Amount

11 3

$ 666

11 7

545

11 12

1,416

11 17

810

11 20

1,642

11 24

1,412

11 27

908

11 29

652

11 30

1,541

Total

$9,592

The bank statement contained two bank memoranda:

1. A credit of $1,375 for the collection of a $1,300 note for Chapin Company plus interest of

$91 and less a collection fee of $16. Chapin Company has not accrued any interest on the note.

2. A debit for the printing of additional company checks $34.

At November 30, the cash balance per books was $5,958, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $9,100. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Chapin Company.

Instructions

(a) Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure described on page 368, prepare a bank reconciliation at November 30.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation. (Hint:The correction of any errors pertaining to recording checks should be made to Accounts Payable. The correction of any errors relating to recording cash receipts should be made to Accounts Receivable).

journalize the adjusting entries to be made by bummer company at august 31 assume th 579422

Bummer Company’s bank statement from Fifth National Bank at August 31, 2010, shows the information on the page.

Balance,August 1

$11,284

Bank credit memoranda:

August deposits

47,521

Collection of note

Checks cleared in August

46,475

receivable plus $105

Balance,August 31

16,856

interest

$4,505

Interest earned

41

Bank debit memorandum:

Safety deposit box rent

20

A summary of the Cash account in the ledger for August shows: Balance, August 1, $10,959; receipts $50,050; disbursements $47,794; and balance, August 31, $13,215. Analysis reveals that the only reconciling items on the July 31 bank reconciliation were a deposit in transit for $2,600 and outstanding checks of $2,925. The deposit in transit was the first deposit recorded by the bank in August. In addition, you determine that there were two errors involving company checks drawn in August: (1) A check for $340 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in August was journalized and posted for $430. (2) A salary check to an employee for $275 was recorded by the bank for $277.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at August 31.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries to be made by Bummer Company at August 31.Assume that interest on the note has not been accrued by the company.

what principles of internal control were violated in this case 579423

Gazarra Company is a very profitable small business. It has not, however, given much consideration to internal control. For example, in an attempt to keep clerical and office expenses to a minimum, the company has combined the jobs of cashier and bookkeeper. As a result, Johnny Stacatto handles all cash receipts, keeps the accounting records, and prepares the monthly bank reconciliations.

The balance per the bank statement on October 31, 2010, was $15,453. Outstanding checks were: no. 62 for $107.74, no. 183 for $127.50, no. 284 for $215.26, no. 862 for $162.10, no. 863 for $192.78, and no. 864 for $140.49. Included with the statement was a credit memorandum of $340 indicating the collection of a note receivable for Gazarra Company by the bank on October 25.

This memorandum has not been recorded by Gazarra Company.

The company’s ledger showed one cash account with a balance of $18,608.81. The balance included undeposited cash on hand. Because of the lack of internal controls, Stacatto took for personal use all of the undeposited receipts in excess of $3,226.18. He then prepared the following bank reconciliation in an effort to conceal his theft of cash.

BANK RECONCILIATION

Cash balance per books, October 31

$18,608.81

Add: Outstanding checks

No. 862

$162.10

No. 863

192.78

No. 864

140.49

410.31

19,019.18

Less: Undeposited receipts

3,226.18

Unadjusted balance per bank, October 31

15,793.00

Less: Bank credit memorandum

340.00

Cash balance per bank statement, October 31

$15,453.00

Instructions

(a) Prepare a correct bank reconciliation. (Hint: Deduct the amount of the theft from the adjusted balance per books.)

(b) Indicate the three ways that Stacatto attempted to conceal the theft and the dollar amount pertaining to each method.

(c) What principles of internal control were violated in this case?

describe limitations of financial statements that might mean that the market value o 579310

Limitations on Financial Statements Markus O”Realius is considering the purchase of Caesar Company. The potential seller has provided Markus with a copy of the business”s financial statements for the last three years. The financial statements reveal total assets of $350,000 and total liabilities of $150,000. The seller is asking $300,000 for the business. Markus believes that the business is worth only about $200,000, the amount of owners” equity reported on the balance sheet. He has asked your assistance in determining a price to offer for the business.

Required Write a memo to Markus explaining why he should not interpret the balance sheet as an accurate measure of the value of the business. Describe limitations of financial statements that might mean that the market value of the business was higher (or lower) than the financial statement amounts.

limits ltd had the following financial statements for the fiscal year ending decembe 579311

Limitations of Financial Statements Limits, Ltd. had the following financial statements for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2004 (the statement of stockholders” equity and the statement of cash flows are not shown).

Limits, Ltd.
Income Statement
For the Year Ending December 31, 2004

Sales revenue

$20,000

Operating expenses:

Cost of sales

$1,000

Wages expense

800

Advertising expense

100

Depreciation expense

300

Research and development expense

300

Total operating expense

2,500

Operating income

17,500

Other expenses:

Interest expense

500

Income before taxes

17,000

Income tax

5,100

Net income

$11,900

Limits, Ltd.
Balance Sheet
as of December 31, 2004

Assets

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Cash

$2,300

Accounts payable

$3,000

Accounts receivable

8,000

Wages payable

7,600

Inventory

15,000

Interest payable

900

Total current assets

25,300

Total current liabilities

11,500

Property, plant and equipment:

Notes payable, long term

9,000

Equipment

21,000

Total liabilities

20,500

Accumulated depreciation

8,000

Stockholders” equity:

Buildings

90,000

Owners” investment

9,700

Accumulated depreciation

85,000

Retained earnings

13,100

PP&E

18,000

Total stockholders” equity

22,800

Total liabilities and

Total assets

$43,300

stockholders” equity

$43,300

Required The text lists several limitations of financial statements. Using the financial statements given here, identify as many examples of limitations or items that relate to limitations of financial statements as you can.

how much net income would the company report for november how much total assets and 579312

Excel in Action Listed below are account balances and other data for The Book Wermz at the close of November 30, 2004. Revenue and expense account balances are for the month of November. All amounts are dollars except shares of common stock. The Book Wermz operates as a corporation.

Accounts payable

$6,131.77

Accounts receivable

375

Accumulated depreciation

13,891.82

Cash

12,307.99

Contributed capital100,000.00

100,000,00

Cost of goods sold

30,937.32

Depreciation expense

817.2

Dividends paid

1,500.00

Equipment

57,650.00

Income tax expense

897.45

Interest expense

932.03

Inventory

235,255.06

Notes payable, current portion

1,122.77

Notes payable, long term

120,084.57

Rent expense

1,738.15

Sales

43,312.25

Service revenues

1,566.23

Shares of common stock

1,000

Supplies

2,130.12

Supplies expense

2,411.53

Wages expense

4,697.35

Wages payable

1,150.68

Required Use the account balances to produce an income statement, a statement of stockholders” equity, and a balance sheet for The Book Wermz in a spreadsheet. The financial statements should follow the examples illustrated in Chapter F4. The balance sheet should contain columns for November and October. October 31 balances should be obtained from data provided in the Chapter F3 spreadsheet problem. Enter account titles in column A. Use columns B, C, and D as necessary for amounts. Use the Borders button to produce single and double lines by selecting the cell to be formatted, using the button down arrow to select the proper line type, and clicking on the button. Use the Indent button to indent titles and captions as needed by selecting the cell and clicking on the button. Use the Comma and Currency $ buttons to format amounts by selecting the cell and clicking on the appropriate buttons. The Comma button also formats numbers so that negative amounts appear in parentheses. The first and last amounts in a column of numbers should include dollar signs as illustrated in the chapter. Set column widths by placing the cursor at the right edge of a column header so the Change Width cursor appears. Then click and drag the column to the right or left as needed. Use functions to sum subtotals and totals, = SUM(B5:B8) for example, so the spreadsheet will automatically recalculate any changes in account numbers. To merge adjacent cells for titles, select the cells to be merged and click on the Merge Cells button. Put titles in bold type by selecting the cell containing the title and clicking on the Bold Type button B . Suppose sales for November had been $45,000 and the cash balance at November 30 had been $13,995.74. How much net income would the company report for November? How much total assets and stockholders” equity would it report at November 30?

the following information was reported on the income statement of wagon wheel compan 579314

The following information was reported on the income statement of Wagon Wheel Company.

Sales revenues

$450,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

150,000

Interest expense

30,000

Wagon Wheel”s gross profit and operating income would be

Gross profit

Operating income

a. $300,000

$70,000

b. $250,000

$70,000

c. $250,000

$100,000

d. $100,000

$70,000

prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances 579323

Grider Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

401 Sales

112 Accounts Receivable

414 Sales Discounts

120 Merchandise Inventory

505 Cost of Goods Sold

301 O. Grider, Capital

On April 1 the accounts receivable ledger of Grider Company showed the following balances: Ogden $1,550, Chelsea $1,200, Eggleston Co. $2,900, and Baez $1,800.The April transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.

Apr. 1

The owner,O. Grider, invested additional cash in the business $7,200.

4

Received check for payment of account from Baez less 2% cash discount.

5

Received check for $920 in payment of invoice no. 307 from Eggleston Co.

8

Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $7,245.The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,347.

10

Received check for $600 in payment of invoice no. 309 from Ogden.

11

Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $740.

23

Received check for $1,500 in payment of invoice no. 310 from Eggleston Co.

29

Received check for payment of account from Chelsea.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a six column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal.

(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the April transactions to these accounts.

(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.

insert the beginning balances in the accounts payable control and subsidiary account 579324

Ming Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

201 Accounts Payable

120 Merchandise Inventory

306 T. Ming, Drawing

130 Prepaid Insurance

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

On October 1 the accounts payable ledger of Ming Company showed the following balances: Bovary Company $2,700, Nyman Co. $2,500, Pyron Co. $1,800, and Sims Company $3,700. The October transactions involving the payment of cash were as follows.

Oct. 1

Purchased merchandise, check no. 63, $300.

3

Purchased equipment, check no. 64, $800.

5

Paid Bovary Company balance due of $2,700, less 2% discount, check no. 65, $2,646.

10

Purchased merchandise, check no. 66, $2,250.

15

Paid Pyron Co. balance due of $1,800, check no. 67.

16

T. Ming, the owner, pays his personal insurance premium of $400, check no. 68.

19

Paid Nyman Co. in full for invoice no. 610, $1,600 less 2% cash discount,check no. 69, $1,568.

29

Paid Sims Company in full for invoice no. 264, $2,500, check no. 70.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a four column cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal.

(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Payable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the October transactions to these accounts.

(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances.

the chart of accounts of lopez company includes the following selected accounts 579325

The chart of accounts of Lopez Company includes the following selected accounts

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

120 Merchandise Inventory

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

126 Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

610 Advertising Expense

201 Accounts Payable

In July the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.

July 1

Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $8,000.

2

Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Fritz purchase $400.

3

Made sales to Pinick Company $1,300, and to Wayne Bros. $1,500.

5

Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,200.

8

Received credit on merchandise returned to Moon Company $300.

13

Purchased store supplies from Cress Supply $720.

15

Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $3,600 and from Anton Company $3,300.

16

Made sales to Sager Company $3,450 and to Wayne Bros. $1,570.

18

Received bill for advertising from Lynda Advertisements $600.

21

Sales were made to Pinick Company $310 and to Haddad Company $2,800.

22

Granted allowance to Pinick Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $40.

24

Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,000.

26

Purchased equipment from Cress Supply $900.

28

Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Moon purchase of July 24, $380.

30

Sales were made to Sager Company $5,600.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Accounts Payable Cr., Merchandise Inventory Dr., and Other Accounts Dr.

(b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.)

(c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts

post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers sell merchandise on account to f cone 7 4 579328

The post closing trial balance for Cortez Co. is as follows.

CORTEZ CO.
Post Closing Trial Balance
December 31, 2010

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 41,500

Accounts Receivable

15,000

Notes Receivable

45,000

Merchandise Inventory

23,000

Equipment

6,450

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 1,500

Accounts Payable

43,000

B. Cortez, Capital

86,450

$130,950

$130,950

The subsidiary ledgers contain the following information: (1) accounts receivable— J. Anders $2,500, F. Cone $7,500, T. Dudley $5,000; (2) accounts payable—J. Feeney $10,000, D. Goodman $18,000, and K. Inwood $15,000. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price. The transactions for January 2011 are as follows.

Jan. 3

Sell merchandise to M. Rensing $5,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

5

Purchase merchandise from E.Vietti $2,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

7

Receive a check from T. Dudley $3,500.

11

Pay freight on merchandise purchased $300.

12

Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13

Receive payment in full from M. Rensing.

14

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Issued credit of $300 to J. Anders for returned merchandise.

15

Send K. Inwood a check for $14,850 in full payment of account, discount $150.

17

Purchase merchandise from G. Marley $1,600, terms 2/10, n/30.

18

Pay sales salaries of $2,800 and office salaries $2,000.

20

Give D. Goodman a 60 day note for $18,000 in full payment of account payable.

23

Total cash sales amount to $9,100.

24

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Sell merchandise on account to F. Cone $7,400,terms 1/10, n/30.

27

Send E.Vietti a check for $950.

29

Receive payment on a note of $40,000 from B. Lemke.

30

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Return merchandise of $300 to G. Marley for credit.

Instructions

(a) Open general and subsidiary ledger accounts for the following.

101 Cash

301 B. Cortez, Capital

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

115 Notes Receivable

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

120 Merchandise Inventory

414 Sales Discounts

157 Equipment

505 Cost of Goods Sold

158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

726 Sales Salaries Expense

200 Notes Payable

727 Office Salaries Expense

201 Accounts Payable

729 Rent Expense

(b) Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash payments journal, and a general journal.

(c) Post the appropriate amounts to the general ledger.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2011.

(e) Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with controlling accounts in the general ledger.

journalize the transactions above in a six column cash receipts journal with columns 579329

Kentucky Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

401 Sales

112 Accounts Receivable

414 Sales Discounts

120 Merchandise Inventory

505 Cost of Goods Sold

301 Ken Tucky, Capital

On June 1 the accounts receivable ledger of Kentucky Company showed the following balances:

Moose & Son $3,500, Chris Co. $2,800, Cornell Bros. $2,400, and Marx Co. $2,000.The June transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.

June 1

The owner, Ken Tucky, invested additional cash in the business $12,000.

3

Received check in full from Marx Co. less 2% cash discount.

6

Received check in full from Chris Co. less 2% cash discount.

7

Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $8,700.The cost of the merchandise sold was $5,000.

9

Received check in full from Moose & Son less 2% cash discount.

11

Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $450.

15

Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $6,500.The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,000.

20

Received check in full from Cornell Bros. $2,400.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a six column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal.

(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the June transactions to these accounts.

(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.

prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances 579330

Starr Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

157 Equipment

120 Merchandise Inventory

201 Accounts Payable

130 Prepaid Insurance

306 R. Starr, Drawing

On November 1 the accounts payable ledger of Starr Company showed the following balances:

P. McCartney $4,000, J. Lennon $2,100, G. Harrison $800, and J. Lynne $1,300. The November transactions involving the payment of cash were as follows.

Nov. 1

Purchased merchandise, check no. 11, $950.

3

Purchased store equipment, check no. 12, $1,400.

5

Paid J. Lynne balance due of $1,300, less 1% discount, check no. 13, $1,287.

11

Purchased merchandise, check no. 14, $1,700.

15

Paid G. Harrison balance due of $800, less 3% discount, check no. 15, $776.

16

R. Starr, the owner, withdrew $400 cash for own use, check no. 16.

19

Paid J. Lennon in full for invoice no. 1245, $2,100 less 2% discount, check no. 17, $2,058.

25

Paid premium due on one year insurance policy, check no. 18, $2,400.

30

Paid P. McCartney in full for invoice no. 832, $2,900, check no. 19.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a four column cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal.

(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Payable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the November transactions to these accounts.

(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances.

prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts 579331

The chart of accounts of Dickinson Company includes the following selected accounts.

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

120 Merchandise Inventory

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

126 Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

610 Advertising Expense

201 Accounts Payable

In May the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account except as indicated.The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.

May 2

Purchased merchandise from Older Company $5,000.

3

Received freight bill from Fast Freight on Older purchase $250.

5

Sales were made to May Company $1,300, Coen Bros. $1,800, and Lucy Company $1,000.

8

Purchased merchandise from Wolfe Company $5,400 and Zig Company $3,000.

10

Received credit on merchandise returned to Zig Company $350.

15

Purchased supplies from Michelle’s Supplies $600.

16

Purchased merchandise from Older Company $3,100, and Wolfe Company $4,800.

17

Returned supplies to Michelle’s Supplies, receiving credit $70. (Hint: Credit Supplies.)

18

Received freight bills on May 16 purchases from Fast Freight $325.

20

Returned merchandise to Older Company receiving credit $200.

23

Made sales to Coen Bros. $1,600 and to Lucy Company $2,500.

25

Received bill for advertising from Ole Advertising $620.

26

Granted allowance to Lucy Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $140.

28

Purchased equipment from Michelle’s Supplies $400.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal.

The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Accounts Payable Cr., Merchandise Inventory Dr., and Other Accounts Dr.

(b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.)

(c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.

show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and check marks as 579332

Selected accounts from the chart of accounts of Valente Company are shown below.

101 Cash

201 Accounts Payable

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

120 Merchandise Inventory

414 Sales Discounts

126 Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

140 Land

610 Advertising Expense

145 Buildings

The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price. During October,Valente Company completed the following transactions.

Oct. 2

Purchased merchandise on account from Janet Company $12,000.

4

Sold merchandise on account to Erik Co. $5,600. Invoice no. 204, terms 2/10, n/30.

5

Purchased supplies for cash $60.

7

Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,700.

9

Paid in full the amount owed Janet Company less a 2% discount.

10

Purchased merchandise on account from Arduino Corp. $2,600.

12

Received payment from Erik Co. for invoice no. 204.

13

Returned $150 worth of damaged goods purchased on account from Arduino Corp. on October 10.

14

Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,000.

16

Sold a parcel of land for $20,000 cash, the land’s original cost.

17

Sold merchandise on account to Ed’s Warehouse $3,900, invoice no. 205, terms 2/10, n/30.

18

Purchased merchandise for cash $1,600.

21

Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,000.

23

Paid in full the amount owed Arduino Corp. for the goods kept (no discount).

25

Purchased supplies on account from Paul Martin Co. $190.

25

Sold merchandise on account to David Corp. $3,800, invoice no. 206, terms 2/10, n/30.

25

Received payment from Ed’s Warehouse for invoice no. 205. Purchased for cash a small parcel of land and a building on the land to use as a storage

26

facility. The total cost of $26,000 was allocated $16,000 to the land and $10,000 to the building.

27

Purchased merchandise on account from Mary Co. $6,200.

28

Made cash sales for the week totaling $5,500.

30

Purchased merchandise on account from Janet Company $10,000.

30

Paid advertising bill for the month from the Gazette, $290.

30

Sold merchandise on account to Ed’s Warehouse $3,400, invoice no. 207, terms 2/10, n/30.

Valente Company uses the following journals.

1. Sales journal.

2. Single column purchases journal.

3. Cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable

Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr.

4. Cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr.

5. General journal.

Instructions

Using the selected accounts provided:

(a) Record the October transactions in the appropriate journals.

(b) Foot and crossfoot all special journals.

(c) Show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and check marks as needed in the journals. (Actual posting to ledger accounts is not required.)

presented below are the sales and cash receipts journals for wicked co for its first 579333

Presented below are the sales and cash receipts journals for Wicked Co. for its first month of operations.

SALES JOURNAL

Date

Account Debited

Accounts Receivable Dr.Sales Cr.

Cost of Goods Sold Dr.
Merchandise Inventory Cr.

Feb. 3

C. Lion

4,000

2,400

9

S. Crow

5,000

3,000

12

T. Mann

6,500

3,900

26

W. Oz

5,500

3,300

21,000

12,600

CASH RECEIPTS JOURNAL

Cash
Dr.

Sales
Discounts
Dr.

Accounts
Receivable
Cr.

Sales
Cr.

Other
Accounts
Cr.

Cost of Goods Sold Dr.
Merchandise Inventory Cr.

Date

Account Credited

23,000

Feb. 1

B.Wicked, Capital

23,000

2

4,500

4,500

2,700

13

C. Lion

3,960

40

4,000

18

Merchandise Inventory

120

120

26

S. Crow

5,000

5,000

36,580

40

9,000

4,500

23,120

2,700

In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for February 2010.

Feb. 2

Purchased merchandise on account from J. Garland for $3,600, terms 2/10, n/30.

7

Purchased merchandise on account from B. Lahr for $23,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

9

Paid cash of $980 for purchase of supplies.

12

Paid $3,528 to J. Garland in payment for $3,600 invoice, less 2% discount.

15

Purchased equipment for $5,500 cash.

16

Purchased merchandise on account from D. Gale $1,900, terms 2/10, n/30.

17

Paid $22,770 to B. Lahr in payment of $23,000 invoice, less 1% discount.

20

B.Wicked withdrew cash of $800 from business for personal use.

21

Purchased merchandise on account from Kansas Company for $6,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

28

Paid $1,900 to D. Gale in payment of $1,900 invoice.

Instructions

(a) Open the following accounts in the general ledger.

101 Cash

120 Merchandise Inventory

112 Accounts Receivable

126 Supplies

157 Equipment

401 Sales

158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

414 Sales Discounts

201 Accounts Payable

505 Cost of Goods Sold

301 B.Wicked, Capital

631 Supplies Expense

306 B.Wicked, Drawing

711 Depreciation Expense

(b) Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in a one column purchases journal and the cash payments journal.

(c) Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.

(d) Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.

(e) Prepare a trial balance at February 28, 2010.

(f) Determine that the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

(g) The following adjustments at the end of February are necessary.

(1) A count of supplies indicates that $200 is still on hand.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for February is $150.

Prepare the adjusting entries and then post the adjusting entries to the general ledger.

(h) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at February 28, 2010.

record the january transactions in a sales journal a single column purchases journal 579335

Bluma Co. uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Balances related to both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger for Bluma are indicated in the working papers. Presented below are a series of transactions for Bluma Co. for the month of January. Credit sales terms are 2/10, n/30. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.

Jan. 3

Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $3,100, invoice no. 510, and to J.Forbes $1,800, invoice no. 511.

5

Purchase merchandise from S. Vogel $5,000 and D. Lynch $2,200, terms n/30.

7

Receive checks from S.LaDew $4,000 and B. Garcia $2,000 after discount period has lapsed.

8

Pay freight on merchandise purchased $235.

9

Send checks to S. Hoyt for $9,000 less 2% cash discount, and to D. Omara for $11,000 less 1% cash discount.

9

Issue credit of $300 to J. Forbes for merchandise returned.

10

Summary daily cash sales total $15,500.

11

Sell merchandise on account to R. Dvorak $1,600, invoice no. 512, and to S. LaDew $900, invoice no. 513.

12

Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13

Receive payment in full from B. Richey and J. Forbes less cash discounts.

15

Withdraw $800 cash by M. Bluma for personal use.

15

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

16

Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $18,000, terms 1/10, n/30; S. Hoyt $14,200, terms 2/10, n/30; and S. Vogel $1,500, terms n/30.

17

Pay $400 cash for office supplies.

18

Return $200 of merchandise to S. Hoyt and receive credit.

20

Summary daily cash sales total $20,100.

21

Issue $15,000 note, maturing in 90 days, to R. Moses in payment of balance due.

21

Receive payment in full from S. LaDew less cash discount.

22

Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $2,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Dvorak $1,300, invoice no. 515.

22

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

23

Send checks to D. Omara and S. Hoyt in full payment less cash discounts.

25

Sell merchandise on account to B. Garcia $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Forbes $6,100, invoice no. 517.

27

Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $14,500, terms 1/10, n/30;D. Lynch $1,200, terms n/30; and S. Vogel $5,400, terms n/30.

27

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

28

Pay $200 cash for office supplies.

31

Summary daily cash sales total $21,300.

31

Pay sales salaries $4,300 and office salaries $3,800.

Instructions

(a) Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal as shown on page 313, a cash payments journal as shown on page 318, and a two column general journal.

(b) Post the journals to the general ledger.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2010, in the trial balance columns of the worksheet.

Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.

(1) Office supplies at January 31 total $900.

(2) Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2010.

(3) Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.

(4) Interest of $50 has accrued on the note payable.

(d) Prepare a multiple step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.

(e) Prepare and post adjusting and closing entries.

(f) Prepare a post closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

what control and subsidiary accounts should be included in hughey amp payne manual s 579336

Hughey & Payne is a wholesaler of small appliances and parts. Hughey & Payne is operated by two owners, Rich Hughey and Kristen Payne. In addition, the company has one employee, a repair specialist, who is on a fixed salary. Revenues are earned through the sale of appliances to retailers (approximately 75% of total revenues), appliance parts to do it yourselfers (10%), and the repair of appliances brought to the store (15%). Appliance sales are made on both a credit and cash basis. Customers are billed on prenumbered sales invoices. Credit terms are always net/30 days. All parts sales and repair work are cash only.

Merchandise is purchased on account from the manufacturers of both the appliances and the parts. Practically all suppliers offer cash discounts for prompt payments, and it is company policy to take all discounts. Most cash payments are made by check. Checks are most frequently issued to suppliers, to trucking companies for freight on merchandise purchases, and to newspapers, radio, and TV stations for advertising. All advertising bills are paid as received. Rich and

Kristen each make a monthly drawing in cash for personal living expenses. The salaried repairman is paid twice monthly. Hughey & Payne currently has a manual accounting system.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Identify the special journals that Hughey & Payne should have in its manual system. List the column headings appropriate for each of the special journals.

(b) What control and subsidiary accounts should be included in Hughey & Payne manual system? Why?

barb doane a classmate has a part time bookkeeping job she is concerned about the in 579337

Barb Doane, a classmate, has a part time bookkeeping job. She is concerned about the inefficiencies in journalizing and posting transactions. Jim Houser is the owner of the company where Barb works. In response to numerous complaints from Barb and others, Jim hired two additional bookkeepers a month ago. However, the inefficiencies have continued at an even higher rate.The accounting information system for the company has only a general journal and a general ledger. Jim refuses to install an electronic accounting system.

Instructions

Now that Barb is an expert in manual accounting information systems, she decides to send a letter to Jim Houser explaining (1) why the additional personnel did not help and (2) what changes should be made to improve the efficiency of the accounting department. Write the letter that you think Barb should send.

how might the system be improved to prevent this situation 579338

Roniger Products Company operates three divisions, each with its own manufacturing plant and marketing/sales force. The corporate headquarters and central accounting office are in Roniger, and the plants are in Freeport, Rockport, and Bayport, all within 50 miles of Roniger. Corporate management treats each division as an independent profit center and encourages competition among them. They each have similar but different product lines. As a competitive incentive, bonuses are awarded each year to the employees of the fastest growing and most profitable division. Jose Molina is the manager of Roniger’s centralized computer accounting operation that enters the sales transactions and maintains the accounts receivable for all three divisions. Jose came up in the accounting ranks from the Bayport division where his wife, several relatives, and many friends still work.

As sales documents are entered into the computer, the originating division is identified by code. Most sales documents (95%) are coded, but some (5%) are not coded or are coded incorrectly. As the manager, Jose has instructed the data entry personnel to assign the Bayport code to all uncoded and incorrectly coded sales documents. This is done he says, “in order to expedite processing and to keep the computer files current since they are updated daily.” All receivables and cash collections for all three divisions are handled by Roniger as one subsidiary accounts receivable ledger.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) How might the system be improved to prevent this situation?

journalize the entries required by the reconciliation 579343

Poorten Company’s bank statement for May 2010 shows the following data.

Balance 5/1

$12,650

Balance 5/31

$14,280

Debit memorandum:

Credit memorandum:

NSF check

$175

Collection of note receivable

$505

The cash balance per books at May 31 is $13,319.Your review of the data reveals the following.

1. The NSF check was from Copple Co., a customer.

2. The note collected by the bank was a $500, 3 month, 12% note.The bank charged a $10 collection fee. No interest has been accrued.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 total $2,410.

4. Deposits in transit at May 31 total $1,752.

5. A Poorten Company check for $352, dated May 10, cleared the bank on May 25.The company recorded this check, which was a payment on account, for $325.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at May 31.

(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.

for each procedure explain the weakness in internal control and identify the interna 579400

The following control procedures are used in Benton’s Boutique Shoppe for cash disbursements.

1. The company accountant prepares the bank reconciliation and reports any discrepancies to the owner.

2. The store manager personally approves all payments before signing and issuing checks.

3. Each week, Benton leaves 100 company checks in an unmarked envelope on a shelf behind the cash register.

4. After payment, bills are filed in a paid invoice folder.

5. The company checks are unnumbered.

Instructions

(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control, and identify the internal control principle that is violated.

(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.

write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvemen 579401

At Hutchingson Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by the vendor, and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees.

After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills PAID, files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Hutchingson Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

(b) Write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvement.

use the information provided to prepare a balance sheet for styles unlimited in good 579285

Styles Unlimited reported the following information at January 31.

Accounts payable

$250

Accounts receivable

1,057

Accrued expenses (current)

348

Cash and equivalents

321

Contributed capital319

319

Deferred income taxes (liabilities)

275

Income taxes payable (current)

93

Inventories

734

Long term debt

650

Other current assets

109

Other current liabilities

16

Other long term assets

248

Other long term liabilities

61

Property and equipment, net of depreciation

1,667

Retained earnings, net of adjustments

2,124

Accrued expenses are current liabilities. Deferred income taxes are longterm liabilities.

Use the information provided to prepare a balance sheet for Styles Unlimited in good form.

prepare a classified balance sheet in proper format show land separately use a three 579286

The accounting staff at Marvelous Enterprises prepares monthly financial statements. At the end of April, the company”s ledger accounts have the following balances. All adjusting entries have been made and the next step is to prepare the financial statements. The company has 18,200 shares of stock outstanding.

Accounts payable

$17,000

Land

$45,000

Accounts receivable

14,700

Long term notes payable

33,000

Accumulated depreciation

13,100

Merchandise inventory

12,480

Buildings

50,000

Notes payable, current portion

14,200

Cash

10,360

Patents

3,300

Contributed capital38,770

38,770

Prepaid insurance

1,100

Copyrights and trademarks

5,000

Retained earnings, March 31

8,400

Cost of goods sold

15,050

Sales revenue

26,000

Depreciation expense

1,100

Supplies

3,570

Dividends declared

1,200

Supplies expense

1,300

Income tax expense

1,060

Wage expense

1,500

Insurance expense

550

Wages payable

17,700

Interest expense

900

Prepare a classified balance sheet in proper format. (Show land separately.) Use a three line heading on the statement that includes (1) the name of the company, (2) the name of the statement, and (3) the appropriate date. Explain how you determined the April 30 balance in Retained Earnings.

leave three lines between each category listed for each category write the names of 579287

Jenny didn”t study very hard when she took accounting because she thought she would never use it on the job at Tech Noid Company. Yesterday, after preparing all end of the month adjusting entries, the company”s accountant became ill. The company asked Jenny to finish the job by preparing the financial statements. The owner needs the statements tomorrow to present to his banker. Jenny is having trouble getting the balance sheet to balance.

Tech Noid Company
Balance Sheet
January 31, 2004

Assets

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Inventory

$1,121

Accounts payable

$231

Interest payable

100

Accounts receivable

691

Land

2,200

Wages payable

636

Noncurrent assets:

Long term liabilities:

Buildings and equipment

4,990

7%, 10 year note payable

2,000

Retained earnings

1,398

Accumulated depreciation

531

Stockholders” equity:

Contributed capital4,230

4,230

Cash

124

Total assets

$9,809

Total liabilities and equity

8,443

(a) Help Jenny by making a list of the five account categories that are printed in bold face type on the balance sheet. Leave three lines between each category listed. For each category, write the names of Tech Noid”s accounts that should be reported under it on the balance sheet. (b) Determine the correct balance sheet amounts for:

1. total current assets

2. total noncurrent assets

3. total assets

4. total current liabilities

5. total long term liabilities

6. total stockholders” equity

7. total liabilities and equity

listed below are account balances and other data for hands amp eyes inc a company th 579288

Listed below are account balances and other data for Hands & Eyes, Inc., a company that sells crafts and decorative supplies, for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.

Accounts payable

$41,000

Land

$65,000

Accounts receivable

29,000

Long term investments

46,000

Accumulated depreciation

180,000

Merchandise inventory

79,000

Buildings

430,000

Notes payable, current portion

25,000

Cash

35,000

Notes payable, long term

307,000

Contributed capital315,000

315,000

Prepaid insurance

22,000

Cost of goods sold

130,000

Retained earnings,

Dividends (declared and paid)

22,000

Dec. 31, 2003

19,000

Equipment

262,000

Sales revenue

373,000

General and administrative expenses

98,000

Selling expenses

34,000

Income tax expense

8,000

Supplies

25,000

Income tax payable

22,000

Trademarks

31,000

Interest expense

33,000

Wages payable

36,000

Shares of common stock outstanding:

20,000

Interest payable

31,000

From the data presented above, determine the amount of each of the items that follow. (Hint: Pretax income for the year 2004 $78,000.)

1. Gross profit

2. Operatintg income

3. Net income

4. Earnings per share

5. Current assets

6. Property, plant, and equipment

7. Other assets

8. Total assets

9. Current liabilities

10. Working capital and working capital ratio

11. Total liabilities

12. Retained earnings, December 31, 2004

13. Total stockholders” equity

14. Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

use the format shown below a for each account indicate the financial statement on wh 579290

A list of financial statement items is given below.

1. Accounts receivable

2. Rent payable

3. Retained earnings

4. Cost of sales

5. Prepaid rent

6. Supplies expense

7. Equipment

8. Dividends

9. Depreciation expense

10. Copyrights

11. Accrued liabilities

12. Wages payable

13. Land

14. Notes payable

15. Service revenue

16. Inventory

17. Advertising expense

18. Common stock

Use the format shown below. (a) For each account, indicate the financial statement on which the account would appear. (b) Identify the information provided by the account. The first item is completed as an example:

Item

Financial Statement

Information Provided

1. Accounts receivable

Balance sheet

Cash to be received in the future from prior sales

describe what is meant by the term articulation b what evidence of articulation is t 579291

Listed below are financial statements for the Sunflower Company.

Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2004

Sales revenue

$20,000

Cost of sales

12,000

Gross profit

8,000

Operating expenses

4,000

Selling and administrative expenses

3,000

Net income

$1,000

Statement of Stockholders” Equity
For the Year Ended December 31, 2004

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Total

Balance at December 31, 2003

$5,000

$13,000

$18,000

Common stock issued

2,000

2,000

Net income

1,000

1,000

Dividends

4,000

4,000

Balance at December 31, 2004

$7,000

$10,000

$17,000

Balance Sheet
as of December 31, 2004

Assets:

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Cash

$9,000

Accounts payable

$5,000

Accounts receivable

3,000

Notes payable

8,000

Inventory

2,000

Common stock

7,000

Land

16,000

Retained earnings

10,000

Total$30,000

$30,000

Total

$30,000

(a) Describe what is meant by the term articulation. (b) What evidence of articulation is there in this set of financial statements?

what would be the appropriate behavior for the company president under the circumsta 579295

Ethical Issues in Financial Reporting Flower Childs is a regional sales manager for Green Grow, Inc., a producer of garden supplies. The company”s fiscal year ends on April 30. In mid April, Flower is contacted by the president of Green Grow. He indicates that the company is facing a financial problem. Two years ago, the company borrowed heavily from several banks to buy a competing company and to increase production of its primary products: insecticides and fertilizers. As a part of the loan agreement, Green Grow must maintain a working capital ratio of 1.5 to 1 and earn a net income of at least $2 per share. If the company fails to meet these requirements, as reflected in its annual financial statements, the banks can restrict future credit for the company or require early payment of its loans, potentially forcing the company into bankruptcy.

The president explains that this fiscal year has been a difficult one for Green Grow. Sales have slipped because of increased competition, and the rising prices of chemicals have increased the company”s production costs. The company is in danger of not meeting the loan requirements. The company could be forced to make drastic cuts or to liquidate its assets. The president informs Flower that her job could be in danger. The president asks her to help with the problem by dating all sales invoices that clear her office during the first half of May as though the sales had been made in April. May is a month of heavy sales volume for the company as retail stores stock up for the coming season. The president believes that the added sales would be sufficient to get the company past the loan problem. He explains that this procedure will be used only this one time. By next year, the company will be in better shape because of new products it is developing. Also, he reminds Flower that her bonus for the year will be higher because of the additional sales that will be recorded for April. He points out that the company is fundamentally in sound financial shape, and that he would hate to see its future jeopardized by a minor bookkeeping problem. He is asking for the cooperation of all of the regional sales managers. He argues that the stockholders, employees, and managers will all be better off if the sales are predated. He wants Flower”s assurance that she will cooperate.

Required

A. What effect will predating the sales have on Green Grow”s balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows? Be specific about which accounts will be affected and why.

B. How will this practice solve the company”s problem with the banks?

C. What would be the appropriate behavior for the company president under the circumstances the company is facing?

D. What would be the appropriate behavior for Flower?

identify and list the errors in the income statement above 579296

Identifying and Correcting Errors in an Income Statement Just after preparing the adjusting entries for the year, the long time controller at Parrot Company took a leave of absence. Her inexperienced assistant did his best to prepare financial statements from the information the controller had left behind. He had particular difficulty with the income statement. The item labeled sales expense is the sum of the amounts charged customers during the year for goods and services provided.

Income Statement
December 31, 2004

Sales expense

$260,722

Cost of goods sold

102,690

Net profit

$158,032

Operating expenses:

Wages

$59,780

Utilities

9,002

Interest

14,420

Depreciation

13,510

Total operating expense

97,712

Operating income

$60,320

Advertising expense

9,968

Pretax income

$50,352

Income tax expense

13,150

Net income

$63,502

Earnings per share of common stock

($64,502 15,000 shares)

$4.30

Required

A. Identify and list the errors in the income statement above.

B. Prepare a corrected income statement.

microsoft corporation s 2002 annual report included the following income statement i 579297

Interpreting an Income Statement Microsoft Corporation”s 2002 annual report included the following income statement information.

Microsoft Corporation
Income Statements

(In millions, except earnings per share)

Year Ended June 30

2000

2001

2002

Revenue

$22,956

$25,296

$28,365

Operating expenses:

Cost of revenue

3,002

3,455

5,191

Research and development

3,772

4,379

4,307

Sales and marketing

4,126

4,885

5,407

General and administrative

1,050

857

1,550

Total operating expenses

11,950

13,576

16,455

Operating income

11,006

11,720

11,910

Losses on equity investees and other

57

159

92

Investment income (loss)

3,326

36

305

Income before income taxes

14,275

11,525

11,513

Provision for income taxes

4,854

3,804

3,684

Income before accounting change

9,421

7,721

7,829

Cumulative effect of accounting change

(net of income taxes of $185)

375

Net income

$9,421

$7,346

$7,829

Basic earnings per share:

Before accounting change

$1.81

$1.45

$1.45

Cumulative effect of accounting change

0.07

$1.81

$1.38

$1.45

Diluted earnings per share:

Before accounting change

$1.70

$1.38

$1.41

Cumulative effect of accounting change

0.06

$1.70

$1.32

$1.41

Weighted average shares outstanding:

Basic

5,189

5,341

5,406

Diluted

5,536

5,574

5,553

Required Ratios often are used to assess changes in financial statement information over time. Use Microsoft”s income statements to answer the following questions. Express your answers as percentages.

A. What was the ratio of net income to net revenues each year?

B. What was the ratio of cost of revenues (cost of goods sold) to net revenues each year?

C. What was the ratio of operating expenses to net revenues each year?

D. What was the percentage change in net income between 2000 and 2001, and between 2001 and 2002? (Hint: Divide the increase in net income from 2000 and 2001 by the net income for 2000.)

E. Did Microsoft”s operating results improve between 2000 and 2001? Between 2001 and 2002? Explain your answers.

using the information above prepare an income statement and a separate statement of 579298

Comprehensive Income The Lo Company imports and sells Chinese furniture in the United States. Its new accountant has been assigned the task of preparing the income statement. She knows that the FASB is now requiring that certain unrealized gains and losses be reported as part of comprehensive income. She has the following information available for the year just ended.

1. Loss on cumulative effect of change of depreciation method, net of tax

$840

2. Gain from disposal of discontinued operations, net of tax

3,500

3. Cost of goods sold

180,000

4. Revenue received in advance

2,500

5. Work in process inventory

135,000

6. Interest expense

4,000

7. Provision for income tax

11,700

8. Sale of treasury stock at a price greater than cost

5,050

9. Sales revenue

250,000

10. Unrealized gain on increase of market value of investment

1,240

11. Sale of stock to investors

60,300

12. General and administrative expense

27,000

13. Extraordinary gain on retirement of debt, net of tax

4,200

14. Unrealized loss on foreign currency translation (regarding foreign subsidiary)

3,600

15. Cash received from customers

75,000

16. Dividends paid to shareholders

8,000

Required

A. From the information given above, decide which items should appear in the income statement, which would appear on a separate statement of comprehensive income, and which would not appear on either. If an item does not appear on either statement, indicate where it would be found. Also indicate which are transactions with owners.

B. Using the information above, prepare an income statement and a separate statement of comprehensive income.

what were the amounts of total assets total liabilities and stockholders equity at y 579299

Reading and Interpreting a Balance Sheet A recent balance sheet for Walt Disney Company is provided below.

Walt Disney Company
Consolidated Balance Sheets

(In millions, except per share data)

30 Sep

2001

2000

ASSETS

Current Assets

Cash and cash equivalents

$618

$842

Receivables

3,343

3,599

Inventories

671

702

Television costs (current)

1,175

1,162

Other assets

1,222

1,258

Total current assets

7,029

7,563

Film and television costs

5,235

5,339

Investments

2,061

2,270

Parks, resorts and other property, at cost

Attractions, buildings and equipment

20,635

19,202

Accumulated depreciation

7,728

6,892

12,907

12,310

Intangible assets, net

14,540

16,117

Other assets

1,927

1,428

Total assets

$43,699

$45,027

30 Sep

2001

2000

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS” EQUITY

Current Liabilities

Accounts payable and other accrued liabilities

$4,603

$5,161

Current portion of borrowings

829

2,502

Unearned royalties and other advances

787

739

Total current liabilities

6,219

8,402

Borrowings

8,940

6,959

Other noncurrent liabilities

5,486

5,210

Minority interests

382

356

Stockholders” Equity

Common stock

12,096

12,101

Retained earnings

12,171

12,767

Adjustments

1,595

768

Total stockholders” equity

22,672

24,100

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$43,699

$45,027

Note: Slight modifications have been made to the format of the statement to simplify the presentation.

Required Respond to the following questions.

A. Do you agree that Disney”s balance sheet is both classified and comparative? Explain why or why not.

B. At year end 2001, what percentage of total assets was composed of current assets? Had this percentage increased or decreased since year end 2000?

C. What was Disney”s amount of working capital at year end 2001? Did it change significantly from year end 2000?

D. Compute the working capital ratio at year end 2001 and year end 2000. Did it improve or deteriorate between 2000 and 2001?

E. Film and television costs is the amount paid to produce movies or television shows.

Explain why it appears in two places on the balance sheet.

F. What were the amounts of total assets, total liabilities, and stockholders” equity at yearend 2001 and year end 2000?

G. Did Disney”s overall financial position improve between 2000 and 2001? Explain.

identify and list the errors in the balance sheet above 579300

Identifying and Correcting Errors in a Balance Sheet Ceramics, Inc. reported the following balance sheet for the year 2004.

Balance Sheet
For the year ending December 31, 2004

Assets:

Cash

$2,000

Accounts payable

500

Inventory

900

Equipment

1,000

Land

1,500

Total assets

$6,000

Liabilities:

Accounts receivable

$3,000

Accrued liabilities

1,000

Total liabilities

4,000

Stockholders” equity:

Common stock

1,800

Retained earnings

5,100

Total stockholders” equity

6,900

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$10,900

Required

A. Identify and list the errors in the balance sheet above.

B. Prepare a corrected balance sheet.

what does gross profit represent calculate gross profit as a percentage of net opera 579301

Interpreting an Income Statement A recent Consolidated Statement of Income for the Coca Cola Company and Subsidiaries is presented below.

Consolidated Statements of Income
The Coca Cola Company and Subsidiaries

Year Ended December 31

2001

2000

1999

(In millions except per share data)

NET OPERATING REVENUES

$20,092

$19,889

$19,284

Cost of goods sold

6,044

6,204

6,009

GROSS PROFIT

14,048

13,685

13,275

Selling, administrative and general expenses

8,696

8,551

8,480

Other operating charges

0

1,443

813

OPERATING INCOME

5,352

3,691

3,982

Interest income

325

345

260

Interest expense

289

447

337

Other income (loss)

282

190

86

INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES AND

CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF ACCOUNTING CHANGE

5,670

3,399

3,819

Income taxes

1,691

1,222

1,388

INCOME BEFORE CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF

ACCOUNTING CHANGE

3,979

2,177

2,431

Cumulative effect of accounting change,

net of income taxes

10

0

0

NET INCOME

$3,969

$2,177

$2,431

BASIC NET INCOME PER SHARE

$1.60

$0.88

$0.98

Before accounting change

0

0

0

Cumulative effect of accounting change

$1.60

$0.88

$0.98

DILUTED NET INCOME PER SHARE

Before accounting change

$1.60

$0.88

$0.98

Cumulative effect of accounting change

0

0

0

$1.60

$0.88

$0.98

AVERAGE SHARES OUTSTANDING

2,487

2,477

2,469

Dilutive effect of stock options

0

10

18

AVERAGE SHARES OUTSTANDING ASSUMING DILUTION

2,487

2,487

2,487

Required

A. What is the amount of cost of goods sold for 1999, 2000, and 2001? What kinds of costs are included in cost of goods sold?

B. What does gross profit represent? Calculate gross profit as a percentage of net operating revenues for each year. What do you observe?

C. How does gross profit differ from operating income?

D. Is Coca Cola more profitable in 2001 than in 1999? Explain.

how much working capital does coca cola report in 2001 and 2000 what conclusions can 579302

Understanding Working Capital and Long Term Debt A recent Consolidated Balance Sheet for the Coca Cola Company and Subsidiaries is presented on the following page.

Required

A. Is Coca Cola a larger or smaller company in 2001 than in 2000? Explain.

B. What is the total amount of long term debt? Explain why Coca Cola classifies longterm debt into two categories.

C. What is working capital?

D. How much working capital does Coca Cola report in 2001 and 2000? What conclusions can you make as a result of your calculations? (Note: This problem takes an interesting twist. Think about the implication of your calculations.)

Consolidated Balance Sheets
The Coca Cola Company and Subsidiaries

31 Dec

2001

2000

ASSETS

CURRENT

Cash and cash equivalents

$1,866

$1,819

Marketable securities

68

73

1,934

1,892

Trade accounts receivable, less allowances of

$59 in 2001 and $62 in 2000

1,882

1,757

Inventories

1,055

1,066

Prepaid expenses and other assets

2,300

1,905

TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS

7,171

6,620

INVESTMENTS AND OTHER ASSETS

Investments

5,422

5,765

Other assets

2,792

2,364

8,214

8,129

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Land

217

225

Buildings and improvements

1,812

1,642

Machinery and equipment

4,881

4,547

Containers

195

200

7,105

6,614

Less allowances for depreciation

2,652

2,446

4,453

4,168

TRADEMARKS AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

2,579

1,917

$22,417

$20,834

31 Dec

2001

2000

LIABILITIES AND SHARE OWNERS” EQUITY

CURRENT

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

$3,679

$3,905

Loans and notes payable

3,743

4,795

Current maturities of long term debt

156

21

Accrued income taxes

851

600

TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES

8,429

9,321

LONG TERM DEBT

1,219

835

OTHER LIABILITIES

961

1,004

DEFERRED INCOME TAXES

442

358

SHARE OWNERS” EQUITY

Common stock, $.25 par value; Authorized: 5,600,000,000

shares; Issued: 3,491,465,016 shares in 2001; 3,481,882,834 shares in 2000

873

870

Capital surplus

3,520

3,196

Reinvested earnings

23,443

21,265

Accumulated other comprehensive income and unearned

compensation on restricted stock

2,788

2,722

25,048

22,609

Less treasury stock, at cost (1,005,237,693 shares in 2001;

997,121,427 shares in 2000)

13,682

13,293

11,366

9,316

$22,417

$20,834

calculate the working capital ratio for 2001 and 2002 discuss your results 579303

Using the Balance Sheet to Determine Asset Composition Recent Balance Sheets for Microsoft Corporation are presented below.

Microsoft Corporation
Balance Sheets
(In millions)

30 Jun

2001

2002

Assets

Current assets:

Cash and equivalents

$3,922

$3,016

Short term investments

27,678

35,636

Total cash and short term investments

31,600

38,652

Accounts receivable, net

3,671

5,129

Inventories

83

673

Deferred income taxes

1,522

2,112

Other

2,334

2,010

Total current assets

39,210

48,576

Property and equipment, net

2,309

2,268

Equity and other investments

14,361

14,191

Goodwill

1,511

1,426

Intangible assets, net

401

243

Other long term assets

1,038

942

Total assets

$58,830

$67,646

30 Jun

2001

2002

Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$1,188

$1,208

Accrued compensation

742

1,145

Income taxes

1,468

2,022

Short term unearned revenue

4,395

5,920

Other

1,461

2,449

Total current liabilities

9,254

12,744

Long term unearned revenue

1,219

1,823

Deferred income taxes

409

398

Other long term liabilities

659

501

Commitments and contingencies

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock and paid in capital shares

authorized 12,000; shares issued

and outstanding 5,383 and 5,359

28,390

31,647

Retained earnings, including accumulated other

comprehensive income of $587 and $583

18,899

20,533

Total stockholders” equity

47,289

52,180

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$58,830

$67,646

Required

A. Microsoft reports property and equipment, net on the balance sheet. Calculate property and equipment as a percentage of total assets for 2001 and 2002.

B. Microsoft reports cash and short term investments as a current asset. Calculate cash and short term investments as a percentage of total assets.

C. Comment on your analysis from Requirements A and B.

D. Calculate the working capital ratio for 2001 and 2002. Discuss your results.

prepare a classified balance sheet as of december 31 2004 include appropriate headin 579304

Preparing Financial Statements Argyle Company has the following account balances at December 31, 2004. During the year, Argyle had 10,000 shares of stock outstanding.

Argyle Company
Account Balances
at December 31, 2004

Account

Balance

Cash

$4,650

Accounts receivable

16,350

Inventory

30,500

Supplies

7,700

Prepaid insurance

3,550

Equipment

42,500

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

17,500

Buildings

170,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

105,000

Land

10,000

Patents

3,000

Accounts payable

18,250

Wages payable

3,450

Interest payable

1,700

Income taxes payable

4,050

Notes payable, current portion

2,500

Account

Balance

Notes payable, long term

37,500

Owners” investment

25,000

Retained earnings, December 31, 2003

60,150

Dividends

15,000

Sales revenue

130,000

Cost of goods sold

62,500

Wages expense

16,000

Utilities expense

2,000

Depreciation expense

1,050

Insurance expense

1,500

Supplies expense

2,300

Interest expense

3,650

Advertising expense

1,450

Patent expense

400

Income tax expense

11,000

Required

A. Prepare an income statement in good form based on Argyle Company”s account balances.

B. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2004. Include appropriate headings and subheadings.

corey issacson is an investor in stone cold enterprises last week he received the co 579306

Using Interrelationships among Financial Statements Corey Issacson is an investor in Stone Cold Enterprises. Last week he received the company”s most recent financial statements but some of the numbers were smudged and unreadable. Each of the unreadable numbers is represented with a letter on the following page.

Stone Cold Enterprises
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2004 and 2005

31 Dec 05

31 Dec 04

(In thousands)

Assets

Cash

$2,940

$1,020

Accounts receivable

1,850

1,225

Merchandise

2,855

1,000

Prepaid insurance

(a)

3,000

Property, plant and equipment

25,000

(b)

Accumulated depreciation

(c)

6,250

Other assets

8,400

3,000

Total assets

$35,545

$ (d)

Liabilities and equity:

Accounts payable

$1,580

$950

Wages payable

125

700

Rent payable

500

500

Long term notes payable (8%)

12,000

12,000

Common stock

(e)

(f)

Retained earnings

(g)

10,845

Total liabilities and equity

$ (h)

$ (i)

Stone Cold Enterprises
Statement of Stockholders” Equity
Year Ended December 31, 2005

Common
Stock

Retained
Earnings

Total

Balance, December 31, 2004

$3,000

$ (j)

$ (k)

Issued common stock

(l)

(m)

Net income

14,495

14,495

Dividends paid

9,000

9,000

Balance, December 31, 2005

$5,000

$ (n)

$21,340

Stone Cold Enterprises
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2005

Sales revenue

$103,000

Cost of goods sold

66,000

Gross profit

37,000

Operating expenses:

Wages

$5,490

Interest

(o)

Rent

(p)

Insurance

1,000

Depreciation

1,250

Total operating expenses

(q)

Pretax income

(r)

Income taxes (35%)

(s)

Net income

$ (t)

Additional information:

1. No items of plant, property and equipment were purchased or sold during the year.

2. The prepaid insurance account represents the remaining portion of a four year policy purchased on January 1, 2004.

3. The rent payable account at year end (both years) represents December”s rent that had not yet been paid.

Required Use your knowledge regarding the interrelationships among financial statements to determine each of the missing amounts.

show how the three financial statements articulate note in parts a b and c include a 579307

Preparing Financial Statements ABC, Inc. has the following account balances at December 31, 2004.

Accounts payable

$17,080

Income tax expense

$1,300

Accounts receivable

9,400

Land

50,000

Accumulated depreciation

26,100

Notes payable

30,000

Buildings

60,000

Retained earnings,

Cash

20,880

31 Dec 03

17,000

Contributed capital31,000

31,000

Sales revenue

26,000

Cost of goods sold

15,600

Supplies

7,500

Depreciation expense

2,200

Wages expense

3,000

Dividends paid

1,200

Wages payable

23,900

During the year 2004, the company issued $6,000 of new common stock.

Required From this information, prepare (A) an income statement, (B) a statement of stockholders” equity, and (C) a classified balance sheet. (D) Show how the three financial statements articulate. (Note: In parts (A), (B), and (C), include appropriate headings and subheadings in the financial statements that you prepare.)

displayed below are the comparative balance sheet and income statement that have dra 579308

Understanding the Information in Financial Statements Today is April 1 and Dale has just received the annual report of Clam Chowder Company, in which he owns stock. Displayed below are the comparative balance sheet and income statement that have drawn his attention.

Balance Sheet

Dec. 31,
2005

Dec. 31,
2004

Income Statement

For Year
2005

Cash

$1,244

$1,512

Sales revenue

$485,000

Accounts receivable

6,914

5,886

Cost of goods sold

300,700

Inventory

11,211

9,099

Gross profit

184,300

Buildings and equipment

49,900

46,500

Operating expenses:

Accumulated depreciation

5,319

2,497

Advertising

31,330

Land

22,000

22,000

Depreciation

2,822

Total assets

$85,950

$82,500

Utilities

19,200

Accounts payable

$2,313

$1,988

Wages

113,698

Interest payable

0

2,563

Operating income

17,250

Wages payable

7,364

6,327

Interest expense

2,400

7%, 10 year note payable

20,000

20,000

Pretax income

14,850

Contributed capital42,300

42,300

42,300

Income tax expense

5,200

Retained capital13,973

13,973

9,322

Net income

$9,650

Total liabilities and equity

$85,950

$82,500

Earnings per share

$3.86

After reviewing this information, Dale makes the following comments.

1. I”m surprised that the value of the company”s land has not increased. Prices have been increasing rapidly in the area the company is located.

2. I”m sure that I received a dividend from this company, but they don”t report that they paid any.

3. I don”t see how the company”s cash balance could have declined when it took in $485,000 in cash from sales to customers.

4. I see that the value of the buildings and equipment declined by $2,822. That seems about right.

5. I don”t understand why the company”s highly trained workforce is not listed as an asset. It is one of the most important resources that the company has.

6. One thing I really like about this company is the up to the minute financial reports it provides.

7. It”s good to see that the value of the inventory has increased since last year.

Required

A. Help Dale better understand these financial statements by responding to each of his comments. Explain whether you agree or disagree with each comment and why.

B. Did the company declare and pay cash dividends during the year just ended? If so, what total amount was distributed?

C. Approximately how many shares of stock does the company have outstanding?

why is it important that time and the timing of events be considered in reporting ac 579309

The Transformation Process as Reported in Financial Statements Far East Specialties is an import company, financed primarily by stockholders and bank loans. It imports handmade goods from Central and East Asia to the United States, where they are sold to retail stores. The company”s buyers contract with small companies for goods, which the buyers ship to a central location in the United States. The goods are inventoried and then redistributed as orders are received from retailers. The company receives a bill from the manufacturers along with the goods it receives. Payment is made each month. Bills are sent to retailers along with orders. Most retailers pay their bills each month, as well. It can be several months from the time goods are shipped to the United States until cash is received from retailers.

Required

A. Explain how the various aspects of Far East Specialties” transformation process are reported in its financial statements. That is, consider the events just described and identify where information about each event is reported in the financial statements. In particular, consider the relationship the company has with its investors, suppliers, and customers.

B. Why is it important that time, and the timing of events, be considered in reporting accounting information?

at october 1 the beginning of its fiscal year the organization had the following bal 579243

Determining Transactions from Changes in Financial Statements The Loc Tite Correctional Facility is a private enterprise prison that contracts services to a midwestern state. At October 1, the beginning of its fiscal year, the organization had the following balance sheet.

Loc Tite Correctional Facility
Balance Sheet
at October 1

Assets:

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity:

Cash

$43,725

Accounts payable

$28,350

Supplies

65,700

Bonds payable

450,000

Equipment

350,000

Owners’ investment

1,050,000

Building

1,400,000

Retained earnings

883,575

Accumulated

depreciation

100,000

Land

652,500

Total

$2,411,925

Total

$2,411,925

During the month of October, a number of economic events occurred and were entered into the accounting system. At the end of October, the company prepared the following financial statements.

Loc Tite Correctional Facility
Financial Statements

Balance Sheet (at Oct. 31)

Income Statement (for Oct.)

Assets:

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity:

Revenues

$810,000

Cash

$58,725

Accounts payable

$28,350

Expenses:

Supplies

28,200

Bonds payable

0

Supplies

37,500

Equipment

350,000

Owners’ Investment

1,050,000

Depreciation

8,625

Building

1,400,000

Retained earnings

1,302,450

Wages

345,000

Accumulated

depreciation

108,625

Land

652,500

Total

$2,380,800

Total

$2,380,800

Net income

$418,875

Required

A. Identify the transactions that occurred during October.

B. Prepare a schedule that explains the changes in cash balance during October.

determine the proper amount of revenue expense and cash flow that should be entered 579245

Accrual versus Cash Flow Consider each of the five independent situations below.

1. Asia Tea Company purchased a 3 month property insurance policy on March 1 at a cost of $3,600. The insurance became effective immediately although payment was due and paid 45 days later.

2. On February 1, Big Bang Chemical Company signed a contract with a customer. Big Bang agreed to deliver each month, for 3 months, goods priced at $7,500. The first delivery was made on April 1. The customer paid $22,500 for these goods on May 15.

3. Turning Tire Company borrowed $15,000 from a bank on February 1. Terms of repayment are that $1,000 of the principal amount must be repaid on the first day of each following month. In addition, interest at 2% per month on the unpaid balance must accompany each payment.

4. Bureaucrats, Inc. consumes large amounts of office supplies. On February 1, a $10,000 order of supplies was received and paid for. 60% of these supplies were used in March and the rest were used in April. On April 20, a $12,000 order of office supplies was received. The invoice for these goods was paid in May. 30% of these goods were consumed in May and the rest were consumed in June.

5. Sales at the High Price Furniture Store totaled $45,000 for the month of February. Of this amount, 20% was cash sales, 40% was collected during March, 30% during April, and 10% during May.

Required

A. Determine the proper amount of revenue, expense, and cash flow that should be entered into the accounting system during each month shown. Use the format shown below. The first event is completed as an example.

B. What does this information suggest to you about the pattern in which accrual based measures are recognized versus cash based measures?

C. What does this suggest to you about a manager’s need for both accrual information and cash flow information?

Event

Revenue, Expense, or
Cash Flow?

Month of
February

Month of March

Month of
April

Month of
May

Month of
June

1

Expense

0

$1,200

$1,200

$1,200

0

Cash Flow

0

0

3,600

0

0

2

3

4

5

from a financial perspective does this company appear to be one that you would like 579246

Preparing Financial Statements and Making Decisions The Desert Harbor Inn has been in business for more than 100 years but was recently renovated.

On January 1, 2004, the balance sheet of the company was as shown on the next page.

During 2004, the inn earned $165,000 from room rentals and another $35,000 from parking, the gift shop, and other guest services. Of this amount, $187,000 was received in cash by year end; $13,000 was still collectible from credit card companies and one very reliable corporate account. Expenses incurred during the year included staff wages, $49,000; utilities, $10,400; supplies used, $4,300; depreciation on furniture and fixtures, $1,500; depreciation on the building, $3,500; interest on note payable, $4,700; cost of goods sold by gift shop, $11,000; and other miscellaneous expenses of $3,300. Except for depreciation, supplies consumed, and $890 of wages still owed to employees, all expenses were paid for in cash. Other cash payments included $800 for purchase of supplies and $35,000 paid on the principal of the note payable. Owners withdrew $45,000 from the business for living expenses during the year.

Desert Harbor Inn
Balance Sheet
January 1, 2004

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Cash

$4,900

Notes payable

$56,500

Supplies on hand

8,800

Investment by owners

60,000

Furniture and equipment

25,000

Retained earnings

19,200

Buildings

95,000

Accumulated depreciation

10,000

Land

12,000

Total

$135,700

Total

$135,700

Required

A. Prepare year end financial statements for the company for 2004. Include an income statement, statement of cash flows, and a balance sheet.

B. From a financial perspective, does this company appear to be one that you would like to own? Why or why not?

study the information given and prepare a new income statement making all changes yo 579247

Identifying Problems in Financial Reporting Alma Zorditch started an Internet company and has computed the first year’s profit as shown below. She is distressed. She thought the business had been going fairly well but does not know how she can live on the meager profit the company has earned. She is considering going out of business. Alma doesn’t have any formal training in accounting but once took a 4 hour seminar on the subject. That seminar impressed on her the importance of keeping detailed and accurate records. All the numbers reported below are accurate, but there may be other problems that you can identify.

Zorditch.com
Profits I Made the First Year

Revenue:

Cash collected from customers

$173,400

Accounts receivable at year end

18,200

Total revenue

$191,600

Expenses:

Money I contributed to start the firm

15,000

Purchase of office furnishings & equipment

28,500

Purchase of office supplies

1,560

Rent on the office space

13,000

Loan from the bank

50,000

Wages paid to employees

36,200

Advertising and promotion

24,280

Miscellaneous

11,300

Total expenses

179,840

Profit

$11,760

After talking with Alma, you discover the following additional information.

1. When purchased, the office furnishings and equipment have an expected useful life of 5 years. That estimate still appears reasonable.

2. All office supplies have been used up.

3. The rent amount includes $1,000 rent paid in advance for the first month of Year 2.

4. Half of the advertising and promotion amont is for a campaign that will begin 3 months from now.

Required

A. Study the information given and prepare a new income statement making all changes you believe are appropriate.

B. Wherever your report differs from Alma’s, justify the change you have made.

C. Based on your revised income statement, what advice would you have for Alma? List two or three specific suggestions.

for each account above indicate whether it is an asset liability owners rsquo equity 579249

Types and Treatment of Accounts Encanto Properties, Inc., uses the accounts listed below.

A. Prepaid Insurance

J. Prepaid Advertising

B. Retained Earnings

K. Notes Payable

C. Accumulated Depreciation

L. Cost of Goods Sold

D. Wages Expense

M. Machinery

E. Commissions Revenue

N. Owners’ Capital

F. Interest Payable

O. Accounts Receivable

G. Supplies

P. Bonds Payable

H. Insurance Expense

Q. Supplies Expense

I. Unearned Rent

R. Depreciation Expense

Required (a) For each account above, indicate whether it is an asset, liability, owners’ equity, revenue, or expense account. (b) Indicate whether the account is closed at the end of the fiscal year.

what would you recommend to ethel what problems do you see in hard rock rsquo s acco 579250

Ethical Issues in an Accounting System Ethel Spikes works for Hard Rock Candy Company. She enters customer orders in the company’s accounting system. The orders are written on prepared forms by the company’s sales representatives (reps). The company employs ten sales reps, who work different territories.

The reps are paid on a commission basis for sales made during the preceding month. Sales reports prepared by the accounting department supervisor are used to determine the commissions. Sales reps drop off the forms with the accounting supervisor each week. The supervisor then delivers the forms to Ethel. She enters the orders in a computer and prints out a sales report and sales invoices for each customer. These are picked up by the supervisor, who delivers them to payroll and to shipping. The result of entering the orders in the accounting system is to increase accounts receivable and to increase sales revenue.

Ethel has discovered an interesting regularity in some of the orders. One of the sales reps always reports abnormally high orders from a particular customer. A few days after the end of each month, the rep submits a cancelation form for the customer to eliminate a large portion of the customer’s order. The supervisor directs Ethel to record the cancelation by reducing accounts receivable for the customer and recording an increase in an operating expense account. Ethel doesn’t know much about accounting. When she asked her supervisor about this procedure, she was told that it was standard for this customer and not to worry about it. Ethel smells a rat, however, and has considered discussing the matter with the vice president for finance. But she is concerned she may simply be making waves that will alienate her supervisor.

Required:

Ethel has sought your advice, as a friend, about this matter. What would you recommend to Ethel? What problems do you see in Hard Rock’s accounting system? How might these problems be solved?

the next line should identify the financial statement as a balance sheet or income s 579252

Excel in Action The problem in Chapter F2 provided account balances for The Book Wermz on September 30, 2004, the end of the company’s fiscal year: Cash $4,238.72, Inventory of Books $235,892.35, Supplies $2,343.28, Equipment $43,297.00, Notes Payable $123,452.88, Investment by Owners $100,000, and Retained Earnings $62,318.47. Chapter F2 also listed summary transactions for October 2004:

Cash sales

$38,246.50

Cost of goods sold

27,318.93

The Equipment account balance of $43,297.00 is net of accumulated depreciation of $12,353.00. Therefore, the Equipment balance before considering the effect of depreciation is $55,650.00.

Other transactions for the month ended October 31, 2004, include:

Cash paid for books purchased

$18,243.27

Cash paid for supplies

1,750.92

Cost of supplies used in October

2,129.48

Employee wages earned and paid in October

3,620.83

Employee wages earned in October but unpaid

527.12

Cash paid for portion of Notes Payable

1,122.77

Cash paid for interest incurred on Notes Payable

823.02

Cash paid for October rent

1,534.86

Depreciation on equipment for October

721.62

In addition, The Book Wermz held classes on book binding for local civic organizations in October. The organizations agreed to a $500 fee for these services but did not make the payment in October.

Required:

Add the transactions described above to those created in Chapter F2. Additional rows should be added to the spreadsheet for the transactions. Additional columns also will be needed for accounts not included in Chapter F2. The following accounts should be included in the spreadsheet in the order indicated: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Inventory,

Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation, Wages Payable, Notes Payable, Investment by Owners, Retained Earnings, Sales, Service Revenues, Cost of Goods Sold, Supplies Expense, Wages Expense, Rent Expense, Depreciation Expense, and Interest Expense. The beginning balance of all new accounts except Accumulated Depreciation is $0. The beginning balance of the Accumulated Depreciation account is $12,353 (note this is a negative amount because it is a contra account), and the beginning balance of the Equipment account should be changed to $55,650 (to permit Accumulated Depreciation to be included as a separate account). Column sums should be recalculated to determine totals at October 31. Make sure to close the revenue and expense accounts to Retained Earnings. Use October 31 as the date for all transactions.

Update the balance sheet and income statement by including the effects of the transactions recorded for October. Use cell references in the financial statements to identify amounts for each account. Add captions to identify each statement. The statements should include the name of the company on the top line. The next line should identify the financial statement as a balance sheet or income statement. The third line should identify the date (October 31, 2004 for the balance sheet) or period (for October 2004 for the income statement). List total revenues and total expenses as subtotals on the income statement. Use underlines to separate the subtotals from other numbers. The Borders button can be used for this purpose.

which of the following statements can be determined from the information provided 579259

The following information is available for two companies for the year 2004:

Handle Bar Mustache Co. Cash Operating Statement For the Year 2001

Pencil Thin Mustache Co. Accrual Income Statement For the Year 2004

Receipts/Revenues

$50,000

$55,000

Payments/Expenses

38,000

31,000

Net Cash/Net Income

$12,000

$24,000

Which of the following statements can be determined from the information provided?

a. Pencil Thin collected more cash from customers during 2004 than did Handle Bar.

b. Pencil Thin was profitable during 2004, whereas Handle Bar may have been profitable.

c. Pencil Thin was twice as profitable as Handle Bar.

d. Handle Bar consumed more total resources during 2004 than did Pencil Thin.

identify and explain any problems you see with the sales plan if you were bright amp 579263

Ethical Issues Involving Revenue Recognition Flash Newton is national sales director at Bright & Shiny Toothpaste Company. The firm manufactures and distributes a full line of premium priced personal care products sold through a carefully selected set of distributors nationwide. The popularity and profit margins of the Bright & Shiny product line make distributorships very profitable and there is intense competition when one becomes available.

Flash, and the regional sales directors working for him, are compensated by a base salary and a significant bonus tied to percentage increases in yearly sales. Because of an impending recession, sales have been mostly flat during the first three quarters of the year. On October 3, Flash convened a national sales meeting with representatives of all distributors. At that meeting, he presented the distributors with Bright & Shiny’s newest sales plan. All distributors would be required to buy, during the 4th quarter, up to 2 years’ worth of inventory of the firm’s products. Further, the prices charged on these special purchases would be 10% greater than usual. Any distributors not agreeing to the proposal would automatically lose their distributorship. Because most distributors are not expected to have cash readily available to pay for these additional purchases under the usual 30 day credit terms, Bright & Shiny will allow up to 12 months to pay.

The new policy has been a huge success and by year end, total orders and shipments to distributors are up by 12% over the previous year. Bright & Shiny recorded all shipments as revenue even though some distributors were told by lower level managers that they could return unsold products. Because many distributors could not handle the large shipments in their usual storage facilities, many orders have been shipped to third party warehouses for storage at Bright & Shiny’s expense. At Flash’s suggestion, and to obtain maximum benefit of this new sales program, the company held the books open for a few days after December 31 to obtain and ship additional orders.

Required:

Identify and explain any problems you see with the sales plan. If you were Bright & Shiny’s CEO, which aspects of the sales plan would you have approved and which would you have denied? Why?

prepare any summary documents you believe might help management or interested extern 579264

Evaluating the Results of an Organization’s Transformation Process SoftwareSolutions.com has been in business for several years and is publicly traded on a major U.S. stock exchange. It is an Internet wholesaler of a variety of commercial software applications. On January 1, 2004, the company’s balance sheet appeared as follows (all amounts are in thousands of dollars):

SoftwareSolutions.com
Balance Sheet
January 1, 2004

Assets

Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

$4,240

Wages payable

$640

Accounts receivable

6,800

Capital stock (owner’s investment)

33,000

Inventory

15,200

Retained earnings

13,600

Buildings & equipment

16,780

Accumulated depreciation

4,780

Land (for plant expansion)

9,000

Total assets

$47,240

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$47,240

During the first quarter of the current year (January, February, March), the following events occurred.

A. New office furniture costing $500 was purchased on the last day of March. This was to be used in a new sales office that was scheduled to open April 1. The office furniture was paid for in cash.

B. Wages and salaries totaling $3,200 were paid. Of this amount, 20% was to liquidate wages payable that arose in the fourth quarter of the previous year. The company has a policy of not making wage or salary advances to employees.

C. All accounts receivable outstanding at January 1 were collected.

D. The company’s advertising agency billed the firm $1,000 for a campaign that had run during the current quarter. The company is planning to pay the bill during April.

E. Sales totaling $18,000 were made to customers. Of these sales, 60% was collected during the first quarter, and the balance is expected to be collected during the next quarter. The goods that were sold had cost the company $13,000 when they were purchased.

F. Dividends were declared and paid to stockholders in the amount of $1,500.

G. Inventory (software programs) costing $10,500 was purchased, of which 10% was paid for by the end of the quarter.

H. A 3 year, $4,000, 12% loan was obtained from a local bank on the last day of the quarter.

I. New shares of stock were sold by the company for $2,000 in cash.

J. A new 3 year lease agreement was signed and executed. The lease required that a $900 monthly rental be paid in advance for the first 2 quarters of the current year. (Total paid is $5,400 = $900 × 6 months.)

K. The accountants calculated that depreciation totaling $350 should be recorded for the quarter for the firm’s buildings and equipment.

L. The land that had been held for plant expansion was sold for $9,000.

Required:

Prepare any summary documents you believe might help management (or interested external parties) better understand the effectiveness or efficiency of the firm’s first quarter transformation process. Did the company have a satisfactory first quarter?

prepare a post closing summary of account balances and d prepare a balance sheet 579265

Financial Statement Preparation and Closing Process Summary account balances for Mom’s Cookie Company at the end of February are presented below. The summary includes all transactions for February, not just those described in this chapter. In particular, additional sales transactions have been included.

Mom’s Cookie Company
Account Balances
February 28, 2004

Account

Balance

Assets:

Cash

7,740

Accounts Receivable

1,580

Merchandise Inventories

7,520

Supplies

60

Prepaid Rent

1,200

Equipment

31,000

Accumulated Depreciation

1,040

Total Assets

48,060

Liabilities:

Accounts Payable

1,400

Unearned Revenue

3,000

Interest Payable

400

Notes Payable

30,000

Total Liabilities

34,800

Owners’ Equity:

Contribution by Owners

10,000

Retained Earnings

480

Sales Revenue

17,160

Cost of Goods Sold

11,440)

Wages Expense

1,000

Rent Expense

600

Depreciation Expense

520

Supplies Expense

400

Utilities Expense

220

Interest Expense

200

Total Owners’ Equity

13,260

Required:

Use the account balances to (a) prepare an income statement for February,

(b) close the revenue and expense accounts (show journal transactions and ledger accounts),

(c) prepare a post closing summary of account balances, and (d) prepare a balance sheet.

use i to indicate income statement b to indicate balance sheet and se to indicate st 579276

For each of the items listed below, indicate the financial statement (or statements) for which the information is true. Use I to indicate income statement, B to indicate balance sheet, and SE to indicate statement of stockholders” equity. If the item below is not true for any of the three financial statements, indicate with an N.

1. The statement provides information about resources consumed during an accounting period.

2. The portion of profits that were distributed to owners of the firm is disclosed.

3. The current market value of the firm”s resources is reported.

4. The statement is dated as of a specific point in time.

5. The amounts that are owed to other organizations or individuals are reported.

6. The total amount of capital that has been contributed to the organization is reported.

7. The amount of capital that has been contributed to the organization during the accounting period just ended is reported.

8. Information is reported regarding the rewards that have been earned from serving customers during the accounting period just ended.

9. The statement is not as of a specific date, but covers a period of time.

10. Reports information that has been developed on the accrual basis.

11. The statement contains information about the financial sacrifices that were made to acquire resources.

12. The statement contains information concerning contributed capital.

13. The statement contains information concerning the results of operating activities.

14. The amount of stock sold during the accounting period just ended is disclosed.

15. The information provided links two other statements.

rearrange the accounts into proper income statement format be sure to date the state 579277

Alex didn”t study very hard when he took accounting because he thought he wouldn”t ever use it on the job at Valentine Company. Yesterday, after preparing all end of the month adjusting entries, both of the company”s accounting staff became ill. The company owner, knowing that Alex had taken accounting as part of his college major, asked him to finish the job by preparing the financial statements. The owner needs the statements tomorrow to present to her banker. Alex isn”t sure that his income statement is prepared properly.

Valentine Company
Income Statement
at September 30, 2004

Sales revenue

$48,500

Wages expense

11,369

Operating income

37,131

Operating expenses:

Advertising

3,133

Cost of goods sold

30,070

Insurance

670

Interest expense

240

Utilities

1,250

Gross profit

1,768

Depreciation expense

282

Pretax income

1,486

Income tax expense

519

Net income

$967

Alex is confident that each revenue account and expense account balance is correct because those were determined by the accounting staff. He is unsure, however, that he has organized them properly on the income statement. Therefore, he is unsure about the summary amounts listed in bold faced print on the statement.

Rearrange the accounts into proper income statement format. Be sure to date the statement correctly.

slotnick company sells rents and services ski equipment information about the compan 579278

Slotnick Company sells, rents, and services ski equipment. Information about the company”s financial performance for a recent fiscal period is provided below.

Average shares outstanding

20,000

Cost of goods sold

$34,000

Debt outstanding

65,000

General and administrative expenses

12,000

Income tax expense

20,000

Interest expense

8,000

Payments to owners

30,000

Rental revenue

45,000

Sales revenue

79,000

Selling expense

27,000

Service revenue

23,000

From the information provided, compute the following amounts for the period:

a. Gross profit

b. Operating expenses

c. Income from operations

d. Pretax income

e. Net income

f. Earnings per share

why do you think items 2 4 7 and 9 are listed separately on an income statement rath 579279

Flowers by Freddie presented the income statement below for its most recent fiscal year. The items have been numbered for convenience in analysis.

(1) Sales revenue

$371,923

(2) Cost of goods sold

201,668

(3) Gross profit

170,255

(4) Operating expenses

72,853

(5) Operating income

97,402

(6) Other revenues

538

(7) Other expenses

13,227

(8) Pretax income

84,713

(9) Income taxes

29,650

10) Net income

$55,063

Answer the following questions. Be specific. Give examples to clarify.

a. What is the difference between the revenue listed in item 1 and that listed in item 6?

b. What does item 3 represent, and why is it important?

c. What do items 2, 4, and 7 have in common?

d. How are items 2, 4, and 7 different from one another?

e. How is item 9 similar to items 2, 4, and 7?

f. Why do you think items 2, 4, 7, and 9 are listed separately on an income statement rather than being lumped together as one item?

how much revenue did it earn from operating activities other than transporting passe 579280

An income statement for Delta Air Lines, Inc., for a recent fiscal year is provided below:

Delta Air Lines, Inc.
Consolidated Statements of Operations
For the Year Ended December 31, 2001

(In millions, except per share data)

OPERATING REVENUES:

Passenger

$12,964

Cargo

506

Other, net

409

Total operating revenues

13,879

OPERATING EXPENSES:

Salaries and related costs

6,124

Aircraft fuel1,817

1,817

Depreciation and amortization

1,283

Passenger commissions

540

Contracted services

1,016

Landing fees and other rents

780

Aircraft rent

737

Aircraft maintenance materials and outside repairs

801

Passenger service

466

Other

1,917

Total operating expenses

15,481

OPERATING INCOME (LOSS)

1,602

OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE):

Interest expense, net

410

Other income

148

LOSS BEFORE INCOME TAXES

1,864

INCOME TAX BENEFIT

648

NET LOSS

($1,216)

BASIC EARNINGS (LOSS) PER SHARE

($9.99)

DILUTED EARNINGS (LOSS) PER SHARE

($9.99)

Note: Modifications have been made to the statement to simplify the presentation. Use this income statement to answer the following questions:

a. What was Delta”s primary source of revenue?

b. What percentage of Delta”s revenue came from this source?

c. What were its largest expenses?

d. How much revenue did Delta earn from transporting passengers?

e. How much revenue did it earn from operating activities other than transporting passengers?

f. How much revenue did it earn from nonoperating activities?

g. How much operating income did Delta earn (or lose)?

h. How much expense did it incur for nonoperating activities?

i. Approximately how many shares of stock did Delta have outstanding during the year?

j. How much profit or loss did Delta report during the fiscal year?

can the amount of cash applebees received from its operating activities during the y 579281

A recent income statement for Applebees International (a restaurant chain) is provided below. It operates both company owned and franchised restaurants.

Applebees International, Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 30, 2001

(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts.)

Revenues:

Company restaurant sales

$651,119

Franchise income

93,225

Total operating revenues

744,344

Cost of company restaurant sales:

Food and beverage

175,977

Labor

208,996

Direct and occupancy

164,965

Pre opening expense

1,701

Total cost of company restaurant sales

551,639

Operating expenses:

General and administrative expenses

72,935

Amortization of intangible assets

5,851

Loss on disposition of restaurants and equipment

1,492

Operating earnings

112,427

Other income (expense):

Investment income

1,650

Interest expense

7,456

Other expense

3,993

Total other expense

9,799

Earnings before income taxes

102,628

Income taxes

38,227

Net earnings

$64,401

Basic net earnings per common share

$1.74

Diluted net earnings per common share

$1.70

Use this financial statement to answer the following questions:

a. How much revenue did Applebees earn from food and drinks?

b. How much revenue did it earn from other operating activities?

c. How much revenue did it earn from nonoperating activities?

d. What amount of gross profit did Applebees earn? Express your answer both in dollars and as a percentage of total revenues.

e. How much expense did it incur for nonoperating activities?

f. Approximately how many shares of stock did Applebees have outstanding during the year?

g. How much operating income and net income did Applebees earn during the fiscal year? Express your answers both in dollars and as a percentage of total revenues.

h. Can the amount of cash Applebees received from its operating activities during the year be determined from the income statement? If so, what is that amount? If not, why not?

what was the amount of its nonoperating income or expense 579282

SuperQuick Computer Corporation reported the following income statement for a recent quarter.

Consolidated Statement of Income
For the Quarter Ended December 31, 2004

Sales

$719,150

Cost of sales

549,313

169,837

Research and development costs

16,900

Selling general and administrative expense

83,771

Other income and expense, net

7,685

108,356

Income before income taxes

61,481

Provision for income taxes

15,451

Net income

$46,030

Earnings per share

$0.93

Assume that Other Income and Expense are nonoperating.

a. What was the company”s gross profit for the quarter?

b. What was the amount of the company”s product costs expensed during the quarter?

c. What was the amount of its operating expenses?

d. What was the amount of its operating income?

e. What was the amount of its nonoperating income or expense?

what was the percentage change in net income between 2003 and 2004 and between 2004 579283

BioTek”s 2005 annual report included the following income statement information.

(In millions, except earnings per share)

Year Ended June 30

2003

2004

2005

Revenue

$8,671

$11,358

$14,484

Operating expenses:

Cost of revenue

1,188

1,085

1,197

Research and development

1,432

1,925

2,502

Acquired in process technology

0

0

296

Sales and marketing

2,657

2,856

3,412

General and administrative

316

362

433

Other expenses

19

259

230

Total operating expenses

5,612

6,487

8,070

Operating income

3,059

4,871

6,414

Interest income

320

443

703

Income before income taxes

3,379

5,314

7,117

Provision for income taxes

1,184

1,860

2,627

Net income

$2,195

$3,454

$4,490

Earnings per share

$0.86

$1.32

$1.67

Ratios often are used to assess changes in financial statement information over time. Use Bio Tek”s income statements to answer the following questions. Express your answers as percentages.

a. What was the ratio of net income to net revenues each year?

b. What was the ratio of cost of revenues (cost of goods sold) to net revenues each year?

c. What was the ratio of operating expenses to net revenues each year?

d. What was the percentage change in net income between 2003 and 2004 and between 2004 and 2005? (Hint: Divide the increase in net income from one year to the next by the net income for the earlier year.)

e. Did Bio Tek”s operating results improve between 2003 and 2005? Explain your answer.

determine each of the following amounts hint not all items will be used 579284

Listed below are selected account balances for Hemmingway Company for June 30, 2004.

Accounts payable

$95,300

Land

$250,000

Accounts receivable

78,100

Merchandise inventory

390,000

Accumulated depreciation

318,000

Notes payable, current portion

50,000

Buildings

750,000

Notes payable, long term

571,300

Cash

34,500

Prepaid insurance

38,000

Contributed capital700,000

700,000

Retained earnings

279,000

Cost of goods sold

840,000

Supplies on hand

52,000

Equipment

450,000

Trademarks

45,000

Interest payable

38,000

Wages expense

375,000

Wages payable

36,000

Determine each of the following amounts. (Hint: Not all items will be used.)

a. Current assets

b. Current liabilities

c. Property, plant, and equipment

d. Total assets

e. Long term liabilities

f. Total liabilities

g. Stockholders” equity

h. Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

i. Working capital

list decisions involving the acquisition use or disposal of resources that environme 579201

Financing, Investing, and Operating Activities as Part of the Transformation Process Environmental Housing Company designs and builds log homes. Financing is provided by owners and creditors, primarily banks. The company owns buildings and equipment it uses in the management, design, transportation, and construction process. It purchases logs and other building materials from other companies. These materials are shipped by the sellers. Homes are designed for customers. Logs are cut to the dimensions called for in a design and shipped to the customer’s building site with other materials for assembly. Environmental Housing employs design engineers, construction and assembly workers, maintenance personnel, and marketing and service personnel, in addition to its management and office staff. The company is in charge of the construction process until the home is completed and ready for occupancy. The company gives warranties for one year after completion that state the completed home is free of defects from materials or construction.

Required List decisions involving the acquisition, use, or disposal of resources that Environmental Housing’s managers would make at each stage (financing, investing, and operating) of the transformation process.

how much did jeni earn for the job how much cash did jeni spend while providing the 579216

Jeni Arrington drives for a large moving company. The company contacts Jeni when it has a job for her and furnishes a truck for her use. Jeni picks up the truck, drives to the customer’s home, and loads, transports, and delivers the customer’s belongings. She returns the truck to the company and receives her pay. Jeni is paid $4.50 per mile for the job. She is responsible for paying for her own gas, food, and lodging. Also, she must hire any helpers she needs to load and unload the truck. Jeni traveled 2,400 miles on a recent job that was completed on June 30. She paid $500 for gas, $116 for food, $204 for lodging, and $100 for helpers. Jeni expects to receive payment on July 5. How much did Jeni earn for the job? How much cash did Jeni spend while providing the service? Why is there a difference in cash flow and net income?

The Hardware Shoppe sold $222,500 of goods during September. It collected $75,000 from these sales plus $165,000 from sales of prior months. Complete the following table:

Cash Flow for
September

Cash Flow
in Future

Sales Revenue
for September

Cash from prior sales

?

Cash from September sales

?

?

?

Total cash received in September

?

wear and tear on the buildings and machinery for the year is estimated to be 42 000 579217

Holes ‘R’ Us, a blasting services company, has the following information available on December 31, the last day of the company’s fiscal year. Each item involves an adjusting entry that must be made before financial statements can be prepared and the books closed for the year. Show how these adjusting entries would be entered into the accounting system.

1. A $35,000 note payable, incurring 9% interest, has been outstanding for the entire year. The note payable was properly recorded when it arose, but no entries regarding this event have been made since.

2. A $12,000 check was received on November 2 from a tenant that subleases part of the company’s headquarters building. The amount was in payment of rent for November, December, and January. When the check was received, Cash was increased and Rent Revenue was increased. (Hint: Use a liability account titled Unearned Rent.)

3. On April 1 of the current year, the company purchased a two year fire insurance policy for $7,200. When the policy was purchased, Cash was decreased and Prepaid Insurance was increased for the entire amount.

4. Wear and tear on the buildings and machinery for the year is estimated to be $42,000.

complete the following table each column represents a different company all receivab 579219

Complete the following table. Each column represents a different company. All receivables are collected in the year following sale.

Company
A

Company
B

Company
C

Cash received from customers during 2004

$300,000

$625,000

?

Sales revenue for 2004

$352,500

$580,000

$260,000

Accounts receivable at beginning of 2004

$31,000

?

$35,000

Accounts receivable at end of 2004

?

$85,000

$53,000

using the spreadsheet format show how this information would be entered into the acc 579220

The following information is available at December 31, the end of the fiscal year. It requires that adjusting entries be identified and entered into the accounting system. Unless specifically noted, none of this information has been previously entered into the accounting system. If the information below were ignored, net income for the year would be $72,400.

1. Employees are owed $9,500 for wages they have earned but will not receive until the next regular payroll distribution in five days.

2. A physical count reveals that there is $5,000 of office supplies remaining on hand at the end of the period. The company started the year with $3,500 of office supplies recorded in the Office Supplies Inventory account. During the year, $14,000 of office supplies was purchased, paid for, and charged to Office Supplies Expense.

3. The basement of the building is rented out to another firm and used for storage. At year end, the $2,000 rent for the month of December had not yet been collected.

4. At the end of the year, the company has long term assets on which $13,600 of depreciation must be recorded.

5. Earlier in the year, a bank loan was obtained and recorded in the accounting system. Since then, interest of $5,200 has been incurred on that loan but it has not yet been recorded or paid.

(a) Using the spreadsheet format, show how this information would be entered into the accounting system. (b) After considering the effects of all five adjusting entries, what is the proper amount of net income that should be reported for the year?

use the format provided and place the appropriate amount in each section of the tabl 579221

Silberman Company transactions are listed below. Indicate the amount of revenue, expense, and cash flow that results from each. Use the format provided, and place the appropriate amount in each section of the table. Use a separate table for each transaction.

a. $5,000 of supplies were purchased in August for cash. $1,500 of the supplies were consumed in August, and $2,500 were consumed in September.

b. $15,000 of merchandise was sold in September. $6,000 of the sales were on credit.

c. Merchandise that cost Silberman $7,500 was sold in September. Silberman had paid $5,000 for the merchandise in August. The rest was paid for in September.

d. $50,000 was borrowed in August. $2,500 will be repaid each month for 20 months beginning in September. (Ignore interest.)

e. $25,000 of equipment was purchased and paid for in August. $500 of the equipment’s revenue generating ability was consumed in September; the remainder will be consumed in the future.

Past

September

Future

Total

Revenues

Expenses

Cash received

Cash paid

explain the difference between cash flows each year and the amount of depreciation e 579224

Rapid Recovery Chemical Company manufactures prescription drugs. On January 1, 2003, the company purchased new equipment for $450,000 in cash. The company will depreciate the equipment over a 3 year period at $150,000 each year. Complete the following table:

2003

2004

2005

Total for 3 Years

Cash paid for equipment

?

?

?

?

Depreciation expense

?

?

?

?

Explain the difference between cash flows each year and the amount of depreciation expense recorded.

wear and tear on the buildings and machinery for the year is estimated to be 35 000 579226

Each of the following independent situations relates to information available on the last day of the year. Each involves an adjustment that must be made to the accounting system before financial statements can be prepared. Show the effects of each adjusting entry on the accounting system.

a. A $15,000 note payable, incurring 8% interest, has been outstanding the entire year. The note payable was properly recorded when it arose.

b. A $3,000 check was received 2 months ago from a tenant that subleases part of a building. The amount was for 6 months’ rent beginning the day the check was received. When received, the entire amount of the check was recorded in a liability account titled Unearned Rent.

c. Exactly halfway through the year just ended, the company purchased a 2 year fire insurance policy for $8,000. When the policy was purchased, the entire amount was recorded in the Prepaid Insurance account.

d. Wear and tear on the buildings and machinery for the year is estimated to be $35,000.

on december 31 2004 the washington music store reported net income of 1 500 and the 579228

On December 31, 2004, the Washington Music Store reported net income of $1,500 and the following account balances.

Cash

$1,375

Accounts receivable

2,100

Prepaid insurance

900

Equipment & furnishings

3,225

Less: Accumulated depreciation

500

Accounts payable

1,100

Wages payable

1,080

Owners’ equity

4,920

After this information was prepared, the bookkeeper discovered that he had forgotten to make two necessary adjusting entries for the year and, therefore, they were not reflected in the balances shown. Information concerning the two missing adjusting entries follows:

a. The prepaid insurance involves a 3 year fire insurance policy that was purchased (and went into effect) on January 1, 2004. By the end of the year, a portion of the insurance policy had been used up.

b. The wages payable does not include the wages that were owed at year end to two workers who had been temporarily assigned to work off the premises. This amount totaled $450.

Using the following schedule, determine the correct year end amount of (1) total assets, (2) total liabilities, (3) owners’ equity, and (4) net income.

Assets

Liabilities

Equity

Net Income

Year end amounts before correction

Adjusting entry (a):

Adjusting entry (b):

Year end corrected amounts

$

$

$

$

after closing what is the amount of owners rsquo equity that will be reported on the 579229

On December 31, 2004, Bert’s Farm Store had the following account balances in its accounting system. All year end adjustments had been entered, but the books had not yet been closed.

Bert’s Farm Store
Account Balances Before Closing
December 31, 2004

Account

Balance

Account

Balance

Cash

$700

Sales Revenue

$2,200

Merchandise

2,800

Cost of Goods Sold

900

Supplies

925

Wages Expense

400

Prepaid Insurance

450

Utilities Expense

150

Equipment

3,550

Depreciation Expense

50

Accumulated Depreciation

1,750

Insurance Expense

100

Interest Payable

150

Supplies Expense

150

Notes Payable

2,000

Interest Expense

100

Owners’ Equity

4,175

a. What is the purpose of closing the books?

b. Prepare all necessary closing entries.

c. After closing, what is the amount of owners’ equity that will be reported on the balance sheet?

prepare a post closing summary of account balances similar to exhibit 13 579230

Constantino Company presented the following general ledger account balances for the month ended December 31, 2005.

Assets:

Cash

20,600

Accounts Receivable

2,250

Equipment

11,000

Total Assets

33,850

Liabilities:

Wages Payable

250

Payable to Internet Service

35

Notes Payable

17,000

Total Liabilities

17,285

Owners’ Equity:

Contributed Capital

13,000

Retained Earnings

1,000

Service Revenue

3,315

Rent Expense

400

Wages Expense

315

Internet Service Expense

35

Total Owners’ Equity

16,565

a. Close the books for Constantino Company.

b. Prepare a post closing summary of account balances similar to Exhibit 13.

prepare the entry to close the revenue and expense accounts at the end of the year 579231

Hydrangea Nurseries had the following general ledger balances at December 31, 2004:

Assets:

Cash

10,000

Accounts Receivable

25,000

Inventory

50,000

Prepaid Insurance

5,000

Equipment

300,000

Accumulated Depreciation

80,000

Total Assets

310,000

Liabilities:

Accounts Payable

35,000

Notes Payable

130,000

Total Liabilities

165,000

Owners’ Equity:

Contributed Capital

90,000

Retained Earnings

45,000

Sales Revenue

300,000

Cost of Goods Sold

140,000

Insurance Expense

5,000

Wages Expense

75,000

Utilities Expense

40,000

Interest Expense

10,000

Depreciation Expense

20,000

Total Owners’ Equity

145,000

a. Prepare the entry to close the revenue and expense accounts at the end of the year.

b. Prepare a post closing summary similar to Exhibit 13.

after all closing entries are entered into the accounting system what will be the am 579232

The accounting staff at Taiwan Manufacturing have prepared the following summary of account balances at year end. The balances include all transactions for the fiscal year except for closing entries.

Account

Balance

Account

Balance

Cash

$1,850

Sales Revenue

$7,600

Merchandise

8,435

Cost of Goods Sold

2,840

Supplies

2,955

Wages Expense

1,015

Prepaid Insurance

1,375

Utilities Expense

550

Equipment

9,650

Depreciation Expense

660

Accumulated Depreciation

4,100

Insurance Expense

495

Interest Payable

425

Supplies Expense

525

Notes Payable

7,000

Interest Expense

300

Owners’ Equity

11,525

a. What is the purpose of closing the books?

b. Prepare all necessary closing entries.

c. After all closing entries are entered into the accounting system, what will be the amount of owners’ equity reported on the balance sheet?

assume that you are called in to advise ms garrison write a memo to her explaining w 579233

Explaining the Difference between Cash and Accrual Accounting The accounting department at Klinger Realty sent the financial reports, as shown below, to Robin Garrison, general manager. Attached was a note indicating that both sets of data are based on the same set of events, which occurred during the quarter just completed. Robin was only recently promoted to this position and is not very knowledgeable about accounting information. After reviewing this report, Robin was somewhat disturbed because she always had thought accounting was an exact process. How, she wondered, can there be two different results from the same set of facts? Furthermore, how could they be so different? Which one is the “true” or “correct” report?

Klinger Realty
Results of Operating Activities
Third Quarter, 2004

Cash Basis

Accrual Basis

Cash receipts/revenues:

Sales commissions

$300,000

$400,000

Property management

210,000

165,000

Total

$510,000

$565,000

Cash payments/expenses:

Office employee wages

53,000

48,000

Advertising

10,000

90,000

Office supplies

0

3,400

Depreciation—office

equipment

0

1,800

Rent

6,000

6,000

Sales staff commissions

150,000

200,000

Property managers’ salaries

116,000

90,000

Total

335,000

439,200

Net cash flow

$175,000

$125,800

Net income

Required Assume that you are called in to advise Ms. Garrison. Write a memo to her explaining why there can be two measures of operating results and why they differ.

what problems do you see with hardy rsquo s reasoning is there an ethical problem wi 579234

Ethics and Accounting Measurement Hardy Rock is proprietor of a jewelry store. In January, he applied for a bank loan and was asked to submit an income statement for the past year, ending in December. Near the end of the prior year, Hardy had purchased merchandise for resale that cost him $60,000. He still owed $45,000 for this merchandise at year end. Half of the merchandise was sold during the Christmas holidays for $75,000. Customers owed Hardy $50,000 for these purchases at year end. Hardy included these transactions as part of his financial statements as follows:

Added to revenues

$75,000

Added to expenses

7,500

Added to net income

$67,500

Hardy reasoned that because he had sold half the merchandise in December, he should report it as revenue, though he had not received all of the cash from customers. Also, he reasoned that because he had paid $15,000 for the merchandise by year end and had sold half of the merchandise, he should report $7,500 of this amount as cost of goods sold.

Required What problems do you see with Hardy’s reasoning? Is there an ethical problem with Hardy’s treatment of these transactions? What should the effect of these transactions have been on net income?

daisy uses accrual basis accounting for which of the events above should revenue be 579235

Revenue Recognition and Accrual Accounting Daisy Political Consultants has been in existence for many years. During the month of November, the following events occurred:

1. The owners contributed an additional $6,500 to the business to finance an expansion of operations.

2. Consulting services totaling $11,000 were performed on credit during November and billed to customers.

3. A loan in the amount of $25,000 was obtained from a wealthy campaign contributor.

4. Expenses in the amount of $6,000 were incurred during the month. One third had been paid for by month end.

5. Cash of $18,500 was collected from customers for whom services had been performed during September and October.

6. Services totaling $4,500 were performed for customers who had paid in the previous month for the services.

Required Daisy uses accrual basis accounting. For which of the events above should revenue be recorded in November? In each case, how much revenue should be recorded? If an event does not involve revenue, specify why not.

helping hands uses accrual basis accounting for which of the events above should an 579238

Expense Recognition and Accrual Accounting The local chapter of Helping Hands, a social service organization, had the following economic events occur during the month of May:

1. A luncheon honoring volunteers was held at a cost of $950. By month end the bill hadn’t been received or paid.

2. New letterhead and envelopes were printed at a cost of $625 and paid for. The new items will not be used, however, until the old supply is exhausted sometime in June.

3. The executive director was paid her usual salary of $3,800 during May.

4. Prizes, ribbons, and awards for events upcoming in July were delivered by the supplier, who charged $10,175. The amount was paid in cash.

5. The electric bill for April totaled $163 and was paid in full.

6. Radio, TV, and newspaper advertising related to a special fund raising campaign ran during May. The $7,550 cost had been paid in April.

Required Helping Hands uses accrual basis accounting. For which of the events above should an expense be recorded in May? In each case, how much expense should be recorded? If an event does not involve an expense, specify why not.

determine a the amount of cash collected from customers during the month b the amoun 579239

Converting Net Income to Cash Flow Middle East Importers reports the following accrual basis information for a recent month.

Total revenue from sales to customers

$90,000

Total expenses

69,000

Net income

$21,000

In addition, the following account information is known:

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Payable

Beginning of month balance

$9,000

$15,000

End of month balance

21,000

9,000

Required Determine (a) the amount of cash collected from customers during the month, (b) the amount of cash paid out for expenses during the month, and (c) the net cash flow for the month.

prepare an accrual basis income statement for the company rsquo s first year in busi 579240

Converting Net Cash Flow to Net Income Khim Lee Company reported the following cash flow information at the end of its first year in business:

Cash received from customers

$235,000

Cash paid out to suppliers of inventory

55,000

Cash paid out to employees

77,500

Cash paid out for advertising

12,500

Cash paid out for taxes

30,000

Net cash flow for the year

$60,000

Also known at year end was the following:

Amounts not yet collected from customers

$85,000

Amounts owed to suppliers

15,000

Wages owed to employees

22,500

Additional taxes still owed

10,000

Amount remaining in inventory

0

Required Prepare an accrual basis income statement for the company’s first year in business.

advise the other partners as to whether they should sell out to support your advice 579241

Ethics and Accounting Measurement Tinker, Evers, and Chance are partners in a sports equipment megastore. Tinker keeps the accounting records for the partnership because he is skilled in accounting and the other partners are not. The partners have agreed that they will share equally in the company’s profits (or losses) at the end of each year. For fiscal 2004, the first year of operations, the company sold $7,600,000 of merchandise. Of this amount, $1,400,000 was still owed to the company by customers at year end. The company purchased and paid for merchandise costing $4,300,000 during 2004; $1,000,000 of this merchandise remained in inventory at year end.

The company purchased and paid for $1,400,000 of equipment during the year. The equipment should have a useful life of 7 years. Thus depreciation expenses would be $200,000 each year. Other expenses amounted to $650,000, all paid for in cash. Tinker has prepared the following income statement and distribution of profits for 2004:

Tinker, Evers, and Chance
Income Statement
For Year 2004

Revenues

$6,200,000

Expenses:

Merchandise

$4,300,000

Equipment

1,400,000

Other

650,000

Total expenses

6,350,000

Net loss

$150,000

Distribution of net loss:

Reduction in owners’ capital:

Tinker

$50,000

Evers

50,000

Chance

50,000

Total distribution of net loss

$150,000

Evers and Chance are mystified by these results because they thought the company had been performing above their expectations. Tinker assured his partners that his numbers were correct. Tinker has offered to buy out his partners, explaining that “he got ‘em into this and should do the right thing.” Of course, the other partners will lose half of their original investment if they sell.

Required

A. What problems do you see with Tinker’s financial report?

B. Advise the other partners as to whether they should sell out. To support your advice, prepare a revised income statement incorporating any changes you think appropriate to support a prudent decision.

determine the weighted average number of shares that melton corporation would use in 579127

(Basic EPS: Two Year Presentation) Melton Corporation is preparing the comparative financial statements for the annual report to its shareholders for fiscal years ended May 31, 2012, and May 31, 2013. The income from operations for each year was $1,800,000 and $2,500,000, respectively. In both years, the company incurred a 10% interest expense on $2,400,000 of debt, an obligation that requires interest only payments for 5 years. The company experienced a loss of $600,000 from a fire in its Scots land facility in February 2013, which was determined to be an extraordinary loss. The company uses a 40% effective tax rate for income taxes. The capital structure of Melton Corporation on June 1, 2011, consisted of 1 million shares of common stock outstanding and 20,000 shares of $50 par value, 6%, cumulative preferred stock. There were no preferred dividends in arrears, and the company had not issued any convertible securities, options, or warrants. On October 1, 2011, Melton sold an additional 500,000 shares of the common stock at $20 per share. Melton distributed a 20% stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on January 1, 2012. On December 1, 2012, Melton was able to sell an additional 800,000 shares of the common stock at $22 per share. These were the only common stock transactions that occurred during the two fiscal years.

Instructions

(a) Identify whether the capital structure at Melton Corporation is a simple or complex capital structure, and explain why.

(b) Determine the weighted average number of shares that Melton Corporation would use in calculating earnings per share for the fiscal year ended:

(1) May 31, 2012.

(2) May 31, 2013.

(c) Prepare, in good form, a comparative income statement, beginning with income from operations, for Melton Corporation for the fiscal years ended May 31, 2012, and May 31, 2013. This statement will be included in Melton’s annual report and should display the appropriate earnings per share presentations.

determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year 579128

(Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS) Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.

2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.

Price per Share

July 1, 2012

$20.00

January 1, 2013

21.00

April 1, 2013

25.00

July 1, 2013

11.00

August 1, 2013

10.50

November 1, 2013

9.00

December 31, 2013

10.00

3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.

4. Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.

5. The after tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $11,550,000.

The following specific activities took place during 2013.

1. January 1—A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

2. April 1—A total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

3. July 1—A 2 for 1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

4. August 1—A total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

5. November 1—A total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

6. Common stock cash dividends—Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

April 15—$0.30 per share October 15—$0.20 per share

7. Preferred stock cash dividends—Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

Instructions

(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

(b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

(c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

there were no changes during 2013 in the number of common shares preferred shares or 579129

(Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS) The information below pertains to Barkley Company for 2013.

Net income for the year

$1,200,000

8% convertible bonds issued at par ($1,000 per bond); each bond is convertible 30 shares of common stock

2,000,000

6% convertible, cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value; each share is convertible

into 3 shares of common stock

4,000,000

Common stock, $10 par value

6,000,000

Tax rate for 2013

40%

Average market price of common stock

$25 per share

There were no changes during 2013 in the number of common shares, preferred shares, or convertible bonds outstanding. There is no treasury stock. The company also has common stock options (granted in a prior year) to purchase 75,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share.

Instructions

(a) Compute basic earnings per share for 2013.

(b) Compute diluted earnings per share for 2013.

explain why agassi corporation is considered to have a simple capital structure 579130

(EPS with Stock Dividend and Extraordinary Items) Agassi Corporation is preparing the comparative financial statements to be included in the annual report to stockholders. Agassi employs a fiscal year ending May 31. Income from operations before income taxes for Agassi was $1,400,000 and $660,000, respectively, for fiscal years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. Agassi experienced an extraordinary loss of $400,000 because of an earthquake on March 3, 2013. A 40% combined income tax rate pertains to any and all of Agassi Corporation’s profits, gains, and losses. Agassi’s capital structure consists of preferred stock and common stock. The company has not issued any convertible securities or warrants and there are no outstanding stock options. Agassi issued 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 6% cumulative preferred stock in 2009. All of this stock is outstanding, and no preferred dividends are in arrears. There were 1,000,000 shares of $1 par common stock outstanding on June 1, 2011. On September 1, 2011, Agassi sold an additional 400,000 shares of the common stock at $17 per share. Agassi distributed a 20% stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on December 1, 2012. These were the only common stock transactions during the past 2 fiscal years.

Instructions

(a) Determine the weighted average number of common shares that would be used in computing earnings per share on the current comparative income statement for:

(1) The year ended May 31, 2012.

(2) The year ended May 31, 2013.

(b) Starting with income from operations before income taxes, prepare a comparative income statement for the years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. The statement will be part of Agassi Corporation’s annual report to stockholders and should include appropriate earnings per share presentation.

(c) The capital structure of a corporation is the result of its past financing decisions. Furthermore, the earnings per share data presented on a corporation’s financial statements is dependent upon the capital structure.

(1) Explain why Agassi Corporation is considered to have a simple capital structure.

(2) Describe how earnings per share data would be presented for a corporation that has a complex capital structure.

describe the differences that exist in current accounting for original proceeds of t 579131

(Warrants Issued with Bonds and Convertible Bonds) Incurring long term debt with an arrangement whereby lenders receive an option to buy common stock during all or a portion of the time the debt is outstanding is a frequent corporate financing practice. In some situations, the result is achieved through the issuance of convertible bonds; in others, the debt instruments and the warrants to buy stock are separate.

Instructions

(a) (1) Describe the differences that exist in current accounting for original proceeds of the issuance of convertible bonds and of debt instruments with separate warrants to purchase common stock.

(2) Discuss the underlying rationale for the differences described in (a) (1) above.

(3) Summarize the arguments that have been presented in favor of accounting for convertible bonds in the same manner as accounting for debt with separate warrants.

(b) At the start of the year, Huish Company issued $18,000,000 of 12% bonds along with warrants to buy 1,200,000 shares of its $10 par value common stock at $18 per share. The bonds mature over the next 10 years, starting one year from date of issuance, with annual maturities of $1,800,000. At the time, Huish had 9,600,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and the market price was $23 per share. The company received $20,040,000 for the bonds and the warrants. For Huish Company, 12% was a relatively low borrowing rate. If offered alone, at this time, the bonds would have been issued at a 22% discount. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) for the issuance of the bonds and warrants for the cash consideration received.

should devers rsquo s knowledge of the compensation plan be a factor that influences 579132

(Ethical Issues—Compensation Plan) The executive officers of Rouse Corporation have a performance based compensation plan. The performance criteria of this plan is linked to growth in earnings per share. When annual EPS growth is 12%, the Rouse executives earn 100% of the shares; if growth is 16%, they earn 125%. If EPS growth is lower than 8%, the executives receive no additional compensation. In 2012, Gail Devers, the controller of Rouse, reviews year end estimates of bad debt expense and warranty expense. She calculates the EPS growth at 15%. Kurt Adkins, a member of the executive group, remarks over lunch one day that the estimate of bad debt expense might be decreased, increasing EPS growth to 16.1%. Devers is not sure she should do this because she believes that the current estimate of bad debts is sound. On the other hand, she recognizes that a great deal of subjectivity is involved in the computation.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What, if any, is the ethical dilemma for Devers?

(b) Should Devers’s knowledge of the compensation plan be a factor that influences her estimate?

(c) How should Devers respond to Adkins’s request?

describe the information that should be disclosed in financial statements or notes t 579133

(Stock Warrants—Various Types) For various reasons a corporation may issue warrants to purchase shares of its common stock at specified prices that, depending on the circumstances, may be less than, equal to, or greater than the current market price. For example, warrants may be issued:

1. To existing stockholders on a pro rata basis.

2. To certain key employees under an incentive stock option plan.

3. To purchasers of the corporation’s bonds.

Instructions

For each of the three examples of how stock warrants are used:

(a) Explain why they are used.

(b) Discuss the significance of the price (or prices) at which the warrants are issued (or granted) in relation to (1) the current market price of the company’s stock, and (2) the length of time over which they can be exercised.

(c) Describe the information that should be disclosed in financial statements, or notes thereto, that are prepared when stock warrants are outstanding in the hands of the three groups listed above.

what are the major recommendations of the stock based compensation pronouncement 579134

(Stock Compensation Plans) The following two items appeared on the Internet concerning the GAAP requirement to expense stock options. WASHINGTON, D.C.—February 17, 2005 Congressman David Dreier (R–CA), Chairman of the House Rules Committee, and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D–CA) reintroduced legislation today that will preserve broad based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares. “Last year, the U.S. House of Representatives overwhelmingly voted for legislation that would have ensured the continued ability of innovative companies to offer stock options to rank and file employees,” Dreier stated. “Both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) continue to ignore our calls to address legitimate concerns about the impact of FASB’s new standard on workers’ ability to have an ownership stake in the New Economy, and its failure to address the real need of shareholders: accurate and meaningful information about a company’s use of stock options.” “In December 2004, FASB issued a stock option expensing standard that will render a huge blow to the 21st century economy,” Dreier said. “Their action and the SEC’s apparent lack of concern for protecting shareholders, requires us to once again take a firm stand on the side of investors and economic growth. Giving investors the ability to understand how stock options impact the value of their shares is critical. And equally important is preserving the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.” “Here We Go Again!” by Jack Ciesielski On February 17, Congressman David Dreier (R–CA), and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D–CA), officially entered Silicon Valley’s bid to gum up the launch of honest reporting of stock option compensation: They co sponsored a bill to “preserve broad based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.” You know what “critical information” they mean: stuff like the stock compensation for the top five officers in a company, with a rigged value set as close to zero as possible. Investors crave this kind of information. Other ways the good Congresspersons want to “help” investors: The bill “also requires the SEC to study the effectiveness of those disclosures over three years, during which time, no new accounting standard related to the treatment of stock options could be recognized. Finally, the bill requires the Secretary of Commerce to conduct a study and report to Congress on the impact of broad based employee stock option plans on expanding employee corporate ownership, skilled worker recruitment and retention, research and innovation, economic growth, and international competitiveness.” It’s the old “four corners” basketball strategy: stall, stall, stall. In the meantime, hope for regime change at your opponent, the FASB.

Instructions

(a) What are the major recommendations of the stock based compensation pronouncement?

(b) How do the provisions of GAAP in this area differ from the bill introduced by members of Congress (Dreier and Eshoo), which would require expensing for options issued to only the top five officers in a company? Which approach do you think would result in more useful information? (Focus on comparability.)

(c) The bill in Congress urges the FASB to develop a rule that preserves “the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.” Write a response to these Congress people explaining the importance of neutrality in financial accounting and reporting.

explain how dividends or dividend requirements on any class of preferred stock that 579135

(EPS: Preferred Dividends, Options, and Convertible Debt) “Earnings per share” (EPS) is the most featured, single financial statistic about modern corporations. Daily published quotations of stock prices have recently been expanded to include for many securities a “times earnings” figure that is based on EPS. Stock analysts often focus their discussions on the EPS of the corporations they study.

Instructions

(a) Explain how dividends or dividend requirements on any class of preferred stock that may be outstanding affect the computation of EPS.

(b) One of the technical procedures applicable in EPS computations is the “treasury stock method.” Briefly describe the circumstances under which it might be appropriate to apply the treasury stock method.

(c) Convertible debentures are considered potentially dilutive common shares. Explain how convertible debentures are handled for purposes of EPS computations.

the exercise at below market price but above book value of a common stock option iss 579136

(EPS Concepts and Effect of Transactions on EPS) Chorkina Corporation, a new audit client of yours, has not reported earnings per share data in its annual reports to stockholders in the past. The treasurer, Beth Botsford, requested that you furnish information about the reporting of earnings per share data in the current year’s annual report in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

Instructions

(a) Define the term “earnings per share” as it applies to a corporation with a capitalization structure composed of only one class of common stock. Explain how earnings per share should be computed and how the information should be disclosed in the corporation’s financial statements.

(b) Discuss the treatment, if any that should be given to each of the following items in computing earnings per share of common stock for financial statement reporting.

(1) Outstanding preferred stock issued at a premium with a par value liquidation right.

(2) The exercise at below market price but above book value of a common stock option issued during the current fiscal year to officers of the corporation.

(3) The replacement of a machine immediately prior to the close of the current fiscal year at a cost 20% above the original cost of the replaced machine. The new machine will perform the same function as the old machine that was sold for its book value.

(4) The declaration of current dividends on cumulative preferred stock.

(5) The acquisition of some of the corporation’s outstanding common stock during the current fiscal year. The stock was classified as treasury stock.

(6) A 2 for 1 stock split of common stock during the current fiscal year.

(7) A provision created out of retained earnings for a contingent liability from a possible lawsuit.

write mr dolan a 1 ndash 1 5 page letter explaining why the warrants are not include 579137

(EPS, Antidilution) Brad Dolan, a stockholder of Rhode Corporation, has asked you, the firm’s accountant, to explain why his stock warrants were not included in diluted EPS. In order to explain this situation, you must briefly explain what dilutive securities are, why they are included in the EPS calculation, and why some securities are antidilutive and thus not included in this calculation. Rhode Corporation earned $228,000 during the period, when it had an average of 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The common stock sold at an average market price of $25 per share during the period. Also outstanding were 30,000 warrants that could be exercised to purchase one share of common stock at $30 per warrant.

Instructions

Write Mr. Dolan a 1–1.5 page letter explaining why the warrants are not included in the calculation.

discuss the propriety of this accounting treatment 579143

Four years after issue, debentures with a face value of $1,000,000 and book value of $960,000 are tendered for conversion into 80,000 ordinary shares immediately after an interest payment date. At that time, the market price of the debentures is 104, and the ordinary shares are selling at $14 per share (par value $10). At date of issue, the company needed Share Premium—Conversion Equity of $50,000. The company records the conversion as follows.

Bonds Payable

960,000

Share Premium—Conversion Equity

50,000

Share Capital—Ordinary

800,000

Share Premium—Ordinary

210,000

Discuss the propriety of this accounting treatment.

prepare the journal entry to record the repurchase of the convertible bond for cash 579144

Angela Corporation issues 2,000 convertible bonds at January 1, 2011. The bonds have a three year life, and are issued at par with a face value of $1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of $2,000,000. Interest is payable annually at 6 percent. Each bond is convertible into 250 ordinary shares (par value of $1). When the bonds are issued, the market rate of interest for similar debt without the conversion option is 8%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the liability and equity component of the convertible bond on January 1, 2011.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the convertible bond on January 1, 2011.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record the repurchase of the convertible bond for cash at January 1, 2014, its maturity date.

prepare the journal entry ies for the fi rst year of the plan assuming that rather t 579155

Assume that Sarazan Company has a share option plan for top management. Each share option represents the right to purchase a $1 par value ordinary share in the future at a price equal to the fair value of the shares at the date of the grant. Sarazan has 5,000 share options outstanding, which were granted at the beginning of 2012. The following data relate to the option grant.

Exercise price for options

$40

Market price at grant date (January 1, 2012)

$40

Fair value of options at grant date (January 1, 2012)

$6

Service period

5 years

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry (ies) for the fi rst year of the share option plan.

(b) Prepare the journal entry (ies) for the fi rst year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted shares were granted at the beginning of 2012.

(c) Now assume that the market price of Sarazan shares on the grant date was $45 per share. Repeat the requirements for (a) and (b).

(d) Sarazan would like to implement an employee share purchase plan for rankand file employees, but it would like to avoid recording expense related to this plan. Explain how employee share purchase plans are recorded.

briefly discuss the objectives for the accounting for share based compensation what 579156

Richardson Company is contemplating the establishment of a share based compensation plan to provide long run incentives for its top management. However, members of the compensation committee of the board of directors have voiced some concerns about adopting these plans, based on news accounts related to a recent accounting standard in this area. They would like you to conduct some research on this recent standard so they can be better informed about the accounting for these plans.

Instructions

When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser to respond to the following questions. (Provide paragraph citations.)

(a) Identify the authoritative literature that addresses the accounting for share based payment compensation plans.

(b) Briefly discuss the objectives for the accounting for share based compensation. What is the role of fair value measurement?

(c) The Richardson Company board is also considering an employee share purchase plan, but the Board does not want to record expense related to the plan. What are the IFRS requirements for the accounting for an employee share purchase plan?

show how the events above would be entered into the accounting system using the form 579185

Recording Transactions Larrisa Enterprises, Inc., owns and operates a chain of mini mart stores in a popular summer resort area.

Business is highly seasonal with about 80% of annual sales occurring during June,

July, and August. Shown below are transactions that occurred during the first week of June.

June 3 Merchandise costing $120,000 was purchased from a supplier using cash.

4Dividends of $25,000 were distributed to owners for their own personal use. (Hint: Dividends reduce Retained Earnings.)

5 Goods costing $112,000 were sold to customers for $140,000 cash.

5 Advertising was run in local newspapers during the first week. The bill, for $9,000, was paid on June 5.

6 Electricity, water, natural gas, and Internet charges totaling $450 were paid in cash.6 Display equipment was purchased for $15,000 cash. 7 Employees were paid a total of $12,900 for all work performed through the end of the first week of June.

Required Show how the events above would be entered into the accounting system using the format demonstrated in the chapter. Beginning balances are provided below:

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Beginning Amounts

90,000

150,000

80,000

60,000

100,000

prepare a statement of cash flows for the college shop 579187

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows During January, The College Shop had the following cash flows:

Cash paid for merchandise

$4,000

Cash paid for rent

5,300

Cash received from sales to customers

13,000

Cash paid for utilities

200

Cash received from owners

9,000

Cash paid for equipment

7,000

Cash paid for insurance

2,500

Cash received from a bank loan

10,500

Cash paid for wages

1,200

The beginning cash balance was $4,000.

Required Prepare a statement of cash flows for The College Shop.

what kinds of changes might the owners make if the return on assets is not acceptabl 579188

Financial Analysis Holiday Travel Store is a retailer that sells merchandise at a family campground. The company’s most recent income statement and balance sheet are presented below:

Holiday Travel Store
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2004

Sales revenue

$75,000

Cost of goods sold

43,000

Wages expense

15,000

Supplies expense

3,500

Utilities expense

2,000

Rent expense

8,000

Net income

$3,500

Holiday Travel Store
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2004

Assets

Cash

$900

Merchandise inventory

7,000

Equipment

20,000

Total assets

$27,900

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Notes payable

$15,500

Contributed capital

10,000

Retained earnings

2,400

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$27,900

Required

A. Calculate Holiday Travel Store’s return on assets.

B. Explain what the ratio means.

C. What kinds of changes might the owners make if the return on assets is not acceptable?

the statement of cash flows for the halyard exploration company reported the followi 579198

The statement of cash flows for the Halyard Exploration Company reported the following:

Cash paid for equipment

$300,000

Cash paid to employees

400,000

Cash paid to owners

150,000

Cash paid to suppliers

560,000

Cash received from customers

1,200,000

What were Halyard’s net cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities?

Operating

Investing

Financing

$240,000

($300,000)

($150,000)

$500,000

($860,000)

$200,000

$640,000

($860,000)

$200,000

$240,000

($860,000)

$200,000

what information does frank rsquo s current accounting system provide him 579200

Designing an Accounting Information System For about a year, Frank Poppa has been operating a hot dog stand in the parking lot of a major discount retailer in a suburban area. The stand appears to be a pushcart but is actually a small trailer that is towed from home each day. Frank cleverly designed the stand to includestorage compartments, napkins, and the like. What started out as a “weekend gig” to pick up a few extra bucks has turned into a full time occupation. Frank soon found that on a hot summer day, he could easily take in more than $1,000 from sales of a full line of fancy hot dogs and cold sodas. About four months ago, Frank decided to expand to more locations. He found that large discount retailers were quite happy to provide him adequate space near the front door because customers enjoyed the convenience and the stand helped build traffic for the retailer.

Frank formed Poppa’s Dogs Company and negotiated contracts with several retailers to provide pushcart operations outside their stores. The contracts generally call for Poppa’s Dogs to pay a location fee to the retailer plus 3% of the pushcart’s sales.

Frank plans to be very careful when hiring the people necessary to operate the five new pushcart locations. He is confident that he can assess good moral character and avoid hiring anyone who would take advantage of him. Frank will have to spend about $3,000 for each new pushcart and related equipment. In addition, he will have to finance an inventory of hot dogs, condiments, and sodas for each location. A local bank has agreed to provide financing. Until now, Frank has maintained an informal accounting system consisting of an envelope full of receipts and his personal checking account. The system has served him well enough so far, but he is finding that more and more he is getting his personal financial activities confused with those of his business. Frank is positive that the business is profitable because he seems to have more money left at the end of the month than he did when he was working full time as an auto mechanic. He has decided he needs a better accounting system and has decided to consult with a CPA he knows to see what she might recommend.

Required What information does Frank’s current accounting system provide him? What additional information should Frank want from an improved accounting system? Make recommendations to Frank regarding how he can improve his accounting system and identify a chart (list) of accounts that you would expect to find in Frank’s new accounting system. For each account, identify whether it is an asset, liability, owner’s equity, revenue, or expense.

prepare a schedule that shows the amount of compensation expense allocable to each y 579119

(Stock Appreciation Rights) On December 31, 2009, Flessel Company issues 120,000 stock appreciation rights to its officers entitling them to receive cash for the difference between the market price of its stock and a pre established price of $10. The fair value of the SARs is estimated to be $4 per SAR on December 31, 2010; $1 on December 31, 2011; $11 on December 31, 2012; and $9 on December 31, 2013. The service period is 4 years, and the exercise period is 7 years.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule that shows the amount of compensation expense allocable to each year affected by the stock appreciation rights plan.

(b) Prepare the entry at December 31, 2013, to record compensation expense, if any, in 2013.

(c) Prepare the entry on December 31, 2013, assuming that all 120,000 SARs are exercised.

prepare the journal entry for compensation expense in 2011 2014 and 2015 relative to 579120

(Stock Appreciation Rights) Derrick Company establishes a stock appreciation rights program that entitles its new president, Dan Scott, to receive cash for the difference between the market price of the stock and a pre established price of $30 (also market price) on January 1, 2011, on 40,000 SARs. The date of grant is January 1, 2011, and the required employment (service) period is 4 years. President Scott exercises all of the SARs in 2016. The fair value of the SARs is estimated to be $6 per SAR on December 31, 2011; $9 on December 31, 2012; $15 on December 31, 2013; $8 on December 31, 2014; and $18 on December 31, 2015.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a 5 year (2011–2015) schedule of compensation expense pertaining to the 40,000 SARs granted to President Scott.

(b) Prepare the journal entry for compensation expense in 2011, 2014, and 2015 relative to the 40,000 SARs.

compute the earnings per share on common stock for the current year as it should be 579121

(EPS: Simple Capital Structure) A portion of the statement of income and retained earnings of Pierson Inc. for the current year follows.

Income before extraordinary item

$15,000,000

Extraordinary loss, net of applicable income tax (Note 1)

1,340,000

Net income

13,660,000

Retained earnings at the beginning of the year

83,250,000

96,910,000

Dividends declared:

On preferred stock—$6.00 per share

$ 300,000

On common stock—$1.75 per share

14,000,000

14,300,000

Retained earnings at the end of the year

$82,610,000

At the end of the current year, Pierson Inc. has outstanding 8,000,000 shares of $10 par common stock and 50,000 shares of 6% preferred.

On April 1 of the current year, Pierson Inc. issued 1,000,000 shares of common stock for $32 per share to help finance the casualty.

Instructions

Compute the earnings per share on common stock for the current year as it should be reported to stockholders.

assuming a 40 tax rate compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the 579122

(EPS: Simple Capital Structure) On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.

6% Cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value, issued and outstanding 10,000 shares

$1,000,000

Common stock, $10 par value, issued and outstanding 200,000 shares

2,000,000

To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 170,000 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.

Date of Acquisition

Shares Issued

Company A April 1, 2012

60,000

Company B July 1, 2012

80,000

Company C October 1, 2012

30,000

On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $90,000 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000. On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $300,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.

Instructions

Assuming a 40% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary.

prepare general journal entries for the current year to record the transactions list 579123

(Entries for Various Dilutive Securities) The stockholders’ equity section of Martino Inc. at the beginning of the current year appears below.

Common stock, $10 par value, authorized 1,000,000
shares, 300,000 shares issued and outstanding

$3,000,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

600,000

Retained earnings

570,000

During the current year, the following transactions occurred.

1. The company issued to the stockholders 100,000 rights. Ten rights are needed to buy one share of stock at $32. The rights were void after 30 days. The market price of the stock at this time was $34 per share.

2. The company sold to the public a $200,000, 10% bond issue at 104. The company also issued with each $100 bond one detachable stock purchase warrant, which provided for the purchase of common stock at $30 per share. Shortly after issuance, similar bonds without warrants were selling at 96 and the warrants at $8.

3. All but 5,000 of the rights issued in (1) were exercised in 30 days.

4. At the end of the year, 80% of the warrants in (2) had been exercised, and the remaining were outstanding and in good standing.

5. During the current year, the company granted stock options for 10,000 shares of common stock to company executives. The company, using a fair value option pricing model, determines that each option is worth $10. The option price is $30. The options were to expire at year end and were considered compensation for the current year.

6. All but 1,000 shares related to the stock option plan were exercised by year end. The expiration resulted because one of the executives failed to fulfill an obligation related to the employment contract.

Instructions

(a) Prepare general journal entries for the current year to record the transactions listed above.

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at the end of the current year. Assume that retained earnings at the end of the current year are $750,000.

prepare the journal entries to record the conversion amortization and interest in co 579124

(Entries for Conversion, Amortization, and Interest of Bonds) Volker Inc. issued $2,500,000 of convertible 10 year bonds on July 1, 2012. The bonds provide for 12% interest payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. The discount in connection with the issue was $54,000, which is being amortized monthly on a straight line basis. The bonds are convertible after one year into 8 shares of Volker Inc.’s $100 par value common stock for each $1,000 of bonds. On August 1, 2013, $250,000 of bonds was turned in for conversion into common stock. Interest has been accrued monthly and paid as due. At the time of conversion, any accrued interest on bonds being converted is paid in cash.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record the conversion, amortization, and interest in connection with the bonds as of the following dates.

(a) August 1, 2013. (Assume the book value method is used.)

(b) August 31, 2013.

(c) December 31, 2013, including closing entries for end of year.

prepare the necessary journal entries in 2011 when the stock option plan was adopted 579125

(Stock Option Plan) Berg Company adopted a stock option plan on November 30, 2011, that provided that 70,000 shares of $5 par value stock be designated as available for the granting of options to officers of the corporation at a price of $9 a share. The market price was $12 a share on November 30, 2012. On January 2, 2012, options to purchase 28,000 shares were granted to President Tom Winter—15,000 for services to be rendered in 2012 and 13,000 for services to be rendered in 2013. Also on that date, options to purchase 14,000 shares were granted to vice president Michelle Bennett—7,000 for services to be rendered in 2012 and 7,000 for services to be rendered in 2013. The market price of the stock was $14 a share on January 2, 2012. The options were exercisable for a period of one year following the year in which the services were rendered. The fair value of the options on the grant date was $4 per option. In 2013, neither the president nor the vice president exercised their options because the market price of the stock was below the exercise price. The market price of the stock was $8 a share on December 31, 2013, when the options for 2012 services lapsed. On December 31, 2014, both president winter and vice president Bennett exercised their options for 13,000 and 7,000 shares, respectively, when the market price was $16 a share.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries in 2011 when the stock option plan was adopted, in 2012 when options were granted, in 2013 when options lapsed, and in 2014 when options were exercised.

prepare the journal entry ies for the first year of the plan assuming that rather th 579126

(Stock Based Compensation) Assume that Amazon has a stock option plan for top management. Each stock option represents the right to purchase a share of Amazon $1 par value common stock in the future at a price equal to the fair value of the stock at the date of the grant. Amazon has 5,000 stock options outstanding, which were granted at the beginning of 2012. The following data relate to the option grant.

Exercise price for options

$40

Market price at grant date (January 1, 2012)

$40

Fair value of options at grant date (January 1, 2012)

$6

Service period

5 years

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry (ies) for the first year of the stock option plan.

(b) Prepare the journal entry (ies) for the first year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted stock were granted at the beginning of 2012.

(c) Now assume that the market price of Amazon stock on the grant date was $45 per share. Repeat the requirements for (a) and (b).

(d) Amazon would like to implement an employee stock purchase plan for rank and file employees, but it would like to avoid recording expense related to this plan. Which of the following provisions must be in place for the plan to avoid recording compensation expense?

(1) Substantially all employees may participate.

(2) The discount from market is small (less than 5%).

(3) The plan offers no substantive option feature.

(4) There is no preferred stock outstanding.

prepare the entry to record the interest expense at october 1 2012 assume that accru 579095

(Conversion of Bonds) Schuss Inc. issued $3,000,000 of 10%, 10 year convertible bonds on June 1, 2012, at 98 plus accrued interest. The bonds were dated April 1, 2012, with interest payable April 1 and October 1. Bond discount is amortized semiannually on a straight line basis. On April 1, 2013, $1,000,000 of these bonds was converted into 30,000 shares of $20 par value common stock. Accrued interest was paid in cash at the time of conversion.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entry to record the interest expense at October 1, 2012. Assume that accrued interest payable was credited when the bonds were issued.

(b) Prepare the entry (ies) to record the conversion on April 1, 2013. (The book value method is used.) Assume that the entry to record amortization of the bond discount and interest payment has been made.

record the conversions using the book value method 579098

(Conversion of Bonds) On January 1, 2011, Trillini Corporation issued $3,000,000 of 10 year, 8% convertible debentures at 102. Interest is to be paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Each $1,000 debenture can be converted into eight shares of Trillini Corporation $100 par value common stock after December 31, 2012. On January 1, 2013, $600,000 of debentures are converted into common stock, which is then selling at $110. An additional $600,000 of debentures is converted on March 31, 2013. The market price of the common stock is then $115. Accrued interest at March 31 will be paid on the next interest date. Bond premium is amortized on a straight line basis.

Instructions

Make the necessary journal entries for:

(a) December 31, 2012.

(b) January 1, 2013.

(c) March 31, 2013.

(d) June 30, 2013.

Record the conversions using the book value method.

prepare journal entries relating to the stock option plan for the years 2012 2013 an 579102

(Issuance and Exercise of Stock Options) On November 1, 2011, Olympic Company adopted a stock option plan that granted options to key executives to purchase 40,000 shares of the company’s $10 par value common stock. The options were granted on January 2, 2012, and were exercisable 2 years after the date of grant if the grantee was still an employee of the company. The options expired 6 years from date of grant. The option price was set at $40, and the fair value option pricing model determines the total compensation expense to be $600,000. All of the options were exercised during the year 2014: 30,000 on January 3 when the market price was $67, and 10,000 on May 1 when the market price was $77 a share.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries relating to the stock option plan for the years 2012, 2013, and 2014. Assume that the employee performs services equally in 2012 and 2013.

prepare journal entries to record issuance of the stock options termination of the s 579103

(Issuance, Exercise, and Termination of Stock Options) On January 1, 2012, Magilla Inc. granted stock options to officers and key employees for the purchase of 20,000 shares of the company’s $10 par common stock at $25 per share. The options were exercisable within a 5 year period beginning January 1, 2014, by grantees still in the employ of the company, and expiring December 31, 2016. The service period for this award is 2 years. Assume that the fair value option pricing model determines total compensation expense to be $400,000. On April 1, 2013, 3,000 options were terminated when the employees resigned from the company. The market price of the common stock was $35 per share on this date. On March 31, 2014, 12,000 options were exercised when the market price of the common stock was $40 per share.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries to record issuance of the stock options, termination of the stock options, exercise of the stock options, and charges to compensation expense, for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014.

prepare the necessary journal entries related to the stock option plan for the years 579104

(Issuance, Exercise, and Termination of Stock Options) On January 1, 2011, Scooby Corporation granted 10,000 options to key executives. Each option allows the executive to purchase one share of Scooby’s $5 par value common stock at a price of $20 per share. The options were exercisable within a 2 year period beginning January 1, 2013, if the grantee is still employed by the company at the time of the exercise. On the grant date, Scooby’s stock was trading at $25 per share, and a fair value option pricing model determines total compensation to be $450,000. On May 1, 2013, 9,000 options were exercised when the market price of Scooby’s stock was $30 per share. The remaining options lapsed in 2015 because executives decided not to exercise their options.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries related to the stock option plan for the years 2011 through 2015.

compute the weighted average number of common shares used in computing earnings per 579107

(Weighted Average Number of Shares) Gogean Inc. uses a calendar year for financial reporting. The company is authorized to issue 9,000,000 shares of $10 par common stock. At no time has Gogean issued any potentially dilutive securities. Listed below is a summary of Gogean’s common stock activities.

1. Number of common shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2011

2,400,000

2. Shares issued as a result of a 10% stock dividend on September 30, 2012

240,000

3. Shares issued for cash on March 31, 2013

2,000,000

Number of common shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2013

4,640,000

4. A 2 for 1 stock split of Gogean’s common stock took place on March 31, 2014

Instructions

(a) Compute the weighted average number of common shares used in computing earnings per common share for 2012 on the 2013 comparative income statement.

(b) Compute the weighted average number of common shares used in computing earnings per common share for 2013 on the 2013 comparative income statement.

(c) Compute the weighted average number of common shares to be used in computing earnings per common share for 2013 on the 2014 comparative income statement.

(d) Compute the weighted average number of common shares to be used in computing earnings per common share for 2014 on the 2014 comparative income statement.

determine the weighted average number of shares outstanding as of december 31 2012 579108

(EPS: Simple Capital Structure) On January 1, 2012, Chang Corp. had 480,000 shares of common stock outstanding. During 2012, it had the following transactions that affected the Common Stock account.

February 1

Issued 120,000 shares

March 1

Issued a 20% stock dividend

May 1

Acquired 100,000 shares of treasury stock

June 1

Issued a 3 for 1 stock split

October 1

Reissued 60,000 shares of treasury stock

Instructions

(a) Determine the weighted average number of shares outstanding as of December 31, 2012.

(b) Assume that Chang Corp. earned net income of $3,256,000 during 2012. In addition, it had 100,000 shares of 9%, $100 par nonconvertible, noncumulative preferred stock outstanding for the entire year. Because of liquidity considerations, however, the company did not declare and pay a preferred dividend in 2012. Compute earnings per share for 2012, using the weighted average number of shares determined in part (a).

(c) Assume the same facts as in part (b), except that the preferred stock was cumulative. Compute earnings per share for 2012.

(d) Assume the same facts as in part (b), except that net income included an extraordinary gain of $864,000 and a loss from discontinued operations of $432,000. Both items are net of applicable income taxes. Compute earnings per share for 2012.

eps simple capital structure kendall inc presented the following data 579110

(EPS: Simple Capital Structure) Kendall Inc. presented the following data.

Net income

$2,200,000

Preferred stock: 50,000 shares outstanding,
$100 par, 8% cumulative, not convertible

5,000,000

Common stock: Shares outstanding 1/1

600,000

Issued for cash, 5/1

300,000

Acquired treasury stock for cash, 8/1

150,000

2 for 1 stock split, 10/1

Instructions

Compute earnings per share.

compute earnings per share for 2012 assume that financial statements for 2012 were i 579111

(EPS: Simple Capital Structure) At January 1, 2012, Cameron Company’s outstanding shares included the following. 280,000 shares of $50 par value, 7% cumulative preferred stock 800,000 shares of $1 par value common stock Net income for 2012 was $2,830,000. No cash dividends were declared or paid during 2012. On February 15, 2013, however, all preferred dividends in arrears were paid, together with a 5% stock dividend on common shares. There were no dividends in arrears prior to 2012. On April 1, 2012, 450,000 shares of common stock were sold for $10 per share, and on October 1, 2012, 110,000 shares of common stock were purchased for $20 per share and held as treasury stock.

Instructions

Compute earnings per share for 2012. Assume that financial statements for 2012 were issued in March 2013.

assume the same facts as those assumed for part a except that the 75 bonds were issu 579112

(EPS with Convertible Bonds, Various Situations) in 2012, Buraka Enterprises issued, at par, 75 $1,000, 8% bonds, each convertible into 100 shares of common stock. Buraka had revenues of $17,500 and expenses other than interest and taxes of $8,400 for 2013. (Assume that the tax rate is 40%.) Throughout 2013, 2,000 shares of common stock were outstanding; none of the bonds was converted or redeemed.

Instructions

(a) Compute diluted earnings per share for 2013.

(b) Assume the same facts as those assumed for part (a), except that the 75 bonds were issued on September 1, 2013 (rather than in 2012), and none have been converted or redeemed.

(c) Assume the same facts as assumed for part (a), except that 25 of the 75 bonds were actually converted on July 1, 2013.

a total of 800 000 shares were issued to complete the merger the new corporation rep 579113

(EPS with Convertible Bonds) On June 1, 2011, Bluhm Company and Amanar Company merged to form Davenport Inc. A total of 800,000 shares were issued to complete the merger. The new corporation reports on a calendar year basis. On April 1, 2013, the company issued an additional 600,000 shares of stock for cash. All 1,400,000 shares were outstanding on December 31, 2013. Davenport Inc. also issued $600,000 of 20 year, 8% convertible bonds at par on July 1, 2013. Each $1,000 bond converts to 40 shares of common at any interest date. None of the bonds have been converted to date. Davenport Inc. is preparing its annual report for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013. The annual report will show earnings per share figures based upon a reported after tax net income of $1,540,000.

Instructions

Determine the following for 2013.

(a) The number of shares to be used for calculating:

(1) Basic earnings per share.

(2) Diluted earnings per share.

(b) The earnings figures to be used for calculating:

(1) Basic earnings per share.

(2) Diluted earnings per share.

discuss how the schedule would differ if the security was convertible preferred stoc 579114

(EPS with Convertible Bonds and Preferred Stock) The Ottey Corporation issued 10 year, $4,000,000 par, 7% callable convertible subordinated debentures on January 2, 2012. The bonds have a par value of $1,000, with interest payable annually. The current conversion ratio is 14:1, and in 2 years it will increase to 18:1. At the date of issue, the bonds were sold at 98. Bond discount is amortized on a straight line basis. Ottey’s effective tax was 35%. Net income in 2012 was $7,500,000, and the company had 2,000,000 shares outstanding during the entire year.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule to compute both basic and diluted earnings per share.

(b) Discuss how the schedule would differ if the security was convertible preferred stock.

is potter plastics inc trading on the equity successfully explain 579039

(Trading on the Equity Analysis) Presented below is information from the annual report of Potter Plastics, Inc.

Operating income

$ 532,150

Bond interest expense

135,000

397,150

Income taxes

183,432

Net income

$ 213,718

Bonds payable

$1,500,000

Common stock

875,000

Retained earnings

575,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the return on common stock equity and the rate of interest paid on bonds.

(b) Is Potter Plastics, Inc. trading on the equity successfully? Explain.

prepare the stockholders rsquo equity section of phelps corporation rsquo s balance 579042

(Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation) On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,000 shares of $100 par value, 8% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.

Jan. 11

Issued 20,000 shares of common stock at $16 per share.

Feb. 1

Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: equipment with a fair value of $50,000; a factory building with a fair value of $160,000; and land with an appraised value of $270,000.

July 29

Purchased 1,800 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)

Aug. 10

Sold the 1,800 treasury shares at $14 per share.

Dec. 31

Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.

Dec. 31

Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $175,700 net income.

Instructions

(a) Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above.

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

prepare the journal entries to record the treasury stock transactions in 2012 assumi 579043

(Treasury Stock Transactions and Presentation) Clemson Company had the following stockholders’ equity as of January 1, 2012.

Common stock, $5 par value, 20,000 shares issued

$100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

300,000

Retained earnings

320,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$720,000

During 2012, the following transactions occurred.

Feb. 1

Clemson repurchased 2,000 shares of treasury stock at a price of $19 per share.

Mar. 1

800 shares of treasury stock repurchased above were reissued at $17 per share.

Mar. 18

500 shares of treasury stock repurchased above were reissued at $14 per share.

Apr. 22

600 shares of treasury stock repurchased above were reissued at $20 per share.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the treasury stock transactions in 2012, assuming Clemson uses the cost method.

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section as of April 30, 2012. Net income for the first 4 months of 2012 was $130,000.

prepare the stockholders rsquo equity section for hatch company at december 31 2013 579044

(Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation) Hatch Company has two classes of capital stock outstanding: 8%, $20 par preferred and $5 par common. At December 31, 2012, the following accounts were included in stockholders’ equity.

Preferred Stock, 150,000 shares

$ 3,000,000

Common Stock, 2,000,000 shares

10,000,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock

200,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

27,000,000

Retained Earnings

4,500,000

The following transactions affected stockholders’ equity during 2013.

Jan. 1

30,000 shares of preferred stock issued at $22 per share.

Feb. 1

50,000 shares of common stock issued at $20 per share.

June 1

2 for 1 stock split (par value reduced to $2.50).

July 1

30,000 shares of common treasury stock purchased at $10 per share. Hatch uses the cost method.

Sept. 15

10,000 shares of treasury stock reissued at $11 per share.

Dec. 31

The preferred dividend is declared, and a common dividend of 50¢ per share is declared.

Dec. 31

Net income is $2,100,000.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders’ equity section for Hatch Company at December 31, 2013. Show all supporting computations.

prepare the stockholders rsquo equity section for hatch company at december 31 2013 579045

(Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation) Hatch Company has two classes of capital stock outstanding: 8%, $20 par preferred and $5 par common. At December 31, 2012, the following accounts were included in stockholders’ equity.

Preferred Stock, 150,000 shares

$ 3,000,000

Common Stock, 2,000,000 shares

10,000,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock

200,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

27,000,000

Retained Earnings

4,500,000

The following transactions affected stockholders’ equity during 2013.

Jan. 1

30,000 shares of preferred stock issued at $22 per share.

Feb. 1

50,000 shares of common stock issued at $20 per share.

June 1

2 for 1 stock split (par value reduced to $2.50).

July 1

30,000 shares of common treasury stock purchased at $10 per share. Hatch uses the cost method.

Sept. 15

10,000 shares of treasury stock reissued at $11 per share.

Dec. 31

The preferred dividend is declared, and a common dividend of 50¢ per share is declared.

Dec. 31

Net income is $2,100,000.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders’ equity section for Hatch Company at December 31, 2013. Show all supporting computations.

the following transactions involving the issuance of shares of stock were completed 579046

(Stock Transactions—Lump Sum) Seles Corporation’s charter authorized issuance of 100,000 shares of $10 par value common stock and 50,000 shares of $50 preferred stock. The following transactions involving the issuance of shares of stock were completed. Each transaction is independent of the others.

1. Issued a $10,000, 9% bond payable at par and gave as a bonus one share of preferred stock, which at that time was selling for $106 a share.

2. Issued 500 shares of common stock for equipment. The equipment had been appraised at $7,100; the seller’s book value was $6,200. The most recent market price of the common stock is $16 a share.

3. Issued 375 shares of common and 100 shares of preferred for a lump sum amounting to $10,800. The common had been selling at $14 and the preferred at $65.

4. Issued 200 shares of common and 50 shares of preferred for equipment. The common had a fair value of $16 per share; the equipment has a fair value of $6,500.

Instructions

Record the transactions listed above in journal entry form.

record the treasury stock transactions given below under the cost method of handling 579047

(Treasury Stock—Cost Method) Before Gordon Corporation engages in the treasury stock transactions listed below, its general ledger reflects, among others, the following account balances (par value of its stock is $30 per share).

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

Common Stock

Retained Earnings

$99,000

$270,000

$80,000

Instructions

Record the treasury stock transactions (given below) under the cost method of handling treasury stock; use the FIFO method for purchase sale purposes.

(a) Bought 380 shares of treasury stock at $40 per share.

(b) Bought 300 shares of treasury stock at $45 per share.

(c) Sold 350 shares of treasury stock at $42 per share.

(d) Sold 110 shares of treasury stock at $38 per share.

prepare the stockholders rsquo equity section of washington company rsquo s balance 579048

(Treasury Stock—Cost Method—Equity Section Preparation) Washington Company has the following stockholders’ equity accounts at December 31, 2012.

Common Stock ($100 par value, authorized 8,000 shares)

$480,000

Retained Earnings

294,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare entries in journal form to record the following transactions, which took place during 2013.

(1) 280 shares of outstanding stock were purchased at $97 per share. (These are to be accounted for using the cost method.)

(2) A $20 per share cash dividend was declared.

(3) The dividend declared in (2) above was paid.

(4) The treasury shares purchased in (1) above were resold at $102 per share.

(5) 500 shares of outstanding stock were purchased at $105 per share.

(6) 350 of the shares purchased in (5) above were resold at $96 per share.

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Washington Company’s balance sheet after giving effect to these transactions, assuming that the net income for 2013 was $94,000. State law requires restriction of retained earnings for the amount of treasury stock.

could conchita corporation give the preferred stockholders 2 years rsquo dividends a 579049

(Cash Dividend Entries) The books of Conchita Corporation carried the following account balances as of December 31, 2012.

Cash

$ 195,000

Preferred Stock (6% cumulative, nonparticipating, $50 par)

300,000

Common Stock (no par value, 300,000 shares issued)

1,500,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock

150,000

Treasury Stock (common 2,800 shares at cost)

33,600

Retained Earnings

105,000

The company decided not to pay any dividends in 2012.

The board of directors, at their annual meeting on December 21, 2013, declared the following: “The current year dividends shall be 6% on the preferred and $.30 per share on the common. The dividends in arrears shall be paid by issuing 1,500 shares of treasury stock.” At the date of declaration, the preferred is selling at $80 per share, and the common at $12 per share. Net income for 2013 is estimated at $77,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries required for the dividend declaration and payment, assuming that they occur simultaneously.

(b) Could Conchita Corporation give the preferred stockholders 2 years’ dividends and common stockholders a30 cents per share dividend, all in cash?

myers declares and distributes a property dividend myers gives one share of abc stoc 579050

(Dividends and Splits) Myers Company provides you with the following condensed balance sheet information.

Current assets

$ 40,000

Current and long term liabilities

$100,000

Equity investments (ABC stock;
10,000 shares at cost)

60,000

Stockholders’ equity Common stock ($5 par)

$ 20,000

Equipment (net)

250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

110,000

Intangibles

60,000

Retained earnings

180,000

310,000

Total assets

$410,000

Total liabilities and

stockholders’ equity

$410,000

Instructions

For each transaction below, indicate the dollar impact (if any) on the following five items: (1) total assets, (2) common stock, (3) paid in capital in excess of par, (4) retained earnings, and (5) stockholders’ equity.

(a) Myers declares and pays a $0.50 per share cash dividend.

(b) Myers declares and issues a 10% stock dividend when the market price of the stock is $14 per share.

(c) Myers declares and issues a 30% stock dividend when the market price of the stock is $15 per share.

(d) Myers declares and distributes a property dividend. Myers gives one share of ABC stock for every two shares of Myers Company stock held. ABC is selling for $10 per share on the date the property dividend is declared.

(e) Myers declares a 2 for 1 stock split and issues new shares.

prepare the stockholders rsquo equity section of the balance sheet in proper form fo 579051

(Stockholders’ Equity Section of Balance Sheet) The following is a summary of all relevant transactions of Vicario Corporation since it was organized in 2012. In 2012, 15,000 shares were authorized and 7,000 shares of common stock ($50 par value) were issued at a price of $57. In 2013, 1,000 shares were issued as a stock dividend when the stock was selling for $60. Three hundred shares of common stock were bought in 2014 at a cost of $64 per share. These 300 shares are still in the company treasury. In 2013, 10,000 preferred shares were authorized and the company issued 5,000 of them ($100 par value) at $113. Some of the preferred stock was reacquired by the company and later reissued for $4,700 more than it cost the company. The corporation has earned a total of $610,000 in net income after income taxes and paid out a total of $312,600 in cash dividends since incorporation.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet in proper form for Vicario Corporation as of December 31, 2014. Account for treasury stock using the cost method.

acting as financial advisor to the board you have been asked to report briefly on ea 579052

(Stock Dividends and Stock Split) Oregon Inc. $10 par common stock is selling for $110 per share. Four million shares are currently issued and outstanding. The board of directors wishes to stimulate interest in Oregon common stock before a forthcoming stock issue but does not wish to distribute capital at this time. The board also believes that too many adjustments to the stockholders’ equity section, especially retained earnings, might discourage potential investors. The board has considered three options for stimulating interest in the stock:

1. A 20% stock dividend.

2. A 100% stock dividend.

3. A 2 for 1 stock split.

Instructions

Acting as financial advisor to the board, you have been asked to report briefly on each option and, considering the board’s wishes, make a recommendation. Discuss the effects of each of the foregoing options.

prepare the journal entry to record the declaration and payment of the cash dividend 579053

(Stock and Cash Dividends) Earnhart Corporation has outstanding 3,000,000 shares of common stock of a par value of $10 each. The balance in its Retained Earnings account at January 1, 2012, was $24,000,000, and it then had Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock of $5,000,000. During 2012, the company’s net income was $4,700,000. A cash dividend of $0.60 a share was declared on May 5, 2012, and was paid June 30, 2012 and a 6% stock dividend was declared on November 30, 2012, and distributed to stockholders of record at the close of business on December 31, 2012. You have been asked to advice on the proper accounting treatment of the stock dividend. The existing stock of the company is quoted on a national stock exchange. The market price of the stock has been as follows.

October 31, 2012

$31

November 30, 2012

$34

December 31, 2012

$38

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the declaration and payment of the cash dividend.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the declaration and distribution of the stock dividend.

(c) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section (including schedules of retained earnings and additional paid in capital) of the balance sheet of Earnhart Corporation for the year 2012 on the basis of the foregoing information. Draft a note to the financial statements setting forth the basis of the accounting for the stock dividend, and add separately appropriate comments or explanations regarding the basis chosen.

how may the damage to baker rsquo s interests be repaired most simply 579054

(Preemptive Rights and Dilution of Ownership) Wallace Computer Company is a small, closely held corporation. Eighty percent of the stock is held by Derek Wallace, president. Of the remainder, 10% is held by members of his family and 10% by Kathy Baker, a former officer who is now retired. The balance sheet of the company at June 30, 2012, was substantially as shown below.

Assets

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

$ 22,000

Current liabilities

$ 50,000

Other

450,000

Capital stock

250,000

$472,000

Retained earnings

172,000

$472,000

Additional authorized capital stock of $300,000 par value had never been issued. To strengthen the cash position of the company, Wallace issued capital stock with a par value of $100,000 to himself at par for cash. At the next stockholders’ meeting, Baker objected and claimed that her interests had been injured.

Instructions

(a) Which stockholder’s right was ignored in the issue of shares to Derek Wallace?

(b) How may the damage to Baker’s interests be repaired most simply?

(c) If Derek Wallace offered Baker a personal cash settlement and they agreed to employ you as an impartial arbitrator to determine the amount, what settlement would you propose? Present your calculations with sufficient explanation to satisfy both parties.

what are examples of changes within owners rsquo equity that do not change the total 579056

Conceptual Issues—Equity) Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts set forth financial accounting and reporting objectives and fundamentals that will be used by the Financial Accounting Standards Board in developing standards. Concepts Statement No. 6 defines various elements of financial statements.

Instructions

Answer the following questions based on SFAC No. 6.

(a) Define and discuss the term “equity.”

(b) What transactions or events change owners’ equity?

(c) Define “investments by owners” and provide examples of this type of transaction. What financial statement element other than equity is typically affected by owner investments?

(d) Define “distributions to owners” and provide examples of this type of transaction. What financial statement element other than equity is typically affected by distributions?

(e) What are examples of changes within owners’ equity that do not change the total amount of owners’ equity?

discuss the case against considering the stock dividend as income to the recipient 579058

(Stock Dividends) Kulikowski Inc., a client, is considering the authorization of a 10% common stock dividend to common stockholders. The financial vice president of Kulikowski wishes to discuss the accounting implications of such an authorization with you before the next meeting of the board of directors.

Instructions

(a) The first topic the vice president wishes to discuss is the nature of the stock dividend to the recipient. Discuss the case against considering the stock dividend as income to the recipient.

(b) The other topic for discussion is the propriety of issuing the stock dividend to all “stockholders of record” or to “stockholders of record exclusive of shares held in the name of the corporation as treasury stock.” Discuss the case against issuing stock dividends on treasury shares.

how should mask account for the stock dividend and how would it affect the stockhold 579059

(Stock Dividend, Cash Dividend, and Treasury Stock) Mask Company has 30,000 shares of $10 par value common stock authorized and 20,000 shares issued and outstanding. On August 15, 2012, Mask purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock for $18 per share. Mask uses the cost method to account for treasury stock. On September 14, 2012, Mask sold 500 shares of the treasury stock for $20 per share. In October 2012, Mask declared and distributed 1,950 shares as a stock dividend from unissued shares when the market price of the common stock was $21 per share. On December 20, 2012, Mask declared a $1 per share cash dividend, payable on January 10, 2013, to shareholders of record on December 31, 2012.

Instructions

(a) How should Mask account for the purchase and sale of the treasury stock, and how should the treasury stock be presented in the balance sheet at December 31, 2012?

(b) How should Mask account for the stock dividend, and how would it affect the stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2012? Why?

(c) How should Mask account for the cash dividend, and how would it affect the balance sheet at December 31, 2012? Why?

should kenseth authorize the transaction 579060

(Treasury Stock—Ethics) Lois Kenseth, president of Sycamore Corporation, is concerned about several large stockholders who have been very vocal lately in their criticisms of her leadership. She thinks they might mount a campaign to have her removed as the corporation’s CEO. She decides that buying them out by purchasing their shares could eliminate them as opponents, and she is confident they would accept a “good” offer. Kenseth knows the corporation’s cash position is decent, so it has the cash to complete the transaction. She also knows the purchase of these shares will increase earnings per share, which should make other investors quite happy. (Earnings per share is calculated by dividing net income available for the common shareholders by the weighted average number of shares outstanding. Therefore, if the number of shares outstanding is decreased by purchasing treasury shares, earnings per share increase.)

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues involved?

(c) Should Kenseth authorize the transaction?

discuss the propriety of this accounting treatment 579061

Four years after issue, debentures with a face value of $1,000,000 and book value of $960,000 are tendered for conversion into 80,000 shares of common stock immediately after an interest payment date. At that time, the market price of the debentures is 104, and the common stock is selling at $14 per share (par value $10). The company records the conversion as follows.

Bonds Payable

1,000,000

Discount on Bonds Payable

40,000

Common Stock

800,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

160,000

Discuss the propriety of this accounting treatment.

for each of the unrelated transactions described below present the entry ies require 579094

(Issuance and Conversion of Bonds) For each of the unrelated transactions described below, present the entry(ies) required to record each transaction.

1. Coyle Corp. issued $10,000,000 par value 10% convertible bonds at 99. If the bonds had not been convertible, the company’s investment banker estimates they would have been sold at 95. Expenses of issuing the bonds were $70,000.

2. Lambert Company issued $10,000,000 par value 10% bonds at 98. One detachable stock warrant was issued with each $100 par value bond. At the time of issuance, the warrants were selling for $4.

3. Sepracor, Inc. called its convertible debt in 2012. Assume the following related to the transaction: The 11%, $10,000,000 par value bonds were converted into 1,000,000 shares of $1 par value common stock on July 1, 2012. On July 1, there was $55,000 of unamortized discount applicable to the bonds, and the company paid an additional $75,000 to the bondholders to induce conversion of all the bonds. The company records the conversion using the book value method.

prepare a balance sheet at may 31 2011 578961

;Laura Geller started a consulting firm, Geller Consulting, on May 1, 2011.The following transactions occurred during the month of May. May 1 Geller invested $8,000 cash in the business in exchange for stock.

2 Paid $800 for office rent for the month.

3 Purchased $500 of supplies on account.

5 Paid $50 to advertise in the County News.

9 Received $3,000 cash for services provided.

12 Declared and paid a $700 cash dividend.

15 Performed $5,300 of services on account.

17 Paid $3,000 for employee salaries.

20 Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.

23 Received a cash payment of $3,000 for services provided on account on May 15.

26 Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.

29 Purchased office equipment for $2,800 on account.

30 Paid $150 for utilities.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format. Include margin explanations for any changes in the Retained Earnings account in your analysis.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of May.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at May 31, 2011.

what was the revenue earned in march 578966

Mary and Jack Gray, local golf stars, opened the Chip Shot Driving Range Company on March 1, 2011. They invested $25,000 cash and received common stock in exchange for their investment. A caddy shack was constructed for cash at a cost of $8,000, and $800 was spent on golf balls and golf clubs. The Grays leased five acres of land at a cost of $1,000 per month and paid the first month’s rent. During the first month, advertising costs totaled $750, of which $150 was unpaid at March 31, and $400 was paid to members of the high school golf team for retrieving golf balls. All revenues from customers were deposited in the company’s bank account. On March 15, Mary and Jack received a dividend of $1,000. A $100 utility bill was received on March 31 but was not paid. On March 31, the balance in the company’s bank account was $18,900. Mary and Jack thought they had a pretty good first month of operations. But, their estimates of profitability ranged from a loss of $6,100 to net income of $2,450.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) How could the Grays have concluded that the business operated at a loss of $6,100? Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?

(b) How could the Grays have concluded that the business operated at a net income of $2,450? (Hint: Prepare a balance sheet at March 31.) Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?

(c) Without preparing an income statement, determine the actual net income for March.

(d) What was the revenue earned in March?

explain to lynn benedict in a memo why the original balance sheet is incorrect and w 578967

Lynn Benedict, the bookkeeper for New York Company, has been trying to get the balance sheet to balance. The company’s balance sheet is shown below.

Assets

Liabilities

Equipment

$25,500

Common stock

$26,000

Cash

9,000

Accounts receivable

(6,000)

Supplies

2,000

Retained earnings

(2,000)

Accounts payable

(8,000)

Notes payable

10,500

$28,500

$28,500

Instructions

Explain to Lynn Benedict in a memo why the original balance sheet is incorrect, and what should be done to correct it.

what would you do in this situation 578968

After numerous campus interviews, Steve Baden, a senior at Great Northern College, received two office interview invitations from the Baltimore offices of two large firms. Both firms offered to cover his out of pocket expenses (travel, hotel, and meals). He scheduled the interviews for both firms on the same day, one in the morning and one in the afternoon. At the= conclusion of each interview, he submitted to both firms his total out of pocket expenses for the trip to Baltimore: mileage $112 (280 miles at $0.40), hotel $130, meals $36, parking and tolls $18, for a total of $296. He believes this approach is appropriate. If he had made two trips, his cost would have been two times $296. He is also certain that neither firm knew he had visited the other on that same trip. Within ten days Steve received two checks in the mail, each in the amount of $296.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders (affected parties) in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) What would you do in this situation?

what are some reasons why a company might want to understate its earnings 578969

As discussed in the “All About You” feature in this chapter (p. 26), some people are tempted to make their finances look worse to get financial aid. Companies sometimes also manage their financial numbers in order to accomplish certain goals. Earnings management is the planned timing of revenues, expenses, gains, and losses to smooth out bumps in net income. In managing earnings, companies’ actions vary from being within the range of ethical activity, to being both unethical and illegal attempts to mislead investors and creditors.

Instructions

Provide responses for each of the following questions.

(a) Discuss whether you think each of the following actions (adapted from www.finaid.org/ fafsa/maximize.phtml) to increase the chances of receiving financial aid is ethical.

(i) Spend down the student’s assets and income first, before spending parents’ assets and income.

(ii) Accelerate necessary expenses to reduce available cash. For example, if you need a new car, buy it before applying for financial aid.

(iii) State that a truly financially dependent child is independent.

(iv) Have a parent take an unpaid leave of absence for long enough to get below the “threshold” level of income.

(b) What are some reasons why a company might want to overstate its earnings?

(c) What are some reasons why a company might want to understate its earnings?

(d) Under what circumstances might an otherwise ethical person decide to illegally overstate or understate earnings?

the fasb has developed the financial accounting standards board accounting standards 578970

The FASB has developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification (or more simply “the Codification”). The FASB’s primary goal in developing the Codification is to provide in one place all the authoritative literature related to a particular topic. To provide easy access to the Codification, the FASB also developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Codification Research System (CRS). CRS is an online, real time database that provides easy access to the Codification. The Codification and the related CRS provide a topically organized structure, subdivided into topic, subtopics, sections, and paragraphs, using a numerical index system. This online system may be accessed at http://asc.fasb.org. You may find this system useful in your present and future studies, and so we have provided an opportunity to use this online system as part of the Broadening Your Perspective section.

Instructions

Register for access to the FASB Codification.You will need to enter an email address and provide a password. Familiarize yourself with the resources that are accessible at the FASB Codification Homepage.

kate brown recorded the following transactions in a general journal during the month 578974

Kate Brown recorded the following transactions in a general journal during the month of March.

Mar. 4

Cash

2,280

Service Revenue

2,280

Mar. 15

Wages Expense

400

Cash

400

Mar. 19

Utilities Expense

92

Cash

92

Post these entries to the Cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash.The beginning balance in cash on March 1 was $600.

determined that cash receipts for laundry fees for the month were 6 200 the chart of 578975

The following accounts come from the ledger of SnowGo Corporation at December 31, 2011.

157

Equipment

$88,000

311

Common Stock

$20,000

332

Dividends

8,000

212

Salaries Payable

2,000

201

Accounts Payable

22,000

200

Notes Payable

19,000

726

Salaries Expense

42,000

722

Insurance Expense

3,000

112

Accounts Receivable

4,000

130

Prepaid Insurance

6,000

400

Service Revenue

95,000

101

Cash

7,000

Bob Sample and other student investors opened Campus Laundromat Inc. on September 1, 2011. During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred.

Sept. 1 Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in the business.

2 Paid $1,000 cash for store rent for the month of September.

3 Purchased washers and dryers for $25,000, paying $10,000 in cash and signing

a $15,000, 6 month, 12% note payable.

4 Paid $1,200 for a one year accident insurance policy.

10 Received a bill from the Daily News for advertising the opening of the laundromat $200.

20 Declared and paid a cash dividend to stockholders $700.

30 Determined that cash receipts for laundry fees for the month were $6,200. The chart of accounts for the company is the same as for Pioneer Advertising Agency Inc. except for the following: No. 154 Laundry Equipment and No. 610 Advertising Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the September transactions. (Use J1 for the journal page number.)

(b) Open ledger accounts and post the September transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at September 30, 2011.

prepare the journal entries for these transactions assuming that the common stock is 579023

(Recording the Issuances of Common Stock) During its first year of operations, Sitwell Corporation had the following transactions pertaining to its common stock.

Jan. 10

Issued 80,000 shares for cash at $6 per share.

Mar. 1

Issued 5,000 shares to attorneys in payment of a bill for $35,000 for services rendered in helping the
company to incorporate.

July 1

Issued 30,000 shares for cash at $8 per share.

Sept. 1

Issued 60,000 shares for cash at $10 per share.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for these transactions, assuming that the common stock has a par value of $3 per share.

(b) Prepare the journal entries for these transactions, assuming that the common stock is no par with a stated value of $2 per share.

prepare the journal entries to record the above transactions 579024

(Recording the Issuance of Common and Preferred Stock) Abernathy Corporation was organized on January 1, 2012. It is authorized to issue 10,000 shares of 8%, $50 par value preferred stock, and 500,000 shares of no par common stock with a stated value of $2 per share. The following stock transactions were completed during the first year.

Jan. 10

Issued 80,000 shares of common stock for cash at $5 per share.

Mar. 1

Issued 5,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $108 per share.

Apr. 1

Issued 24,000 shares of common stock for land. The asking price of the land was $90,000; the fair value of the land was $80,000.

May 1

Issued 80,000 shares of common stock for cash at $7 per share.

Aug. 1

Issued 10,000 shares of common stock to attorneys in payment of their bill of $50,000 for services rendered in helping the company organize.

Sept. 1

Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for cash at $9 per share.

Nov. 1

Issued 1,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $112 per share.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record the above transactions.

briefly explain which method is in your opinion the better method 579026

(Lump Sum Sale of Stock with Bonds) Fogelberg Corporation is a regional company which is an SEC registrant. The corporation’s securities are thinly traded on NASDAQ (National Association of Securities Dealers Quotes). Fogelberg has issued 10,000 units. Each unit consists of a $500 par, 12% subordinated debenture and 10 shares of $5 par common stock. The investment banker has retained 400 units as the underwriting fee. The other 9,600 units were sold to outside investors for cash at $850 per unit. Prior to this sale the 2 week ask price of common stock was $40 per share. Twelve percent is a reasonable market yield for the debentures, and therefore the par value of the bonds is equal to the fair value.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record Fogelberg’s transaction, under the following conditions.

(1) Employing the incremental method.

(2) Employing the proportional method, assuming the recent price quote on the common stock reflects fair value.

(b) Briefly explain which method is, in your opinion, the better method.

prepare the journal entry to record item 3 using the cost method 579028

(Stock Issuances and Repurchase) Loxley Corporation is authorized to issue 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. During 2012, Loxley took part in the following selected transactions.

1. Issued 5,000 shares of stock at $45 per share, less costs related to the issuance of the stock totaling $7,000.

2. Issued 1,000 shares of stock for land appraised at $50,000. The stock was actively traded on a national stock exchange at approximately $46 per share on the date of issuance.

3. Purchased 500 shares of treasury stock at $44 per share. The treasury shares purchased was issued in 2008 at $40 per share.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record item 1.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record item 2.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record item 3 using the cost method.

effect of treasury stock transactions on financials sanborn company has outstanding 579029

(Effect of Treasury Stock Transactions on Financials) Sanborn Company has outstanding 40,000 shares of $5 par common stock which had been issued at $30 per share. Sanborn then entered into the following transactions.

1. Purchased 5,000 treasury shares at $45 per share.

2. Resold 500 of the treasury shares at $40 per share.

3. Resold 2,000 of the treasury shares at $49 per share.

Instructions

Use the following code to indicate the effect each of the three transactions has on the financial statement categories listed in the table below, assuming Sanborn Company uses the cost method:

I = Increase; D = Decrease; NE= No effect.

#

Assets

Liabilities

Stockholders’
Equity

Paid in
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Net
Income

1

2

3

if the preferred stock was issued at 107 per share how should the preferred stock is 579030

(Preferred Stock Entries and Dividends) Weisberg Corporation has 10,000 shares of $100 par value, 6% preferred stock and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2012.

Instructions

Answer the questions in each of the following independent situations.

(a) If the preferred stock is cumulative and dividends were last paid on the preferred stock on December 31, 2009, what are the dividends in arrears that should be reported on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet? How should these dividends be reported?

(b) If the preferred stock is convertible into seven shares of $10 par value common stock and 3,000 shares are converted, what entry is required for the conversion assuming the preferred stock was issued at par value?

(c) If the preferred stock was issued at $107 per share, how should the preferred stock is reported in the stockholders’ equity section?

what is the cost per share of treasury stock at december 31 2013 and at december 31 579031

(Analysis of Equity Data and Equity Section Preparation) For a recent 2 year period, the balance sheet of Franklin Company showed the following stockholders’ equity data at December 31 in millions.10

2013

2012

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

$ 891

$ 817

Common stock

545

540

Retained earnings

7,167

5,226

Treasury stock

1,428

918

Total stockholders’ equity

$7,175

$5,665

Common stock shares issued

218

216

Common stock shares authorized

500

500

Treasury stock shares

34

27

Instructions

(a) Answer the following questions.

(1) What is the par value of the common stock?

(2) What is the cost per share of treasury stock at December 31, 2013, and at December 31, 2012?

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section at December 31, 2013.

equity items on the balance sheet the following are selected transactions that may 579032

(Equity Items on the Balance Sheet) The following are selected transactions that may affect stockholders’ equity.

1. Recorded accrued interest earned on a note receivable.

2. Declared and distributed a stock split.

3. Declared a cash dividend.

4. Recorded a retained earnings restriction.

5. Recorded the expiration of insurance coverage that was previously recorded as prepaid insurance.

6. Paid the cash dividend declared in item 3 above.

7. Recorded accrued interest expense on a note payable.

8. Declared a stock dividend.

9. Distributed the stock dividend declared in item 8.

Instructions

In the following table, indicate the effect each of the nine transactions has on the financial statement elements listed. Use the following code:

I =Increase D = Decrease NE = No effect

Item

Assets

Liabilities

Stockholders’
Equity

Paid in
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Net
Income

prepare the appropriate journal entries for each of the following cases 579035

(Entries for Stock Dividends and Stock Splits) The stockholders’ equity accounts of Lawrence Company have the following balances on December 31, 2012.

Common stock, $10 par, 200,000 shares issued and outstanding

$2,000,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

1,200,000

Retained earnings

5,600,000

Shares of Lawrence Company stock are currently selling on the Midwest Stock Exchange at $37.

Instructions

Prepare the appropriate journal entries for each of the following cases.

(a) A stock dividend of 5% is declared and issued.

(b) A stock dividend of 100% is declared and issued.

(c) A 2 for 1 stock split is declared and issued.

prepare the required journal entries for the following unrelated items 579036

(Dividend Entries) The following data were taken from the balance sheet accounts of Wickham Corporation on December 31, 2012.

Current assets

$540,000

Debt investments

624,000

Common stock (par value $10)

600,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

150,000

Retained earnings

840,000

Instructions

Prepare the required journal entries for the following unrelated items.

(a) A 5% stock dividend is declared and distributed at a time when the market price is $39 per share.

(b) The par value of the capital stock is reduced to $2 with a 5 for 1 stock split.

(c) A dividend is declared January 5, 2013, and paid January 25, 2013, in bonds held as an investment. The bonds have a book value of $90,000 and a fair value of $125,000.

determine the current balance of retained earnings 579037

(Computation of Retained Earnings) The following information has been taken from the ledger accounts of Sampras Corporation.

Total income since incorporation

$287,000

Total cash dividends paid

60,000

Total value of stock dividends distributed

40,000

Gains on treasury stock transactions

18,000

Unamortized discount on bonds payable

32,000

Instructions

Determine the current balance of retained earnings.

prepare journal entries to record the transactions described above 579038

(Dividends and Stockholders’ Equity Section) Elizabeth Company reported the following amounts in the stockholders’ equity section of its December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par (10,000 shares
authorized, 2,000 shares issued)

$200,000

Common stock, $5 par (100,000 shares authorized,
20,000 shares issued)

100,000

Additional paid in capital

125,000

Retained earnings

450,000

Total

$875,000

During 2013, Elizabeth took part in the following transactions concerning stockholders’ equity.

1. Paid the annual 2012 $8 per share dividend on preferred stock and a $2 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends had been declared on December 31, 2012.

2. Purchased 2,700 shares of its own outstanding common stock for $40 per share. Elizabeth uses the cost method.

3. Reissued 700 treasury shares for land valued at $30,000.

4. Issued 500 shares of preferred stock at $105 per share.

5. Declared a 10% stock dividend on the outstanding common stock when the stock is selling for $45 per share.

6. Issued the stock dividend.

7. Declared the annual 2013 $8 per share dividend on preferred stock and the $2 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends are payable in 2014.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions described above.

(b) Prepare the December 31, 2013, stockholders’ equity section. Assume 2013 net income was $330,000.

determine the stockholders rsquo equity of broadway company at december 31 2011 578936

Presented below is selected information related to Broadway Company at December 31, 2011. Broadway reports financial information monthly.

Accounts Payable

$ 3,000

Salaries Expense

$16,500

Cash

7,000

Note Payable

25,000

Advertising Expense

6,000

Rent Expense

10,500

Service Revenue

54,000

Accounts Receivable

13,500

Equipment

29,000

Dividends

7,500

(a) Determine the total assets of Broadway Company at December 31, 2011.

(b) Determine the net income that Broadway Company reported for December 2011.

(c) Determine the stockholders’ equity of Broadway Company at December 31, 2011.

urlacher company performs the following accounting tasks during the year 578937

Urlacher Company performs the following accounting tasks during the year.

______Analyzing and interpreting information.

______Classifying economic events.

______Explaining uses, meaning, and limitations of data.

______Keeping a systematic chronological diary of events.

______Measuring events in dollars and cents.

______Preparing accounting reports.

______Reporting information in a standard format.

______Selecting economic activities relevant to the company.

______Summarizing economic events.

Accounting is “an information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.” Instructions

Categorize the accounting tasks performed by Urlacher as relating to either the identification (I), recording (R), or communication (C) aspects of accounting.

a the following are users of financial statements 578938

(a) The following are users of financial statements.

______Customers

______Securities and Exchange Commission

______Internal Revenue Service

______Store manager

______Labor unions

______Suppliers

______Marketing manager

______Vice president of finance

______Production supervisor

______Securities and Exchange Commission

______Customers

______Store manager

Instructions

Identify the users as being either external users or internal users.

(b) The following questions could be asked by an internal user or an external user.

______ Can we afford to give our employees a pay raise?

______ Did the company earn a satisfactory income?

______ Do we need to borrow in the near future?

______ How does the company’s profitability compare to other companies?

______ What does it cost us to manufacture each unit produced?

______ Which product should we emphasize?

______ Will the company be able to pay its short term debts?

Instructions

Identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an external user.

the following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions 578940

The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.

1. Grossman Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost. In an effort to provide more relevant information, Grossman reports the buildings at market value in its accounting reports.

2. Jones Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.

3. Caleb Borke, president of Caleb’s Cantina, records his personal living costs as expenses of the Cantina.

Instructions

For each of the three situations, say if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect. If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.

selected transactions for evergreen lawn care company are listed below 578942

Selected transactions for Evergreen Lawn Care Company are listed below.

1. Sold common stock for cash to start business.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Purchased equipment on account.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Paid dividends.

6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

7. Incurred advertising expense on account.

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.

Instructions

List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders’ equity.

brandon computer timeshare company entered into the following transactions during ma 578943

Brandon Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2011.

1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.

2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $15,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Provided computer services to Fisher Construction Company for $3,000 cash.

5. Paid Northern States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Stockholders invested an additional $32,000 in the business.

7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,200 on account.

Instructions

Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:

(a) an increase in assets and a decrease in assets.

(b) an increase in assets and an increase in stockholders’ equity.

(c) an increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.

(d) a decrease in assets and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

(e) a decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.

(f) an increase in liabilities and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

(g) an increase in stockholders’ equity and a decrease in liabilities.

lily company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated 578945

Lily Company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated.

December 31

Total Assets

Total Liabilities

2010

$400,000

$250,000

2011

$460,000

$300,000

2012

$590,000

$400,000

Lily began business on January 1, 2010, with an investment of $100,000 from stockholders.

Instructions

From an analysis of the change in stockholders’ equity during the year, compute the net income (or loss) for:

(a) 2010, assuming Lily paid $15,000 in dividends for the year.

(b) 2011, assuming stockholders made an additional investment of $50,000 and Lily paid no dividends in 2011.

(c) 2012, assuming stockholders made an additional investment of $15,000 and Lily paid dividends of $30,000 in 2012.

determine the missing amounts 578946

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two corporations for the year 2011, Craig Cantrel and Mills Enterprises.

Craig

Mills

Cantrel

Enterprises

Beginning of year:

Total assets

$ 95,000

$129,000

Total liabilities

85,000

(c)

Total stockholders’ equity

(a)

80,000

End of year:

Total assets

160,000

180,000

Total liabilities

120,000

50,000

Total stockholders’ equity

40,000

130,000

Changes during year in stockholders’ equity:

Additional investment

(b)

25,000

Dividends

24,000

(d)

Total revenues

215,000

100,000

Total expenses

175,000

55,000

Instructions

Determine the missing amounts.

prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending de 578947

The following information relates to Linda Stanley Co. for the year 2011

Retained earnings, January 1, 2011

$48,000

Advertising expense

$ 1,800

Dividends during 2011

6,000

Rent expense

10,400

Service revenue

62,500

Utilities expense

3,100

Salaries expense

30,000

Instructions

After analyzing the data, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2011.

prepare a correct balance sheet 578948

Mary Close is the bookkeeper for Mendez Company. Mary has been trying to get the balance sheet of Mendez Company to balance. Mendez’s balance sheet is shown below.

MENDEZ COMPANY

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2011

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$15,000

Accounts payable

$20,000

Supplies

8,000

Accounts receivable

(8,500)

Equipment

46,000

Common stock

50,000

Dividends

10,000

Retained earnings

17,500

Total assets

$79,000

Total liabilities and

stockholders’ equity

$79,000

Instructions

Prepare a correct balance sheet.

determine deer park rsquo s net income for 2011 578949

Deer Park, a public camping ground near the Lake Mead National Recreation Area, has compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2011.

Revenues during 2011—camping fees

$140,000

Notes payable

$ 60,000

Revenues during 2011—general store

50,000

Expenses during 2011

150,000

Accounts payable

11,000

Supplies on hand

2,500

Cash on hand

23,000

Common stock

20,000

Original cost of equipment

105,500

Retained earnings

?

Market value of equipment

140,000

Instructions

(a) Determine Deer Park’s net income for 2011.

(b) Prepare a balance sheet for Deer Park as of December 31, 2011.

prepare the 2011 retained earnings statement for kevin and johnson attorneys at law 578951

Presented below is information related to Kevin and Johnson, Attorneys at Law.

Retained earnings, January 1, 2011

$ 23,000

Legal service revenue—2011

350,000

Total expenses—2011

211,000

Assets, January 1, 2011

85,000

Liabilities, January 1, 2011

62,000

Assets, December 31, 2011

168,000

Liabilities, December 31, 2011

85,000

Dividends—2011

79,000

Instructions

Prepare the 2011 retained earnings statement for Kevin and Johnson, Attorneys at Law.

prepare the 2011 statement of cash flows for heartland company 578952

This information is for Heartland Company for the year ended December 31, 2011.

Cash received from revenues from customers

$600,000

Cash received for issuance of common stock

350,000

Cash paid for new equipment

100,000

Cash dividends paid

20,000

Cash paid for expenses

410,000

Cash balance 1/1/11

30,000

Instructions

Prepare the 2011 statement of cash flows for Heartland Company.

prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings c 578953

;Barone’s Repair Inc. was started on May 1. A summary of May transactions is presented below.

1. Stockholders invested $10,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2. Purchased equipment for $5,000 cash.

3. Paid $400 cash for May office rent.

4. Paid $500 cash for supplies.

5. Incurred $250 of advertising costs in the Beacon News on account.

6. Received $5,100 in cash from customers for repair service.

7. Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.

8. Paid part time employee salaries $2,000.

9. Paid utility bills $140.

10. Provided repair service on account to customers $750.

11. Collected cash of $120 for services billed in transaction (10).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions, using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment,Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings. Revenue is called Service Revenue.

(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for May.

prepare an income statement for september a retained earnings statement for septembe 578954

On August 31, the balance sheet of Nashville Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Office Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash for accounts payable due.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Earned revenue of $8,000, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.

6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $300.

7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank on a 6 month note payable.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash +Accounts Receivable +Supplies +Office Equipment =Notes Payable +Accounts Payable +Common Stock +Retained Earnings + Revenues Expenses Dividends.

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.

prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of may a 578955

On May 1, Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, was started with an investment of $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2011, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.

Cash

$ 5,600

Notes Payable

$30,000

Accounts Receivable

7,200

Rent Expense

1,200

Equipment

64,000

Repair Expense

400

Lesson Revenue

7,500

Fuel Expense

2,500

Advertising Expense

500

Insurance Expense

400

Accounts Payable

800

No additional investments were made in May, but the company paid dividends of $1,500 during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.

prepare an income statement for the month of june 578956

Mark Miller started a delivery service, Miller Deliveries, on June 1, 2011.The following transactions occurred during the month of June. June 1 Stockholders invested $10,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2 Purchased a used van for deliveries for $12,000. Mark paid $2,000 cash and signed a note payable for the remaining balance.

3 Paid $500 for office rent for the month.

5 Performed $4,400 of services on account.

9 Declared and paid $200 in cash dividends.

12 Purchased supplies for $150 on account.

15 Received a cash payment of $1,250 for services provided on June 5.

17 Purchased gasoline for $100 on account.

20 Received a cash payment of $1,500 for services provided.

23 Made a cash payment of $500 on the note payable.

26 Paid $250 for utilities.

29 Paid for the gasoline purchased on account on June 17.

30 Paid $1,000 for employee salaries.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format. Include margin explanations for any changes in the Retained Earnings account in your analysis.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of June.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at June 30, 2011.

financial statement information about four different companies is as follows 578957

Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows.

Karma

Yates

McCain

Dench

Company

Company

Company

Company

January 1, 2011

Assets

$ 95,000

$110,000

(g)

$170,000

Liabilities

50,000

(d)

75,000

( j)

Stockholders’ equity

(a)

60,000

45,000

90,000

December 31, 2011

Assets

(b)

137000

200,000

(k)

Liabilities

55,000

75,000

(h)

80,000

Stockholders’ equity

60,000

(e)

130,000

170,000

Stockholders’ equity changes in year

Additional investment

(c)

15,000

10,000

15,000

Dividends

25,000

(f)

14,000

20,000

Total revenues

350,000

420,000

(i)

520,000

Total expenses

320,000

385,000

342,000

(l)

Instructions

(a) Determine the missing amounts. (Hint: For example, to solve for (a), Assets _ Liabilities _ Stockholders’ Equity _ $45,000.)

(b) Prepare the retained earnings statement for Yates Company. Assume beginning retained earnings was $20,000.

(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the retained earnings statement to the income statement and balance sheet.

prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings c 578958

On April 1, Jenny Russo established Matrix Travel Agency.The following transactions were completed during the month.

1. Stockholders invested $10,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2. Paid $400 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased office equipment for $2,500 cash.

4. Incurred $300 of advertising costs in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $600 cash for office supplies.

6. Earned $9,500 for services provided: $3,000 cash is received from customers, and the balance of $6,500 is billed to customers on account.

7. Declared and paid a $200 cash dividend.

8. Paid Chicago Tribune amount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees’ salaries $2,200.

10. Received $4,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Office Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanation for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) From an analysis of the column Retained Earnings, compute the net income or net loss for April.

prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of june 578960

Divine Cosmetics Co., a company that provides individual skin care treatment, was started on June 1 with an investment of $26,200 cash. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30 and the revenues and expenses for the month of June.

Cash

$11,000

Notes Payable

$13,000

Accounts Receivable

4,000

Accounts Payable

1,200

Service Revenue

6,000

Supplies Expense

1,600

Cosmetic Supplies

2,000

Gas and Oil Expense

800

Advertising Expense

500

Utilities Expense

300

Equipment

25,000

Stockholders made no additional investments in June. The company paid a cash dividend of $1,200 during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2011.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for June assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $800 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at June 30, and (2) $100 of gas and oil expense was incurred but not paid.

assuming the following data compute 578850

Assuming the following data, compute:

1.Cash collected from customers.

2.Cash paid for wages and salaries.

3.Cash paid for inventory purchases.

4.Cash paid for taxes.

Income Statement

Amount for Year

Balance Sheet

Beg. of Year

End of Year

Sales revenue

$225,000

Accounts receivable (net)

$20,000

$22,000

Wages and salaries expense

55,000

Wages and salaries payable

14,000

11,000

Cost of goods sold

105,000

Accounts payable

24,500

26,000

Inventory

34,000

28,000

Income tax expense

35,000

Income taxes payable

15,500

18,000

jane ortiz is the proprietor of a small company the results of operations for last y 578851

Jane Ortiz is the proprietor of a small company. The results of operations for last year are shown, along with selected balance sheet data. From the information provided, determine the amount of net cash flows provided from operations, using the direct method.

Sales revenue

$200,000

Cost of goods sold

140,000

Gross margin

$60,000

Operating expenses:

Wages expense .

$ 25,000

Utilities expense

1,800

Rent expense

12,000

Insurance expense

3,000

41,800

Net income

$18,200

Beginning

End of

of Year

Year

Accounts receivable (net)

$22,000

$25,000

Inventory

35,000

30,000

Prepaid insurance

3,000

2,500

Accounts payable

14,000

17,000

Wages payable

4,000

2,000

use the direct method to compute cash flows provided by operating activities in 2003 578853

The following information was taken from the comparative financial statements of Imperial Corporation for the years ended December 31, 2002 and 2003:

Net income for 2003

$ 90,000

Sales revenue

500,000

Cost of goods sold

300,000

Depreciation expense for 2003

60,000

Amortization of goodwill for 2003

10,000

Interest expense on short term debt for 2003.

3,500

Dividends declared and paid in 2003

65,000

Dec. 31, 2003

Dec. 31, 2002

Accounts receivable (net)

$30,000

$43,000

Inventory

50,000

42,000

Accounts payable

56,000

59,400

Use the direct method to compute cash flows provided by operating activities in 2003. (HINT: You need to calculate cash paid for operating expenses.)

use the direct method to compute cash flows provided by operating activities in 2003 578855

The following information was taken from the comparative financial statements of Altec Industries, Inc., for the years ended December 31, 2002 and 2003:

Net income for 2003

$175,000

Sales revenue

750,000

Cost of goods sold

425,000

Depreciation expense for 2003

45,000

Amortization of goodwill for 2003

5,000

Interest expense on short term debt for 2003

8,000

Dividends declared and paid in 2003

30,000

Utilities expense.

3,000

Dec. 31,

Dec. 31,

2003

2002

Accounts receivable (net)

$45,000

$57,000

Inventory

62,500

50,000

Accounts payable

70,000

51,500

Use the direct method to compute cash flows provided by operating activities in 2003. (HINT: You need to calculate cash paid for operating expenses.)

given the following selected data for milton corporation using the indirect method t 578857

Given the following selected data for Milton Corporation, using the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities, determine the net increase (decrease) in cash for the year ended December 31, 2003.

Net income.

$ 95,000

Depreciation

25,000

Other operating expenses.

140,000

Cost of goods sold.

240,000

Sales revenue

500,000

Increase in accounts receivable (net)

10,000

Decrease in accounts payable

5,000

Decrease in inventory.

3,000

Increase in prepaid assets

7,000

Increase in wages payable.

15,000

Equipment purchased for cash

40,000

Increase in bonds payable

100,000

Dividends declared and paid

40,000

Decrease in dividends payable

2,000

based on the following information determine the net increase decrease in cash for p 578858

Based on the following information, determine the net increase (decrease) in cash for Porter Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2003. Use the direct method to report cash flows from operating activities.

Cash received from interest revenue

$ 14,000

Cash paid for dividends

45,000

Cash collected from customers.

349,000

Cash paid for wages

254,000

Depreciation expense for the period.

25,000

Cash received from issuance of common stock

200,000

Cash paid for retirement of bonds at par

100,000

Cash received on sale of equipment at book value

5,000

Cash paid for land

85,000

north western company provides the following financial information prepare a stateme 578859

North Western Company provides the following financial information. Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2003, using the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities.

North Western Company

Comparative Balance Sheets

For the Years Ended December 31, 2003 and 2002

Assets

2003

2002

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 4,500

$ 9,000

Accounts receivable (net).

33,000

36,000

Inventory

75,000

60,000

Plant and equipment (net)

262,500

225,000

Total assets

$375,000

$330,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable.

$ 60,000

$ 54,000

Capital stock

225,000

217,500

Retained earnings

90,000

58,500

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$375,000

$330,000

North Western Company

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2003

Sales

$412,500

Cost of goods sold.

225,000

Gross margin. .

$187,500

Operating expenses

135,000

Net income

$ 52,500

consider the following information as you match the companies 578860

By analyzing the information in Exercise 13 16, prepare a statement of cash flows. Use the direct method to report cash flows from operating activities.

CASH FLOW PATTERNS

Below are recent financial statement data for the following companies:

• AMAZON.COM

• COCA COLA

• EXXONMOBIL

• MICROSOFT

Use the financial statement data to match each company with its numbers. All numbers are inmillions.

Cash Flow from

Net

Operating

Investing

Financing

Income

Activities

Activities

Activities

1

$ (720)

$ (91)

$ (922)

$ 1,104

2

7,910

15,013

(10,985)

(4,779)

3

7,785

10,030

(11,191)

2,245

4

2,431

3,883

(3,421)

(471)

Consider the following information as you match the companies:

1.Start ups have high positive financing cash flows relative to investing cash flows.

2.Companies with lots of property, plant, and equipment have cash from operations that is greater than net income because of lots of depreciation expense.

3.Old cash cows are spending money on investing but still have plenty left over for a net cash outflow from financing activities.

what must have been the combined amount of cash flows provided by used in investing 578862

Development Corporation reports the following summary data for the current year:

a.Sales revenue totaled $251,500.

b.Interest revenue for the period was $2,200.

c.Interest expense for the period was $800.

d.Cost of goods sold for the period was $156,000.

e.Operating expenses, all paid in cash (except for depreciation of $15,000), were $48,000.

f.Income tax expense for the period was $8,000.

g.Accounts receivable (net) increased by $10,000 during the period.

h.Accounts payable decreased by $5,000 during the period.

i.Inventory at the beginning and end of the period was $25,000 and $35,000, respectively.

j.Cash increased during the period by $5,000.

Assume all other current asset and current liability accounts remained constant during the period.

Required

1.Compute the amount of cash collected from customers.

2.Compute the amount of cash paid for inventory.

3.Compute the amount of cash paid for operating expenses.

4.Compute the amount of cash flows provided by (used in) operations.

5. Interpretive Question: What must have been the combined amount of cash flows provided by (used in) investing and financing activities?

prepare a statement of cash flows for m amp m company for the year ended december 31 578863

The following information, in T account format, is provided for the M & M Company for the year 2003:

Cash Account

Beg. Bal.

15,400

(b)

56,500

(a)

147,000

(c)

23,000

(d)

3,500

(f)

59,700

(e)

15,000

(g)

1,600

End. Bal.

37,700

(h)

2,400

Additional information:

a.Sales revenue for the period was $145,000. Accounts receivable (net) decreased $2,000 during the period.

b.Net purchases of $58,000 were made during 2003, all on account. Accounts payable increased $1,500 during the period.

c.The equipment account increased by $18,000 during the year.

d.One piece of equipment that cost $5,000, with a net book value of $3,000, was sold for a $500 gain.

e.The company borrowed $15,000 from its bank during the year.

f.Various operating expenses were all paid in cash, except for depreciation of $1,800. Total operating expenses were $61,500.

g.Interest expense for the year was $1,200. The interest payable account decreased by $400 during the year.

h.Income tax expense for the year was $3,600. The income taxes payable account increased by $1,200 during the year.

1.From the information given, reconstruct the journal entries that must have been made during the year (omit explanations).

2.Prepare a statement of cash flows for M & M Company for the year ended December 31, 2003.

compute the beginning balance in the cash account 578864

The following information was provided by the treasurer of Surety, Inc., for the year 2003:

a.Cash sales for the year were $50,000; sales on account totaled $60,000.

b.Cost of goods sold was 50% of total sales.

c.All inventory is purchased on account.

d.Depreciation on equipment was $31,000 for the year.

e.Amortization of goodwill was $2,000.

f.Collections of accounts receivable were $38,000.

g.Payments on accounts payable for inventory equaled $39,000.

h.Rent expense paid in cash was $11,000.

i.The company issued 20,000 shares of $10 par stock for $240,000.

j.Land valued at $106,000 was acquired by issuance of a bond with a par value of $100,000.

k.Equipment was purchased for cash at a cost of $84,000.

l.Dividends of $46,000 were declared but not yet paid.

m.The company paid $15,000 of dividends that had been declared the previous year.

n.A machine used on the assembly line was sold for $12,000. The machine had a book value of $7,000.

o.Another machine with a book value of $500 was scrapped and was reported as an ordinary loss. No cash was received on this transaction.

p.The cash account increased $191,000 during the year to a total of $274,000.

Reqired

1.Compute the beginning balance in the cash account.

2.How much cash was provided by (or used in) operating activities?

3.How much cash was provided by (or used in) investing activities?

4.How much cash was provided by (or used in) financing activities?

5.Would all the above items, (a) through (p), be reported on a cash flow statement? Explain.

explain how gardner enterprises can pay cash dividends during a year when it reports 578865

Gardner Enterprises reported a net loss of $40,000 for the year just ended. Relevant data for the company follow.

Beginning

End of

of Year

Year

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 50,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable (net).

80,000

65,000

Inventory

123,000

130,000

Prepaid expenses

7,500

4,500

Accounts payable

55,000

60,000

Accrued liabilities

10,000

4,000

Dividends payable.

25,000

35,000

Depreciation for the year, $43,000

Dividends declared, $35,000

Required

1.Using the indirect method, determine the net cash flows provided by (used in) operating activities for Gardner Enterprises.

2. Interpretive Question: Explain how Gardner Enterprises can pay cash dividends during a year when it reports a net loss.

interpretive question explain the main differences between the net amount of cash fl 578866

Super Sales, Inc., shows the following information in its accounting records at year end:

Sales revenue

$890,000

Interest revenue

12,000

Cost of goods sold.

425,000

Wages expense.

225,000

Depreciation expense

50,000

Other (cash) operating expenses

84,000

Dividends declared.

40,000

Selected balance sheet data are as follows:

Beginning

End of

of Year

Year

Accounts receivable (net)

$ 55,000

$ 78,000

Interest receivable

10,000

12,000

Inventory

225,000

220,000

Accounts payable

42,000

35,000

Wages payable

20,000

25,000

Dividends payable

35,000

40,000

Required

1.Using the direct method, compute the net cash flows provided by (used in) operating activities for Super Sales, Inc.

2. Interpretive Question: Explain the main differences between the net amount of cash flows from operations and net income (loss).

what is the impact of dividends paid on net cash flows from operations explain 578867

The following combined income and retained earnings statement, along with selected balance sheet data, are provided for Roper Company:

Net sales revenue.

$85,000

Other revenues.

4,500*

Total revenues.

$89,500

Expenses:

$51,000

Cost of goods sold.

14,700

Selling and administrative expenses

3,200

Depreciation expense

1,400

Interest expense.

70,300

Total expenses.

$19,200

Income before taxes.

5,760

Income taxes

$13,440

Net income.

33,500

Retained earnings, January 1, 2003

$46,940

Dividends declared and paid.

2,500

Retained earnings, December 31, 2003

$44,440

Beginning

of Year

End of

Year

Accounts receivable (net)

$10,500

$11,000

Inventory

19,300

18,000

Prepaid expenses

950

700

Accounts payable

7,200

8,000

Interest payable

1,500

1,000

Income taxes payable.

500

2,500

Required

1.Using the indirect method, compute the net cash flows from operations for Roper Company for 2003.

2.Using the direct method, compute the net cash flows from operations for Roper Company for 2003.

3.What is the impact of dividends paid on net cash flows from operations? Explain.

complete the work sheet with the key items above and compute the net income loss to 578868

The following partially completed work sheet is provided for ATM Corporation, which uses the direct method in computing net cash flows from operations:

Accrual

Adjustments

Cash

Net sales revenue. .

Basis

Debits

Credits

Basis

Expenses:

$150,000

Cost of goods sold.

$ 75,000

Depreciation.

0

Loss on sale of equipment

0

Other (cash) expenses.

26,000

Total expenses

$101,000

Net income (net cash flows from operations)

$ 49,000

Key:

1.Decrease in Accounts Receivable (net), $4,500.

2.Loss on sale of equipment, $1,500.

3.Increase in Inventory, $10,000.

4.Increase in Accounts Payable, $3,000.

5.Depreciation for the year, $8,000.

6.Decrease in Prepaid Expenses, $1,000.

7.Increase in Accrued Liabilities, $2,500. Complete the work sheet with the key items above and compute the net income (loss) to be reported by ATM Corporation on its income statement for 2003.

using the data provided prepare an income statement for jackson corporation for the 578869

Jackson Corporation computed the amount of cash flows from operations using both the direct and indirect methods, as follows:

Direct method:

Collections from customers

$445,000

Payments to suppliers

(130,000)

Payments for operating expenses

(210,000)

Cash flows provided by operating activities .

$105,000

Indirect method:

Net income.

$ 95,000

Depreciation

20,000

Gain on sale of equipment

(7,500)

Decrease in inventory

1,000

Decrease in accounts receivable (net)

1,500

Decrease in accounts payable

(7,500)

Increase in miscellaneous accrued payable .

2,500

Cash flows provided by operating activities .

$105,000

Using the data provided, prepare an income statement for Jackson Corporation for the year 2003.

prepare a statement of cash flows for jem company for the year ended december 31 200 578870

JEM Company’s comparative balance sheets for 2002 and 2003 are provided.

2003

2002

Assets

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 30,500

$ 10,000

Accounts receivable (net)

64,500

51,000

Inventory

100,000

115,000

Equipment.

55,000

30,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(21,500)

(14,000)

Total assets

$228,500

$192,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 52,500

$ 46,000

Long term notes payable.

70,000

50,000

Capital stock

60,000

60,000

Retained earnings

46,000

36,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity.

$228,500

$192,000

The following additional information is available:

a.Net income for the year 2003 (as reported on the income statement) was $50,000.

b.Dividends of $40,000 were declared and paid.

c.Equipment that cost $8,000 and had a book value of $1,000 was sold during the year for $2,500.

Required

Based on the information provided, prepare a statement of cash flows for JEM Company for the year ended December 31, 2003. Use the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities.

financial statement data for continental stores inc are provided all numbers are sho 578871

Financial statement data for Continental Stores, Inc., are provided. (All numbers are shown rounded to the nearest thousand, with 000’s omitted.)

Continental Stores, Inc.

Income and Retained Earnings Statements

For the Year Ended December 31, 2003

Sales revenue

$1,290

Cost of goods sold

978

Gross margin

$ 312

Operating expenses:

Sales and administrative expenses.

$ 105

Depreciation expense.

14

Other expenses

87

Total operating expenses

$ 206

Income before taxes.

$ 106

Income taxes

51

Net income.

$ 55

Dividends paid.

10

Increase in retained earnings.

$ 45

Continental Stores, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 2003 and 2002

Assets

2003

2002

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 752

$ 725

Accounts receivable (net)

461

448

Inventory.

226

953

Land ..

1,340

1,240

Store fixtures .

369

369

Accumulated depreciation, store fixtures.

(51)

(37)

Total assets

$3,097

$3,698

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Liabilities:

Accounts payable.

$ 175

$ 378

Short term notes payable.

525

768

Long term debt..

804

1,004

Total liabilities

$1,504

$2,150

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock

$ 448

$ 448

Paid in capital in excess of par

500

500

Retained earnings

645

600

Total stockholders’ equity

$1,593

$1,548

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity.

$3,097

$3,698

1.Compute the net cash flows from operations using the direct method.

2. Interpretive Question: Comment on the difference between net income and net cash flows from operations.

3.Prepare a statement of cash flows for Continental Stores, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2003.

grant kesler is the manager and one of three brothers who own the rocky mountain aut 578873

Grant Kesler is the manager and one of three brothers who own the Rocky Mountain Auto Parts Company in Denver, Colorado. Grant is pleased that sales were up last year and that his new, small company has been able to expand and open a second store in Denver. After reviewing the balance sheet, however, Grant is concerned that Cash shows a negative balance. He can’t understand how his company can show net income, based on increased sales, yet have a negative Cash position. He is concerned about what his banker is going to say when they meet next month to discuss a loan for the company to expand to a third store. Grant provides the following financial information and asks for your help.

Sales.

$150,000

Less cost of goods sold .

63,000

Gross margin

$ 87,000

Operating expenses:

Salary and wages

$32,000

Depreciation

4,500

Other operating expenses

12,400

48,900

Operating income

$ 38,100

Income taxes

8,200

Net income..

$ 29,900

Rocky Mountain Auto Parts Company

Comparative Balance Sheets

As of December 31, 2003 and 2002

Assets

2003

2002

Current assets:

$ (3,200)

$ 6,400

Cash

3,100

2,700

Accounts receivable (net).

63,000

42,000

Inventory

$ 62,900

$51,100

Total current assets .

Other assets:

Property, plant, and equipment

$ 82,300

$39,000

Less accumulated depreciation

(20,100)

(15,600)

Total other assets

$ 62,200

$23,400

Total assets

$125,100

$74,500

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$ 6,400

$ 5,700

Wages payable .

1,500

1,300

Taxes payable

1,900

2,100

Total current liabilities

$ 9,800

$ 9,100

Other liabilities:

Notes payable.

30,000

10,000

Total liabilities

$ 39,800

$19,100

Stockholders’ equity:

Capital stock

$ 40,000

$40,000

Retained earnings

45,300

15,400

Total stockholders’ equity .

$ 85,300

$55,400

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$125,100

$74,500

1.Using the direct method, compute the net cash flows from operations. Also determine net cash flows for investing and financing activities.

2. Interpretive Question: Is Rocky Mountain Auto Parts Company in a good liquidity position? As Mr. Kesler’s banker, would you loan him more money to fund the company’s expansion?

determine the stockholders rsquo equity of flanagan corporation at december 31 2011 578895

Presented below is selected information related to Flanagan Corporation at December 31, 2011. Flanagan reports financial information monthly.

Office Equipment

$10,000

Utilities Expense

$ 4,000

Cash

8,000

Accounts Receivable

9,000

Service Revenue

36,000

Wages Expense

7,000

Rent Expense

11,000

Notes Payable

16,500

Accounts Payable

2,000

Dividends

5,000

(a) Determine the total assets of Flanagan Corporation at December 31, 2011.

(b) Determine the net income that Flanagan Corporation reported for December 2011.

(c) Determine the stockholders’ equity of Flanagan Corporation at December 31, 2011.

prepare journal entries to record these transactions 578818

FRC Manufacturing Company produces and sells one main product. There is significant seasonality in demand, and the unit price is quite high. As a result, during the heavy selling season, the company generates cash that is idle for a few months. The company uses this cash to acquire investments. The following transactions relate to FRC’s investments during 2003:

Mar. 15 Purchased 800 shares of Lewis Corporation stock at $25 per share, plus brokerage fees of $624. This stock is classified as trading.

Apr. 1 Purchased $42,000 of 12% bonds of Martin Company. This investment is classified as available for sale.

June 3 Received a cash dividend of $1.80 per share on the Lewis Corporation stock.

Oct. 1 Received a semiannual interest payment of $2,520 on the Martin Company bonds. 10 Sold 600 shares of the Lewis Corporation stock at $29 per share less a $325 brokerage fee.

Dec. 31 Recorded $1,260 of interest earned on the Martin Company bonds for the period October 1, 2003, through December 31, 2003.

31 The market price of the Lewis Corporation stock was $22 per share; the market price of the Martin Company bonds was $40,320. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.

the following data pertain to the investments of sumner company during 2003 the comp 578819

The following data pertain to the investments of Sumner Company during 2003, the company’s first year of operations:

a. Purchased 200 shares of Corporation A stock at $40 per share, plus brokerage fees of $100. Classified as trading.

b. Purchased $10,000 of Corporation B bonds at face value. Classified as trading.

c. Received a cash dividend of $0.50 per share on the Corporation A stock.

d. Received interest of $600 on the Corporation B bonds.

e. Purchased 50 shares of Corporation C stock for $3,500. Classified as available for sale.

f. Received interest of $600 on the Corporation B bonds.

g. Sold 80 shares of Corporation A stock for $32 per share due to a significant decline in the market.

h. Received a cash dividend of $1.40 per share on the Corporation C stock.

i. Interest receivable at year end on the Corporation B bonds amounts to $200.

j. Market value of securities at year end: Corporation A stock, $42 per share; Corporation B bonds, $10,200; Corporation C stock, $3,450. Enter these transactions in T accounts, and determine each of the following for the year:

Reqiored

1. Dividend revenue.

2. Bond interest revenue.

3. Net gain or loss from selling securities.

4. Unrealized gain or loss from holding securities.

why are losses from the write down of available for sale securities not included in 578820

Durham Company often purchases common stocks of other companies as long term investments. At the end of 2002, Durham held the common stocks listed. (Assume that Durham Company exercises no significant influence over these companies; that is, they are classified as available for sale securities.)

Number of

Cost

Corporation

Shares

per Share

A

2,000

$ 70

B

3,000

50

C

1,500

148

D

1,000

82

Additional information for 2002:

Sep. 30 Durham received a cash dividend of $2.50 per share on Corporation A stock.

Dec. 31 The market prices were quoted as follows:

Corporation A stock, $64; Corporation B stock, $48;

Corporation C stock, $150; Corporation D stock, $78.

Required

1. Illustrate how these investments would be reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2002, and prepare the adjusting entry at that date.

2. What items and amounts would be reported on the income statement for 2002?

3. Prepare the journal entry for the sale of Corporation D stock for $74 per share in 2003.

4. Interpretive Question: Why are losses from the write down of available for sale securities not included in the current year’s income, whereas similar losses for trading securitiesare included?

prepare journal entries for these transactions 578821

On January 1, Draxton Company had surplus cash and decided to make some long term investments. The following transactions occurred during the year:

Jan. 1 Purchased twenty $1,000, 12% bonds of Sifco Corporation at face value. Semiannual interest payment dates are January 1 and July 1 each year. The bonds are classified as available for sale.

Feb. 15 Purchased 4,000 shares of Porto Corporation stock at $35 per share, plus brokerage

fees of $1,500. The stock is classified as available for sale.

July 1 Received a semiannual interest payment on the Sifco Corporation bonds.

Sep. 30 Received an annual cash dividend of $1.50 per share on Porto Corporation stock.

Oct. 15 Sold 1,000 shares of the Porto Corporation stock at $42 per share.

Dec. 31 Adjusted the accounts to accrue interest on the Sifco Corporation bonds.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries for these transactions.

2. The market quote for Sifco Corporation’s bonds at closing on December 31 was 104.

The Porto Corporation stock closed at $40 per share. Prepare a partial balance sheet showing all the necessary data for these securities. Assume that Draxton exercises no significant influence over its investees.

prepare a partial income statement and balance sheet to show how the investments acc 578822

On March 15, 2003, Boston Company acquired 5,000 shares of Richfield Corporation common stock at $45 per share as a long term investment. Richfield has 50,000 shares of outstanding voting common stock. Boston does not own any other stocks. The following additional events occurred during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2003:

Dec. 1 Boston received a cash dividend of $2.50 per share from Richfield Corporation.

31 Richfield Corporation announced earnings for the year of $150,000.

31 Richfield common stock had a closing market price of $42 per share.

Required

1. What accounting method should be used to account for this investment? Why?

2. Prepare journal entries for the above transactions.

3. Prepare a partial income statement and balance sheet to show how the investments accounts would be shown on the financial statements.

prepare all adjusting journal entries needed at december 31 2003 578823

General Corporation has the following investments in equity securities at December 31, 2002 (there are no existing balances in the market adjustment account):

Percentage

of Shares

Market Price

Company

Classification

Shares

Owned

Cost

at 12/31/02

Clarke Corporation

Trading

1,000

2%

$75

$78

Marlin Company

Available for sale

4,000

15

34

32

Air Products, Inc.

Available for sale

3,000

10

46

43

1. Prepare any adjusting entries required at December 31, 2002.

2. Illustrate how these investments would be presented on General Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31, 2002. The available for sale securities are expected to be held for two to five years.

3. Prepare the journal entry on April 10, 2003, when General Corporation sold the Clarke Corporation investment for $72 per share.

4. Assume that General Corporation still owns its investment in Marlin Company and Air Products at December 31, 2003; the market prices on that date are $37 for Marlin and $44 for Air Products. Prepare all adjusting journal entries needed at December 31, 2003.

prepare a schedule showing the amortization of the bond premium or discount over the 578826

Corbett Corporation decided to purchase twenty $1,000, 10%, six year bonds of Texas Manufacturing Company as a long term investment on February 1, 2002. The bonds mature on February 1, 2008, and interest payments are made semiannually on February 1 and August 1.

1. How much should Corbett Corporation be willing to pay for the bonds if the current interest rate on similar bonds is 8%?

2. Prepare a schedule showing the amortization of the bond premium or discount over the remaining life of the bonds, assuming that Corbett Corporation uses the effective interest method of amortization.

3. How much bond interest revenue would be recorded each year if the straight line method of amortization were used? Show how these amounts differ from the annual interest recognized using the effective interest method. (Assume a fiscal year ending July 31.)

4. Interpretive Question: Which of the two amortization methods is preferable? Why?

show all adjusting entries relating to the bonds on december 31 2003 assuming that s 578827

Strong Equipment Company made the following purchases of debt securities during 2003. All are classified as held to maturity, and all pay interest semiannually.

Purchase

Date

Corp.

Face

Amount

Cost

Interest

Rate, %

Maturity

Date

Last

Interest

Payment

Date

10/15/03

A

$ 5,000

102

9

1/1/08

7/1/03

11/30/03

B

10,000

96

12

4/1/06

10/1/03

12/15/03

C

15,000

98

14

6/1/07

12/1/03

12/31/03

D

12,000

105

10¼

5/1/04

11/1/03

Required

1. Prepare journal entries for the purchases.

2. Show all adjusting entries relating to the bonds on December 31, 2003, assuming that Strong Equipment Company closes its book on that date and uses the straight line amortization method.

how should century account for its investments in essem corporation 578828

Century Corporation acquired 8,400 common shares of Fidelity Company on January 10, 2003, for $12 per share and acquired 15,000 common shares of Essem Corporation on January 25, 2003, for $22 per share. Fidelity has 60,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and Essem has 50,000 shares outstanding. At December 31, 2003, the following information was obtained about the operations of Fidelity and Essem:

Fidelity

Essem

Net income

$36,000.00

$100,000.00

Dividends paid per share .

0.40

1.00

Market value per share at December 31, 2003 .

10.00

20.00

Assume that Century Corporation exerted significant influence over the policies of Essem Corporation, but influenced the policies of Fidelity Corporation only to a very limited extent. Century classified its investment in Fidelity as an available for sale security.

1. How should Century account for its investments in Essem Corporation?

2. Prepare the journal entries for each investment for the year 2003 using the method or methods you selected in (1).

what is the minimum number of shares of stock that brock could have outstanding in o 578830

The following activities relate to the Hilton Company during the years 2002 and 2003: 2002

Feb. 15 Hilton purchased 5,000 shares of Brock Equipment stock for $35 per share. Dec. 1 Hilton received a $1.25 per share cash dividend from Brock Equipment. 31 Brock Equipment common stock had a closing market price of $32 per share. Brock’s 2002 net income was $60,000. 2003

July 1 Hilton sold all 5,000 shares of Brock Equipment stock for $37 per share. Additional information: Brock Equipment had 25,000 shares of common stock outstanding on January 1, 2002.

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions assuming:

a. The securities are classified as available for sale.

b. The equity method is used.

2. Show the amounts that would be reported on the financial statements of Hilton Company at December 31, 2002, under each assumption.

3. Interpretive Question: What is the minimum number of shares of stock that Brock could have outstanding in order for Hilton to use the equity method?

prepare the journal entries necessary to record the transactions for 2003 578831

During January 2003, Danbury, Inc., acquired 40,000 shares of Corporation A common stock for $24 per share. In addition, it purchased 5,000 shares of Corporation B preferred (nonvoting) stock for $112 per share. Corporation A has 160,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and Corporation B has 12,000 shares of nonvoting stock outstanding. Danbury anticipates holding both securities for at least five years. The following data were obtained from operations during 2003:

2003

Net income:

Corporation A

$190,000

Corporation B

80,000

Dividends paid (per share):

Corporation A.

$0.60

Corporation B

2.50

Market value per share at December 31:

Corporation A

$ 25

Corporation B

109

Required

1. Interpretive Question: What method should Danbury, Inc., use in accounting for the investment in Corporation A stock? Why? What accounting method should be used in accounting for Corporation B nonvoting stock? Why?

2. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record the transactions for 2003.

show how the long term investments and the related revenues would be reported on the 578832

On January 2, 2003, Drexello, Inc., purchased $75,000 of 10%, five year bonds of Greasy Trucking as a held to maturity security at a price of $77,610 plus accrued interest. The bonds mature on November 1, 2007, and interest is payable semiannually on May 1 and November 1. Drexello uses the straight line method of amortizing bond premiums and discounts. In addition to the bonds, Drexello purchased 30% of the 50,000 shares of outstanding common stock of Mellon Company at $42 per share, plus brokerage fees of $450, on January 10, 2003. On December 31, 2003, Mellon announced that its net income for the year was $150,000 and paid an annual dividend of $2 per share as advised by the board of directors of Drexello. The closing market price of Mellon common stock on December 31 was $38 per share.

1. Record all the 2003 transactions relating to these two investments in general journal form.

2. Show how the long term investments and the related revenues would be reported on the financial statements of Drexello at December 31, 2003.

prepare an income statement for the year ended december 31 2003 and a balance sheet 578837

Hannah Company started business on January 1, 2002. The following transactions and events occurred in 2002 and 2003. For simplicity, information for sales, inventory purchases, collections on account, and payments on account is given in summary form at the end of each year.

2002

Jan. 1 Issued 100,000 shares of $1 par common stock to investors at $20 per share. 1 Purchased a building for $550,000. The building has a 25 year expected useful life and a $50,000 expected salvage value. Hannah uses the straight line method of depreciation.1 Leased equipment under a five year lease. The five lease payments of $30,000 each are to be made on December 31 of each year. The cash price of the equipment is $113,724. This lease is accounted for as a capital lease with an implicit interest rate of 10%. The equipment has a five year useful life and zero expected salvage value; Hannah uses straight line depreciation with all of its equipment.

Feb. 1 Borrowed $1.5 million from Burtone Bank. The loan bears an 11% annual interest rate. Interest is to be paid each year on February 1. The principal on the loan will be repaid in four years

Mar. 1 Purchased 40,000 shares of Larry Company for $35 per share. Hannah classifies this as an investment in trading securities. These securities are reported as a current asset. July 15 Purchased 50,000 shares of Frances Ann Company for $21 per share. Hannah classifies this as an investment in available for sale securities. These securities are reported as a long term asset.

Nov. 17 Declared a cash dividend of $0.25 per share, payable on January 15, 2003.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 The Larry Company shares had a market value of $30 per share. The Frances Ann Company shares had a market value of $27 per share.

Summary

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $800,000. The cost of inventory sold was $350,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $370,000.

c. Inventory costing $420,000 was purchased on account. (Hannah Company uses the perpetual inventory method.)

d. Payments on account totaled $400,000.

2003

Jan. 1 Issued $500,000 in bonds at par value. The bonds have a stated interest rate of 8%, payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.

1 The estimated useful life and salvage value for the building were changed. It is now estimated that the building has a remaining life (as of January 1, 2003) of 20 years. Also, it is now estimated that the building will have no salvage value. These changes in estimate are to take effect for the year 2003 and subsequent years. 15 Paid the cash dividend declared in November 2002.

Feb. 1 Hannah Company repurchased 10,000 shares of its own common stock to be held as treasury stock. The price paid was $37 per share. 1 Paid the interest on the loan from Burtone Bank.

Apr. 10 Sold all 40,000 shares of the Larry Company stock. The shares were sold for $28per share.

July 1 Paid the interest on the bonds.

Oct. 1 Retired the bonds that were issued on January 1. Hannah had to pay $470,000 to retire the bonds. This amount included interest that had accrued since July 1.

Nov 20 Declared a cash dividend of $0.40 per share. The dividend applies only to outstanding shares, not to treasury shares.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 After recording depreciation expense for the year, the building was evaluated for possible impairment. The building is expected to generate cash flows of $20,000 per year for its 19 year remaining life. The building has a current market value of $325,000.

31 The Frances Ann Company shares had a market value of $18 per share.

Summary

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $1.7 million. The cost of inventory sold was $800,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $1.43 million.

c. Inventory costing $900,000 was purchased on account.

d. Payments on account totaled $880,000.

1. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2002. Also prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

2. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2002. There is no need to show your ledger Taccounts; however, preparing and posting to T accounts may aid in the preparation of the trial balance.

3. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2002, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2002.

4. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2003. Also prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

5. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2003. (As you compute the amounts to include in the trial balance, don’t forget the beginning balances left over from 2002.)

6. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2003, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2003.

what factors would you focus on and what additional information would you need befor 578842

Save More, Inc., a discount department store, has applied to its bankers for a loan. Although the company has been profitable, it is short of cash. The loan application includes the following information about current assets, current liabilities, net income, depreciation expense, and dividends for the past five years. (All numbers are rounded to the nearest thousand, with the 000s omitted.)

Dec. 31,

Dec. 31,

Dec. 31,

Dec. 31,

Dec. 31,

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 5

$ 73

$ 10

$158

$ (189)

Accounts receivable (net)

403

555

516

576

654

Inventory

253

142

383

385

1,022

Accounts payable

19

17

281

253

52

Net income

454

492

467

440

481

Depreciation expense . .

50

50

55

60

60

Dividends paid

177

197

208

211

211

ether the bank should loan money to Save More, Inc.

1.Compute the net cash flows from operations for the last four years.

2.What caused the sudden decrease in cash flows from operations?

3.What factors would you focus on and what additional information would you need before deciding whether to make the loan?

how do you think paula would analyze these results do you agree that analyzing cash 578844

Paula Dalton is a security analyst for DJM, Inc. She claims that she can tell a great deal about companies by analyzing their cash flow patterns. Specifically, she looks at the negative or posi tive cash flow trends in the three categories on cash flow statements. Paula thinks this information is even more valuable than net income trend data from income statements. She illustrates her theory with the following patterns of cash flows for Abbott Company over the past three years.

2003

2002

2001

Net income

+

+

Cash flows from:

Operating activities

_

+

Investing activities

+

+

+

Financing activities

+

+

+

How do you think Paula would analyze these results? Do you agree that analyzing cash flow patterns provides superior analytical information?

indicate whether each of the following items would be associated with a cash inflow 578845

Indicate whether each of the following items would be associated with a cash inflow (I), cash outflow (O), or noncash item (N) and under which category each would be reported on a statement of cash flows: Operating Activities (OA); Investing Activities (IA); Financing Activities (FA); or not on the statement (NOS). An example is provided.

Item

Classified as

Reported under

Example: Sales Revenue I

I

OA

1.Fees collected for services

2.Interest paid

3.Proceeds from sale of equipment

4.Cash (principal) received from bank on long term note

5.Purchase of treasury stock for cash

6.Collection of loan made to company officer

7.Cash dividends paid

8.Taxes paid

9.Depreciation expense

10.Wages paid to employees

11.Cash paid for inventory purchases

12.Proceeds from sale of common stock

13.Interest received on loan to company officer

14.Purchase of land by issuing stock

15.Utility bill paid

show in which section of the statement of cash flows the information would be report 578846

The following items summarize certain transactions that occurred during the past year for Alta Inc. Show in which section of the statement of cash flows the information would be reported by placing an X in the appropriate column. (Assume the direct method is used to report operating cash flows.)

Reported In

Statement of Cash Flows

Transaction

Operating

Investing

Financing

Not Reported in

Statement of Cash Flows

a. Collections from customers

b. Depreciation expense

c. Wages and salaries paid

d. Cash dividends paid

e. Taxes paid

f. Utilities paid

g. Building purchased in exchange for stock

h. Stock of Western Co. purchased

i. Inventory purchased for cash

j. Interest on Alta’s note to local bank paid

k. Interest received from a note with a customer

l. Delivery truck sold at no gain or loss

prepare journal entries for each of the transactions omit explanations 578847

Following are the transactions of Equine Company:

a.Sold equipment for $1,000. The original cost was $15,700; the book value is $1,700.

b.Purchased equipment costing $110,000 by paying cash of $20,000 and signing a $90,000 long term note at 12% interest.

c.Received $5,000 of the principal and $450 in interest on a long term note receivable.

d.Received $2,500 in cash dividends on stock held as a trading security. (Assume that the cost method is used.)

e.Purchased treasury stock for $3,000.

Complete the following:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of the transactions. (Omit explanations.)

2.For each transaction, indicate the amount of cash inflow or outflow. Then, note how each transaction would be classified on a statement of cash flows.

prepare appropriate journal entries for each of the above transactions omit explana 578848

The Vikon Company had the following selected transactions during the past year:

a.Sold (issued) 1,000 shares of common stock, $10 par, for $25 per share.

b.Collected $100,000 of accounts receivable.

c.Paid dividends to current stockholders in the amount of $50,000 (assume dividends declared earlier establishing a dividends payable account).

d.Received $1,500 interest on a note receivable from a company officer.

e.Paid the annual insurance premium of $1,200.

f.Recorded depreciation expense of $5,000.

1.Prepare appropriate journal entries for each of the above transactions. (Omit explanations.)

2.For each transaction, indicate the amount of cash inflow or outflw and also how each cash flow would be classified on a statement of cash flows.

prepare a statement of cash flows for new company for the year ended december 31 20 578849

Assume you have access to the ledger (specifically, the detail of the cash account) for New Company, represented by the following T account:

Cash

Beg. Bal.

11,500

(2)

75,000

(1)

150,000

(3)

60,000

(4)

6,000

(5)

5,500

(6)

30,000

(7)

25,000

(8)

12,000

(9)

15,000

End. Bal.

29,000

The transactions that are represented by posting entries (1) through (9) in the cash account are as follows:

1.Collections on account

2.Payments for wages and salaries

3.Payments for inventory

4.Proceeds from sale of equipment

5.Payments of dividends

6.Proceeds from new bank loan

7.Payments for other cash operating expenses

8.Proceeds from sale of nontrading securities

9.Payments for taxes

From these data, prepare a statement of cash flows for New Company for the year ended December 31, 2002.

comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to 578728

Liam Corporation and Aslan Corporation, two corporations of roughly the same size, are both involved in the manufacture of canoes and sea kayaks. Each company depreciates its plant assets using the straight line approach. An investigation of their financial statements reveals the following information.

Liam Corp.

Aslan Corp.

Net income

$ 300,000

$ 325,000

Sales revenue

1,100,000

990,000

Average total assets

1,000,000

1,050,000

Average plant assets

750,000

770,000

Instructions

(a) For each company, calculate the asset turnover ratio.

(b) Based on your calculations in part (a), comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to generate sales and produce net income.

prepare a 2012 income statement and an owner s equity statement 578729

Winterschid Company’s trial balance at December 31, 2012, is presented below. All 2012 transactions have been recorded except for the items described on page 500.

Cash

Debit

Accounts Receivable

$ 28,000

Notes Receivable

36,800

Interest Receivable

10,000

Inventory

–0–

Prepaid Insurance

36,200

Land

3,600

Buildings

20,000

Equipment

150,000

Patents

60,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

9,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

$ 500

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

50,000

Accounts Payable

24,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

27,300

Unearned Rent Revenue

–0–

Notes Payable (due in 2013)

6,000

Interest Payable

11,000

Notes Payable (due after 2013)

–0–

Owner’s Capital

35,000

Owner’s Drawings

113,600

Sales Revenue

900,000

Interest Revenue

–0–

Rent Revenue

–0–

Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets

–0–

Bad Debts Expense

–0–

Cost of Goods Sold

630,000

Depreciation Expense

–0–

Insurance Expense

–0–

Interest Expense

–0–

Other Operating Expenses

61,800

Amortization Expense

–0–

Salaries and Wages Expense

110,000

Total

$1,167,400

$1,167,400

Unrecorded transactions:

1. On May 1, 2012, Winterschid purchased equipment for $13,200 plus sales taxes of $600 (all paid in cash).

2. On July 1, 2012, Winterschid sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000.

Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2012, was $1,800; 2012 depreciation prior to the sale of the equipment was $450.

3. On December 31, 2012, Winterschid sold for $9,000 on account inventory that cost $6,300.

4. Winterschid estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year end is $4,000.

5. The note receivable is a one year, 8% note dated April 1, 2012. No interest has been recorded.

6. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600 6 month premium on September 1, 2012.

7. The building is being depreciated using the straight line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.

8. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.

9. The equipment purchased on May 1, 2012, is being depreciated using the straight line method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.

10. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2012, and has a useful life of 10 years from that date.

11. Unpaid salaries and wages at December 31, 2012, total $2,200.

12. The unearned rent revenue of $6,000 was received on December 1, 2012, for 3 months rent.

13. Both the short term and long term notes payable are dated January 1, 2012, and carry a 9% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above.

(b) Prepare an updated December 31, 2012, trial balance.

(c) Prepare a 2012 income statement and an owner’s equity statement.

(d) Prepare a December 31, 2012, classified balance sheet.

where does the company disclose its intangible assets and what types of intangibles 578731

The financial statements and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of PepsiCo, Inc. are presented in Appendix A.

Instructions

Refer to PepsiCo’s financial statements and answer the following questions.

(a) What was the total cost and book value of property, plant, and equipment at December 26, 2009?

(b) What method or methods of depreciation are used by the company for financial reporting purposes?

(c) What was the amount of depreciation and amortization expense for each of the three years 2007–2009?

(d) Using the statement of cash flows, what is the amount of capital spending in 2009 and 2008?

(e) Where does the company disclose its intangible assets, and what types of intangibles did it have at December 26, 2009?

which company should sally vogts buy why 578734

Reimer Company and Lingo Company are two proprietorships that are similar in many respects. One difference is that Reimer Company uses the straight line method and Lingo Company uses the declining balance method at double the straight line rate. On January 2, 2010, both companies acquired the depreciable assets show.

Asset

Cost

Salvage Value

Useful Life

Buildings

$320,000

$20,000

40 years

Equipment

110,000

10,000

10 years

Including the appropriate depreciation charges, annual net income for the companies in the years 2010, 2011, and 2012 and total income for the 3 years were as follows.

2010

2011

2012

Total

Reimer Company

$84,000

$88,400

$90,000

$262,400

Lingo Company

68,000

76,000

85,000

229,000

At December 31, 2012, the balance sheets of the two companies are similar except that Lingo Company has more cash than Reimer Company. Sally Vogts is interested in buying one of the companies. She comes to you for advice.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Determine the annual and total depreciation recorded by each company during the 3 years.

(b) Assuming that Lingo Company also uses the straight line method of depreciation instead of the declining balance method as in (a), prepare comparative income data for the 3 years.

(c) Which company should Sally Vogts buy? Why?

write a brief memo to your instructor discussing american exploration company s note 578735

The following was published with the financial statements to American Exploration Company.

Property, Plant, and Equipment—The Company accounts for its oil and gas exploration and production activities using the successful efforts method of accounting. Under this method, acquisition costs for proved and unproved properties are capitalized when incurred…. The costs of drilling exploratory wells are capitalized pending determination of whether each well has discovered proved reserves. If proved reserves are not discovered, such drilling costs are charged to expense…. Depletion of the cost of producing oil and gas properties is computed on the unitsof activity method.

Instructions

Write a brief memo to your instructor discussing American Exploration Company’s note regarding property, plant, and equipment. Your memo should address what is meant by the “successful efforts method” and “units of activity method.”

what is the effect of dennis harwood s proposed change on income before taxes in the 578736

Buster Container Company is suffering declining sales of its principal product, nonbiodegradeableplastic cartons. The president, Dennis Harwood, instructs his controller, Shelly McGlone, to lengthen asset lives to reduce depreciation expense. A processing line of automated plastic extruding equipment, purchased for $3.1 million in January 2012, was originally estimated to have a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $300,000. Depreciation has been recorded for 2 years on that basis. Dennis wants the estimated life changed to 12 years total, and the straight line method continued. Shelly is hesitant to make the change, believing it is unethical to increase net income in this manner. Dennis says, “Hey, the life is only an estimate, and I’ve heard that our competition uses a 12 year life on their production equipment.”

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Is the change in asset life unethical, or is it simply a good business practice by an astute president?

(c) What is the effect of Dennis Harwood’s proposed change on income before taxes in the year of change?

ow do you think the value of these brands is reported on the appropriate company s b 578737

Both the All About You feature (available at the book’s companion website) and the Feature Story at the beginning of the chapter discussed the company Rent A Wreck. Note that the trade name Rent A Wreck is a very important asset to the company, as it creates immediate product identification. As indicated in the chapter, companies invest substantial sums to ensure that their product is wellknown to the consumer. Test your knowledge of who owns some famous brands and their impact on the financial statements.

Instructions

(a) Provide an answer to the five multiple choice questions below.

(1) Which company owns both Taco Bell and Pizza Hut?

(a) McDonald’s.

(b) CKE.

(c) Yum Brands.

(d) Wendy’s.

(2) Dairy Queen belongs to:

(a) Breyer.

(b) Berkshire Hathaway.

(c) GE.

(d) The Coca Cola Company.

(3) Phillip Morris, the cigarette maker, is owned by:

(a) Altria.

(b) GE.

(c) Boeing.

(d) ExxonMobil.

(4) AOL, a major Internet provider, belongs to:

(a) Microsoft.

(b) Cisco.

(c) NBC.

(d) Time Warner.

(5) ESPN, the sports broadcasting network, is owned by:

(a) Procter & Gamble.

(b) Altria.

(c) Walt Disney.

(d) The Coca Cola Company.

(b) How do you think the value of these brands is reported on the appropriate company’s balance sheet?

prepare the current liability section of lepid s december 31 2012 balance sheet 578750

Lepid Company has the following account balances at December 31, 2012.

Notes payable ($80,000 due after 12/31/13)

$200,000

Unearned service revenue

75,000

Other long term debt ($30,000 due in 2013)

150,000

Salaries and wages payable

22,000

Other accrued expenses

15,000

Accounts payable

100,000

In addition, Lepid is involved in a lawsuit. Legal counsel feels it is probable Lepid will pay damages of $38,000 in 2013.

(a) Prepare the current liability section of Lepid’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

(b) Lepid’s current assets are $504,000. Compute Lepid’s working capital and current ratio.

journalize the february transactions 578753

Indiana Jones Company had the following selected transactions.

Feb.

1

Signs a $50,000, 6 month, 9% interest bearing note payable to CitiBank and receives

$50,000 in cash.

10

Cash register sales total $43,200, which includes an 8% sales tax.

28

The payroll for the month consists of salaries and wages of $50,000. All wages are

subject to 8% FICA taxes. A total of $8,900 federal income taxes are withheld. The

salaries are paid on March 1.

28

The company develops the following adjustment data.

  1. Interest expense of $375 has been incurred on the note.
  2. Employer payroll taxes include 8% FICA taxes, a 5.4% state unemployment tax, and a 0.8% federal unemployment tax.
  3. Some sales were made under warranty. Of the units sold under warranty, 350 are expected to become defective. Repair costs are estimated to be $40 per unit.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the February transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries at February 28.

compute goblin s working capital and current ratio 578755

Goblin Company, has the following account balances at December 31, 2012.

Notes payable ($60,000 due after 12/31/13)

$100,000

Unearned service revenue

70,000

Other long term debt ($90,000 due in 2013)

250,000

Salaries and wages payable

32,000

Accounts payable

63,000

In addition, Goblin is involved in a lawsuit. Legal counsel feels it is probable Goblin will pay damages of $85,000 in 2013.

(a) Prepare the current liability section of Goblin’s 12/31/12 balance sheet.

(b) Goblin’s current assets are $570,000. Compute Goblin’s working capital and current ratio.

prepare journal entries for each of the transactions 578797

C.S. Lewis Company had the following transactions involving notes payable.

July 1, 2012

Borrows $50,000 from Fourth National Bank by signing a 9 month, 12% note.

Nov. 1, 2012

Borrows $60,000 from Livingston State Bank by signing a 3 month, 10% note.

Dec. 31, 2012

Prepares adjusting entries.

Feb. 1, 2013

Pays principal and interest to Livingston State Bank.

Apr. 1, 2013

Pays principal and interest to Fourth National Bank.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries for each of the transactions.

kroger co s 2009 financial statements contained the following data in millions 578804

Kroger Co.’s 2009 financial statements contained the following data (in millions).

Current assets

$ 7,450

Accounts receivable

$909

Total assets

23,093

Interest expense

502

Current liabilities

7,714

Income tax expense

532

Total liabilities

18,187

Net income

70

Cash

424

Instructions

Compute these values:

(a) Working capital.

(b) Current ratio.

compute the following amounts for pedja s wages for the current week 578806

Pedja Belic’s regular hourly wage rate is $15, and she receives a wage of 1½ times the regular hourly rate for work in excess of 40 hours. During a March weekly pay period, Pedja worked 42 hours. Her gross earnings prior to the current week were $6,000. Pedja is married and claims three withholding allowances. Her only voluntary deduction is for group hospitalization insurance at $25 per week.

Instructions

(a) Compute the following amounts for Pedja’s wages for the current week.

(1) Gross earnings.

(2) FICA taxes. (Assume an 8% rate on maximum of $90,000.)

(3) Federal income taxes withheld. (Use the withholding table in the text, page 521.)

(4) State income taxes withheld. (Assume a 2.0% rate.)

(5) Net pay.

(b) Record Pedja’s pay.

prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and alvarez s payroll tax expense 578808

Alvarez Company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending January 31.

Federal

Hours

Hourly

Income Tax

Health

Employee

M

T

W

T

F

S

Rate

Withholding

Insurance

L. Donnon

8

8

9

8

10

3

$12

$34

$10

L. Gregoire

8

8

8

8

8

2

13

37

25

D. Alcazar

9

10

8

8

9

0

15

58

25

Employees are paid 1½ times the regular hourly rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Alvarez Company is subject to 5.4% state unemployment taxes and 0.8% federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the payroll register for the weekly payroll.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and Alvarez’s payroll tax expense.

journalize the february payroll and the payment of the payroll 578809

Selected data from a February payroll register for Favino Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.

Gross earnings:

State income taxes

$ (3)

Regular

$8,900

Union dues

100

Overtime

(1)

Total deductions

(4)

Total

(2)

Net pay

$7,660

Deductions:

Account debited:

FICA taxes

$ 800

Salaries and wages expense

(5)

Federal income taxes

1,140

FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts.

(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll.

the following data pertain to the securities of linford company during 2003 the comp 578813

The following data pertain to the securities of Linford Company during 2003, the company’s first year of operations:

a. Purchased 400 shares of Corporation A stock at $40 per share plus a commission of $200. This security is classified as trading.

b. Purchased $6,000 of Corporation B bonds. These bonds are classified as trading.

c. Received a cash dividend of $0.50 per share on the Corporation A stock.

d. Sold 100 shares of Corporation A stock for $46 per share.

e. Received interest of $240 on the Corporation B bonds.

f. Purchased 50 shares of Corporation C stock for $3,500. Classified the stock as availablefor sale.

g. Received interest of $240 on the Corporation B bonds.

h. Sold 150 shares of Corporation A stock for $28 per share.

i. Received a cash dividend of $1.40 per share on the Corporation C stock.

j. Interest receivable at year end on the Corporation B bonds amounts to $60. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions. Post the entries to T accounts, and determine the amount of each of the following for the year:

Required

1. Dividend revenue.

2. Bond interest revenue.

3. Net gain or loss from selling securities.

how would your answer to 1 change if the securities were classified as available for 578814

Fox Company incurred the following transactions relating to the common stock of NOP Company:

July 10, 2001 Purchased 10,000 shares at $45 per share.

Sep. 29, 2002 Sold 2,000 shares at $51 per share.

Aug. 17, 2003 Sold 2,500 shares at $33 per share.

The end of year market prices for the shares were as follows:

Dec. 31, 2001 $47 per share

Dec. 31, 2002 $39 per share

Dec. 31, 2003 $31 per share

Fox Company classifies the NOP stock as trading securities.

1. Determine the amount of (a) realized gain or loss and (b) unrealized gain or loss to be reported on the income statement each year relating to the NOP stock.

2. How would your answer to (1) change if the securities were classified as available for sale? Explain.

determine the amount of a realized gain or loss and b unrealized gain or loss to be 578815

Lorien Technologies, Inc., purchased the following securities during 2002:

Market Value

Security

Classification

Cost

(12/31/02)

A

Trading

$ 5,000

$ 4,000

B

Trading

7,000

10,000

C

Available for sale

10,000

8,000

D

Available for sale

6,000

3,500

The following transactions occurred during 2003:

a. On January 1, 2003, Lorien purchased Security E for $12,000. Security E is classified as available for sale.

b. On March 23, 2003, Security B was sold for $4,700.

c. On July 23, 2003, Security C was sold for $19,500.

The remaining securities had the following market values as of December 31, 2003:

Market

Security

Value

A

$ 4,500

D

5,000

E

13,000

1. Determine the amount of (a) realized gain or loss and (b) unrealized gain or loss to be reported relating to Lorien’s trading securities for 2003.

2. Determine the amount of (a) realized gain or loss and (b) unrealized gain or loss to be reported relating to Lorien’s available for sale securities for 2003. Which amounts will appear on the income statement?

prepare the appropriate journal entries to record each of these transactions 578816

In December 2003, the treasurer of Marble Company concluded that the company had excess cash on hand and decided to invest in Sandy Corporation stock. The company intends to hold the stock for a period of 6 to 12 months and classifies the security as trading. The following transactions took place:

Jan. 1 Purchased 5,500 shares of Sandy Corporation stock for $82,500.

Apr. 15 Received a cash dividend of $0.65 per share on the Sandy Corporation stock.

May 22 Sold 1,500 shares of the Sandy Corporation stock at $20 per share for cash.

July 15 Received a cash dividend of $0.45 per share on the Sandy Corporation stock.

Aug. 31 Sold the balance of the Sandy Corporation stock at $8 per share for cash.

Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record each of these transactions.

what items and amounts would be reported on the income statement for the year 578817

Menlo Company often invests in the debt and equity securities of other companies as short term investments. During 2003, the following events occurred: July 1 Menlo purchased the securities listed here:

Security

Type

Classification

Cost

1

Debt

Trading

$28,800

2

Equity

Trading

27,600

3

Equity

Trading

46,800

4

Equity

Available for sale

16,800

Sep. 30 Menlo received a cash dividend of $1,500 on Security 2.

Dec. 1 Menlo sold Security 4 for $14,800.

31 Menlo received interest of $2,600 on Security 1.

31 The market prices were quoted as follows: Security 1, $25,600; Security 2, $28,800; Security 3, $45,000.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the events.

2. Illustrate how these investments would be reported on the balance sheet at December 31.

3. What items and amounts would be reported on the income statement for the year?

match the statement with the term most directly associated with it 578642

Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.

Goodwill

Intangible assets

Research and development costs

Amortization

Franchises

1. Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long lived assets that do not possess physical substance.

2. The allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense in a rational and systematic manner.

3. A right to sell certain products or services, or use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.

4. Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred.

5. The excess of the cost of a company over the fair value of the net assets acquired.

explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of 578695

The following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by Georgie Company during the first 2 months of 2012.

1. Paid $5,000 of accrued taxes at time plant site was acquired.

2. Paid $200 insurance to cover possible accident loss on new factory machinery while the machinery was in transit.

3. Paid $850 sales taxes on new delivery truck.

4. Paid $17,500 for parking lots and driveways on new plant site.

5. Paid $250 to have company name and advertising slogan painted on new delivery truck.

6. Paid $8,000 for installation of new factory machinery.

7. Paid $900 for one year accident insurance policy on new delivery truck.

8. Paid $75 motor vehicle license fee on the new truck.

Instructions

(a) Explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of plant assets.

(b) List the numbers of the foregoing transactions, and opposite each indicate the account title to which each expenditure should be debited.

indicate to which account moseley would debit each of the costs 578696

Moseley Company incurred the following costs.

1. Sales tax on factory machinery purchased

$ 5,000

2. Painting of and lettering on truck immediately upon purchase

700

3. Installation and testing of factory machinery

2,000

4. Real estate broker’s commission on land purchased

3,500

5. Insurance premium paid for first year’s insurance on new truck

880

6. Cost of landscaping on property purchased

7,200

7. Cost of paving parking lot for new building constructed

17,900

8. Cost of clearing, draining, and filling land

13,300

9. Architect’s fees on self constructed building

10,000

Instructions

Indicate to which account Moseley would debit each of the costs.

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 578698

Jim McAvoy has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation.

1. Depreciation is a process of asset valuation, not cost allocation.

2. Depreciation provides for the proper matching of expenses with revenues.

3. The book value of a plant asset should approximate its fair value.

4. Depreciation applies to three classes of plant assets: land, buildings, and equipment.

5. Depreciation does not apply to a building because its usefulness and revenue producing ability generally remain intact over time.

6. The revenue producing ability of a depreciable asset will decline due to wear and tear and to obsolescence.

7. Recognizing depreciation on an asset results in an accumulation of cash for replacement of the asset.

8. The balance in accumulated depreciation represents the total cost that has been charged to expense.

9. Depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are reported on the income statement.

10. Four factors affect the computation of depreciation: cost, useful life, salvage value, and residual value.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

compute the revised annual depreciation on each asset in 2012 578702

Kiran Shah, the new controller of Ginarrbrik Company, has reviewed the expected useful lives and salvage values of selected depreciable assets at the beginning of 2012. His findings are as follows.

Accumulated

Useful Life

Type of

Date

Depreciation

in Years

Salvage Value

Asset

Acquired

Cost

1/1/12

Old

Proposed

Old

Proposed

Building

1/1/06

$800,000

$114,000

40

50

$40,000

$37,000

Warehouse

1/1/07

100,000

19,000

25

20

5,000

3,600

All assets are depreciated by the straight line method. Ginarrbrik Company uses a calendar year in preparing annual financial statements. After discussion, management has agreed to accept Kiran’s proposed changes.

Instructions

(a) Compute the revised annual depreciation on each asset in 2012. (Show computations.)

(b) Prepare the entry (or entries) to record depreciation on the building in 2012.

journalize all entries required on the above dates including entries to update depre 578703

Presented below are selected transactions at Kirke Company for 2012.

Jan.

1

Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2002. The machine cost

$62,000 on that date. It had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.

June

30

Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2009. The computer cost $40,000. It

had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $14,000.

Dec.

31

Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2008. The truck cost

$39,000. It was depreciated based on a 6 year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.

Instructions

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Kirke Company uses straight line depreciation.

prepare the necessary entries to record these intangibles all costs incurred were fo 578707

Kake Company, organized in 2012, has the following transactions related to intangibleassets.

1/2/12

Purchased patent (7 year life)

$560,000

4/1/12

Goodwill purchased (indefinite life)

360,000

7/1/12

10 year franchise; expiration date 7/1/2022

440,000

9/1/12

Research and development costs

185,000

Instructions

Prepare the necessary entries to record these intangibles. All costs incurred were for cash. Make the adjusting entries as of December 31, 2012, recording any necessary amortization and reflecting all balances accurately as of that date.

analyze the foregoing transactions using the following column headings 578711

Rumblebuffin Company was organized on January 1. During the first year of operations, the following plant asset expenditures and receipts were recorded in random order.

Debits

1. Cost of filling and grading the land

$ 4,000

2. Full payment to building contractor

700,000

3. Real estate taxes on land paid for the current year

5,000

4. Cost of real estate purchased as a plant site (land $100,000 and

building $45,000)

145,000

5. Excavation costs for new building

35,000

6. Architect’s fees on building plans

10,000

7. Accrued real estate taxes paid at time of purchase of real estate

2,000

8. Cost of parking lots and driveways

14,000

9. Cost of demolishing building to make land suitable for

15,000

construction of new building

$930,000

Credit

10. Proceeds from salvage of demolished building

$ 3,500

Instructions

Analyze the foregoing transactions using the following column headings. Insert the number of each transaction in the Item space, and insert the amounts in the appropriate columns. For amounts entered in the Other Accounts column, also indicate the account titles.

Item

Land

Buildings

Other Accounts

compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each bus at december 31 2012 578712

In recent years, Sonya Transportation purchased three used buses. Because of frequent turnover in the accounting department, a different accountant selected the depreciation method for each bus, and various methods were selected. Information concerning the buses is summarized on page 494.

Salvage

Useful Life

Bus

Acquired

Cost

Value

in Years

Depreciation Method

1

1/1/10

$ 96,000

$ 6,000

5

Straight line

2

1/1/10

120,000

10,000

4

Declining balance

3

1/1/11

80,000

8,000

5

Units of activity

For the declining balance method, the company uses the double declining rate. For the units of activity method, total miles are expected to be 120,000. Actual miles of use in the first 3 years were: 2011, 24,000; 2012, 34,000; and 2013, 30,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each bus at December 31, 2012.

(b) If bus no. 2 was purchased on April 1 instead of January 1, what is the depreciation expense for this bus in (1) 2010 and (2) 2011?

indicate how much depreciation expense should be recorded each year for this equipme 578714

At the beginning of 2010, Sarofim Company acquired equipment costing $90,000. It was estimated that this equipment would have a useful life of 6 years and a residual value of $9,000 at that time. The straight line method of depreciation was considered the most appropriate to use with this type of equipment. Depreciation is to be recorded at the end of each year.

During 2012 (the third year of the equipment’s life), the company’s engineers reconsidered their expectations, and estimated that the equipment’s useful life would probably be 7 years (in total) instead of 6 years. The estimated residual value was not changed at that time. However, during 2015 the estimated residual value was reduced to $5,000.

Instructions

Indicate how much depreciation expense should be recorded each year for this equipment, by completing the following table.

Year

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

prepare the plant assets section of alina s balance sheet at december 31 2013 578715

At December 31, 2012, Alina Company reported the following as plant assets.

Land

$ 4,000,000

Buildings

$28,500,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings

12,100,000

16,400,000

Equipment

48,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment

5,000,000

43,000,000

Total plant assets

$63,400,000

During 2013, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

April

1

Purchased land for $2,130,000.

May

1

Sold equipment that cost $780,000 when purchased on January 1, 2009. The equipment

was sold for $450,000.

June

June

Sold land purchased on June 1, 2003 for $1,500,000. The land cost $400,000.

July

July

Purchased equipment for $2,000,000.

Dec.

Dec.

Retired equipment that cost $500,000 when purchased on December 31, 2003. No

salvage value was received.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the above transactions. The company uses straight line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 50 year life and no salvage value. The equipment is estimated to have a 10 year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.

(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2013.

(c) Prepare the plant assets section of Alina’s balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

prepare journal entries to record the transactions above 578717

The intangible assets section of Centaur Company at December 31, 2012, is presented below.

Patents ($70,000 cost less $7,000 amortization)

$63,000

Franchises ($48,000 cost less $19,200 amortization)

28,800

Total

$91,800

The patent was acquired in January 2012 and has a useful life of 10 years. The franchise was acquired in January 2009 and also has a useful life of 10 years. The following cash transactions may have affected intangible assets during 2013.

Jan. 2

Paid $45,000 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.

Jan.–June

Developed a new product, incurring $140,000 in research and development costs. A

patent was granted for the product on July 1. Its useful life is equal to its legal life.

Sept. 1

Paid $50,000 to an extremely large defensive lineman to appear in commercials

advertising the company’s products. The commercials will air in September and October.

Oct. 1

Acquired a franchise for $100,000. The franchise has a useful life of 50 years.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions above.

(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2013 amortization expense.

(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012 578718

Due to rapid turnover in the accounting department, a number of transactions involving intangible assets were improperly recorded by the Satyr Company in 2012.

1. Satyr developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of $136,000. The company also purchased a patent for $60,000. In early January, Satyr capitalized $196,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization expense of $9,800 was recorded based on a 20 year useful life.

2. On July 1, 2012, Satyr purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of $92,000. Satyr recorded a half year’s amortization in 2012, based on a 50 year life ($920 amortization). The goodwill has an indefinite life.

Instructions

Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012. Assume the books have not yet been closed for 2012.

based on your calculations in part a comment on the relative effectiveness of the tw 578719

Ratilal Company and Navi Corporation, two corporations of roughly the same size, are both involved in the manufacture of in line skates. Each company depreciates its plant assets using the straight line approach. An investigation of their financial statements reveals the following information.

Ratilal Co.

Navi Corp.

Net income

$ 800,000

$1,000,000

Sales revenue

1,200,000

1,080,000

Average total assets

2,500,000

2,000,000

Average plant assets

1,800,000

1,000,000

Instructions

(a) For each company, calculate the asset turnover ratio.

(b) Based on your calculations in part (a), comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to generate sales and produce net income.

compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each machine at december 31 2012 578721

In recent years, Kannada Company purchased three machines. Because of heavy turnover in the accounting department, a different accountant was in charge of selecting the depreciation method for each machine, and each selected a different method. Information concerning the machines is summarized below.

Salvage

Useful Life

Depreciation

Machine

Acquired

Cost

Value

in Years

Method

1

1/1/09

$105,000

$ 5,000

10

Straight line

2

1/1/10

150,000

10,000

8

Declining balance

3

11/1/12

100,000

15,000

6

Units of activity

For the declining balance method, the company uses the double declining rate. For the units of activity method, total machine hours are expected to be 25,000. Actual hours of use in the first 3 years were: 2012, 2,000; 2013, 4,500; and 2014, 5,500.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each machine at December 31, 2012.

(b) If machine 2 had been purchased on May 1 instead of January 1, what would be the depreciation expense for this machine in (1) 2010 and (2) 2011?

calculate the amount of depreciation expense that zakiuddin should record for machin 578722

On January 1, 2012, Zakiuddin Company purchased the following two machines for use in its production process.

Machine A:

The cash price of this machine was $55,000. Related expenditures included:

sales tax $2,750, shipping costs $100, insurance during shipping $75, installation

and testing costs $75, and $90 of oil and lubricants to be used with the

machinery during its first year of operation. Zakiuddin estimates that the useful

life of the machine is 4 years with a $5,000 salvage value remaining at the

end of that time period.

Machine B:

The recorded cost of this machine was $100,000. Zakiuddin estimates that the

useful life of the machine is 4 years with a $10,000 salvage value remaining at

the end of that time period.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the following for Machine A.

(1) The journal entry to record its purchase on January 1, 2012.

(2) The journal entry to record annual depreciation at December 31, 2012, assuming the straight line method of depreciation is used.

(b) Calculate the amount of depreciation expense that Zakiuddin should record for machine B each year of its useful life under the following assumption.

(1) Zakiuddin uses the straight line method of depreciation.

(2) Zakiuddin uses the declining balance method. The rate used is twice the straight line rate.

(3) Zakiuddin uses the units of activity method and estimates the useful life of the machine is 25,000 units. Actual usage is as follows: 2012, 5,500 units; 2013, 7,000 units; 2014, 8,000 units; 2015, 4,500 units.

(c) Which method used to calculate depreciation on machine B reports the lowest amount of depreciation expense in year 1 (2012)? The lowest amount in year 4 (2015)? The lowest total amount over the 4 year period?

indicate how much depreciation expense should be recorded for this equipment each ye 578723

At the beginning of 2010, Farooque Company acquired equipment costing $200,000. It was estimated that this equipment would have a useful life of 6 years and a residual value of $20,000 at that time. The straight line method of depreciation was considered the most appropriate to use with this type of equipment. Depreciation is to be recorded at the end of each year.

During 2012 (the third year of the equipment’s life), the company’s engineers reconsidered their expectations, and estimated that the equipment’s useful life would probably be 7 years (in total) instead of 6 years. The estimated residual value was not changed at that time. However, during 2015 the estimated residual value was reduced to $5,000.

Instructions

Indicate how much depreciation expense should be recorded for this equipment each year by completing the following table.

Year

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

prepare the plant assets section of ramaswami s balance sheet at december 31 2013 578724

At December 31, 2012, Ramaswami Company reported the following as plant assets.

Land

$ 2,000,000

Buildings

$20,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings

8,000,000

12,000,000

Equipment

30,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment

4,000,000

26,000,000

Total plant assets

$40,000,000

During 2013, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

April

1

Purchased land for $1,200,000.

May

1

Sold equipment that cost $420,000 when purchased on January 1, 2009. The equipment

was sold for $240,000.

June

1

Sold land purchased on June 1, 2003, for $1,000,000. The land cost $340,000.

July

1

Purchased equipment for $1,100,000.

Dec.

31

Retired equipment that cost $300,000 when purchased on December 31, 2003. No

salvage value was received.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the above transactions. Ramaswami uses straight line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 50 year useful life and no salvage value. The equipment is estimated to have a 10 year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.

(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2013.

(c) Prepare the plant assets section of Ramaswami’s balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

prepare journal entries to record the 2013 amortization expense for intangible asset 578726

The intangible assets section of Praphaphorn Company at December 31, 2012, is presented below.

Patents ($100,000 cost less $10,000 amortization)

$ 90,000

Copyrights ($60,000 cost less $24,000 amortization)

36,000

Total

$126,000

The patent was acquired in January 2012 and has a useful life of 10 years. The copyright was acquired in January 2009 and also has a useful life of 10 years. The following cash transactions may have affected intangible assets during 2013.

Jan. 2

Paid $45,000 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.

Jan.–June

Developed a new product, incurring $230,000 in research and development costs. A

patent was granted for the product on July 1. Its useful life is equal to its legal life.

Sept. 1

Paid $125,000 to an Xgames star to appear in commercials advertising the company’s

products. The commercials will air in September and October.

Oct. 1

Acquired a copyright for $200,000. The copyright has a useful life of 50 years.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions above.

(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2013 amortization expense for intangible assets.

(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

(d) Prepare the note to the financials on Praphaphorn’s intangibles as of December 31, 2013.

prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012 578727

Due to rapid turnover in the accounting department, a number of transactions involving intangible assets were improperly recorded by Chansantor Company in 2012.

1. Chansantor developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of $110,000. The company also purchased a patent for $50,000. In early January, Chansantor capitalized $160,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization expense of $8,000 was recorded based on a 20 year useful life.

2. On July 1, 2012, Chansantor purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of $200,000. Chansantor recorded a half year’s amortization in 2012, based on a 50 year life ($2,000 amortization). The goodwill has an indefinite life.

Instructions

Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012. Assume the books have not yet been closed for 2012.

based on these facts what are austin rsquo s current ratio and debt ratio 578581

Selected data for Austin Company follow:

Current assets

$50,000

Current liabilities

$40,000

Long term assets

70,000

Long term liabilities

35,000

Total revenues

30,000

Total expenses

20,000

Based on these facts, what are Austin’s current ratio and debt ratio?

Current ratio Debt ratio

a. 2 to 1 0.5 to 1

b. .83 to 1 0.5 to 1

c. 1.25 to 1 0.625 to 1

d. 2 to 1 0.633 to 1

how much were cherokee rsquo s total expenses show your work 578584

(Learning Objective 1: Linking accrual accounting and cash flows) Cherokee Corporation earned revenues of $35 million during 20X1 and ended the year with net income of $8 million. During 20X1, Cherokee collected $33 million from customers and paid cash for all of its expenses plus an additional $1 million for amounts payable at December 31, 20X0. Answer these questions about Cherokee’s operating results, financial position, and cash flows during 20X1:

Required

1. How much were Cherokee’s total expenses? Show your work.

2. Identify all the items that Cherokee will report on its 20X1 income statement. Show each amount.

3. Cherokee began 20X1 with receivables of $4 million. All sales are on account. What was the company’s receivables balance at the end of 20X1? Identify the appropriate financial statement, and show how Cherokee will report ending receivables in the 20X1 annual report.

4. Cherokee began 20X1 owing accounts payable of $9 million. All expenses are increased on account. During 20X1 Cherokee paid $28 million on account. How much in accounts payable did the company owe at the end of the year? Identify the appropriate financial statement and show how Cherokee will report accounts payable in its 20X1 annual report.

prepare the monthly income statement the statement of retained earnings and the clas 578589

P3 57A

(Learning Objective 3, 4, 6: Preparing an adjusted trial balance and the financial statements; using the current ratio to evaluate the business) The unadjusted trial balance of Princess, Inc., at January 31, 20X2, and the related month end adjustment data follow.

Princess, Inc. Trial Balance January 31, 20X2

Cash

$ 8,000

Accounts receivable

10,000

Prepaid rent

3,000

Supplies

2,000

Furniture

36,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 3,000

Accounts payable

10,000

Salary payable

Common stock

26,000

Retained earnings (December 31, 20X1)

13,000

Dividends

4,000

Service revenue

14,000

Salary expense

2,000

Rent expense

Utilities expense

1,000

Depreciation expense

Supplies expense

Total

$66,000

$66,000

Adjustment data:

a. Accrued service revenue at January 31, $2,000.

b. Prepaid rent expired during the month. The unadjusted prepaid balance of $3,000 relates to the period January through March.

c. Supplies used during January, $2,000.

d. Depreciation on furniture for the month. The estimated useful life of the furniture is 3 years.

e. Accrued salary expense at January 31 for Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday. The 5 day weekly payroll of $5,000 will be paid on Friday, February 2.

Required

1. Using Exhibit 3 9, page 145, as an example, prepare the adjusted trial balance of Princess, Inc., at January 31, 20X2. Key each adjusting entry by letter.

2. Prepare the monthly income statement, the statement of retained earnings, and the classified balance sheet. Draw arrows linking the three financial statements.

peppertree apartments inc rsquo s unadjusted and adjusted trial balances at april 30 578590

(Learning Objective 3: Analyzing and recording adjustments) Peppertree Apartments, Inc.’s, unadjusted and adjusted trial balances at April 30, 20X1, is given on the next page.

Peppertree Apartments, Inc. Adjusted Trial Balance April 30, 20X1

Trial Balance

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account Title

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Cash

8,300

8,300

Accounts receivable

6,300

6,800

Interest receivable

300

Note receivable

4,100

4,100

Supplies

900

200

Prepaid insurance

2,400

700

Building

66,400

66,400

Accumulated depreciation

16,000

18,200

Accounts payable

6,900

6,900

Wages payable

400

Unearned rental revenue

600

100

Common stock

18,000

18,000

Retained earnings

42,700

42,700

Dividends

3,600

3,600

Rental revenue

9,900

10,900

Interest revenue

300

Wage expense

1,600

2,000

Insurance expense

1,700

Depreciation expense

2,200

Property tax expense

300

300

Supplies expense

700

Utilities expense

200

200

94,100

94,100

97,500

97,500

Required

1. Make the adjusting entries that account for the differences between the two trial balances.

2. Compute Peppertree’s total assets, total liabilities, total equity, and net income.

draw arrows linking the three financial statements 578591

(Learning Objective 4, 6: Preparing the financial statements and using the debt ratio) The adjusted trial balance of Snead Corporation, at December 31, 20X6, follows on the next page.

Required

1. Prepare Snead Corporation’s 20X6 income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet. List expenses (except for income tax) in decreasing order on the income statement and show total liabilities on the balance sheet. Draw arrows linking the three financial statements.

2. Snead’s lenders require that the company maintain a debt ratio no higher than 0.60. Compute Snead’s debt ratio at December 31, 20X6, to determine whether the company is in compliance with this debt restriction. If not, suggest a way that Snead could have avoided this difficult situation.

Snead Corporation Adjusted Trial Balance December 31, 20X6

Cash

$ 1,400

Accounts receivable

8,900

Supplies

2,300

Prepaid rent

1,600

Equipment

37,100

Accumulated depreciation

$ 4,300

Accounts payable

3,700

Interest payable

800

Unearned service revenue

600

Income tax payable

2,100

Note payable

18,600

Common stock

5,000

Retained earnings

1,000

Dividends

24,000

Service revenue

107,900

Depreciation expense

1,600

Salary expense

39,900

Rent expense

10,300

Interest expense

3,100

Insurance expense

3,800

Supplies expense

2,900

Income tax expense

7,100

Total

$144,000

$144,000

(Learning Objective 5: Closing the books and evaluating retained earnings) The accounts of Meadowbrook Services, Inc., at March 31, 20X3, are listed in alphabetical order.

Accounts payable

$14,700

Interest expense

$ 600

Accounts receivable

16,500

Note payable, long term

2,800

Accumulated depreciation equipment

7,100

Other assets

6,200

Advertising expense

10,900

Prepaid expenses

14,100

Cash

7,500

Retained earnings, March 1, 20X2

5,300

Common stock

9,100

Salary expense

20,200

Current portion of note payable

800

Salary payable

17,800

Equipment

1,900

Service revenue

2,400

Depreciation expense

31,200

Supplies

94,100

Dividends

43,200

Supplies expense

3,800

Unearned service revenue

4,600

Required

1. All adjustments have been journalized and posted, but the closing entries have not yet been made. Journalize Meadowbrook’s closing entries at March 31, 20X3.

2. Set up a T account for Retained Earnings and post to that account. Compute Meadowbrook’s net income for the year ended March 31, 20X3. What is the ending balance of Retained Earnings?

3. Did Retained Earnings increase or decrease during the year? What caused the increase or the decrease?

this problem demonstrates the effects of transactions on the current ratio and the d 578593

(Learning Objectives 6: Analyzing financial ratios) This problem demonstrates the effects of transactions on the current ratio and the debt ratio of Hialeah Company. Hialeah’s condensed and adapted balance sheet at December 31, 20X6, is:

(In millions)

Total current assets

$15.5

Properties, plant, equipment, and other assets

15.8

$31.3

Total current liabilities

$ 9.2

Total long term liabilities

5.3

Total stockholders’ equity

16.8

$31.3

Assume that during the first quarter of the following year, 20X7, Hialeah completed the following transactions:

a. Paid half the current liabilities.

b. Borrowed $3 million on long term debt.

c. Earned revenue, $2.5 million, on account.

d. Paid selling expense of $1 million.

e. Accrued general expense of $0.8 million. Credit General Expense Payable, a current liability.

f. Purchased equipment for $4.2 million, paying cash of $1.4 million and signing a longterm note payable for $2.8 million.

g. Recorded depreciation expense of $0.6 million.

Required

1. Compute Hialeah’s current ratio and debt ratio at December 31, 20X6. Round to 2 decimal places.

2. Consider each transaction separately. Compute Hialeah’s current ratio and debt ratio after each transaction during 20X7, that is, 7 times.

3. Based on your analysis, you should be able to readily identify the effects of certain transactions on the current ratio and the debt ratio. Test your understanding by completing these statements with either “increase” or “decrease”:

a. Revenues usually the current ratio.

b. Revenues usually the debt ratio.

c. Expenses usually the current ratio.

d. Expenses usually the debt ratio.

e. If a company’s current ratio is greater than 1.0, as it is for Hialeah, paying off a current liability will always the current ratio.

f. Borrowing money on long term debt will always the current ratio and the debt ratio.

identify the appropriate financial statement and show how schubert will report accou 578594

(Learning Objective 1: Linking accural accounting and cash flows) During 20X1, Schubert, Inc., earned revenues of $19 million from the sale of its products. Schubert ended the year with net income of $4 million. Schubert collected cash of $20 million from customers and paid cash for all 20X1 expenses plus an additional $3 million on account for amounts payable at the end of 20X0. Answer these questions about Schubert’s operating results, financial position, and cash flows during 20X1:

1. How much were Schubert’s total expenses? Show your work.

2. Identify all the items that Schubert will report on its income statement for 20X1. Show each amount.

3. Schubert began 20X1 with receivables of $6 million. All sales are on account. What was Schubert’s receivables balance at the end of 20X1? Identify the appropriate financial statement and show how Schubert will report its ending receivables balance in the company’s 20X1 annual report.

4. Schubert began 20X1 owing accounts payable of $9 million. Schubert incurs all expenses on account. During 20X1, Schubert paid $18 million on account. How much in accounts payable did Schubert owe at the end of 20X1? Identify the appropriate financial statement and show how Schubert will report accounts payable in its 20X1 annual report.

which method better measures income and assets use the last transaction to explain 578595

(Learning Objective 1: Cash basis versus accrual basis) Bombay Foods had the following selected transactions during November:

Nov. 1

Received $800 in advance for food to be delivered later.

5

Paid electricity expenses, $700.

9

Received cash for the day’s sales, $2,000.

14

Purchased two food warmers, $1,800.

23

Served a banquet, receiving a note receivable, $700.

30

Accrued salary expense, $900.

30

Prepaid building rent for December and January, $3,000.

Required

1. Show how each transaction would be handled using the cash basis and the accrual basis. Under each column, give the amount of revenue or expense for November. Journal entries are not required. Use the following format for your answer, and show your computations:

2. Compute income (loss) before tax for November under the two accounting methods.

3. Which method better measures income and assets? Use the last transaction to explain.

prepare the monthly income statement the statement of retained earnings and the clas 578598

(Learning Objective 3, 4, 6: Preparing an adjusted trial balance and the financial statements; using the current ratio to evaluate the business) Consider the unadjusted trial balance of Omega Advertising, Inc., at October 31, 20X2, and the related month end adjustment data.

Omega Advertising, Inc. Trial Balance October 31, 20X2

Cash

$16,300

Accounts receivable

7,000

Prepaid rent

4,000

Supplies

600

Furniture

36,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 3,000

Accounts payable

8,800

Salary payable

Common stock

15,000

Retained earnings (September 30, 20X2)

21,000

Dividends

4,600

Advertising revenue

25,400

Salary expense

4,400

Rent expense

Utilities expense

300

Depreciation expense

Supplies expense

Total

$73,200

$73,200

Adjustment data:

a. Accrued advertising revenue at October 31, $2,900.

b. Prepaid rent expired during the month. The unadjusted prepaid balance of $4,000 relates to the period October 20X2 through January 20X3.

c. Supplies used during October, $200.

d. Depreciation on furniture for the month. The furniture’s expected useful life is 5 years.

e. Accrued salary expense at October 31 for Monday through Thursday; the 5 day weekly payroll is $2,000.

Required

1. Using Exhibit 3 9, page 145, as an example, prepare the adjusted trial balance of Omega Advertising at October 31, 20X2. Key each adjusting entry by letter.

2. Prepare the monthly income statement, the statement of retained earnings, and the classified balance sheet. Draw arrows linking the three financial statements.

did retained earnings increase or decrease during the year what caused the increase 578599

(Learning Objective 5: Making closing entries and evaluating retained earnings) The accounts of Cookie Lapp eTravel, Inc., at December 31, 20X5, are listed in alphabetical order.

Accounts payable

$ 5,100

Note payable, long term

$10,600

Accounts receivable

800

Other assets

3,600

Accumulated depreciation furniture

6,600

Retained earnings, December 31, 20X4

7,700

Interest expense

11,600

Supplies

93,500

Advertising expense

2,200

Service revenue

5,300

Cash

7,300

Salary expense

24,600

Common stock

15,000

Salary payable

3,900

Depreciation expense

1,300

Supplies expense

5,700

Dividends

47,400

Unearned service revenue

3,600

Furniture

41,400

Required

1. All adjustments have been journalized and posted, but the closing entries have not yet been made. Journalize Lapp’s closing entries at December 31, 20X5.

2. Set up a T account for Retained Earnings and post to that account. Then compute Lapp’s net income for 20X5. What is the ending balance of Retained Earnings?

3. Did Retained Earnings increase or decrease during the year? What caused the increase or decrease?

v based on your analysis you should be able to readily identify the effects of certa 578601

(Learning Objective 6: Analyzing financial ratios) This problem demonstrates the effects of transactions on the current ratio and the debt ratio of Rockwell Company. Rockwell’s condensed balance sheet at March 31, 20X1, follows.

(In millions)

Total current assets

$3.0

Properties, net, and other assets

3.8

$6.8

Total current liabilities

$2.2

Total long term liabilities

2.4

Total stockholders’ equity

2.2

$6.8

transactions:

a. Paid half the current liabilities.

b. Borrowed $3 million on long term debt.

c. Earned revenue of $2.5 million on account.

d. Paid selling expense of $1 million.

e. Accrued salary expense of $0.8 million. Credit Salary Payable, a current liability.

f. Purchased equipment for $4.2 million, paying cash of $1.4 million and signing a longterm note payable for $2.8 million.

g. Recorded depreciation expense of $0.6 million.

Required

1. Compute Rockwell’s current ratio and debt ratio at March 31, 20X1. Round to 2 decimal places.)

2. Consider each transaction separately. Compute Rockwell’s current ratio and debt ratio after each transaction during 20X2, that is, 7 times. Round ratios to 2 decimal places.

3. Based on your analysis, you should be able to readily identify the effects of certain transactions on the current ratio and the debt ratio. Test your understanding by completing these statements with either “increase” or “decrease”:

a. Revenues usually the current ratio.

b. Revenues usually the debt ratio.

c. Expenses usually the current ratio. (Note: Depreciation is an exception to this rule.)

d. Expenses usually the debt ratio.

e. If a company’s current ratio is greater than 1.0, as for Rockwell, paying off a current liability will always the current ratio.

f. Borrowing money on long term debt will always the current ratio and the debt ratio.

prepare a corrected adjusted trial balance give land its correct balance 578602

(Learning Objectives 3, 6: Adjusting and correcting the accounts; computing and evaluating the current ratio) The unadjusted trial balance of Good Times, Inc., at January 31, 20X6, does not balance. In addition, the trial balance needs to be adjusted before the financial statements at January 31, 20X6 can be prepared. The manager of Good Times needs to know the business’s current ratio.

Cash

$ 6,000

Accounts receivable

2,200

Supplies

800

Prepaid rent

1,200

Land

41,000

Accounts payable

10,000

Salary payable

700

Unearned service revenue

25,400

Note payable, due in 3 years

5,000

Common stock

7,300

Retained earnings

9,100

Service revenue

3,400

Salary expense

900

Rent expense

0

Advertising expense

0

Supplies expense

0

Required

1. How much out of balance is the trial balance? The error is in the Land account. ?

a. Supplies of $600 were used during January.

b. The balance of Prepaid Rent was paid on January 1 and covers the whole year 20X6. No adjustment was made on January 31.

c. At January 31, Good Times owes employees $400.

d. Unearned service revenue of $200 was earned during January.

Prepare a corrected, adjusted trial balance. Give Land its correct balance.

3. After the error is corrected and after these adjustments are made, compute the current ratio of Good Times, Inc. If your business had this current ratio, could you sleep at night?

prepare corrected financial statements for eagle restaurant inc income statement sta 578603

(Learning Objectives 4: Preparing financial statements; continue or shut down the business?) On October 1, Tiger Woods opened Eagle Restaurant, Inc. Woods is now at a crossroads. The October financial statements paint a glowing picture of the business, and Woods has asked you whether he should expand the business. To expand the business, Woods wants to be earning net income of $10,000 per month and have total assets of $35,000. Woods believes he is meeting both goals. To start the business, Woods invested $20,000, not the $10,000 amount reported as “Common stock” on the balance sheet. The business issued $20,000 of common stock to Woods. The bookkeeper plugged the $10,000 “Common stock” amount into the balance sheet to make it balance. The bookkeeper made some other errors too. Woods shows you the following financial statements that the bookkeeper prepared.

Required

Prepare corrected financial statements for Eagle Restaurant, Inc.: Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheet. Then, based on Woods’ goals and your corrected statements, recommend to Woods whether he should expand the restaurant.

state whether it is ethical to record the revenue transaction in december identify t 578604

Cross Timbers Energy Co. is in its third year of operations, and the company has grown. To expand the business, Cross Timbers borrowed $1 million from Bank of Fort Worth. As a condition for making this loan, the bank required that Cross Timbers maintain a current ratio of at least 1.50 and a debt ratio of no more than 0.50. Business recently has been worse than expected. Expenses have brought the current ratio down to 1.47 and the debt ratio up to 0.51 at December 15. Lane Collins, the general manager, is considering the result of reporting this current ratio to the bank. Collins is considering recording this year some revenue on account that Cross Timbers will earn next year. The contract for this job has been signed, and Cross Timbers will deliver the natural gas during January of next year.

Required

1. Journalize the revenue transaction, and indicate how recording this revenue in December would affect the current ratio and the debt ratio.

2. State whether it is ethical to record the revenue transaction in December. Identify the accounting principle relevant to this situation.

3. Propose for Cross Timbers a course of action that is ethical.

compute the overall effect of these transactions on the company rsquo s reported inc 578605

The net income of Accent Photography Company decreased sharply during 2009. Lisa Brown, owner of the company, anticipates the need for a bank loan in 2010. Late in 2009, Brown instructed the accountant to record a $20,000 sale of portraits to the Brown family, even though the photos will not be shot until January 2010. Brown also told the accountant not to make the following December 31, 2009, adjusting entries:

Salaries owed to employees 5,000

Prepaid insurance that has expired 1,000

Required

1. Compute the overall effect of these transactions on the company’s reported income for 2009. Is reported net income overstated or understated?

2. Why did Brown take these actions? Are they ethical? Give your reason, identifying the parties helped and the parties harmed by Brown’s action. 3. As a personal friend, what advice would you give the accountant?

compute the current ratios and debt ratios for yum brands at december 31 2005 and at 578606

Brands, Inc.—like all other businesses—adjusts accounts prior to year end to get correct amounts for the financial statements. Examine YUM’s balance sheet in Appendix A, and pay particular attention to (a) Prepaid Expenses and Other Current Assets and (b) Income Taxes Payable.

Required

1. Why aren’t Prepaid Expenses “true” expenses? Why does a company have income taxes payable at year end?

2. Open T accounts for the two accounts listed above. Insert YUM’s balances (in millions) at December 31, 2005.

3. Journalize the following transactions for the year ended December 30, 2006. Key entries by letter, and show amounts in millions. Explanations are not required.

a. Recorded General Expense for expiration of the beginning balance of Prepaid Expenses.

b. Paid off the beginning balance of Income Taxes Payable.

c. Paid the ending balance of Prepaid Expenses.

d. Recorded Income Tax Expense of $284 million, paying $247 million in cash and accruing the remainder.

4. Post these entries to the 2 accounts and show that the ending balances of Prepaid Expenses and Other Current Assets and of Income Taxes Payable agree with the corresponding amounts reported in YUM’s December 30, 2006, balance sheet.

5. Compute the current ratios and debt ratios for YUM! Brands at December 31, 2005, and at December 30, 2006. Did the ratio values improve, deteriorate, or hold steady during 2006? Do YUM’s ratio values indicate financial strength or weakness?

examine pier 1 rsquo s income statement in appendix b at the end of this book for ea 578607

(Learning Objective 3: Explaining accruals and deferrals) During 2006, Pier I Imports had numerous accruals and deferrals. As a new member of Pier 1’s accounting staff, it is your job to explain the effects of accruals and deferrals on Pier 1’s net income for 2006. The accrual and deferral data follow, along with questions that Pier 1 stockholders have raised (all amounts in millions):

1. Beginning total receivables for 2006 were $47. Ending receivables for 2006 are $64. Which of these amounts did Pier 1 earn in 2005? Which amount did Pier 1 earn in 2006? Which amount is included in Pier 1’s net income for 2006?

2. Accumulated depreciation stood at $383 at the end of 2005 and at $370 at year end 2006. Depreciation expense for 2006 was $56. How can accumulated depreciation decrease during 2006 when the company is adding more depreciation each year? (Challenge)

3. Pier 1 reports an account titled Gift Cards and other Deferred (Unearned) Revenue. This account carried credit balances of $61 at the end of 2005 and $64 at the end of 2006. What type of account is Gift Cards and other Deferred (Unearned) Revenue? Make a single journal entry to show how this account could have increased its balance during 2006. Then explain the event in your own words.

4. Certain income statement accounts are directly linked to specific balance sheet accounts other than cash. Examine Pier 1’s income statement in Appendix B at the end of this book. For each “Operating cost and expense,” each “Non operating (income) and expense,” and Provision for income taxes, identify the related balance sheet account (other than cash). Use standard account titles, not necessarily the titles Pier 1 uses.

prepare the income statement of davis lawn service inc for the 4 months may through 578608

Matt Davis formed a lawn service company as a summer job. To start the business on May 1, he deposited $1,000 in a new bank account in the name of the corporation. The $1,000 consisted of an $800 loan from his father and $200 of his own money. The corporation issued 200 shares of common stock to Davis. Davis rented lawn equipment, purchased supplies, and hired high school students to mow and trim his customers’ lawns. At the end of each month, Davis mailed bills to his customers. On August 31, Davis was ready to dissolve the business and return to Duke University for the fall semester. Because he had been so busy, he had kept few records other than his checkbook and a list of amounts owed by customers. At August 31, Davis’s checkbook shows a balance of $1,390, and his customers still owe him $560. During the summer, he collected $5,150 from customers. His checkbook lists payments for supplies totaling $400, and he still has gasoline, weedeater cord, and other supplies that cost a total of $50. He paid his employees wages of $1,900, and he still owes them $200 for the final week of the summer. Davis rented some equipment from Ludwig Tool Company. On May 1, he signed a 6 month lease on mowers and paid $600 for the full lease period. Ludwig will refund the unused portion of the prepayment if the equipment is in good shape. To get the refund, Davis has kept the mowers in excellent condition. In fact, he had to pay $300 to repair a mower that ran over a hidden tree stump. To transport employees and equipment to jobs, Davis used a trailer that he bought for $300. He figures that the summer’s work used up one third of the trailer’s service potential. The business checkbook lists an expenditure of $460 for dividends paid to Davis during the summer. Also, Davis paid his father back during the summer.

Required

1. Prepare the income statement of Davis Lawn Service, Inc., for the 4 months May through August. The business is not subject to income tax.

2. Prepare the classified balance sheet of Davis Lawn Service, Inc., at August 31.

how much must pepsico borrow during 20×4 to keep its cash balance from falling below 578610

Assume the following situation for PepsiCo Inc.: PepsiCo ended 20X3 with cash of $200 million. At December 31, 20X3, Bob Detmer, the CFO of PepsiCo, is preparing the budget for 20X4. During 20X4, Detmer expects PepsiCo to collect $26,400 million from customers and $80 million from interest earned on investments. PepsiCo expects to pay $12,500 million for its inventories and $5,400 million for operating expenses. To remain competitive, PepsiCo plans to spend $2,200 million to upgrade production facilities and an additional $350 million to acquire other companies. PepsiCo also plans to sell older assets for approximately $300 million and to collect $220 million of this amount in cash. PepsiCo is budgeting dividend payments of $550 million during the year. Finally, the company is scheduled to pay off $1,200 million of long term debt plus the $6,600 million of current liabilities left over from 20X3. Because of the growth planned for 20X4, Detmer budgets the need for a minimum cash balance of $300 million.

Required

  1. How much must PepsiCo borrow during 20X4 to keep its cash balance from falling below $330 million? Prepare the 20X4 cash budget to answer this important question.

explain how each of these costs would be accounted for 578638

Henley Company purchased a delivery truck. The total cash payment was $27,900, including the following items.

Negotiated purchase price

$24,000

Installation of special shelving

1,100

Painting and lettering

900

Motor vehicle license

100

Annual insurance policy

500

Sales tax

1,300

Total paid

$27,900

Explain how each of these costs would be accounted for.

an adjusting entry that debits an expense and credits a liability is which type 578524

An adjusting entry that debits an expense and credits a liability is which type?

a. accrued expense c. prepaid expense

b. depreciation expense d. cash expense Use the following data for questions 11 and 12. Here are key figures from the balance sheet of Seville, Inc., at the end of 20X3 (amounts in thousands):

December 31, 20X3

Total assets (of which 40% are current)

$4,000

Current liabilities

800

Bonds payable (long term)

1,200

Common stock

1,500

Retained earnings

500

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

4,000

write a paragraph to explain why unearned revenues are liabilities instead of revenu 578540

(Learning Objective 3: Explaining unearned revenues) Write a paragraph to explain why unearned revenues are liabilities instead of revenues. In your explanation, use the following actual example: The Wall Street Journal collects cash from subscribers in advance and later delivers newspapers to subscribers over a 1 year period. Explain what happens to the unearned revenue over the course of a year as The Wall Street Journal delivers papers to subscribers. Into what account does the earned subscription revenue go as The Wall Street Journal delivers papers? Give the journal entries that The Wall Street Journal would make to (a) collect $40,000 of subscription revenue in advance and (b) record earning $40,000 of subscription revenue. Include an explanation for each entry, as illustrated in the.

receiving 7 000 in advance and then earning 6 000 as service revenue explanations ar 578542

(Learning Objective 3: Updating the accounts) Bentley, Inc., collects cash from customers two ways:

a. Accrued revenue. Some customers pay Bentley after Bentley has performed service for the customer. During 20X8, Bentley made sales of $50,000 on account and later received cash of $40,000 on account from these customers.

b. Unearned revenue. A few customers pay Bentley in advance, and Bentley later performs the service for the customer. During 20X8 Bentley collected $7,000 cash in advance and later earned $6,000 of this amount. Journalize for Bentley

a. Earning service revenue of $50,000 on account and then collecting $40,000 on account.

b. Receiving $7,000 in advance and then earning $6,000 as service revenue. Explanations are not required.

use these data to prepare falcon sporting goods company rsquo s income statement for 578543

(Learning Objective 4: Preparing the financial statements) Falcon Sporting Goods Company reported the following data at March 31, 20X4, with amounts in thousands:

Retained earnings,

Cost of goods sold

$126,000

March 31, 20X3

$ 1,300

Cash

900

Accounts receivable

27,700

Property and equipment, net

7,200

Net revenue

174,500

Common stock

26,000

Total current liabilities

53,600

Inventories

33,000

All other expenses

45,000

Long term liabilities

13,500

Other current assets

4,800

Dividends

0

Other assets

24,300

Use these data to prepare Falcon Sporting Goods Company’s income statement for the year ended March 31, 20X4; statement of retained earnings for the year ended March 31, 20X4; and classified balance sheet at March 31, 20X4. Use the report format for the balance sheet. Draw arrows linking the three statements.

which financial statement reports revenues and expenses which statement reports cash 578549

(Learning Objective 1, 2: Accrual basis of accounting, applying accounting principles) During 20X6, Dish Network, Inc., which designs network servers, earned revenues of $700 million. Expenses totaled $540 million. Dish collected all but $20 million of the revenues and paid $550 million on its expenses. Dish’s top managers are evaluating 20X6, and they ask you the following questions:

a. Under accrual accounting, what amount of revenue should Dish Network report for 20X6? Is the revenue the $700 million earned or is it the amount of cash actually collected? How does the revenue principle help to answer these questions?

b. Under accrual accounting, what amount of total expense should Dish Network report for 20X6—$540 million or $550 million? Which accounting principle helps to answer this question?

c. Which financial statement reports revenues and expenses? Which statement reports cash receipts and cash payments?

a utility bill is received on december 30 and will be paid next year when should the 578551

(Learning Objective 2: Applying accounting concepts and principles) Identify the accounting concept or principle that gives the most direction on how to account for each of the following situations:

a. Salary expense of $20,000 is accrued at the end of the period to measure income properly.

b. October has been a particularly slow month, and the business will have a net loss for the third quarter of the year. Management is considering not following its customary practice of reporting quarterly earnings to the public.

c. A physician performs a surgical operation and bills the patient’s insurance company. It may take 3 months to collect from the insurance company. Should the physician record revenue now or wait until cash is collected?

d. A construction company is building a highway system, and construction will take 3 years. When should the company record the revenue it earns?

e. A utility bill is received on December 30 and will be paid next year. When should the company record utility expense?

suppose the adjustments were not made compute the overall overstatement or understat 578552

(Learning Objective 1, 3: Journalizing adjusting entries and analyzing their effects on net income; accrual versus cash basis) An accountant made the following adjustments at December 31, the end of the accounting period:

a. Prepaid insurance, beginning, $700. Payments for insurance during the period, $2,100. Prepaid insurance, ending, $800.

b. Interest revenue accrued, $900.

c. Unearned service revenue, beginning, $800. Unearned service revenue, ending, $300.

d. Depreciation, $6,200.

e. Employees’ salaries owed for 3 days of a 5 day work week; weekly payroll, $9,000.

f. Income before income tax, $20,000. Income tax rate is 40%.

Required

1. Journalize the adjusting entries.

2. Suppose the adjustments were not made. Compute the overall overstatement or understatement of net income as a result of the omission of these adjustments.

consider each situation separately 578553

(Learning Objective 2, 3: Allocating supplies cost to the asset and the expense) Bird Kultgen, Inc., experienced four situations for its supplies. Compute the amounts indicated by question marks for each situation. For situations 1 and 2, journalize the needed transaction. Consider each situation separately.

Situation

1

2

3

4

Beginning supplies

$ 500

$1,000

$300

$ 900

Payments for supplies during the year

?

3,100

?

1,100

Total cost to account for

1,300

?

?

2,000

Ending supplies

400

500

700

?

Supplies expense

$ 900

$ ?

$700

$1,400

learning objective 3 journalizing adjusting entries clark motor company faced the f 578554

(Learning Objective 3: Journalizing adjusting entries) Clark Motor Company faced the following situations. Journalize the adjusting entry needed at December 31, 20X6, for each situation. Consider each fact separately.

a. The business has interest expense of $9,000 that it must pay early in January 20X7.

b. Interest revenue of $3,000 has been earned but not yet received.

c. On July 1, when we collected $3,000 rent in advance, we debited Cash and credited Unearned Rent Revenue. The tenant was paying us for 2 years’ rent.

d. Salary expense is $1,000 per day—Monday through Friday—and the business pays employees each Friday. This year, December 31 falls on a Tuesday.

e. The unadjusted balance of the Supplies account is $3,100. The total cost of supplies on hand is $800.

f. Equipment was purchased at the beginning of this year at a cost of $60,000. The equipment’s useful life is 5 years. Record depreciation for this year and then determine the equipment’s book value.

learning objective 3 making adjustments in t accounts the accounting records of bel 578555

(Learning Objective 3: Making adjustments in T accounts) The accounting records of Belmont Publishing Company include the following unadjusted balances at May 31: Accounts Receivable, $1,300; Supplies, $900; Salary Payable, $0; Unearned Service Revenue, $800; Service Revenue, $14,400; Salary Expense, $4,200; Supplies Expense, $0. Belmont’s accountant develops the following data for the May 31 adjusting entries:

a. Supplies on hand, $300.

b. Salary owed to employees, $2,000.

c. Service revenue accrued, $600.

d. Unearned service revenue that has been earned, $700. Open the foregoing T accounts with their beginning balances. Then record the adjustments directly in the accounts, keying each adjustment amount by letter. Show each account’s adjusted balance. Journal entries are not required.

prepare honeybee hams inc rsquo s income statement and statement of retained earning 578556

(Learning Objective 4: preparing the financial statements) The adjusted trial balance of Honeybee Hams, Inc., follows.

Honeybee Hams, Inc. Adjusted Trial Balance December 31, 20X6

Adjusted Trial Balance

(Thousands)

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 3,300

Accounts receivable

1,800

Inventories

1,100

Prepaid expenses

1,900

Property, plant, equipment

6,600

Accumulated depreciation

$ 2,400

Other assets

9,900

Accounts payable

7,700

Income tax payable

600

Other liabilities

2,200

Common stock

4,900

Retained earnings (beginning, December 31, 20X5)

4,500

Dividends

1,700

Sales revenue

41,000

Cost of goods sold

25,000

Selling, administrative, and general expense

10,000

Income tax expense

2,000

Total

$63,300

$63,300

Required

Prepare Honeybee Hams, Inc.’s, income statement and statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 20X6, and its balance sheet on that date. Draw the arrows linking the three statements.

compute the amount of sales revenue insurance expense and other operating expenses t 578557

(Learning Objective 3: Measuring financial statement amounts) The adjusted trial balances of Triumph Corporation at March 31, 2008, and March 31, 2007, include these amounts (in millions):

2008

2007

Receivables

$300

$200

Prepaid insurance

180

110

Accrued liabilities payable (for other operating expenses)

700

600

Triumph completed these transactions during the year ended March 31, 2008.

Collections from customers

$20,800

Payment of prepaid insurance

400

Cash payments for other operating expenses

4,100

Compute the amount of sales revenue, insurance expense, and other operating expenses to report on the income statement for the year ended March 31, 2008.

assume now that you are city of st paul st paul st paul rsquo s income statement for 578558

(Learning Objective 4: Reporting on the financial statements) This question deals with the items and the amounts that two entities, Mother Frances Hospital (Mother Frances) and City of St. Paul (St. Paul) should report in their financial statements. Fill in the blanks.

Required

1. On July 1, 20X5, Mother Frances collected $3,000 in advance from St. Paul, a client. Under the contract, Mother Frances is obligated to perform medical exams for City of St. Paul employees evenly during the 12 months ending June 30, 20X6. Assume you are Mother Frances.

Mother Frances’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X5, will report Mother Frances’s balance sheet at December 31, 20X5, will report.

2. Assume now that you are City of St. Paul (St. Paul). St. Paul’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X5, will report. St. Paul’s balance sheet at December 31, 20X5, will report.

use the same facts for vodafone as in item 1 further assume vodafone reported unearn 578559

(Learning Objective 1, 3: Linking deferrals and cash flows) This exercise builds from a simple situation to a slightly more complex situation. Vodafone, the British wireless phone service provider, collects cash in advance from customers. All amounts are in millions of pounds sterling, (£) the British monetary unit. Assume Vodafone collected £500 in advance during 2008 and at year end still owed customers phone service worth £100.

Required

1. Show what Vodafone will report for 2008 on its Income statement • Balance sheet

2. Use the same facts for Vodafone as in item 1. Further, assume Vodafone reported unearned service revenue of £70 back at the end of 2007. Show what Vodafone will report for 2008 on the same financial statements. Explain why your answer here differs from your answer to item 1.

how much net income did ulrich earn during 20×2 p 147 prepare a t account for retain 578560

(Learning Objective 5: Closing the accounts) Prepare the closing entries from the following selected accounts from the records of Ulrich Corporation at December 31, 20X2:

Cost of services sold

$11,600

Service revenue

$23,600

Accumulated depreciation

17,800

Depreciation expense

4,100

Selling, general, and administrative expense

6,900

Other revenue

600

Retained earnings, December 31, 20X1 1,900

1,900

Dividends

400

Income tax expense

400

Income tax payable

300

How much net income did Ulrich earn during 20X2? (p. 147) Prepare a T account for Retained Earnings to show the December 31, 20X2, balance of Retained Earnings.

the unadjusted trial balance and income statement amounts from the december 31 adjus 578561

(Learning Objective 3, 5: Identifying and recording adjusting and closing entries) The unadjusted trial balance and income statement amounts from the December 31 adjusted trial balance of Kopec Production Company follow.

Required

Journalize the adjusting and closing entries of Kopec Production Company at December 31. There was only one adjustment to Service Revenue.

Kopec Production Company

Account Title

Unadjusted Trial Balance

Form the Adjusted Trial Balance

Cash

10,200

Prepaid rent

1,100

Equipment

32,100

Accumulated depreciation

3,800

Accounts payable

4,600

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

8,400

Income tax payable

Note payable, long term

10,000

Common stock

8,700

Retained earnings

1,300

Dividends

1,000

Service revenue

12,800

19,500

Salary expense

4,000

4,900

Rent expense

1,200

1,400

Depreciation expense

300

Income tax expense

1,600

Net income

49,600

49,600

8,200

19,500

determine whether each transaction improved or hurt williams rsquo current ratio and 578563

(Learning Objective 6: Measuring the effects of transactions on the ratios) Ben Williams Company reported these ratios at December 31, 2008 (dollar amounts in millions):

Current ratio

=

$20/$10

=

2.00

Debt ratio

=

$20/$50

=

0.40

Ben Williams Company completed these transactions during 2009:

a. Purchased equipment on account, $4.

b. Paid long term debt, $5.

c. Collected cash from customers in advance, $2.

d. Accrued interest expense, $1.

e. Made cash sales, $6.

Determine whether each transaction improved or hurt Williams’ current ratio and debt ratio. Round all ratios to 2 decimal places.

compute the current ratio and the debt ratio of sedberry rsquo s accounting practice 578564

(Learning Objectives 3, 4, 5, 6: Adjusting the accounts, preparing the financial statements, closing the accounts, and evaluating the business). Start from the trial balance and the posted T accounts that Lance Sedberry, Certified Public Accountant, Professional Corporation (P.C.), prepared for his accounting practice at January 18. A professional corporation is not subject to income tax. Later in January, the business completed these transactions:

Jan. 21

Received $900 in advance for tax work to be performed over the next 30 days.

21

Hired a secretary to be paid on the 15th day of each month.

26

Paid $900 on account.

28

Collected $600 on account.

31

Declared and paid dividends of $1,000.

Required

1. Open these T accounts: Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation—Furniture, Salary Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Retained Earnings, Depreciation Expense—Equipment, Depreciation Expense—Furniture, and Supplies Expense. Also, use the T accounts that you opened

2. Journalize the transactions of January 21 through 31.

3. Post the January 21 to 31 transactions to the T accounts, keying all items by date.

4. Prepare a trial balance at January 31. Also set up columns for the adjustments and for the adjusted trial balance.

5. At January 31, Sedberry gathers the following information for the adjusting entries:

a. Accrued service revenue, $1,000.

b. Earned $300 of the service revenue collected in advance on January 21.

c. Supplies on hand, $300.

d. Depreciation expense—equipment, $100; furniture, $200.

e. Accrued expense for secretary’s salary, $700. Make these adjustments directly in the adjustments columns and complete the adjusted trial balance at January 31.

6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. and an account balance as Bal.

7. Prepare the income statement and statement of retained earnings of Lance Sedberry, Certified Public Accountant, P.C., for the month ended January 31 and the classified balance sheet at that date. Draw arrows to link the financial statements.

8. Journalize and post the closing entries at January 31. Denote each closing amount as Clo. and an account balance as Bal.

9. Compute the current ratio and the debt ratio of Sedberry’s accounting practice and evaluate these ratio values as indicative of a strong or weak financial position.

compute valley forge rsquo s current ratio at december 31 2008 and again at december 578565

(Learning Objective 6: Evaluating the current ratio) Valley Forge Corporation reported the following current accounts at December 31, 2008 (amounts in thousands):

Cash

$1,700

Receivables

5,600

Inventory

1,800

Prepaid expenses

800

Accounts payable

2,400

Unearned revenues

1,200

Accrued expenses payable

1,700

During 2009, Valley Forge completed these selected transactions:

• Sold services on account, $8,500.

• Depreciation expense, $400.

• Paid for expenses, $7,100.

• Collected from customers on account, $7,500.

• Accrued expenses, $300.

• Paid on account, $1,000.

• Used up prepaid expenses, $200.

Compute Valley Forge’s current ratio at December 31, 2008, and again at December 31, 2009. Did the current ratio improve or deteriorate during 2009? Comment on the level of the company’s current ratio.

metro collected the full 1 200 on april 1 20×1 metro made the following journal entr 578575

On April 1, 20X1, Metro Insurance Company sold a one year insurance policy covering the year ended April 1, 20X2. Metro collected the full $1,200 on April 1, 20X1. Metro made the following journal entry to record the receipt of cash in advance:

Cash

1,200

Unearned Revenue

1,200

Nine months have passed, and Metro has made no adjusting entries. Based on these facts, the adjusting entry needed by Metro at December 31, 20X1, is.

Unearned Revenue

300

Insurance Revenue

300

Insurance Revenue

300

Unearned Revenue

300

Unearned Revenue

900

Insurance Revenue

900

Insurance Revenue

900

Unearned Revenue

900

write a memo to answer your friend rsquo s questions state which accounts go on the 578492

P2 56B (Learning Objective 1: Analyzing a trial balance) Your best friend is considering making an investment in Photometric Tailoring Co. She seeks your advice in interpreting the company’s information. Specifically, she asks whether this trial balance provides the data to prepare a balance sheet and an income statement.

Photometric Tailoring Co. Trial Balance December 31, 20X9

Cash

$ 12,000

Accounts receivable

47,000

Prepaid expenses

4,000

Equipment

236,000

Accounts payable

$105,000

Note payable

92,000

Common stock

30,000

Retained earnings

32,000

Service revenue

139,000

Salary expense

63,000

Rent expense

26,000

Supplies expense

7,000

Advertising expense

3,000

Total

$398,000

$398,000

Required

Write a memo to answer your friend’s questions. State which accounts go on the balance sheet and which accounts go on the income statement. In your memo, state the amount of net income that Photometric Tailoring earned in 20X9, and explain your computation.

prepare the income statement of dh designers inc for the month ended may 31 20×1 lis 578493

(Learning Objective 1: Analyzing transactions with the accounting equation and preparing the financial statements) Donald Healey operates and is the major stockholder of an interior design studio called DH Designers, Inc. The following amounts summarize the business on April 30, 20X1:

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Supplies

+

Land

=

Accounts
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Retained
Earnings

1,700

2,200

24,100

5,400

10,000

12,600

a. Healey received $30,000 as a gift and deposited the cash in the business bank account. The business issued common stock to Healey.

b. Paid $1,400 on accounts payable.

c. Performed services for a client and received cash of $4,100.

d. Collected cash from a customer on account, $700.

e. Purchased supplies on account, $800.

f. Consulted on the interior design of a major office building and billed the client for services rendered, $5,000.

g. Received cash of $1,700 and issued common stock to a stockholder.

h. Recorded the following expenses for the month: (1) paid office rent—$1,200; (2) paid advertising—$600.

i. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $2,000.

Required

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding transactions on the accounting equation of DH Designers, Inc.

2. Prepare the income statement of DH Designers, Inc., for the month ended May 31, 20X1. List expenses in decreasing order by amount.

3. Prepare the statement of retained earnings of DH Designers, Inc., for the month ended May 31, 20X1.

4. Prepare the balance sheet of DH Designers, Inc., at May 31, 20X1. (pp. 63–64)

analyze the effects of the preceding events on the accounting equation of the busine 578495

(Learning Objective 1, 2: Analyzing transactions with the accounting equation) Lane Kohler opened a law office, which he operates as a professional corporation. The name of the new entity is Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, Professional Corporation (P.C.). Kohler experienced the following events during the organizing phase of his new business and its first month of operations. Some of the events were personal transactions of the stockholders and did not affect the law practice. Others were transactions that should be accounted for by the business.

March 1

Kohler sold 1,000 shares of YouTube stock and received $75,000 cash from his stockbroker.

2

Kohler deposited in his personal bank account the $75,000 cash from sale of the YouTube stock.

3

Kohler received $100,000 cash from his former partners in the law firm from which he resigned.

5

Kohler deposited $50,000 cash in a new business bank account titled Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, P.C. The business issued common stock to Kohler.

6

A representative of a large company telephoned Kohler and told him of the company’s intention to transfer $15,000 of legal business to Kohler.

7

The business paid $500 cash for letterhead stationery for the law office.

9

The business purchased office furniture. Kohler paid cash of $10,000 and agreed to pay the account payable for the remainder, $9,500, within 3 months.

23

Kohler finished court hearings on behalf of a client and submitted his bill for legal services, $3,000. He expected to collect from this client within 1 month.

29

The business paid $5,000 of its account payable on the furniture purchased on March 9.

30

The business paid office rent of $1,900.

31

The business declared and paid a cash dividend of $1,000.

1. Classify each of the preceding events as one of the following:

a. A personal transaction of a stockholder, not to be recorded by the business of Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, P.C.

b. A business transaction to be recorded by the business of Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, P.C.

c. A business related event but not a transaction to be recorded by the business of Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, P.C.

2. Analyze the effects of the preceding events on the accounting equation of the business of Lane Kohler, Attorney and Counselor, P.C.

3. Record the transactions of the business in its journal. Include an explanation for each entry.

after these transactions how much cash does the business have how much does it owe i 578496

(Learning Objective 2, 3: Analyzing and recording transactions) Blanton Glass Etching, Inc., owns shops in outlet malls. The business completed the following transactions during June:

June 1

Received cash of $25,000 and issued common stock to the stockholders.

2

Paid $10,000 cash and signed a $30,000 note payable to purchase land.

7

Received $15,000 cash from service revenue and deposited that amount in the bank.

10

Purchased supplies on account, $1,700.

15

Paid employees’ salaries, $2,800, and rent on a shop, $1,800.

15

Paid advertising expense, $1,200.

16

Paid $800 on account.

17

Declared and paid a cash dividend of $3,000.

Blanton uses the following accounts: Cash, Supplies, Land, Accounts Payable, Notes Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Rent Expense, and Advertising Expense.

Required

1. Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required.

2. Prepare T accounts for Cash, Accounts Payable, and Notes Payable. Post to these 3 accounts.

3. After these transactions, how much cash does the business have? How much does it owe in total liabilities?

prepare the trial balance of barron environmental services inc at september 30 of th 578497

(Learning Objective 2, 3, 4: Journalizing transactions, posting, and preparing and using a trial balance) During the first month of operations, Barron Environmental Services, Inc., completed the following transactions:

Sept. 3

Received $20,000 cash and issued common stock.

4

Purchased supplies, $800, and furniture, $1,800, on account.

6

Performed services for a client and received $5,000 cash.

7

Paid $15,000 cash to acquire land for an office site.

10

Worked for a client, billed the client, and received her promise to pay the $600 within 1 week.

14

Paid for the furniture purchased September 4 on account.

16

Paid the telephone bill, $200.

17

Received partial payment from client on account, $500.

24

Paid the water and electricity bills, $400.

28

Received $1,500 cash for helping a client meet environmental standards.

30

Paid secretary’s salary, $1,200.

30

Declared and paid dividends of $2,000.

Required

Set up the following T accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Furniture, Land, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, and Utilities Expense.

1. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

2. Post the transactions to the T accounts, using transaction dates as posting references. Label the ending balance of each account Bal., as shown in the chapter.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Barron Environmental Services, Inc., at September 30 of the current year.

4. Barron asks you how much in total resources the business has to work with, how much it owes, and whether September was profitable (and by how much).

prepare the trial balance of walker consulting company at june 30 20×3 578498

(Learning Objective 3, 4: Recording transactions directly in T accounts; preparing and using a trial balance) During the first month of operations (June 20X3), Walker Consulting Company completed the following selected transactions:

a. Began the business with an investment of $20,000 cash and a building valued at $60,000. The corporation issued common stock to the stockholders.

b. Borrowed $90,000 from the bank; signed a note payable.

c. Purchased supplies on account for $1,300.

d. Paid $35,000 for computer equipment.

e. Paid employees’ salaries totaling $2,200.

f. Performed consulting service on account for a client, $2,100.

g. Paid $800 of the account payable created in transaction c.

h. Received a $600 bill for advertising expense that will be paid in the near future.

i. Performed service for clients and received $1,100 in cash.

j. Received $1,200 cash on account.

k. Paid the following cash expenses: (1) rent, $700; (2) utilities, $400.

Required

1. Set up the following T accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Computer Equipment, Building, Accounts Payable, Note Payable, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, and Utilities Expense.

2. Record each transaction directly in the T accounts without using a journal. Use the letters to identify the transactions.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Walker Consulting Company, at June 30, 20X3.

compute the amount of net income or net loss for this first month of operations why 578499

(Learning Objective 4, 5: Recording transactions directly in T accounts, preparing a trial balance, and measuring net income or loss) A friend named Jay Barlow has asked what effect certain transactions will have on his company. Time is short, so you cannot apply the detailed procedures of journalizing and posting. Instead, you must analyze the transactions without the use of a journal. Barlow will continue the business only if he can expect to earn monthly net income of $10,000. The following transactions occurred this month:

a. Barlow deposited $10,000 cash in a business bank account, and the corporation issued common stock to him.

b. Borrowed $5,000 cash from the bank and signed a note payable due within 1 year. c. Paid $300 cash for supplies.

d. Purchased advertising in the local newspaper for cash, $800.

e. Purchased office furniture on account, $4,400.

f. Paid the following cash expenses for 1 month: employee salary, $1,700; office rent, $600.

g. Earned revenue on account, $7,000.

h. Earned revenue and received $2,500 cash.

i. Collected cash from customers on account, $1,200.

j. Paid on account, $1,000.

Required

1. Set up the following T accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Furniture, Accounts Payable, Notes Payable, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Advertising Expense, and Rent Expense.

2. Record the transactions directly in the accounts without using a journal. Key each transaction by letter.

3. Prepare a trial balance for Barlow Networks, Inc., at the current date. List expenses with the largest amount first, the next largest amount second, and so on.

4. Compute the amount of net income or net loss for this first month of operations. Why or why not would you recommend that Barlow continue in business?

prepare a corrected income statement and balance sheet remember that retained earnin 578500

(Learning Objective 2: Correcting financial statements; deciding whether toexpand a business) Sophia Loren opened an Italian restaurant. Business has been good, and Loren is considering expanding the restaurant. Loren, who knows little accounting, produced the following financial statements for Little Italy, Inc., at December 31, 20X1, end of the first month of operations:

Little Italy, Inc. Income Statement Month Ended December 31, 20X1

Sales revenue

$36,000

Common stock

10,000

Total revenue

46,000

Accounts payable

$ 8,000

Advertising expense

5,000

Rent expense

6,000

Total expenses

19,000

Net income

$27,000

Little Italy, Inc. Balance Sheet December 31, 20X1

Assets

Cash

$ 6,000

Cost of goods sold (expense)

22,000

Food inventory

5,000

Furniture

10,000

Total Assets

43,000

Liabilities

None

Owners’ Equity

$43,000

In these financial statements all amounts are correct, except for Owners’ Equity. Loren heard that total assets should equal total liabilities plus owners’ equity, so she plugged in the amount of owners’ equity at $43,000 to make the balance sheet come out even.

Required

Sophia Loren has asked whether she should expand the restaurant. Her banker says Loren may be wise to expand if (a) net income for the first month reached $5,000 and (b) total assets are at least $25,000. It appears that the business has reached these milestones, but Loren doubts whether her financial statements tell the true story. She needs your help in making this decision. Prepare a corrected income statement and balance sheet. (Remember that Retained Earnings, which was omitted from the balance sheet, should equal net income for the first month; there were no dividends.) After preparing the statements, give Sophia Loren your recommendation as to whether she should expand the restaurant.

food and paper expense5 use the relevant accounts from requirement 4 to prepare a su 578503

Learning Objective 3, 4: Recording transactions and computing net income) Refer to YUM! Brands’ financial statements in Appendix A at the end of the book. Assume that YUM completed the following selected transactions during 2006.

a. Made company sales (revenue) and collected cash of $8,365 million.

b. Earned franchise and license fee revenue on account, $1,196 million.

c. Purchased inventories, paying cash of $2,557 million.

d. Incurred food and paper expense of $2,549 million. Credit the Inventories account.

e. Paid operating and other expenses of $6,188 million.

f. Collected cash on accounts and notes receivable, $1,212 million.

g. Paid cash for other assets, $671 million.

Required

1. Set up T accounts for: Cash (debit balance of $158 million); Accounts and Notes Receivable (debit balance of $236 million); Inventories (debit balance of $85 million); Other Assets ($0 balance); Company Sales (Revenue: $0 balance); Franchise and License Fee Revenue ($0 balance); Food and Paper Expense ($0 balance); Operating and Other Expenses ($0 balance).

2. Journalize YUM’s transactions a–g. Explanations are not required.

3. Post to the T accounts, and compute the balance for each account. Key postings by transaction letters a–g.

4. For each of the following accounts, compare your computed balance to YUM’s actual balance as shown on YUM’s 2006 income statement or balance sheet in Appendix A. Your amounts should agree to the actual figures.

a. Cash

b. Accounts and Notes Receivable

c. Inventories

d. Company Sales (Revenue)

e. Franchise and License Fee Revenue

f. Food and Paper Expense5. Use the relevant accounts from requirement 4 to prepare a summary income statement for YUM! Brands, Inc.,for 2006. Compare the net income you computed to YUM’s actual net income. The 2 amounts should be equal.

how much long term debt does pier 1 owe at the end of 2006 at the end of 2005 what m 578504

(Learning Objective 1, 2: Analyzing a leading company’s financial statements) Refer to the Pier 1 Imports financial statements in Appendix B at the end of the book. Suppose you are an investor considering buying Pier 1 stock. The following questions are important: Show amounts in millions and round to the nearest $1 million.

1. Explain whether Pier 1 had more sales revenue, or collected more cash from customers, during 2006. Combine Pier 1’s 2 receivable accounts, and then analyze total receivables to answer this question.

2. A major concern of lenders, such as banks, is the amount of “long term debt” a company owes. How much long term debt does Pier 1 owe at the end of 2006? at the end of 2005? What must have happened to Pier 1’s long term debt during 2006? (Challenge)

3. Investors are vitally interested in a company’s sales and profits, and its trends of sales and profits over time. Consider Pier 1’s net sales and net income (net loss) during the period from 2004 through 2006. Compute the percentage increase or decrease in net sales and also in net income (net loss) from 2004 to 2006. Which item grew faster during this 2 year period, net sales or net income (net loss)? (Challenge)

discuss how to evaluate the success of your venture and how to decide whether to con 578505

You are promoting a rock concert in your area. Your purpose is to earn a profit, so you need to establish the formal structure of a business entity. Assume you organize as a corporation.

Required

1. Make a detailed list of 10 factors you must consider as you establish the business.

2. Describe 10 of the items your business must arrange to promote and stage the rock concert.

3. Identify the transactions that your business can undertake to organize, promote, and stage the concert. Journalize the transactions, and post to the relevant T accounts. Set up the accounts you need for your business ledger. Refer to the appendix at the end of book if needed.

4. Prepare the income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet immediately after the rock concert, that is, before you have had time to pay all the business bills and to collect all receivables.

5. Assume that you will continue to promote rock concerts if the venture is successful. If it is unsuccessful, you will terminate the business within 3 months after the concert. Discuss how to evaluate the success of your venture and how to decide whether to continue in business.

you will probably encounter numerous accounts that you have not yet learned deal wit 578506

Contact a local business and arrange with the owner to learn what accounts the business uses.

Required

1. Obtain a copy of the business’s chart of accounts.

2. Prepare the company’s financial statements for the most recent month, quarter, or year. You may use either made up account balances or balances supplied by the owner. If the business has a large number of accounts within a category, combine related accounts and report a single amount on the financial statements. For example, the company may have several cash accounts. Combine all cash amounts and report a single Cash amount on the balance sheet. You will probably encounter numerous accounts that you have not yet learned. Deal with these as best you can. The charts of accounts given in the appendix at the end of the book can be helpful.

on september 1 2008 michael moe incorporated moe rsquo s mowing inc a company that p 578507

On September 1, 2008, Michael Moe incorporated Moe’s Mowing, Inc., a company that provides mowing and landscaping services. During the month of September, the business incurred the following transactions:

a. To begin operations, Michael deposited $10,000 cash in the business’s bank account. The business received the cash and issued common stock to Michael.

b. The business purchased equipment for $3,500 on account.

c. The business purchased office supplies for $800 cash.

d. The business provided $2,600 of services to a customer on account.

e. The business paid $500 cash toward the equipment previously purchased on account in transaction b.

f. The business received $2,000 in cash for services provided to a new customer.

g. The business paid $200 cash to repair equipment.

h. The business paid $900 cash in salary expense.

i. The business received $2,100 cash from a customer on account.

j. The business paid cash dividends of $1,500.

prepare the trial balance of moe rsquo s mowing inc at september 30 2008 578508

Requirements

1. Create blank T accounts for the following accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Repair Expense.

2. Journalize the transactions and then post to the T accounts. Use the table in table to help with the journal entries.

Increase

Decrease

Assets

debit

credit

Liabilities

credit

debit

Stockholders’ Equity

credit

debit

Revenues

credit

debit

Expenses

debit

credit

Dividends

debit

credit

3. Total each T account to determine its balance at the end of the month.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Moe’s Mowing, Inc., at September 30, 2008.

the net amount of a plant asset cost minus accumulated depreciation is called that a 578511

The net amount of a plant asset (cost minus accumulated depreciation) is called that asset’s book value, or carrying amount. Below shows how Genie would report the book value of its equipment and building at June 30 (the building data are assumed for this illustration).

Genie Car Wash Plant Assets at June 30

Equipment

$24,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(400)

$23,600

Building

$50,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(200)

49,800

Book value of plant assets

$73,400

At June 30, the book value of equipment is $23,600; the book value of the building is $49,800.

shows how starbucks corporation reports property plant and equipment in its annual r 578512

Shows how Starbucks Corporation reports property, plant, and equipment in its annual report. Lines 1 to 6 list specific assets and their cost. Line 7 shows the cost of all Starbucks plant assets. Line 8 gives the amount of accumulated depreciation, and line 9 shows the assets’ book value of $2,288 million.

1 Land

$ 32

2 Buildings

109

3 Leasehold improvements

2,437

4 Store equipment

785

5 Roasting equipment

197

6 Furniture, fixtures, and other

4,258

7 Property, plant, and equipment, at cost

(1,970)

8 Less: Accumulated depreciation

$2,288

9 Property, plant, and equipment, net

698

journalize the goldsmith company adjusting entries at december 31 20×5 key entries b 578514

The trial balance of Goldsmith Company shown below pertains to December 31, 20X5, which is the end of its year long accounting period. Data needed for the adjusting entries include the following:

a. Supplies on hand at year end, $2,000.

b. Depreciation on furniture and fixtures, $20,000.

c. Depreciation on building, $10,000.

d. Salaries owed but not yet paid, $5,000.

e. Accrued service revenue, $12,000.

f. Of the $45,000 balance of unearned service revenue, $32,000 was earned during the year.

g. Accrued income tax expense, $35,000.

Required

  1. Open the ledger accounts with their unadjusted balances. Show dollar amounts in thousands, as shown for Accounts Receivable:

Accounts Receivable

370

2. Journalize the Goldsmith Company adjusting entries at December 31, 20X5. Key entries by letter, as .

3. Post the adjusting entries.

4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance, .

5. Prepare the income statement, the statement of retained earnings, and the balance sheet. (At this stage, it is not necessary to classify assets or liabilities as current or long term.) Draw arrows linking these three financial statements.

Goldsmith Company Trial Balance December 31, 20X5

Cash

$ 198,000

Accounts receivable

370,000

Supplies

6,000

Furniture and fixtures

100,000

Accumulated depreciation furniture and fixtures

$ 40,000

Building

250,000

Accumulated depreciation building

130,000

Accounts payable

380,000

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

45,000

Income tax payable

Common stock

100,000

Retained earnings

193,000

Dividends

65,000

Service revenue

286,000

Salary expense

172,000

Supplies expense

Depreciation expense furniture and fixtures

Depreciation expense building

Income tax expense

Miscellaneous expense

13,000

Total

$1,174,000

$1,174,000

prepare goldsmith company rsquo s classified balance sheet to identify the company r 578515

The trial balance of Goldsmith Company shown below pertains to December 31, 20X5, which is the end of its year long accounting period. Data needed for the adjusting entries include the following:

a. Supplies on hand at year end, $2,000.

b. Depreciation on furniture and fixtures, $20,000.

c. Depreciation on building, $10,000.

d. Salaries owed but not yet paid, $5,000.

e. Accrued service revenue, $12,000.

f. Of the $45,000 balance of unearned service revenue, $32,000 was earned during the year.

g. Accrued income tax expense, $35,000.

Required

1. Make Goldsmith Company’s closing entries at December 31, 20X5. Explain what the closing entries accomplish and why they are necessary. Show amounts in thousands.

2. Post the closing entries to Retained Earnings and compare Retained Earnings’ ending balance with the amount reported on the balance sheet on page 151. The two amounts should be the same.

3. Prepare Goldsmith Company’s classified balance sheet to identify the company’s current assets and current liabilities. (Goldsmith has no long term liabilities.) Then compute the company’s current ratio and debt ratio at December 31, 20X5.

4. The top management of Goldsmith Company has asked you for a $500,000 loan to expand the business. Goldsmith proposes to pay off the loan over a 10 year period. Re compute Goldsmith’s debt ratio assuming you make the loan. Use the company financial statements plus the ratio values to decide whether to grant the loan at an interest rate of 8%, 10%, or 12%. Goldsmith’s cash flow is strong. Give the reasoning underlying your decision.

on november 1 rosewood apartments received 4 800 from a tenant for three months rsqu 578516

On November 1, Rosewood Apartments received $4,800 from a tenant for three months’ rent. The receipt was credited to Unearned Rent Revenue. What adjusting entry is needed on December 31?

Unearned Rent Revenue

3,200

Rent Revenue

3,200

Rent Revenue

1,600

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,600

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,600

Rent Revenue

1,600

Cash

1,600

Rent Revenue

1,600

The following normal balances appear on the adjusted trial balance of Augusta National Company:

Equipment

$90,000

Accumulated depreciation, equipment

15,000

Depreciation expense, equipment

5,000

The book value of the equipment is

a. $85,000.

b. $70,000.

c. $75,000.

d. $60,000.

prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with 578271

On September 1 the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger of Seaver Company was $10,960.The customers’ subsidiary ledger contained account balances as follows: Ruiz $1,440, Kingston $2,640, Bannister $2,060, Crampton $4,820. At the end of September the various journals contained the following information. Sales journal: Sales to Crampton $800; to Ruiz $1,260; to Iman $1,330; to Bannister $1,100. Cash receipts journal: Cash received from Bannister $1,310; from Crampton $2,300; from Iman $380; from Kingston $1,800; from Ruiz $1,240.

General journal: An allowance is granted to Crampton $220.

Instructions

(a) Set up control and subsidiary accounts and enter the beginning balances. Do not construct the journals.

(b) Post the various journals. Post the items as individual items or as totals, whichever would be the appropriate procedure. (No sales discounts given.)

(c) Prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with the subsidiary ledger at September 30, 2010.

what is the january 1 balance in the koyan company subsidiary account 578272

Yu Suzuki Company has a balance in its Accounts Receivable control account of $11,000 on January 1, 2010. The subsidiary ledger contains three accounts: Smith Company, balance $4,000; Green Company, balance $2,500; and Koyan Company. During January, the following receivable related transactions occurred.

Credit Sales

Collections

Returns

Smith Company

$9,000

$8,000

$ 0

Green Company

7,000

2,500

3,000

Koyan Company

8,500

9,000

0

Instructions

(a) What is the January 1 balance in the Koyan Company subsidiary account?

(b) What is the January 31 balance in the control account?

(c) Compute the balances in the subsidiary accounts at the end of the month.

(d) Which January transaction would not be recorded in a special journal?

what is the january 1 balance in the aatski company subsidiary account 578273

Nobo Uematsu Company has a balance in its Accounts Payable control account of $8,250 on January 1, 2010. The subsidiary ledger contains three accounts: Jones Company, balance $3,000; Brown Company, balance $1,875; and Aatski Company. During January, the following payable related transactions occurred.

Purchases

Payments

Returns

Jones Company

$6,750

$6,000

$ 0

Brown Company

5,250

1,875

2,250

Aatski Company

6,375

6,750

0

Instructions

(a) What is the January 1 balance in the Aatski Company subsidiary account?

(b) What is the January 31 balance in the control account?

(c) Compute the balances in the subsidiary accounts at the end of the month.

(d) Which January transaction would not be recorded in a special journal?

prepare a sales journal and a single column purchase journal 578274

Montalvo Company uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during September 2010.

Sept. 2

Sold merchandise on account to T. Hossfeld, invoice no. 101, $720, terms n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $420.

10

Purchased merchandise on account from L. Rincon $600, terms 2/10, n/30.

12

Purchased office equipment on account from R. Press $6,500.

21

Sold merchandise on account to P. Lowther, invoice no. 102 for $800, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $480.

25

Purchased merchandise on account from W. Barone $860, terms n/30.

27

Sold merchandise to S. Miller for $700 cash.The cost of the merchandise sold was $400.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a sales journal and a single column purchase journal.

(b) Record the transaction(s) for September that should be journalized in the sales journal and the purchases journal.

prepare a multiple column cash receipts journal and a multiple column cash payments 578275

Pherigo Co. uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during May 2010.

May 1

I. Pherigo invested $50,000 cash in the business.

2

Sold merchandise to B. Sherrick for $6,300 cash.The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,200.

3

Purchased merchandise for $7,200 from J. DeLeon using check no. 101.

14

Paid salary to H. Potter $700 by issuing check no. 102.

16

Sold merchandise on account to K. Kimbell for $900, terms n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $630.

22

A check of $9,000 is received from M. Moody in full for invoice 101; no discount given.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple column cash receipts journal and a multiple column cash payments journal.

(b) Record the transaction(s) for May that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal and cash payments journal.

indicate a the journal and b the columns in the journal that should be used in recor 578276

Wick Company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook. In April, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

1. Made a refund to a customer as an allowance for damaged goods.

2. Received collection from customer within the 3% discount period.

3. Purchased merchandise for cash.

4. Paid a creditor within the 3% discount period.

5. Received collection from customer after the 3% discount period had expired.

6. Paid freight on merchandise purchased.

7. Paid cash for office equipment.

8. Received cash refund from supplier for merchandise returned.

9. Withdrew cash for personal use of owner.

10. Made cash sales.

Instructions

Indicate (a) the journal, and (b) the columns in the journal that should be used in recording each transaction.

in a brief memo to the president of velasquez company explain the postings to the co 578277

Velasquez Company has the following selected transactions during March.

Mar. 2

Purchased equipment costing $9,400 from Chang Company on account.

5

Received credit of $410 from Lyden Company for merchandise damaged in shipment to Velasquez.

7

Issued credit of $400 to Higley Company for merchandise the customer returned.

The returned merchandise had a cost of $260.

Velasquez Company uses a one column purchases journal, a sales journal, the columnar cash journals used in the text, and a general journal.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions in the general journal.

(b) In a brief memo to the president of Velasquez Company, explain the postings to the control and subsidiary accounts from each type of journal.

for each transaction indicate whether it would normally be recorded in a cash receip 578278

Below are some typical transactions incurred by Kwun Company.

1. Payment of creditors on account.

2. Return of merchandise sold for credit.

3. Collection on account from customers.

4. Sale of land for cash.

5. Sale of merchandise on account.

6. Sale of merchandise for cash.

7. Received credit for merchandise purchased on credit.

8. Sales discount taken on goods sold.

9. Payment of employee wages.

10. Income summary closed to owner’s capital.

11. Depreciation on building.

12. Purchase of office supplies for cash.

13. Purchase of merchandise on account.

Instructions

For each transaction, indicate whether it would normally be recorded in a cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, sales journal, single column purchases journal, or general journal.

compute the january 31 balance for matisyahu in the following accounts 578279

Selected account balances for Matisyahu Company at January 1, 2010, are presented below.

Accounts Payable

$14,000

Accounts Receivable

22,000

Cash

17,000

Inventory

13,500

Matisyahu’s sales journal for January shows a total of $100,000 in the selling price column, and its one column purchases journal for January shows a total of $72,000.

The column totals in Matisyahu’s cash receipts journal are: Cash Dr. $61,000; Sales Discounts Dr. $1,100; Accounts Receivable Cr. $45,000; Sales Cr. $6,000; and Other Accounts Cr. $11,100.

The column totals in Matisyahu’s cash payments journal for January are: Cash Cr. $55,000; Inventory Cr. $1,000; Accounts Payable Dr. $46,000; and Other Accounts Dr. $10,000.

Matisyahu’s total cost of goods sold for January is $63,600.

Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Cash, Inventory, and Sales are not involved in the “Other Accounts” column in either the cash receipts or cash payments journal, and are not involved in any general journal entries.

Instructions

Compute the January 31 balance for Matisyahu in the following accounts.

(a) Accounts Payable.

(b) Accounts Receivable.

(c) Cash.

(d) Inventory.

(e) Sales.

please complete the attached assignment 578340

Need Accounting assignment completed please see attached

Document Preview:

Assignment 1: Excel Project This assignment is based on O’Leary Lab 4: Stock Portfolio analysis and consist of two (2) parts – an Excel based assignment and a paper. You have been assigned to evaluate the stock market performance of firms who manufacture accounting software products. Your evaluation will be based on large and medium market firms. The firms are as follows: Large Market Stocks Oracle Software (Oracle Corp: NASDAQ) SAP (SAP AG: NYSE) Medium Market Stocks Microsoft Great Plains (Microsoft: NASDAQ) Small Market Stocks QuickBooks (Intuit: NASDAQ) Peachtree (Sage Grp: LSE) Part I: Excel Spreadsheet Assignment 1. Create one (1) Excel workbook that contains each of the four (4) scenarios (detailed below). Use the appropriate Excel formulas and functions to justify your derived results. Note: Follow the completion and submission instructions provided in the table below. Scenario 1 You have been given $5,000,000 to invest the five (5) stocks. You must invest the $5,000,000 accordingly: No more than 35% of your investment will be in the Large Market Stocks, with a minimum of 15% investment in any given stock No more than 30% of your investments will be in the Medium Market Stock, with a minimum of 15% investment in the stock No more than 35% of your investment will be in the Small Market Stocks, with a minimum of 15% investment in any given stock The purchase date of the stock will be six (6) month ago. Track your stock’s daily performance for the 120 trading days following the purchase date. During this time, you will note the gains and losses each day. At the end of the 120 days’ tracking period, calculate your net gain (or loss) for each stock and your total investment at the end of the 120 days. Develop the appropriate charts that highlight your performance. You will create a minimum of two (2) charts. Note: Your purchase must be in whole shares. For example, you cannot purchase 100.5 shares. You must purchase either 100 or 101…

Attachments:

foundations of accounting 578346

Total: 100 Points Possible Number of Points: Total Scored: Part I: True /False (15 Points) 1. An extraordinary item appears on the income statement before the section on discontinued operations. True False 2. Earnings per share is equal to net income applicable to common stock, divided by the weighted number of common shares outstanding. True False 3. The price earnings ratio is based on expected future earnings, while the earnings per share ratio is based on historical earnings. True False 4. In order to receive a dividend, a stockholder must have owned the stock as of the declaration date.

Document Preview:

Possible Number of Points: Total: 100 Points Total Scored: Part I: True /False (15 Points) on the income statement before the section on 1. An extraordinary item appears operations. discontinued True False income applicable to common stock, divided by 2. Earnings per share is equal to net number of common shares outstanding. the weighted True False on expected future earnings, while the earnings 3. The price earnings ratio is based on historical earnings. per share ratio is based True False stockholder must have owned the stock as of the 4. In order to receive a dividend, a declaration date. True False of stock, but his or her provides a stockholder with more shares 5. A stock dividend company is no larger than before. percentage of ownership in the True False of cash flows is to measure the profitability principal purpose of a statement 6. The accounting records on the cash basis. business that maintains its of a True False7. In a statement of cash flows, the term cash includes both cash and cash equivalents. True False 8. Companies that show profits on the income statement will always show positive cash flows from operating activities. True False 9. The purchase of equipment for the manufacturing of inventory in belongs the operations section of the statement of cash flows. True False 10. In the long run, it is more important for a business to generate positive cash flows from investing than from operating activities. activities True False 11. The quick ratio is especially useful in evaluating the liquidity of a company with fast moving inventories. True False 12. The gross profit rate usually is lowest on fast moving merchandise and highest on specialty and novelty products. True False 13. The trend in ratios is usually more useful than looking at a single year’s ratio. True False 14. A liquidity refers to its ability to remain company’s profitable. True False 15. The lower the current ratio, the more liquid the company appears. True…

Attachments:

co 401 k analysis the company you work for will contribute 12 percent of your gross 578347

Co

401 (K) Analysis

The company you work for will contribute 12 percent of your gross pay to a 401(K) plan in your name. You can add up to another 10 percent of your gross pay to the same account, but the total contribution (the company’s plus yours) cannot exceed $10,000. Create a worksheet with the following columns:Gross pay, Employer Contribution, My Contribution, and Total Contribution. Enter a value for your gross pay and create a formula to calculate the company contribution.In a column to the right, enter the numbers 0 to 10.Format them as percentages.Create a list box that uses the percentages and calculates your contribution for the My Contribution column.Total the contributions.Use the combo box to see how much of your gross pay you can contribute to the IRA without exceeding the $10,000 limit.Select the value you think is most appropriate for you.Enter your name and the current date in the worksheet.Save the workbook as MY 401K.

py and paste your question here…

scenario 1 energy inc energy which operates in the oil industry is a u s subsidiary 578441

Scenario 1Energy Inc. (Energy), which operates in the oil industry, is a U.S. subsidiary of a U.K.entity that prepares its financial statements in accordance with (1) IFRSs in reporting toits parent and (2) U.S. GAAP for reporting to its U.S. based lender. Energy’s operationssometimes result in soil contamination. Energy cleans up this contamination whenrequired to do so under the laws of the particular country in which it operates. Onecountry in which Energy operates has no legislation requiring cleanup, and Energy hasinadvertently contaminated land in that country in prior years. As of December 31, 20X1,it is virtually certain that a draft law requiring a cleanup of land already contaminatedwill be enacted, but not until shortly after the year end.

Required:Should Energy recognize a provision as of December 31, 20X1, (1) in reporting to itsU.K. parent under IFRSs and (2) in reporting to its U.S. based lender in accordance withU.S. GAAP?

for each of the following cases indicate a to what interest rate columns and b to wh 578459

For each of the following cases, indicate (a) to what interest rate columns and (b) to what number of periods you would refer in looking up the future value factor. (1) In Table 1 (future value of 1):

Annual
Rate

Number of
Years Invested

Compounded

Case A

6%

3

Annually

Case B

8%

4

Semiannually

(2) In Table 2 (future value of an annuity of 1):

Annual
Rate

Number of
Years Invested

Compounded

Case A

5%

8

Annually

Case B

65

6

Semiannually

for each of the following cases indicate a to what interest rate columns and b to wh 578464

For each of the following cases, indicate (a) to what interest rate columns and (b) to what number of periods you would refer in looking up the discount rate. (1) In Table 3 (present value of 1):

Annual
Rate

Number of
Years Involved

Discounts
per Year

Case A

12%

6

Annually

Case B

10%

11

Annually

Case C

6%

9

Semiannually

Annual
Rate

Number of
Years Involved

Number of
Payments Involved

Frequency of
Payments

Case A

12%

20

20

Annually

Case B

10%

5

5

Annually

Case C

8%

4

8

Semiannually

prepare the balance sheet of ready resources inc at june 30 20×8 578486

(Learning Objective 1: Analyzing transactions with the accounting equation and preparing the financial statements) The following amounts summarize the financial position of Ready Resources, Inc., on May 31, 20X8:

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Supplies

+

Land

=

Accounts
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Retained
Earnings

1,200

1,500

12,000

8,000

4,000

2,700

During June 20X8, Ready Resources completed these transactions:

a. The business received cash of $5,000 and issued common stock.

b. Performed services for a customer and received cash of $6,700.

c. Paid $5,000 on accounts payable.

d. Purchased supplies on account, $1,000.

e. Collected cash from a customer on account, $500.

f. Consulted on the design of a computer system and billed the customer for services rendered, $2,400.

g. Recorded the following business expenses for the month: (1) paid office rent $900; (2) paid advertising $300.

h. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $1,800.

Required

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding transactions on the accounting equation of Ready Resources, Inc.

2. Prepare the income statement of Ready Resources, Inc., for the month ended June 30, 20X8. List expenses in decreasing order by amount.

3. Prepare the entity’s statement of retained earnings for the month ended June 30, 20X8.

4. Prepare the balance sheet of Ready Resources, Inc., at June 30, 20X8.

analyze the effects of the preceding events on the accounting equation of perry real 578488

(Learning Objective 1, 2: Analyzing transactions with the accounting equation) Perry Real Estate Co. experienced the following events during the organizing phase and its first month of operations. Some of the events were personal for the stockholders and did not affect the business. Others were transactions of the business.

Nov. 4

Gaylord Perry, the major stockholder of real estate company, received $50,000 cash from an inheritance.

5

Perry deposited $50,000 cash in a new business bank account titled Perry Real Estate Co. The business issued common stock to Perry.

6

The business paid $300 cash for letterhead stationery for the new office.

7

The business purchased office equipment. The company paid cash of $30,000 and agreed to pay the account payable for the remainder, $7,000, within 3 months.

10

Perry sold Dell stock, which he had owned for several years, receiving $75,000 cash from his personal stockbroker.

11

Perry deposited the $75,000 cash from sale of the Dell stock in his personal bank account.

12

A representative of a large company telephoned Perry and told him of the company’s intention to transfer $10,000 of business to Perry.

18

Perry finished a real estate deal for a client and submitted his bill for services, $10,000. Perry expects to collect from this client within 2 weeks.

21

The business paid half its account payable for the equipment purchased on November 7.

25

The business paid office rent of $4,000.

30

The business declared and paid a cash dividend of $2,000.

Required

1. Classify each of the preceding events as one of the following:

a. A business related event but not a transaction to be recorded by Perry Real Estate Co.

b. A personal transaction for a stockholder, not to be recorded by Perry Real Estate Co.

c. A business transaction to be recorded by Perry Real Estate Co.

2. Analyze the effects of the preceding events on the accounting equation of Perry Real Estate Co. Use a format similar to that in Exhibit 2 1, Panel B.

3. Record the transactions of the business in its journal. Include an explanation for each entry.

prepare t accounts for cash accounts payable and notes payable post to these three a 578489

(Learning Objective 2, 3: Analyzing and recording transactions) During December, Barnett Auction Co. completed the following transactions:

Dec. 1

Barnett received $10,000 cash and issued common stock to the stockholders.

5

Paid monthly rent, $1,000.

9

Paid $5,000 cash and signed a $25,000 note payable to purchase land for an office site.

10

Purchased supplies on account, $1,200.

19

Paid $600 on account.

22

Borrowed $15,000 from the bank for business use. Barnett signed a note payable to the bank in the name of the business.

31

Service revenues earned during the month included $6,000 cash and $5,000 on account.

31

Paid employees’ salaries ($2,000), advertising expense ($1,500), and utilities expense ($1,100).

31

Declared and paid a cash dividend of $4,000.

Barnett’s business uses the following accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Land, Accounts Payable, Notes Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Advertising Expense, and Utilities Expense.

Required

1. Journalize each transaction of Barnett Auction Co. Explanations are not required.

2. Prepare T accounts for Cash, Accounts Payable, and Notes Payable. Post to these three accounts.

3. After these transactions, how much cash does the business have? How much in total liabilities does it owe?

prepare the trial balance of double r heating and air conditioning inc at january 31 578490

(Learning Objective 2, 3, 4: Journalizing transactions, posting, and preparing and using a trial balance) During the first month of operations, Double R Heating and Air Conditioning, Inc., completed the following transactions:

Jan. 2

Double R received $30,000 cash and issued common stock to the stockholders.

3

Purchased supplies, $1,000, and equipment, $2,600, on account.

4

Performed service for a customer and received cash, $1,500.

7

Paid cash to acquire land, $22,000.

11

Performed service for a customer and billed the customer, $800.

16

Paid for the equipment purchased January 3 on account.

17

Paid the telephone bill, $100.

18

Received partial payment from customer on account, $500.

22

Paid the water and electricity bills, $400.

29

Received $1,800 cash for servicing the heating unit of a customer.

31

Paid employee salary, $1,300.

31

Declared and paid dividends of $2,200. We expect to collect within 1 month.

Required

Set up the following T accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Land, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, and Utilities Expense.

1. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

2. Post the transactions to the T accounts, using transaction dates as posting references. Label the ending balance of each account Bal., as shown in the chapter.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Double R Heating and Air Conditioning, Inc., at January 31 of the current year.

4. The manager asks you how much in total resources the business has to work with, how much it owes, and whether January was profitable (and by how much).

prepare the trial balance of music services corporation at april 30 20×1 578491

(Learning Objective 3, 4: Recording transactions directly in T accounts; preparing and using a trial balance) During the first month of operations (April 20X1), Music Services Corporation completed the following selected transactions:

a. The business received cash of $25,000 and a building valued at $50,000. The corporation issued common stock to the stockholders.

b. Borrowed $50,000 from the bank; signed a note payable.

c. Paid $60,000 for music equipment.

d. Purchased supplies on account, $1,000.

e. Paid employees’ salaries, $1,300.

f. Received $500 for service performed for customers.

g. Performed service for customers on account, $1,800.

h. Paid $600 of the account payable created in Transaction d.

i. Received a $500 bill for utility expense that will be paid in the near future.

j. Received cash on account, $1,100.

k. Paid the following cash expenses: (1) rent, $1,000; (2) advertising, $800.

Required

1. Set up the following T accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Music Equipment, Building, Accounts Payable, Note Payable, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salary Expense,

Rent Expense, Advertising Expense, and Utilities Expense.

2. Record the foregoing transactions directly in the T accounts without using a journal. Use the letters to identify the transactions.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Music Services Corporation at April 30, 20X1.

vasquez ltd is a retailer operating in edmonton alberta vasquez uses the perpetual i 578205

Vasquez Ltd. is a retailer operating in Edmonton,Alberta.Vasquez uses the perpetual inventory method.All sales returns from customers result in the goods being returned to inventory; the inventory is not damaged.Assume that there are no credit transactions; all amounts are settled in cash.

You are provided with the following information for Vasquez Ltd. for the month of January 2010.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

December 31

Ending inventory

150

$17

January 2

Purchase

100

21

January 6

Sale

150

40

January 9

Sale return

10

40

January 9

Purchase

75

24

January 10

Purchase return

15

24

January 10

Sale

50

45

January 23

Purchase

100

28

January 30

Sale

110

50

Instructions

(a) For each of the following cost flow assumptions, calculate (i) cost of goods sold, (ii) ending inventory, and (iii) gross profit.

(1) LIFO. (2) FIFO. (3) Moving average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

sandoval appliance mart began operations on may 1 it uses a perpetual inventory syst 578206

Sandoval Appliance Mart began operations on May 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system.

During May the company had the following purchases and sales for its Model 25 Sureshot camera.

Date

Units

Unit Cost

Sales Units

May 1

7

$150

4

4

8

8

$170

12

5

15

6

$185

20

3

25

4

Instructions

(a) Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO, (2) moving average cost, and (3) LIFO.

(b) Which costing method produces (1) the highest ending inventory valuation and (2) the lowest ending inventory valuation?

using the gross profit rate for february determine both the estimated total inventor 578207

Saffordville Company lost 70% of its inventory in a fire on March 25, 2010. The accounting records showed the following gross profit data for February and March.

March

February

(to 3/25)

Net sales

$300,000

$250,000

Net purchases

197,800

191,000

Freight in

2,900

4,000

Beginning inventory

4,500

13,200

Ending inventory

13,200

?

Saffordville Company is fully insured for fire losses but must prepare a report for the insurance company.

Instructions

(a) Compute the gross profit rate for the month of February.

(b) Using the gross profit rate for February, determine both the estimated total inventory and inventory lost in the fire in March.

compute the ending inventory at cost for each department at december 31 assuming the 578208

Neer Department Store uses the retail inventory method to estimate its monthly ending inventories. The following information is available for two of its departments at August 31, 2010.

Sporting Goods

Jewelry and Cosmetics

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Net sales

$1,000,000

$1,160,000

Purchases

$675,000

1,066,000

$741,000

1,158,000

Purchase returns

(26,000)

(40,000)

(12,000)

(20,000)

Purchase discounts

(12,360)

(2,440)

Freight in

9,000

14,000

Beginning inventory

47,360

74,000

39,440

62,000

At December 31, Neer Department Store takes a physical inventory at retail. The actual retail values of the inventories in each department are Sporting Goods $95,000, and Jewelry and Cosmetics $44,000.

Instructions

(a) Determine the estimated cost of the ending inventory for each department on August 31, 2010, using the retail inventory method.

(b) Compute the ending inventory at cost for each department at December 31, assuming the cost to retail ratios are 60% for Sporting Goods and 64% for Jewelry and Cosmetics.

elms country limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of 578209

Elms Country Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of February 28, 2010, the company’s year end. The following transactions occurred, and the accountant asked your help in determining whether they should be recorded or not.

(a) On February 26, Elms shipped goods costing $800 to a customer and charged the customer $1,000.The goods were shipped with terms FOB shipping point and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

(b) On February 26, Brad Inc. shipped goods to Elms under terms FOB shipping point. The invoice price was $450 plus $30 for freight.The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Elms on March 2.

(c) Elms had $650 of inventory isolated in the warehouse.The inventory is designated for a customer who has requested that the goods be shipped on March 10.

(d) Also included in Elms’s warehouse is $700 of inventory that Art Producers shipped to Elms on consignment.

(e) On February 26, Elms issued a purchase order to acquire goods costing $900. The goods were shipped with terms FOB destination on February 27. Elms received the goods on March 2.

(f) On February 26, Elms shipped goods to a customer under terms FOB destination. The invoice price was $350; the cost of the items was $200. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount.

soul patrol distribution markets cds of the performing artist taylor hicks at the be 578210

Soul Patrol Distribution markets CDs of the performing artist Taylor Hicks. At the beginning of October, Soul Patrol had in beginning inventory 2,000 of Hicks’s CDs with a unit cost of $7. During October Soul Patrol made the following purchases of Hicks’s CDs.

Oct. 3

3,000 @ $8

Oct. 19

3,000 @ $10

Oct. 9

3,500 @ $9

Oct. 25

3,500 @ $11

During October, 11,400 units were sold. Soul Patrol uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods.

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

calculate i ending inventory ii cost of goods sold iii gross profit and iv gross pro 578212

You are provided with the following information for Web Inc. for the month ended June 30, 2010.Web uses the periodic method for inventory.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

June 1

Beginning inventory

40

$40

June 4

Purchase

135

44

June 10

Sale

110

70

June 11

Sale return

15

70

June 18

Purchase

55

46

June 18

Purchase return

10

46

June 25

Sale

65

75

June 28

Purchase

30

50

Instructions

(a) Calculate (i) ending inventory, (ii) cost of goods sold, (iii) gross profit, and (iv) gross profit rate under each of the following methods.

(1) LIFO. (2) FIFO. (3) Average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

prepare partial income statements through gross profit and calculate the value of en 578213

You are provided with the following information for Mondello Inc. Mondello Inc. uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions.

March 1

Beginning inventory 2,000 liters at a cost of 60¢ per liter.

March 3

Purchased 2,500 liters at a cost of 65¢ per liter.

March 5

Sold 2,200 liters for $1.05 per liter.

March 10

Purchased 4,000 liters at a cost of 72¢ per liter.

March 20

Purchased 2,500 liters at a cost of 80¢ per liter.

March 30

Sold 5,000 liters for $1.25 per liter.

Instructions

(a) Prepare partial income statements through gross profit, and calculate the value of ending inventory that would be reported on the balance sheet, under each of the following cost flow assumptions. Round ending Inventory and cost of goods sold to the nearest dollar.

(1) Specific identification method assuming:

(i) the March 5 sale consisted of 1,100 liters from the March 1 beginning inventory and 1,100 liters from the March 3 purchase; and

(ii) the March 30 sale consisted of the following number of units sold from beginning inventory and each purchase: 450 liters from March 1; 550 liters from March 3; 2,900 liters from March 10; 1,100 liters from March 20.

(2) FIFO.

(3) LIFO.

(b) How can companies use a cost flow method to justify price increases? Which cost flow method would best support an argument to increase prices?

the management of clare co asks your help in determining the comparative effects of 578214

The management of Clare Co. asks your help in determining the comparative effects of the FIFO and LIFO inventory cost flow methods. For 2010, the accounting records show the following data.

Inventory, January 1 (10,000 units)

$ 45,000

Cost of 100,000 units purchased

532,000

Selling price of 80,000 units sold

700,000

Operating expenses

140,000

Units purchased consisted of 35,000 units at $5.10 on May 10; 35,000 units at $5.30 on August 15; and 30,000 units at $5.60 on November 20. Income taxes are 30%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2010 under FIFO and LIFO. (Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management.

(1) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful inventory amount for the balance sheet? Why?

(2) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful net income? Why?

(3) Which inventory cost flow method is most likely to approximate actual physical flow of the goods? Why?

(4) How much additional cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) How much of the gross profit under FIFO is illusory in comparison with the gross profit under LIFO?

hector inc is a retailer operating in british columbia hector uses the perpetual inv 578215

Hector Inc. is a retailer operating in British Columbia. Hector uses the perpetual inventory method. All sales returns from customers result in the goods being returned to inventory; the inventory is not damaged. Assume that there are no credit transactions; all amounts are settled in cash.You are provided with the following information for Hector Inc. for the month of January 2010.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

January 1

Beginning inventory

100

$15

January 5

Purchase

150

18

January 8

Sale

110

28

January 10

Sale return

10

28

January 15

Purchase

55

20

January 16

Purchase return

5

20

January 20

Sale

80

32

January 25

Purchase

30

22

Instructions

(a) For each of the following cost flow assumptions, calculate (i) cost of goods sold, (ii) ending inventory, and (iii) gross profit.

(1) LIFO. (2) FIFO. (3) Moving average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using 1 fifo 2 mov 578216

Fontana Co. began operations on July 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system. During July the company had the following purchases and sales.

Purchase

Date

Units

Unit Cost

Sales Units

July 1

5

$120

July 6

4

July 11

7

$136

July 14

3

July 21

8

$147

July 27

Instructions

(a) Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO, (2) moving average cost, and (3) LIFO.

(b) Which costing method produces the highest ending inventory valuation?

using the gross profit rate for november determine the estimated cost of the invento 578217

O’Reilly Company lost all of its inventory in a fire on December 26, 2010. The accounting records showed the following gross profit data for November and December.

December

November

(to 12/26)

Net sales

$600,000

$700,000

Beginning inventory

32,000

36,000

Purchases

377,000

424,000

Purchase returns and allowances

13,300

14,900

Purchase discounts

8,500

9,500

Freight in

8,800

9,900

Ending inventory

36,000

?

O’Reilly is fully insured for fire losses but must prepare a report for the insurance company.

Instructions

(a) Compute the gross profit rate for November.

(b) Using the gross profit rate for November, determine the estimated cost of the inventory lost in the fire.

determine the inventory loss as a result of the fire using the gross profit method 578218

On April 10, 2010, fire damaged the office and warehouse of Inwood Company. Most of the accounting records were destroyed, but the following account balances were determined as of March 31, 2010: Merchandise Inventory, January 1, 2010, $80,000; Sales (January 1–March 31, 2010), $180,000; Purchases (January 1–March 31, 2010) $94,000. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31. It uses a periodic inventory system. From an analysis of the April bank statement, you discover cancelled checks of $4,200 for cash purchases during the period April 1–10. Deposits during the same period totaled $18,500.

Of that amount, 60% were collections on accounts receivable, and the balance was cash sales.

Correspondence with the company’s principal suppliers revealed $12,400 of purchases on account from April 1 to April 10. Of that amount, $1,600 was for merchandise in transit on April 10 that was shipped FOB destination.

Correspondence with the company’s principal customers produced acknowledgments of credit sales totaling $37,000 from April 1 to April 10. It was estimated that $5,600 of credit sales will never be acknowledged or recovered from customers. Inwood Company reached an agreement with the insurance company that its fire loss claim should be based on the average of the gross profit rates for the preceding 2 years. The financial statements for 2008 and 2009 showed the following data.

2009

2008

Net sales

$600,000

$480,000

Cost of goods purchased

404,000

356,000

Beginning inventory

60,000

40,000

Ending inventory

80,000

60,000

Inventory with a cost of $17,000 was salvaged from the fire.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Determine the balances in (1) Sales and (2) Purchases at April 10.

(b) Determine the average profit rate for the years 2008 and 2009. (Hint: Find the gross profit rate for each year and divide the sum by 2.)

(c) Determine the inventory loss as a result of the fire, using the gross profit method.

what is the effect of this transaction on this year rsquo s and next year rsquo s in 578220

B. J. Ortiz Wholesale Corp. uses the LIFO method of inventory costing. In the current year, profit at B. J. Ortiz is running unusually high. The corporate tax rate is also high this year, but it is scheduled to decline significantly next year. In an effort to lower the current year’s net income and to take advantage of the changing income tax rate, the president of B. J. Ortiz Wholesale instructs the plant accountant to recommend to the purchasing department a large purchase of inventory for delivery 3 days before the end of the year. The price of the inventory to be purchased has doubled during the year, and the purchase will represent a major portion of the ending inventory value.

Instructions

(a) What is the effect of this transaction on this year’s and next year’s income statement and income tax expense? Why?

(b) If B. J. Ortiz Wholesale had been using the FIFO method of inventory costing, would the president give the same directive?

(c) Should the plant accountant order the inventory purchase to lower income? What are the ethical implications of this order?

what accounts payable balance appears in the general ledger at the end of january 578221

Presented below is information related to Sims Company for its first month of SUBSIDIARY LEDGERS operations. Determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger.What Accounts Payable balance appears in the general ledger at the end of January?

Credit Purchases

Cash Paid

Jan. 5

Devon Co.

$11,000

Jan. 9

Devon Co.

$7,000

11

Shelby Co.

7,000

14

Shelby Co.

2,000

22

Taylor Co.

14,000

27

Taylor Co.

9,000

identifies suspicious transactions or likely mistakes such as wrong account numbers 578259

Here is a list of words or phrases related to computerized accounting systems.

1. Entry level software.

2. Enterprise resource planning systems.

3. Network compatible.

4. Audit trail.

5. Internal control.

Instructions

Match each word or phrase with the best description of it.

(a) Allows multiple users to access the system at the same time.

(b) Enables the tracking of all transactions.

(c) Identifies suspicious transactions or likely mistakes such as wrong account numbers or duplicate transactions.

(d) Large scale computer systems that integrate all aspects of the organization including accounting, sales, human resource management, and manufacturing.

(e) System for companies with revenues of less than $5 million and up to 20 employees.

beka borke has prepared the following list of statements about accounting informatio 578260

Beka Borke has prepared the following list of statements about accounting information systems.

1. The accounting information system includes each of the steps of the accounting cycle, the documents that provide evidence of transactions that have occurred, and the accounting records.

2. The benefits obtained from information provided by the accounting information system need not outweigh the cost of providing that information.

3. Designers of accounting systems must consider the needs and knowledge of various users.

4. If an accounting information system is cost effective and provides useful output, it does not need to be flexible.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger what ac 578267

Presented below is information related to City Company for its first month of operations.

Determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger.What Accounts Payable balance appears in the general ledger at the end of January?

Credit Purchases

Cash Paid

Jan. 6

Eli Company

$ 9,000

Jan. 11 Eli Company

$ 6,500

Jan. 10

Teddy Company

12,000

Jan. 16 Teddy Company

12,000

Jan. 23

U 2 Company

10,000

Jan. 29 U 2 Company

7,700

what is the balance of the accounts receivable control account after the monthly pos 578269

Donahue Company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in. On June 30, after all monthly postings had been completed, the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger had a debit balance of $320,000; the Accounts Payable control account had a credit balance of $77,000.

The July transactions recorded in the special journals are summarized below. No entries affecting accounts receivable and accounts payable were recorded in the general journal for July.

Sales journal Total sales $161,400

Purchases journal Total purchases $56,400

Cash receipts journal Accounts receivable column total $131,000

Cash payments journal Accounts payable column total $47,500

Instructions

(a) What is the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(b) What is the balance of the Accounts Payable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(c) To what account(s) is the column total of $161,400 in the sales journal posted?

(d) To what account(s) is the accounts receivable column total of $131,000 in the cash receipts journal posted?

the management of morales co is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its presen 578201

The management of Morales Co. is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its present inventory cost flow method, which is average cost.They request your help in determining the results of operations for 2010 if either the FIFO method or the LIFO method had been used. For 2010, the accounting records show the following data.

Inventories

Purchases and Sales

Beginning (15,000 units)

$32,000

Total net sales (215,000 units)

$865,000

Ending (30,000 units)

Total cost of goods purchased

(230,000 units)

595,000

Purchases were made quarterly as follows.

Quarter

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

1

60,000

$2.40

$144,000

2

50,000

2.50

125,000

3

50,000

2.60

130,000

4

70,000

2.80

196,000

230,000

$595,000

Operating expenses were $147,000, and the company’s income tax rate is 34%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2010 under FIFO and LIFO. (Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management.

(1) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the more meaningful inventory amount for the balance sheet? Why?

(2) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the more meaningful net income? Why?

(3) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) is more likely to approximate actual physical flow of the goods? Why?

(4) How much additional cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) Will gross profit under the average cost method be higher or lower than (a) FIFO and (b) LIFO? (Note: It is not necessary to quantify your answer.)

you are provided with the following information for pavey inc for the month ended oc 578202

You are provided with the following information for Pavey Inc. for the month ended October 31, 2010. Pavey uses a periodic method for inventory.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Units

Selling Price

October 1

Beginning inventory

60

$25

October 9

Purchase

120

26

October 11

Sale

100

35

October 17

Purchase

70

27

October 22

Sale

60

40

October 25

Purchase

80

28

October 29

Sale

110

40

Instructions

(a) Calculate (i) ending inventory, (ii) cost of goods sold, (iii) gross profit, and (iv) gross profit rate under each of the following methods.

(1) LIFO.

(2) FIFO.

(3) Average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

you have the following information for bernelli diamonds bernelli diamonds uses the 578203

You have the following information for Bernelli Diamonds. Bernelli Diamonds uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions. Bernelli only carries one brand and size of diamonds—all are identical. Each batch of diamonds purchased is carefully coded and marked with its purchase cost.

March 1

Beginning inventory 150 diamonds at a cost of $300 per diamond.

March 3

Purchased 200 diamonds at a cost of $350 each.

March 5

Sold 180 diamonds for $600 each.

March 10

Purchased 350 diamonds at a cost of $375 each.

March 25

Sold 400 diamonds for $650 each.

Instructions

(a) Assume that Bernelli Diamonds uses the specific identification cost flow method.

(1) Demonstrate how Bernelli Diamonds could maximize its gross profit for the month by specifically selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(2) Demonstrate how Bernelli Diamonds could minimize its gross profit for the month by selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(b) Assume that Bernelli Diamonds uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would Bernelli Diamonds report under this cost flow assumption?

(c) Assume that Bernelli Diamonds uses the LIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would the company report under this cost flow assumption?

(d) Which cost flow method should Bernelli Diamonds select? Explain.

which inventory cost flow method is most likely to approximate the actual physical f 578204

P6 7A The management of Utley Inc. asks your help in determining the comparative effects of the FIFO and LIFO inventory cost flow methods. For 2010 the accounting records show these data.

Inventory, January 1 (10,000 units)

$ 35,000

Cost of 120,000 units purchased

504,500

Selling price of 100,000 units sold

665,000

Operating expenses

130,000

Units purchased consisted of 35,000 units at $4.00 on May 10; 60,000 units at $4.20 on August 15; and 25,000 units at $4.50 on November 20. Income taxes are 28%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2010 under FIFO and LIFO. (Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management in the form of a business letter.

(1) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful inventory amount for the balance sheet? Why?

(2) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful net income? Why?

(3) Which inventory cost flow method is most likely to approximate the actual physical flow of the goods? Why?

(4) How much more cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO?

Why?

(5) How much of the gross profit under FIFO is illusionary in comparison with the gross profit under LIFO?

ekale thompson an auditor with sneed cpas is performing a review of strawser company 578181

EKale Thompson, an auditor with Sneed CPAs, is performing a review of Strawser Company’s inventory account. Strawser did not have a good year and top management is under pressure to boost reported income. According to its records, the inventory balance at year end was $740,000. However, the following information was not considered when determining that amount.

1. Included in the company’s count were goods with a cost of $250,000 that the company is holding on consignment.The goods belong to Superior Corporation.

2. The physical count did not include goods purchased by Strawser with a cost of $40,000 that were shipped FOB destination on December 28 and did not arrive at Strawser’s warehouse until January 3.

3. Included in the inventory account was $17,000 of office supplies that were stored in the warehouse and were to be used by the company’s supervisors and managers during the coming year.

4. The company received an order on December 29 that was boxed and was sitting on the loading dock awaiting pick up on December 31.The shipper picked up the goods on January 1 and delivered them on January 6. The shipping terms were FOB shipping point. The goods had a selling price of $40,000 and a cost of $30,000. The goods were not included in the count because they were sitting on the dock.

5. On December 29 Strawser shipped goods with a selling price of $80,000 and a cost of $60,000 to District Sales Corporation FOB shipping point. The goods arrived on January 3. District Sales had only ordered goods with a selling price of $10,000 and a cost of $8,000. However, a sales manager at Strawser had authorized the shipment and said that if District wanted to ship the goods back next week, it could.

6. Included in the count was $40,000 of goods that were parts for a machine that the company no longer made. Given the high tech nature of Strawser’s products, it was unlikely that these obsolete parts had any other use. However, management would prefer to keep them on the books at cost, “since that is what we paid for them, after all.”

Instructions

Prepare a schedule to determine the correct inventory amount. Provide explanations for each item above, saying why you did or did not make an adjustment for each item.

if bargain electronics used the specific identification method instead of the fifo m 578182

On December 1, Bargain Electronics Ltd. has three DVD players left in stock. All are identical, all are priced to sell at $150. One of the three DVD players left in stock, with serial #1012, was purchased on June 1 at a cost of $100. Another, with serial #1045, was purchased on November 1 for $90.The last player, serial #1056, was purchased on November 30 for $80.

Instructions

(a) Calculate the cost of goods sold using the FIFO periodic inventory method assuming that two of the three players were sold by the end of December, Bargain Electronic’s year end.

(b) If Bargain Electronics used the specific identification method instead of the FIFO method, how might it alter its earnings by “selectively choosing” which particular players to sell to the two customers? What would Bargain’s cost of goods sold be if the company wished to minimize earnings? Maximize earnings?

(c) Which of the two inventory methods do you recommend that Bargain use? Explain why.

compute the ending inventory at september 30 and cost of goods sold using the fifo a 578183

Boarders sells a snowboard, Xpert, that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts. Below is information relating to Boarders’s purchases of Xpert snowboards during September. During the same month, 121 Xpert snowboards were sold. Boarders uses a periodic inventory system.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Sept. 1

Inventory

26

$ 97

$ 2,522

Sept. 12

Purchases

45

102

4,590

Sept. 19

Purchases

20

104

2,080

Sept. 26

Purchases

50

105

5,250

Totals

141

$14,442

Instructions

(a) Compute the ending inventory at September 30 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods. Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

(b) For both FIFO and LIFO, calculate the sum of ending inventory and cost of goods sold.What do you notice about the answers you found for each method?

compute the ending inventory at may 31 and cost of goods sold using the fifo and lif 578184

Catlet Co. uses a periodic inventory system. Its records show the following for the month of May, in which 65 units were sold.

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

May 1

Inventory

30

$ 8

$240

15

Purchases

25

11

275

24

Purchases

35

12

420

Totals

90

$935

Instructions

Compute the ending inventory at May 31 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods.

Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under 1 fifo and 578185

Yount Company reports the following for the month of June.

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

June 1

Inventory

200

$5

$1,000

12

Purchase

300

6

1,800

23

Purchase

500

7

3,500

30

Inventory

120

Instructions

(a) Compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.

(b) Which costing method gives the higher ending inventory? Why?

(c) Which method results in the higher cost of goods sold? Why?

determine the amount of the ending inventory by applying the lower of cost or market 578187

Americus Camera Shop uses the lower of cost or market basis for its inventory.The following data are available at December 31.

Item

Units

Unit Cost

Market

Cameras:

     

Minolta

5

$170

$156

Canon

6

150

152

Light meters:

     

Vivitar

12

125

115

Kodak

14

120

135

Instructions

Determine the amount of the ending inventory by applying the lower of cost or market basis.

lebo hardware reported cost of goods sold as follows 578189

Lebo Hardware reported cost of goods sold as follows.

2010

2011

Beginning inventory

$ 20,000

$ 30,000

Cost of goods purchased

150,000

175,000

Cost of goods available for sale

170,000

205,000

Ending inventory

30,000

35,000

Cost of goods sold

$140,000

$170,000

Lebo made two errors: (1) 2010 ending inventory was overstated $3,000, and (2) 2011 ending inventory was understated $6,000.

Instructions

Compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year.

explain in a letter to the president of staley company what has happened mdash i e t 578190

Staley Watch Company reported the following income statement data for a 2 year period.

2010

2011

Sales

$210,000

$250,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

32,000

44,000

Cost of goods purchased

173,000

202,000

Cost of goods available for sale

205,000

246,000

Ending inventory

44,000

52,000

Cost of goods sold

161,000

194,000

Gross profit

$ 49,000

$ 56,000

Staley uses a periodic inventory system. The inventories at January 1, 2010, and December 31, 2011, are correct. However, the ending inventory at December 31, 2010, was overstated $5,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare correct income statement data for the 2 years.

(b) What is the cumulative effect of the inventory error on total gross profit for the 2 years?

(c) Explain in a letter to the president of Staley Company what has happened—i.e., the nature of the error and its effect on the financial statements.

the cost of goods sold computations for o rsquo brien company and weinberg company a 578192

The cost of goods sold computations for O’Brien Company and Weinberg Company are shown below.

O’Brien Company

Weinberg Company

Beginning inventory

$ 45,000

$ 71,000

Cost of goods purchased

200,000

290,000

Cost of goods available for sale

245,000

361,000

Ending inventory

55,000

69,000

Cost of goods sold

$190,000

$292,000

Instructions

(a) Compute inventory turnover and days in inventory for each company.

(b) Which company moves its inventory more quickly?

calculate the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold for each cost 578193

Klugman Appliance uses a perpetual inventory system. For its flat screen television sets, the January 1 inventory was 3 sets at $600 each. On January 10, Klugman purchased 6 units at $660 each.The company sold 2 units on January 8 and 4 units on January 15.

Instructions

Compute the ending inventory under (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) moving average cost.

*E6 16 Yount Company reports the following for the month of June.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

June 1

Inventory

200

$5

$1,000

12

Purchase

300

6

1,800

23

Purchase

500

7

3,500

30

Inventory

120

Instructions

(a) Calculate the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold for each cost flow assumption, using a perpetual inventory system. Assume a sale of 400 units occurred on June 15 for a selling price of $8 and a sale of 480 units on June 27 for $9.

(b) How do the results differ from E6 6 and E6 8?

(c) Why is the average unit cost not $6 [($5 _ $6 _ $7) _ 3 = $6]?

which inventory cost flow method fifo lifo gives the same ending inventory value und 578194

Information about Boarders is presented in E6 4. Additional data regarding Boarders’ sales of Xpert snowboards are provided below.Assume that Boarders uses a perpetual inventory system.

Date

Units

Unit Price

Total Cost

Sept. 5

Sale

12

$199

$ 2,388

Sept. 16

Sale

50

199

9,950

Sept. 29

Sale

59

209

12,331

Totals

121

$24,669

Instructions

(a) Compute ending inventory at September 30 using FIFO, LIFO, and moving average cost.

(b) Compare ending inventory using a perpetual inventory system to ending inventory using a periodic inventory system.

(c) Which inventory cost flow method (FIFO, LIFO) gives the same ending inventory value under both periodic and perpetual? Which method gives different ending inventory values?

doc gibbs company reported the following information for november and december 2010 578195

Doc Gibbs Company reported the following information for November and December 2010.

November

December

Cost of goods purchased

$500,000

$ 610,000

Inventory, beginning of month

100,000

120,000

Inventory, end of month

120,000

????

Sales

800,000

1,000,000

Doc Gibbs’s ending inventory at December 31 was destroyed in a fire.

Instructions

(a) Compute the gross profit rate for November.

(b) Using the gross profit rate for November, determine the estimated cost of inventory lost in the fire.

quayle shoe store uses the retail inventory method for its two departments women rsq 578197

Quayle Shoe Store uses the retail inventory method for its two departments,Women’s Shoes and Men’s Shoes.The following information for each department is obtained.

Women’s

Men’s

Item

Department

Department

Beginning inventory at cost

$ 32,000

$ 45,000

Cost of goods purchased at cost

148,000

136,300

Net sales

178,000

185,000

Beginning inventory at retail

46,000

60,000

Cost of goods purchased at retail

179,000

185,000

Instructions

Compute the estimated cost of the ending inventory for each department under the retail inventory method.

for each of the above transactions specify whether the item in question should be in 578198

Heath Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory at February 28, 2008, the company’s year end.The accountant counted everything that was in the warehouse as of February 28, which resulted in an ending inventory valuation of $48,000. However, she didn’t know how to treat the following transactions so she didn’t record them.

(a) On February 26, Heath shipped to a customer goods costing $800. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point, and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

(b) On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Heath FOB destination.The invoice price was $350.The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Heath on March 2.

(c) Heath had $500 of inventory at a customer’s warehouse “on approval.”The customer was going to let Heath know whether it wanted the merchandise by the end of the week, March 4.

(d) Heath also had $400 of inventory on consignment at a Jasper craft shop.

(e) On February 26, Heath ordered goods costing $750. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on February 27. Heath received the goods on March 1.

(f) On February 28, Heath packaged goods and had them ready for shipping to a customer FOB destination. The invoice price was $350; the cost of the items was $250.The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

(g) Heath had damaged goods set aside in the warehouse because they are no longer saleable.

These goods originally cost $400 and, originally, Heath expected to sell these items for $600.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount. For each item that is not included in ending inventory, indicate who owns it and what account, if any, it should have been recorded in.

which cost flow method results in 1 the highest inventory amount for the balance she 578199

Glanville Distribution markets CDs of the performing artist Harrilyn Clooney.At the beginning of March, Glanville had in beginning inventory 1,500 Clooney CDs with a unit cost of $7.

During March Glanville made the following purchases of Clooney CDs.

March 5

3,000 @ $8

March 21

4,000 @ $10

March 13

5,500 @ $9

March 26

2,000 @ $11

During March 12,500 units were sold. Glanville uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods.

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

determine 1 the ending inventory and 2 the cost of goods sold under each of the assu 578200

Eddings Company had a beginning inventory of 400 units of Product XNA at a cost of $8.00 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Feb. 20

600 units at $9

Aug. 12

300 units at $11

May 5

500 units at $10

Dec. 8

200 units at $12

Eddings Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totaled 1,500 units.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory, and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods.

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet, and

(2) the lowest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

olaf distributing company completed the following merchandising transactions in the 578102

Olaf Distributing Company completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of April. At the beginning of April, the ledger of Olaf showed Cash of $9,000 and M. Olaf, Capital of $9,000.

Apr. 2

Purchased merchandise on account from Dakota Supply Co. $6,900, terms 1/10, n/30.

4

Sold merchandise on account $5,500, FOB destination, terms 1/10, n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,100.

5

Paid $240 freight on April 4 sale.

6

Received credit from Dakota Supply Co. for merchandise returned $500.

11

Paid Dakota Supply Co. in full, less discount.

13

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on April 4.

14

Purchased merchandise for cash $3,800.

16

Received refund from supplier for returned goods on cash purchase of April 14, $500.

18

Purchased merchandise from Skywalker Distributors $4,500, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.

20

Paid freight on April 18 purchase $100.

23

Sold merchandise for cash $6,400.The merchandise sold had a cost of $5,120.

26

Purchased merchandise for cash $2,300.

27

Paid Skywalker Distributors in full, less discount.

29

Made refunds to cash customers for defective merchandise $90. The returned merchandise had a scrap value of $30.

30

Sold merchandise on account $3,700, terms n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,800.

Olaf Company’s chart of accounts includes the following: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable,No. 120 Merchandise Inventory,No. 201 Accounts Payable,No. 301 M. Olaf, Capital, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 414 Sales Discounts, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold, and No. 644 Freight out.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Enter the beginning cash and capital balances, and post the transactions. (Use J1 for the journal reference.)

(c) Prepare the income statement through gross profit for the month of April 2010.

maine department store is located near the village shopping mall at the end of the c 578103

Maine Department Store is located near the Village Shopping Mall. At the end of the company’s calendar year on December 31, 2010, the following accounts appeared in two of its trial balances.

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Accounts Payable

$79,300

$79,300

Interest Payable

$8,000

Accounts Receivable

50,300

50,300

Interest Revenue

$4,000

4,000

Accumulated Depr.—Building

42,100

$52,500

Merchandise Inventory

$75,000

$75,000

Accumulated Depr.—Equipment

$29,600

42,900

Mortgage Payable

80,000

80,000

Building

190,000

$190,000

Office Salaries Expense

32,000

32,000

Cash

23,800

23,800

Prepaid Insurance

9,600

2,400

B. Maine, Capital

176,600

$176,600

Property Tax Expense

4,800

Cost of Goods Sold

412,700

412,700

Property Taxes Payable

4,800

Depr. Expense—Building

10,400

Sales Salaries Expense

76,000

76,000

Depr. Expense—Equipment

13,300

Sales

628,000

628,000

B. Maine, Drawing

28,000

28,000

Sales Commissions Expense

10,200

14,500

Equipment

110,000

$110,000

Sales Commissions Payable

4,300

Insurance Expense

7,200

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

8,000

Interest Expense

3,000

11,000

Utilities Expense

11,000

12,000

Utilities Expense Payable

1,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement, an owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet. $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries that were made.

(c) Journalize the closing entries that are necessary.

prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended december 31 2010 578105

At the end of Gordman Department Store’s fiscal year on December 31, 2010, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight in

$5,600

Merchandise Inventory

$40,500

Purchases

447,000

Purchase Discounts

$12,000

Purchase Returns and Allowances

6,400

Sales

$718,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on December 31, 2010, is $75,000.

2. Note that Gordman Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended December 31, 2010.

calculate the ending balance of accounts payable for each of the 2008 2009 and 2010 578106

Kristen Montana operates a retail clothing operation. She purchases all merchandise inventory on credit and uses a periodic inventory system. The accounts payable account is used for recording inventory purchases only; all other current liabilities are accrued in separate accounts.You are provided with the following selected information for the fiscal years 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010.

2007

2008

2009

2010

Inventory (ending)

$13,000

$11,300

$14,700

$12,200

Accounts payable (ending)

20,000

Sales

225700

227,600

219,500

Purchases of merchandise

inventory on account

146,000

$145,000

129,000

Cash payments to suppliers

135,000

$161,000

127,000

Instructions

(a) Calculate cost of goods sold for each of the 2008, 2009, and 2010 fiscal years.

(b) Calculate the gross profit for each of the 2008, 2009, and 2010 fiscal years.

(c) Calculate the ending balance of accounts payable for each of the 2008, 2009, and 2010 fiscal years.

(d) Sales declined in fiscal 2010. Does that mean that profitability, as measured by the gross profit rate, necessarily also declined? Explain, calculating the gross profit rate for each fiscal year to help support your answer. (Round to one decimal place.)

prepare an income statement through gross profit assuming merchandise inventory on h 578107

At the beginning of the current season, the ledger of Village Tennis Shop showed Cash $2,500; Merchandise Inventory $1,700; and Angie Wilbert, Capital $4,200.The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr. 4

Purchased racquets and balls from Denton Co. $740, terms 3/10, n/30.

6

Paid freight on Denton Co. purchase $60.

8

Sold merchandise to members $900, terms n/30.

10

Received credit of $40 from Denton Co. for a racquet that was returned.

11

Purchased tennis shoes from Newbee Sports for cash $300.

13

Paid Denton Co. in full.

14

Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Venus’s Sportswear $600, terms 2/10, n/60.

15

Received cash refund of $50 from Newbee Sports for damaged merchandise that was returned.

17

Paid freight on Venus’s Sportswear purchase $30.

18

Sold merchandise to members $1,000, terms n/30.

20

Received $500 in cash from members in settlement of their accounts.

21

Paid Venus’s Sportswear in full.

27

Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that did not fit properly.

30

Received cash payments on account from members $500.

The chart of accounts for the tennis shop includes Cash; Accounts Receivable; Merchandise Inventory; Accounts Payable; Angie Wilbert, Capital; Sales; Sales Returns and Allowances; Purchases; Purchase Returns and Allowances; Purchase Discounts; and Freight in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $2,296.

prepare a multiple step income statement and an owner rsquo s equity statement for t 578108

The trial balance of Terry Manning Fashion Center contained the following accounts at November 30, the end of the company’s fiscal year.

TERRY MANNING FASHION CENTER
Trial Balance
November 30, 2010

Debit

Credit

Cash

$28,700

Accounts Receivable

30,700

Merchandise Inventory

44700

Store Supplies

6,200

Store Equipment

85000

Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

$22,000.00

Delivery Equipment

48,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Delivery Equipment

6,000

Notes Payable

51,000

Accounts Payable

48,500

Terry Manning, Capital

110,000

Terry Manning, Drawing

12000

Sales

755,200

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,800

Cost of Goods Sold

497,400

Salaries Expense

140,000

Advertising Expense

24,400

Utilities Expense

14,000

Repair Expense

12,100

Delivery Expense

16,700

Rent Expense

24,000

Totals

$992,700

$992,700

Adjustment data:

1. Store supplies on hand totaled $2,500.

2. Depreciation is $9,000 on the store equipment and $5,000 on the delivery equipment.

3. Interest of $4,080 is accrued on notes payable at November 30.

4. Merchandise inventory actually on hand is $44,400.

Instructions

(a) Enter the trial balance on a worksheet, and complete the worksheet.

(b) Prepare a multiple step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year, and a classified balance sheet as of November 30, 2010. Notes payable of 30,000 are due in January 2011.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries.

(d) Journalize the closing entries.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

newman hardware store completed the following merchandising transactions in the mont 578110

Newman Hardware Store completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of May. At the beginning of May, the ledger of Newman showed Cash of $5,000 and Newman, Capital of $5,000.

May 1

Purchased merchandise on account from Jerry’s Wholesale Supply $4,200, terms 2/10, n/30.

2

Sold merchandise on account $2,100, terms 1/10, n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $1,300.

5

Received credit from Jerry’s Wholesale Supply for merchandise returned $300.

9

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on sales of $2,100 on May 2.

10

Paid Jerry’s Wholesale Supply in full, less discount.

11

Purchased supplies for cash $400.

12

Purchased merchandise for cash $1,400.

15

Received refund for poor quality merchandise from supplier on cash purchase $150.

17

Purchased merchandise from Cosmo Distributors $1,300, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.

19

Paid freight on May 17 purchase $130.

24

Sold merchandise for cash $3,200.The merchandise sold had a cost of $2,000.

25

Purchased merchandise from Costanza, Inc. $550, FOB destination, terms 2/10, n/30.

27

Paid Cosmo Distributors in full, less discount.

29

Made refunds to cash customers for defective merchandise $60. The returned merchandise had a scrap value of $10.

31

Sold merchandise on account $900, terms n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $560.

Newman Hardware’s chart of accounts includes the following: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 120 Merchandise Inventory, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 301 Newman, Capital, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 414 Sales Discounts, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Enter the beginning cash and capital balances and post the transactions. (Use J1 for the journal reference.)

(c) Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the month of May 2010.

tarp department store is located in midtown platteville during the past several year 578111

Tarp Department Store is located in midtown Platteville. During the past several years, net income has been declining because of suburban shopping centers.At the end of the company’s fiscal year on November 30, 2010, the following accounts appeared in two of its trial balances.

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Accounts Payable

$ 25,200

$ 25,200

Interest Revenue

$ 8,000

$ 8,000

Accounts Receivable

30,500

30,500

Merchandise Inventory

29,000

29,000

Accumulated Depr.—Delivery Equip.

10,000

15,000

Notes Payable

37,000

37,000

Accumulated Depr.—Store Equip.

24,000

32,000

Prepaid Insurance

10,500

3,500

Cash

6,000

6,000

Property Tax Expense

2,800

J.Tarp, Capital

101,700

101,700

Property Taxes Payable

2,800

Cost of Goods Sold

507,000

507,000

Rent Expense

15,000

15,000

Delivery Expense

6,500

6,500

Salaries Expense

96,000

96,000

Delivery Equipment

46,000

46,000

Sales

680,000

680,000

Depr. Expense—Delivery Equip.

5,000

Sales Commissions Expense

6,500

11,200

Depr. Expense—Store Equip.

8,000

Sales Commissions Payable

4,700

J.Tarp, Drawing

10,000

10,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

8,000

Insurance Expense

7,000

Store Equip.

100,000

100,000

Interest Expense

6400

6,400

Utilities Expense

8,500

8,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement, an owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet. Notes payable are due in 2013.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries that were made.

(c) Journalize the closing entries that are necessary.

caleb borke a former disc golf star operates caleb rsquo s discorama at the beginnin 578112

Caleb Borke, a former disc golf star, operates Caleb’s Discorama. At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Caleb’s Discorama showed Cash $1,800, Merchandise Inventory $2,500, and C. Borke, Capital $4,300. The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr. 5

Purchased golf discs, bags, and other inventory on account from Innova Co. $1,200, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/60.

7

Paid freight on Innovas purchase $50.

9

Received credit from Innova Co. for merchandise returned $100.

10

Sold merchandise on account for $900, terms n/30. The merchandise sold had a cost of $540.

12

Purchased disc golf shirts and other accessories on account from Lightning Sportswear $670, terms 1/10, n/30.

14

Paid Innova Co. in full, less discount.

17

Received credit from Lightning Sportswear for merchandise returned $70.

20

Made sales on account for $560, terms n/30.The cost of the merchandise sold was $340.

21

Paid Lightning Sportswear in full, less discount.

27

Granted an allowance to members for clothing that was flawed $30.

30

Received payments on account from customers $800.

The chart of accounts for the store includes the following: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 120 Merchandise Inventory, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 301 C. Borke, Capital, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended november 30 2010 578113

At the end of Duckworth Department Store’s fiscal year on November 30, 2010, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight in

$ 4,500

Merchandise Inventory

40,000

Purchases

585,000

Purchase Discounts

6,300

Purchase Returns and Allowances

2,700

Sales

810,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

18,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on November 30, 2010, is $32,600.

2. Note that Duckworth Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended November 30, 2010.

sales declined over the 3 year fiscal period 2008 ndash 2010 does that mean that pro 578114

Letterman Inc. operates a retail operation that purchases and sells home entertainment products. The company purchases all merchandise inventory on credit and uses a periodic inventory system. The accounts payable account is used for recording inventory purchases only; all other current liabilities are accrued in separate accounts. You are provided with the following selected information for the fiscal years 2007 through 2010, inclusive.

2007

2008

2009

2010

Income Statement Data

Sales

$53,300

$ (e)

$45,200

Cost of goods sold

(a)

13,800

14,300

Gross profit

38,300

33,800

(i)

Operating expenses

34,900

(f)

28,600

Net income

$ (b)

$ 2,500

$ (j)

Balance Sheet Data

Merchandise inventory

$7,200

$ (c)

$8,100

$ (k)

Accounts payable

3,200

3,600

2,500

(l)

Additional Information

Purchases of merchandise

inventory on account

$14,200

$ (g)

$13,200

Cash payments to suppliers

(d)

(h)

13,600

Instructions

(a) Calculate the missing amounts.

(b) Sales declined over the 3 year fiscal period, 2008–2010. Does that mean that profitability necessarily also declined? Explain, computing the gross profit rate and the profit margin ratio for each fiscal year to help support your answer.

prepare an income statement through gross profit assuming merchandise inventory on h 578115

At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Five Pines Pro Shop showed Cash $3,000; Merchandise Inventory $4,000; and Irene Tiger, Capital $7,000.These transactions occurred during April 2010.

Apr. 5

Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Mickelson Co. $1,200,FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/60.

7

Paid freight on Mickelson Co. purchases $50.

9

Received credit from Mickelson Co. for merchandise returned $100.

10

Sold merchandise on account to members $600, terms n/30.

12

Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from Dagger Sportswear $340, terms 1/10, n/30.

14

Paid Mickelson Co. in full.

17

Received credit from Dagger Sportswear for merchandise returned $40.

20

Made sales on account to members $600, terms n/30.

21

Paid Dagger Sportswear in full.

27

Granted credit to members for clothing that had flaws $35.

30

Received payments on account from members $650.

The chart of accounts for the pro shop includes Cash; Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory; Accounts Payable; Irene Tiger, Capital; Sales; Sales Returns and Allowances; Purchases; Purchase Returns and Allowances; Purchase Discounts, and Freight in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $4,726.

prepare a condensed income statement for 2010 assuming 1 carrie rsquo s changes are 578118

Three years ago, Carrie Dungy and her brother in law Luke Barber opened FedCo Department Store. For the first two years, business was good, but the following condensed income results for 2009 were disappointing.

FEDCO DEPARTMENT STORE
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2009

Net sales

$700,000

Cost of goods sold

553,000

Gross profit

147,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

$100,000

Administrative expenses

20,000

120,000

Net income

$ 27,000

Carrie believes the problem lies in the relatively low gross profit rate (gross profit divided by net sales) of 21%. Luke believes the problem is that operating expenses are too high. Carrie thinks the gross profit rate can be improved by making both of the following changes. She does not anticipate that these changes will have any effect on operating expenses.

1. Increase average selling prices by 17%.This increase is expected to lower sales volume so that total sales will increase only 6%.

2. Buy merchandise in larger quantities and take all purchase discounts. These changes are expected to increase the gross profit rate by 3 percentage points.

Luke thinks expenses can be cut by making both of the following changes. He feels that these changes will not have any effect on net sales.

1. Cut 2009 sales salaries of $60,000 in half and give sales personnel a commission of 2% of net sales.

2. Reduce store deliveries to one day per week rather than twice a week; this change will reduce 2009 delivery expenses of $30,000 by 40%.

Carrie and Luke come to you for help in deciding the best way to improve net income.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a condensed income statement for 2010 assuming (1) Carrie’s changes are implemented and (2) Luke’s ideas are adopted.

(b) What is your recommendation to Carrie and Luke?

(c) Prepare a condensed income statement for 2010 assuming both sets of proposed changes are made.

when should surfing usa co record the sale 578119

The following situation is in chronological order.

1. Flutie decides to buy a surfboard.

2. He calls Surfing USA Co. to inquire about their surfboards.

3. Two days later he requests Surfing USA Co. to make him a surfboard.

4. Three days later, Surfing USA Co. sends him a purchase order to fill out.

5. He sends back the purchase order.

6. Surfing USA Co. receives the completed purchase order.

7. Surfing USA Co. completes the surfboard.

8. Flutie picks up the surfboard.

9. Surfing USA Co. bills Flutie.

10. Surfing USA Co. receives payment from Flutie.

Instructions

In a memo to the president of Surfing USA Co., answer the following.

(a) When should Surfing USA Co. record the sale?

(b) Suppose that with his purchase order, Flutie is required to make a down payment. Would that change your answer?

who are the stakeholders that are harmed or benefitted in this situation 578120

Laura McAntee was just hired as the assistant treasurer of Dorchester Stores. The company is a specialty chain store with nine retail stores concentrated in one metropolitan area.

Among other things, the payment of all invoices is centralized in one of the departments Laura will manage. Her primary responsibility is to maintain the company’s high credit rating by paying all bills when due and to take advantage of all cash discounts.

Danny Feeney, the former assistant treasurer who has been promoted to treasurer, is training Laura in her new duties. He instructs Laura that she is to continue the practice of preparing all checks “net of discount” and dating the checks the last day of the discount period. “But,”

Danny continues, “we always hold the checks at least 4 days beyond the discount period before mailing them. That way we get another 4 days of interest on our money. Most of our creditors need our business and don’t complain. And, if they scream about our missing the discount period, we blame it on the mail room or the post office.We’ve only lost one discount out of every hundred we take that way. I think everybody does it. By the way, welcome to our team!”

Instructions

(a) What are the ethical considerations in this case?

(b) Who are the stakeholders that are harmed or benefitted in this situation?

(c) Should Laura continue the practice started by Danny? Does she have any choice?

determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010 discuss the 578124

Early in 2010 Westmoreland Company switched to a just in time inventory system. Its sales, cost of goods sold, and inventory amounts for 2009 and 2010 are shown below.

2009

2010

Sales

$2,000,000

$1,800,000

Cost of goods sold

1,000,000

910,000

Beginning inventory

290,000

210,000

Ending inventory

210,000

50,000

Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.

neverwas company just took its physical inventory the count of inventory items on ha 578176

Neverwas Company just took its physical inventory.The count of inventory items on hand at the company’s business locations resulted in a total inventory cost of $300,000. In reviewing the details of the count and related inventory transactions, you have discovered the following. 1. Neverwas has sent inventory costing $26,000 on consignment to Niagara Company.All of this

inventory was at Niagara’s showrooms on December 31.

2. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $20,000) that was sold on December 28, terms FOB shipping point.The goods were in transit on December 31.

3. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $17,000) that was purchased with terms of FOB shipping point.The goods were in transit on December 31.

Compute the correct December 31 inventory.

determine the value of the company rsquo s inventory under the lower of cost or mark 578178

(a) Blank Company sells three different categories of tools (small, medium and large).The cost and market value of its inventory of tools are as follows.

Cost

Market

Small

$ 64,000

$ 73,000

Medium

290,000

260,000

Large

152,000

171,000

Determine the value of the company’s inventory under the lower of cost or market approach.

(b) Audio Company understated its 2010 ending inventory by $31,000. Determine the impact this error has on ending inventory, cost of goods sold, and owner’s equity in 2010 and 2011.

determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010 discuss the 578179

Early in 2010 Aragon Company switched to a just in time inventory system. Its sales, cost of goods sold, and inventory amounts for 2009 and 2010 are shown below.

2009

2010

Sales

$3,120,000

$3,713,000

Cost of goods sold

1,200,000

1,425,000

Beginning inventory

180,000

220,000

Ending inventory

220,000

80,000

Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.

premier bank and trust is considering giving lima company a loan before doing so the 578180

Premier Bank and Trust is considering giving Lima Company a loan. Before doing so, they decide that further discussions with Lima’s accountant may be desirable. One area of particular concern is the inventory account, which has a year end balance of $297,000. Discussions with the accountant reveal the following.

1. Lima sold goods costing $38,000 to Comerica Company, FOB shipping point, on December 28.

The goods are not expected to arrive at Comerica until January 12. The goods were not included in the physical inventory because they were not in the warehouse.

2. The physical count of the inventory did not include goods costing $95,000 that were shipped to Lima FOB destination on December 27 and were still in transit at year end.

3. Lima received goods costing $22,000 on January 2. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 26 by Galant Co.The goods were not included in the physical count.

4. Lima sold goods costing $35,000 to Emerick Co., FOB destination, on December 30. The goods were received at Emerick on January 8. They were not included in Lima’s physical inventory.

5. Lima received goods costing $44,000 on January 2 that were shipped FOB destination on December 29.The shipment was a rush order that was supposed to arrive December 31.This purchase was included in the ending inventory of $297,000.

Instructions

Determine the correct inventory amount on December 31.

identify the seven transactions and as much detail about each transaction as you can 578059

Reconstructing Events from the Financial Statements Costantino Company just started in business. The first seven transactions have been entered into and processed by the company’s computerized accounting information system. To be sure the accounting system is operating properly, Jim Costantino, the owner, has printed out the financial statements as produced by the accounting system after seven transactions.

Assets:

Liabilities and Equity:

Cash

$22,850

Payable to bank

$6,285

Equipment

11,000

Payable for equipment

11,000

Total assets

$33,850

Owner investment

15,000

Revenues

$2,250

Retained earnings

1,565

Expenses:

Total liabilities and equity

$33,850

Rent

400

Wages

250

Internet service

35

Net income

$1,565

Required

Identify the seven transactions and as much detail about each transaction as you can.

prepare a balance sheet at the end of the first month 578060

Recording Transactions and Preparing Financial Statements Assume that you began a small business in May 2004 by (1) investing $10,000 and (2) borrowing $30,000 from a bank. You (3) purchased equipment for $25,000 cash and (4) purchased merchandise for $12,000 using cash. During the first month of operations, your company (5) sold merchandise for $27,000 in cash. (6) The cost of merchandise sold during the month was $10,000. You (7) repaid $300 of the amount borrowed from the bank. You (8) withdrew $800 from the business for personal use. The name of your business is Sand Dune Trading Company.

Required

A. Record transactions 1–8 using the format illustrated in the chapter.

B. Prepare an income statement for May 2004, the first month of operations.

C. Prepare a balance sheet at the end of the first month.

for each item above indicate the financial statement for which the information is tr 578061

Identifying Financial Statements Refer to the information about financial statements below.

1. The statement provides information about resources consumed during an accounting period.

2. The statement is dated as of a specific point in time.

3. The amounts that are owed to other organizations or individuals are reported.

4. The total amount of capital that has been contributed to the organization is reported.

5. The cash used for investing activities is reported.

6. Information is reported regarding the rewards that have been earned from serving customers during the accounting period just ended.

7. The cash received from financing activities is reported.

8. The statement is not as of a specific date, but covers a period of time.

9. The statement contains information about the financial obligations that were made to acquire resources.

10. The statement reports cash inflows and outflows.

Required For each item above, indicate the financial statement for which the information is true. Use I to indicate income statement, B to indicate balance sheet, C to indicate cash flow statement. If an item is not true for any of the three financial statements, indicate with an N.

prepare an income statement and balance sheet in good form for each statement use a 578062

Summarizing the Results of Financial Activities The accounting staff at Moonbeam Enterprises prepares monthly financial statements. At the end of April 2004 the company had the following account balances:

Land

$45,000

Notes payable

33,000

Merchandise inventory

12,480

Buildings

50,000

Cash

10,360

Contributed capital

38,770

Retained earnings, April 30

46,070

Cost of goods sold

15,050

Sales revenue

26,000

Supplies expense

1,300

Income tax expense

1,060

Wage expense

1,500

Insurance expense

550

Interest expense

900

Required

Prepare an income statement and balance sheet in good form. For each statement, use a three line heading on the statement that includes (a) the name of the company, (b) the name of the statement, and (c) the appropriate time period or date.

smith company is preparing its multiple step income statement statement of owner rsq 578079

Smith Company is preparing its multiple step income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and classified balance sheet. Using the column heads Account, Financial Statement, and Classification, indicate in which financial statement and under what classification each of the following would be reported.

Account

Financial Statement

Classification

Accounts Payable

Accounts Receivable

Accumulated Depreciation—

Office Building

Cash

Casualty Loss from Vandalism

Cost of Goods Sold

Delivery Equipment

Depreciation Expense

E. Smith, Capital

E. Smith, Drawing

Freight out

Insurance Expense

Interest Payable

Land

Merchandise Inventory

Notes Payable (due in 5 years)

Property Tax Payable

Salaries Expense

Salaries Payable

Sales Returns and Allowances

Sales Revenues

Unearned Rent

Utilities Expense

Warehouse

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 578080

Mr. Wellington has prepared the following list of statements about service companies and merchandisers.

1. Measuring net income for a merchandiser is conceptually the same as for a service company.

2. For a merchandiser, sales less operating expenses is called gross profit.

3. For a merchandiser, the primary source of revenues is the sale of inventory.

4. Sales salaries is an example of an operating expense.

5. The operating cycle of a merchandiser is the same as that of a service company.

6. In a perpetual inventory system, no detailed inventory records of goods on hand are maintained.

7. In a periodic inventory system, the cost of goods sold is determined only at the end of the accounting period.

8. A periodic inventory system provides better control over inventories than a perpetual system.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

on april 5 purchased merchandise from bryant company for 25 000 terms 2 10 net 30 fo 578081

Information related to Steffens Co. is presented below.

1. On April 5, purchased merchandise from Bryant Company for $25,000 terms 2/10, net/30, FOB shipping point.

2. On April 6 paid freight costs of $900 on merchandise purchased from Bryant.

3. On April 7, purchased equipment on account for $26,000.

4. On April 8, returned damaged merchandise to Bryant Company and was granted a $4,000 credit for returned merchandise.

5. On April 15 paid the amount due to Bryant Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Steffens Co. under a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Steffens Co. paid the balance due to Bryant Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

on september 1 howe office supply had an inventory of 30 calculators at a cost of 18 578082

On September 1, Howe Office Supply had an inventory of 30 calculators at a cost of $18 each.The company uses a perpetual inventory system. During September, the following transactions occurred.

Sept. 6 Purchased 80 calculators at $20 each from DeVito Co. for cash.

9 Paid freight of $80 on calculators purchased from DeVito Co.

10 Returned 2 calculators to DeVito Co. for $42 credit (including freight) because they did not meet specifications.

12 Sold 26 calculators costing $21 (including freight) for $31 each to Mega Book Store, terms n/30.

14 Granted credit of $31 to Mega Book Store for the return of one calculator that was not ordered. 20 Sold 30 calculators costing $21 for $31 each to Barbara’s Card Shop, terms n/30.

Instructions

Journalize the September transactions.

on december 3 wheeler company sold 500 000 of merchandise to hashmi co terms 2 10 n 578084

Presented below are transactions related to Wheeler Company.

1. On December 3,Wheeler Company sold $500,000 of merchandise to Hashmi Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.The cost of the merchandise sold was $350,000.

2. On December 8, Hashmi Co. was granted an allowance of $27,000 for merchandise purchased on December 3.

3. On December 13,Wheeler Company received the balance due from Hashmi Co.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Wheeler Company using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Wheeler Company received the balance due from Hashmi Co. on January 2 of the following year instead of December 13. Prepare the journal entry to record the receipt of payment on January 2.

presented is information related to rogers co for the month of january 2010 578087

Presented is information related to Rogers Co. for the month of January 2010.

Ending inventory per

Insurance expense

$ 12,000

perpetual records

$ 21,600

Rent expense

20,000

Ending inventory actually

Salary expense

61,000

on hand

21,000

Sales discounts

10,000

Cost of goods sold

218,000

Sales returns and allowances

13,000

Freight out

7,000

Sales

350,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the necessary adjusting entry for inventory.

(b) Prepare the necessary closing entries.

presented below is information for obley company for the month of march 2010 578088

Presented below is information for Obley Company for the month of March 2010.

Cost of goods sold

$212,000

Rent expense

$32,000

Freight out

7,000

Sales discounts

8,000

Insurance expense

12,000

Sales returns and allowances

13,000

Salary expense

58,000

Sales

370,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement.

(b) Compute the gross profit rate.

determine the gross profit rates round to one decimal place 578092

Presented below is financial information for two different companies.

Nam

Mayo

Company

Company

Sales

$90,000

(d)

Sales returns

(a)

$5,000

Net sales

84,000

100,000

Cost of goods sold

56,000

(e)

Gross profit

(b)

41,500

Operating expenses

15,000

(f)

Net income

(c)

15,000

Instructions

(a) Determine the missing amounts.

(b) Determine the gross profit rates. (Round to one decimal place.)

financial information is presented below for three different companies 578093

Financial information is presented below for three different companies.

Natural

Mattar

Allied

Cosmetics

Grocery

Wholesalers

Sales

$90,000

$ (e)

$144,000

Sales returns and allowances

(a)

5,000

$12,000

Net sales

81,000

$95,000

(i)

Cost of goods sold

56,000

(f)

(j)

Gross profit

(b)

38,000

24,000

Operating expenses

15,000

(g)

18,000

Income from operations

(c)

(h)

(k)

Other expenses and losses

4,000

7,000

(l)

Net income

(d)

11,000

5,000

Instructions

Determine the missing amounts.

on january 1 2010 rachael ray corporation had merchandise inventory of 50 000 at dec 578095

On January 1, 2010, Rachael Ray Corporation had merchandise inventory of $50,000. At December 31, 2010, Rachael Ray had the following account balances.

Freight in

$4,000

Purchases

500,000

Purchase discounts

$6,000

Purchase returns and allowances

$2,000

Sales

800,000

Sales discounts

5,000

Sales returns and allowances

10,000

At December 31, 2010, Rachael Ray determines that its ending inventory is $60,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute Rachael Ray’s 2010 gross profit.

(b) Compute Rachael Ray’s 2010 operating expenses if net income is $130,000 and there are no non operating activities.

fill in the lettered blanks to complete the cost of goods sold sections 578096

Below is a series of cost of goods sold sections for companies B, F, L, and R.

B

F

L

R

Beginning inventory

$150

$70

$1,000

$ (j)

Purchases

1,600

1,080

(g)

43,590

Purchase returns and allowances

$40

(d)

$290

(k)

Net purchases

(a)

1,030

$6,210

41,090

Freight in

110

(e)

(h)

2,240

Cost of goods purchased

(b)

1,280

7,940

(l)

Cost of goods available for sale

1,820

1,350

(i)

49,530

Ending inventory

310

(f)

1,450

6,230

Cost of goods sold

(c)

1,230

7,490

43,300

Instructions

Fill in the lettered blanks to complete the cost of goods sold sections.

assume that martinez co paid the balance due to d norlan company on may 4 instead of 578097

This information relates to Martinez Co.

1. On April 5 purchased merchandise from D. Norlan Company for $20,000, terms 2/10, net/30, FOB shipping point.

2. On April 6 paid freight costs of $900 on merchandise purchased from D. Norlan Company.

3. On April 7 purchased equipment on account for $26,000.

4. On April 8 returned some of April 5 merchandise, which cost $2,800, to D. Norlan Company.

5. On April 15 paid the amount due to D. Norlan Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Martinez Co. using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Assume that Martinez Co. paid the balance due to D. Norlan Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of chevalier c 578098

Presented below is information related to Chevalier Co.

1. On April 5, purchased merchandise from Paris Company for $22,000, terms 2/10, net/30, FOB shipping point.

2. On April 6, paid freight costs of $800 on merchandise purchased from Paris.

3. On April 7, purchased equipment on account from Wayne Higley Mfg. Co. for $26,000.

4. On April 8, returned merchandise, which cost $4,000, to Paris Company.

5. On April 15, paid the amount due to Paris Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Chevalier Co. using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Assume that Chevalier Co. paid the balance due to Paris Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

complete the worksheet by extending amounts reported in the adjusted trial balance t 578099

Presented below are selected accounts for Carpenter Company as reported in the worksheet at the end of May 2010.

Adjusted Trial Balance

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Accounts

Cash

9,000

Merchandise Inventory

$76,000

Sales

450,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

$10,000

Sales Discounts

9,000

Cost of Goods Sold

300,000

Instructions

Complete the worksheet by extending amounts reported in the adjusted trial balance to the appropriate columns in the work sheet. Do not total individual columns.

operating expenses incurred on account but not yet recorded total 1 500 578100

The trial balance columns of the worksheet for Green Company at June 30, 2010, are as follows.

GREEN COMPANY
Worksheet
For the Month Ended June 30,2010

Trial Balance

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,320

Accounts Receivable

2,440

Merchandise Inventory

11,640

Accounts Payable

$1,120

Ed Green, Capital

3,600

Sales

42,400

Cost of Goods Sold

20,560

Operating Expenses

10,160

47,120

$47,120

Other data:

Operating expenses incurred on account, but not yet recorded, total $1,500.

Instructions

Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet.

sansomite co distributes suitcases to retail stores and extends credit terms of 1 10 578101

Sansomite Co. distributes suitcases to retail stores and extends credit terms of 1/10, n/30 to all of its customers. At the end of June, Sansomite’s inventory consisted of suitcases costing $1,200. During the month of July the following merchandising transactions occurred.

1 Jul

Purchased suitcases on account for $1,800 from Trunk Manufacturers, FOB destination,
terms 2/10, n/30. The appropriate party also made a cash payment of $100 for
freight on this date.

3

Sold suitcases on account to Satchel World for $2,000.The cost of suitcases sold is $1,200.

9

Paid Trunk Manufacturers in full.

12

Received payment in full from Satchel World.

17

Sold suitcases on account to The Going Concern for $1,500. The cost of the suitcases sold was $900.

18

Purchased suitcases on account for $1,700 from Kingman Manufacturers, FOB
shipping point, terms 1/10, n/30. The appropriate party also made a cash payment of
$100 for freight on this date.

20

Received $300 credit (including freight) for suitcases returned to Kingman
Manufacturers.

21

Received payment in full from The Going Concern.

22

Sold suitcases on account to Fly By Night for $2,250. The cost of suitcases sold was
$1,350.

30

Paid Kingman Manufacturers in full.

31

Granted Fly By Night $200 credit for suitcases returned costing $120.

Sansomite’s chart of accounts includes the following:No. 101 Cash,No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 120 Merchandise Inventory, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 414 Sales Discounts, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for the month of July for Sansomite using a perpetual inventory system.

if management issued misleading financial information do the shareholders have a rea 578017

The Importance of Accounting Regulations In its 2001 annual report, Qwest Communications International Inc. (“Qwest”) stated that because of an SEC investigation, it couldn’t guarantee that it would not have to restate its earnings (to make them consistent with GAAP). A restatement could wipe out more than $500 million of earnings, bringing Qwest close to violating agreements with its creditors. The biggest problem with a restatement is that Qwest faces lawsuits alleging that company executives made misleading statements to prop up the stock price.

Required

A. What is the SEC? What is its mission?

B. If a company’s management believes they have reported earnings in a meaningful way, why can the SEC force them to restate earnings?

C. If management issued misleading financial information, do the shareholders have a reason to be upset with the company? Explain.

what are the short run and long run implications for your company rsquo s profits if 578018

Ethics and Moral Hazard You are the manager of a retail electronics store. Recently, you purchased 200 What A Sound portable CD players from a wholesaler in a going out of business sale. These units cost you $80 each, about half of the normal cost of other brands that you sell for $260. You expected to sell these units at the regular price and earn an above normal profit. After your purchase, you discovered that the units were poorly constructed and would probably last about a third as long as other major brands.

Customers often ask you for a recommendation when considering the purchase of a portable CD player. If you tell them the truth about the What A Sound model, you may have difficulty selling these units, even if you offer a steep discount.

Required

A. What will you tell a customer who asks about these units?

B. What are the short run and long run implications for your company’s profits if (a) you conceal the quality of the units and sell them at their regular price or (b) reveal the quality problem? If you were to choose alternative b, what options might you consider in an effort to minimize the effect of these units on your profits?

what ethical issues should be considered in choosing which brakes to use 578019

Ethics and Moral Hazard You manage an auto service store. One of your major services is brake replacement. You purchase replacement parts at an average cost of $30 per set. Each set contains parts for four wheels and will repair one car. You charge an average of $100 per car for replacing worn brakes, including an average labor cost of $40. Your current volume for brake replacements is about 700 jobs per month. A new vendor has contacted you with an offer to sell you replacement parts at an average cost of $22.50 per set. After checking on the quality of these parts, you find that their average life is about two thirds that of the parts you are currently using.

Required

A. What are the short run profit implications of using the $22.50 brakes instead of the $30 brakes?

B. What are the long run profit implications?

C. What ethical issues should be considered in choosing which brakes to use?

which of the following are features of the corporate form of business organization 578020

Multiple Choice Overview of the Chapter

1. The basic purpose of accounting is to:

a. minimize the amount of taxes a company has to pay.

b. permit an organization to keep track of its economic activities.

c. report the largest amount of earnings to stockholders.

d. reduce the amount of risk experienced by investors.

2. A primary purpose of all organizations in our society is to:

a. make a profit.

b. minimize the payment of taxes.

c. provide employment for the largest number of workers possible.

d. create value by transforming resources from one form to another.

3. Value is created when organizations:

a. raise capital by borrowing funds from banks, individuals, or other businesses.

b. pay cash to suppliers, employees, owners, and government.

c. sell products or services at prices that exceed the value of resources consumed.

d. invest in machinery.

4. Which of the following are features of the corporate form of business organization?

Mutual Agency

Limited Liability

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

5. Tammy Faye invested $2,000 in a partnership. One year later, the partnership was sold, and cash from the sale was distributed to the partners. On that date, Tammy received a check for her share of the company in the amount of $2,250. What was Tammy’s return on investment?

a. $0

b. $250

c. $2,000

d. $2,250

6. Sternberg Enterprises developed a new type of roller skate that is very popular because of its high quality and reasonable price. Sternberg is losing money on the product, however, because several key production personnel recently resigned and replacements are not as skilled. Which of the following terms properly describe the firm?

Effective

Efficient

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

7. The transformation of resources refers to:

a. the assessment of employee performance.

b. converting resources from one form to a more valuable form.

c. procedures designed to reduce a company’s risk.

d. training methods by which unskilled workers become efficient and effective.

8. An investor is evaluating the potential investments described below. Past financial results of these two companies are judged to be indicative of future returns and risk.

Year

Abercrombie Profits

Fitch Profits

A

$16

$6

B

18

48

C

20

3

From the information provided, which investment appears to have the higher return and which the higher risk?

Highest Return

Highest Risk

Abercrombie

Abercrombie

Abercrombie

Fitch

Fitch

Abercrombie

Fitch

Fitch

9. SEC stands for:

a. Securities Excellence Commission

b. Securities and Exchange Commission

c. Standard Executive Compensation

d. Salaried Executive’s Council

10. Ethical behavior is particularly important for accounting because:

a. companies cannot detect unethical behavior.

b. if the reports are wrong, accountants may have to go to jail.

c. the SEC cannot carefully audit each company’s financial statements.

d. the reliability of accounting information depends on the honesty of those who prepare, report, and audit this information.

identify the resources transformation activities and goods of environmental housing 578021

Understanding the Transformation Process Environmental Housing Company designs and builds log homes. It purchases logs and other building materials from other companies. The logs are cut to the dimensions called for in a design and shipped to the customer’s building site with other materials for assembly. Environmental Housing employs construction and assembly workers, maintenance personnel, and marketing and service personnel, in addition to its management and office staff. The company is in charge of the construction process until the home is completed and ready for occupancy.

Required

Identify the resources, transformation activities, and goods of Environmental Housing’s transformation process. Construct a diagram similar to Exhibit 4 that shows the flow of resources through the transformation process.

one of the company rsquo s customers is behind on scheduled payments the amounts are 578035

Leonetta Garcetti owns and manages a large construction company. This morning she is faced with the following issues.

1. The office manager just submitted his resignation and the search for a replacement must be organized.

2. A loan officer from the company’s bank just phoned saying that the company’s application for a $400,000 loan has been approved.

3. Bids from several vendors have been received regarding installation of a new computerized information system. One proposal must be selected.

4. Because the new bank loan has been approved, two short term loans can be paid off.

5. Old office furniture is awaiting disposal.

6. A long time customer is unhappy with the firm’s latest architectural drawings for a new shopping center complex.

7. A new construction crane is being purchased.

8. An investor has approached Leonetta offering to purchase 20% of her company in exchange for cash.

9. The firm is considering the purchase of exclusive regional rights to a patented construction process.

10. One of the company’s customers is behind on scheduled payments. The amounts are large and Leonetta must decide whether to suspend construction on the project involved. Identify each of the issues above as involving a financing activity, an investing activity, or an operating activity.

identify which part of the transformation process is involved use f to indicate a fi 578036

For each of the following items, identify which part of the transformation process is involved. Use F to indicate a financing activity, I to indicate an investing activity, or O to indicate an operating activity.

a. ____ New manufacturing equipment was purchased for installation in the factory.

b. ____ Three new salespersons were hired.

c. ____ A loan was obtained from a local bank.

d. ____ A $500 down payment was received from a customer on goods sold.

e. ____ The Human Resources department hired three new employees.

f. ____ The company’s worn out delivery truck was sold to the junk yard for $400.

g. ____ The owner contributed more cash to the business.

h. ____ Refunds totaling $450 were given to several customers.

i. ____ Goods were shipped to a customer in a neighboring state.

j. ____ The remaining balance of a loan was repaid in full.

indicate the amount of cash other assets liabilities and or owners rsquo equity that 578037

Popovich Company had the following transactions during June.

June 1 $20,000 of merchandise inventory was purchased with cash.

15 Sold merchandise for $60,000 cash. The merchandise had cost Popovich $28,000.

23 Borrowed $200,000 from a bank.

25 Paid $2,000 for supplies used in June.

28 June wages of $6,000 were paid.

30 $100,000 of equipment was purchased using cash.

30 Paid $4,000 for utilities consumed in June.

Indicate the amount of cash, other assets, liabilities, and/or owners’ equity that would result from each transaction by completing the table provided on the next page.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Cash

Other Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Date

Accounts

$40,000

60,000

=

30,000

+

50,000

+ 20,000

1 Jun

Beginning Amounts

Ending Amounts

show how the financial effects of each transaction would be recorded using the follo 578038

Perez Company had the following selected transactions during the month of May. Show how the financial effects of each transaction would be recorded using the following format. The first transaction has been completed as an example. Juanita Perez invested $10,000 in the company on May 1.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Beginning Amounts

70,000

+90,000

=

60,000

+

60,000

+40,000

1 May

Cash

10,000

Contributed Capital

10,000

May 5 Sold goods for $30,000 cash. The goods had cost $14,000. 10 Purchased merchandise inventory for $45,000 cash.

15 Paid back part of a bank loan, $1,500 (decrease Notes Payable).

22 Purchased equipment for $4,000 using cash.

31 Paid the utility company for services consumed, $600.

31 Paid $7,500 wages for labor services consumed.

the following account changes were made in the company rsquo s accounting records du 578040

Rosy Cheeks Company distributes perfumes and cosmetics. The following account changes were made in the company’s accounting records during March. For each item, describe the transaction that caused the changes. The first item has been completed as an example.

a. Cash increased $18,000; Contributed Capital increased $18,000.

The owners invested $18,000 in the company.

b. Equipment increased $10,500; Cash decreased $10,500.

c. Cash increased $8,500; Notes Payable increased $8,500.

d. Supplies inventory increased $13,500; Cash decreased $13,500.

e. Merchandise Inventory decreased $9,500; Cost of Goods Sold increased $9,500.

f. Cash increased $23,500; Sales Revenue increased $23,500.

g. Supplies Expense increased $2,250; Supplies inventory decreased $2,250.

cash 5 000 liabilities 1 500 contributed capital 3 000 and retained earnings 500 pre 578041

Amelio has operated a one person law firm for many years. During the first week of February, the following events occurred in his business.

Feb. 2 Collected $1,800 from a client for legal work performed.

3 February’s office rent of $1,200 was paid to the landlord.

4A $300 payment was made on a loan previously obtained from a local bank.

4The monthly subscription to Lawyer’s Monthly magazine (a Miscellaneous Expense) was paid: $35.

5 Collected $4,250 for legal services performed.

5 Purchased a computer for $3,200 using cash.

6 Wages were paid to the office staff totaling $525.

6 Office supplies of $128 were purchased for cash and were consumed.

Show how the events above would be recorded using the format demonstrated in the chapter.

Beginning account balances were as follows: Cash $5,000, Liabilities $1,500, Contributed Capital $3,000, and Retained Earnings $500. Prepare an income statement for the first week of February.

prepare a schedule demonstrating that assets liabilities owner rsquo s equity for th 578042

Balance sheet accounts for Dale’s Delightful Florist Shoppe at the end of a recent fiscal year are listed below. Prepare a schedule demonstrating that assets =liabilities +owner’s equity for the company.

Supplies Inventory

$4,150

Buildings

79,500

Cash

1,200

Equipment

12,750

Flowers and Plants

24,780

Notes Payable

58,000

Proprietor’s Capital

64,380

record the transactions using the format shown in the chapter 578043

Harmony Cabot opened a music store in a local mall, selling CDs and tapes. She invested $80,000 in the business and borrowed $140,000 from a local bank. The following additional events occurred during April, the first month of operations:

a. Paid cash for equipment costing $45,150.

b. Purchased an inventory of CDs and tapes for $129,600 in cash.

c. Sold one third of the CDs and tapes for a cash sales price of $85,000.

d. Paid expenses as follows:

Employee wages

$12,300

Rent

15,500

Utilities

4,800

Postage

650

Insurance

1,290

Record the transactions using the format shown in the chapter.

what issues must a manager consider before making a financing decision or investing 578051

Recording Transactions Surf The Net.com had the following events occur during October:

1. Paid $5,800 for utilities.

2. Made cash sales to customers that totaled $89,460. The merchandise had cost Surf The Net.com $60,000

3. Paid $28,600 for new equipment.

4. Repaid a $4,900 bank loan.

5. Borrowed $65,000 from local bank.

6. Paid $59,430 to employees for salaries.

7. Paid $11,900 for maintenance and repair.

8. Received $48,600 from investors.

9. Paid $3,750 for supplies that were used.

Required

A. Record transactions 1–9 using the format illustrated in the chapter.

B. What issues must a manager consider before making a financing decision or investing decision?

arrange the accounts and balances into the accounting equation as shown below 578052

The Accounting Equation Apollo Corporation reported the following accounts and balances in its financial statements:

Cash

$10,000

Merchandise Inventory

30,000

Equipment

45,000

Notes Payable

20,000

Contributed Capital

35,000

Retained Earnings

30,000

Required

Arrange the accounts and balances into the accounting equation as shown below:

Assets = Liabilities + Equity

prepare an income statement that reports the firm rsquo s profit during june 578053

Recording Transactions Davidson Enterprises had the following transactions during its first month of business, June 2004. June 1 Lynne Davidson set up a bank account in the business name and deposited $8,000 of her personal funds to it.

2 June’s rent of $525 per month for a store front location was paid in cash.

7 Goods for resale costing $3,600 were purchased using cash.

12 Paid advertising costs of $1,000 for the firm’s Gala Grand Opening.

26 Goods costing $3,000 were sold during June for $7,200 in cash.

30 Workers were paid $850 and the utility company was paid $228 for June services.

Required

A. Use the format illustrated below to show how these transactions would be recorded.

B. Prepare an income statement that reports the firm’s profit during June.

C. Prepare a balance sheet that reports the firm’s assets, liabilities, and equity at June 30.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Date

Accounts

0

+0

=

0

+

0

+0

Beginning Amounts

carmen bay withdrew 500 cash for personal use hint reduce retained earnings assume t 578054

Recording Transactions Carmen Bay Company sells a variety of souvenirs to tourists on the beach. Teenagers are paid 20 percent of the sales price to hawk the wares up and down the beach and are paid daily. The company was formed only recently and given approval by the local city council to operate. The following events are the first in the company’s short history:

1. The company was formed when Carmen Bay contributed $2,150 to the firm.

2. A local bank loaned the firm $4,000 in exchange for the firm’s one year note payable.

3. Merchandise costing $4,100 was purchased with cash.

4. Goods costing $825 were sold to tourists for a total of $2,250 in cash, and the teenagers were paid their commissions.

5. A payment of $1,500 was made to the local bank on the note payable.

6. Carmen Bay withdrew $500 cash for personal use (Hint: reduce retained earnings). Assume the company uses the following set of accounts:

Cash

Notes Payable

Cost of Sales

Merchandise Inventory

Sales

Contributed Capital

Retained Earnings

Commissions Expense

Required Determine how each event affects the company, and record the events using the format shown below.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Date

Accounts

0

+0

=

0

+

0

+0

Beginning Amounts

rented a lawnmower 75 per month an edger 50 per month and a wheelbarrow 10 per month 578055

Recording Transactions Randi had a hard time finding a summer job when she went home from college, so she decided to go into business for herself mowing lawns. She had the following business activities during the month of June. June 1 Used $200 of her own money and borrowed $450 from her father to start the business.

2 Rented a used pickup truck from an uncle for $85 per month. Paid for the first month’s use.

3 Rented a lawnmower ($75 per month), an edger ($50 per month), and a wheelbarrow ($10 per month) at an equipment rental store. Paid the first month’s rental fees in full.

16 During the first two weeks, performed $528 of lawn mowing services. Customers paid in cash. Paid out $52 for gas, oil, and other supplies.

18 Paid $35 for a newspaper advertisement that had appeared earlier in the month.

30 During the last half of the month, performed $507 of lawn mowing services and collected the cash.

30 Paid out $107 for gas, oil, and other supplies.

30 Paid back one half of the amount she had borrowed from her father plus $5 for interest.

Randi knew from taking an accounting class at college that the following accounts would be needed to keep track of her business activities.

Cash

Equipment Rental Expense

Note Payable—Dad

Contributed Capital

Service Revenue

Retained Earnings

Gas and Oil Expense

Advertising Expense

how much income or loss did the company earn 578057

Reconstructing Events from Information in the Accounting Database Jill Jones has just established a security alarm maintenance service. She charges $20 per hour per person and is paid by check upon completion of the job. Her expenses are rather low— usually only supplies and transportation. Following are the entries to the accounting system that were made for the first seven transactions of the company.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Cash

5,000

Contributed Capital

5,000

Supplies Inventory

300

Cash

300

Cash

4,200

Service Revenues

4,200

Utilities Expense

450

Cash

450

Transportation Expense

500

Cash

500

Insurance Expense

500

Cash

700

Retained Earnings

1,300

Cash

1,300

Ending Amounts

5,950

+300

=

+

5,000

+1,250

Required

A. For each transaction, describe the event that caused the entry to be made.

B. How much income (or loss) did the company earn?

what total amount of owners rsquo equity would be reported on the balance sheet 578058

Understanding Information in the Accounting Information System Jacqueline owns and operates a specialty cosmetics manufacturing firm. Distribution is primarily through boutique shops in regional shopping centers, although some items are sold directly through a network of beauty consultants. Raw materials consist of various lotions, potions, fragrances, oils, and powders. The transactions that occurred during the month of March were entered into the accounting system as follows.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Mar. 1

Cash

10,000

Contributed Capital

1,000

Mar. 3

Cash

7,000

Notes Payable

7000

Mar. 5

Merchandise Inventory

8,100

Cash

8,100

Mar. 18

Cash

15,250

Sales Revenue

15,250

Cost of Goods Sold

7,500

Merchandise Inventory

7,500

Mar. 18

Wages Expense

650

Cash

650

Mar. 23

Notes Payable

2,500

1,300

Cash

2,500

Mar. 31

Retained Earnings

5,000

2,000

Cash

2,000

Ending Amounts

19,000

+600

=

4,500

+

10,000

+5,100

Required

A. Describe each of the firm’s transactions. Specify as much detail about each transaction as you can.

B. Assume an income statement and balance sheet are prepared immediately after the last transaction.

1. What amount of net income would be reported?

2. What total amount of owners’ equity would be reported on the balance sheet?

they depend on managers to run the business for the benefit of owners and to provide 577966

Hammer Hardware is owned and managed by Harvey Hammer. As a small company, Hammer Hardware does not need access to large amounts of capital. Harvey is probably more interested in maintaining control of his company rather than having others invest in it. As a proprietorship, Harvey has total control of the business. All company profits belong to him. A primary disadvantage of the proprietorship is that Harvey is personally liable for all of the company’s obligations. He is responsible for paying the company’s debts, even if they require use of his personal resources.

Home Depot is a large corporation. To obtain the financial resources the company needs, it sells stock to a large number of investors. These investors expect a return from their investments but have no interest in managing the company. Instead, they hire professional managers to run the company for them. Corporations permit access to large amounts of capital. Also, individual owners are not responsible for the corporation’s debt, thus reducing the risk of ownership. A primary disadvantage of corporations is that owners have little access to information about the company. They depend on managers to run the business for the benefit of owners and to provide reliable information about their business activities.

information is required to verify that appropriate amounts of taxes and fees are bei 577967

A. Exchanges and contracts between managers, owners, and creditors: Owners and creditors exchange money with Floorshine for the right to receive cash in the future from the company. Contracts exist among managers, owners, and creditors. Managers contract with owners and creditors for money to acquire resources that will generate profits for the company and to employ the resources effectively and efficiently. Managers expect to be rewarded for their effectiveness and efficiency, and owners and creditors expect a fair return on their investments. These contracting parties need information to assess how well managers have performed and to determine how much cash from the company’s operations should be distributed to each party. Managers, owners, and creditors decide whether the terms of contracts are being met. Owners hire independent auditors (CPAs) to examine the financial information provided by managers to owners and creditors to ensure its reliability.

B. Exchanges and contracts between suppliers and managers: Suppliers exchange goods and services with the company for the right to receive cash. Contracts between suppliers and managers require information to determine that the company receives the correct types and quantities of goods and services at the appropriate times. Also, information is needed to demonstrate that the company has made timely payments for these goods and services.

C. Exchanges and contracts between employees and managers: Employees exchange labor services with the company for wages and benefits. Contracts between employees and managers describe the payments, benefits, and rights employees have negotiated with managers. Information is needed to demonstrate that labor services have been provided and employees have been treated fairly. The demands of employees for future wages and benefits depend, in part, on the profitability of the company. Employees and managers need information about the performance of the company to negotiate future contracts.

D. Exchanges and contracts between customers and managers: Customers exchange cash for goods and services provided by the company. Customers, such as retail stores, may receive the goods and pay for them later, say within 30 or 60 days. Managers expect to receive the payments when they are due. Contracts between customers and managers call for the delivery of goods to customers and payment to the company. Customers decide whether to continue to purchase the company’s goods. The quality and costs of the goods and future prospects for obtaining the goods when needed are relevant pieces of information. Information about the payment history of customers helps managers decide whether to continue to extend credit to customers.

E. Exchanges and contracts between government agencies and managers: Government agencies monitor companies to determine if they are engaged in fair trade and labor practices. Managers provide information to demonstrate that the company is conforming to government regulations. Governments provide services to companies in the form of police and fire protection, utilities, sanitation, and streets and roads. Companies pay taxes and fees for these services. Information is required to verify that appropriate amounts of taxes and fees are being paid.

match the type of organization with the characteristics and examples provided below 577982

Match the type of organization with the characteristics and examples provided below:

Type of organization:

1. Merchandising (or retail) companies

2. Manufacturing companies

3. Service companies

4. Governmental and nonprofit organizations

Characteristics and examples:

a. Provide goods or services without the intent of making a profit. Examples include the IRS and the United Way.

b. Produce goods that are sold to consumers or to merchandising companies. Examples include Ford Motor Company and PepsiCo.

c. Sell to consumers goods that are produced by other companies. Examples include Wal Mart and Sears.

d. Sell services rather than goods. Examples include H&R Block and Delta Air Lines.

how much total profit is earned by those involved in making and selling the slacks w 577985

Fashion Threads Company uses the following four steps to make a particular pair of cotton slacks:

a. Cotton is planted, grown, harvested, and shipped to a textile manufacturer. The cost to produce the cotton associated with the slacks is $5. This amount of cotton is sold to the manufacturer for $5.50.

b. Raw cotton is processed into cotton fabric. The cost of producing the fabric for the slacks, including the cost of the raw cotton, is $13.25. This fabric is sold to a garment manufacturer for $17.

c. Cotton fabric is cut and sewn to produce a pair of slacks. The cost of making the slacks, including the cost of the fabric, is $25. The slacks are sold to a retailer for $30.

d. The cost to the retailer of making the slacks available for sale, including the cost of the slacks, is $34. The retailer sells the slacks for $56.

Use Exhibits 5 and 6 to help you answer the following questions. How much profit is earned at each step in the production and selling process? How much total profit is earned by those involved in making and selling the slacks? Why are customers willing to pay the amounts involved in this process?

prepare a schedule that shows the amount of profit or loss earned by mario rsquo s r 577987

Mario’s Restaurant specializes in Italian food. During February, Mario’s recorded the following sales to customers and costs of doing business:

Sales to customers

$19,500

Cost of food products used

5,750

Cost of rented building and equipment

4,376

Cost of employee labor services used

3,750

Maintenance and utilities used

2,000

Prepare a schedule that shows the amount of profit (or loss) earned by Mario’s Restaurant during February. (Hint: See Exhibit 6.)

which company is more efficient which is more effective in which company would you i 577994

You have a choice of investing in either of two companies, Lewis or Clark. Both companies make the same products and compete in the same markets. Over the last five years, the operating results for the two companies have been:

Lewis

Clark

Sales to customers

$4,500,000

$5,625,000

Profit

$412,500

$675,000

Return on investment per dollar invested

4.50%

7.50%

Which company is more efficient? Which is more effective? In which company would you invest? State the reasons for your answers.

provided below are four types of organizations and a list of organizations with whic 578001

Types of Organizations Provided below are four types of organizations and a list of organizations with which you are probably familiar. Associate each organization with a type of organization.

Types of organizations

Merchandising companies

Manufacturing companies

Service companies

Governmental or nonprofit organizations.

Organizations

United Parcel Service (UPS)

Internal Revenue Service (IRS)

Amazon.com

March of Dimes

Dow Chemical Company

JCPenney

United States Postal Service (USPS)

DaimlerChrysler

PepsiCo

Sears

Federal Express (FedEx)

Verizon Communications

assuming he invested 1 200 000 in the dealership what was the return on his investme 578002

Determining Profit and Return on Investment Harry Honda owns a small car dealership. He rents the property he uses, buys cars from a manufacturer, and resells them to customers. During July, Harry sold 14 cars that cost him a total of $189,000. The total amount he received from the sale of these cars was $224,000. Other costs incurred by Harry for the month included rent, $2,550; utilities, $800; insurance, $825; maintenance of property and cars, $500; advertising, $1,000; and property taxes and business license, $200.

Required

A. Prepare a profit report that calculates the amount of profit earned during July.

B. What can Harry do with the profit he earned?

C. Assuming he invested $1,200,000 in the dealership, what was the return on his investment for July expressed as a percentage of his investment?

what is the expected annual return on investment 578003

Developing Profit and Return on Investment Through hard work and careful saving, Hans and his family have $152,000 to start a small specialty foods business. The family estimates sales to customers will be about $4,500 per month during the first year. On the average, expected costs per month are budgeted as follows:

Wages for occasional labor

$700

Utilities

$100

Rent on land and buildings

1,200

Advertising

300

Supplies

75

Delivery costs

225

Required

A. What is the projected monthly profit?

B. What is the expected annual return on investment?

prepare a schedule that shows the amount of profit earned by the company during the 578004

The Relationship between Profit and Value Created Marty and Judi own and operate Tender Sender Company, a store providing private mail boxes, contract shipping services on commission, and a wide variety of gift and novelty items. The following transactions occurred during the month of February.

1. Sold $6,000 of gift items for which the company had paid $3,100.

2. Advertising, both newspaper and radio, was $1,500.

3. Rent for the month received from mail box customers totaled $1,640.

4. The cost of monthly rent for the store location was $2,200.

5. The cost of utilities for the month was $475.

6. Commissions earned from shipping services for the month totaled $1,588.

7. Sold $3,200 of novelty items that had cost the company $1,450.

8. The cost of supplies used during the month was $384.

9. Other miscellaneous costs for the month of February totaled $250.

Required

A. Prepare a schedule that shows the amount of profit earned by the company during the month of February.

B. Has the company created value? Explain your answer.

explain how a bank loan officer may use your profit projections to help make the len 578005

How Businesses Create Value You are considering opening a shop in a nearby mall that will sell specialty T shirts. T shirts, containing designs and words selected by customers, will be produced for customers on order. You will need to borrow $25,000 to begin operations. A local bank has agreed to consider a loan and has asked for a summary plan to demonstrate the performance you expect from your company and your ability to repay the loan. You will pay $5.50 for T shirts and will sell them for $8. The cost of paint and supplies will be $0.50 per shirt. An examination of similar stores at other malls indicates that you should be able to sell an average of 1,000 shirts per month. Rent for your store will be $300 per month. Utilities will be $150 per month, on average. Wages will be $800 per month.

Required

A. Calculate the expected profit of your company for the first year of operation.

B. Explain how a bank loan officer may use your profit projections to help make the lending decision.

determine the profit earned by betsy during september 578007

The Results of the Transformation Process Betsy started Betsy’s Flag Co. on September 1. During September, Betsy consumed the following resources:

Rent

$625

Utilities

250

Supplies

3,000

Repairs

1,500

Fabric

8,750

Wages

2,500

Business license

500

Betsy created resources by selling flags for $22,000 during the month of September.

Required

Determine the profit earned by Betsy during September.

if the company came to your bank requesting a loan how would you respond from the da 578008

Using Accounting Information for Decisions The chief financial officer (CFO) of Flash Bulb and Seed Company has prepared the following projections for the month of August.

Expected sales

$480,000

Projected monthly resources consumed:

Rent

$85,000

Utilities

2,900

Wages

274,000

Advertising

115,000

Repairs

12,000

Supplies

2,500

Total cost of resources consumed

491,400

Projected loss

($11,400)

Although Flash Bulb and Seed Company predicts a loss for August, the CFO is confident that sales will increase in the future.

Required

A. Why is it important that the CFO prepare a document like this?

B. If the company came to your bank requesting a loan, how would you respond? From the data given, does the firm appear that it is likely to be able to repay a loan? Why?

determine john rsquo s return of investment 578009

Return on Investment and Return of Investment John invested $250,000 into a business that earned a profit of 2,250 during the past month as shown below. John believes the business will earn an annual profit equal to twelve times the monthly profit. Assume John wants to take $20,000 from the business each year for his personal use.

Resources created from sales

$17,000

Resources consumed:

Materials

$7,500

Insurance

1,500

Rent

2,000

Utilities

950

Wages

2,800

Total cost of resources consumed

14,750

Profit earned

$2,250

Required

A. Determine the company’s return on investment.

B. Determine John’s return of investment.

for each of the three independent situations recommend the form of business organiza 578010

Choosing a Form of Business Organization Below are three independent situations.

A. Larry, Ulysses, and Irene are three college student friends planning to set up a summer business at a nearby resort to sell T shirts, souvenirs, and novelties to tourists. While they have no assets (to speak of) of their own, Larry’s uncle has agreed to finance them with upfront capital to acquire merchandise and so on. They plan to operate for only one summer, as all expect to graduate soon and take permanent jobs in a nearby state.

B. Molly and Vicky are twin sisters who have decided to start a computer software consulting firm. Molly is the “techie,” and a bit unreliable. Vicky is a highly successful manager gifted with organizational and business skills. Between the two, they believe they can attract and serve a profitable clientele. In fact, they envision rapid expansion of their practice and diversification into a variety of related business activities. Between them, they have only enough liquid capital to start a small operation. C. Reginald and Ruth Ann are ne’er do well offspring of a deceased industrialist who left them each $400 million—most of which they still have. Ever the optimists, they think there is money to be made in the steel business. A friend they met at the country club has persuaded them to provide $10 million to set up a business that would manufacture and distribute a line of lightweight steel kites. Operations would be located in a nearby state.

Required

For each of the three independent situations, recommend the form of business organization that you believe would be most appropriate. Explain your reasoning in each case, both in favor of your selection and any reasons against your choice.

which contracts will require the parties to rely on accounting information to verify 578012

Contracts, Risk, and Uses of Accounting Information Sonny Beam established Solar Supply Corporation earlier in the current year. To obtain resources, he contributed $5,000 of his savings to the company, had the company borrow $8,000 from his mother, sold shares of company stock to friends totaling $10,000, and obtained a $25,000 bank loan. The company is obligated to buy out all investors and repay the two loans within 12 months of the business becoming profitable. Sonny located space in a nearby business park and leased it for monthly rent of $1,000 plus 1% of his company’s sales. Several competing manufacturers tried to attract him as a distributor of their products. He signed an exclusive agreement with one that offered its products at 52% off their normal sales prices with 30 day free credit. Sonny hired a sales manager at a salary of $3,000 per month and promised her a profit sharing plan payable each December 31. Sonny’s credit policy is that commercial customers receive 60 day free credit and that retail customers must pay by cash or credit card. All goods carry the manufacturer’s warranty and Sonny’s secondary warranty of “satisfaction guaranteed or your money back.” Because the company is a corporation, it will pay corporate income tax to the city, state, and federal governments. In addition, the state will levy a merchandise tax each July 1.

Required

A. Identify the primary exchanges and contracts between the company and those that interact with it.

B. Which of the parties have taken on risk? For each such party, describe that risk.

C. Which contracts will require the parties to rely on accounting information to verify performance according to the contract? Be specific.

suppose the financial information of low land associates but not that of hill countr 578013

Using Information About Risk to Make Decisions Nancy and Mauro are reviewing the information given below for different reasons. Nancy is a bank loan officer who has received a 2 year, $50,000 loan application from both firms. Mauro is an independently wealthy investor who is considering investing $50,000 in a company. The information below is just one part of a complete data set about the companies that both persons are reviewing. The data reveal the profit history of the two firms over the last seven years. The companies are very similar except for the way in which their profits vary over the years. (All dollar amounts are in thousands.)

Profits

2004

2003

2002

2001

2000

1999

1998

Total

Hill Country Enterprises

337

315

303

268

207

225

201

1,856

Low Land Associates

730

55

10

598

131

619

498

2,249

Required

A. Explain the concept of risk and its usual relationship to return on investment.

B. If you were Nancy, would you be more likely to make the loan to Hill Country or to Low Land? Why?

C. If you were Mauro, would you be more likely to invest in Hill Country or Low Land? Why?

D. Suppose the financial information of Low Land Associates (but not that of Hill Country Enterprises) has been audited and verified as being in conformance with generally accepted accounting principles. Would that change your responses to parts (b) and (c) above?

when a new relationship is established between two businesses would the customer be 578014

Using Financial Information to Assess Risk Assume you are the credit manager for a manufacturing company that sells its products to retail businesses. One of your company’s sales representatives has been working hard to establish business relationships with two different retailers. Both businesses are interested in marketing your products. Summary earnings information is presented below for each business.

Profits (losses)

2001

2002

2003

2004

Company A

80,000

20,000

10,000

70,000

Company B

30,000

32,000

40,000

43,000

Required

A. Based on the summary financial information, which company is a better credit risk?

B. When a new relationship is established between two businesses, would the customer be interested in information about the supplier’s financial condition? Why or why not?

is there an economic incentive for taylor to misrepresent the annual sales 578015

Accounting Information and Management Compensation Taylor Grey is the sales manager of an electronics manufacturing company. His annual bonus is based on profits earned by the company. On December 30, Taylor is inquiring about the status of a very large order that he would like to include in the year end profit figures. Unfortunately, a production machine has broken down. Taylor has been advised the order will not be completed and shipped by the end of the year. The profit figures including and excluding the order appear below.

Profit Including the Order

Profit Excluding the Order

$2,300,000

$1,500,000

Taylor’s bonus is 3% of profits.

Required

A. Using the financial information provided, calculate Taylor’s bonus under both scenarios.

B. Why do companies use accounting information to evaluate managerial performance?

C. Is there an economic incentive for Taylor to misrepresent the annual sales?

gaap help ensure that users can compare the financial information of two different c 578016

The Value of an Audit Assume you have inherited a sum of money from a distant relative and are looking for good investment opportunities. You are considering investing in one of two companies, Wonderworks or Hoffstetter’s. Both companies are retailing organizations that have earned profits during the month of January as follows:

Wonderworks

Hoffstetter’s

Resources created

$50,000

$60,000

Resources consumed:

Cost of merchandise sold

$30,000

$35,000

Wages

5,000

4,000

Rent

2,000

2,500

Supplies

1,500

1,700

Utilities

700

500

43,700

Total cost of resources consumed

39,200

$16,300

Profit earned

$10,800

You learn that a CPA examined the financial information provided by Wonderworks and confirmed the information was prepared according to GAAP. “I don’t see any reason to pay a CPA to examine my company’s books,” Patty Hoffstetter tells you. They add to the cost of conducting business. Hoffstetter’s brother in law prepared the company’s financial information. He has no formal training in accounting but followed the instructions provided in the accounting software package that he purchased from an office supply company.

Required

A. Do you agree that the audit adds no value? Why or why not?

B. GAAP help ensure that users can compare the financial information of two different companies. The two sets of financial information appear identical in format. Are they comparable?

purchased land that had an assessed value of 390 000 at the time of purchase a 600 0 577927

(Imputation of Interest) Presented below are two independent situations:

(a) On January 1, 2013, Spartan Inc. purchased land that had an assessed value of $390,000 at the time of purchase. A $600,000, zero interest bearing note due January 1, 2016, was given in exchange. There was no established exchange price for the land, nor a ready fair value for the note. The interest rate charged on a note of this type is 12%. Determine at what amount the land should be recorded at January 1, 2013, and the interest expense to be reported in 2013 related to this transaction.

(b) On January 1, 2013, Geimer Furniture Co. borrowed $4,000,000 (face value) from Aurora Co., a major customer, through a zero interest bearing note due in 4 years. Because the note was zeroing interest bearing, Geimer Furniture agreed to sell furniture to this customer at lower than market price. A 10% rate of interest is normally charged on this type of loan. Prepare the journal entry to record this transaction and determine the amount of interest expense to report for 2013.

assuming that general market interest rates have been stable over the period does th 577929

(Fair Value Option) Fallen Company commonly issues long term notes payable to its various lenders. Fallen has had a pretty good credit rating such that its effective borrowing rate is quite low (less than 8% on an annual basis). Fallen has elected to use the fair value option for the long term notes issued to Barclay’s Bank and has the following data related to the carrying and fair value for these notes.

Carrying Value

Fair Value

December 31, 2012

$54,000

$54,000

December 31, 2013

44,000

42,500

December 31, 2014

36,000

38,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry at December 31 (Fallen’s year end) for 2012, 2013, and 2014, to record the fair value option for these notes.

(b) At what amount will the note be reported on Fallen’s 2013 balance sheet?

(c) What is the effect of recording the fair value option on these notes on Fallen’s 2014 income?

(d) Assuming that general market interest rates have been stable over the period, does the fair value data for the notes indicate that Fallen’s creditworthiness has improved or declined in 2014? Explain.

how should strickland report the gain or loss on the disposition of machine and on r 577931

(Settlement of Debt) Strickland Company owes $200,000 plus $18,000 of accrued interest to Moran State Bank. The debt is a 10 year, 10% notes. During 2012, Strickland’s business deteriorated due to a faltering regional economy. On December 31, 2012, Moran State Bank agrees to accept an old machine and cancel the entire debt. The machine has a cost of $390,000, accumulated depreciation of $221,000, and a fair value of $180,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for Strickland Company and Moran State Bank to record this debt settlement.

(b) How should Strickland report the gain or loss on the disposition of machine and on restructuring of debt in its 2012 income statement?

(c) Assume that, instead of transferring the machine, Strickland decides to grant 15,000 shares of its common stock ($10 par) which has a fair value of $180,000 in full settlement of the loan obligation. If Moran State Bank treats Strickland’s stock as a trading investment, prepare the entries to record the transaction for both parties.

will the gain recorded by barkley be equal to the loss recorded by american bank und 577932

(Term Modification without Gain—Debtor’s Entries) On December 31, 2012, the American Bank enters into a debt restructuring agreement with Barkley Company, which is now experiencing financial trouble. The bank agrees to restructure a 12%, issued at par, $3,000,000 note receivable by the following modifications:

1. Reducing the principal obligation from $3,000,000 to $2,400,000.

2. Extending the maturity date from December 31, 2012, to January 1, 2016.

3. Reducing the interest rate from 12% to 10%.

Barkley pays interest at the end of each year. On January 1, 2016, Barkley Company pays $2,400,000 in cash to Firstar Bank.

Instructions

(a) Will the gain recorded by Barkley be equal to the loss recorded by American Bank under the debt restructuring?

(b) Can Barkley Company record a gain under the term modification mentioned above? Explain.

(c) Assuming that the interest rate Barkley should use to compute interest expense in future periods is 1.4276%, prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring.

(d) Prepare the interest payment entry for Barkley Company on December 31, 2014.

(e) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016?

what interest rate should barkley use to compute its interest expense in future peri 577934

(Term Modification with Gain—Debtor’s Entries) Use the same information as in E14 22 above except that American Bank reduced the principal to $1,900,000 rather than $2,400,000. On January 1, 2016, Barkley pays $1,900,000 in cash to American Bank for the principal.

Instructions

(a) Can Barkley Company records a gain under this term modification? If yes, compute the gain for Barkley Company.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the gain on Barkley’s books.

(c) What interest rate should Barkley use to compute its interest expense in future periods? Will your answer be the same as in E14 22 above? Why or why not?

(d) Prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring.

(e) Prepare the interest payment entries for Barkley Company on December 31, of 2013, 2014, and 2015.

(f) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016?

determine the stated interest rate and the effective interest rate 577937

(Analysis of Amortization Schedule and Interest Entries) The following amortization and interest schedule reflects the issuance of 10 year bonds by Capulet Corporation on January 1, 2006, and the subsequent interest payments and charges. The company’s year end is December 31, and financial statements are prepared once yearly.

Amortization Schedule

Year

Cash

Interest

Amount Unamortized

Carrying Value

1/1/2006

$5,651

$ 94,349

2006

$11,000

$11,322

5,329

94,671

2007

11,000

11,361

4,968

95,032

2008

11,000

11,404

4,564

95,436

2009

11,000

11,452

4,112

95,888

2010

11,000

11,507

3,605

96,395

2011

11,000

11,567

3,038

96,962

2012

11,000

11,635

2,403

97,597

2013

11,000

11,712

1,691

98,309

2014

11,000

11,797

894

99,106

2015

11,000

11,894

100,000

Instructions

(a) Indicate whether the bonds were issued at a premium or a discount and how you can determine this fact from the schedule.

(b) Indicate whether the amortization schedule is based on the straight line method or the effective interest method and how you can determine which method is used.

(c) Determine the stated interest rate and the effective interest rate.

(d) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2006.

(e) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry or entries to reflect the bond transactions and accruals for 2006. (Interest is paid January 1.)

(f) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry or entries to reflect the bond transactions and accruals for 2013. Capulet Corporation does not use reversing entries.

prepare a bond amortization schedule up to and including january 1 2015 using the ef 577938

(Issuance and Retirement of Bonds) Venezuela Co. is building a new hockey arena at a cost of $2,500,000. It received a downpayment of $500,000 from local businesses to support the project, and now needs to borrow $2,000,000 to complete the project. It therefore decides to issue $2,000,000 of 10.5%, 10 year bonds. These bonds were issued on January 1, 2011, and pay interest annually on each January 1. The bonds yield 10%. Venezuela paid $50,000 in bond issue costs related to the bond sale.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds and the related bond issue costs incurred on January 1, 2011.

(b) Prepare a bond amortization schedule up to and including January 1, 2015, using the effective interest method.

(c) Assume that on July 1, 2014, Venezuela Co. retires half of the bonds at a cost of $1,065,000 plus accrued interest. Prepare the journal entry to record this retirement.

prepare journal entries to record the issuance of the 11 bonds and the retirement of 577940

(Issuance and Retirement of Bonds; Income Statement Presentation) Holiday Company issued its 9%, 25 year mortgage bonds in the principal amount of $3,000,000 on January 2, 1998, at a discount of $150,000, which it proceeded to amortize by charges to expense over the life of the issue on a straight line basis. The indenture securing the issue provided that the bonds could be called for redemption in total but not in part at any time before maturity at 104% of the principal amount, but it did not provide for any sinking fund. On December 18, 2012, the company issued its 11%, 20 year debenture bonds in the principal amount of $4,000,000 at 102, and the proceeds were used to redeem the 9%, 25 year mortgage bonds on January 2, 2013. The indenture securing the new issue did not provide for any sinking fund or for retirement before maturity.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of the 11% bonds and the retirement of the 9% bonds.

(b) Indicate the income statement treatment of the gain or loss from retirement and the note disclosure required.

issuance of bonds between interest dates straight line retirement presented below a 577942

(Issuance of Bonds between Interest Dates, Straight Line, Retirement) Presented below are selected transactions on the books of Simonson Corporation.

May1,2012

Bonds payable with a par value of $900,000, which are dated January 1, 2012, are sold at 106 plus accrued interest. They are coupon bonds, bear interest at 12% (payable annually at January 1), and mature January 1, 2022.

Dec. 31

Adjusting entries are made to record the accrued interest on the bonds, and the amortization of the proper amount of premium.

Jan.1, 2013

Interest on the bonds is paid.

April 1

Bonds with par value of $360,000 are called at 102 plus accrued interest, and retired. (Bond premium is to be amortized only at the end of each year.)

Dec. 31

Adjusting entries are made to record the accrued interest on the bonds, and the proper amount of premium amortized.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries for the transactions above.

interest payment dates are april 1 and october 1 and the company uses the straight l 577943

(Entries for Life Cycle of Bonds) On April 1, 2012, Seminole Company sold 15,000 of its 11%, 15 year, $1,000 face value bonds at 97. Interest payment dates are April 1 and October 1, and the company uses the straight line method of bond discount amortization. On March 1, 2013, Seminole took advantage of favorable prices of its stock to extinguish 6,000 of the bonds by issuing 200,000 shares of its $10 par value common stock. At this time, the accrued interest was paid in cash. The company’s stock was selling for $31 per share on March 1, 2013.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries needed on the books of Seminole Company to record the following.

(a) April 1, 2012: issuance of the bonds.

(b) October 1, 2012: payment of semiannual interest.

(c) December 31, 2012: accrual of interest expense.

(d) March 1, 2013: extinguishment of 6,000 bonds.

prepare any necessary adjusting entries relative to depreciation and amortization on 577944

(Entries for Zero Interest Bearing Note) On December 31, 2012, Faital Company acquired a computer from Plato Corporation by issuing a $600,000 zero interest bearing note, payable in full on December 31, 2016. Faital Company’s credit rating permits it to borrow funds from its several lines of credit at 10%. The computer is expected to have a 5 year life and a $70,000 salvage value.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry for the purchase on December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare any necessary adjusting entries relative to depreciation (use straight line) and amortization (use effective interest method) on December 31, 2013.

(c) Prepare any necessary adjusting entries relative to depreciation and amortization on December 31, 2014.

these long term bonds have the following sinking fund requirements and maturities fo 577946

(Comprehensive Problem: Issuance, Classification, Reporting) Presented below are four independent situations.

(a) On March 1, 2013, Wilke Co. issued at 103 plus accrued interest $4,000,000, 9% bonds. The bonds are dated January 1, 2013, and pay interest semiannually on July 1 and January 1. In addition, Wilke Co. incurred $27,000 of bond issuance costs. Compute the net amount of cash received by Wilke Co. as a result of the issuance of these bonds.

(b) On January 1, 2012, Langley Co. issued 9% bonds with a face value of $700,000 for $656,992 to yield 10%. The bonds are dated January 1, 2012, and pay interest annually. What amount is reported for interest expense in 2012 related to these bonds, assuming that Langley used the effective interest method for amortizing bond premium and discount?

(c) Tweedie Building Co. has a number of long term bonds outstanding at December 31, 2012. These long term bonds have the following sinking fund requirements and maturities for the next 6 years.

Sinking Fund

Maturities

2013

$300,000

$100,000

2014

100,000

250,000

2015

100,000

100,000

2016

200,000

2017

200,000

150,000

2018

200,000

100,000

Indicate how this information should be reported in the financial statements at December 31, 2012.

(d) In the long term debt structure of Beckford Inc., the following three bonds were reported: mortgage bonds payable $10,000,000; collateral trust bonds $5,000,000; bonds maturing in installments, secured by plant equipment $4,000,000. Determine the total amount, if any, of debenture bonds outstanding.

using the data on the prior page for illustrative purposes write a short memo 1 ndas 577947

(Effective Interest Method) Samantha Cordelia, an intermediate accounting student, is having difficulty amortizing bond premiums and discounts using the effective interest method. Furthermore, she cannot understand why GAAP requires that this method be used instead of the straight line method. She has come to you with the following problem, looking for help. On June 30, 2012, Hobart Company issued $2,000,000 face value of 11%, 20 year bonds at $2,171,600, a yield of 10%. Hobart Company uses the effective interest method to amortize bond premiums or discounts. The bonds pay semiannual interest on June 30 and December 31. Prepare an amortization schedule for four periods.

Instructions

Using the data on the prior page for illustrative purposes, write a short memo (1–1.5 pages double spaced) to Samantha, explaining what the effective interest method is, why it is preferable, and how it is computed.

prepare the journal entry that halvor and frontenac national bank would make for eac 577949

(Restructure of Note under Different Circumstances) Halvor Corporation is having financial difficulty and therefore has asked Frontenac National Bank to restructure its $5 million note outstanding. The present note has 3 years remaining and pays a current rate of interest of 10%. The present market rate for a loan of this nature is 12%. The note was issued at its face value.

Instructions

Presented below are four independent situations. Prepare the journal entry that Halvor and Frontenac National Bank would make for each of these restructurings.

(a) Frontenac National Bank agrees to take an equity interest in Halvor by accepting common stock valued at $3,700,000 in exchange for relinquishing its claim on this note. The common stock has a par value of $1,700,000.

(b) Frontenac National Bank agrees to accept land in exchange for relinquishing its claim on this note. The land has a book value of $3,250,000 and a fair value of $4,000,000.

(c) Frontenac National Bank agrees to modify the terms of the note, indicating that Halvor does not have to pay any interest on the note over the 3 year period.

(d) Frontenac National Bank agrees to reduce the principal balance due to $4,166,667 and require interest only in the second and third year at a rate of 10%.

what items related to the bond issue would be included in sealy rsquo s 2013 income 577950

(Bond Theory: Price, Presentation, and Retirement) On March 1, 2013, Sealy Company sold its 5 year, $1,000 face value, 9% bonds dated March 1, 2013, at an effective annual interest rate (yield) of 11%. Interest is payable semiannually, and the first interest payment date is September 1, 2013. Sealy uses the effective interest method of amortization. Bond issue costs were incurred in preparing and selling the bond issue. The bonds can be called by Sealy at 101 at any time on or after March 1, 2014.

Instructions

(a) (1) How would the selling price of the bond be determined?

(2) Specify how all items related to the bonds would be presented in a balance sheet prepared immediately after the bond issue was sold.

(b) What items related to the bond issue would be included in Sealy’s 2013 income statement, and how would each be determined?

(c) Would the amount of bond discount amortization using the effective interest method of amortization be lower in the second or third year of the life of the bond issue? Why?

(d) Assuming that the bonds were called in and retired on March 1, 2014, how should Sealy report the retirement of the bonds on the 2014 income statement?

which of the methods above is generally accepted and how should the appropriate amou 577951

(Bond Theory: Amortization and Gain or Loss Recognition)

Part I. The appropriate method of amortizing a premium or discount on issuance of bonds is the effective interest method.

Instructions

(a) What is the effective interest method of amortization and how is it different from and similar to the straight line method of amortization?

(b) How is amortization computed using the effective interest method, and why and how do amounts obtained using the effective interest method differ from amounts computed under the straight line method?

Part II. Gains or losses from the early extinguishment of debt that is refunded can theoretically be accounted for in three ways:

1. Amortized over remaining life of old debt.

2. Amortized over the life of the new debt issue.

3. Recognized in the period of extinguishment.

Instructions

(a) Develop supporting arguments for each of the three theoretical methods of accounting for gains and losses from the early extinguishment of debt.

(b) Which of the methods above is generally accepted and how should the appropriate amount of gain or loss be shown in a company’s financial statements?

what are project financing arrangements using special purpose entities 577952

(Off Balance Sheet Financing) Matt Ryan Corporation is interested in building its own soda can manufacturing plant adjacent to its existing plant in Partyville, Kansas. The objective would be to ensure a steady supply of cans at a stable price and to minimize transportation costs. However, the company has been experiencing some financial problems and has been reluctant to borrow any additional cash to fund the project. The company is not concerned with the cash flow problems of making payments, but rather with the impact of adding additional long term debt to its balance sheet. The president of Ryan, Andy Newlin, approached the president of the Aluminum Can Company (ACC), their major supplier, to see if some agreement could be reached. ACC was anxious to work out an arrangement, since it seemed inevitable that Ryan would begin their own can production. The Aluminum Can Company could not afford to lose the account. After some discussion a two part plan was worked out. First, ACC was to construct the plant on Ryan’s land adjacent to the existing plant. Second, Ryan would sign a 20 year purchase agreement. Under the purchase agreement, Ryan would express its intention to buy all of its cans from ACC, paying a unit price which at normal capacity would cover labor and material, an operating management fee, and the debt service requirements on the plant. The expected unit price, if transportation costs are taken into consideration, is lower than current market. If Ryan did not take enough production in any one year and if the excess cans could not be sold at a high enough prices on the open market, Ryan agrees to make up any cash shortfall so that ACC could make the payments on its debt. The bank will be willing to make a 20 year loan for the plant, taking the plant and the purchase agreement as collateral. At the end of 20 years, the plant is to become the property of Ryan.

Instructions

(a) What are project financing arrangements using special purpose entities?

(b) What are take or pay contracts?

(c) Should Ryan record the plant as an asset together with the related obligation?

(d) If not, should Ryan record an asset relating to the future commitment?

(e) What is meant by off balance sheet financing?

what are the ethical issues in this case 577953

(Bond Issue) Donald Lennon is the president, founder, and majority owner of Wichita Medical Corporation, an emerging medical technology products company. Wichita is in dire need of additional capital to keep operating and to bring several promising products to final development, testing, and production. Donald, as owner of 51% of the outstanding stock, manages the company’s operations. He places heavy emphasis on research and development and long term growth. The other principal stockholder is Nina Friendly who, as a nonemployee investor, owns 40% of the stock. Nina would like to deemphasize the R & D functions and emphasize the marketing function to maximize short run sales and profits from existing products. She believes this strategy would raise the market price of Wichita’s stock. All of Donald’s personal capital and borrowing power is tied up in his 51% stock ownership. He knows that any offering of additional shares of stock will dilute his controlling interest because he won’t be able to participate in such an issuance. But, Nina has money and would likely buy enough shares to gain control of Wichita. She then would dictate the company’s future direction, even if it meant replacing Donald as president and CEO. The company already has considerable debt. Raising additional debt will be costly, will adversely affect Wichita’s credit rating, and will increase the company’s reported losses due to the growth in interest expense. Nina and the other minority stockholders express opposition to the assumption of additional debt, fearing the company will be pushed to the brink of bankruptcy. Wanting to maintain his control and to preserve the direction of “his” company, Donald is doing everything to avoid a stock issuance and is contemplating a large issuance of bonds, even if it means the bonds are issued with a high effective interest rate.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) What would you do if you were Donald?

assuming that total dividends declared in 2012 were 64 000 and that the preferred st 577957

McNabb Corp. had $100,000 of 7%, $20 par value preferred stock and 12,000 shares of $25 par value common stock outstanding throughout 2012.
(a) Assuming that total dividends declared in 2012 were $64,000, and that the preferred stock is not cumulative but is fully participating, common stockholders should receive 2012 dividends of what amount?
(b) Assuming that total dividends declared in 2012 were $64,000, and that the preferred stock is fully participating and cumulative with preferred dividends in arrears for 2011, preferred stockholders should receive 2012 dividends totaling what amount?
(c) Assuming that total dividends declared in 2012 were $30,000, that the preferred stock is cumulative, nonparticipating, and was issued on January 1, 2011, and that $5,000 of preferred dividends were declared and paid in 2011, the common stockholders should receive 2012 dividends totaling what amount.

the value created by a transformation of resources is the difference between the tot 577965

A

Bach’s Music Store
Profit Earned
For December 2004

Resources created from selling goods and services:

Musical instruments

$8,000

Sheet music

1,400

Repair of instruments

2,200

Total resources created

$11,600

Resources consumed:

Cost of instruments sold

4,300

Cost of sheet music sold

870

Rent

650

Supplies used

250

Advertising

300

Utilities

200

Miscellaneous

180

Total resources consumed

6,750

Profit

$4,850

B. The value created by a transformation of resources is the difference between the total price of the goods and services sold and the total cost of the resources consumed in producing these goods and services. This difference is profit for the seller.

prepare the journal entries that should be made in 2012 and 2013 to record the trans 577861

(Premium Entries and Financial Statement Presentation) Sycamore Candy Company offers a CD single as a premium for every five candy bar wrappers presented by customers together with $2.50. The candy bars are sold by the company to distributors for 30 cents each. The purchase price of each CD to the company is $2.25; in addition, it costs 50 cents to mail each CD. The results of the premium plan for the years 2012 and 2013 are as follows. (All purchases and sales are for cash.)

2012

2013

CDs purchased

250,000

330,000

Candy bars sold

2,895,400

2,743,600

Wrappers redeemed

1,200,000

1,500,000

2012 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2013

290,000

2013 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2014

350,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries that should be made in 2012 and 2013 to record the transactions related to the premium plan of the Sycamore Candy Company.

(b) Indicate the account names, amounts, and classifications of the items related to the premium plan that would appear on the balance sheet and the income statement at the end of 2012 and 2013.

prepare any disclosures and journal entries required by the airline in preparation o 577862

(Loss Contingencies: Entries and Essay) On November 24, 2012, 26 passengers on Windsor Airlines Flight No. 901 were injured upon landing when the plane skidded off the runway. Personal injury suits for damages totaling $9,000,000 were filed on January 11, 2013, against the airline by 18 injured passengers. The airline carries no insurance. Legal counsel has studied each suit and advised Windsor that it can reasonably expect to pay 60% of the damages claimed. The financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, were issued February 27, 2013.

Instructions

(a) Prepare any disclosures and journal entries required by the airline in preparation of the December 31, 2012, financial statements.

(b) Ignoring the Nov. 24, 2012, accident, what liability due to the risk of loss from lack of insurance coverage should Windsor Airlines record or disclose? During the past decade, the company has experienced at least one accident per year and incurred average damages of $3,200,000. Discuss fully.

prepare the journal entries that should be recorded as of december 31 2012 to recogn 577863

(Loss Contingencies: Entries and Essays) Polska Corporation, in preparation of its December 31, 2012, financial statements, is attempting to determine the proper accounting treatment for each of the following situations.

1. As a result of uninsured accidents during the year, personal injury suits for $350,000 and $60,000 have been filed against the company. It is the judgment of Polska’s legal counsel that an unfavorable outcome is unlikely in the $60,000 case but that an unfavorable verdict approximating $250,000 will probably result in the $350,000 case.

2. Polska Corporation owns a subsidiary in a foreign country that has a book value of $5,725,000 and an estimated fair value of $9,500,000. The foreign government has communicated to Polska its intention to expropriate the assets and business of all foreign investors. On the basis of settlements other firms have received from this same country, Polska expects to receive 40% of the fair value of its properties as final settlement.

3. Polska’s chemical product division consisting of five plants is uninsurable because of the special risk of injury to employees and losses due to fire and explosion. The year 2012 is considered one of the safest (luckiest) in the division’s history because no loss due to injury or casualty was suffered. Having suffered an average of three casualties a year during the rest of the past decade (ranging from $60,000 to $700,000), management is certain that next year the company will probably not be so fortunate.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries that should be recorded as of December 31, 2012, to recognize each of the situations above.

(b) Indicate what should be reported relative to each situation in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Explain why.

in response to your attorney rsquo s letter morgan sondgeroth esq has informed you t 577865

(Liability Errors) You are the independent auditor engaged to audit Millay Corporation’s December 31, 2012, financial statements. Millay manufactures household appliances. During the course of your audit, you discovered the following contingent liabilities.

1. Millay began production of a new dishwasher in June 2012 and, by December 31, 2012, sold 120,000 to various retailers for $500 each. Each dishwasher is under a one year warranty. The company estimates that its warranty expense per dishwasher will amount to $25. At year end, the company had already paid out $1,000,000 in warranty expenses. Millay’s income statement shows warranty expenses of $1,000,000 for 2012. Millay accounts for warranty costs on the accrual basis.

2. In response to your attorney’s letter, Morgan Sondgeroth, Esq., has informed you that Millay has been cited for dumping toxic waste into the Kishwaukee River. Clean up costs and fines amount to $2,750,000. Although the case is still being contested, Sondgeroth is certain that Millay will most probably have to pay the fine and clean up costs. No disclosure of this situation was found in the financial statements.

3. Millay is the defendant in a patent infringement lawsuit by Megan Drabek over Millay’s use of a hydraulic compressor in several of its products. Sondgeroth claims that, if the suit goes against Millay, the loss may be as much as $5,000,000; however, Sondgeroth believes the loss of this suit to be only reasonably possible. Again, no mention of this suit is made in the financial statements. As presented, these contingencies are not reported in accordance with GAAP, which may create problems in issuing a favorable audit report. You feel the need to note these problems in the work papers.

Instructions

Heading each page with the name of the company, balance sheet date, and a brief description of the problem, writes a brief narrative for each of the above issues in the form of a memorandum to be incorporated in the audit work papers. Explain what led to the discovery of each problem, what the problem really is, and what you advised your client to do (along with any appropriate journal entries) in order to bring these contingencies in accordance with GAAP.

compute the amount that schmitt company should report as a liability in its december 577866

(Warranty and Coupon Computation) Schmitt Company must make computations and adjusting entries for the following independent situations at December 31, 2013.

1. Its line of amplifiers carries a 3 year warranty against defects. On the basis of past experience the estimated warranty costs related to dollar sales are: first year after sale—2% of sales; second year after sale—3% of sales; and third year after sale—5% of sales. Sales and actual warranty expenditures for the first 3 years of business were:

Sales

Warranty Expenditures

2011

$ 800,000

$ 6,500

2012

1,100,000

17,200

2013

1,200,000

62,000

Instructions

Compute the amount that Schmitt Company should report as a liability in its December 31, 2013, balance sheet. Assume that all sales are made evenly throughout each year with warranty expenses also evenly spaced relative to the rates above.

2. With some of its products, Schmitt Company includes coupons that are redeemable in merchandise. The coupons have no expiration date and, in the company’s experience, 40% of them are redeemed. The liability for unredeemed coupons at December 31, 2012, was $9,000. During 2013, coupons worth $30,000 were issued, and merchandise worth $8,000 was distributed in exchange for coupons redeemed.

Instructions

Compute the amount of the liability that should appear on the December 31, 2013, balance sheet.

assume that dumars corporation on february 15 2013 entered into a financing agreemen 577868

(Refinancing of Short Term Debt) Dumars Corporation reports in the current liability section of its balance sheet at December 31, 2012 (its year end), short term obligations of $15,000,000, which includes the current portion of 12% long term debt in the amount of $10,000,000 (matures in March 2013). Management has stated its intention to refinance the 12% debt whereby no portion of it will mature during 2013. The date of issuance of the financial statements is March 25, 2013.

Instructions

(a) Is management’s intent enough to support long term classification of the obligation in this situation?

(b) Assume that Dumars Corporation issues $13,000,000 of 10 year debentures to the public in January 2013 and that management intends to use the proceeds to liquidate the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013. Furthermore, assume that the debt maturing in March 2013 is paid from these proceeds prior to the issuance of the financial statements. Will this have any impact on the balance sheet classification at December 31, 2012? Explain your answer.

(c) Assume that Dumars Corporation issues common stock to the public in January and that management intends to entirely liquidate the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013 with the proceeds of this equity securities issue. In light of these events, should the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013 be included in current liabilities at December 31, 2012?

(d) Assume that Dumars Corporation, on February 15, 2013, entered into a financing agreement with a commercial bank that permits Dumars Corporation to borrow at any time through 2014 up to $15,000,000 at the bank’s prime rate of interest. Borrowings under the financing agreement mature three years after the date of the loan. The agreement is not cancelable except for violation of a provision with which compliance is objectively determinable. No violation of any provision exists at the date of issuance of the financial statements. Assume further that the current portion of long term debt does not mature until August 2013. In addition, management intends to refinance the $10,000,000 obligation under the terms of the financial agreement with the bank, which is expected to be financially capable of honoring the agreement.

(1) Given these facts, should the $10,000,000 be classified as current on the balance sheet at December 31, 2012?

(2) Is disclosure of the refinancing method required?

what would your answer be if instead of a refinancing at the date of issuance of the 577869

(Refinancing of Short Term Debt) Andretti Inc. issued $10,000,000 of short term commercial paper during the year 2012 to finance construction of a plant. At December 31, 2012, the corporation’s yearend, Andretti intends to refinance the commercial paper by issuing long term debt. However, because the corporation temporarily has excess cash, in January 2013 it liquidates $3,000,000 of the commercial paper as the paper matures. In February 2013, Andretti completes an $18,000,000 long term debt offering. Later during the month of February, it issues its December 31, 2012, financial statements. The proceeds of the long term debt offering are to be used to replenish $3,000,000 in working capital, to pay $7,000,000 of commercial paper as it matures in March 2013, and to pay $8,000,000 of construction costs expected to be incurred later that year to complete the plant.

Instructions

(a) How should the $10,000,000 of commercial paper be classified on the December 31, 2012, January 31, 2013, and February 28, 2013, balance sheets? Give support for your answer and also consider the cash element.

(b) What would your answer be if, instead of a refinancing at the date of issuance of the financial statements, a financing agreement existed at that date?

the company fully anticipates that suits will be filed and claims asserted for injur 577870

(Loss Contingencies) On February 1, 2013, one of the huge storage tanks of Viking Manufacturing Company exploded. Windows in houses and other buildings within a one mile radius of the explosion were severely damaged, and a number of people were injured. As of February 15, 2013 (when the December 31, 2012, financial statements were completed and sent to the publisher for printing and public distribution), no suits had been filed or claims asserted against the company as a consequence of the explosion. The company fully anticipates that suits will be filed and claims asserted for injuries and damages. Because the casualty was uninsured and the company considered at fault, Viking Manufacturing will have to cover the damages from its own resources.

Instructions

Discuss fully the accounting treatment and disclosures that should be accorded the casualty and related contingent losses in the financial statements dated December 31, 2012.

if the amount of the loss is uncertain how would the loss contingency be reported in 577871

(Loss Contingency) Presented below is a note disclosure for Matsui Corporation. Litigation and Environmental: The Company has been notified, or is a named or a potentially responsible party in a number of governmental (federal, state and local) and private actions associated with environmental matters, such as those relating to hazardous wastes, including certain sites which are on the United States EPA National Priorities List (“Superfund”). These actions seek clean up costs, penalties and/or damages for personal injury or to property or natural resources. In 2012, the Company recorded a pre tax charge of $56,229,000, included in the “Other expense (income)—net” caption of the Company’s consolidated income statements, as an additional provision for environmental matters. These expenditures are expected to take place over the next several years and are indicative of the Company’s commitment to improve and maintain the environment in which it operates. At December 31, 2012, environmental accruals amounted to $69,931,000; of which $61,535,000 are considered noncurrent and are included in the “Deferred credits and other liabilities” caption of the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. While it is impossible at this time to determine with certainty the ultimate outcome of environmental matters, it is management’s opinion, based in part on the advice of independent counsel (after taking into account accruals and insurance coverage applicable to such actions) that when the costs are finally determined they will not have a material adverse effect on the financial position of the Company.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What conditions must exist before a loss contingency can be recorded in the accounts?

(b) Suppose that Matsui Corporation could not reasonably estimate the amount of the loss, although it could establish with a high degree of probability the minimum and maximum loss possible. How should this information be reported in the financial statements?

(c) If the amount of the loss is uncertain, how would the loss contingency be reported in the financial statements?

how should constantine report the suit in its 2012 financial statements discuss the 577872

(Warranties and Loss Contingencies) The following two independent situations involve loss contingencies.

Part 1

Benson Company sells two products, Grey and Yellow. Each carries a one year warranty.

1. Product Grey—Product warranty costs, based on past experience, will normally be 1% of sales.

2. Product Yellow—Product warranty costs cannot be reasonably estimated because this is a new product line. However, the chief engineer believes that product warranty costs are likely to be incurred.

Instructions

How should Benson report the estimated product warranty costs for each of the two types of merchandise above? Discuss the rationale for your answer. Do not discuss disclosures that should be made in Benson’s financial statements or notes.

Part 2

Constantine Company is being sued for $4,000,000 for an injury caused to a child as a result of alleged negligence while the child was visiting the Constantine Company plant in March 2012. The suit was filed in July 2012. Constantine’s lawyer states that it is probable that Constantine will lose the suit and be found liable for a judgment costing anywhere from $400,000 to $2,000,000. However, the lawyer states that the most probable judgment is $1,000,000.

Instructions

How should Constantine report the suit in its 2012 financial statements? Discuss the rationale for your answer. Include in your answer disclosures, if any that should be made in Constantine’s financial statements or notes.

presented below are two different situations related to mckee corporation debt oblig 577875

Presented below are two different situations related to Mckee Corporation debt obligations. Mckee’s next financial reporting date is December 31, 2012. The financial statements are authorized for issuance on March 1, 2013.

1. Mckee has a long term obligation of $400,000, which is maturing over 4 years in the amount of $100,000 per year. The obligation is dated November 1, 2012, and the first maturity date is November 1, 2013.

2. Mckee has a short term obligation due February 15, 2013. Its lender agrees to extend the maturity date of this loan to February 15, 2015. The agreement for extension is signed on January 15, 2013.

Instructions

Indicate how each of these debt obligations is reported on Mckee’s statement of financial position on December 31, 2012.

the most likely outcome of this dispute is that bolivia will lose and have to pay 40 577876

The following situations relate to Bolivia Company.

1. Bolivia provides a warranty with all its products it sells. It estimates that it will sell 1,000,000 units of its product for the year ended December 31, 2012, and that its total revenue for the product will be $100,000,000. It also estimates that 60% of the product will have no defects, 30% will have major defects, and 10% will have minor defects. The cost of a minor defect is estimated to be $5 for each product sold, and the cost for a major defect cost is $15. The company also estimates that the minimum amount of warranty expense will be $2,000,000 and the maximum will be $10,000,000.

2. Bolivia is involved in a tax dispute with the tax authorities. The most likely outcome of this dispute is that Bolivia will lose and have to pay $400,000. The minimum it will lose is $20,000 and the maximum is $2,500,000.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entry to record provisions, if any, for Bolivia at December 31, 2012.

assume that kobayashi corporation issues ordinary shares to the public in january an 577877

Kobayashi Corporation reports in the current liability section of its statement of financial position at December 31, 2012 (its year end), short term obligations of $15,000,000, which includes the current portion of 12% long term debt in the amount of $10,000,000 (matures in March 2013). Management has stated its intention to refinance the 12% debt whereby no portion of it will mature during 2013. The date of issuance of the financial statements is March 25, 2013.

Instructions

(a) Is management’s intent enough to support long term classification of the obligation in this situation?

(b) Assume that Kobayashi Corporation issues $13,000,000 of 10 year debentures to the public in January 2013 and that management intends to use the proceeds to liquidate the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013. Furthermore, assume that the debt maturing in March 2013 is paid from these proceeds prior to the authorization to issue the financial statements. Will this have any impact on the statement of financial position classification at December 31, 2012? Explain your answer.

(c) Assume that Kobayashi Corporation issues ordinary shares to the public in January and that management intends to entirely liquidate the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013 with the proceeds of this equity securities issue. In light of these events, should the $10,000,000 debt maturing in March 2013 be included in current liabilities at December 31, 2012?

if the classification of some of the items is doubtful explain why in each case 577913

(Classification of Liabilities) Presented below are various account balances.

(a) Bank loans payable of a winery, due March 10, 2016. (The product requires aging for 5 years before sale.)

(b) Unamortized premium on bonds payable, of which $3,000 will be amortized during the next year.

(c) Serial bonds payable, $1,000,000, of which $250,000 are due each July 31.

(d) Amounts withheld from employees’ wages for income taxes.

(e) Notes payable due January 15, 2015.

(f) Credit balances in customers’ accounts arising from returns and allowances after collection in full of account.

(g) Bonds payable of $2,000,000 maturing June 30, 2014.

(h) Overdraft of $1,000 in a bank account. (No other balances are carried at this bank.)

(i) Deposits made by customers who have ordered goods.

Instructions

Indicate whether each of the items above should be classified on December 31, 2013, as a current liability, a long term liability, or under some other classification. Consider each one independently from all others; that is, do not assume that all of them relate to one particular business. If the classification of some of the items is doubtful, explain why in each case.

chinook corporation incurred the following costs in connection with the issuance of 577918

(Determine Proper Amounts in Account Balances) Presented below are three independent situations.

(a) Chinook Corporation incurred the following costs in connection with the issuance of bonds:

(1) Printing and engraving costs, $15,000; (2) legal fees, $49,000, and (3) commissions paid to underwriter, $60,000. What amount should be reported as Unamortized Bond Issue Costs and where should this amount be reported on the balance sheet?

(b) McEntire Co. sold $2,500,000 of 10%, 10 year bonds at 104 on January 1, 2012. The bonds were dated January 1, 2012 and pay interest on July 1 and January 1. If McEntire uses the straight line method to amortize bond premium or discount, determine the amount of interest expense to be reported on July 1, 2012, and December 31, 2012.

(c) Cheriel Inc. issued $600,000 of 9%, 10 year bonds on June 30, 2012, for $562,500. This price provided a yield of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable semiannually on December 31 and June 30. If Cheriel uses the effective interest method, determine the amount of interest expense to record if financial statements are issued on October 31, 2012.

will the total bond interest expense for the life of the bond be greater than the sa 577919

(Entries and Questions for Bond Transactions) On June 30, 2012, Mackes Company issued $5,000,000 face value of 13%, 20 year bonds at $5,376,150, a yield of 12%. Mackes uses the effective interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay semiannual interest on June 30 and December 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.

(1) The issuance of the bonds on June 30, 2012.

(2) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2012.

(3) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on June 30, 2013.

(4) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2013.

(b) Show the proper balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable on the December 31, 2013, balance sheet.

(c) Provide the answers to the following questions.

(1) What amount of interest expense is reported for 2013?

(2) Will the bond interest expense reported in 2013 be the same as, greater than, or less than the amount that would be reported if the straight line method of amortization were used?

(3) Determine the total cost of borrowing over the life of the bond.

(4) Will the total bond interest expense for the life of the bond be greater than, the same as, or less than the total interest expense if the straight line method of amortization were used?

which provides the bondholders with a 10 yield the bonds are dated january 1 2012 an 577920

(Entries for Bond Transactions) On January 1, 2012, Osborn Company sold 12% bonds having a maturity value of $800,000 for $860,651.79, which provides the bondholders with a 10% yield. The bonds are dated January 1, 2012, and mature January 1, 2017, with interest payable December 31 of each year. Osborn Company allocates interest and unamortized discount or premium on the effective interest basis.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry at the date of the bond issuance.

(b) Prepare a schedule of interest expense and bond amortization for 2012–2014.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record the interest payment and the amortization for 2012.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the interest payment and the amortization for 2014.

prepare a schedule that identifies the following items for each bond 577921

(Information Related to Various Bond Issues) Pawnee Inc. has issued three types of debt on January 1, 2012, the start of the company’s fiscal year.

(a) $10 million, 10 year, 13% unsecured bonds, interest payable quarterly. Bonds were priced to yield 12%.

(b) $25 million par of 10 year, zero coupon bonds at a price to yield 12% per year.

(c) $15 million, 10 year, 10% mortgage bonds, interest payable annually to yield 12%.

Instructions

Prepare a schedule that identifies the following items for each bond: (1) maturity value, (2) number of interest periods over life of bond, (3) stated rate per each interest period, (4) effective interest rate per each interest period, (5) payment amount per period, and (6) present value of bonds at date of issue.

on january 2 2007 prebish corporation issued 1 500 000 of 10 bonds at 97 due decembe 577922

(Entry for Retirement of Bond; Bond Issue Costs) On January 2, 2007, Prebish Corporation issued $1,500,000 of 10% bonds at 97 due December 31, 2016. Legal and other costs of $24,000 were incurred in connection with the issue. Interest on the bonds is payable annually each December 31. The $24,000 issue costs are being deferred and amortized on a straight line basis over the 10 year term of the bonds. The discount on the bonds is also being amortized on a straight line basis over the 10 years. (Straight line is not materially different in effect from the preferable “interest method”.) The bonds are callable at 101 (i.e., at 101% of face amount), and on January 2, 2012, Prebish called $1,000,000 face amount of the bonds and retired them.

Instructions

Ignoring income taxes, compute the amount of loss, if any, to be recognized by Prebish as a result of retiring the $1,000,000 of bonds in 2012 and prepare the journal entry to record the retirement.

prepare journal entries to record the retirement of the old issue and the sale of th 577924

(Entries for Retirement and Issuance of Bonds) On June 30, 2004, Mendenhal Company issued 12% bonds with a par value of $600,000 due in 20 years. They were issued at 98 and were callable at 104 at any date after June 30, 2012. Because of lower interest rates and a significant change in the company’s credit rating, it was decided to call the entire issue on June 30, 2013, and to issue new bonds. New 10% bonds were sold in the amount of $800,000 at 102; they mature in 20 years. Mendenhal Company uses straight line amortization. Interest payment dates are December 31 and June 30.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the retirement of the old issue and the sale of the new issue on June 30, 2013.

(b) Prepare the entry required on December 31, 2013, to record the payment of the first 6 months’ interest and the amortization of premium on the bonds.

what account should be charged for the 325 000 and how should it be shown in the fin 577805

Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2010, the company expends $325,000 on a research project, but by the end of 2010, it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.

(a) What account should be charged for the $325,000, and how should it be shown in the financial statements?

(b) The project is completed in 2011, and a successful patent is obtained. The R&D costs to complete the project are $130,000 ($36,000 of these costs were incurred after achieving economic viability). The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number 472 1001 84 in 2011 total $24,000. The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form.

(c) In 2012, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $47,200, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2019. What is the proper way to account for this cost?

(d) Additional engineering and consulting costs incurred in 2012 required to advance the design of a new version of the product to the manufacturing stage total $60,000. These costs enhance the design of the product considerably, but it is highly uncertain if there will be a market for the new version of the product. Discuss the proper accounting treatment for this cost.

compute the total net liability to be reported on the december 31 balance sheet for 577836

(Accounts and Notes Payable) The following are selected 2012 transactions of Darby Corporation.

Sept. 1

Purchased inventory from Orion Company on account for $50,000. Darby records purchases gross and

uses a periodic inventory system.

Oct. 1

Issued a $50,000, 12 month, 8% note to Orion in payment of account.

Oct. 1

Borrowed $75,000 from the Shore Bank by signing a 12 month, zero interest bearing $81,000 note.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the selected transactions above.

(b) Prepare adjusting entries at December 31.

(c) Compute the total net liability to be reported on the December 31 balance sheet for:

(1) The interest bearing note.

(2) The zero interest bearing note.

prepare a partial balance sheet for santana at december 31 2012 showing how its 7 00 577838

(Refinancing of Short Term Debt) On December 31, 2012, Santana Company has $7,000,000 of short term debt in the form of notes payable to Golden State Bank due in 2013. On January 28, 2013, Santana enters into a refinancing agreement with Golden that will permit it to borrow up to 60% of the gross amount of its accounts receivable. Receivables are expected to range between a low of $5,000,000 in May to a high of $8,000,000 in October during the year 2013. The interest cost of the maturing short term debt is 15%, and the new agreement calls for a fluctuating interest rate at 1% above the prime rate on notes due in 2017. Santana’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet is issued on February 15, 2013.

Instructions

Prepare a partial balance sheet for Santana at December 31, 2012, showing how its $7,000,000 of short term debt should be presented, including footnote disclosure.

compute the amounts of any liability for compensated absences that should be reporte 577840

(Compensated Absences) Assume the facts in E13 5, except that Matthewson Company has chosen not to accrue paid sick leave until used, and has chosen to accrue vacation time at expected future rates of pay without discounting. The company used the following projected rates to accrue vacation time.

Year in Which Vacation
Time Was Earned

Projected Future Pay Rates
Used to Accrue Vacation Pay

2012

$12.90

2013

13.70

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record transactions related to compensate absences during 2012 and 2013.

(b) Compute the amounts of any liability for compensated absences that should be reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2012 and 2013.

prepare the necessary journal entries if the wages and salaries paid and the employe 577842

(Payroll Tax Entries) The payroll of Delaney Company for September 2012 is as follows. Total payroll was $480,000, of which $140,000 is exempt from Social Security tax because it represented amounts paid in excess of $106,800 to certain employees. The amount paid to employees in excess of $7,000 was $410,000. Income taxes in the amount of $80,000 were withheld, as was $9,000 in union dues. The state unemployment tax is 3.5%, but Delaney Company is allowed a credit of 2.3% by the state for its unemployment experience. Also, assume that the current FICA tax is 7.65% on an employee’s wages to $106,800 and 1.45% in excess of $106,800. No employee for Delaney makes more than $125,000. The federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8% after state credit.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries if the wages and salaries paid and the employer payroll taxes are recorded separately.

prepare a schedule showing the employer rsquo s total cost of wages for november by 577843

(Payroll Tax Entries) Allison Hardware Company’s payroll for November 2012 is summarized below.

Amount Subject to Payroll Taxes

Unemployment Tax

Payroll

Wages Due

FICA

Federal

State

Factory

$140,000

$140,000

$40,000

$40,000

Sales

32,000

32,000

4,000

4,000

Administrative

36,000

36,000

Total

$208,000

$208,000

$44,000

$44,000

At this point in the year, some employees have already received wages in excess of those to which payroll taxes apply. Assume that the state unemployment tax is 2.5%. The FICA rate is 7.65% on an employee’s wages to $106,800 and 1.45% in excess of $106,800. Of the $208,000 wages subject to FICA tax, $20,000 of the sales wages is in excess of $106,800. Federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8% after credits. Income tax withheld amounts to $16,000 for factory, $7,000 for sales, and $6,000 for administrative.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule showing the employer’s total cost of wages for November by function.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the factory, sales, and administrative payrolls including the employer’s payroll taxes.

prepare 2012 entries for selzer using the expense warranty approach assume that selz 577845

(Warranties) Selzer Equipment Company sold 500 Rollomatics during 2012 at $6,000 each. During 2012, Selzer spent $30,000 servicing the 2 year warranties that accompany the Rollomatic. All applicable transactions are on a cash basis.

Instructions

(a) Prepare 2012 entries for Selzer using the expense warranty approach. Assume that Selzer estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years.

(b) Prepare 2012 entries for Selzer assuming that the warranties are not an integral part of the sale. Assume that of the sales total, $160,000 relates to sales of warranty contracts. Selzer estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years. Estimate revenues earned on the basis of costs incurred and estimated costs.

how should holmgren chemical report this information in its financial statements at 577847

(Contingencies) Presented below are three independent situations. Answer the question at the end of each situation.

1. During 2012, Maverick Inc. became involved in a tax dispute with the IRS. Maverick’s attorneys have indicated that they believe it is probable that Maverick will lose this dispute. They also believe that Maverick will have to pay the IRS between $800,000 and $1,400,000. After the 2012 financial statements were issued, the case was settled with the IRS for $1,200,000. What amount, if any, should be reported as a liability for this contingency as of December 31, 2012?

2. On October 1, 2012, Holmgren Chemical was identified as a potentially responsible party by the Environmental Protection Agency. Holmgren’s management along with its counsel have concluded that it is probable that Holmgren will be responsible for damages, and a reasonable estimate of these damages is $6,000,000. Holmgren’s insurance policy of $9,000,000 has a deductible clause of $500,000. How should Holmgren Chemical report this information in its financial statements at December 31, 2012?

3. Shinobi Inc. had a manufacturing plant in Darfur, which was destroyed in the civil war. It is not certain who will compensate Shinobi for this destruction, but Shinobi has been assured by governmental officials that it will receive a definite amount for this plant. The amount of the compensation will be less than the fair value of the plant but more than its book value. How should the contingency be reported in the financial statements of Shinobi Inc.?

prepare any journal entries required for the depot and the asset retirement obligati 577848

(Asset Retirement Obligation) Bassinger Company purchases an oil tanker depot on January 1, 2012, at a cost of $600,000. Bassinger expects to operate the depot for 10 years, at which time it is legally required to dismantle the depot and remove the underground storage tanks. It is estimated that it will cost $70,000 to dismantle the depot and remove the tanks at the end of the depot’s useful life. Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the depot (considered a plant asset) and the asset retirement obligation for the depot on January 1, 2012. Based on an effective interest rate of 6%, the fair value of the asset retirement obligation on January 1, 2012, is $39,087.

(b) Prepare any journal entries required for the depot and the asset retirement obligation at December 31, 2012. Bassinger uses straight line depreciation; the estimated residual value for the depot is zero.

(c) On December 31, 2021, Bassinger pays a demolition firm to dismantle the depot and remove the tanks at a price of $80,000. Prepare the journal entry for the settlement of the asset retirement obligation.

what amount should wiseman report as a liability for unredeemed coupons at december 577849

(Premiums) Presented below are three independent situations.

1. Marquart Stamp Company records stamp service revenue and provides for the cost of redemptions in the year stamps are sold to licensees. Marquart’s past experience indicates that only 80% of the stamps sold to licensees will be redeemed. Marquart’s liability for stamp redemptions was $13,000,000 at December 31, 2011. Additional information for 2012 is as follows.

Stamp service revenue from stamps
sold to licensees

$9,500,000

Cost of redemptions (stamps
sold prior to 1/1/12)

6,000,000

If all the stamps sold in 2012 were presented for redemption in 2013, the redemption cost would be $5,200,000. What amount should Marquart report as a liability for stamp redemptions at December 31, 2012?

2. In packages of its products, Wiseman Inc. includes coupons that may be presented at retail stores to obtain discounts on other Wiseman products. Retailers are reimbursed for the face amount of coupons redeemed plus 10% of that amount for handling costs. Wiseman honors requests for coupon redemption by retailers up to 3 months after the consumer expiration date. Wiseman estimates that 60% of all coupons issued will ultimately be redeemed. Information relating to coupons issued by Wiseman during 2012 is as follows.

Consumer expiration date

12/31/12

Total face amount of coupons issued

$850,000

Total payments to retailers as of 12/31/12

330,000

What amount should Wiseman report as a liability for unredeemed coupons at December 31, 2012?

3. Newell Company sold 600,000 boxes of pie mix under a new sales promotional program. Each box contains one coupon, which when submitted with $4.00, entitles the customer to a baking pan. Newell pays $6.00 per pan and $0.50 for handling and shipping. Newell estimates that 70% of the coupons will be redeemed, even though only 250,000 coupons had been processed during 2012. What amount should Newell report as a liability for unredeemed coupons at December 31, 2012?

set up a table using the format shown below and analyze the effect of the 18 transac 577850

(Financial Statement Impact of Liability Transactions) Presented below is a list of possible transactions.

1. Purchased inventory for $80,000 on account (assume perpetual system is used).

2. Issued an $80,000 note payable in payment on account (see item 1 above).

3. Recorded accrued interest on the note from item 2 above.

4. Borrowed $100,000 from the bank by signing a 6 month, $112,000, zero interest bearing note.

5. Recognized 4 months’ interest expense on the note from item 4 above.

6. Recorded cash sales of $75,260, which includes 6% sales tax.

7. Recorded wage expense of $35,000. The cash paid was $25,000; the difference was due to various amounts withheld.

8. Recorded employer’s payroll taxes.

9. Accrued accumulated vacation pay.

10. Recorded an asset retirement obligation.

11. Recorded bonuses due to employees.

12. Recorded sales of product and related warranties.

13. Accrued warranty expense .

14. Paid warranty costs that were accrued in item 13 above.

15. Recorded a contingent loss on a lawsuit that the company will probably lose.

16. Paid warranty costs under contracts from item 12.

17. Recognized warranty revenue (see item 12).

18. Recorded estimated liability for premium claims outstanding.

Instructions

Set up a table using the format shown below and analyze the effect of the 18 transactions on the financial statement categories indicated.

compute each of the following ratios for each of the four indicate the manner in whi 577851

(Ratio Computations and Discussion) Costner Company has been operating for several years, and on December 31, 2012, presented the following balance sheet.

COSTNER COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Cash

$ 40,000

Accounts payable

$ 70,000

Receivables

75,000

Mortgage payable

140,000

Inventory

95,000

Common stock ($1 par)

160,000

Plant assets (net)

220,000

Retained earnings

60,000

$430,000

$430,000

The net income for 2012 was $25,000. Assume that total assets are the same in 2011 and 2012.

Instructions

Compute each of the following ratios. For each of the four, indicate the manner in which it is computed and its significance as a tool in the analysis of the financial soundness of the company.

(a) Current ratio. (c) Debt to total assets.

(b) Acid test ratio. (d) Rate of return on assets.

prepare a brief evaluation of the financial condition of vogue company and of the ad 577852

(Ratio Computations and Analysis) Vogue Company’s condensed financial statements provide the following information.

VOGUE COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET

Dec. 31, 2012

Dec. 31, 2011

Cash

$ 52,000

$ 60,000

Accounts receivable (net)

158,000

80,000

Short term investments

80,000

40,000

Inventory

440,000

360,000

Prepaid expenses

3,000

7,000

Total current assets

733,000

547,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

897,000

853,000

Total assets

$1,630,000

$1,400,000

Current liabilities

240,000

160,000

Bonds payable

400,000

400,000

Common stockholders’ equity

990,000

840,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$1,630,000

$1,400,000

INCOME STATEMENT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 2012

Sales

$1,640,000

Cost of goods sold

(800,000)

Gross profi t

840,000

Selling and administrative expenses

(480,000)

Interest expense

(40,000)

Net income

$ 320,000

Instructions

(a) Determine the following for 2012.

(1) Current ratio at December 31.

(2) Acid test ratio at December 31.

(3) Accounts receivable turnover.

(4) Inventory turnover.

(5) Rate of return on assets.

(6) Profit margin on sales.

(b) Prepare a brief evaluation of the financial condition of Vogue Company and of the adequacy of its profits.

edwardson corporation rsquo s year end is december 31 assuming that no adjusting ent 577853

(Current Liability Entries and Adjustments) Described below are certain transactions of Edwardson Corporation. The company uses the periodic inventory system.

1. On February 2, the corporation purchased goods from Martin Company for $70,000 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/30. Purchases and accounts payable are recorded by the corporation at net amounts after cash discounts. The invoice was paid on February 26.

2. On April 1, the corporation bought a truck for $50,000 from General Motors Company, paying $4,000 in cash and signing a one year, 12% note for the balance of the purchase price.

3. On May 1, the corporation borrowed $83,000 from Chicago National Bank by signing a $92,000 zero interest bearing note due one year from May 1.

4. On August 1, the board of directors declared a $300,000 cash dividend that was payable on September 10 to stockholders of record on August 31.

Instructions

(a) Make all the journal entries necessary to record the transactions above using appropriate dates.

(b) Edwardson Corporation’s year end is December 31. Assuming that no adjusting entries relative to the transactions above have been recorded, prepare any adjusting journal entries concerning interest that are necessary to present fair financial statements at December 31. Assume straight line amortization of discounts.

on december 10 the store purchased for cash three delivery trucks for 120 000 the tr 577854

(Liability Entries and Adjustments) Listed below are selected transactions of Schultz Department Store for the current year ending December 31.

1. On December 5, the store received $500 from the Jackson Players as a deposit to be returned after certain furniture to be used in stage production was returned on January 15.

2. During December, cash sales totaled $798,000, which includes the 5% sales tax that must be remitted to the state by the fifteenth day of the following month.

3. On December 10, the store purchased for cash three delivery trucks for $120,000. The trucks were purchased in a state that applies a 5% sales tax.

4. The store determined it will cost $100,000 to restore the area (considered a land improvement) surrounding one of its store parking lots, when the store is closed in 2 years. Schultz estimates the fair value of the obligation at December 31 is $84,000.

Instructions

Prepare all the journal entries necessary to record the transactions noted above as they occurred and any adjusting journal entries relative to the transactions that would be required to present fair financial statements at December 31. Date each entry. For simplicity, assume that adjusting entries are recorded only once a year on December 31.

the fica rate is 7 65 on employee and employer on a maximum of 106 800 per employee 577855

(Payroll Tax Entries) Cedarville Company pays its office employee payroll weekly. Below is a partial list of employees and their payroll data for August. Because August is their vacation period, vacation pay is also listed.

Employee

Earnings to
July 31

Weekly
Pay

Vacation Pay to Be
Received in August

Mark Hamill

$4,200

$200

Karen Robbins

3,500

150

$300

Brent Kirk

2,700

110

220

Alec Guinness

7,400

250

Ken Sprouse

8,000

330

660

Assume that the federal income tax withheld is 10% of wages. Union dues withheld are 2% of wages. Vacations are taken the second and third weeks of August by Robbins, Kirk, and Sprouse. The state unemployment tax rate is 2.5% and the federal is 0.8%, both on a $7,000 maximum. The FICA rate is 7.65% on employee and employer on a maximum of $106,800 per employee. In addition, a 1.45% rate is charged both employer and employee for an employee’s wages in excess of $106,800.

Instructions

Make the journal entries necessary for each of the four August payrolls. The entries for the payroll and for the company’s liability are made separately. Also make the entry to record the monthly payment of accrued payroll liabilities.

make the entry to record the payment of the payroll liabilities created assume that 577856

(Payroll Tax Entries) Below is a payroll sheet for Otis Import Company for the month of September 2012. The company is allowed a 1% unemployment compensation rate by the state; the federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8% and the maximum for both is $7,000. Assume a 10% federal income tax rate for all employees and a 7.65% FICA tax on employee and employer on a maximum of $106,800. In addition, 1.45% is charged both employer and employee for an employee’s wages in excess of $106,800 per employee.

Name

Earnings
to Aug. 31

September
Earnings

Income
Tax
Withholding

FICA

State
U.C.

Federal
U.C.

B.D. Williams

$ 6,800

$ 800

D. Raye

6,500

700

K. Baker

7,600

1,100

F. Lopez

13,600

1,900

A. Daniels

107,000

13,000

B. Kingston

112,000

16,000

Instructions

(a) Complete the payroll sheet and make the necessary entry to record the payment of the payroll.

(b) Make the entry to record the payroll tax expenses of Otis Import Company.

(c) Make the entry to record the payment of the payroll liabilities created. Assume that the company pays all payroll liabilities at the end of each month.

what liability relative to these transactions would appear on the december 31 2012 b 577857

(Warranties, Accrual, and Cash Basis) Brooks Corporation sells computers under a 2 year warranty contract that requires the corporation to replace defective parts and to provide the necessary repair labor. During 2012, the corporation sells for cash 400 computers at a unit price of $2,500. On the basis of past experience, the 2 year warranty costs are estimated to be $155 for parts and $185 for labor per unit. (For simplicity, assume that all sales occurred on December 31, 2012.) The warranty is not sold separately from the computer.

Instructions

(a) Record any necessary journal entries in 2012, applying the cash basis method.

(b) Record any necessary journal entries in 2012, applying the expense warranty accrual method.

(c) What liability relative to these transactions would appear on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet and how would it be classified if the cash basis method is applied?

(d) What liability relative to these transactions would appear on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet and how would it be classified if the expense warranty accrual method is applied? In 2013, the actual warranty costs to Brooks Corporation were $21,400 for parts and $39,900 for labor.

(e) Record any necessary journal entries in 2013, applying the cash basis method.

(f) Record any necessary journal entries in 2013, applying the expense warranty accrual method.

what amounts relative to the 2012 television warranties would appear on the december 577858

(Extended Warranties) Dos Passos Company sells televisions at an average price of $900 and also offers to each customer a separate 3 year warranty contract for $90 that requires the company to perform periodic services and to replace defective parts. During 2012, the company sold 300 televisions and 270 warranty contracts for cash. It estimates the 3 year warranty costs as $20 for parts and $40 for labor and accounts for warranties separately. Assume sales occurred on December 31, 2012, and straight line recognition of warranty revenues occurs.

Instructions

(a) Record any necessary journal entries in 2012.

(b) What liability relative to these transactions would appear on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet and how would it be classified? In 2013, Dos Passos Company incurred actual costs relative to 2012 television warranty sales of $2,000 for parts and $4,000 for labor.

(c) Record any necessary journal entries in 2013 relative to 2012 television warranties.

(d) What amounts relative to the 2012 television warranties would appear on the December 31, 2013, balance sheet and how would they be classified?

what amount if any is disclosed in the balance sheet as a liability for future warra 577859

(Warranties, Accrual, and Cash Basis) Alvarado Company sells a machine for $7,400 under a 12 month warranty agreement that requires the company to replace all defective parts and to provide the repair labor at no cost to the customers. With sales being made evenly throughout the year, the company sells 600 machines in 2012 (warranty expense is incurred half in 2012 and half in 2013). As a result of product testing, the company estimates that the warranty cost is $390 per machine ($170 parts and $220 labor).

Instructions

Assuming that actual warranty costs are incurred exactly as estimated, what journal entries would be made relative to the following facts?

(a) Under application of the expense warranty accrual method for:

(1) Sale of machinery in 2012.

(2) Warranty costs incurred in 2012.

(3) Warranty expense charged against 2012 revenues.

(4) Warranty costs incurred in 2013.

(b) Under application of the cash basis method for:

(1) Sale of machinery in 2012.

(2) Warranty costs incurred in 2012.

(3) Warranty expense charged against 2012 revenues.

(4) Warranty costs incurred in 2013.

(c) What amount, if any, is disclosed in the balance sheet as a liability for future warranty costs as of December 31, 2012, under each method?

(d) Which method best reflects the income in 2012 and 2013 of Alvarado Company? Why?

determine the proper allocation to preferred and common stockholders of a 100 000 ca 577751

As of December 31, 2002, First Corporation has 200,000 shares of $10 par value common stock] authorized, with 100,000 of these shares issued and outstanding.

1. Prepare journal entries to record the following 2003 transactions: Jan. 1 Received authorization for 200,000 shares of 7%, cumulative preferred stock with a par value of $10.

Jan. 2 Issued 10,000 shares of the preferred stock at $15 per share. June 1 Reacquired 40% of the common stock outstanding for $18 per share.

June 2 Declared a cash dividend of $10,000. The date of record is June 15.June 30 Paid the previously declared cash dividend of $10,000.

2. Determine the proper allocation to preferred and common stockholders of a $100,000 cash dividend declared on December 31, 2003. (This dividend is in addition to the June 2 dividend.)

3. Interpretive Question: Why didn t the preferred stockholders receive their currentdividend preference of $7,000 in part (2)?

prepare the stockholders equity section of the june 30 2003 balance sheet and a stat 577752

Murtry, Inc., reported the following stockholders equity balances in its June 30, 2002, balance sheet:

Preferred stock (6%, $100 par, cumulative; 20,000 shares authorized,

6,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ 600,000

Common stock ($20 par; 250,000 shares authorized,

60,000 shares issued and outstanding)

1,200,000

Retained earnings.

950,000

Required

1. The following stockholders equity transactions occurred (in the order presented) during the fiscal year ending June 30, 2003. Prepare the necessary journal entries to record the transactions.

a. Murtry declared and issued a 5% dividend on common stock; the market value of the stock was $30 per share on the date of the dividend.

b. A 50% stock dividend on common stock was declared and issued when the stock was trading at a market price of $40 per share.

c. A cash dividend was declared at the end of the fiscal year. The common stockholders will receive 50 cents per share after the current and cumulative preference on the preferred stock is satisfied. Preferred stock dividends are one year in arrears.

2. Assuming Murtry s net income for the year ended June 30, 2003, is $310,000, prepare the stockholders equity section of the June 30, 2003, balance sheet and a statement of stockholders equity for the 2002 2003 fiscal year.

3. Interpretive Question: What is the effect on earnings per share when a company has a stock dividend or stock split?

prepare the stockholders equity section of iron corporation s balance sheet as of de 577753

The following balances appear in the accounts of Iron Corporation as of December 31, 2003:

Retained earnings, January 1, 2003

$128,000

Prior period adjustment (tax adjustment for 2001).

(57,000)

Net income for 2003

60,000

Preferred stock (7%, $12 par, 20,000 shares authorized,

5,000 shares issued and outstanding)

60,000

Common stock ($5 par, 100,000 shares authorized,

16,000 shares issued, 200 held as treasury stock)

80,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock.

13,400

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

42,800

Treasury stock

3,600

Cash dividends (declared during 2003)

10,000

Required

1. Prepare the statement of retained earnings for Iron Corporation as of December 31, 2003.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of Iron Corporation s balance sheet as of December 31, 2003.

prepare a 2003 statement of retained earnings 577754

Marsh Corporation records show the following at December 31, 2003:

Extraordinary loss (net of tax).

$(50,000)

Cash dividends declared during 2003

30,000

Stock dividends issued during 2003 .

14,000

January 1, 2003, retained earnings balance.

690,000

Prior period adjustment (net of tax)

(36,000)

Net income before extraordinary items and taxes (assume a 40% tax rate)

160,000

Prepare a 2003 statement of retained earnings.

prepare a statement of owner s capital for 2003 577755

On January 1, 2003, Pat Larsen decided to open the Donut Shop. Pat deposited $40,000 of her own money in a company bank account and obtained a $30,000 loan from a local bank. During its first year of operation, the shop had net income of $84,000, which included $150,000 of revenues and $66,000 of expenses. Pat withdrew a lump sum of $48,000 from the business that year to cover personal living expenses.

1. Prepare journal entries to record:

a. Pat s original contribution to the firm.

b. The bank loan.

c. Pat s withdrawal for her living expenses.

d. Any closing entries required at year end.

2. Prepare a statement of owner s capital for 2003.

3. Interpretive Question: How would the accounting for the transactions in part (1) be different if Pat s business were a corporation?

what is the relationship between the amount of capital contributed by each owner and 577756

On January 1, 2003, Reed and Bailey established a partnership to sell fruit.

a. Reed invested $42,000 cash in the partnership, and Bailey invested $20,000 cash and a building valued at $25,000.

b. Reed invested another $6,000 cash. Bailey donated a truck valued at $7,000.

c. Reed withdrew $11,000 cash, and Bailey withdrew $6,300 cash.

d. A fire destroyed half of the building donated by Bailey. There was no insurance on the building. The partners share profits and losses equally.

e. Reed and Bailey agree to admit a third partner on March 1 of the next year. This partner, Kiefer, promises to invest $50,000 cash.

Required

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Journalize the closing entries. Assume revenues totaled $50,000 and expenses totaled $31,000.

3. Compute each partner s capital balance at the end of 2003.

4. Interpretive Question: What is the relationship between the amount of capital contributed by each owner and the way profits are to be allocated?

pentron data corporation has a significant amount of excess cash on hand and has dec 577775

Pentron Data Corporation has a significant amount of excess cash on hand and has decided to make a long term investment in either debt or equity securities. After a careful analysis, the investment committee has recommended to the company treasurer that Pentron purchase either one of the following two investments. The first investment involves purchasing sixty $1,000,8% bonds issued by the Andrea Company. The bonds mature in four years, pay interest semiannually and are currently selling at 92. The second investment alternative involves purchasing3,000 shares of Franklin Corporation common stock at $30 per share (including brokerage fees). The investment committee believes that the Franklin stock will pay an annual dividend of $3.50 per share and is likely to be salable at the end of four years for $36 per share. Discuss the following questions:

1. If Pentron wants to earn 12% per year, should it make either investment?

2. Which of the two investments would you advise the treasurer to invest in assuming the inherent risk is approximately equal? Your decision should be based on which investment provides the more attractive return, ignoring income tax effects.

prepare the journal entries required to record each of these events 577780

In January 2001, Solitron, Inc., determined that it had excess cash on hand and decided to invest in Horner Company stock. The company intends to hold the stock for a period of three to five years, thereby making the investment an available for sale security. The following transactions took place in 2001, 2002, and 2003. 2001

Jan 17 Purchased 2,750 shares of Horner Company stock for $89,500.

May 10 Received a cash dividend of $1.30 per share on Horner Company stock.

Dec. 31 The market value of the Horner Company stock was $30 per share. 2002

May 22 Purchased 750 shares of Horner Company stock at $40 per share.

July 18 Received a cash dividend of $0.90 per share on the Horner Company stock.

Dec. 31 The market value of the Horner Company stock was $42 per share. 2003

June 7 Received a cash dividend of $1 per share on the Horner Company stock.

Oct. 5 Sold the Horner Company stock at $27 per share for cash.

Dec. 31 The market value of the Horner Company stock was $25 per share.

Prepare the journal entries required to record each of these events.

what would net income be if the market value of security b were 95 000 577781

During 2001, Litten Company purchased trading securities as a short term investment. The costs of the securities and their market values on December 31, 2003, are listed below:

Market Value

Security

Cost

(December 31, 2003)

A

$ 65,000

$ 81,000

B

100,000

54,000

C

220,000

226,000

Litten had no trading securities in the years before 2003. Before any adjustments related to these trading securities, Litten had net income of $300,000 in 2003.

1. What is net income (ignoring income taxes) after making any necessary trading security adjustments?

2. What would net income be if the market value of Security B were $95,000?

prepare the journal entries required to record each of these transactions 577782

In February 2003, Packard Corporation purchased the following securities. Prior to these purchases, Packard had no portfolio of investment securities.

Security

Type

Classification

Cost

1

Debt

Trading

$11,500

2

Equity

Trading

9,000

3

Equity

Available for sale

7,250

4

Debt

Available for sale

12,300

During 2003, Packard received $2,400 in interest and $1,800 in dividends. On December 31, 2003, Packard’s portfolio of securities had the following market values:

Security

Fair Market Value

1

$12,000

2

8,750

3

7,500

4

12,500

Prepare the journal entries required to record each of these transactions.

prepare the journal entries required to record the purchase of the securities the re 577783

CIB, Inc., purchased the following securities during 2003:

Security

Type

Classification

Cost

1

Debt

Trading

$1,200

2

Equity

Trading

1,750

3

Debt

Available for sale

2,100

4

Equity

Available for sale

900

5

Debt

Held to maturity

5,500

During 2003, CIB received interest of $700 and dividends of $300 on its investments. On September 29, 2003, CIB sold one half of Security 1 for $800. On December 31, 2003, the portfolio of securities had the following fair market values:

Security

Fair Market Value

1

$ 850

2

1,800

3

2,000

4

950

5

6,000

CIB had no balance in its market adjustment accounts at the beginning of the year. Prepare the journal entries required to record the purchase of the securities, the receipt of interest and dividends, the sale of securities, and the adjustments required at year end.

prepare the necessary adjusting entry ies on december 31 2003 577784

Sharp, Inc., had the following portfolio of investment securities on January 1, 2003

Fair Market Value

Security

Type

Classification

Historical Cost

(1/1/03)

1

Debt

Trading

$1,000

$ 800

2

Equity

Trading

1,250

1,100

3

Debt

Trading

1,700

1,650

4

Debt

Available for sale

2,200

2,150

5

Debt

Held to maturity

1,800

1,750

Appropriate adjustments have been made in prior years. No securities were bought or sold during 2003. On December 31, 2003, Sharp’s portfolio of securities had the following fair market values:

Fair Market Value

Security

(12/31/03)

1

$ 650

2

1,200

3

1,700

4

2,250

5

1,850

Prepare the necessary adjusting entry(ies) on December 31, 2003.

prepare the entries required at the end of 2002 and 2003 to properly adjust atlantic 577785

Atlantic, Inc., held the following portfolio of securities on December 31, 2002 (the end of its first year of operations):

Market Value

Cost

(12/31/02)

Trading securities.

$18,700

$17,500

Available for sale securities

21,350

22,000

Held to maturity securities

15,000

15,700

No additional securities were bought or sold during 2003. On December 31, 2003, Atlantic’s securities had a fair market value of:

Trading securities

$18,250

Available for sale securities

22,500

Held to maturity securities

15,300

Prepare the entries required at the end of 2002 and 2003 to properly adjust Atlantic’s portfolio of securities.

prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of these securities 577786

The Fishing Store is a chain of sporting goods stores. The Fishing Store is interested in using some of its excess cash to invest in securities. It decides to buy the following securities:

Security

Type

Price

Fea Company

Available for sale

$ 4,000

Herdsman, Inc.

Trading

7,500

Lenny Company

Available for sale

3,200

White Company

Held to maturity

10,000

Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of these securities.

prepare the journal entry to record the sale of these securities 577787

Jerrod Company owns the following securities, which it is interested in selling:

Security

Type

Cost

Market Adjustments

Market Price

Monsen Company

Available for sale

$ 4,000

$ 300 increase

$ 5,000

Jensen Company

Trading

7,500

1,000 decrease

5,500

Stic Company

Available for sale

3,200

500 increase

4,000

Larouse Company

Held to maturity

10,000

None

11,000

Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of these securities.

discuss the conceptual merits and reporting requirements of accounting for the penal 577796

(Accounting for Pollution Expenditure) Counting Crows Company operates several plants at which limestone is processed into quicklime and hydrated lime. The Eagle Ridge plant, where most of the equipment was installed many years ago, continually deposits a dusty white substance over the surrounding countryside. Citing the unsanitary condition of the neighboring community of Scales Mound, the pollution of the Galena River, and the high incidence of lung disease among workers at Eagle Ridge, the state’s Pollution Control Agency has ordered the installation of air pollution control equipment. Also, the agency has assessed a substantial penalty, which will be used to clean up Scales Mound. After considering the costs involved (which could not have been reasonably estimated prior to the agency’s action), Counting Crows Company decides to comply with the agency’s orders, the alternative being to cease operations at Eagle Ridge at the end of the current fiscal year. The officers of Counting Crows agree that the air pollution control equipment should be capitalized and depreciated over its useful life, but they disagree over the period(s) to which the penalty should be charged.

Instructions

Discuss the conceptual merits and reporting requirements of accounting for the penalty in each of the following ways.

(a) As a charge to the current period.

(b) As a correction of prior periods.

(c) As a capitalizable item to be amortized over future periods.

explain how each of the costs for 2011 and the first 9 months of 2012 should be trea 577797

(Accounting for Pre Opening Costs) After securing lease commitments from several major stores, Auer Shopping Center, Inc. was organized and built a shopping center in a growing suburb. The shopping center would have opened on schedule on January 1, 2012, if it had not been struck by a severe tornado in December. Instead, it opened for business on October 1, 2012. All of the additional construction costs that were incurred as a result of the tornado were covered by insurance. In July 2011, in anticipation of the scheduled January opening, a permanent staff had been hired to promote the shopping center, obtain tenants for the uncommitted space, and manage the property. A summary of some of the costs incurred in 2011 and the first nine months of 2012 follows.

2011

January 1, 2012
through
September 30, 2012

Interest on mortgage bonds

$720,000

$540,000

Cost of obtaining tenants

300,000

360,000

Promotional advertising

540,000

557,000

The promotional advertising campaign was designed to familiarize shoppers with the center. Had it been known in time that the center would not open until October 2012, the 2011 expenditure for promotional advertising would not have been made. The advertising had to be repeated in 2012. All of the tenants who had leased space in the shopping center at the time of the tornado accepted the October occupancy date on condition that the monthly rental charges for the first 9 months of 2012 are canceled.

Instructions

Explain how each of the costs for 2011 and the first 9 months of 2012 should be treated in the accounts of the shopping center corporation. Give the reasons for each treatment.

what recognition if any should be made of the infringement litigation in the financi 577798

(Accounting for Patents) On June 30, 2012, your client, Ferry Company, was granted two patents covering plastic cartons that it had been producing and marketing profitably for the past 3 years. One patent covers the manufacturing process, and the other covers the related products. Ferry executives tell you that these patents represent the most significant breakthrough in the industry in the past 30 years. The products have been marketed under the registered trademarks ever tight, Duratainer, and Sealrite. Licenses under the patents have already been granted by your client to other manufacturers in the United States and abroad and are producing substantial royalties. On July 1, Ferry commenced patent infringement actions against several companies whose names you recognize as those of substantial and prominent competitors. Ferry’s management is optimistic that these suits will result in a permanent injunction against the manufacture and sale of the infringing products as well as collection of damages for loss of profits caused by the alleged infringement. The financial vice president has suggested that the patents be recorded at the discounted value of expected net royalty receipts.

Instructions

(a) What is the meaning of “discounted value of expected net receipts”? Explain.

(b) How would such a value be calculated for net royalty receipts?

(c) What basis of valuation for Ferry’s patents would be generally accepted in accounting? Give supporting reasons for this basis.

(d) Assuming no practical problems of implementation, and ignoring generally accepted accounting principles, what is the preferable basis of valuation for patents? Explain.

(e) What would be the preferable theoretical basis of amortization? Explain.

(f) What recognition, if any, should be made of the infringement litigation in the financial statements for the year ending September 30, 2012? Discuss.

briefly indicate the practical and conceptual reasons for the conclusion reached by 577799

(Accounting for Research and Development Costs) Cuevas Co. is in the process of developing a revolutionary new product. A new division of the company was formed to develop, manufacture, and market this new product. As of year end (December 31, 2012), the new product has not been manufactured for resale. However, a prototype unit was built and is in operation. Throughout 2012, the new division incurred certain costs. These costs include design and engineering studies, prototype manufacturing costs, administrative expenses (including salaries of administrative personnel), and market research costs. In addition, approximately $900,000 in equipment (with an estimated useful life of 10 years) was purchased for use in developing and manufacturing the new product. Approximately $315,000 of this equipment was built specifically for the design development of the new product. The remaining $585,000 of equipment was used to manufacture the pre production prototype and will be used to manufacture the new product once it is in commercial production.

Instructions

(a) How are “research” and “development” defined in the authoritative literature (GAAP)?

(b) Briefly indicate the practical and conceptual reasons for the conclusion reached by the Financial Accounting Standards Board on accounting and reporting practices for research and development costs.

(c) In accordance with GAAP, how should the various costs of Cuevas described above is recorded on the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012?

reid recognizes that corporate profits have been down lately and is hesitant to appr 577800

(Accounting for Research and Development Costs) Czeslaw Corporation’s research and development department has an idea for a project it believes will culminate in a new product that would be very profitable for the company. Because the project will be very expensive, the department requests approval from the company’s controller, Jeff Reid. Reid recognizes that corporate profits have been down lately and is hesitant to approve a project that will incur significant expenses that cannot be capitalized due to the requirements of the authoritative literature. He knows that if they hire an outside firm that does the work and obtains a patent for the process, Czeslaw Corporation can purchase the patent from the outside firm and record the expenditure as an asset. Reid knows that the company’s own R&D department is first rate, and he is confident they can do the work well.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues involved?

(c) What should Reid do?

the stockholders equity section of ardvark corporation s december 31 2002 balance sh 577726

The stockholders equity section of Ardvark Corporation s December 31, 2002, balance sheet included the following items:

Common stock ($20 par, 250,000 shares authorized,

50,000 shares issued and outstanding)..

$1,000,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

1,500,000

Retained earnings.

2,000,000

Record the following transactions for 2003:

a. On March 1, Ardvark declared and issued a 25% stock dividend on common stock. The market price of the stock was $40 per share on that date.

b. On June 30, a 4 for 1 stock split was declared.

c. On September 15, a 10% stock dividend on common stock was declared and distributed.

The market price of the stock was $30 per share on the dividend date.

compute the new balance for all stockholders equity accounts after the stock divide 577728

On July 1, 2003, Sanford Corporation s balance sheet reported the following account balances in the stockholders equity section:

Common stock, $5 par

$150,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

20,000

Retained earnings

180,000

Total stockholders equity

$350,000

On August 31, 2003, Sanford s board of directors declared and issued a 10% stock dividend. The market value on August 31 is $12 per share.

1. Compare the book value per share before and after the issuance of the stock dividend.

2. Compute the new balance for all stockholders equity accounts after the stock dividend.

prepare journal entries to record each of the above transactions 577729

On December 31, 2002, White Lighting Corporation s stockholders equity section of the balance sheet showed the following:

Common stock ($10 par, 50,000 shares authorized,

25,000 issued and 17,000 outstanding).

$250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

375,000

Retained earnings

450,000

Treasury stock (8,000 shares, at cost)

(90,000)

Total stockholders equity

$985,000

During 2003, the following transactions occurred:

a. On March 1, 2003, White Lighting purchased 5,000 shares of its stock at $20 per share.

b. On April 15, 2003, White Lighting reissued the 5,000 shares of its stock purchased in (a); the market price on that day was $30 per share.

c. On June 10, 2003, White Lighting declared and paid a 10% stock dividend. Market price of the stock was $32 per share.

d. On June 30, 2003, White Lighting declared a cash dividend of 50 cents per share. The dividend was paid on July 30. The record date was July 15.

e. On October 1, 2003, White Lighting issued 5,000 shares of new stock for $40 per share.

Prepare journal entries to record each of the above transactions.

prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended december 31 2003 assume 577730

The stockholders equity section of Summer Corporation s balance sheet shows the following as of the end of 2003:

Preferred stock (5%, $30 par, 10,000 shares authorized,

5,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ ?

Common stock ($12 par, 50,000 shares authorized,

28,000 issued, 27,500 outstanding)

336,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock

?

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

424,000

Retained earnings

78,000

Treasury stock (purchased at $14)

?

Total stockholders equity

$ ?

Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2003. Assume the following additional facts:

a. Retained earnings as of December 31, 2002, was $25,500.

b. Net income as of 2003 was $72,000.

c. Dividends equal to the current dividend preference on preferred stock were declared and issued.

d. A prior period adjustment was made to retained earnings to correct an overstatement of 2002 net income in the amount of $12,000.

e. Common stock was sold for $12.

prepare journal entries to record the transactions and prepare a statement of owner 577731

At the beginning of 2003, Marena Sanchez decided to go into business making and selling decorative artificial plants. During the year ended December 31, 2003, Sanchez had the following transactions:

a. Withdrew $20,000 from a personal savings account and deposited that amount in a new checking account to be used solely for the business.

b. Paid cash to purchase $12,000 of materials needed to make plants.

c. Invested another $24,000 in the business.

d. Sold 450 plants during the year at $60 each for cash.

e. Incurred and paid operating expenses for the year of $10,500.

f. At the end of the year, $4,000 of materials remained on hand. The cost of materials used was transferred to a cost of goods sold account. g. Withdrew $5,000 for personal use. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions, and prepare a statement of owner s capital for the year.

prepare the journal entries including closing entries for the transactions 577732

Jill Emerson owned a pet shop. On August 1, 2003, Emerson accepted Allan Jacobs as a partner. At that time, Emerson s capital account showed a balance of $135,000. Jacobs contributed $90,000 cash for a 40% share in both capital and earnings. During the rest of 2003, the following transactions took place:

a. Emerson withdrew $12,000 and Jacobs withdrew $4,000.

b. Emerson invested another $4,500 cash, and Jacobs contributed a truck valued at $6,000.

c. Net income from August 1, 2003, through December 31, 2003, was $26,700, which included$66,700 of revenues and $40,000 of expenses.

Given this information:

1. Prepare the journal entries (including closing entries) for the transactions.

2. Prepare a statement of partners capital for the 5 months ending December 31, 2003, for the Emerson and Jacobs partnership.

prepare the journal entry to record dr wright s investment in the partnership 577733

On July 1, 2003, Dr. Wright and Dr. O Flaherty decided to form a partnership by combining all the assets and liabilities of their respective dental practices. The partnership will have a new and separate set of books. Dr. Wright s balance sheet at June 30, 2003, was as follows:

Assets

Cash.

$ 27,000

Accounts receivable.

$116,000

Less allowance for uncollectible accounts

6,600

109,400

Dental equipment

$ 52,900

Less accumulated depreciation .

24,200

28,700

Building

$169,400

Less accumulated depreciation .

13,500

155,900

Total assets ..

$321,000

Liabilities and Owner s Equity

Accounts payable

$ 22,700

Mortgage payable.

150,000

Dr. Wright, capital .

148,300

Total liabilities and owner s equity

$321,000

The partners agreed that $5,600 of the accounts receivable were uncollectible and that $2,400= was a reasonable allowance for the un collectibility of the remaining receivables. They also agreed that the dental equipment and the building should be recorded at their respective fair market values of $46,000 and $182,000. Prepare the journal entry to record Dr. Wright s investment in the partnership.

the following selected items and amounts were taken from the balance sheet of quale 577734

The following selected items and amounts were taken from the balance sheet of Quale Company as of December 31, 2003:

Cash

$ 93,000

Property, plant, and equipment

850,000

Accumulated depreciation.

150,000

Liabilities

50,000

Preferred stock (7%, $100 par, noncumulative, 10,000 shares authorized,

5,000 shares issued and outstanding)

500,000

Common stock ($10 par, 100,000 shares authorized,

80,000 shares issued and outstanding)

800,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock

1,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

125,000

Paid in capital, treasury stock.

1,000

Retained earnings

310,000

Required For each of parts (1) to (5), (a) prepare the necessary journal entry (or entries) to record each transaction, and (b) calculate the amount that would appear on the December 31, 2003, balance sheet as a consequence of this transaction only for the account given. (Note: In your answer to each part of this problem, consider this to be the only transaction that took place during 2003.)

1. Quale Company issued 200 shares of common stock in exchange for cash of $4,000.

a. Entry

b. Paid In Capital in Excess of Par, Common Stock

2. The company issued 200 shares of preferred stock at a price of $102 per share.

a. Entry

b. Paid In Capital in Excess of Par, Preferred Stock

3. The company issued 500 shares of common stock in exchange for a building. The common stock is not actively traded, but the building was recently appraised at $11,000.

a. Entry

b. Property, Plant, and Equipment

4. The company reacquired 1,000 shares of common stock from a stockholder for $23,000 and subsequently reissued the shares to a different investor for $21,500. (Note: Make two entries.)

a. Entries

b. Paid In Capital, Treasury Stock

5. The board of directors declared dividends of $75,000. This amount includes the currentyear dividend preference on preferred stock, with the remainder to be paid to common shareholders.

a. Entry

b. Retained Earnings

prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet for the company at dece 577735

The following is West Valley Company s stockholders equity section of the balance sheet on December 31, 2002:

Preferred stock (8%, $60 par, noncumulative, 16,000 shares authorized,

8,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$480,000

Common stock ($10 par, 120,000 shares authorized,

80,000 shares issued and outstanding)

800,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock

130,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

252,000

Retained earnings.

330,000

Required

1. Journalize the following 2003 transactions:

a. Issued 2,000 preferred shares at $70 per share.

b. Reacquired 1,000 common shares for the treasury at $13 per share.

c. Declared and paid a $2 per share dividend on common stock in addition to paying the required preferred dividends. (Note: Debit Retained Earnings directly.)

d. Reissued 600 treasury shares at $14 per share.

e. Reissued the remaining treasury shares at $12 per share.

f. Earnings for the year were $92,000, including $200,000 of revenues and $108,000 of expenses.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet for the company at December 31, 2003.

zina corporation was organized during 2002 at the end of 2002 the stockholders equit 577736

Zina Corporation was organized during 2002. At the end of 2002, the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet appeared as follows:

Contributed capital:

Preferred stock (8%, $40 par, 10,000 shares authorized,

5,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$200,000

Common stock ($20 par, 30,000 shares authorized, 12,000 issued,

10,000 outstanding).

240,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock.

50,000

Total contributed capital

$490,000

Retained earnings

110,000

Total contributed capital plus retained earnings

$600,000

Less treasury stock (2,000 shares at cost of $25 per share) .

(50,000)

Total stockholders equity

$550,000

Required

During 2003, the following transactions occurred in the order given:

a. Issued 1,000 shares of common stock at $24 per share.

b. Reissued 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $27 per share.

c. Reissued 500 shares of treasury stock at $20 per share.

prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet as of december 31 2003 577737

The balance sheet for Lakeland Corporation as of December 31, 2002, is as follows:

Assets

$750,000

Liabilities.

$410,000

Stockholders equity:

Preferred stock, convertible (5%, $20 par) .

$ 50,000

Common stock ($10 par)..

150,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock.

30,000

Retained earnings

116,000

$346,000

Less treasury stock, common (500 shares

(6,000)

340,000

Total liabilities and stockholders equity

$750,000

During 2003, the following transactions were completed in the order given:

a. The company reacquired 750 shares of outstanding common stock at $7 per share.

b. The company reacquired 150 shares of common stock in settlement of an account receivable of $1,500.

c. Semiannual cash dividends of 75 cents per share on common stock and 50 cents per share on preferred stock were declared and paid.

d. Each share of preferred stock is convertible into three shares of common stock. Five hundred shares of preferred stock were converted into common stock. (HINT: Shares are converted at par values, and any excess reduces Retained Earnings.)

e. The 900 shares of common treasury stock acquired during 2003 were sold at $13. The remaining treasury shares were exchanged for a machine with a fair market value of$6,300.

f. The company issued 3,000 shares of common stock in exchange for land appraised at $39,000.

g. Semiannual cash dividends of 75 cents per share on common stock and 50 cents per share on preferred stock were declared and paid.

h. Closed net income of $35,000 to Retained Earnings, which included $135,000 of revenues and $100,000 of expenses.

i. Closed dividends accounts to Retained Earnings.

Required

1. Give the necessary journal entries to record the transactions listed.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet as of December 31, 2003.

prepare the stockholders equity section of nielsen corporation s december 31 2003 ba 577738

The stockholders equity section of Nielsen Corporation s December 31, 2002, balance sheet is as follows:

Stockholders equity:

Preferred stock (10%, $50 par, 10,000 shares authorized,

1,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ 50,000

Common stock ($15 par, 100,000 shares authorized,

5,000 shares issued and outstanding)

75,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock .

2,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock .

25,000

Total contributed capital.

$152,000

Retained earnings.

102,000

Total stockholders equity

$254,000

During 2003, Nielsen Corporation had the following transactions affecting stockholders equity:

Jan. 20 Paid a cash dividend of $2 per share on common stock. The dividend was declared on December 15, 2002.

Aug. 15 Reacquired 1,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share.

Sept. 30 Reissued 500 shares of treasury stock at $21 per share.

Oct. 15 Declared and paid cash dividends of $3 per share on the common stock.

Nov. 1 Reissued 200 shares of treasury stock at $18 per share.

Dec. 15 Declared and paid the 10% preferred cash dividend.

Dec. 31 Closed net income of $40,000 to Retained Earnings. (Revenues were $260,000; expenses were $220,000.) Also closed the dividends accounts to Retained Earnings.

Required

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of Nielsen Corporation s December 31, 2003, balance sheet.

3. Interpretive Question: What is the effect on earnings per share when a company purchases treasury stock?

salty corporation was organized in january 2000 and issued shares of preferred and c 577739

Salty Corporation was organized in January 2000 and issued shares of preferred and common stock as shown. As of December 31, 2003, there have been no changes in outstanding stock.

Preferred stock (8%, $10 par, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$200,000

Common stock ($40 par, 10,000 shares issued and outstanding)

400,000

For each of the following independent situations, compute the amount of dividends that would be paid for each class of stock in 2002 and 2003. Assume that total dividends of $10,000 and $80,000 are paid in 2002 and 2003, respectively.

1. Preferred stock is noncumulative.

2. Preferred stock is cumulative, and no dividends are in arrears in 2002.

3. Preferred stock is cumulative, and no dividends have been paid during 2000 and 2001.

why is it important that a common stockholder know about the dividend privileges of 577740

Rasmussen Corporation had authorization for 40,000 shares of 6% preferred stock, par value $10 per share, and 8,000 shares of common stock, par value $100 per share, all of which are issued and outstanding. During the years beginning in 2002, Rasmussen Corporation maintained a policy of paying out 50% of net income in cash dividends. One half the net income for the three years beginning in 2002 was $16,000, $160,000, and $128,000. There are no dividends in arrears for years prior to 2002. Compute the amount of dividends paid to each class of stock for each year under the following separate cases:

1. Preferred stock is noncumulative.

2. Preferred stock is cumulative.

3. Interpretive Question: Why is it important that a common stockholder know about the dividend privileges of the preferred stock?

which of the three companies is most likely to be a high growth internet company whi 577741

The following numbers are for three different companies:

A

B

C

Cash .

$ 50

$ 200

$ 400

Retained earnings

900

800

3,500

Cash dividends

80

0

500

Paid in capital

1,000

2,500

2,000

Total liabilities

600

300

1,400

Sales

5,000

10,000

4,000

Net income .

200

500

800

1. For each company, compute the dividend payout ratio.

2. Interpretive Question: Which of the three companies is most likely to be a high growth Internet company? Which is most likely to be an old, stable company? Explain.

a computer virus destroyed important financial information pertaining to denton comp 577743

A computer virus destroyed important financial information pertaining to Denton Company s stockholders equity section. Your expertise is needed to compute the missing account balances. The only information you can recover from the computer s backup system is as follows:

a. During 2003, 8,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $10 were issued when the market price per share was $22.

b. Cash dividends of $30,000 were paid to preferred shareholders.

c. Denton Company acquired 4,000 shares of common stock at $15 to hold as treasury stock.

d. Denton Company reissued 3,000 shares of treasury stock for $18.

December 31, 2002

December 31, 2003

Preferred stock

$ 2,000

$ 2,000

Common stock.

6,000

?

Paid in capital in excess of par,

preferred stock

750

750

Paid in capital in excess of par,

common stock.

1,750

?

Paid in capital, treasury stock

0

?

Retained earnings.

4,500

5,250

Treasury stock

0

(15,000)

Total stockholders equity. .

15,000

?

Required

1. Calculate the account balances for the following accounts:

a. Common Stock

b. Paid In Capital in Excess of Par, Common Stock

c. Paid In Capital, Treasury Stock

d. Stockholders Equity

2. How much net income did Denton Company report for 2003?

prepare a statement of stockholders equity for the year ended december 31 2003 577746

The condensed balance sheet of IBC Corporation at December 31, 2002, is shown below.

Assets

Cash.

$ 400,000

All other assets

1,042,000

$1,442,000

Liabilities and Stockholders

Current liabilities .

$ 164,000

Long term liabilities

230,000

$ 394,000

Contributed capital:

Common stock ($10 par, 100,000 shares authorized,

80,000 shares outstanding).

$ 800,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock . .

80,000

Retained earnings

168,000

$1,048,000

$1,442,000

During 2003, the following transactions affected stockholders equity:

Feb. 15 Purchased 2,000 shares of IBC outstanding common stock at $15 per share.

May 21 Sold 1,200 of the shares purchased on February 15 at $19 per share.

Sept. 15 Issued 8,000 shares of previously unissued common stock at $21 per share.

Dec. 21 Sold the remaining 800 shares of treasury stock at $22 per share.

Dec. 31 Closed net income of $85,360 to Retained Earnings. Revenues were $185,360; expenses were $100,000.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries to record the 2003 transactions.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2003.

3. Prepare a statement of stockholders equity for the year ended December 31, 2003.

is comprehensive income a good measure of the change in a company s value during the 577748

The following information relates to Pecos Yo Company:

Sales

$15,000

Cost of goods sold.

6,000

Other operating expenses

2,500

Interest expense .

400

Income tax expense.

3,000

In addition, the following events occurred during the year:

a. Pecos Yo Company has an investment portfolio for long term investment purposes. That portfolio decreased in value by $7,000 during the year.

b. Pecos Yo Company owns a substantial amount of land. During the year, the land increased in value by $11,000.

c. Pecos Yo Company has several foreign subsidiaries. The currencies in the countries where those subsidiaries are located declined in value (relative to the U.S. dollar) during the year. Accordingly, the computed value of the equity of those subsidiaries, in U.S. dollars, decreased by $5,000.

Reqiored

1. Compute Pecos Yo s comprehensive income for the year.

2. Interpretive Question: Is comprehensive income a good measure of the change in a company s value during the year?

what was the total amount of money raised during 2003 from the selling of stock assu 577749

The stockholders equity section of Glory Company s balance sheet was as follows as of December 31, 2003, and December 31, 2002:

Glory Company

Stockholders Equity Sections of Balance Sheet

December 31, 2003 and 2002 (in millions)

2003

2002

Preferred stock

$ 21.4

$ 21.4

Common stock

48.4

43.2

Paid in capital, various types

22.6

15.3

Retained earnings.

51.8

41.2

Subtotal ..

$144.2

$121.1

Accumulated foreign currency translation

adjustments

21.4

57.3

Net unrealized gains (losses) on investments in certain

debt and equity securities.

(46.4)

(8.8)

Total stockholders equity..

$119.2

$169.6

Based on the stockholders equity section for Glory Company, answer the following questions:

1. Do you believe Glory Company made a profit during the year 2003? Assuming that only net income and dividends changed the retained earnings balance from 2002 to 2003, by how much did net income exceed dividends?

2. What was the total amount of money raised during 2003 from the selling of stock? (Assume that only the selling of stock affected the contributed capital accounts.)

3. Did the market value of Glory Company s securities that affect the equity section increase or decrease in 2003? By how much?

4. Interpretive Question: The board of directors believes it should fire the current management of the company because total stockholders equity decreased substantially. Do you agree? Why or why not?

the stockholders equity section of hathaway corporation s december 31 2002 balance s 577750

The stockholders equity section of Hathaway Corporation s December 31, 2002, balance sheet is as follows:

Contributed capital:

Preferred stock (5%, $25 par, 2,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ 50,000

Common stock ($30 par, 10,000 shares issued and outstanding)

300,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock

10,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

100,000

Total contributed capital.

$460,000

Retained earnings.

340,000

Total stockholders equity.

$800,000

During 2003, Hathaway Corporation had the following transactions:

Feb. 1 Paid a cash dividend of $3 per share on common stock. The dividend was declared December 31, 2002.

Mar. 15 Declared and issued a 19% common stock dividend. The market price of the stock on this date was $40 per share.

June 1 Reacquired 3,000 shares of common stock at $35 per share.

Sept. 1 Reissued 500 shares of treasury stock at $40 per share.

Nov. 15 Reissued 500 shares of treasury stock at $32 per share.

Record the transactions.

determine the present value in each of the following situations 577670

1.Determine the present value in each of the following situations:

a.A $5,000 loan to be repaid in full at the end of three years. Interest on the loan is payable quarterly. The interest rate is 12% compounded quarterly.

b.A two year note for $8,000 bearing interest at an annual rate of 10%, compounded semiannually. Interest is payable semiannually.

c.A five year mortgage to be paid in monthly installments of $1,000. The interest rate is 12% compounded monthly.

2.Determine the future value in each of the following situations:

a.An investment of $10,000 today to earn interest at 6% compounded semiannually to provide for a down payment on a house five years from now. b.An investment of $25,000 today to earn interest at 8% compounded quarterly that is designated for a charitable contribution 10 years from now when the donor retires.

compute the present value for each of the following situations assuming an interest 577671

Compute the present value for each of the following situations, assuming an interest rate of 10% compounded annually. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

a.A single payment of $30,000 due on a mortgage five years from now.

b.A series of payments of $5,000 each, due at the end of each year for five years.

c.A five year, 10% loan of $25,000, with interest payable annually, and the principal due in five years.

2.Compute the future value amounts (rounded to the nearest dollar) in each of the following situations:

a.A $20,000 lump sum investment today that will earn interest at 10% compounded annually over five years.

b.A $5,000 lump sum investment today that will earn interest at 8%, compounded quarterly to provide money for a child s college education 15 years from now.

prepare the journal entries on november 30 and december 31 for the monthly payments 577675

On November 1, 2003, Hill Company arranges with an insurance company to borrow $200,000 on a 20 year mortgage to purchase land and a building to be used in its operations. The land and the building are pledged as collateral for the loan, which has an annual interest rate of 12%, compounded monthly. The monthly payments of $2,200 are made at the end of each month, beginning on November 30, 2003.

1.Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of the land and building, assuming that $40,000 of the purchase price is assignable to the land.

2.Prepare the journal entries on November 30 and December 31 for the monthly payments on the mortgage.

3. Interpretive Question: Explain generally how the remaining liability at December 31, 2003, will be reported on the company s balance sheet dated December 31, 2003.

prepare the journal entries for the following dates 577676

On January 1, 2002, Linda Lou Foods, Inc., leased a tractor. The lease agreement qualifies as a capital lease and calls for payments of $7,000 per year (payable each year on January 1, starting in 2003) for eight years. The annual interest rate on the lease is 8%. Linda Lou Foods uses a calendar year reporting period.

1.Prepare the journal entries for the following dates:

a.January 1, 2002, to record the leasing of the tractor.

b.December 31, 2002, to recognize the interest expense for the year 2002.

c.January 1, 2003, to record the first lease payment.

2.Prepare the appropriate journal entries at December 31, 2003, and January 1, 2004.

3. Interpretive Question: Explain briefly how the leased asset is accounted for annually.

prepare the journal entry to record the first lease payment on december 31 2003 and 577677

Exploration, Inc., leased a starship on January 2, 2003. Terms of the lease require annual payments of $41,208 per year for five years. The interest rate on the lease is 12%, and the first payment is due on December 31, 2003.

1.Compute the present value of the lease payments.

2.Assuming the lease qualifies as a capital lease, prepare the journal entry to record the lease.

3.Prepare the journal entry to record the first lease payment on December 31, 2003, and to depreciate the leased asset. Exploration, Inc., uses the straight line method for depreciating all long term assets.

4. Interpretive Question: How would the leased asset, and its associated liability, be disclosed on the balance sheet prepared on December 31, 2003?

prepare the liabilities section of the company s balance sheet 577681

The following list of accounts is taken from the adjusted trial balance of Goforth Company.

Accounts Payable

$45,000

Notes Payable (due in 6 months) .

24,000

Income Taxes Payable

18,000

Unearned Sales Revenue

27,500

Notes Payable (due in 2 years) . .

40,000

Prepaid Insurance

6,200

Accounts Receivable

53,000

Current Portion of Mortgage Payable.

12,300

Mortgage Payable (due beyond 1 year)

93,000

Retained Earnings

91,400

Property Taxes Payable

8,700

Salaries & Wages Payable

15,200

Sales Tax Payable

3,100

Required

Prepare the liabilities section of the company s balance sheet.

prepare the liabilities section of plymouth company s balance sheet at december 31 2 577682

The following amounts are shown on the Plymouth Company s adjusted trial balance for the year 2003:

Accounts Payable

$36,000

Property Taxes Payable.

6,300

Short Term Notes Payable

44,000

Mortgage Payable (due within 1 year)

28,000

Mortgage Payable (due after 1 year

300,000

Accrued Interest on Mortgage Payable

3,000

Lease Liability (Current Portion)

58,000

Lease Liability (Long Term)

414,000

Rent Payable

70,000

Income Taxes Payable

50,000

Federal & State Unemployment Taxes Payable.

16,000

Required

Prepare the liabilities section of Plymouth Company s balance sheet at December 31, 2003.

which of the ratios computed in 1 through 4 would be most useful to you in evaluatin 577683

The following information comes from the financial statements of Ron Winmill Company:

Long term debt

$180,000

Total liabilities

230,000

Total stockholders equity

150,000

Current assets

80,000

Earnings before income taxes

11,000

Interest expense

23,000

Required

Compute the following ratio values. State any assumptions that you make.

1.Current ratio.

2.Debt ratio.

3.Debt to equity ratio.

4.Times interest earned.

5. Interpretive Question: You are a bank manager considering making a new $20,000 loan to Ron Winmill that would replace part of the existing long term debt. You expect Ron Winmill to repay your loan in two years. Which of the ratios computed in (1) through (4) would be most useful to you in evaluating whether to make the loan to Ron Winmill?

compute the value for the ratio that you have designed 577684

The following information comes from the financial statements of Travis Campbell Company:

Total liabilities

100,000

Total stockholders equity

80,000

Property, plant, and equipment

110,000

Sales.

500,000

Earnings before income taxes

$11,000

Interest expense

23,000

In addition, Travis Campbell has a large number of operating leases. The payments on these operating leases total $30,000 per year for the next 10 years. The present value of the economic obligation associated with these operating leases is $180,000. Of course, because these are operating leases, this economic obligation is off the balance sheet. Compute the following ratio values:

1.Debt ratio. HINT: Remember the accounting equation.

2.Debt ratio assuming that Travis Campbell s operating leases are accounted for as capital leases.

3.Asset turnover (sales/total assets).

4.Asset turnover assuming that Travis Campbell s operating leases are accounted for as capital leases.

5. Interpretive Question: You are Travis Campbell s banker. You are concerned that the times interest earned ratio is not accurately reflecting the risk that Travis Campbell will not meet its fixed annual payments because most of those fixed payments are operating lease payments, not interest payments. Design an alternative ratio that will reflect the fact that, like interest payments, operating lease payments are fixed obligations that must be covered through operating profits each year. Compute the value for the ratio that you have designed.

determine the price at which the bonds would be sold 577688

Cyprus Corporation issued $150,000 of bonds on January 1, 2003, to raise funds to buy some special machinery. The maturity date of the bonds is January 1, 2008, with interest payable each January 1 and July 1. The stated rate of interest is 10%. When the bonds were sold, the effective rate of interest was 12%. The company s financial reporting year ends December 31.

1.Determine the price at which the bonds would be sold.

2.Prepare the amortization schedule using the effective interest method.

3.Prepare a comparative schedule of interest expense for each year (2003 2008) for the effective interest and straight line methods of amortization.

4.Record the journal entry for the last payment using the amortization schedule in (2).

5.Record the journal entry for the retirement of the bonds.

6. Interpretive Question: Is the difference between the interest expense each year between the straight line and effective interest methods sufficient to require the use of the effective interest method? How do you think this question would be answered in practice?

prepare the journal entry to retire the bonds on march 1 2005 assuming all interest 577691

Foster Corporation issued three year bonds with a $180,000 face value on March 1, 2002, in order to pay for a new computer system. The bonds mature on March 1, 2005, with interest payable on March 1 and September 1. The contract rate of interest is 10%. (Interest is compounded semiannually.) When the bonds were sold, the effective rate of interest was 12%. The company s fiscal year ends on February 28.

1.At what price were the bonds issued based on the information presented?

2.Prepare an amortization schedule using the effective interest method.

3.Prepare a schedule of interest expense for each year (2002 2005), comparing the annual interest expense for straight line and effective interest amortization.

4.Using the amortization schedule prepared in (2), prepare the journal entry to record the interest payment on September 1, 2002.

5.Prepare the adjusting journal entry to record accrued interest on February 28, 2003.

6.Prepare the journal entry to retire the bonds on March 1, 2005, assuming all interest has been paid prior to retirement.

amity construction company issued 100 000 of 10 bonds on january 1 2003 the maturity 577692

Amity Construction Company issued $100,000 of 10% bonds on January 1, 2003. The maturity date of the bonds is January 1, 2013. Interest is payable January 1 and July 1. The bonds were sold at 111.4 on July 1, 2003. The company uses the straight line method of amortizing bond premiums and discounts.

1.Make the required journal entries for each of the following dates:

a.July 1, 2003.

b.December 31, 2003.

c.January 1, 2004.

d.July 1, 2004.

2.Because of a substantial decline in the market rate of interest, Amity Construction Company purchased all the bonds on the open market at face value (100) on July 1, 2006. The following entry had just been made on that day:

Bond Interest Expense

4,400

Premium on Bonds

600

Cash

5,000

Made semiannual interest payment on the bonds and amortized bond premium for six months. Prepare the journal entry to record the retirement of the bonds on July 1, 2006.

what was the carrying value of this bond issue on the balance sheet of the company a 577693

Durham Corporation was authorized to issue $500,000 of 8%, four year bonds, dated May 1, 2003. All the bonds were sold on that date when the effective interest rate was 10%. Interest is payable on May 1 and November 1 each year. The company follows a policy of amortizing premium or discount using the effective interest method. The company closes its books on December 31 of each year.

1.Calculate the issuance price of the bonds.

2.Prepare an amortization schedule that covers the life of the bond.

3.Prepare journal entries at the following dates based on the information shown in the amortization schedule prepared for requirement (2).

a.December 31, 2003.

b.May 1, 2004.

c.November 1, 2004.

d.December 31, 2004.

4.Based on the journal entries prepared for requirement (3), how much interest expense related to this bond issue did the company report on its income statement for the year 2004?

5.What was the carrying value of this bond issue on the balance sheet of the company at December 31, 2004?

6. Interpretive Question: Explain why another company in the same industry, which issued bonds with the same amount of face value, the same date of issuance, and the same stated rate of interest, might have had an issuance price of more or less than the price you computed for the issuance of the Durham Corporation bonds.

bonds with a face value of 200 000 and a stated interest rate of 12 were issued on m 577694

Bonds with a face value of $200,000 and a stated interest rate of 12% were issued on March 1, 2003. The bonds pay interest each February 28 and August 31 and mature on March 1, 2013. The issuing company uses the calendar year for financial reporting. Using these data, complete the following tables for each of the conditions listed. (Show computations and assume straight line amortization.)

1.The bonds sold at face value.

2.The bonds sold at 97.

3.The bonds sold at 103.

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

Cash received at issuance date

______

______

______

Total cash paid to bondholders through maturity

______

______

______

Income Statement for 2003:

Bond interest expense.

______

______

______

Balance Sheet at December 31, 2003:

______

______

______

Long term liabilities:

Bonds payable, 12%.

Unamortized discount.

______

______

______

Unamortized premium..

______

______

______

Bond carrying value.

______

______

______

Approximate effective interest rate

______

______

______

*Round to the nearest tenth of a percent.

last year shades international a hypothetical company invented the famous shades sun 577709

Last year, Shades International (a hypothetical company) invented the famous Shades Sunglasses that are widely popular around the world and especially in Japan and the Far East. Citizens of these countries love the new age sunglasses and are buying them as fast as they can. Shades International owns the patent but contracts out to other companies to manufacture the glasses. Shades International also leases its research and development facility, the only building it occupies. Royalties from the glasses exceeded $10 million last year and are expected to increase dramatically this year. Selected data (in millions of dollars) from Shades International s financial statements are as follows:

Patent

$0.3

Other assets

0.9

Total liabilities

4.5

Total stockholders equity

(3.3)

In the next two months, Shades International will be offering stock for sale to the public. Your friend is encouraging you to buy some of the stock. You are leery about the negative stockholders equity balance. Is Shades International worth even considering as a possible investment?

what is the total amount of dividends paid to common and preferred stockholders duri 577720

During 2003, Doxey Corporation had the following transactions and related events:

Jan. 15 Issued 6,500 shares of common stock at par ($16 per share), bringing the total number of shares outstanding to 121,300.

Feb. 6 Declared a 50 cent per share dividend on common stock for stockholders of record on March 6.

Mar. 6 Date of record.

8 Pedro Garcia, a prominent banker, purchased 20,000 shares of Doxey Corporation common stock from the company for $346,000.

Apr. 6 Paid dividends declared on February 6.

June 19 Reacquired 800 shares of common stock as treasury stock at a total cost of $9,350.

Sept. 6 Declared dividends of 55 cents per share to be paid to common stockholders of record on October 15, 2003. Oct. 6 The Dow Jones Industrial Average plummeted 300 points, and Doxey s stock price fell $3 per share. 15 Date of record.

Nov. 16 Paid dividends declared on September 6. Dec. 15 Declared and paid a 6% cash dividend on 18,000 outstanding shares of preferred stock (par value $32). Given this information:

Reqiored

1. Prepare the journal entries for these transactions.

2.B632:B633 What is the total amount of dividends paid to common and preferred stockholders during 2003?

the following numbers are for three different companies 577721

The following numbers are for three different companies:

A

B

C

Total assets. .

$1,000

$2,500

$2,000

Cash dividends

50

200

400

Total liabilities

600

$800

31 Oct

Net income . .

200

500

500

For each company, compute the dividend payout ratio.

what is the dollar amount to be reported for preferred stock 577722

The stockholders equity section of Kay Corporation at the end of the current year showed:

Preferred stock (6%, $40 par, 10,000 shares authorized,

6,000 shares issued and outstanding).

$ ?

Common stock ($6 par, 80,000 shares authorized, 53,000 issued,

52,650 shares outstanding

318,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock.

?

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

129,000

Retained earnings.

86,000

Less treasury stock (350 shares at cost)

(2,000)

Total stockholders equity

$ ?

1. What is the dollar amount to be reported for preferred stock?

2. What is the average price for which common stock was issued? (Round to the nearest cent.)

3. If preferred stock was issued at an average price of $43 per share, what amount should appear in the paid in capital in excess of par, preferred stock account?

4. What is the average cost per share of treasury stock? (Round to the nearest cent.)

5. Assuming that the preferred stock was issued for an average price of $43 per share, what is total stockholders equity?

6. If net income for the year were $67,000 and if only dividends on preferred stock were paid, by how much would retained earnings increase?

prepare the stockholders equity section of the december 31 2003 balance sheet for sp 577723

The following account balances, before any closing entries, appear on the books of Spring Company as of December 31, 2003:

Retained Earnings (balance at Jan. 1, 2003

$240,000

Dividends, Preferred Stock

15,000

Dividends, Common Stock

35,000

Common Stock ($5 par, 100,000 shares authorized,

70,000 issued and outstanding).

350,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par, Common Stock.

350,000

Preferred Stock (6%, $50 par, 50,000 shares authorized,

5,000 issued and outstanding).

250,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par, Preferred Stock.

25,000

Based on these account balances, and assuming net income for 2003 of $80,000, prepare the stockholders equity section of the December 31, 2003, balance sheet for Spring Company.

what contributed most to the increased equity from 2002 to 2003 577725

Red Rider Company has the following stockholders equity section on its balance sheet as of December 31, 2003 and 2002.

2003

2002

Stockholders Equity

Preferred stock.

$ 2.0

$ 2.0

Common stock.

32.0

32.0

Paid in capital various

12.4

11.2

Retained earnings.

24.5

24.6

Subtotal

$ 70.9

$69.8

Accumulated foreign currency translation adjustments.

5.2

4.5

Net unrealized gains on investments in certain debt

and equity securities

25.6

20.0

Total stockholders equity

$101.7

$94.3

Based on this stockholders equity section, answer the following questions:

1. At the end of 2003, what was the total amount of equity financing provided by Red Rider s investors?

2. At the end of 2003, how much of Red Rider s earnings had not been distributed to investors?

3. What is the total amount of other equity items contained in the 2003 stockholders equity section?

4. What contributed most to the increased equity from 2002 to 2003?

prepare the entries on mendenhall s books to record the sale and related collection 577607

Presented below are two independent situations.

(a) On January 6, Mendenhall Co. sells merchandise on account to Miles Inc. for $9,000, terms 2/10, n/30. On January 16, Miles Inc. pays the amount due. Prepare the entries on Mendenhall’s books to record the sale and related collection.

(b) On January 10, Markus Klinko uses his Indrani Co. credit card to purchase merchandise from Indrani Co. for $9,000. On February 10, Klinko is billed for the amount due of $9,000. On February 12, Klinko pays $5,000 on the balance due. On March 10, Klinko is billed for the amount due, including interest at 2% per month on the unpaid balance as of February 12. Prepare the entries on Indrani Co.’s books related to the transactions that occurred on January 10, February 12, and March 10.

the ledger of g k reid company at the end of the current year shows accounts receiva 577608

The ledger of G.K. Reid Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $120,000, Sales Revenue $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $30,000.

Instructions

(a) If G.K. Reid uses the direct write off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming G.K. Reid determines that L. Gaga’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.

(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.

(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.

determine the total estimated uncollectibles 577609

Lohan Company has accounts receivable of $93,100 at March 31. An analysis of the accounts shows the following information.

Month of Sale

Balance, March 31

March

$60,000

February

17,600

January

8,500

Prior to January

7,000

$93,100

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,200 prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company’s estimate of bad debts is shown on the next page.

Estimated Percentage

Age of Accounts

Uncollectible

1–30 days

2.0%

31–60 days

5.0%

61–90 days

30.0%

Over 90 days

50.0%

Instructions

(a) Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31 to record bad debts expense.

indicate the statement presentation of the financing charges and the credit card ser 577614

Bowie Stores accepts both its own and national credit cards. During the year, the following selected summary transactions occurred.

Jan.

15

Made Bowie credit card sales totaling $18,000. (There were no balances prior to

January 15.)

20

Made Visa credit card sales (service charge fee 2%) totaling $4,300.

Feb.

10

Collected $10,000 on Bowie credit card sales.

15

Added finance charges of 1% to Bowie credit card balance.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for Bowie Stores.

(b) Indicate the statement presentation of the financing charges and the credit card service charge expense for Bowie Stores.

journalize the transactions for stroup supply co 577615

Stroup Supply Co. has the following transactions related to notes receivable during the last 2 months of 2012.

Nov.

1

Loaned $15,000 cash to Jorge Perez on a 1 year, 10% note.

Dec.

11

Sold goods to Armle Hammer, Inc., receiving a $6,750, 90 day, 8% note.

16

Received a $4,000, 6 month, 9% note in exchange for Max Weinberg’s outstanding

accounts receivable.

31

Accrued interest revenue on all notes receivable.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for Stroup Supply Co.

(b) Record the collection of the Perez note at its maturity in 2013.

record the following transactions for conando co in the general journal 577616

Record the following transactions for Conando Co. in the general journal.

2012

May

1

Received a $7,500, 1 year, 10% note in exchange for Andy Richter’s

outstanding accounts receivable.

Dec.

31

Accrued interest on the Richter note.

2013

Closed the interest revenue account.

May

1

Received principal plus interest on the Richter note. (No interest has been accrued in 2013.)

prepare journal entries to record the transactions 577617

La Bamba Company had the following select transactions.

Apr.

1, 2012

Accepted Shatner Company’s 1 year, 12% note in settlement of a $20,000

account receivable.

July

1, 2012

Loaned $25,000 cash to Richie Rosenberg on a 9 month, 10% note.

Dec.

31, 2012

Accrued interest on all notes receivable.

Apr.

1, 2013

Received principal plus interest on the Shatner note.

Apr.

1, 2013

Richie Rosenberg dishonored its note; La Bamba expects it will eventually collect.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries to record the transactions. La Bamba prepares adjusting entries once a year on December 31.

compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2012 577620

At December 31, 2011, Mernt Co. reported the following information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$960,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

80,000

During 2012, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1. Sales on account

$3,200,000

2. Sales returns and allowances

50,000

3. Collections of accounts receivable

2,810,000

4. Write offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

90,000

5. Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

24,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.

(b) Enter the January 1, 2012, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2012, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that expected bad debts are $115,000.

(d) Compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2012.

what is the weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense 577621

Information related to Jordan Schlansky Company for 2012 is summarized below.

Total credit sales

$2,200,000

Accounts receivable at December 31

825,000

Bad debts written off

33,000

Instructions

(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Jordan Schlansky Company report if it uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts?

(b) Assume that Jordan Schlansky Company estimates its bad debts expense to be 2% of credit sales. What amount of bad debts expense will Jordan Schlansky record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $4,000?

(c) Assume that Jordan Schlansky Company estimates its bad debts expense based on 6% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will Jordan Schlansky record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $3,000?

(d) Assume the same facts as in (c), except that there is a $3,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Jordan Schlansky record?

(e) What is the weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense?

calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information 577623

Pender Inc. uses the allowance method to estimate uncollectible accounts receivable. The company produced the following aging of the accounts receivable at year end.

Not

Number of Days Outstanding

Total

0–30

31–60

61–90

91–120

Over 120

Accounts receivable

$ 22,000

77,000

46,000

39,000

23,000

$15,000

% uncollectible

57,000

1%

4%

5%

8%

10%

Estimated bad debts

Instructions

(a) Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.

(b) Prepare the year end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the current balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $8,000 debit.

(c) Of the above accounts, $5,000 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible account.

(d) The company collects $5,000 subsequently on a specific account that had previously been determined to be uncollectible in (c). Prepare the journal entry(ies) necessary to restore the account and record the cash collection.

(e) Comment on how your answers to (a)–(d) would change if Pender Inc. used 3% of total accounts receivable, rather than aging the accounts receivable. What are the advantages to the company of aging the accounts receivable rather than applying a percentage to total accounts receivable?

show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at october 31 577625

Manatee Company closes its books monthly. On September 30, selected ledger account balances are:

Notes Receivable

$33,000

Interest Receivable

170

Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face

Term

Interest

Aug. 16

M. Bear Inc.

$ 8,000

60 days

8%

Aug. 25

Pope Co.

9,000

60 days

10%

Sept. 30

Quackers Corp.

16,000

6 months

9%

Interest is computed using a 360 day year. During October, the following transactions were completed.

Oct.

7

Made sales of $6,900 on Manatee credit cards.

12

Made sales of $900 on MasterCard credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.

15

Added $460 to Manatee customer balance for finance charges on unpaid balances.

15

Received payment in full from M. Bear Inc. on the amount due.

24

Received notice that the Pope note has been dishonored. (Assume that Pope is

Instructions

(a) Journalize the October transactions and the October 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable.

(b) Enter the balances at October 1 in the receivable accounts. Post the entries to all of the receivable accounts.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at October 31.

on january 1 2012 pierre company had accounts receivable 139 000 notes receivable 25 577626

On January 1, 2012, Pierre Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $25,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Stacy Richter Company. It is a 4 month, 12% note dated December 31, 2011. Pierre Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan.

5

Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Bernard Company, terms n/15.

20

Accepted Bernard Company’s $20,000, 3 month, 9% note for balance due.

Feb.

18

Sold $8,000 of merchandise to LaBamba Company and accepted LaBamba’s $8,000,

6 month, 9% note for the amount due.

Apr.

20

Collected Bernard Company note in full.

30

Received payment in full from Stacy Richter Company on the amount due.

May

25

Accepted Cloppy Inc.’s $4,000, 3 month, 7% note in settlement of a past due balance on account.

Aug.

18

Received payment in full from LaBamba Company on note due.

25

The Cloppy Inc. note was dishonored. Cloppy Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.

Sept.

1

Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Bessie Lou Company and accepted a $12,000, 6 month,

10% note for the amount due.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year 2012 577627

At December 31, 2011, Artie Kendall Imports reported the following information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$250,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

15,000

During 2012, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1. Sales on account

$2,400,000

2. Sales returns and allowances

45,000

3. Collections of accounts receivable

2,250,000

4. Write offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

12,000

5. Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

3,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.

(b) Enter the January 1, 2012, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. Post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2012, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that estimated bad debts are $22,000.

(d) Compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year 2012.

what amount of bad debts expense will gustavo company report if it uses the direct w 577628

Information related to Gustavo Company for 2012 is summarized below.

Total credit sales

$1,100,000

Accounts receivable at December 31

369,000

Bad debts written off

22,150

Instructions

(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Gustavo Company report if it uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts?

(b) Assume that Gustavo Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense to be 2% of credit sales. What amount of bad debts expense will Gustavo record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $3,000?

(c) Assume that Gustavo Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense based on 6% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will Gustavo Company record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $4,000?

(d) Assume the same facts as in (c), except that there is a $2,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Gustavo record?

(e) What is the weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense?

journalize and post to the allowance account the following events and transactions i 577629

Presented below is an aging schedule for Stol Company.

Not

Number of Days Past Due

Customer

Total

Yet Due

1–30

31–60

61–90

Over 90

Ang

$ 30,000

$ 13,500

$16,500

Bistro

75,000

$ 45,000

Conesie

45,000

22,500

7,500

$45,000

Dagova

57,000

$57,000

Others

189,000

138,000

22,500

19,500

9,000

$396,000

$205,500

$43,500

$36,000

$45,000

$66,000

Estimated

Percentage

Uncollectible

Total Estimated

2%

6%

10%

25%

50%

Bad Debts

$ 54,570

$ 4,110

$ 2,610

$ 3,600

$ 11,250

$33,000

At December 31, 2012, the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a credit of $16,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize and post the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2012.

(b) Journalize and post to the allowance account the following events and transactions in the year 2013.

(1) March 1, a $1,900 customer balance originating in 2012 is judged uncollectible.

(2) May 1, a check for $1,900 is received from the customer whose account was written off as uncollectible on March 1.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entry for bad debts on December 31, 2013. Assume that the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a debit of $2,000, and the aging schedule indicates that total estimated bad debts will be $42,300.

smithfield corportation owns and operates three sawmills that make lumber for buildi 577630

Smithfield Corportation owns and operates three sawmills that make lumber for building homes. The operations consist of cutting logs in the forest, hauling them to the various sawmills, sawing the lumber, and shipping it to building supply warehouses throughout the western part of the United States. To haul the logs, Smithfield has several trucks. Relevant data pertaining to one truck are:

a. Date of purchase, July 1, 2001.

b. Cost:

Truck.

$60,000

Trailer

20,000

Paint job (to match company colors)

1,500

Sales tax..

3,500

c. Estimated useful life of the truck, 150,000 miles.

d. Estimated salvage value, zero.

e. 2002 expenditures on truck:

(1) Spent $5,000 on tires, oil changes, greasing, and other miscellaneous items.

(2) Spent $22,000 to overhaul the engine and replace the transmission on January 1,

2002. This expenditure increased the life of the truck by 135,000 miles.

Record journal entries to account for:

1. The purchase of the truck.

2. The 2001 depreciation expense using units of production depreciation and assuming the truck was driven 45,000 miles.

3. The expenditures relating to the truck during 2002.

4. The 2002 depreciation expense using the units of production method and assuming the truck was driven 60,000 miles.

hamburg company recently began business and purchased a large facility to make beach 577647

Hamburg Company recently began business and purchased a large facility to make beach clothing. Hamburg Company managed to make a small profit in its initial year of operations, although it used all its cash to purchase inventory and equipment. After preparing its tax return for the year, Hamburg s managers realized that they could pay less taxes than they thought. Because IRS accelerated depreciation methods allow for higher depreciation expense than the straight line method the company is using for financial reporting purposes, Hamburg can claim more depreciation expense than it thought it could and can reduce taxable income by $30,000. However, Hamburg s managers know that the two depreciation methods will eventually even out because the difference is only temporary and will create a deferred income tax liability, which must be recorded on the books. The managers are very conservative, though, and would rather pay the additional taxes now than record a liability that must be paid in the future, even if they must borrow the money from a bank to pay the extra taxes. They have come to you for advice. What would you tell them?

financing alternative would you recommend to the company if you were an investor wou 577648

Berlin Company is in a world of hurt. For the past 15 years, the company has been the exclusive toy supplier to Infants R Us toy stores. Unfortunately for Berlin Company, Infants R Us just declared bankruptcy and went out of business. Berlin is the supplier for a few local toy stores, but Infants R Us was by far its largest customer. Berlin s managers believe that they can save the company if they can raise enough money to develop a new product line of a popular toy, Nano Babies. Developing the new product line will require a considerable investment, however. Berlin is trying to decide the best way to finance the investment. It has found a bank that will loan it the money at 18%, a very high rate but the only one it can get because of its precarious financial position. Berlin can also issue bonds to raise the money, but because of investors concerns about the future viability of the company, the only kind of bonds investors will buy are high interest junk bonds at an interest rate of 17%. Even then, there is concern that the bonds will be discounted when they are marketed. Which financing alternative would you recommend to the company? If you were an investor, would you buy Berlin Company s bonds?

the following information comes from the financial statements of karlla peterson com 577664

The following information comes from the financial statements of Karlla Peterson Company:

Total liabilities

$100,000

Total stockholders equity

80,000

In addition, Karlla Peterson has a large number of operating leases. The payments on these operating leases total $20,000 per year for the next 15 years. The present value of the economic obligation associated with these operating leases is $150,000. Of course, because these are operating leases, this economic obligation is off the balance sheet.

Compute the following ratio values:

1.Debt ratio. HINT: Remember the accounting equation.

2.Debt to equity ratio.

3.Debt to equity ratio assuming that Karlla Peterson s operating leases are accounted for as capital leases.

4.Debt ratio assuming that Karlla Peterson s operating leases are accounted for as capital leases.

the following is a partially completed amortization schedule prepared for the ligget 577668

The following is a partially completed amortization schedule prepared for the Liggett Company to account for its three year bond issue with a face value of $50,000. The schedule covf494 ers the first three semiannual interest payment dates. Amounts are rounded to the nearest dollar. Compute the missing numbers.

Interest

Bond

Premium

Bonds Payable

Year

Paid

Expense

Amortized

Carrying Value

0

$52,537

1/2

(1)

$2,627

(2)

52,164

1

$3,000

(3)

$392

(4)

11/2

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements 577527

Mose Office Supply Company recently changed its system of internal control over cash disbursements. The system includes the following features.

Instead of being unnumbered and manually prepared, all checks must now be prenumbered and written by using the new checkwriting machine purchased by the company. Before a check can be issued, each invoice must have the approval of Linda Purl, the purchasing agent, and Idris Elba, the receiving department supervisor. Checks must be signed by either Vivianne Collins, the treasurer, or Nick D’Agosto, the assistant treasurer. Before signing a check, the signer is expected to compare the amount of the check with the amount on the invoice.

After signing a check, the signer stamps the invoice PAID and inserts within the stamp, the date, check number, and amount of the check. The “paid” invoice is then sent to the accounting department for recording.

Blank checks are stored in a safe in the treasurer’s office. The combination to the safe is known only by the treasurer and assistant treasurer. Each month, the bank statement is reconciled with the bank balance per books by the assistant chief accountant. All employees who handle or account for cash are bonded.

Instructions

Identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements of Mose Office Supply Company.

what internal control features exist in a petty cash fund 577528

Ursula Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. The following transactions occurred over a 2 month period.

July

1

Established petty cash fund by writing a check on Scranton Bank for $200.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $196.00. On this date the fund consisted of $4.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $94.00, postage expense $42.40, entertainment expense $46.60, and miscellaneous expense $11.20.

31

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $192.00. At this date, the fund consisted of $8.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $82.10, charitable contributions expense $45.00, postage expense $25.50, and miscellaneous expense $39.40.

Aug.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $187.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $13.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $75.60, entertainment expense $43.00, postage expense $33.00, and miscellaneous expense $37.00.

16

Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $300 by writing a check for $100.

31

Replenished petty cash fund by writing a check for $284.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $16 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: postage expense $140.00, travel expense $95.60, and freight out $47.10.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.

(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.

(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?

prepare the necessary adjusting entries for sabre company at may 31 2012 577529

On May 31, 2012, Sabre Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50. The bank statement from New York State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,404.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.

2. Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Sabre Company for the correct amount.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $576.25. Deposits in transit were $1,916.15.

4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Carol Stills on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Sabre Company for $658.

5. A $2,500 note receivable was collected by the bank for Sabre Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.

6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Rapier Company to Tom Lujak for $800 that was incorrectly charged to Sabre Company by the bank.

7. On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Jo Bennett, a customer, to Sabre Company on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Sabre Company at May 31, 2012.

prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation 577530

The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Helene Company at November 30, 2012, was as follows.

HELENE COMPANY

Bank Reconciliation

November 30, 2012

Cash balance per bank

$14,367.90

Add: Deposits in transit

2,530.20

16,898.10

Less: Outstanding checks

Check Number

Check Amount

3451

$2,260.40

3470

720.10

3471

844.50

3472

1,426.80

3474

1,050.00

6,301.80

Adjusted cash balance per bank

$10,596.30

The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at November 30.

Bank Statement

Checks

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

12 1

3451

$ 2,260.40

12 1

$ 2,530.20

12 2

3471

844.50

12 4

1,211.60

12 7

3472

1,426.80

12 8

2,365.10

12 4

3475

1,640.70

12 16

2,672.70

12 8

3476

1,300.00

12 21

2,945.00

12 10

3477

2,130.00

12 26

2,567.30

12 15

3479

3,080.00

12 29

2,836.00

12 27

3480

600.00

12 30

1,025.00

12 30

3482

475.50

Total

$18,152.90

12 29

3483

1,140.00

12 31

3485

540.80

Total

$15,438.70

The cash records per books for December showed the following.

Cash Receipts

Cash Payments Journal

Journal

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

12 1

3475

$1,640.70

12 20

3482

$ 475.50

12 3

$ 1,211.60

12 2

3476

1,300.00

12 22

3483

1,140.00

12 7

2,365.10

12 2

3477

2,130.00

12 23

3484

798.00

12 15

2,672.70

12 4

3478

621.30

12 24

3485

450.80

12 20

2,954.00

12 8

3479

3,080.00

12 30

3486

1,889.50

12 25

2,567.30

12 10

3480

600.00

Total

$14,933.20

12 28

2,836.00

12 17

3481

807.40

12 30

1,025.00

12 31

1,690.40

Total

$17,322.10

The bank statement contained two memoranda:

1. A credit of $4,145 for the collection of a $4,000 note for Helene Company plus interest of $160 and less a collection fee of $15. Helene Company has not accrued any interest on the note.

2. A debit of $572.80 for an NSF check written by L. Purl, a customer. At December 31, the check had not been redeposited in the bank.

At December 31, the cash balance per books was $12,485.20, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $20,154.30. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Helene Company.

Instructions

(a) Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure, prepare a bank reconciliation at December 31.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation.

identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts 577533

Magical Elves Theater is located in the Brooklyn Mall. A cashier’s booth is located near the entrance to the theater. Three cashiers are employed. One works from 1–5 p.m., another from 5–9 p.m. The shifts are rotated among the three cashiers. The cashiers receive cash from customers and operate a machine that ejects serially numbered tickets. The rolls of tickets are inserted and locked into the machine by the theater manager at the beginning of each

cashier’s shift.

After purchasing a ticket, the customer takes the ticket to an usher stationed at the entrance of the theater lobby some 60 feet from the cashier’s booth. The usher tears the ticket in half, admits the customer, and returns the ticket stub to the customer. The other half of the ticket is dropped into a locked box by the usher.

At the end of each cashier’s shift, the theater manager removes the ticket rolls from the machine and makes a cash count. The cash count sheet is initialed by the cashier. At the end of the day, the manager deposits the receipts in total in a bank night deposit vault located in the mall.

The manager also sends copies of the deposit slip and the initialed cash count sheets to the theater company treasurer for verification and to the company’s accounting department. Receipts from the first shift are stored in a safe located in the manager’s office.

Instructions

(a) Identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts transactions of the Magical Elves Theater.

(b) If the usher and cashier decide to collaborate to misappropriate cash, what actions might they take?

what internal control features exist in a petty cash fund 577534

Chow Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. The following transactions occurred over a 2 month period.

July

1

Established petty cash fund by writing a check on China Bank for $100.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $96.90. On this date, the fund consisted of $3.10 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $51.00, postage expense $20.50, entertainment expense $23.10, and miscellaneous expense $4.10.

31

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $95.90. At this date, the fund consisted of $4.10 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $43.50, charitable contributions expense $20.00, postage expense $20.10, and miscellaneous expense $12.30.

Aug.

15

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $98.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $2.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $40.20, entertainment expense $21.00, postage expense $14.00, and miscellaneous expense $19.80.

16

Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $150 by writing a check for $50.

31

Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $137.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $13 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight out $74.00, entertainment expense $43.20, and postage expense $17.70.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.

(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.

(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?

on may 31 2012 the company s cash account per its general ledger showed the followin 577535

Rohatyn Genetics Company of Lancaster, Wisconsin, spreads herbicides and applies liquid fertilizer for local farmers. On May 31, 2012, the company’s Cash account per its general ledger showed the following balance.

CASH

NO. 101

Date

Explanation

Ref.

Debit

Credit

Balance

May 31

Balance

13,287

The bank statement from Lancaster State Bank on that date showed the following balance.

LANCASTER STATE BANK

Checks and Debits

Deposits and Credits

Daily Balance

XXX

XXX

5/31

13,332

prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation 577536

The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Williams Company at October 31, 2012, was as follows.

WILLIAMS COMPANY

Bank Reconciliation

October 31, 2012

Cash balance per bank

$6,000

Add: Deposits in transit

842

6,842

Less: Outstanding checks

Check Number

Check Amount

2451

$700

2470

396

2471

464

2472

270

2474

578

2,408

Adjusted cash balance per bank

$4,434

The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at October 31. The November bank statement showed the following checks and deposits:

Bank Statement

Checks

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

11 1

2470

$ 396

11 1

$ 842

11 2

2471

464

11 4

666

11 5

2474

578

11 8

545

11 4

2475

903

11 13

1,416

11 8

2476

1,556

11 18

810

11 10

2477

330

11 21

1,624

11 15

2479

980

11 25

1,412

11 18

2480

714

11 28

908

11 27

2481

382

11 30

652

11 30

2483

317

Total

$8,875

11 29

2486

495

Total

$7,115

The cash records per books for November showed the following.

Cash Receipts

Cash Payments Journal

Journal

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

11 1

2475

$ 903

11 20

2483

$ 317

11 3

$ 666

11 2

2476

1,556

11 22

2484

460

11 7

545

11 2

2477

330

11 23

2485

525

11 12

1,416

11 4

2478

300

11 24

2486

495

11 17

810

11 8

2479

890

11 29

2487

210

11 20

1,642

11 10

2480

714

11 30

2488

635

11 24

1,412

11 15

2481

382

Total

$8,067

11 27

908

11 18

2482

350

11 29

652

11 30

1,541

Total

$9,592

The bank statement contained two bank memoranda:

1. A credit of $1,375 for the collection of a $1,300 note for Williams Company plus interest of $91 and less a collection fee of $16. Williams Company has not accrued any interest on the note.

2. A debit for the printing of additional company checks $34.

At November 30, the cash balance per books was $5,958, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $9,100. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Williams Company.

Instructions

(a) Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure described on pages 384–385, prepare a bank reconciliation at November 30.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation.

journalize the adjusting entries to be made by trong company at august 31 assume tha 577537

Trong Company’s bank statement from Nguyen National Bank at August 31, 2012, shows the information below.

Balance, August 1

$11,284

Bank credit memoranda:

August deposits

47,521

Collection of note

Checks cleared in August

46,475

receivable plus $105

Balance, August 31

16,856

interest

$4,505

Interest earned

41

Bank debit memorandum:

Safety deposit box rent

20

A summary of the Cash account in the ledger for August shows: Balance, August 1, $10,959; receipts $50,050; disbursements $47,794; and balance, August 31, $13,215. Analysis reveals that the only reconciling items on the July 31 bank reconciliation were a deposit in transit for $2,600 and outstanding checks of $2,925. The deposit in transit was the first deposit recorded by the bank in August. In addition, you determine that there were two errors involving company checks drawn in August: (1) A check for $340 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in August was journalized and posted for $430. (2) A salary check to an employee for $275 was recorded by the bank for $277.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at August 31.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries to be made by Trong Company at August 31. Assume that interest on the note has not been accrued by the company.

what principles of internal control were violated in this case 577538

Braun Company is a very profitable small business. It has not, however, given much consideration to internal control. For example, in an attempt to keep clerical and office expenses to a minimum, the company has combined the jobs of cashier and bookkeeper. As a result, Judith Tan handles all cash receipts, keeps the accounting records, and prepares the monthly bank reconciliations.

The balance per the bank statement on October 31, 2012, was $15,453. Outstanding checks were: no. 62 for $107.74, no. 183 for $127.50, no. 284 for $215.26, no. 862 for $162.10, no. 863 for $192.78, and no. 864 for $140.49. Included with the statement was a credit memorandum of $340 indicating the collection of a note receivable for Braun Company by the bank on October 25. This memorandum has not been recorded by Braun Company.

The company’s ledger showed one cash account with a balance of $18,608.81. The balance included undeposited cash on hand. Because of the lack of internal controls, Tan took for personal use all of the undeposited receipts in excess of $3,226.18. She then prepared the following bank reconciliation in an effort to conceal her theft of cash.

BANK RECONCILIATION

Cash balance per books, October 31

$18,608.81

Add: Outstanding checks

No. 862

$162.10

No. 863

192.78

No. 864

140.49

410.37

19,019.18

Less: Undeposited receipts

3,226.18

Unadjusted balance per bank, October 31

15,793.00

Less: Bank credit memorandum

340.00

Cash balance per bank statement, October 31

$15,453.00

Instructions

(a) Prepare a correct bank reconciliation. (Hint: Deduct the amount of the theft from the adjusted balance per books.)

(b) Indicate the three ways that Tan attempted to conceal the theft and the dollar amount pertaining to each method.

(c) What principles of internal control were violated in this case?

journalize the adjusting entries resulting from the bank reconciliation and adjustme 577539

On December 1, 2012, Bluemound Company had the following account balances.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$18,200

Accumulated Depreciation—

Notes Receivable

2,200

Equipment

$ 3,000

Accounts Receivable

7,500

Accounts Payable

6,100

Inventory

16,000

Owner’s Capital

64,400

Prepaid Insurance

1,600

$73,500

Equipment

28,000

$73,500

During December, the company completed the following transactions.

Dec.

7

Received $3,600 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).

12

Purchased merchandise on account from Klump Co. $12,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

17

Sold merchandise on account $15,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise

sold was $10,000.

19

Paid salaries $2,500.

22

Paid Klump Co. in full, less discount.

26

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on December 17.

Adjustment data:

1. Depreciation $200 per month.

2. Insurance expired $400.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions. (Assume a perpetual inventory system.)

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions.

Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Sales Revenue, and Sales Discounts.

(c) The statement from Jackson County Bank on December 31 showed a balance of $21,994. A comparison of the bank statement with the Cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank collected a note receivable of $2,200 for Bluemound Company on December 15.

2. The December 31 receipts of $2,736 were not included in the bank deposits for December.

The company deposited these receipts in a night deposit vault on December 31.

3. Checks outstanding on December 31 totaled $1,210.

4. On December 31, the bank statement showed a NSF charge of $800 for a check received by the company from L. Shur, a customer, on account.

Prepare a bank reconciliation as of December 31 based on the available information

(d) Journalize the adjusting entries resulting from the bank reconciliation and adjustment data.

(e) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger T accounts.

(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31.

what church policies should be changed to improve internal control 577544

The board of trustees of a local church is concerned about the internal accounting controls for the offering collections made at weekly services. The trustees ask you to serve on a three person audit team with the internal auditor of a local college and a CPA who has just joined the church.

At a meeting of the audit team and the board of trustees, you learn the following.

1. The church’s board of trustees has delegated responsibility for the financial management and audit of the financial records to the finance committee. This group prepares the annual budget and approves major disbursements. It is not involved in collections or record keeping. No audit has been made in recent years because the same trusted employee has kept church records and served as financial secretary for 15 years. The church does not carry any fidelity insurance.

2. The collection at the weekly service is taken by a team of ushers who volunteer to serve one month. The ushers take the collection plates to a basement office at the rear of the church. They hand their plates to the head usher and return to the church service. After all plates have been turned in, the head usher counts the cash received. The head usher then places the cash in the church safe along with a notation of the amount counted. The head usher volunteers to serve for 3 months.

3. The next morning, the financial secretary opens the safe and recounts the collection. The secretary withholds $150–$200 in cash, depending on the cash expenditures expected for the week, and deposits the remainder of the collections in the bank. To facilitate the deposit, church members who contribute by check are asked to make their checks payable to “Cash.”

4. Each month, the financial secretary reconciles the bank statement and submits a copy of the reconciliation to the board of trustees. The reconciliations have rarely contained any bank errors and have never shown any errors per books.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal accounting control over the handling of collections.

(b) List the improvements in internal control procedures that you plan to make at the next meeting of the audit team for (1) the ushers, (2) the head usher, (3) the financial secretary, and (4) the finance committee.

(c) What church policies should be changed to improve internal control?

what are the ethical considerations in this case 577546

You are the assistant controller in charge of general ledger accounting at Riverside Bottling Company. Your company has a large loan from an insurance company. The loan agreement requires that the company’s cash account balance be maintained at $200,000 or more, as reported monthly.

At June 30, the cash balance is $80,000, which you report to Gena Schmitt, the financial vice president. Gena excitedly instructs you to keep the cash receipts book open for one additional day for purposes of the June 30 report to the insurance company. Gena says, “If we don’t get that cash balance over $200,000, we’ll default on our loan agreement. They could close us down, put us all out of our jobs!” Gena continues, “I talked to Oconto Distributors (one of Riverside’s largest customers) this morning. They said they sent us a check for $150,000 yesterday. We should receive it tomorrow. If we include just that one check in our cash balance, we’ll be in the clear. It’s in the mail!”

Instructions

(a) Who will suffer negative effects if you do not comply with Gena Schmitt’s instructions? Who will suffer if you do comply?

(b) What are the ethical considerations in this case?

(c) What alternatives do you have?

an analysis and aging of the accounts receivable of prince company at december 31 re 577572

An analysis and aging of the accounts receivable of Prince Company at December 31 reveals the following data.

Accounts receivable

$800,000

Allowance for doubtful

accounts per books before

adjustment

50,000

Amounts expected to become

uncollectible

65,000

The cash realizable value of the accounts receivable at December 31, after adjustment, is:

a. $685,000.

c. $800,000.

b. $750,000.

d. $735,000.

blinka retailers accepted 50 000 of citibank visa credit card charges for merchandis 577575

Blinka Retailers accepted $50,000 of Citibank Visa credit card charges for merchandise sold on July 1. Citibank charges 4% for its credit card use. The entry to record this transaction by Blinka Retailers will include a credit to Sales Revenue of $50,000 and a debit(s) to:

a. Cash

$48,000

and Service Charge Expense

$2,000

b. Accounts Receivable

$48,000

and Service Charge Expense

$2,000

c. Cash

$50,000

d. Accounts Receivable

$50,000

foti co accepts a 1 000 3 month 6 promissory note in settlement of an account with b 577576

Foti Co. accepts a $1,000, 3 month, 6% promissory note in settlement of an account with Bartelt Co. The entry to record this transaction is as follows

a. Notes Receivable

1,015

Accounts Receivable

1,015

b. Notes Receivable

1,000

Accounts Receivable

1,000

c. Notes Receivable

1,000

Sales Revenue

1,000

d. Notes Receivable

1,030

Accounts Receivable

1,030

the entry made by ginter co when the note is collected assuming no interest has been 577577

Ginter Co. holds Kolar Inc.’s $10,000, 120 day, 9% note. The entry made by Ginter Co. when the note is collected, assuming no interest has been previously accrued, is:

a. Cash

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,300

b. Cash

10,000

Notes Receivable

10,000

c. Accounts Receivable

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Revenue

300

d. Cash

10,300

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Revenue

300

prepare journal entries for the transactions above 577606

Presented below are selected transactions of Santos Company. Santos sells in large quantities to other companies and also sells its product in a small retail outlet.

March

1

Sold merchandise on account to Jaclyn Company for $3,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

3

Jaclyn Company returned merchandise worth $500 to Santos.

9

Santos collected the amount due from Jaclyn Company from the March 1 sale.

15

Santos sold merchandise for $400 in its retail outlet. The customer used his Santos

credit card.

31

Santos added 1.5% monthly interest to the customer’s credit card balance.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries for the transactions above.

who are the stakeholders in this situation 577437

Glenda Shumway, president of RF Industries, wishes to issue a press release to bolster her company’s image and maybe even its stock price, which has been gradually falling. As controller, you have been asked to provide a list of 20 financial ratios and other operating statistics for RF Industries’ first quarter financials and operations. Two days after you provide the data requested, Regina Tarow, the public relations director of RF, asks you to prove the accuracy of the financial and operating data contained in the press release written by the president and edited by Regina. In the news release, the president highlights the sales increase of 25% over last year’s first quarter and the positive change in the current ratio from 1.5:1 last year to 3:1 this year. She also emphasizes that production was up 50% over the prior year’s first quarter. You note that the release contains only positive or improved ratios and none of the negative or deteriorated ratios. For instance, no mention is made that the debt to total assets ratio has increased from 35% to 55%, that inventories are up 89%, and that although the current ratio improved, the current cash debt coverage ratio fell from .15 to .05. Nor is there any mention that the reported profit for the quarter would have been a loss had not the estimated lives of RF plant and machinery been increased by 30%. Regina emphasized, “The Pres wants this release by early this afternoon.”

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Is there anything unethical in the president’s actions?

(c) Should you as controller remain silent? Does Regina have any responsibility?

htmand complete the investment allocation questionnaire add up your total points to 577438

In this chapter you learned how to use many tools for performing a financial analysis of a company. When making personal investments, however, it is most likely that you won’t be buying stocks and bonds in individual companies. Instead, when most people want to invest in stock, they buy mutual funds. By investing in a mutual fund, you reduce your risk because the fund diversifies by buying the stock of a variety of different companies, bonds, and other investments, depending on the stated goals of the fund. Before you invest in a fund, you will need to decide what type of fund you want. For example, do you want a fund that has the potential of high growth (but also high risk), or are you looking for lower risk and a steady steam of income? Do you want a fund that invests only in U.S. companies, or do you want one that invests globally? Many resources are available to help you with these types of decisions.

Instructions

htmand complete the investment allocation questionnaire. Add up your total points to determine the type of investment fund that would be appropriate for you.

determine that the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general 577439

Presented below are the sales and cash receipts journals for Hudson Co. for its first month of operations.

SALES JOURNAL

S1

Date

Account Debited

Ref.

Accounts Receivable Dr.

Cost of Goods Sold Dr.

Feb. 3

C. Leslie

Sales Revenue Cr.

Inventory Cr.

9

S. David

4,000

2,400

12

T. Baker

5,000

3,000

26

W. Oz

6,500

3,900

5,500

3,300

21,000

12,600

CASH RECEIPTS JOURNAL

Sales

Accounts

Sales

Other

Cost of Goods

Owner’s

Cash

Discounts

Receivable

Revenue

Accounts

Sold Dr.

Date

Account Credited

Ref.

Dr.

Dr.

Cr.

Cr.

Cr.

Inventory Cr..

Feb. 1

Owner’s Capital

23,000

23,000

2

4,500

4,500

13

C. Leslie

3,960

40

4,000

18

Inventory

120

120

26

S. David

5,000

5,000

36,580

40

9,000

4,500

23,120

In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for February 2012.

Feb.

2

Purchased merchandise on account from B. Baumgartner for $3,600, terms 2/10, n/30.

7

Purchased merchandise on account from A. Martin for $23,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

9

Paid cash of $980 for purchase of supplies.

12

Paid $3,528 to B. Baumgartner in payment for $3,600 invoice, less 2% discount.

15

Purchased equipment for $5,500 cash.

16

Purchased merchandise on account from D. Gale $1,900, terms 2/10, n/30.

17

Paid $22,770 to A. Martin in payment of $23,000 invoice, less 1% discount.

20

S. Hudson withdrew cash of $800 from the business for personal use.

21

Purchased merchandise on account from Kansas Company for $6,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

28

Paid $1,900 to D. Gale in payment of $1,900 invoice.

Instructions

(a) Open the following accounts in the general ledger.

101

Cash

301

Owner’s Capital

112

Accounts Receivable

306

Owner’s Drawings

120

Inventory

401

Sales Revenue

126

Supplies

414

Sales Discounts

157

Equipment

505

Cost of Goods Sold

158

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

631

Supplies Expense

201

Accounts Payable

711

Depreciation Expense

(b) Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in a one column purchases journal and the cash payments journal (see Illustration 7 16).

(c) Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.

(d) Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.

(e) Prepare a trial balance at February 28, 2012.

(f) Determine that the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

(g) The following adjustments at the end of February are necessary.

(1) A count of supplies indicates that $200 is still on hand.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for February is $150.

Prepare the adjusting entries and then post the adjusting entries to the general ledger.

(h) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at February 28, 2012.

prepare a post closing trial balance and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers ag 577440

Packard Company has the following opening account balances in its general and subsidiary ledgers on January 1 and uses the periodic inventory system. All accounts have normal debit and credit balances.

General Ledger

Account

January 1

Number

Account Title

Opening Balance

101

Cash

$33,750

112

Accounts Receivable

13,000

115

Notes Receivable

39,000

120

Inventory

20,000

125

Supplies

1,000

130

Prepaid Insurance

2,000

157

Equipment

6,450

158

Accumulated Depreciation—

1,500

201

Accounts Payable

35,000

301

Owner’s Capital

78,700

Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger

January 1

Opening

Customer

Balance

R. Draves

$1,500

B. Hachinski

7,500

S. Ingles

4,000

Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledger

January 1

Opening

Creditor

Balance

S. Kosko

$ 9,000

R. Mikush

15,000

D. Moreno

11,000

Jan.

3

Sell merchandise on account to B. Remy $3,100, invoice no. 510, and J. Fine $1,800,

invoice no. 511.

5

Purchase merchandise on account from S. Yost $3,000 and D. Laux $2,700.

7

Receive checks for $4,000 from S. Ingles and $2,000 from B. Hachinski.

8

Pay freight on merchandise purchased $180.

9

Send checks to S. Kosko for $9,000 and D. Moreno for $11,000.

9

Issue credit of $300 to J. Fine for merchandise returned.

10

Summary cash sales total $15,500.

11

Sell merchandise on account to R. Draves for $1,900, invoice no. 512, and to S. Ingles

$900, invoice no. 513.

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

12

Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13

Receive payment in full from B. Remy and J. Fine.

15

Withdraw $800 cash by I. Packard for personal use.

16

Purchase merchandise on account from D. Moreno for $15,000, from S. Kosko for

$13,900, and from S. Yost for $1,500.

17

Pay $400 cash for supplies.

18

Return $200 of merchandise to S. Kosko and receive credit.

20

Summary cash sales total $17,500.

21

Issue $15,000 note to R. Mikush in payment of balance due.

21

Receive payment in full from S. Ingles.

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

22

Sell merchandise on account to B. Remy for $3,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Draves

for $800, invoice no. 515.

23

Send checks to D. Moreno and S. Kosko in full payment.

25

Sell merchandise on account to B. Hachinski for $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Fine

for $6,100, invoice no. 517.

27

Purchase merchandise on account from D. Moreno for $12,500, from D. Laux for

$1,200, and from S. Yost for $2,800.

28

Pay $200 cash for office supplies.

31

Summary cash sales total $22,920.

31

Pay sales salaries of $4,300 and office salaries of $3,600.

Instructions

(a) Record the January transactions in the appropriate journal—sales, purchases, cash receipts, cash payments, and general.

(b) Post the journals to the general and subsidiary ledgers. Add and number new accounts in an orderly fashion as needed.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2012, using a worksheet. Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.

(1) Supplies at January 31 total $700.

(2) Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2012.

(3) Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.

(4) Interest of $30 has accrued on the note payable.

(5) Inventory at January 31 is $15,000.

(d) Prepare a multiple-step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.

(e) Prepare and post the adjusting and closing entries.

(f) Prepare a post-closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

prepare a multiple step income statement and an owner s equity statement for january 577441

Bluma Co. uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Balances related to both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger for Bluma are indicated in the working papers. Presented on the next page are a series of transactions for Bluma Co. for the month of January. Credit sales terms are 2/10, n/30. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.

Jan.

3

Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $3,100, invoice no. 510, and to J. Forbes $1,800, invoice

no. 511.

5

Purchase merchandise from S. Vogel $5,000 and D. Lynch $2,200, terms n/30.

7

Receive checks from S. LaDew $4,000 and B. Garcia $2,000 after discount period has lapsed.

8

Pay freight on merchandise purchased $235.

9

Send checks to S. Hoyt for $9,000 less 2% cash discount, and to D. Omara for $11,000 less 1%

cash discount.

9

Issue credit of $300 to J. Forbes for merchandise returned.

10

Summary daily cash sales total $15,500.

11

Sell merchandise on account to R. Dvorak $1,600, invoice no. 512, and to S. LaDew $900, invoice

no. 513.

12

Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13

Receive payment in full from B. Richey and J. Forbes less cash discounts.

15

Withdraw $800 cash by M. Bluma for personal use.

15

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

16

Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $18,000, terms 1/10, n/30; S. Hoyt $14,200, terms 2/10, n/30;

and S. Vogel $1,500, terms n/30.

17

Pay $400 cash for office supplies.

18

Return $200 of merchandise to S. Hoyt and receive credit.

20

Summary daily cash sales total $20,100.

21

Issue $15,000 note, maturing in 90 days, to R. Moses in payment of balance due.

21

Receive payment in full from S. LaDew less cash discount.

22

Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $2,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Dvorak $1,300,

invoice no. 515.

22

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

23

Send checks to D. Omara and S. Hoyt in full payment less cash discounts.

25

Sell merchandise on account to B. Garcia $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Forbes $6,100, invoice

no. 517.

27

Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $14,500, terms 1/10, n/30; D. Lynch $1,200, terms n/30; and

S. Vogel $5,400, terms n/30.

27

Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

28

Pay $200 cash for office supplies.

31

Summary daily cash sales total $21,300.

31

Pay sales salaries $4,300 and office salaries $3,800.

Instructions

(a) Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal as shown on page 327, a cash payments journal as shown on page 332, and a two column general journal.

(b) Post the journals to the general ledger.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2012, in the trial balance columns of the worksheet. Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.

(1) Office supplies at January 31 total $900.

(2) Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2012.

(3) Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.

(4) Interest of $50 has accrued on the note payable.

(d) Prepare a multiple step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for January and a classify ed balance sheet at the end of January.

(e) Prepare and post adjusting and closing entries.

(f) Prepare a post closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

what control and subsidiary accounts should be included in hughey payne s manual sys 577443

Hughey & Payne is a wholesaler of small appliances and parts. Hughey & Payne is operated by two owners, Rich Hughey and Kristen Payne. In addition, the company has one employee, a repair specialist, who is on a fixed salary. Revenues are earned through the sale of appliances to retailers (approximately 75% of total revenues), appliance parts to do it yourselfers (10%), and the repair of appliances brought to the store (15%). Appliance sales are made on both a credit and cash basis. Customers are billed on prenumbered sales invoices. Credit terms are always net/30 days. All parts sales and repair work are cash only.

Merchandise is purchased on account from the manufacturers of both the appliances and the parts. Practically all suppliers offer cash discounts for prompt payments, and it is company policy to take all discounts. Most cash payments are made by check. Checks are most frequently issued to suppliers, to trucking companies for freight on merchandise purchases, and to newspapers, radio, and TV stations for advertising. All advertising bills are paid as received. Rich and Kristen each make a monthly drawing in cash for personal living expenses. The salaried repairman is paid twice monthly. Hughey & Payne currently has a manual accounting system.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Identify the special journals that Hughey & Payne should have in its manual system. List the column headings appropriate for each of the special journals.

(b) What control and subsidiary accounts should be included in Hughey & Payne’s manual system? Why?

at changes should be made to improve the efficiency of the accounting department 577444

Barb Doane, a classmate, has a part time bookkeeping job. She is concerned about the inefficiencies in journalizing and posting transactions. Jim Houser is the owner of the company where Barb works. In response to numerous complaints from Barb and others, Jim hired two additional bookkeepers a month ago. However, the inefficiencies have continued at an even higher rate. The accounting information system for the company has only a general journal and a general ledger. Jim refuses to install a computerized accounting system.

Instructions

Now that Barb is an expert in manual accounting information systems, she decides to send a letter to Jim Houser explaining (1) why the additional personnel did not help and (2) what changes should be made to improve the efficiency of the accounting department. Write the letter that you think Barb should send.

what are the ethical issues in this case 577445

Roniger Products Company operates three divisions, each with its own manufacturing plant and marketing/sales force. The corporate headquarters and central accounting office are in Roniger, and the plants are in Freeport, Rockport, and Bayport, all within 50 miles of Roniger. Corporate management treats each division as an independent profit center and encourages competition among them. They each have similar but different product lines. As a competitive incentive, bonuses are awarded each year to the employees of the fastest growing and most profitable division.

Jose Molina is the manager of Roniger’s centralized computerized accounting operation that enters the sales transactions and maintains the accounts receivable for all three divisions. Jose came up in the accounting ranks from the Bayport division where his wife, several relatives, and many friends still work.

As sales documents are entered into the computer, the originating division is identified by code. Most sales documents (95%) are coded, but some (5%) are not coded or are coded incorrectly. As the manager, Jose has instructed the data entry personnel to assign the Bayport code to all uncoded and incorrectly coded sales documents. This is done he says, “in order to expedite processing and to keep the computer files current since they are updated daily.” All receivables and cash collections for all three divisions are handled by Roniger as one subsidiary accounts receivable ledger.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) How might the system be improved to prevent this situation?

journalize the entries required by the reconciliation 577459

Poorten Company’s bank statement for May 2012 shows the following data.

Balance 5/1

$12,650

Balance 5/31

$14,280

Debit memorandum:

Credit memorandum:

NSF check

$175

Collection of note receivable

$505

The cash balance per books at May 31 is $13,319. Your review of the data reveals the following.

1. The NSF check was from Copple Co., a customer.

2. The note collected by the bank was a $500, 3 month, 12% note. The bank charged a $10 collection fee. No interest has been accrued.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 total $2,410.

4. Deposits in transit at May 31 total $1,752.

5. A Poorten Company check for $352, dated May 10, cleared the bank on May 25.

The company recorded this check, which was a payment on account, for $325.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at May 31.

(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.

for each weakness suggest a change in procedure that will result in good internal co 577514

The following control procedures are used at Melora Company for over the counter cash receipts.

1. To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.

2. All over the counter receipts are registered by three clerks who use a cash register with a single cash drawer.

3. The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day’s receipts.

4. At the end of each day, the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.

5. Cashiers are experienced; they are not bonded.

Instructions

(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control, and identify the control principle that is violated.

(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in procedure that will result in good internal control.

for each procedure explain the weakness in internal control and identify the interna 577515

The following control procedures are used in Kelly Erin’s Boutique Shoppe for cash disbursements.

1. The company accountant prepares the bank reconciliation and reports any discrepancies to the owner.

2. The store manager personally approves all payments before signing and issuing checks.

3. Each week, Kelly leaves 100 company checks in an unmarked envelope on a shelf behind the cash register.

4. After payment, bills are filed in a paid invoice folder.

5. The company checks are unnumbered.

Instructions

(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control, and identify the internal control principle that is violated.

(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.

write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvemen 577516

At Hannon Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by the vendor, and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills PAID, files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Hannon Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

(b) Write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvement.

indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak in 577517

Listed below are five procedures followed by Ellie Kempet Company.

1. Several individuals operate the cash register using the same register drawer.

2. A monthly bank reconciliation is prepared by someone who has no other cash respon sibilities.

3. Roy Anderson writes checks and also records cash payment journal entries.

4. One individual orders inventory, while a different individual authorizes payments.

5. Unnumbered sales invoices from credit sales are forwarded to the accounting department every four weeks for recording.

Instructions

Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control. If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated. Use the table below.

Procedure IC

Good or Weak?

Related Internal Control Principle

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak in 577518

Listed below are five procedures followed by Wallace Company.

1. Employees are required to take vacations.

2. Any member of the sales department can approve credit sales.

3. Andy Buckley ships goods to customers, bills customers, and receives payment from customers.

4. Total cash receipts are compared to bank deposits daily by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.

5. Time clocks are used for recording time worked by employees.

Instructions

Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control. If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated. Use the table below.

Procedure IC

Good or Weak?

Related Internal Control Principle

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

journalize the entries in march that pertain to the operation of the petty cash fund 577520

Rashida Company uses an imprest petty cash system. The fund was established on March 1 with a balance of $100. During March, the following petty cash receipts were found in the petty cash box.

Receipt

Date

No.

For

Amount

3/5

1

Stamp Inventory

$39

7

2

Freight out

21

9

3

Miscellaneous Expense

6

11

4

Travel Expense

24

14

5

Miscellaneous Expense

5

The fund was replenished on March 15 when the fund contained $3 in cash. On March 20, the amount in the fund was increased to $150.

Instructions

Journalize the entries in March that pertain to the operation of the petty cash fund.

journalize the entries required by the reconciliation 577521

Bob Vance is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Bob’s reconciliation is as follows.

Cash balance per bank

$3,560.20

Add: NSF check

690.00

Less: Bank service charge

25.00

Adjusted balance per bank

$4,225.20

Cash balance per books

$3,875.20

Less: Deposits in transit

530.00

Add: Outstanding checks

930.00

Adjusted balance per books

$4,275.20

Instructions

(a) Prepare a correct bank reconciliation.

(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.

the may bank statement and the may cash payments journal show the following 577522

On April 30, the bank reconciliation of Gabe Lewis Company shows three outstanding checks: no. 254, $650; no. 255, $820; and no. 257, $410. The May bank statement and the May cash payments journal show the following.

Bank Statement

Checks Paid

Date

Check No.

Amount

5/4

254

650

5/2

257

410

5/17

258

159

5/12

259

275

5/20

261

500

5/29

263

480

5/30

262

750

Cash Payments Journal

Checks Issued

Date

Check No.

Amount

5/2

258

159

5/5

259

275

5/10

260

890

5/15

261

500

5/22

262

750

5/24

263

480

5/29

264

560

Instructions

Using step 2 in the reconciliation procedure, list the outstanding checks at May 31.

prepare the bank reconciliation at september 30 577524

The information below relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Porter Company.

Balance September 1—$17,150; Cash deposited—$64,000.

Balance September 30—$17,404; Checks written—$63,746.

The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,422 on September 30 and the following memoranda.

Credits

Debits

Collection of $1,500 note plus interest $30

$1,530

NSF check: Charles Esten

$425

Interest earned on checking account

$45

Safety deposit box rent

$65

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.

the cash records of holly company show the following four situations 577525

The cash records of Holly Company show the following four situations.

1. The June 30 bank reconciliation indicated that deposits in transit total $720. During July, the general ledger account Cash shows deposits of $15,750, but the bank statement indicates that only $15,600 in deposits were received during the month.

2. The June 30 bank reconciliation also reported outstanding checks of $680. During the month of July, Holly Company books show that $17,200 of checks were issued. The bank statement showed that $16,400 of checks cleared the bank in July.

3. In September, deposits per the bank statement totaled $26,700, deposits per books were $25,400, and deposits in transit at September 30 were $2,100.

4. In September, cash disbursements per books were $23,700, checks clearing the bank were $25,000, and outstanding checks at September 30 were $2,100.

There were no bank debit or credit memoranda. No errors were made by either the bank or Holly Company.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) In situation (1), what were the deposits in transit at July 31?

(b) In situation (2), what were the outstanding checks at July 31?

(c) In situation (3), what were the deposits in transit at August 31?

(d) In situation (4), what were the outstanding checks at August 31?

what disclosures should flax make in its financial statements concerning cash and ca 577526

Flax Company has recorded the following items in its financial records.

Cash in bank

$ 47,000

Cash in plant expansion fund

100,000

Cash on hand

12,000

Highly liquid investments

34,000

Petty cash

500

Receivables from customers

89,000

Stock investments

61,000

The cash in bank is subject to a compensating balance of $5,000. The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased. The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months. The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.

Instructions

(a) What amount should Flax report as “Cash and cash equivalents” on its balance sheet?

(b) Where should the items not included in part (a) be reported on the balance sheet?

(c) What disclosures should Flax make in its financial statements concerning “cash and cash equivalents”?

determines increases or decreases in a series of financial statement data 577413

Match each of the following terms with the phrase that best describes it.

Quality of earnings

Current ratio

Horizontal analysis

Pro forma income

Discontinued operations

Comprehensive income

1. A measure used to evaluate a company’s liquidity.

2. Usually excludes items that a company thinks are unusual or non recurring.

3. Indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the financial statements.

4. The disposal of a significant segment of a business.

5. Determines increases or decreases in a series of financial statement data.

6. Includes all changes in stockholders’ equity during a period except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.

prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2010 using 2009 as the base yea 577416

Here is financial information for Galenti Inc.

December 31, 2010

December 31, 2009

Current assets

$106,000

$ 80,000

Plant assets (net)

400,000

360,000

Current liabilities

91,000

65,000

Long term liabilities

122,000

90,000

Common stock, $1 par

138,000

115,000

Retained earnings

155,000

170,000

Instructions

Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2010 using 2009 as the base year.

prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2010 and 2009 577417

Operating data for Robinson Corporation are presented below.

2010

2009

Sales

$800,000

$600,000

Cost of goods sold

520,000

408,000

Selling expenses

120,000

72,000

Administrative expenses

72,000

48,000

Income tax expense

32,000

21,600

Net income

56,000

50,400

Instructions

Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2010 and 2009.

prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for nike using 2006 as a bas 577418

The comparative balance sheets of Nike, Inc. are presented here.

NIKE, INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
May 31
($ in millions)

Assets

2007

2006

Current assets

$ 8,076

$7,346

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

1,678

1,658

Other assets

934

866

Total assets

$10,688

$9,870

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

$ 2,584

$2,612

Long term liabilities

1,079

973

Stockholders’ equity

7,025

6,285

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$10,688

$9,870

Instructions

(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for Nike using 2006 as a base.

(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet data for Nike for 2007.

prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for winfrey corporation u 577419

Here are the comparative income statements of Winfrey Corporation.

WINFREY CORPORATION
Comparative Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31

2010

2009

Net sales

$598,000

$520,000

Cost of goods sold

477,000

450,000

Gross profit

$121,000

$ 70,000

Operating expenses

80,000

45,000

Net income

$ 41,000

$ 25,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Winfrey Corporation using 2009 as a base. (Show the amounts of increase or decrease.)

(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Winfrey Corporation for both years.

compute the current ratio current cash debt coverage ratio receivables turnover rati 577420

Nordstrom, Inc. operates department stores in numerous states. Selected financial statement data (in millions) for 2007 are presented below.

End of Year

Beginning of Year

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 358

$ 403

Receivables (net)

1,788

684

Merchandise inventory

956

997

Other current assets

259

658

Total current assets

$3,361

$2,742

Total current liabilities

$1,635

$1,433

For the year, net credit sales were $8,828 million, cost of goods sold was $5,526 million, and cash from operations was $161 million.

Instructions

Compute the current ratio, current cash debt coverage ratio, receivables turnover ratio, average collection period, inventory turnover ratio, and days in inventory at the end of the current year.

compute the current ratio as of the beginning of the month and after each transactio 577421

Talley Incorporated had the following transactions involving current assets and current liabilities during February 2010.

3

Collected accounts receivable of $15,000.

7

Purchased equipment for $20,000 cash.

11

Paid $3,000 for a 3 year insurance policy.

14

Paid accounts payable of $12,000.

18

Declared cash dividends, $6,000.

Additional information:

As of February 1, 2010, current assets were $110,000 and current liabilities were 40,000.

Instructions

Compute the current ratio as of the beginning of the month and after each transaction.

compute the following ratios at december 31 2010 577422

Armada Company has these comparative balance sheet data:

ARMADA COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31

2010

2009

Cash

$ 25,000

$ 30,000

Receivables (net)

65,000

60,000

Inventories

60,000

50,000

Plant assets (net)

200,000

180,000

$350,000

$320,000

Accounts payable

$ 50,000

$ 60,000

Mortgage payable (15%)

100,000

100,000

Common stock, $10 par

140,000

120,000

Retained earnings

60,000

40,000

$350,000

$320,000

Additional information for 2010:

1. Net income was $25,000.

2. Sales on account were $375,000. Sales returns and allowances amounted to $25,000.

3. Cost of goods sold was $198,000.

4. Net cash provided by operating activities was $48,000.

5. Capital expenditures were $25,000, and cash dividends were $18,000.

Instructions

Compute the following ratios at December 31, 2010.

(a) Current.

(b) Receivables turnover.

(c) Average collection period.

(d) Inventory turnover.

(e) Days in inventory.

(f ) Cash debt coverage.

(g) Current cash debt coverage.

(h) Free cash flow.

compute the following ratios for 2006 577423

Selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller Barnes & Noble are presented here. All balance sheet data are as of the end of the fiscal year (in millions).

2006

2005

Net sales

$5,261.3

$5,103.0

Cost of goods sold

3,623.0

3,535.8

Net income

150.5

146.7

Accounts receivable

100.5

99.1

Inventory

1,354.6

1,314.0

Total assets

3,196.8

3,156.3

Total common stockholders’ equity

1,164.9

1,115.8

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2006:

(a) Profit margin.

(b) Asset turnover.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(e) Gross profit rate.

compute the following measures for 2010 577424

Here is the income statement for Swayze, Inc.

SWAYZE, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$400,000

Cost of goods sold

230,000

Gross profit

170,000

Expenses (including $16,000 interest and $24,000 income taxes)

90,000

Net income

$ 80,000

Additional information:

1. Common stock outstanding January 1, 2010, was 30,000 shares, and 40,000 shares were outstanding at December 31, 2010.

2. The market price of Swayze, Inc., stock was $17.60 in 2010.

3. Cash dividends of $21,000 were paid, $10,000 of which were to preferred tockholders.

Instructions

Compute the following measures for 2010.

(a) Earnings per share.

(b) Price earnings ratio.

(c) Payout ratio.

(d) Times interest earned ratio.

compute the following for garcia corporation 577425

Garcia Corporation experienced a fire on December 31, 2010, in which its financial records were partially destroyed. It has been able to salvage some of the records and has ascertained the following balances.

December 31, 2010

December 31, 2009

Cash

$ 30,000

$ 10,000

Receivables (net)

72,500

126,000

Inventory

200,000

180,000

Accounts payable

50,000

10,000

Notes payable

30,000

20,000

Common stock, $100 par

400,000

400,000

Retained earnings

113,500

101,000

Additional information:

1. The inventory turnover is 4.4 times.

2. The return on common stockholders’ equity is 18%. The company had no additional paid in capital.

3. The receivables turnover is 11.2 times.

4. The return on assets is 16%.

5. Total assets at December 31, 2009, were $605,000.

Instructions

Compute the following for Garcia Corporation.

(a) Cost of goods sold for 2010.

(b) Net credit sales for 2010.

(c) Net income for 2010.

(d) Total assets at December 31, 2010.

comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the 2010 return 577426

Here are comparative statement data for Blue Company and Gray Company, two competitors. All balance sheet data are as of December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2009.

Blue Company

Gray Company

2010

2009

2010

2009

Net sales

$1,849,035

$546,000

Cost of goods sold

1,080,490

278,000

Operating expenses

250,000

82,000

Interest expense

6,800

1,600

Income tax expense

62,030

31,000

Current assets

325,975

$312,410

83,336

$ 79,467

Plant assets (net)

526,800

500,000

139,728

125,812

Current liabilities

66,325

75,815

35,348

30,281

Long term liabilities

113,990

90,000

29,620

25,000

Common stock, $10 par

500,000

500,000

120,000

120,000

Retained earnings

172,460

146,595

38,096

29,998

(a) Prepare a vertical analysis of the 2010 income statement data for Blue Company and Gray Company.

(b) Comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the 2010 return on assets and the return on common stockholders’ equity ratios for both companies.

the comparative statements of mcgillis company are presented here 577427

The comparative statements of McGillis Company are presented here.

McGILLIS COMPANY
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31

2010

2009

Net sales

$1,890,540

$1,750,500

Cost of goods sold

1,058,540

996,000

Gross profit

832,000

754,500

Selling and administrative expenses

506,000

479,000

Income from operations

326,000

275,500

Other expenses and losses
Interest expense

25,000

19,000

Income before income taxes

301,000

256,500

Income tax expense

90,000

77,000

Net income

$ 211,000

$ 179,500

McGILLIS COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Current assets

Cash

$ 60,100

$ 64,200

Short term investments

74,000

50,000

Accounts receivable

117,800

102,800

Inventory

123,000

115,500

Total current assets

374,900

332,500

Plant assets (net)

615,300

520,300

Total assets

$990,200

$852,800

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

2010

2009

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$160,000

$145,400

Income taxes payable

43,500

42,000

Total current liabilities

203,500

187,400

Bonds payable

210,000

200,000

Total liabilities

413,500

387,400

Stockholders’ equity
Common stock ($5 par)

290,000

300,000

Retained earnings

286,700

165,400

Total stockholders’ equity

576,700

465,400

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$990,200

$852,800

All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities for 2010 was $220,000.

Capital expenditures were $120,000, and cash dividends were $80,000.

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2010.

(a) Earnings per share.

(b) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Current ratio.

(e) Receivables turnover.

(f ) Average collection period.

(g) Inventory turnover.

(h) Days in inventory.

(i) Times interest earned.

(j) Asset turnover.

(k) Debt to total assets.

(l) Current cash debt coverage.

(m) Cash debt coverage.

(n) Free cash flow.

condensed balance sheet and income statement data for breckenridge corporation are p 577428

Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Breckenridge Corporation are presented here.

BRECKENRIDGE CORPORATION
Balance Sheets
December 31

2010

2009

2008

Cash

$ 30,000

$ 20,000

$ 18,000

Receivables (net)

50,000

45,000

48,000

Other current assets

90,000

85,000

64,000

Investments

55,000

70,000

45,000

Plant and equipment (net)

500,000

370,000

258,000

$725,000

$590,000

$433,000

Current liabilities

$ 85,000

$ 80,000

$ 30,000

Long term debt

185,000

85,000

20,000

Common stock, $10 par

320,000

300,000

300,000

Retained earnings

135,000

125,000

83,000

$725,000

$590,000

$433,000

BRECKENRIDGE CORPORATION
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31

2010

2009

Sales

$640,000

$500,000

Less: Sales returns and allowances

40,000

30,000

Net sales

600,000

470,000

Cost of goods sold

425,000

300,000

Gross profit

175,000

170,000

Operating expenses (including income taxes)

110,000

99,000

Net income

$ 65,000

$ 71,000

Additional information:

1. The market price of Breckenridge’s common stock was $6.00, $9.00, and $7.00 for 2008, 2009, and 2010, respectively.

2. You must compute dividends paid. All dividends were paid in cash.

Instructions

(a) Compute the following ratios for 2009 and 2010.

(1) Profit margin.

(2) Gross profit.

(3) Asset turnover.

(4) Earnings per share.

(5) Price earnings.

(6) Payout.

(7) Debt to total assets.

(b) Based on the ratios calculated, discuss briefly the improvement or lack thereof in the financial position and operating results from 2009 to 2010 of Breckenridge Corporation.

selected financial data of target and wal mart for 2006 are presented here in millio 577429

Selected financial data of Target and Wal Mart for 2006 are presented here (in millions).

Target
Corporation

Wal Mart
Stores, Inc.

Income Statement Data for Year

Net sales

$57,878

$348,650

Cost of goods sold

39,399

264,152

Selling and administrative expenses

14,315

64,001

Interest expense

572

1,809

Other income (expense)

905

(1,039)

Income tax expense

1,710

6,365

Net income

$ 2,787

$ 11,284

Balance Sheet Data (End of Year)

Current assets

$14,706

$ 46,588

Noncurrent assets

22,643

104,605

Total assets

$37,349

$151,193

Current liabilities

$11,117

$ 51,754

Long term debt

10,599

37,866

Total stockholders’ equity

15,633

61,573

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$37,349

$151,193

Beginning of Year Balances

Total assets

$34,995

$138,187

Total stockholders’ equity

14,205

53,171

Current liabilities

9,588

48,825

Total liabilities

20,790

85,016

Other Data

Average net receivables

$ 5,930

$ 2,707

Average inventory

6,046

32,797

Net cash provided by operating activities

4,862

20,209

Capital expenditures

3,928

15,666

Dividends

380

2,802

Instructions

(a) For each company, compute the following ratios.

(1) Current.

(2) Receivables turnover.

(3) Average collection period.

(4) Inventory turnover.

(5) Days in inventory.

(6) Profit margin.

(7) Asset turnover.

(8) Return on assets.

(9) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(10) Debt to total assets.

(11) Times interest earned.

(12) Current cash debt coverage.

(13) Cash debt coverage.

(14) Free cash flow.

Financial Reporting and Analysis

what information outside the annual report may also be useful to your parents in mak 577430

Your parents are considering investing in Tootsie Roll Industries common stock. They ask you, as an accounting expert, to make an analysis of the company for them. Fortunately, excerpts from a recent annual report of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A of this textbook.

Instructions

(a) Make a 5 year trend analysis, using 2003 as the base year, of (1) net sales and (2) net earnings. Comment on the significance of the trend results.

(b) Compute for 2007 and 2006 the (1) debt to total assets ratio and (2) times interest earned ratio. (See note 6 for interest expense.) How would you evaluate Tootsie Roll’s long term solvency?

(c) Compute for 2007 and 2006 the (1) profit margin ratio, (2) asset turnover ratio,

(3) return on assets ratio, and (4) return on common stockholders’ equity ratio. How would you evaluate Tootsie Roll’s profitability? Total assets at December 31, 2005, were $813,696,000, and total stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2005, was $617,405,000.

(d) What information outside the annual report may also be useful to your parents in making a decision about Tootsie Roll?

what does the article rsquo s author say the graham and dodd p e tells us about the 577432

The August 15, 2007, issue of the New York Timesincluded an article by David Leonhardt titled “Remembering a Classic Investing Theory.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) At the time of the article, what was the average P E ratio for the Standard & Poor’s 500 stock index? How did this compare with the average P E ratio since World War II?

(b) What criticism did Graham and Dodd have of the way the P E is usually measured today?

(c) Using the Graham and Dodd approach to measuring the P E ratio, what was the P E at the time the article was written, and how did it compare with its value in previous years?

(d) What does the article’s author say the Graham and Dodd P E tells us about the stock market at the time the article was written?

compute the following profitability ratios for the two companies and comment on the 577433

The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc. provide refreshments to every corner of the world. Selected data from the 2007 consolidated financial statements for The Coca Cola Company and for PepsiCo, Inc., are presented here (in millions).

Coca Cola

PepsiCo

Total current assets

$12,105

$10,151

Total current liabilities

13,225

7,753

Net sales

28,857

39,474

Cost of goods sold

10,406

18,038

Net income

5,981

5,658

Average (net) receivables for the

2,952

4,057

Average inventories for the year

1,931

2,108

Average total assets

36,616

32,279

Average common stockholders’ equity

19,332

16,386

Average current liabilities

11,058

7,307

Average total liabilities

17,284

15,978

Total assets

43,269

32,279

Total liabilities

21,525

17,394

Income taxes

1,892

1,973

Interest expense

456

224

Cash provided by operating activities

7,150

6,934

Capital expenditures

1,648

2,430

Cash dividends

3,149

2,204

Instructions

(a) Compute the following liquidity ratios for 2007 for Coca Cola and for PepsiCo and comment on the relative liquidity of the two competitors.

(1) Current ratio. (4) Inventory turnover.

(2) Receivables turnover. (5) Days in inventory.

(3) Average collection period. (6) Current cash debt coverage.

(b) Compute the following solvency ratios for the two companies and comment on the relative solvency of the two competitors.

(1) Debt to total assets ratio.

(2) Times interest earned.

(3) Cash debt coverage ratio.

(4) Free cash flow.

(c) Compute the following profitability ratios for the two companies and comment on the relative profitability of the two competitors.

(1) Profit margin.

(2) Asset turnover.

(3) Return on assets.

(4) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

evaluate the company rsquo s liquidity relative to the industry averages and to the 577434

Purpose:To employ comparative data and industry data to evaluate a company’s performance and financial position.

Steps

(1) Identify two competing companies.

(2) Go to the above address.

(3) Type in the first company’s stock symbol. (Use “symbol look up.”).

(4) Choose Ratios.

(5) Print out the results.

(6) Repeat steps 3–5 for the competitor.

Instructions

(a) Evaluate the company’s liquidity relative to the industry averages and to the competitor that you chose.

(b) Evaluate the company’s solvency relative to the industry averages and to the competitor that you chose.

(c) Evaluate the company’s profitability relative to the industry averages and to the competitor that you chose.

explain why you would want the financial statements to be audited b discuss the impl 577435

You are a loan officer for Lakeland Bank of Port Washington. Dennis Schwartz, president of D. Schwartz Corporation, has just left your office. He is interested in an 8 year loan to expand the company’s operations. The borrowed funds would be used to purchase new equipment. As evidence of the company’s debt worthiness, Schwartz provided you with the following facts.

2010

2009

Current ratio

3.1

2.1

Asset turnover ratio

2.8

2.2

Cash debt coverage ratio

.1

.2

Net income

Up 32%

Down 8%

Earnings per share

$3.30

$2.50

Schwartz is a very insistent (some would say pushy) man. When you told him that you would need additional information before making your decision, he acted offended, and said, “What more could you possibly want to know?” You responded that, at a minimum, you would need complete, audited financial statements.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Explain why you would want the financial statements to be audited. (b) Discuss the implications of the ratios provided for the lending decision you are to make. That is, does the information paint a favorable picture? Are these ratios relevant to the decision?

(c) List three other ratios that you would want to calculate for this company, and explain why you would use each.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the di 577336

Data for Percival Company are presented as:

PERCIVAL COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$5,400,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,780,000

Purchases

3,430,000

Goods available for sale

5,210,000

Ending inventory

1,920,000

Total cost of goods sold

3,290,000

Gross profit

2,110,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

420,000

Administrative expense

525,000

Depreciation expense

105,000

Amortization expense

20,000

1,070,000

Net income

$1,040,000

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the in 577337

The income statement of Belini Inc. reported the following condensed information.

BELINI INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Revenues

$545,000

Operating expenses

400,000

Income from operations

145,000

Income tax expense

47,000

Net income

$ 98,000

Belini’s balance sheet contained these comparative data at December 31.

2010

2009

Accounts receivable

$60,000

$75,000

Accounts payable

35,000

51,000

Income taxes payable

10,000

6,000

Belini has no depreciable assets. Accounts payable pertain to operating expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

there are the financial statements of rivera company 577339

There are the financial statements of Rivera Company.

RIVERA COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 25,000

$ 33,000

Accounts receivable

23,000

14,000

Merchandise inventory

41,000

25,000

Property, plant, and equipment

$ 73,000

$ 78,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(27,000)

46,000

(24,000)

54,000

Total

$135,000

$126,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 23,000

$ 43,000

Income taxes payable

26,000

20,000

Bonds payable

20,000

10,000

Common stock

25,000

25,000

Retained earnings

41,000

28,000

Total

$135,000

$126,000

RIVERA COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$286,000

Cost of goods sold

194,000

Gross profit

92,000

Selling expenses

$28,000

Administrative expenses

9,000

37,000

Income from operations

55,000

Interest expense

7,000

Income before income taxes

48,000

Income tax expense

10,000

Net income

$ 38,000

Additional data:

1. Dividends of $25,000 were declared and paid.

2. During the year equipment was sold for $10,000 cash. This equipment cost $13,000 originally and had a book value of $10,000 at the time of sale.

3. All depreciation expense, $6,000, is in the selling expense category.

4. All sales and purchases are on account.

5. Additional equipment was purchased for $8,000 cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash basis measures:

(1) Current cash debt coverage ratio.

(2) Cash debt coverage ratio.

(3) Free cash flow.

condensed financial data of ulrich company are shown below 577341

Condensed financial data of Ulrich Company are shown below.

ULRICH COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 82,700

$ 33,400

Accounts receivable

75,800

37,000

Inventories

121,900

102,650

Investments

89,500

107,000

Plant assets

320,000

205,000

Accumulated depreciation

(49,500)

(40,000)

Total

$640,400

$445,050

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$ 52,700

$ 48,280

Accounts payable

15,100

18,830

Accrued expenses payable

140,000

70,000

Bonds payable

250,000

200,000

Common stock

182,600

107,940

Retained earnings

$640,400

$445,050

Total

ULRICH COMPANY
Income Statement Data
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$297,500

Gain on sale of plant assets

5,000

302,500

Less:

Cost of goods sold

$99,460

Operating expenses, excluding
depreciation expense

14,670

Depreciation expense

35,500

Income taxes

27,270

Interest expense

2,940

179,840

Net income

$122,660

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $151,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Investments were sold at cost.

3. Plant assets costing $36,000 were sold for $15,000, resulting in a gain of $5,000.

4. A cash dividend of $48,000 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 using the indirect method 577343

Presented on the next page are the comparative balance sheets for Nunez Company at December 31.

NUNEZ COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 41,000

$ 57,000

Accounts receivable

77,000

64,000

Inventory

192,000

140,000

Prepaid expenses

12,140

16,540

Land

100,000

150,000

Equipment

205,000

175,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(70,000)

(42,000)

Building

250,000

250,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

(70,000)

(50,000)

Total

$737,140

$760,540

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 48,000

$ 45,000

Bonds payable

235,000

265,000

Common stock, $1 par

280,000

250,000

Retained earnings

174,140

200,540

Total

$737,140

$760,540

Additional information:

1. Operating expenses include depreciation expense $65,000 and charges from prepaid expenses of $4,400.

2. Land was sold for cash at cost.

3. Cash dividends of $59,290 were paid.

4. Net income for 2010 was $32,890.

5. Equipment was purchased for $70,000 cash. In addition, equipment costing $40,000 with a book value of $23,000 was sold for $25,000 cash.

6. Bonds were converted at face value by issuing 30,000 shares of $1 par value common stock.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 using the indirect method.

what was the net cash used by investing activities for 2007 577344

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll Industries are presented in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What was the amount of net cash provided by operating activities for 2007? For 2006?

What were some causes of any significant changes in cash from operations between 2006 and 2007?

(b) What was the amount of increase or decrease in cash and cash equivalents for the year ended December 31, 2007?

(c) Which method of computing net cash provided by operating activities does Tootsie Roll use? (d) From your analysis of the 2007 statement of cash flows, was the change in accounts receivable a decrease or an increase? Was the change in inventories a decrease or an increase? Was the change in accounts payable a decrease or an increase?

(e) What was the net cash used by investing activities for 2007?

(f ) What was the amount of interest paid in 2007? What was the amount of income taxes paid in 2007?

based on your findings in parts a through c can you conclude whether or not amazon c 577347

The incredible growth of Amazon.com has put fear into the hearts of traditional retailers. Its stock price has soared to amazing levels. However, in 2001 many investors were very concerned about whether Amazon would survive since it had never earned a profit, and it was burning through cash. Some investors sold, but others decided to hold on to their investment in the company’s stock. The following information is taken from the 2001 and 2004 financial statements of Amazon.com.

($ in millions)

2001

2004

Current assets

$1,207.9

$2,539.4

Total assets

1,637.5

3,248.5

Current liabilities

921.4

1,620.4

Total liabilities

3,077.5

5,096.1

Cash provided by operations

(119.8)

566.6

Capital expenditures

50.3

89.1

Dividends paid

0

0

Net income (loss)

(567.3)

588.5

Average current liabilities

948.2

1,436.6

Average total liabilities

3,090.0

4,773.4

Instructions

(a) Calculate the current ratio and current cash debt coverage ratio for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its comparative liquidity.

(b) Calculate the cash debt coverage ratio and the debt to total assets ratio for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its comparative solvency.

(c) Amazon.com has avoided purchasing large warehouses. Instead, it has used those of others. In order to increase customer satisfaction Amazon may have to build its own warehouses. Calculate free cash flow for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its ability to purchase warehouses and to finance expansion from internally generated cash.

(d) Based on your findings in parts (a) through (c), can you conclude whether or not Amazon.com’s amazing stock price is justified?

with whom do you agree dan or jill explain your position 577349

Dan Pine and Jill Alton are examining the following statement of cash flows for Devito Company for the year ended January 31,

DEVITO COMPANY
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended January 31, 2010

Sources of cash

From sales of merchandise

$385,000

From sale of capital stock

405,000

From sale of investment (purchased below)

80,000

From depreciation

55,000

From issuance of note for truck

20,000

From interest on investments

6,000

Total sources of cash

951,000

Uses of cash

For purchase of fixtures and equipment

320,000

For merchandise purchased for resale

258,000

For operating expenses (including depreciation)

170,000

For purchase of investment

75,000

For purchase of truck by issuance of note

20,000

For purchase of treasury stock

10,000

For interest on note payable

3,000

Total uses of cash

856,000

Net increase in cash

$ 95,000

Dan claims that Devito’s statement of cash flows is an excellent portrayal of a superb first year with cash increasing $95,000. Jill replies that it was not a superb first year. Rather, she says, the year was an operating failure, that the statement is presented incorrectly, and that $95,000 is not the actual increase in cash. The cash balance at the beginning of the year was $140,000.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Using the data provided, prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form using the indirect method. The only noncash items in the income statement are depreciation and the gain from the sale of the investment.

(b) With whom do you agree, Dan or Jill? Explain your position.

are the board members or anyone else likely to discover the misclassification 577351

Christy Automotive Corp. is a medium sized wholesaler of automotive parts. It has 10 stockholders who have been paid a total of $1 million in cash dividends for 8 consecutive years. The board’s policy requires that, for this dividend to be declared, net cash provided by operating activities as reported in Christy Automotive’s current year’s statement of cash flows must exceed $1 million. President and CEO Albert Roland’s job is secure so long as he produces annual operating cash flows to support the usual dividend. At the end of the current year, controller George Ellerby presents president Albert Roland with some disappointing news: The net cash provided by operating activities is calculated by the indirect method to be only $970,000. The president says to George, “We must get that amount above $1 million. Isn’t there some way to increase operating cash flow by another $30,000?” George answers, “These figures were prepared by my assistant. I’ll go back to my office and see what I can do.” The president replies, “I know you won’t let me down, George.” Upon close scrutiny of the statement of cash flows, George concludes that he can get the operating cash flows above $1 million by reclassifying a $60,000, 2 year note payable listed in the financing activities section as “Proceeds from bank loan—$60,000.” He will report the note instead as “Increase in payables—$60,000” and treat it as an adjustment of net income in the operating activities section. He returns to the president, saying, “You can tell the board to declare their usual dividend. Our net cash flow provided by operating activities is $1,030,000.” “Good man, George! I knew I could count on you,” exults the president.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Was there anything unethical about the president’s actions? Was there anything unethical about the controller’s actions?

(c) Are the board members or anyone else likely to discover the misclassification?

indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the fin 577358

Match each of the following terms with the phrase that it best matches.

Comprehensive income

Quality of earnings

Solvency ratio

Vertical analysis

Pro forma income

Extraordinary items

1. Measures the ability of the company to survive over a long period of time.

2. Usually excludes items that a company thinks are unusual or non recurring.

3. Includes all changes in stockholders’ equity during a period except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.

4. Indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the financial statements.

5. Describes events and transactions that are unusual in nature and infrequent in occurrence.

6. Expresses each item within a financial statement as a percent of a base amount.

prepare an income statement for the year 577359

The events and transactions of Dever Corporation for the year ending December 31, 2010, resulted in these data.

Cost of goods sold

$2,600,000

Net sales

4,400,000

Other expenses and losses

9,600

Other revenues and gains

5,600

Selling and administrative expenses

1,100,000

Gain from discontinued division

570,000

Loss from tornado disaster (extraordinary loss)

600,000

Analysis reveals the following.

1. All items are before the applicable income tax rate of 30%.

2. The plastics division was sold on July 1.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement for the year.

dividends paid to common 577369

2010

2009

Inventory

$ 54,000

$ 48,000

Current assets

81,000

106,000

Total assets

382,000

326,000

Current liabilities

27,000

36,000

Total liabilities

102,000

88,000

Stockholders’ equity

280,000

238,000

Net sales

784,000

697,000

Cost of goods sold

306,000

277,000

Net income

134,000

90,000

Tax expense

22,000

18,000

Interest expense

12,000

12,000

Dividends paid to
preferred stockholders

20,000

20,000

Dividends paid to common
stockholders

15,000

10,000

indicate which of the following items would be reported as an extraordinary item on 577377

Indicate which of the following items would be reported as an extraordinary item on Denison Corporation’s income statement.

(a) Loss from damages caused by a volcano eruption.

(b) Loss from the sale of short term investments.

(c) Loss attributable to a labor strike.

(d) Loss caused when the Food and Drug Administration prohibited the manufacture and sale of a product line.

(e) Loss of inventory from flood damage because a warehouse is located on a flood plain that floods every 5 to 10 years.

(f) Loss on the write down of outdated inventory.

(g) Loss from a foreign government’s expropriation of a production facility.

(h) Loss from damage to a warehouse in southern California from a minor earthquake.

did waubons rsquo s net income as a percent of sales increase decrease or remain unc 577403

Vertical analysis (common size) percentages for Waubons Company’s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.

Vertical Analysis

2010

2009

2008

Sales

100.0%

100.0%

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

60.5

62.4

64.5

Expenses

26.0

26.6

28.5

Did Waubons’s net income as a percent of sales increase, decrease, or remain unchanged over the 3 year period? Provide numerical support for your answer.

explain whether olympic rsquo s net income increased decreased or remained unchanged 577404

Horizontal analysis (trend analysis) percentages for Olympic Company’s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.

Horizontal Analysis

2010

2009

2008

Sales

96.2%

104.8%

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

102.0

97.0

100.0

Expenses

105.6

95.4

100.0

Explain whether Olympic’s net income increased, decreased, or remained unchanged over the 3 year period.

what conclusions about the management of accounts receivable can be drawn from these 577406

The following data are taken from the financial statements of Fleetwood Company.

Accounts receivable (net), end of year

2010

2009

Net sales on account

$ 560,000

$ 540,000

Terms for all sales are 1/10, n/45.

4,400,000

4,000,000

Compute for each year (a) the receivables turnover ratio and (b) the average collection period. What conclusions about the management of accounts receivable can be drawn from these data? At the end of 2008, accounts receivable was $500,000.

compute for each year a the inventory turnover ratio and b days in inventory what co 577407

The following data were taken from the income statements of Bordeaux Company.

2010

2009

Sales revenue

$6,420,000

$6,240,000

Beginning inventory

970,000

837,000

Purchases

4,840,000

4,661,000

Ending inventory

1,020,000

970,000

Compute for each year (a) the inventory turnover ratio and (b) days in inventory. What conclusions concerning the management of the inventory can be drawn from these data?

compute these ratios at march 3 2007 a current cash debt coverage ratio b cash debt 577409

Selected data taken from the 2006 financial statements of trading card company Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions).

2006

Net sales for 2006

$326.7

Current liabilities, February 25, 2006

41.1

Current liabilities, March 3, 2007

62.4

Net cash provided by operating activities

10.4

Total liabilities, February 25, 2006

65.2

Total liabilities, March 3, 2007

73.2

Capital expenditures

3.7

Cash dividends

6.2

Compute these ratios at March 3, 2007: (a) current cash debt coverage ratio (b) cash debt coverage ratio, and (c) free cash flow. Provide a brief interpretation of your results.

the condensed financial statements of eau fra icirc che company for the years 2009 a 577412

The condensed financial statements of Eau Fraîche Company for the years 2009 and 2010 are presented below.

EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31 (in thousands)

2010

2009

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 330

$ 360

Accounts receivable (net)

470

400

Inventories

460

390

Prepaid expenses

120

160

Total current assets

1,380

1,310

Property, plant, and equipment

420

380

Investments

10

10

Intangibles and other assets

530

510

Total assets

$2,340

$2,210

Current liabilities

$ 900

$ 790

Long term liabilities

410

380

Stockholders’ equity—common

1,030

1,040

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$2,340

$2,210

EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY
Income Statements
For the Year Ended December 31 (in thousands)

2010

2009

Revenues

$3,800

$3,460

Costs and expenses

Cost of goods sold

970

890

Selling & administrative expenses

2,400

2,330

Interest expense

10

20

Total costs and expenses

3,380

3,240

Income before income taxes

420

220

Income tax expense

168

132

Net income

$ 252

$ 88

Compute the following ratios for 2010 and 2009.

(a) Current ratio.

(b) Inventory turnover. (Inventory on December 31, 2008, was $340.)

(c) Profit margin ratio.

(d) Return on assets. (Assets on December 31, 2008, were $1,900.)

(e) Return on common stockholders’ equity. (Equity on December 31, 2008, was $900.)

(f ) Debt to total assets ratio.

(g) Times interest earned.

for each point in time state whether the company is most likely in the introductory 577308

The information in the table is from the statement of cash flows for a company at four different points in time (A, B, C, and D). Negative values are presented in parentheses.

Point in Time

A

B

C

D

Cash provided by operations

$ (60,000)

$ 30,000

$120,000

$(10,000)

Cash provided by investing

(100,000)

25,000

30,000

(40,000)

Cash provided by financing

70,000

(110,000)

(50,000)

120,000

Net income

(40,000)

10,000

100,000

(5,000)

Instructions

For each point in time, state whether the company is most likely in the introductory phase, growth phase, maturity phase, or decline phase. In each case explain your choice.

prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company rsquo s 577310

The current sections of Kitselton Inc.’s balance sheets at December 31, 2009 and 2010, are presented here. Kitselton’s net income for 2010 was $153,000. Depreciation expense was $34,000.

2010

2009

Current assets

Cash

$105,000

$ 99,000

Accounts receivable

100,000

89,000

Inventory

168,000

172,000

Prepaid expenses

27,000

22,000

Total current assets

$400,000

$382,000

Current liabilities

Accrued expenses payable

$ 15,000

$ 5,000

Accounts payable

85,000

92,000

Total current liabilities

$100,000

$ 97,000

Instructions

Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, using the indirect method.

prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method 577311

The following information is available for Felix Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2010.

Beginning cash balance

$ 45,000

Accounts payable decrease

3,700

Depreciation expense

187,000

Accounts receivable increase

8,200

Inventory increase

11,000

Net income

284,100

Cash received for sale of land at book value

35,000

Sales

747,000

Cash dividends paid

12,000

Income tax payable increase

4,700

Cash used to purchase building

129,000

Cash used to purchase treasury stock

32,000

Cash received from issuing bonds

200,000

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

from the postings in the accounts indicate how the information is reported on a stat 577312

The three accounts shown below appear in the general ledger of Tovar Corp. during 2010.

Equipment

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

160,000

July 31

Purchase of equipment

70,000

230,000

Sept. 2

Cost of equipment constructed

53,000

283,000

Nov. 10

Cost of equipment sold

49,000

234,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

71,000

Nov. 10

Accumulated depreciation
equipment sold

30,000

41,000

Dec. 31

Depreciation for year

28,000

69,000

Retained Earnings

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

105,000

Aug. 23

Dividends (cash)

19,000

86,000

Dec. 31

Net income

72,000

158,000

Instructions

From the postings in the accounts, indicate how the information is reported on a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. The loss on sale of equipment was $8,000.

compute these cash basis ratios 577313

Shown below and on the next page are comparative balance sheets for Matsui Company.

MATSUI COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 68,000

$ 22,000

Accounts receivable

85,000

76,000

Inventories

170,000

189,000

Land

80,000

100,000

Equipment

260,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

(66,000)

(32,000)

Total

$597,000

$555,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

2010

2009

Accounts payable

$ 39,000

$ 47,000

Bonds payable

150,000

200,000

Common stock ($1 par)

216,000

174,000

Retained earnings

192,000

134,000

Total

$597,000

$555,000

Additional information:

1. Net income for 2010 was $93,000.

2. Cash dividends of $35,000 were declared and paid.

3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000.

4. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash.

5. No equipment was sold during 2010.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash basis ratios:

(1) Current cash debt coverage.

(2) Cash debt coverage.

using the cash based measures presented in this chapter compare the a liquidity and 577314

Presented below is 2006 information for PepsiCo, Inc. and The Coca Cola Company.

($ in millions)

PepsiCo

Coca Cola

Cash provided by operations

$ 6,084

$ 5,957

Average current liabilities

8,133

9,363

Average total liabilities

16,019

13,058

Net income

5,642

5,080

Sales

35,137

24,088

Capital expenditures

2,068

1,407

Dividends paid

1,854

2,911

Instructions

Using the cash based measures presented in this chapter, compare the (a) liquidity and (b) solvency of the two companies.0

using the cash based measures presented in this chapter compare the a liquidity and 577315

Information for two companies in the same industry, Hoyt Corporation and Rex Corporation, is presented here.

Cash provided by operating activities

Hoyt
Corporation

Rex
Corporation

Average current liabilities

$100,000

$100,000

Average total liabilities

50,000

100,000

Net earnings

200,000

250,000

Capital expenditures

200,000

200,000

Dividends paid

40,000

70,000

5,000

10,000

Instructions

Using the cash based measures presented in this chapter, compare the (a) liquidity and (b) solvency of the two companies.

prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method not 577318

The 2010 accounting records of Spaulding Transport reveal these transactions and events.

Payment of interest

$ 10,000

Payment of salaries and wages

53,000

Cash sales

48,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

Receipt of dividend revenue

18,000

Proceeds from sale of vehicles

812,000

Payment of income taxes

12,000

Purchase of equipment for cash

22,000

Net income

38,000

Loss on sale of vehicles

3,000

Payment for merchandise

105,000

Payment of dividends

14,000

Payment for land

74,000

Payment of operating expenses

28,000

Collection of accounts receivable

192,000

Instructions

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method. (Not all of the items will be used.)

prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method 577319

The following information is available for Mosquito Hollow Corp. for 2010.

Cash used to purchase treasury stock

$ 57,300

Cash dividends paid

21,800

Cash paid for interest

22,400

Net income

464,300

Sales

802,000

Cash paid for taxes

93,000

Cash received from customers

566,100

Cash received from sale of building (at book value)

202,400

Cash paid for operating expenses

77,000

Beginning cash balance

11,000

Cash paid for goods and services

279,100

Cash received from issuing common stock

355,000

Cash paid to redeem bonds at maturity

200,000

Cash paid to purchase equipment

113,200

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method.

compute the amount that should be reported in the operating activities section of th 577320

The following information is taken from the 2010 general ledger of Luzinski Company.

Rent

Rent expense

$ 30,000

Prepaid rent, January 1

5,900

Prepaid rent, December 31

9,000

salaries

Salaries expense

$ 54,000

Salaries payable, January 1

10,000

Salaries payable, December 31

8,000

sales

Revenue from sales

$160,000

Accounts receivable, January 1

16,000

Accounts receivable, December 31

7,000

Instructions

In each case, compute the amount that should be reported in the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.

complete the table indicating whether each item 1 should be reported as an operating 577321

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year.

Transaction

Where Reported
on Statement

Cash Inflow,
Outflow, or
No Effect?

(a)

Recorded depreciation expense on the
plant assets.

(b)

Recorded and paid interest expense.

(c)

Recorded cash proceeds from a sale of
plant assets.

(d)

Acquired land by issuing common
stock.

(e)

Paid a cash dividend to preferred
stockholders.

(f)

Distributed a stock dividend to common
stockholders.

(g)

Recorded cash sales.

(h)

Recorded sales on account.

(i)

Purchased inventory for cash.

(j)

Purchased inventory on account.

Instructions

Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating

(O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule, and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year 577323

The income statement of Grider Company is presented here.

GRIDER COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended November 30, 2010

Sales

$7,700,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,900,000

Purchases

4,400,000

Goods available for sale

6,300,000

Ending inventory

1,400,000

Total cost of goods sold

4,900,000

Gross profit

2,800,000

Operating expenses

450,000

Selling expenses

700,000

Administrative expenses

1,150,000

Net income

$1,650,000

Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable increased $300,000 during the year, and inventory decreased $500,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $150,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to suppliers of merchandise decreased $350,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable decreased $100,000 during the year.

5. Administrative expenses include depreciation expense of $80,000.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended November 30, 2010, for Grider Company, using the indirect method.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the in 577325

Jantzen Company’s income statement contained the condensed information below.

JANTZEN COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Revenues

$970,000

Operating expenses, excluding depreciation

$614,000

Depreciation expense

70,000

Loss on sale of equipment

16,000

700,000

Income before income taxes

270,000

Income tax expense

40,000

Net income

$230,000

Jantzen’s balance sheet contained the comparative data at December 31.

2010

2009

Accounts receivable

$70,000

$60,000

Accounts payable

41,000

28,000

Income taxes payable

13,000

7,000

Accounts payable pertain to operating expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

presented below are the financial statements of trahan company 577327

Presented below are the financial statements of Trahan Company.

TRAHAN COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 38,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable

33,000

14,000

Merchandise inventory

27,000

20,000

Property, plant, and equipment

60,000

78,000

Accumulated depreciation

(32,000)

(24,000)

Total

$126,000

$ 108,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 24,000

$ 15,000

Income taxes payable

7,000

8,000

Bonds payable

27,000

33,000

Common stock

18,000

14,000

Retained earnings

50,000

38,000

Total

$126,000

$ 108,000

TRAHAN COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$242,000

Cost of goods sold

175,000

Gross profit

67,000

Selling expenses

$18,000

Administrative expenses

6,000

24,000

Income from operations

43,000

Interest expense

3,000

Income before income taxes

40,000

Income tax expense

8,000

Net income

$ 32,000

Additional data:

1. Dividends declared and paid were $20,000.

2. During the year equipment was sold for $8,500 cash. This equipment cost $18,000 originally and had a book value of $8,500 at the time of sale.

3. All depreciation expense is in the selling expense category.

4. All sales and purchases are on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash basis measures:

(1) Current cash debt coverage ratio.

(2) Cash debt coverage ratio.

(3) Free cash flow.

condensed financial data of cipra inc follow 577329

Condensed financial data of Cipra Inc. follow.

CIPRA INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 80,800

$ 48,400

Accounts receivable

87,800

33,000

Inventories

112,500

102,850

Prepaid expenses

28,400

26,000

Investments

138,000

114,000

Plant assets

285,000

242,500

Accumulated depreciation

(50,000)

(52,000)

Total

$682,500

$514,750

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$102,000

$ 67,300

Accrued expenses payable

16,500

17,000

Bonds payable

110,000

150,000

Common stock

220,000

175,000

Retained earnings

234,000

105,450

$682,500

$514,750

Sales

$392,780

Less:

Cost of goods sold

$135,460

Operating expenses, excluding
depreciation

12,410

Depreciation expense

46,500

Income taxes

27,280

Interest expense

4,730

Loss on sale of plant assets

7,500

233,880

Net income

$158,900

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $100,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Old plant assets having an original cost of $57,500 were sold for $1,500 cash.

3. Bonds matured and were paid off at face value for cash.

4. A cash dividend of $30,350 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2010 using the indi 577331

The comparative balance sheets for Mercado Company as of December 31 are presented below.

MERCADO COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$ 65,000

$ 45,000

Accounts receivable

50,000

62,000

Inventory

151,450

142,000

Prepaid expenses

15,280

21,000

Land

105,000

130,000

Equipment

228,000

155,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(45,000)

(35,000)

Building

200,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

(60,000)

(40,000)

Total

$709,730

$680,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 44,730

$ 40,000

Bonds payable

260,000

300,000

Common stock, $1 par

200,000

160,000

Retained earnings

205,000

180,000

Total

$709,730

$680,000

Additional information:

1. Operating expenses include depreciation expense of $42,000 and charges from prepaid expenses of $5,720.

2. Land was sold for cash at book value.

3. Cash dividends of $12,000 were paid.

4. Net income for 2010 was $37,000.

5. Equipment was purchased for $95,000 cash. In addition, equipment costing $22,000 with a book value of $10,000 was sold for $8,000 cash.

6. Bonds were converted at face value by issuing 40,000 shares of $1 par value common stock.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, using the indirect method.

for each transaction listed above indicate whether it will increase i decrease d or 577332

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during the year.

Transactions

Free
Cash
Flow
($125,000)

Current
Cash
Debt
Coverage
Ratio
(0.5 times)

Cash
Debt
Coverage
Ratio
(0.3 times)

(a)

Recorded credit sales $2,500.

(b)

Collected $1,500 owing from
customers.

(c)

Paid amount owing to
suppliers $2,750.

(d)

Recorded sales returns of $500 and
credited the customer’s account.

(e)

Purchased new equipment $5,000;
signed a long term note payable
for the cost of the equipment.

(f)

Purchased a patent and
paid $15,000 cash for the asset.

Instructions

For each transaction listed above, indicate whether it will increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (NE) on the ratios.

complete the table indicating whether each item 1 should be reported as an operating 577333

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year.

Transaction

Where Reported
on Statement

Cash Inflow,
Outflow, or
No Effect?

(a)

Recorded depreciation expense on the
plant assets.

(b)

Incurred a loss on disposal of plant assets.

(c)

Acquired a building by paying cash.

(d)

Made principal repayments on a
mortgage.

(e)

Issued common stock.

(f )

Purchased shares of another company
to be held as a long term equity
investment.

(g)

Paid dividends to common stockholders.

(h)

Sold inventory on credit. The company
uses a perpetual inventory system.

(i)

Purchased inventory on credit.

(j)

Paid wages to employees.

Instructions

Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating (O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule, and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the plant asset acc 577334

The following selected account balances relate to the plant asset accounts of Venable Inc. at year end.

2010

2009

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

$337,500

$300,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

144,000

96,000

Buildings

750,000

750,000

Depreciation expense

101,500

85,500

Equipment

300,000

240,000

Land

100,000

70,000

Loss on sale of equipment

6,000

0

Additional information:

1. Venable purchased $90,000 of equipment and $30,000 of land for cash in 2010.

2. Venable also sold equipment in 2010.

3. Depreciation expense in 2010 was $37,500 on building and $64,000 on equipment.

Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the plant asset accounts in 2010.

(b) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (a) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year 577335

The income statement of Percival Company is presented on page 650. Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable decreased $320,000 during the year, and inventory increased $140,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $175,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to merchandise suppliers increased $60,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable increased $145,000 during the year.

PERCIVAL COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$5,400,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,780,000

Purchases

3,430,000

Goods available for sale

5,210,000

Ending inventory

1,920,000

Total cost of goods sold

3,290,000

Gross profit

2,110,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

420,000

Administrative expense

525,000

Depreciation expense

105,000

Amortization expense

20,000

1,070,000

Net income

$1,040,000

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, for Percival Company, using the indirect method.

explain whether talbot would be liable for the resulting damage for the following fi 576851

BBAL201 Business Law

Group Assignment (Group of Four)

Total Marks: 25

Due Session 5.2

Talbot, a motor mechanic, spilt some engine oil near the open entranceway to his workshop. He immediately scrubbed it with detergent, but the surface remained slightly oily. Imagine that the following accidents took place.
Explain whether Talbot would be liable for the resulting damage for the following five situations (may refer to the relevant cases):

(i) Talbot went to get some sand from the back of the workshop and the phone rang. Not wanting to miss a customer, he returned to answer the call. His back was turned for 30 seconds. During that time Nancy, a customer, entered. She slipped and broke her leg.

(ii) Nancy’s daughter, who was a very nervous person, was walking behind her mother. She became very upset when she saw her mother fall because she knew that serious damage could result.

(iii) Talbot wrote out a sign in very large bright letters which said ‘Warning—slippery floor. Do not enter’ and fixed it to the side of the workshop entrance. Connor, a customer with very poor eyesight, missed the sign, strode in, slipped and broke his leg.

(iv) Connor screamed loudly after his fall. This caused a customer who was filling his tank at the self serve pump to spin round involuntarily and spray petrol into the eyes of another customer, who ran in shock down the driveway of Talbot’s garage. The driver of a Porsche who was entering the driveway swung his wheel to avoid the customer and crashed into a brick wall, causing more than $15,000 damage to his car.

(v) Immediately after the spill, Talbot walked outside, pulled down the shutters of the workshop and went for a coffee. A 15 year old girl and a 14 year old boy who live behind the garage often sneak into the workshop when Talbot is out and chase each other around. Talbot had previously threatened to charge them with trespass. They sneak in through the unlocked back door and begin to chase each other. The boy slips and crashed into the shutters. He breaks his jaw and suffers possible long term brain damage.

question 3 on december 31 2012 the american bank enters into a debt restructuring ag 576860

Question 3

On December 31, 2012, the American Bank enters into a debt restructuring agreement with Barkley Company, which is now experiencing financial trouble. The bank agrees to restructure a13%, issued at par, $3,109,000note receivable by the following modifications:

1. Reducing the principal obligation from $3,109,000 to $2,487,200.
2. Extending the maturity date from December 31, 2012, to January 1, 2016.
3. Reducing the interest rate from13% to10%.

Barkley pays interest at the end of each year. On January 1, 2016, Barkley Company pays $2,487,200in cash to Firstar Bank.
(a)Will the gain recorded by Barkley be equal to the loss recorded by American Bank under the debt restructuring?NoYes
(b)Can Barkley Company record a gain under the term modification mentioned above?NoYes
(c)Assuming that the interest rate Barkley should use to compute interest expense in future periods is 1.4276%, prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548.)

BARKLEY COMPANY
Interest Payment Schedule After Debt Restructuring
Effective Interest Rate
Date Cash
Paid
Interest
Expense
Reduction
of Carrying
Amount
Carrying
Amount of
Note
12/31/12 $ $ $ $
12/31/13
12/31/14
12/31/15 *
Total $ $ $

*Difference due to rounding
(d)Prepare the interest payment entry for Barkley Company on December 31, 2014.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit

(e)What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016?(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit

On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.

1. The term of the noncancelable lease is6years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease.
2. Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012.
3. The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $225,100, and its cost is $180,080.
4. The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $11,000. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight line basis.
5. Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an10% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is11%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown.
6. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.)

(b)

Calculate the amount of the annual rental payment.(Round present value factor calculations to 5 decimal places, e.g. 1.25124 and the final answer to 0 decimal places e.g. 58,971.)

The amount of the annual rental payment $

prepare an executive summary to ginnie adams the owner of the bottled water company 576871

The Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master Budget In the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package.

Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary. The project should include: 1. Executive Summary 2. Sales Budget 3. Production Budget 4. Direct Materials Budget 5. Direct Labor Budget 6. Overhead Budget 7. Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 8. Cost of Goods Manufactured Budget 9. Budget and Income Statement

Document Preview:

ACT 500 Portfolio Project Guidelines The Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master Budget In the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package. Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary. The project should include: 1. Executive Summary 2. Sales Budget 3. Production Budget 4. Direct Materials Budget 5. Direct Labor Budget 6. Overhead Budget 7. Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 8. Cost of Goods Manufactured Budget 9. Budget and Income Statement

Attachments:

the accounting records of nu tonics inc include the following information for the ye 576874

The accounting records of Nu tonics Inc., include the following information for the year ended December 31, 2013:

Materials Inventory as at 1 January 2013 $ 20,000

Materials Inventory as at 31 December 2013 $ 24,000

Work in process Inventory as at 1 January 2013 $ 12,000

Work in process Inventory as at 31 December 2013 $ 8,000

Finished goods Inventory as at 1 January 2013 $ 80,000

Finished goods Inventory as at 31 December 2013 $ 90,000

Direct Materials used $210,000

Direct Labour $ 120,000

Administrative Expenses $ 310,000

Sales $ 700,000

Required:

1. Prepare a Schedule of the Cost of Finished Goods Manufactured for the year ended 31 December 2013.

2. Prepare the Income statement for the period ending 31 December 2013.

my daughter needs assistance with question 8 and the southwest airlines financial st 576887

My daughter needs assistance with question #8 and the Southwest Airlines financial statement is attached:

“Using Southwest Airlines’ financial statements and related notes, identify four items that may result in adjusting entries for prepayments and accruals. support your answer by suitable figures from the Southwest Airlines’ 2013 annual report.”

Document Preview:

Arab Open University BE210: TMA – 2nd Semester 2013 2014 Cut Off Date: 4th of May 2014 About TMA: The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 1 to 4. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession. Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 1 to 4. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the financial statements in reality. Develop students’ communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet. The TMA: The TMA requires you to: Review various study chapters (from Chapter 1 to 4) of ‘Financial and Managerial Accounting’ Book and apply some of the concepts within it. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1,200 words. The word count excludes headings, references, title page, and diagrams. You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 14 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria?Content?Referencing?Structure and Presentation of ideas?Total marks???Financial Reporting on the Internet (Southwest Airlines Co.)?????Marks?90?5?5?100?? The TMA Questions Financial Reporting on the Internet (Southwest Airlines Co.) The internet is a good place to get information that is useful to you in your study of accounting. For example, you can find information about current events, professional accounting organizations, and specific companies that may support your study. Southwest Airlines Co. (the…

Attachments:

at the end of each module you will apply the module s concepts by completing compreh 576942

Assignment 3: Excel Problems

At the end of each module, you will apply the module s concepts by completing comprehensive assignments from the textbook.

Complete problems P21 20A (p. 1121), P21 21A (p. 1122), and P21 22A (p.1123) in your textbook.

Present your analysis of the assigned problems in Excel format. Enter non numerical responses in the same worksheet using textboxes.

Assignment 3 Grading Criteria

Maximum Points

P20 21A:

Prepared report for July 2011 which shows the performance of the Dayton store, the Ohio region and the company

10

Explained and justified if would investigate the Dayton store on the basis of the report

5

Explained if Doggy World should prepare a master budget and discussed the benefits of budgeting

5

P21 21A:

Prepared Clipboard Office Supply s budgeted income statement for May and June

10

P21 22A:

Prepared schedules of budgeted cash collections, budgeted cash payments for purchases and budgeted cash payments for operating expenses

10

Prepared a cash budget and identified the cash balance as of June 30, 2011

10

Total:

50

Attachments:

a special order decision 576951

I am completely lost on how to go about putting this data together and making a decision

Document Preview:

Managerial Accounting (AF 211) Course Project For this semester’s course project, you have to analyze the following case: Brinkers’ Bicycle Shop: A Special Order Decision Your analysis should include the following steps, to the extent logical and possible, given the character of the case: Identify and describe or explain the problem that the managers of the organization in question are encountering. What has happened to make the managers realize that the problem has arisen? What is the likely cause of the problem? Why is the problem important? Analyze the problem, using tools and concepts that we have been studying, as well as your general business and management knowledge. Analyze the situation from a quantitative perspective, using the data available in the case, and from operational, qualitative and strategic perspectives. Use diagrams/tables to conduct your analysis and to report your findings. Your analysis should show that you can use these tools and concepts and the language of management accounting correctly and articulately. Draw conclusions regarding the nature of the problem and possible solutions, and develop recommendations for the managers in question. Write a memorandum to the organization’s managers that summarizes your analysis, findings and recommendations. The memo should contain: An introductory paragraph which explains the purpose of the memo and summarizes the analysis that you have conducted, your findings and your recommendations. One or more paragraphs that describe and explain in some detail the problem(s) that you have identified, the analysis that you have conducted, your findings and conclusions, and your recommendations. If you have made any assumptions in conducting your analysis, be sure to state them clearly and to justify them. Also, be certain to describe any limitations of your analysis, for example, data which is not available but would be useful. The memo itself should only be a few pages. Attach one or more…

Attachments:

strategic management accounting module code apc 309 576956

Sunderland Business School

MBA

Module Title: Strategic Management Accounting

Module Code: APC 309

Individual assignment

Hand In Date: Week commencing 5th May 2014

General Information

Weighting – 100% of the marks for this module

This is an individual assignment of 3,000 words (+/ 10%), excluding the bibliography and any appendices. The word count MUST be shown on the front of the assignment.

There are TWO questions to be answered in this assignment. Each question carries a maximum mark of 50%

All of the learning outcomes for the module are being assessed in this assignment. The learning outcomes are shown in the section entitled ‘’Marking Guide’’, which is further on in this document.

The University’s policy on cheating collusion and plagiarism will be applied to this piece of work.

You are required to produce a report that answers the following TWO questions:

Requirements:

Part a.

XYZ Limited is a medium sized manufacturing business which makes and sells products to a range of industrial customers who use XYZ’s products in their own products. The working capital of XYZ is typical of a manufacturing organisation in that at any point in time they have cash, trade receivables, inventories of raw materials, work in progress and finished goods and trade payables.

The Managing Director of XYZ Limited believes that all parts of the working capital cycle could be improved and has asked you to produce a report which discusses how each part of the working capital cycle could be improved and which critically evaluates the implications of the improvements on XYZ and other connected parties (for example trade receivables and trade payables).

Part b.

A Strategic Management Accountant (SMA) uses cost and income data in a number of different decision making scenarios. Four such scenarios are:

  1. Shutting down or keeping open part of the business;
  2. Pricing products or services;
  3. Product mix and limiting factor analysis; and
  4. Make or buy decisions.

For each of the above four scenarios, you are asked to

  1. Critically evaluate and discuss what the relevant costs and income would be, to enable the SMA to reach a decision; and
  2. Discuss and comment on any qualitative factors that might need to be taken into account in reaching a decision;

If you want to use numerical examples to support your answers please include these as an appendix.

Guidance:

Students are encouraged to be inquisitive and innovative in their approach as to what should be included in this report the following may be of some use in providing guidance as to what could possibly be included, although this is in no way meant to be prescriptive.

The aim of the assignment is to help you understand how key areas of management accounting and control are demonstrated in practice for various sizes and types of companies. This will include investigating topics from throughout the course linked to the above issues. Some of the principles, concepts ad models will be more relevant to your chosen approach than others and so it is likely that different students will formulate different approaches to the problems. This is normal, it is not expected that all of the course content will be used in the analysis, concentrate on that which you feel is most important.

As part of your work you might find it helpful to briefly explore the underlying theory behind the key areas of investigation that you identify before applying them to report.

With 3,000 words you do not have a lot of room for long introductions so assume you are writing to a sophisticated audience who has a working knowledge of management accounting and control and is well versed in business theory. Numerical examples for illustrative purposes may be of use
but should not be the main thrust of the work. If used they should be to provide evidence to support your findings from your other analysis of position and policies. If other sources are used remember to
reference everything!

Please avoid relying too heavily on descriptive sections reproducing information available from course material or the set text. It is your own logical, evaluation of the situation, the interpretation of course material and presentation, with critical analysis, of a coherent strategic plan that will attract high marks.

APC309 MAY ASSESMENT MARKING GUIDE

Marking Guide

The learning outcomes for this module assessed by this piece of work are

Knowledge

  1. Critically evaluate a range of key management accounting models and concepts.
  2. Critically understanding of specific analytical skills in key areas within management accounting at local and international level
  3. Critically understand of the role and limitations of management accounting theory.

Skills

  1. Applied the key management accounting concepts and methodologies in order to contribute to successful decision making in an organisation.

In light of this the assessment criteria in the grid below will be used when assessing your work.

ASSESSMENT CRITERIA

Criteria Fail ( Fail (35 39) 3rd (40 49) 2:2 (50 59) 2:1 (69 69) Ist (70+)
Knowledge of relevant concepts and issues Fails to identify the majority of the concepts relevant to the question or introduces topics that are not relevant. The ordering of the concepts indicates a lack of understanding of key concepts. Fails to identify the majority of the concepts relevant to the question. Those concepts that are used are misapplied. The ordering of the concepts is in appropriate. Identifies some of the key concepts, but not all o f them, or displays an in correct understanding of some of the concepts discussed. The ordering of the concepts may be adhoc. Identifies and utilises some of the key concepts relevant to the question. Uses some of the concepts, but not always in an appropriate context. The work is ordered appropriately Identifies the majority of the key concepts relevant to the question and uses them in an appropriate context. Orders and structures them in a logical sequence Identifies all of the key concepts relevant to the question and uses them in an appropriate context. The material is structured to show significant understanding of the key issues.
Depth of understanding and extent of critical evaluation (including evidence of wider reading) The student has failed to address the question set or appears to have answered a different question to that set. There is no evidence of any reading. No key issues identified. There is no evaluation of the validity of the sources used or the work is based on one key source. Inappropriate sources are used extensively. There is no evidence of appropriate wider reading. No reflection on key issues. There is some evaluation of the materials used in the work. The work is based on a limited number of appropriate sources.
Little reflection on key issues.
Good evaluation of materials used, with discernment obvious as to key sources. The work is based on a number of appropriate sources. Some reflection on key issues. Good evaluation of all key/important sources materials used. The work is based on a wide range of appropriate sources. Good reflection on key issues. The work is set in a context where wider reading and appreciation of the context is obvious. The material included is relevant to the topic and appropriate in addressing the key issues identified in the assignment
Evidence of appropriate analysis The student fails to draw any relationships from the material used or the student is incorrect in the relationships that they draw. The student draws one or two basic relationships from the material used, but then subsequently misapply these concepts. The student draws one or two basic relationships from the material used, but fails to identify other important relationships. There may be some evidence they have not clearly understood all of the material they have presented The student draws some limited relationships from the material used. There might be minor issues where the student is incorrect in the assertions that they make, but overall they demonstrate appropriate analysis. The student starts to demonstrate they understand the key relationships from the material used. There are no substantive errors in their analysis. All the key connections are drawn between materials from different sources. The student makes no substantive errors in their analysis and reflects upon the key issues identified in their analysis.
Ability to synthesise relevant material from a range of sources The student fails to use any appropriate sources. There is extensive repetition of notes given out in class. The student uses just a few non academic sources of information or the material used is inappropriate for UG level study. They quote verbatim extensively from one or two sources. They use quotations incorrectly to support an argument. The student uses a few sources of information or the material used is inappropriate for UG level study. Extensive verbatim quotes are used as a replacement for the students own work. The student may be limited in their use of academic sources such as journals and books, but there is evidence that they have attempted to access a range of sources including non academic ones. The student has accessed a range of academic sources such as journals and books, and also appropriate non academic ones. Verbatim quotes are used to enhance the arguments being developed rather than as a replacement for the students own work. The student has accessed a wide range of appropriate sources. They make reference to a wide range of material in their work. Verbatim quotes are used from a range of sources to illustrate and support the arguments being developed, but without becoming a substitute for the students own work.
Structure and clarity of presentation. The work has no coherent structure. The work is littered with spelling and typographical errors. Very poor use of English. Where appropriate tables/graphs are not used. Referencing is poor or non existent. The work is poorly organised, and structured. There are many spelling and typographical errors. Poor use of English. Where appropriate tables/graphs are not used. Referencing is patchy and incomplete. The work is poorly structured. There are spelling and typographical errors. Poor use of English. Where appropriate tables/graphs are not used appropriately. Some of the referencing is incomplete The work has a clear structure and generally a logical progression. Occasional typographical and spelling errors. Some use of tables/graphs is made where appropriate. The work has overall a coherent structure and a clear and logical progression. Very few typographical and spelling errors. Good use of tables/graphs is made where appropriate. The work is well structured with clearly defined objectives that are achieved. Typographical and spelling errors are rare. Excellent use of tables/graphs is made where appropriate.

Attachments:

write a report recommending changes to operational processes to improve customer ser 577001

Assessment description Write a report recommending changes to operational processes to improve customer service of the Paper Plane Manufacturing Company based on the data collected during the six rounds of manufacture your team carried out during this module.

Review the data you have collected during the six rounds of the Paper Plane Manufacturing Company and write a report which outlines:

  • The results of your manufacture to date in terms of quantity and quality.
  • The key areas for future improvement.
  • Recommendations to improve processes to improve performance.
  • A plan of how you will implement the recommendations.

Procedure

  1. Collate data from the six rounds of manufacture of the Paper Plane Manufacturing Company.
  2. Analyse data and qualitative notes on discussions and decisions taken.
  3. Make recommendations to improve processes to improve customer service to achieve the goal of the Paper Plane Manufacturing Company.

Specifications You must provide by the end of the program:

  • Raw data collected and copies of notes taken.
  • Written report detailing the results of manufacturing to date and recommendations for changes in processes to improve customer service.

Your assessor will be looking for:

  • Use of data and documents created and recorded during the six rounds of the Paper Plane Manufacturing Company to accurately reflect the quantity and quality of the product produced.
  • Appropriate references, as the source of data, to one or more data monitoring tools.
  • Use of the data and one or more analytical tools appropriately to review current processes to determine where improvements can be made.
  • Use one or more appropriate tools to analyse barriers to improved performance.
  • Recommendations which are consistent with the data and analysis and the organisation’s goal and customer requirements.
  • Prioritising of recommendations appropriately.

Taking into account what is required to effectively communicate to the team and change people’s behaviour in creating the implementation

Assessment Task 2: Promotional Campaign Submission details Candidate’s Name Phone No. Assessor’s Name Phone No. Assessment Site Assessment Date/s Time/s The assessment task is due on the date specified by your assessor. Any variations to this arrangement must be approved in writing by your assessor. Submit this document with any required evidence attached. See specifications below for details. Performance objective The candidate must demonstrate the ability to conduct promotional activities to support the promotion of a product or service.

  1. Review the marketing plan developed in the Assessment Task 1 and finalise before implementing the campaign.
  2. Develop your promotional materials.
  3. Conduct the campaign.

Note: Ensure that your assessor is included as part of your target market so that they can assess progress. For example, you will need to include your assessor in emails or SMS messages. Alternatively if you are conducting a meet and greet display, you need to ensure that your assessor is available on the day of the promotion. Specifications You must:

  • develop promotional material
  • conduct a promotional activity
  • include your assessor in promotional communication.

Your assessor will be looking for:

  • promotional materials that are developed for the target market including:
    • appropriate language
    • appropriate visuals
    • correct application of technology.
  • A campaign that is professionally run, demonstrating:
    • product or service is clearly identified
    • effective use of networks
    • the promotion enhances the perception of the product or service.

you are employed by workplace solutions agency your task 577004

You are employed by Workplace Solutions Agency. Your task (across assessment tasks 1 and 2) is to plan the draft, edit and write a report on the Moortown Sports and Leisure Centre using the materials provided and the Workplace Solutions Agency report style guide.

The report should have the following main parts:

  • Marketing and promotion
  • Recommendations
  • Table of contents
  • Executive summary
  • Operational structure
  • Acknowledgments
  • Communication
  • Title page.

The target audience for the report is the Manager of the Moortown Sports and Leisure Centre. Your report should be approximately 1,000–1,500 words. Procedure

  1. Carefully read the Moortown Sports and Leisure Centre report findings.
  2. Analyse, generate ideas, research and plan an outline for the writing task scenario in the assessment description.

PAMS (Purpose, Audience, Message, Style) analysis and at least one of the following documents:

  • brainstorming activities
  • mind mapping
  • outline.
  1. Prepare to discuss your planning documents and the planning process
  2. Meet with assessor to discuss your planning process and organisational requirements such as ergonomic requirements and resource conservation.

Specifications Submit at least two documents you have produced while planning, such as:

  • PAMS analysis and at least one of the following:

1. Brainstorming activities

2. mind mapping

3. outline.

Answer the following questions:

  • Look at your PAMS analysis. What is the purpose of the writing task and how will you achieve this?
  • What is the most appropriate document format for this task and why is it appropriate to the task?
  • What means of communication or communication tools (pens, paper, PowerPoint, Word) will you use and why?
  • Explain how your plan/outline shows an overview of the structure and contents of the report.
  • What are your main points and main arguments? Explain how your plan/outline captures these.
  • How could you prevent injury to yourself when you are repeatedly writing at a workstation for long periods of time?
  • What are some resources that organisations might need to conserve?
  • How would you conserve these resources?

Moortown Sports and Leisure Centre report findings From surveys of clients and community, observation, interviews with staff and consultation with key stakeholders:

  • centre can’t fit it any new clubs
  • peak times 12–2 pm, 4–8 pm Mon–Fri; 8 am–2 pm Sat
  • cafe is staffed by casuals, limited to opening times and service
  • 2% of Moortown residents use centre
  • opening hours 6 am–10 pm
  • outside peak times, centre operates at 22% capacity
  • six rooms for therapy treatments = hired 35%, available only at peak times
  • rooms are hired on casual basis and centre receives 15% of all monies
  • no contracts, no leases
  • cash is paid weekly
  • 65% of community are unaware of any programs, 30% are aware of two or fewer programs, 5% are aware of more than two programs
  • ads in local newspaper, flyers etc.
  • sometimes there is an advertising segment on 3MU community radio
  • mostly new clients are attracted by word of mouth, find out through notice board, reception desk or from instructors
  • seven clubs have longstanding agreements – verbal and use 80% of time and space
  • pool and basketball court is most popular
  • 13 clubs use the centre:
    • Moortown Basketball Club
    • Moortown Soccer Club
    • Moortown Athletics
    • Moortown Handball Club
    • Moortown Volleyball (new)
    • Lake Moortown Rowers
    • Moortown Cricket Club
    • Central Cycling
    • The Moortown Climbers
    • Maulers Basketball Club
    • MSLC Squash club
    • Moortown Bowlers
    • MSLC table tennis team.
  • five new clubs want training times
  • licensed
  • no booking procedure for BBQ/lawn area; members protest about private bookings because of limited space
  • can fit 150 for catering
  • there is a drinks fridge at reception
  • sports clothing, health supplements, massage oils etc are also sold at reception = big demand causing space and crowding problems
  • five full time staff
  • 27 casuals – Moortown uni students who do lots of different roles e.g. bar/café, life guard, holiday program leaders, umpire, reception etc.
  • no handover procedure, no intranet
  • communication is via central message book
  • no regular staff meetings
  • staffing budget is 21% over
  • all bookings – crèche, rooms for hire, courts, etc. are done by hand in separate record books in the various areas, then put together into one book at main desk
  • double bookings and missed bookings happen a lot.

go to the various websites and identify the most reliable 577010

Instructions for Assessment 1 1. Go here: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_fallacies 2. Stay away from ‘Formal Fallacies’. 3. Select from ‘Informal Fallacies’. 4. DO NOT use Wikipedia as a source. 5. Select the name of your fallacy and then google that name. 6. Go to the various websites and identify the most reliable. 7. Copy/paste your basic research information into a Word file, and KEEP TRACK OF THE WEBSITE YOU GOT IT FROM.

Document Preview:

Week 6 Assessment 1 Structure April 28, 2014 1Week 6 Assessment 1 Structure April 28, 2014 2Week 6 Assessment 1 Structure April 28, 2014 3

a major perspective on accounting financial reporting regulation 577013

ASSIGNMENT QUESTION:

A major perspective on accounting (financial reporting) regulation views regulation as

being required to protect the public interest. However, the regulatory capture and

economic (private) interests perspectives argue that the public interest objective could be

adversely affected by various factors.

The assignment question requires you to explain the above three perspectives on

accounting regulation. In particular, to what extent do you believe that, within the

Australian financial reporting regulatory environment, the issues of regulatory capture

and private interests do adversely affect the objective of the provision of useful

information for users of public company financial reports? State any recommendations

you would make to reduce any potential for adverse impacts, and comment on what the

three perspectives mean for the role and power of accountants in society.

Write a research essay addressing the above assignment question. You are required to fully explain your

viewpoints and support your decision by academic research papers (at least 3 peer reviewed academic

papers) plus newspaper articles, textbooks and other reliable sources of literature.

(Total for part B = 30 marks)

Document Preview:

ASSIGNMENT QUESTION: A major perspective on accounting (financial reporting) regulation views regulation as being required to protect the public interest. However, the regulatory capture and economic (private) interests perspectives argue that the public interest objective could be adversely affected by various factors. The assignment question requires you to explain the above three perspectives on accounting regulation. In particular, to what extent do you believe that, within the Australian financial reporting regulatory environment, the issues of regulatory capture and private interests do adversely affect the objective of the provision of useful information for users of public company financial reports? State any recommendations you would make to reduce any potential for adverse impacts, and comment on what the three perspectives mean for the role and power of accountants in society. Write a research essay addressing the above assignment question. You are required to fully explain your viewpoints and support your decision by academic research papers (at least 3 peer reviewed academic papers) plus newspaper articles, textbooks and other reliable sources of literature. (Total for part B = 30 marks)

Attachments:

your manager has recently heard about the use of digital dashboards 577066

Accounting Information Systems (Acc200) Assignment 2 Session 1, 2014 (2014 30) Please refer to the marking criteria in the study guide to assist you in developing your answers to the following questions. Question 1 (20 marks) (word limit guide 300 – 400 words): Your Manager has recently heard about the use of “Digital Dashboards”, but is unsure what they are and how they can be used. Prepare a summary for your Manager explaining what “Digital Dashboards” are and how they can be used to improve business performance. Include information on a potential supplier of this type of product, noting pricing and features available. Question 2 (20 marks) (word limit guide 300 – 400 words): “Bring Your Own Devices” (BYOD) present new possibilities and challenges for organisations of all sizes. In relation to an organisations network and users, outline the benefits and complications that may arise from BYOD (eg. Smartphones, Tablets and Wi Fi Laptops). Question 3 (30 marks): You have been hired by manufacturing organisation STAR to review their logistics department. The organisation is looking to improve efficiencies in this area. Prior to being able to make any recommendations, you must first understand the current process being undertaken. Below are the notes that you have taken during you discussion with the logistics manager of STAR. “The sales order is received and sent by the sales office to the warehouse clerk. The warehouse clerk checks for availability of the goods. The warehouse clerk generates a picking slip. This is then used to pick the goods that have been ordered and then the goods are packed in a box. As the goods are packed, the items on the picking slip are initialled in indicate that the correct quantities have been taken from the shelves and packed. The boxed goods, sales order and picking slip are then forwarded to the dispatch administrator. The dispatch administrator compares the details of the picking slip to the items in the box. If there is any discrepancy between the packed goods and the documentation, it is resolved by the warehouse manager. Once the goods and the documentation are matched, the dispatch administrator keys the details of the order into the computer; the details are stored in the ‘goods packed’ file. The computer then displays a list of approved couriers. The list of approved couriers is stored in the ‘authorised courier’ file in the computer. The administrator selects a courier form the list and clicks ‘confirm’. The computer retrieves the details from the goods packed file, adds the courier details, saves the updated data I the goods packed file and displays the full details on the computer screen. The dispatch officer then reviews the details on the screen and clicks ‘accept details’. A shipping notice is created, which is stored in the ‘shipping notice’ file, and a bill of lading, which is stored in the ‘bill of lading’ file. Two copies of the shipping notice and one copy of the bill of lading are printed. The bill of lading and one copy of the shipping notice are attached to the box containing the goods, and placed in the shipping area. The courier collects and delivers the goods to the customer. The sales order and picking slip are matched to the shipping notice and sent to accounts receivable. In accounts receivable, the sales order, packing slip and shipping notice are matched with the customer’s purchase order (stored in the ‘orders awaiting delivery’ file) and filed by shipment date in the ‘orders to be invoiced’ file.” Using the details from your discussion with the logistics manager and an applicable system tool, create a level 0 data flow diagram to document the existing system from sales office to customer. Question 4 (30 marks): Mr Jimmy Cash owns a number of successful businesses. He has become aware of some irregularities in one of his small businesses “Cash Enterprises” and has asked you to investigate. Your initial investigations uncover the following information from Sally the bookkeeper: 1. Regular transfer of unauthorised payments into her personal investment account 2. Paying herself for overtime that was not worked 3. Paying herself additional Superannuation amounts 4. Weekly payments of $5000 to Bill’s Cleaning Services (run by Sally’s husband) for routine cleaning services 5. Sally never took leave, claiming that her role was too important to be absent Write a Business Report (in report format) to Jimmy outlining: • the risks and internal control issues that were uncovered in your investigation • Any recommendations to Jimmy to avoid these risks in future

1 prepare all required adjusting journal entries 2 prepare an adjusted trial balance 577113

1. Prepare all required adjusting journal entries2. Prepare an adjusted trial balance3. prepare a complete set of financial statements for the year ended december 31, 2013, in good form

Additional info:Jacobson companies policy is to prepare financial statements annually and therefore adjusting entries are only done at year end, December 31.

The short term note payable for $50,000 was issued on November 1, 2013 and matures on September 30, 2014. The terms of the note call for interest of 6% payable a maturity. As of December 31, no interest has been accrued in Jacobson Company’s accounting records.

The bonds payable were issued at a discount on July 1, 2010 and mature on June 30, 2020. Interest is paid semiannually every June 30 and December 31. All interest payments have been made on the designated date.

The buildings are depreciated on a straight line basis. The Company’s

the sasoon barber shop employs four barbers one barber who also se 577237

The Sasoon Barber Shop employs four barbers. One barber, who also serves as D the manager, is paid a salary of $3,000 per month. The other barbers are paid $1,500 per et month. In addition, each barber is paid a commission of $3 per haircut. Other monthly PI costs arc store rent $700 plus 60 cents per haircut, depreciation on equipment $400, bar art ber supplies 40 cents per haircut. utilities $300. and advertising $100. The price of a hair. CI cut is $10.

instructions la) Determine the variable costs per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs. (b) Compute the break even point in units and dollars. (c) Prepare a CVP graph. assuming a maximum of 1.800 haircuts in a month. Usc increments of 300 haircuts on the lm/A.111A axis and $3.000 increments on the re s” vertical axis. (d) Determine the net income, assuming 1.800 haircuts arc given in a month. ,t ey1P1S 211 MI Frute Company bottles and distributes Frute Ade. a fruit drink. The beverage Dr; is sold for !LO cents per lb ounce bottle to who charge customers 70 cents per mien bottle. For the year 2014, management estimates the following •••••••1 •••• •

Document Preview:

Handy Scanner for Android

Attachments:

share issue 577248

Regardless of the advice you have given (Part A), the owners have decided to go “public” and issue an ‘IPO” They issue 30 million shares ($2.00), of which the payment on application is to $0.80 per share (closes 18th April 2013), $0.50 four weeks after allocation (allocation is 12th May 2013) and the remaining amount to be paid on 30th June 2013. The IPO attracts requests for 30.4 million shares. In this case, it exceeds the allowable number of shares and the directors decide to apply the “first come, first served” approach and return the excess back to the unlucky applicants

Required: You are to journalise the events (including dates and notations). You should assume that all monies were received on 18th April (applications).

the following data are available for allen clapp corporation 577268

The following data are available for Allen Clapp Corporation.

Net income

$200,000

Depreciation expense

40,000

Dividends paid

60,000

Gain on sale of land

10,000

Decrease in accounts receivable

20,000

Decrease in accounts payable

30,000

Net cash provided by operating activities is:

(a) $160,000.

(b) $220,000.

(c) $240,000.

(d) $280,000.

analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash fl 577306

Rensing Corporation had these transactions during 2010.

(a) Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long term note in exchange.

(b) Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash.

(c) Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000.

(d) Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000.

(e) Sold a long term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash.

(f) Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable.

(g) Paid $18,000 on accounts payable.

Instructions

Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities.

indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using the 577307

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Kingsley Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary.

(a) Payment of interest on notes payable.

(b) Exchange of land for patent.

(c) Sale of building at book value.

(d) Payment of dividends.

(e) Depreciation.

(f) Conversion of bonds into common stock.

(g) Receipt of interest on notes receivable.

(h) Issuance of capital stock.

(i) Amortization of patent.

(j) Issuance of bonds for land.

(k) Purchase of land.

(l) Receipt of dividends on investment in stock.

(m) Loss on sale of land.

(n) Retirement of bonds.

Instructions

Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using these four major classifications: operating activity (indirect method), investing activity, financing activity, and significant noncash investing and financing activity.

prepare a statement of partnership liquidation with supporting safe payments schedul 576750

Installment liquidation—Safe payments schedule

Jason, Kelly, and Becky, who share partnership profits 50 percent, 30 percent, and 20 percent, respectively, decide to liquidate their partnership. They need the cash from the partnership as soon as possible but do not want to sell the assets at fire sale prices, so they agree to an installment liquidation. A summary balance sheet on January 1, 2011, is as follows:

Cash

$ 16,500

Accounts payable

$ 21,000

Accounts receivable

28,000

Jason capital

69,000

Inventory

20,500

Kelly capital

47,000

Equipment—net

101,000

Becky capital

43,000

Loan to Jason

14,000

$180,000

$180,000

Cash is distributed to the partners at the end of each month, with $5,000 retained for possible contingencies in the liquidation process. During January 2011, Jason agreed to offset his capital balance with his loan from the partnership, $25,000 was collected on the accounts receivable, and the balance is determined to be uncollectible. Liquidation expenses of $2,000 were paid. During February 2011, $18,000 was collected from the sale of inventories and $90,000 collected from the sale of equipment. Additional liabilities of $3,000 were discovered, and $2,000 of liquidation expenses were paid. All cash was then distributed in a final liquidation.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation with supporting safe payments schedules for each cash distribution.

prepare a statement of partnership liquidation with supporting safe payments schedul 576751

Installment liquidation—Safe payments schedules

The balance sheet of Roger, Susan, and Tom, who share partnership profits 30 percent, 30 percent, and 40 percent, respectively, included the following balances on January 1, 2011, the date of dissolution:

Cash

$ 20,000

Liabilities

$ 40,100

Other assets

130,000

Loan from Roger

5,000

Loan to Susan

10,000

Roger capital

9,900

Susan capital

45,000

Tom capital

60,000

$160,000

$160,000

During January 2011, part of the firm’s assets are sold for $40,000. In February the remaining assets are sold for $21,000. Assume that available cash is distributed to the proper parties at the end of January and at the end of February.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation with supporting safe payments schedules for each cash distribution. (It will not be possible to determine the actual gains and losses in January.)

prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the period october 1 through nove 576752

Installment liquidation

Account balances for the Rob, Tom, and Val partnership on October 1, 2011, are as follows:

Cash

$ 21,000

Accounts payable

$ 80,000

Accounts receivable

63,000

Note payable

50,000

Inventory

120,000

Rob capital (30%)

43,600

Equipment

150,000

Tom capital (50%)

150,000

Rob loan

15,000

Val capital (20%)

45,400

$369,000

$369,000

The partners have decided to liquidate the business. Activities for October and November are as follows:

October

1 Rob is short of funds, and the partners agree to charge her loan to her capital account.

2 $40,000 is collected on the accounts receivable; $4,000 is written off as uncollectible.

3 Half the inventory is sold for $50,000.

4 Equipment with a book value of $55,000 is sold for $60,000.

5 The $50,000 bank note plus $600 accrued interest is paid in full.

6 The accounts payable are paid.

7 Liquidation expenses of $2,000 are paid.

8 Except for a $5,000 contingency fund, all available cash is distributed to partners at the end of October.

November

9 The remaining equipment is sold for $38,000.

10 Val accepts inventory with a book value of $20,000 and a fair value of $10,000 as payment for part of her capital balance. The rest of the inventory is written off.

11 Accounts receivable of $10,000 are collected. The remaining receivables are written off.

12 Liquidation expenses of $800 are paid.

13 Remaining cash, including the contingency fund, is distributed to the partners.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the period October 1 through November 30.

prepare a cash distribution schedule for the january 8 2012 distribution of availabl 576753

Installment liquidation

The adjusted trial balance of the Jee, Moore, and Olsen partnership at December 31, 2011, is as follows:

Cash

$ 50,000

Accounts receivable—net

100,000

Nonmonetary assets

800,000

Expenses

400,000

Total debits

$1,350,000

Accounts payable

$ 80,000

Jee capital

250,000

Moore capital

450,000

Olsen capital

370,000

Revenue

200,000

Total credits

$1,350,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. Partnership profits are divided 20%, 40%, and 40% to Jee, Moore, and Olsen, respectively, after salary allowances of $25,000 each to Jee and Moore for time devoted to the business.

2. Due to the disastrous results of 2011, the partners agreed to liquidate the business as soon as possible after January 1, 2012, and to distribute available cash on a weekly basis.

3. During the first week in January, $85,500 was collected on the accounts receivable, and cash was distributed on January 8, 2012.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entries to close the partnership books at December 31, 2011.

2. Develop a cash distribution plan for the partnership as of January 1, 2012.

3. Prepare a cash distribution schedule for the January 8, 2012, distribution of available cash.

prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the beams plank and timbers partn 576754

Installment liquidation

The after closing trial balances of the Beams, Plank, and Timbers partnership at December 31, 2011, included the following accounts and balances:

Cash

$120,000

Accounts receivable—net

140,000

Inventory

200,000

Plant assets—net

200,000

Trademarks

20,000

Total debits

$680,000

Accounts payable

$150,000

Notes payable

100,000

Beams capital (profi t sharing ratio, 50%)

170,000

Plank capital (profi t sharing ratio, 30%)

180,000

Timbers capital (profi t sharing ratio, 20%)

80,000

Total credits

$680,000

The partnership is to be liquidated as soon as possible, and all available cash except for a $10,000 contingency balance is to be distributed at the end of each month prior to the time that all assets are converted into cash.

During January 2012, $100,000 was collected from accounts receivable, inventory items with a book value of $80,000 were sold for $100,000, and available cash was distributed. During February 2012, Beams received plant assets with a book value of $60,000 and a fair value of $50,000 in partial settlement of her equity in the partnership. Also during February, the remaining inventory items were sold for $60,000, liquidation expenses of $2,000 were paid, and a liability of $8,000 was discovered. Cash was distributed on February 28. During March 2012, the plant assets were sold for $110,000, the remaining noncash assets were written off, final liquidation expenses of $5,000 were paid, and cash was distributed. The dissolution of the partnership was completed on March 31, 2012.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the Beams, Plank, and Timbers partnership for the period January 1 to March 31, 2012.

hal company filed for protection from creditors under the bankruptcy act on july 1 2 576766

Financial reporting during bankruptcy

Hal Company filed for protection from creditors under the bankruptcy act on July 1, 2011. Hal had the following liabilities at the time of filing:

10% mortgage bonds payable, secured by a building

with a book value and fair value of $100,000

$200,000

Accrued interest on mortgage (January 1–July 1)

10,000

Accounts payable

80,000

Priority tax claims

50,000

$340,000

1. The December 31, 2011, balance sheet will show prepetition liabilities of:

a $340,000 (the claims at filing)

b $240,000 (the original claims less the secured portion of the mortgage bonds)

c $350,000 (the original claims plus six months’ interest on the bonds)

d $290,000 (the original claims less the priority tax claims)

two and a half years after filing the petition for bankruptcy hal rsquo s management 576767

Two and a half years after filing the petition for bankruptcy, Hal’s management, its creditors, the equity holders, and other parties in interest agree on a reorganization value of $500,000. Which of the following statements is most likely?

a The reorganization value approximates the appraised value of the firm as a going concern less the prepetition liabilities.

b The reorganization value approximates the fair value of the assets less the fair value of the prepetition and postpetition liabilities.

c The reorganization value approximates the fair value of the assets less the book value of the postpetition liabilities and the estimated settlement value of the prepetition liabilities.

d The reorganization value approximates the fair value of the entity without considering the liabilities.

two of uni rsquo s subsidiaries are operating as debtors in possession under the ban 576768

Uni, a parent company with five wholly owned operating subsidiaries, is in the process of preparing consolidated financial statements for the year. Two of Uni’s subsidiaries are operating as debtors in possession under the bankruptcy act. Which of the following statements is correct?

a ASC Topic 810, “Consolidation,” prohibits Uni from consolidating the financial statements of the two subsidiaries in bankruptcy with those of the other affiliated companies.

b ASC Topic 810, “Consolidation,” requires that the financial statements of all five of the subsidiaries be consolidated with those of the parent company.

c If Uni’s consolidated financial statements include the operations of the two subsidiaries in bankruptcy, ASC Topic 852 requires that condensed combined financial statements for all entities in reorganization be presented as supplementary financial statements.

d If Uni’s consolidated financial statements do not include the operations of the two subsidiaries in bankruptcy, those subsidiaries must be accounted for under the cost method.

does bax qualify for fresh start reporting on the basis of the reorganization value 576771

Fresh start reporting requirements

Bax has been operating under Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code for the past 15 months. On March 31, 2011, just before confirmation of its reorganization plan, Bax’s reorganization value is estimated at $2,000,000. A balance sheet for Bax prepared on the same date is summarized as follows:

Current assets

$ 750,000

Plant assets

3,000,000

$3,750,000

Postpetition liabilities

$1,200,000

Prepetition liabilities subject to compromise *

1,500,000

Fully secured debt

900,000

Capital stock

900,000

Deficit

(750,000 )

$3,750,000

* Represents allowed claims. The reorganization plan calls for payment of $150,000 and issuance of $300,000 notes and $375,000 common stock in settlement of the prepetition liabilities.

REQUIRED

1. Does Bax qualify for fresh start reporting on the basis of the reorganization value?

2. What other conditions must be met for fresh start reporting? Show calculations.

show how the 200 000 cash will be distributed to holders of each of the claims 576772

Financial reporting during bankruptcy—Distributions to creditors

Hol is in bankruptcy and is being liquidated by a court appointed trustee. The financial report that follows was prepared by the trustee just before the final cash distribution:

Assets

Cash

$ 200,000

Approved Claims

Mortgage payable (secured by property that was

sold for $100,000)

$ 160,000

Accounts payable, unsecured

100,000

Administrative expenses payable, unsecured

16,000

Salaries payable, unsecured

4,000

Interest payable, unsecured

20,000

Total approved claims

$ 300,000

The administrative expenses are for trustee fees and other costs of administering the debtor corporation’s estate.

REQUIRED: Show how the $200,000 cash will be distributed to holders of each of the claims.

prepare financial statements on march 31 for sco in trusteeship balance sheet cash r 576773

Financial reporting during bankruptcy

The balance sheet of Sco appeared as follows on March 1, 2011, when an interim trustee was appointed by the U.S. trustee to assume control of Sco’s estate in a case.

Assets

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

$ 4,000

Accounts payable

$ 50,000

Accounts receivable—net

8,000

Note payable—unsecured

40,000

Inventories

36,000

Revenue received in advance

1,000

Land

20,000

Wages payable

3,000

Buildings—net

100,000

Mortgage payable

80,000

Intangible assets

26,000

Capital stock

40,000

Retained earnings deficit

(20,000 )

Assets

$194,000

Liabilities and equity

$194,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. Creditors failed to elect a trustee; accordingly, the interim trustee became trustee for the case.

2. The land and buildings are pledged as security for the mortgage payable.

3. In January 2011, Sco received $1,000 from a customer as a payment in advance for merchandise that is no longer marketed.

4. Activities of the trustee during March are summarized as follows:

a. $7,200 is collected on the receivables, and the balance is determined to be uncollectible.

b. All inventories are sold for $19,400.

c. Land and buildings bring a total of $90,000.

d. Nothing is realized from the intangible assets.

e. Administrative expenses of $8,200 are incurred by the trustee.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a separate set of books for the trustee to assume possession of the estate and convert its assets into cash.

2. Prepare financial statements on March 31 for Sco in trusteeship (balance sheet, cash receipts and disbursements, and changes in estate equity).

3. Prepare journal entries on the trustee’s books to distribute available cash to creditors and close the case.

determine the expected recovery per dollar of unsecured claims 576774

Financial reporting during bankruptcy

Justin Corporation filed a petition under the bankruptcy act in January 2011. On March 15, 2011, the trustee provided the following information about the corporation’s financial affairs.

Book Values

Estimated Realizable Values

Assets

Cash

$ 20,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable—net

100,000

75,000

Inventories

150,000

70,000

Plant assets—net

250,000

280,000

Total assets

$520,000

Liabilities

Liability for priority claims

$ 80,000

Accounts payable—unsecured

150,000

Note payable, secured by accounts

receivable

100,000

Mortgage payable, secured by all

plant assets

220,000

Total liabilities

$550,000

REQUIRED

1. Determine the amount expected to be available for unsecured claims.

2. Determine the expected recovery per dollar of unsecured claims.

3. Estimate the amount of recovery for each class of creditors.

show how the available cash will be distributed in final liquidation of the corporat 576775

Claims rankings and cash distribution upon liquidation

Fabulous Fakes Corporation is being liquidated under Chapter 7 of the bankruptcy act. All assets have been converted into cash, and $374,500 cash is available to pay the following claims:

1.

Administrative expenses of preserving and liquidating the debtor corporation’s estate

$ 12,500

2.

Merchandise creditors

99,000

3.

Local government for property taxes

4,000

4.

Local bank for unsecured loan (principal is $30,000 and interest is $4,500)

34,500

5.

State government for gross receipts taxes

3,000

6.

Employees for unpaid wages during the month before filing (includes $5,000 for the company president and less than $4,000 for each of the other employees)

48,000

7.

Customers for prepaid merchandise that was not delivered

1,500

8.

Holders of the first mortgage on the company’s real estate that was sold for $240,000 (includes $220,000 principal and $8,500 interest)

228,500

Assume that all the claims are allowed and that they were timely filed.

REQUIRED

1. Rank the claims according to priority under the bankruptcy act.

2. Show how the available cash will be distributed in final liquidation of the corporation.

prepare a statement of affairs assuming that the note payable and interest are secur 576776

Financial reporting during bankruptcy—Statement of affairs

Hanna Corporation filed a petition under the bankruptcy act on June 30, 2011. Data relevant to its financial position as of this date are:

Book Value

Estimated Net Realizable Values

Cash

$ 2,200

$ 2,200

Accounts receivable—net

15,000

13,500

Inventories

20,000

22,500

Equipment—net

55,000

28,000

Total assets

$92,200

$66,200

Accounts payable

$26,400

Rent payable

7,600

Wages payable

12,000

Note payable plus accrued interest

31,000

Capital stock

55,000

Retained earnings (deficit)

(39,800 )

Total liabilities and equity

$92,200

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a statement of affairs assuming that the note payable and interest are secured by a mortgage on the equipment and that wages are less than $4,000 per employee.

2. Estimate the amount that will be paid to each class of claims if priority liquidation expenses, including trustee fees, are $4,000 and estimated net realizable values are actually realized.

prepare a statement of affairs for dawn corporation on july 10 2011 576777

Financial reporting during bankruptcy

The unsecured creditors of Dawn Corporation filed a petition under Chapter 7 of the bankruptcy act on July 1, 2011, to force Dawn into bankruptcy. The court order for relief was granted on July 10, at which time an interim trustee was appointed to supervise liquidation of the estate. A listing of assets and liabilities of Dawn Corporation as of July 10, 2011, along with estimated realizable values, is as follows:

Book Value

Estimated Net Realizable Values

Assets

Cash

$ 80,000

$ 80,000

Accounts receivable—net

210,000

160,000

Inventories

200,000

210,000

Equipment—net

150,000

60,000

Land and buildings—net

250,000

140,000

Intangible assets

10,000

$900,000

$650,000

Accounts payable

$400,000

Note payable

100,000

Wages payable (from June and July)

24,000

Taxes payable

76,000

Mortgage payable $200,000, plus

$5,000 unpaid interest to July 10

205,000

Capital stock

300,000

Retained earnings deficit

(205,000 )

$900,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. Accounts receivable are pledged as security for the note payable.

2. No more than $1,000 is owed to any employee.

3. Taxes payable is a priority item.

4. Inventory items include $50,000 acquired on July 5, 2011; the unpaid invoice is included in accounts payable.

5. The mortgage payable and interest are secured by the land and buildings.

6. Trustee fees and other costs of liquidating the estate are expected to be $11,000.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a statement of affairs for Dawn Corporation on July 10, 2011.

2. Develop a schedule showing how available cash will be distributed to each class of claims, assuming that

(a) the estimated realizable values are actually received and (b) the trustee and other fees of liquidating the estate are $11,000.

prepare a statement of affairs for everlast window corporation as of june 30 2011 576778

Financial reporting during bankruptcy

The balance sheet of Everlast Window Corporation at June 30, 2011, contains the following items:

Assets

Cash

$ 40,000

Accounts receivable—net

70,000

Inventories

50,000

Land

30,000

Building—net

200,000

Machinery—net

60,000

Goodwill

50,000

$500,000

Equities

$110,000

Accounts payable

60,000

Wages payable

10,000

Property taxes payable

150,000

Mortgage payable

15,000

Interest on mortgage payable

50,000

Note payable—unsecured

5,000

Interest payable—unsecured

200,000

Capital stock

(100,000 )

Retained earnings deficit

$500,000

The company is in financial difficulty, and its stockholders and creditors have requested a statement of affairs for planning purposes. The following information is available:

1. The company estimates that $63,000 is the maximum amount collectible for the accounts receivable.

2. Except for 20% of the inventory items that are damaged and worth only $2,000, the cost of the other items is expected to be recovered in full.

3. The land and building have a combined appraisal value of $170,000 and are subject to the $150,000 mortgage and related accrued interest.

4. The appraised value of the machinery is $20,000.

5. Wages payable and property taxes payable are unsecured priority items that do not exceed any limitations of the bankruptcy act.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a statement of affairs for Everlast Window Corporation as of June 30, 2011.

2. Compute the estimated settlement per dollar of unsecured liabilities.

p6 1 you have the following projections about the costs in a family restaurant for n 576799

P6.1You have the following projections about the costs in a family restaurant

for next year:

Net income required: 22% after income tax on the owner’s present

investment of $80,000, income tax rate is 28%.

Depreciation: Present book value (consolidated) of furniture

and equipment is $76,000, depreciation rate is

20%.

Interest: Interest on a loan outstanding of $35,000 is 8%.

Known Costs Variable Costs

Insurance $ 3,000 Food cost, 38% of sales revenue

License 2,500 Wage cost, 34% of sales revenue

Utilities 8,400 Other costs, 12% of sales revenue

Maintenance 3,600

Administration 9,800

Salaries 41,600

a.What sales revenue would the restaurant have to achieve next year in

order to acquire the desired net income after tax?

b.What is the required average check needed to achieve the annual sales

revenue objective if the restaurant is open 365 days, had 60 seats, and

had an average seat turnover of 2.5 times per day?

accounting 576806

Chapter 2 page 98/99 Case #2

Chapter 6 page 290, Question #6.1
Document Preview:

HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING N I N T H E D I T I O N Contributing Author J O H N W I L E Y & S O N S , I N C . M A R T I N G. J A G E L S C A T H E R I N E E . R A L S T O N HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING N I N T H E D I T I O N Contributing Author J O H N W I L E Y & S O N S , I N C . M A R T I N G. J A G E L S C A T H E R I N E E . R A L S T O N This book is printed on acid free paper. Copyright © 2007 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. All rights reserved. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey Published simultaneously in Canada No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or otherwise, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of the appropriate per copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750 8400, fax (978) 750 4470, or on the web at www.copyright.com. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030, (201) 748 6011, fax (201) 748 6008, e mail: permcoordinator@wiley.com. Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and author have used their best efforts in preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this book and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or extended by sales representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained herein may not be suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professional where appropriate. Neither the publisher nor author…

Attachments:

the business case ethics lt o p gt earl smith is a financial controller with practic 576825

The business case Ethics:</o:p>

Earl Smith is a financial controller with Practical Solutions Pty Ltd, an entity that sells software products to accounting firms and small businesses. At present, Mr Smith is analysing a number of software packages that focus on job costing. He needs to pick one package that he can recommend to his clients. Each software vendor is keen to have their software selected as it will result in a significant increase in sales for their company. </o:p>

Anita Loo is a salesperson for the software company Dogto Ltd. She has told Mr Smith that he should go to Los Angeles to analyse her company’s software package properly, because the programming experts there could give him a thorough demonstration. Ms Loo has also suggested that he take his family, so that he feels relaxed in a foreign country and is in the right frame of mind to undertake his analysis. She also suggests that Disneyland is worth visiting while Mr Smith is over there. Dogto Ltd would pick up the expenses for the trip.
Questions…
a. Outline any ethical issues involved in Mr Smith taking the trip. Relate any ethical issues directly to the facts of the business case.</o:p>

b.Outline any benefits to Practical Solutions Pty Ltd of Mr Smith taking the trip.</o:p>

c. How might Practical Solutions Pty Ltd be able to visit Dogto Ltd in Los Angeles without the appearance of favouring Dogto Ltd?</o:p>

d.What would be the advantages and disadvantages to Practical Solutions Pty Ltd of having a code of conduct?</o:p>

e. List the principles you would include in a ‘Code of Conduct’ for Practical Solutions (PS) Pty Ltd and give a brief description of each. To assist you in determining this, you may like to examine the ‘Code of Conduct’ of: the company assigned to the group you were in during Weeks 1 to 4 of session; a government agency; and a university such as ours (UWS) or the University of Newcastle. Remember, PS Pty Ltd is a small to medium enterprise (SME).</o:p>

Reference List: </o:p>

Includes any references you have used and cited in your report. You must use the Harvard referencing system as per the guide available from the UWS library website. (Note: the reference list is not included in the word count).
</o:p>

complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet s in a workbook 576838

ACT 500 Portfolio Project GuidelinesThe Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master BudgetIn the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package. Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary. The project should include: 1.Executive Summary 2.Sales Budget 3.Production Budget 4.Direct Materials Budget 5.Direct Labor Budget 6.Overhead Budget 7.Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 8.Cost of Goods Manufactured Budget 9.Budget and Income Statement

Document Preview:

ACT 500 Portfolio Project Guidelines The Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master Budget In the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package. Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary. The project should include: 1. Executive Summary 2. Sales Budget 3. Production Budget 4. Direct Materials Budget 5. Direct Labor Budget 6. Overhead Budget 7. Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 8. Cost of Goods Manufactured Budget 9. Budget and Income Statement

Attachments:

prepare a schedule showing how the cash available on february 1 2011 should be distr 576727

Simple liquidation—Schedule of cash available

The partnership of Folly and Frill is in the process of liquidation. On January 1, 2011, the ledger shows account balances as follows:

Cash

$10,000

Accounts payable

$15,000

Accounts receivable

25,000

Folly capital

40,000

Lumber inventory

40,000

Frill capital

20,000

$21,000 are collected. No further collections on the receivables are expected. Profits are shared 60 percent to Folly and 40 percent to Frill.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule showing how the cash available on February 1, 2011, should be distributed.

determine the amount of cash that should be paid to each partner 576729

Liquidation—Cash distribution computation, safe payments schedule

Fred, Ethel, and Lucy have decided to liquidate their partnership. Account balances on January 1, 2011, are as follows:

Cash

$120,000

Accounts payable

$ 40,000

Other assets

120,000

Fred capital (30%)

85,000

$240,000

Ethel capital (30%)

25,000

Lucy capital (40%)

90,000

$240,000

The partners agree to keep a $10,000 contingency fund and to distribute available cash immediately.

REQUIRED: Determine the amount of cash that should be paid to each partner.

determine how cash should be distributed to creditors and partners 576730

Liquidation—Cash distribution computation, safe payments schedule

Jan, Kim, and Lee announce plans to liquidate their partnership immediately. The assets, equities, and profit and loss sharing ratios are summarized as follows.

Loan to Kim

$ 20,000

Accounts payable

$ 60,000

Other assets

180,000

Jan capital (50%)

59,000

$200,000

Kim capital (30%)

29,000

Lee capital (20%)

52,000

$200,000

The other assets are sold for $120,000, and an overlooked bill for landscaping services of $5,000 is discovered. Kim cannot pay her partnership debt at the present time, but she expects to have the money in a month or two.

REQUIRED: Determine how cash should be distributed to creditors and partners.

determine the correct capital balances of ali bart and carrie 576731

Liquidation—Capital balance computation correcting an error

The profit and loss sharing agreement of the partnership of Ali, Bart, and Carrie provides a salary allowance for Ali and Carrie of $10,000 each. Partners receive a 10 percent interest allowance on their average capital balances for the year. The remainder is divided 40 percent to Ali, 20 percent to Bart, and 40 percent to Carrie. The December 31, 2011, after closing balances are as follows:

Net assets

$150,000

Ali capital

$ 60,000

Bart capital

25,000

Carrie capital

65,000

$150,000

erroneously undervalued by $15,000, resulting in an error in calculating the 2011 net income.

REQUIRED: Determine the correct capital balances of Ali, Bart, and Carrie.

prepare a safe payments schedule to show the amount of cash to be distributed to eac 576732

Safe payments schedule

A condensed balance sheet with profit sharing percentages for the Evers, Freda, and Grace partnership on January 1, 2011, shows the following:

Cash

$100,000

Liabilities

$ 80,000

Other assets

500,000

Evers capital (40%)

100,000

Freda capital (40%)

250,000

Grace capital (20%)

170,000

$600,000

$600,000

On January 2, 2011, the partners decide to liquidate the business, and during January they sell assets with a book value of $300,000 for $170,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare a safe payments schedule to show the amount of cash to be distributed to each partner if all available cash, except for a $10,000 contingency fund, is distributed immediately after the sale.

prepare a schedule to show the phaseout of the partnership and final closing of the 576733

Statement of partnership liquidation

The partnership of Alice, Betty, and Carle became insolvent during 2011, and the partnership ledger shows the following balances after all partnership assets have been converted into cash and all available cash distributed:

Debit

Credit

Accounts payable

$ 30,000

Alice capital

20,000

Betty capital

$120,000

Carle capital

70,000

$120,000

$120,000

Profit and loss sharing percentages for the three partners are Alice, 30 percent; Betty, 40 percent; and Carle, 30 percent. The personal assets and liabilities of the partners are as follows

Alice

Betty

Carle

Personal assets

$60,000

$110,000

$60,000

Personal liabilities

50,000

60,000

40,000

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule to show the phaseout of the partnership and final closing of the books if the partnership creditors recover $30,000 from Betty.

prepare a schedule to show the phaseout of the partnership and final closing of the 576734

Statement of partnership liquidation—Partner insolvency case

After all partnership assets were converted into cash and all available cash distributed to creditors, the ledger of the Daniel, Eric, and Fred partnership showed the following balances:

Debit

Credit

Accounts payable

$20,000

Daniel capital (40%)

10,000

Eric capital (30%)

60,000

Fred capital (30%)

$90,000

$90,000

$90,000

The percentages indicated are residual profit and loss sharing ratios. Personal assets and liabilities of the partners are as follows:

Daniel

Eric

Fred

Personal assets

$50,000

$50,000

$100,000

Personal liabilities

45,000

40,000

40,000

The partnership creditors proceed against Fred for recovery of their claims, and the partners settle their claims against each other in accordance with UPA.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule to show the phaseout of the partnership and final closing of the books.

prepare a liquidation statement for the ace ben cid and don partnership for the peri 576735

Statement of partnership liquidation—Partner insolvency case

The partnership of Ace, Ben, Cid, and Don is dissolved on January 5, 2011, and the account balances at June 30, 2011, after all noncash assets are converted into cash, are as follows:

Debits

Credits

Cash

$200,000

Cid capital (20%)

170,000

Don capital (10%)

80,000

Accounts payable

$400,000

Ace capital (50%)

40,000

Ben capital (20%)

10,000

$450,000

$450,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. The percentages indicated represent the relevant profit and loss sharing ratios.

2. Personal assets and liabilities of the partners at June 30, 2011, are as follows:

Personal Assets

Personal Liabilities

Ace

$600,000

$300,000

Ben

100,000

150,000

Cid

400,000

300,000

Don

100,000

20,000

3. Ace pays $200,000 into the partnership, and partnership liabilities are paid on July 1, 2011.

4. On July 15, 2011, Cid pays $100,000 into the partnership and Don pays $80,000. No further contributions from either Cid or Don are possible.

5. Losses from the bankruptcy of Cid are divided among the solvent partners on July 15, 2011.

6. Available cash is distributed and the partnership books are closed on July 31, 2011.

REQUIRED: Prepare a liquidation statement for the Ace, Ben, Cid, and Don partnership for the period June 30, 2011, to July 31, 2011.

prepare a schedule of safe payments for the denver elsie fannie and george partnersh 576736

Safe payments schedule

The partnership of Denver, Elsie, Fannie, and George is being liquidated over the first few months of 2011. The trial balance at January 1, 2011, is as follows:

Debits

Credits

Cash

$200,000

Accounts receivable

56,000

Inventory

142,000

Equipment (net)

300,000

Land

150,000

Loan to Denver

20,000

Accounts payable

$400,000

Denver capital (20%)

170,000

Elsie capital (10%)

80,000

Fannie capital (50%)

140,000

George capital (20%)

78,000

$868,000

$868,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. The partners agree to retain $20,000 cash on hand for contingencies and to distribute the rest of the available cash at the end of each month.

2. In January, half of the receivables were collected. Inventory that cost $75,000 was liquidated for $45,000. The land was sold for $250,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule of safe payments for the Denver, Elsie, Fannie, and George partnership for January 31, 2011.

available cash should be distributed as follows 25 000 to accounts payable and 576739

After all noncash assets have been converted into cash in the liquidation of the Maris and DeMarco partnership, the ledger contains the following account balances:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$34,000

Accounts payable

$25,000

Loan payable to Maris

9,000

Maris capital

8,000

DeMarco capital

8,000

Available cash should be distributed as follows: $25,000 to accounts payable and:

a $9,000 for loan payable to Maris

b $4,500 each to Maris and DeMarco

c $1,000 to Maris and $8,000 to DeMarco

d $8,000 to Maris and $1,000 to DeMarco

the partnership of gwen bill and sissy is liquidating and the ledger shows the follo 576740

The partnership of Gwen, Bill, and Sissy is liquidating and the ledger shows the following:

Cash

$ 80,000

Inventories

100,000

Accounts payable

60,000

Gwen capital (50%)

40,000

Bill capital (25%)

45,000

Sissy capital (25%)

35,000

If all available cash is distributed immediately:

a Gwen, Bill, and Sissy should get $26,667 each

b Gwen, Bill, and Sissy should get $6,667 each

c Gwen should get $10,000, and Bill and Sissy should get $5,000 each

d Bill should get $15,000, and Sissy $5,000

if available cash except for a 5 000 contingency fund is distributed immediately dic 576741

The following balance sheet summary, together with residual profit sharing ratios, was developed on April 1, 2011, when the Dick, Frank, and Helen partnership began its liquidation:

Cash

$140,000

Liabilities

$ 60,000

Accounts receivable

60,000

Loan from Frank

20,000

Inventories

85,000

Dick capital (20%)

75,000

Plant assets—net

200,000

Frank capital (40%)

200,000

Loan to Dick

25,000

Helen capital (40%)

155,000

$510,000

$510,000

If available cash except for a $5,000 contingency fund is distributed immediately, Dick, Frank, and Helen, respectively, should receive:

a $0, $60,000, and $15,000

b $11,000, $22,000, and $22,000

c $0, $70,000, and $5,000

d $0, $27,500, and $27,500

if wayne contributes 70 000 to the partnership to provide cash to pay the creditors 576742

The partnership of Unsel, Vance, and Wayne was dissolved on June 30, 2011, and account balances after noncash assets were converted into cash on September 1, 2011, are:

Cash

$50,000

Accounts payable

$120,000

Unsel capital (30%)

90,000

Vance capital (30%)

(60,000)

Wayne capital (40%)

(100,000)

Personal assets and liabilities of the partners at September 1, 2011, are:

Personal Assets

Personal Liabilities

Unsel

$ 80,000

$90,000

Vance

100,000

61,000

Wayne

190,000

80,000

If Wayne contributes $70,000 to the partnership to provide cash to pay the creditors, what amount of Unsel’s $90,000 partnership equity would appear to be recoverable?

a $90,000

b $81,000

c $79,000

d None of the above

prepare the journal entry to distribute available cash on january 1 2011 include a s 576743

Cash distribution plan and entries—Installment

Barney, Betty, and Rubble are partners in a business that is in the process of liquidation. On January 1, 2011, the ledger accounts show the balances indicated:

Cash $25,000 Barney capital $72,000

Inventory 72,000 Betty capital 28,000

Supplies 18,000 Rubble capital 15,000

The cash is distributed to partners on January 1, 2011. Inventory and supplies are sold for a lumpsum price of $81,000 on February 9, 2011, and on February 10, 2011, cash on hand is distributed to the partners in final liquidation of the business.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entry to distribute available cash on January 1, 2011. Include a safe payments schedule as proper explanation of who should receive cash.

2. Prepare journal entries necessary on February 9, 2011, to record the sale of assets and distribution of the gain or loss to the partners’ capital accounts.

3. Prepare the journal entry to distribute cash on February 10, 2011, in final liquidation of the business.

prepare a cash distribution plan to show how cash will be distributed as it becomes 576744

Cash distribution plan

The December 31, 2011, balance sheet of the Chan, Dickerson, and Grunther partnership, along with the partners’ residual profit and loss sharing ratios, is summarized as follows:

Assets

Equities

$ 90,000

Cash

$ 60,000

Accounts payable

50,000

Receivables

120,000

Loan from Dickerson

95,000

Inventories

150,000

Chan capital (20%)

160,000

Due from Chan

15,000

Dickerson capital (30%)

205,000

Other assets

255,000

Grunther capital (50%)

$600,000

$600,000

The partners agree to liquidate their partnership as soon as possible after January 1, 2012, and to distribute all cash as it becomes available.

REQUIRED: Prepare a cash distribution plan to show how cash will be distributed as it becomes available.

prepare a cash distribution plan as of january 1 2011 for the fred flint and wilma p 576745

Cash distribution plan

Fred, Flint, and Wilma announced the liquidation of their partnership beginning on January 1, 2011. Profits and losses are divided 30 percent to Fred, 20 percent to Flint, and 50 percent to Wilma. Balance sheet items are summarized as follows:

Cash

$ 45,000

Accounts payable

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable—net

25,000

Fred capital (30%)

75,000

Inventories

25,000

Flint capital (20%)

30,000

Plant assets—net

80,000

Wilma capital (50%)

60,000

Flint loan

10,000

$185,000

$185,000

REQUIRED : Prepare a cash distribution plan as of January 1, 2011, for the Fred, Flint, and Wilma partnership.

the partners agree that loan balances should be closed to capital accounts and that 576746

Installment liquidation

The partnership of Gary, Henry, Ian, and Joseph is preparing to liquidate. Profit and loss sharing ratios are shown in the summarized balance sheet at December 31, 2011, as follows:

Cash

$200,000

Other liabilities

$100,000

Inventories

200,000

Gary capital (40%)

300,000

Loan to Henry

20,000

Henry capital (30%)

320,000

Other assets

510,000

Ian capital (20%)

100,000

Joseph capital (10%)

110,000

$930,000

$930,000

REQUIRED

1. The partners anticipate an installment liquidation. Prepare a cash distribution plan as of January 1, 2012, that includes a $50,000 contingency fund to help the partners predict when they will be included in cash distributions.

2. During January 2012, the inventories are sold for $100,000, the other liabilities are paid, and $50,000 is set aside for contingencies. The partners agree that loan balances should be closed to capital accounts and that remaining cash (less the contingency fund) should be distributed to partners. How much cash should each partner receive?

prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the eli joe and ned partnership f 576747

Statement of partnership liquidation

Eli, Joe, and Ned agree to liquidate their consulting practice as soon as possible after the close of business on July 31, 2011. The trial balance on that date shows the following account balances:

Debits

Credits

Cash

$13,000

Accounts receivable

12,000

Furniture and fi xtures

35,000

Accounts payable

$ 6,000

Eli capital

24,000

Joe capital

15,000

Ned capital

15,000

$60,000

$60,000

The partners share profits and losses 20 percent, 30 percent, and 50 percent to Eli, Joe, and Ned, respectively, after Ned is allowed a monthly salary of $4,000. August transactions and events are as follows:

1. The accounts payable are paid.

2. Accounts receivable of $8,000 are collected in full. Ned accepts accounts receivable with a face value and fair value of $3,000 in partial satisfaction of his capital balance. The remaining accounts receivable are written off as uncollectible.

3. Furniture with a book value of $25,000 is sold for $15,000.

4. Furniture with a book value of $4,000 and an agreed upon fair value of $1,000 is taken by Joe in partial settlement of his capital balance. The remaining furniture and fixtures are donated to Goodwill Industries.

5. Liquidation expenses of $3,000 are paid.

6. Available cash is distributed to partners on August 31.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the Eli, Joe, and Ned partnership for August.

prepare a statement of liquidation for the jones smith and tandy partnership 576748

Installment liquidation

Jones, Smith, and Tandy are partners in a furniture store that began liquidation on January 1, 2011, when the ledger contained the following account balances:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 15,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

Inventories

65,000

Land

50,000

Buildings

100,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

$ 40,000

Furniture and fi xtures

50,000

Accumulated depreciation—furniture and

30,000

fi xtures

Accounts payable

80,000

Jones capital (20%)

40,000

Smith capital (30%)

60,000

Tandy capital (50%)

50,000

$300,000

$300,000

The following transactions and events occurred during the liquidation process:

January

Inventories were sold for $20,000 cash, collections on account totaled $14,000, and half of the amount due to creditors was paid.

February

Land costing $40,000 was sold for $60,000, the remaining land and buildings were sold for $40,000, half of the remaining receivables were collected, and the remainder were uncollectible.

March

The remaining liabilities were paid, and available cash was distributed to the partners in fi nal liquidation.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of liquidation for the Jones, Smith, and Tandy partnership.

if 25 000 cash is realized from the receivables and inventories during january 2012 576749

Installment liquidation

The after closing trial balance of the Lin, Mary, and Nell partnership at December 31, 2011, was as follows:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 47,000

Receivables—net

25,000

Inventories

20,000

Plant assets—net

50,000

Accounts payable

$ 55,000

Lin capital (50%)

55,000

Mary capital (30%)

12,000

Nell capital (20%)

20,000

Total

$142,000

$142,000

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. The partnership is to be liquidated as soon as the assets can be converted into cash. Cash realized on conversion of assets is to be distributed as it becomes available, except that $10,000 is to be held to provide for contingencies during the liquidation period.

2. Profits and losses on liquidation are to be divided in the percentages indicated in the trial balance.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a cash distribution plan for the Lin, Mary, and Nell partnership.

2. If $25,000 cash is realized from the receivables and inventories during January 2012, how should the cash be distributed at the end of January? (Assume that this is the first distribution of cash during the liquidation period.)

the assets and liabilities are recorded and presented at their respective fair value 576694

Partnership retirement—Various situations

Partners Allen, Baker, and Coe share profits and losses 50:30:20, respectively. The balance sheet at April 30, 2011, follows:

Assets

Equities

Cash

$ 40,000

Accounts payable

$100,000

Other assets

360,000

Allen capital

74,000

$400,000

Baker capital

130,000

Coe capital

96,000

$400,000

The assets and liabilities are recorded and presented at their respective fair values. Jones is to be admitted as a new partner with a 20% capital interest and a 20% share of profits and losses in exchange for a cash contribution. No goodwill or bonus is to be recorded. How much cash should Jones contribute?

a $60,000

b $72,000

c $75,000

d $80,000

what are the capital balances of elton don and kravitz respectively 576695

Elton and Don are partners who share profits and losses in the ratio of 7:3, respectively. On November 5, 2011, their respective capital accounts were as follows:

Elton

$ 70,000

Don

60,000

$130,000

On that date they agreed to admit Kravitz as a partner with a one third interest in the capital and profits and losses upon his investment of $50,000. The new partnership will begin with a total capital of $180,000. Immediately after Kravitz’s admission, what are the capital balances of Elton, Don, and Kravitz, respectively?

a $60,000, $60,000, $60,000

b $63,000, $57,000, $60,000

c $63,333, $56,667, $60,000

d $70,000, $60,000, $50,000

what should be the capital balances of eli george and dick respectively 576696

William desires to purchase a one fourth capital and profit and loss interest in the partnership of Eli, George, and Dick. The three partners agree to sell William one fourth of their respective capital and profit and loss interests in exchange for a total payment of $40,000. The capital accounts and the respective percentage interests in profits and losses immediately before the sale to William are as follows:

Eli capital (60%)

$ 80,000

George capital (30%)

40,000

Dick capital (10%)

20,000

$140,000

All other assets and liabilities are fairly valued, and implied goodwill is to be recorded prior to the acquisition by William. Immediately after William’s acquisition, what should be the capital balances of Eli, George, and Dick, respectively?

a $60,000, $30,000, $15,000

b $69,000, $34,500, $16,500

c $77,000, $38,500, $19,500

d $92,000, $46,000, $22,000

what is the combined gain realized by newton and sharman upon the sale of a portion 576697

The capital accounts of the partnership of Newton, Sharman, and Jackson on June 1, 2011, are presented, along with their respective profit and loss ratios:

Newton

$139,200

1/2

Sharman

208,800

1/3

Jackson

96,000

1/6

$444,000

On June 1, 2011, Sidney was admitted to the partnership when he purchased, for $132,000, a proportionate interest from Newton and Sharman in the net assets and profits of the partnership. As a result of this transaction, Sidney acquired a one fifth interest in the net assets and profits of the firm. Assuming that implied goodwill is not to be recorded, what is the combined gain realized by Newton and Sharman upon the sale of a portion of their interests in the partnership to Sidney?

a $0

b $43,200

c $62,400

d $82,000

which is to be repaid in full goodwill is to be recorded in this transaction as impl 576700

On June 30, 2011, the balance sheet for the partnership of Williams, Brown, and Lowe, together with their respective profit and loss ratios, is summarized as follows:

Assets, at cost

$300,000

Williams loan

$ 15,000

Williams capital (20%)

70,000

Brown capital (20%)

65,000

Lowe capital (60%)

150,000

$300,000

Williams has decided to retire from the partnership, and by mutual agreement the assets are to be adjusted to their fair value of $360,000 at June 30, 2011. It is agreed that the partnership will pay Williams $102,000 cash for his partnership interest exclusive of his loan, which is to be repaid in full. Goodwill is to be recorded in this transaction, as implied by the excess payment to Williams. After Williams’s retirement, what are the capital account balances of Brown and Lowe, respectively?

a $65,000 and $150,000

b $97,000 and $246,000

c $73,000 and $174,000

d $77,000 and $186,000

prepare a statement of partners rsquo capital for the year ended december 31 2011 576701

Partnership income allocation—Salary allowance and interest

The partnership agreement of Kray, Lam, and Mann provides for the division of net income as follows:

1. Lam, who manages the partnership, is to receive a salary of $11,000 per year.

2. Each partner is to be allowed interest at 10% on beginning capital.

3. Remaining profits are to be divided equally.

During 2011, Kray invested an additional $4,000 in the partnership. Lam withdrew $5,000, and Mann withdrew $4,000. No other investments or withdrawals were made during 2011. On January 1, 2011, the capital balances were Kray, $65,000; Lam, $75,000; and Mann, $70,000. Total capital at year end was $252,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partners’ capital for the year ended December 31, 2011.

calculate the capital balances of each of the partners immediately after iot is admi 576702

Recording new partner investment

After operating as partners for several years, Gro and Ham decided to sell one half of each of their partnership interests to Iot for a total of $70,000, paid directly to Gro and Ham. At the time of Iot’s admittance to the partnership, Gro and Ham had capital balances of $45,000 and $65,000, respectively, and shared profits 45 percent to Gro and 55 percent to Ham.

REQUIRED

1. Calculate the capital balances of each of the partners immediately after Iot is admitted as a partner assuming that the assets are not revalued, and prepare a second calculation of the capital balances assuming that the assets are revalued at the time Iot is admitted.

2. In designing a new partnership agreement, how should profits and losses be divided?

3. If a new partnership agreement is not established, how will profits and losses be divided?

prepare a statement of partnership capital for the year ended december 31 2011 576704

Partnership income allocation—Statement of partnership capital

Ellen, Fargo, and Gary are partners who share profits and losses 20 percent, 20 percent, and 60 percent, respectively, after Ellen and Fargo each receive a $12,000 salary allowance. Capital balances on January 1, 2011, are as follows:

Ellen (20%)

$ 69,000

Fargo (20%)

85,500

Gary (60%)

245,500

During 2011, Gary invested an additional $20,000 in the partnership, and Ellen and Fargo each withdrew $12,000, equal to their salary allowances as provided by the profit and loss sharing agreement. The partnership net assets at December 31, 2011, were $481,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership capital for the year ended December 31, 2011.

prepare a balance sheet for the mortin oscar and trent partnership on january 2 2011 576705

Recording new partner investment—Revaluation and nonrevaluation cases

The partnership of Mortin and Oscar is being dissolved, and the assets and equities at book value and fair value and the profit and loss sharing ratios at January 1, 2011, are as follows:

Book Value

Fair Value

Cash

$ 20,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable—net

100,000

100,000

Inventories

50,000

200,000

Plant assets—net

100,000

120,000

$270,000

$440,000

Accounts payable

$ 50,000

$ 50,000

Mortin capital (50%)

120,000

Oscar capital (50%)

100,000

$270,000

Mortin and Oscar agree to admit Trent into the partnership for a one third interest. Trent invests $95,000 cash and a building to be used in the business with a book value to Trent of $100,000 and a fair value of $120,000.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a balance sheet for the Mortin, Oscar, and Trent partnership on January 2, 2011, just after the admission of Trent, assuming that the assets are revalued and goodwill is recognized.

2. Prepare a balance sheet for the Mortin, Oscar, and Trent partnership on January 2, 2011, after the admission of Trent, assuming that the assets are not revalued.

journal entries to correct the books of the partnership at december 31 2011 assuming 576707

Partnership income allocation—Complex, net loss

The partnership agreement of Alex, Carl, and Erika provides that profits are to be divided as follows:

1. Alex is to receive a salary allowance of $10,000 for managing the partnership business.

2. Partners are to receive 10% interest on average capital balances. Drawings are excluded from computing these averages.

3. Remaining profits are to be divided 30%, 30%, and 40% to Alex, Carl, and Erika, respectively. Alex had a capital balance of $60,000 at January 1, 2011, and had drawings of $8,000 on July 1, 2011. Carl’s capital balance on January 1, 2011, was $90,000, and he invested an additional $30,000 on September 1, 2011. Erika’s beginning capital balance was $110,000, and she withdrew $10,000 on July 1 but invested an additional $20,000 on October 1, 2011. The partnership has a net loss of $12,000 during 2011, and the accountant in charge allocated the net loss as follows: $200 profit to Alex, $4,800 loss to Carl, and $7,400 loss to Erika.

REQUIRED

1. A schedule to show the correct allocation of the partnership net loss for 2011

2. A statement of partnership capital for the year ended December 31, 2011

3. Journal entries to correct the books of the partnership at December 31, 2011, assuming that all closing entries for the year have been recorded.

determine the allocation of the 2011 net income to the partners under each of the fo 576708

Partnership income allocation—Profit sharing based on beginning, ending, and average capital balances

A summary of changes in the capital accounts of the Katie, Lynda, and Molly partnership for 2011, before closing partnership net income to the capital accounts, is as follows:

Katie Capital

Lynda Capital

Molly Capital

Total Capital

Balance January 1, 2011

$80,000

$80,000

$90,000

$250,000

Investment April 1

20,000

20,000

Withdrawal May 1

(15,000)

(15,000)

Withdrawal July 1

(10,000)

(10,000)

Withdrawal September 1

(30,000 )

(30,000 )

$90,000

$65,000

$60,000

$215,000

REQUIRED: Determine the allocation of the 2011 net income to the partners under each of the following sets of independent assumptions:

1. Partnership net income is $60,000, and profit is divided on the basis of average capital balances during the year.

2. Partnership net income is $50,000, Katie gets a bonus of 10% of income for managing the business, and the remaining profits are divided on the basis of beginning capital balances.

3. Partnership net loss is $35,000, Molly receives a $12,000 salary, each partner is allowed 10% interest on beginning capital balances, and the remaining profits are divided equally.

calculate the balances that should be in the three capital accounts on january 1 201 576709

Partner income allocation—Correction of error

The partnership of Jones, Keller, and Glade was created on January 2, 2011, with each of the partners contributing cash of $30,000. Reported profits, withdrawals, and additional investments were as follows:

Reported Net Income

Withdrawals

Additional Investments

2011

$19,000

$4,000 Keller

$5,000 Glade

5,000 Jones

2012

22,000

8,000 Glade

5,000 Jones

3,000 Keller

2013

29,000

2,000 Glade

6,000 Glade

4,000 Keller

The partnership agreement provides that partners are to be allowed 10 percent interest on the beginning of the year capital balances, that Jones is to receive a $7,000 salary allowance, and that remaining profits are to be divided equally. After the books were closed on December 31, 2013, it was discovered that depreciation had been understated by $2,000 each year and that the inventory taken at December 31, 2013, was understated by $8,000.

REQUIRED

1. Calculate the balances in the three capital accounts on January 1, 2014.

2. Calculate the balances that should be in the three capital accounts on January 1, 2014, taking into account the corrections that must be made for errors made in the calculation of income in the prior years.

3. Give the journal entry (one entry) to correct the books on January 1, 2014.

prepare journal entries for the admission of cathy into the partnership for an inves 576710

Recording new partner investment and subsequent balance sheet

The partnership of Addie and Bal is adding a new partner, Cathy, and its assets and equities at book value and fair value just prior to her admission to the partnership on January 1, 2011, are as follows:

Book Value

Fair Value

Assets

Cash

$ 15,000

$ 15,000

Accounts receivable—net

45,000

40,000

Inventories

50,000

60,000

Plant assets—net

90,000

105,000

$200,000

$220,000

Equities

$ 30,000

$ 30,000

Accounts payable

50,000

40,000

15% note payable

64,000

Addie capital (60%)

56,000

Bal capital (40%)

$200,000

On January 2, 2011, Addie and Bal take Cathy into the partnership of Addie, Bal, and Cathy for a 40 percent interest in capital and profits.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare journal entries for the admission of Cathy into the partnership for an investment of $150,000 assuming that assets (including any goodwill) are revalued.

2. Prepare a balance sheet for the Addie, Bal, and Cathy partnership on January 2, 2011, just after the admission of Cathy.

prepare the journal entry or entries to admit darling into the partnership and calcu 576711

Recording new partner investment—Various situations

The capital accounts of the Ann, Bob, and Carrie partnership at December 31, 2011, together with profit and loss sharing ratios, are as follows:

Ann (25%)

$ 75,000

Bob (25%)

100,000

Carrie (50%)

125,000

The partners agree to admit Darling into the partnership.

REQUIRED: Prepare the journal entry or entries to admit Darling into the partnership and calculate the partners’ capital balances immediately after his admission under each of the following independent assumptions:

1. Carrie sells half of her interest to Darling for $90,000, and the partners agree to admit Darling into the partnership.

2. Darling invests $75,000 cash in the partnership for a 25% interest in the partnership capital and profits, and partnership assets are revalued.

3. Darling invests $80,000 cash in the partnership for a 20% interest in the capital and profits, and partnership assets are revalued.

4. Darling invests $90,000 cash in the partnership for a 30% interest in the capital and profits, and partnership assets are not revalued.

prepare journal entries giving two alternative solutions for recording con rsquo s a 576712

Recording new partner investment—Various situations

Three partners, Pat, Mic, and Hay, have capital balances and profit sharing ratios at December 31, 2011, as follows:

Pat

$144,000

profi t ratio 2/5

Mic

216,000

profi t ratio 1/2

Hay

90,000

profi t ratio 1/10

On January 1, 2012, Con invests $85,080 in the business for a one sixth interest in capital and income.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare journal entries giving two alternative solutions for recording Con’s admission to the partnership.

2. Prepare journal entries giving two alternative solutions for recording Con’s admission to the partnership if she purchased a one sixth interest from each of the partners, rather than paying the $85,080 into the business.

prepare journal entries to record the admission of carmen for a 40 percent interest 576713

Recording new partner investment—Various situations

The AT Partnership was organized several years ago, and on January 1, 2011, the partners agree to admit Carmen for a 40 percent interest in capital and earnings. Capital account balances and profit and loss sharing ratios at January 1, 2011, before the admission of Carmen, are as follows:

Aida (50%)

$500,000

Thais (50%)

280,000

REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries to record the admission of Carmen for a 40 percent interest in the capital and rights to future profits under the following independent assumptions.

1. Carmen pays $450,000 directly to Aida and Thais for 40% of each of their interests, and the bonus procedure is used.

2. Carmen pays $600,000 directly to Aida and Thais for 40% of each of their interests, and goodwill is recorded.

3. Carmen invests $450,000 in the partnership for her 40% interest, and goodwill is recorded.

4. Carmen invests $600,000 in the partnership for her 40% interest, and goodwill is recorded.

prepare statements of partnership capital for the years ended december 31 2011 and d 576714

Partnership income allocation—Multiple years

Harry, Iona, and Jerry formed a partnership on January 1, 2011, with each partner contributing $20,000 cash. Although the partnership agreement provided that Jerry receive a salary of $1,000 per month for managing the partnership business, Jerry has never withdrawn any money from the partnership. Harry withdrew $4,000 in each of the years 2011 and 2012, and Iona invested an additional $8,000 in 2011 and withdrew $8,000 during 2012. Due to an oversight, the partnership has not maintained formal accounting records, but the following information as of December 31, 2012, is available:

Cash on hand

$ 28,500

Due from customers

20,000

Merchandise on hand (at cost)

40,000

Delivery equipment—net of depreciation

37,000

Prepaid expenses

4,000

Assets

$129,500

Due to suppliers

$ 14,600

Wages payable

4,400

Note payable

10,000

Interest payable

500

Liabilities

$ 29,500

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

1. The partners agree that income for 2012 was about half of the total income for the first two years of operations.

2. Although profits were not divided until 2012, the partnership agreement provides that profits, after allowance for Jerry’s salary, are to be divided each year on the basis of beginning of the year capital balances.

REQUIRED: Prepare statements of partnership capital for the years ended December 31, 2011, and December 31, 2012.

prepare a statement of partnership capital assuming that the partnership agreement p 576715

Partnership income allocation

The partnership of Parker and Boone was formed and commenced operations on March 1, 2011, with Parker contributing $30,000 cash and Boone investing cash of $10,000 and equipment with an agreed upon valuation of $20,000. On July 1, 2011, Boone invested an additional $10,000 in the partnership. Parker made a capital withdrawal of $4,000 on May 2, 2011, but reinvested the $4,000 on October 1, 2011. During 2011, Parker withdrew $800 per month, and Boone, the managing partner, withdrew $1,000 per month. These drawings were charged to salary expense. A preclosing trial balance taken at December 31, 2011, is as follows:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 9,000

Receivables—net

15,000

Equipment—net

50,000

Other assets

19,000

Liabilities

$ 17,000

Parker capital

30,000

Boone capital

40,000

Service revenue

50,000

Supplies expense

17,000

Utilities expense

4,000

Salaries to partners

18,000

Other miscellaneous expenses

5,000

Total

$137,000

$137,000

REQUIRED

1. Journalize the entries necessary to close the partnership books assuming that there is no agreement regarding profit distribution.

2. Prepare a statement of partnership capital assuming that the partnership agreement provides for monthly salary allowances of $800 and $1,000 for Parker and Boone, respectively, and for the division of remaining profits in relation to average capital balances.

3. Prepare a profit distribution schedule for the Parker and Boone partnership assuming monthly salary allowances of $800 and $1,000 for Parker and Boone, respectively; interest allowances at a 12 percent annual rate on average capital balances; and remaining profits divided equally.

prepare journal entries with supporting computations to show tom rsquo s admittance 576716

Recording new partner investment—Complex nonrevaluation and revaluation cases

A condensed balance sheet for the Peter, Quarry, and Sherel partnership at December 31, 2011, and their profit and loss sharing percentages on that date are as follows:

Condensed Balance Sheet at December 31, 2011

Cash

$ 15,000

Liabilities

$ 50,000

Other assets

185,000

Peter capital (50%)

75,000

Total assets

$200,000

Quarry capital (30%)

50,000

Sherel capital (20%)

25,000

Total liabilities and capital

$200,000

On January 1, 2012, the partners decided to bring Tom into the partnership for a one fourth interest in the capital and profits of the partnership. The following proposals for Tom’s admittance into the partnership were considered:

1. Tom would purchase one half of Peter’s capital and right to future profits directly from Peter for $60,000.

2. Tom would purchase one fourth of each partner’s capital and rights to future profits by paying a total of $45,000 directly to the partners.

3. Tom would invest $55,000 cash in the partnership for a 25% interest in capital. Future profits would be divided 37.5 percent, 22.5 percent, 15 percent, and 25 percent for Peter, Quarry, Sherel, and Tom, respectively.

REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries with supporting computations to show Tom’s admittance into the partnership under each of the above proposals assuming that:

1. Partnership net assets are not to be revalued

2. Partnership net assets are to be revalued

determine average capital balances for timmy and lassie for 2011 576717

Partnership income allocation

Timmy and Lassie have been operating an accounting firm as partners for a number of years, and at the beginning of 2011, their capital balances were $60,000 and $75,000, respectively. During 2011, Timmy invested an additional $10,000 on April 1 and withdrew $6,000 on August 30. Lassie withdrew $12,000 on May 1 and withdrew another $6,000 on November 1. In addition, Timmy and Lassie withdrew their salary allowances of $18,000 and $24,000, respectively. At year end 2011, total capital of the Timmy and Lassie partnership was $182,000. Timmy and Lassie share income after salary allowances in a 60:40 ratio.

REQUIRED

1. Determine average capital balances for Timmy and Lassie for 2011.

2. Allocate 2011 partnership income to Timmy and Lassie.

what amount should be included in far rsquo s income statement for the quarter ended 576638

Far Corporation had the following transactions during the quarter ended March 31, 2011:

Loss on early extinguishment of debt

$ 70,000

Payment of fire insurance premium for calendar year 2011

100,000

What amount should be included in Far’s income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2011?

Extraordinary Loss

Insurance Expense

a

$70,000

$100,000

b

$70,000

$ 25,000

c

$17,500

$ 25,000

d

0

$100,000

at what amount will tap report cost of sales in its first quarter interim report 576642

Interim accounting under LIFO

Tap Manufacturing Company records sales of $1,000,000 and cost of sales of $550,000 during the first quarter of 2011. Tap uses the LIFO inventory method, and its inventories are computed as follows:

Beginning LIFO inventory at January 1

10,000 units at $5

$50,000

Ending LIFO inventory at March 31

6,000 units at $5

$30,000

Before year end, Tap expects to replace the 4,000 units liquidated in the first quarter. The current cost of the inventory units is $7each.

REQUIRED: At what amount will Tap report cost of sales in its first quarter interim report?

prepare a schedule to disclose revenue by operating segment for external reporting a 576643

Apply threshold tests

The following information has been accumulated for use in preparing segment disclosures for Wod Corporation (in thousands):

Sales to Unaffiliated Customers

Sales to Affiliated Customers

Total Sales

Apparel

$164

$ 164

Construction

112

112

Furniture

208

$ 6

214

Lumber and wood products

175

90

265

Paper

90

90

Textiles

50

170

220

Tobacco

93

93

Total

$892

$266

$1,158

REQUIRED

1. Determine Wod’s reportable segments under the 10 percent revenue test.

2. Are additional reportable segments required under the 75 percent revenue test?

3. Prepare a schedule to disclose revenue by operating segment for external reporting. Assume that the paper and tobacco segments, both sold in grocery stores, share similar operating characteristics on four of the five aggregation criteria.

which segments are reportable segments under a the revenue test b the operating prof 576644

Apply threshold tests

The following data for 2011 relate to Hay Industries, a worldwide conglomerate:

Sales to Unaffiliated Customers

Intersegment Sales

Operating Profit (Loss)

Assets

Food

$300,000

$ 50,000

$45,000

$310,000

Chemical

110,000

40,000

23,000

150,000

Textiles

65,000

5,000

(8,000)

60,000

Furniture

48,000

9,000

40,000

Beverage

62,000

10,000

18,000

60,000

Oil

15,000

(2,000 )

25,000

Segment

600,000

105,000

85,000

645,000

Corporate

(7,000 )

15,000

Consolidated

$600,000

0

$78,000

$660,000

REQUIRED : Answer the following questions related to Hay’s required segment disclosures and show computations:

1. Which segments are reportable segments under (a) the revenue test, (b) the operating profit test, and (c) the asset test?

2. Do additional reportable segments have to be identified?

which of dap rsquo s operating segments meet at least one of the tests for segment r 576645

Apply threshold tests—Disclosure

DaP Corporation’s home country is the United States, but it also has operations in Canada, Mexico, Brazil, and South Africa and reports internally on a geographic basis. Information relevant to DaP’s operating segment disclosure requirement for the year ended December 31, 2011, is presented in summary form as follows:

United States

Canada

Mexico

Brazil

South Africa

Consolidated

Sales to unaffiliated customers

$120,000

$13,000

$20,000

$22,000

$15,000

$190,000

Intersegment transfers

29,000

11,000

10,000

$ 50,000

Total revenue

$149,000

$24,000

$20,000

$22,000

$25,000

$240,000

Operating profit

$ 24,000

$ 6,000

$ 8,000

$ 5,000

$ 7,000

$ 50,000

Identifiable assets

$150,000

$30,000

$19,000

$20,000

$31,000

$250,000

REQUIRED

1. Prepare schedules to show which of DaP’s operating segments require separate disclosure under (a) the 10% revenue test, (b) the 10% asset test, and (c) the 10% profit test.

2. Which of DaP’s operating segments meet at least one of the tests for segment reporting?

3. Prepare a schedule to disclose DaP’s segment operations from the information given.

determine which industry segments are reportable segments under the revenue test for 576646

Apply threshold tests—Segment and enterprisewide disclosure

Mer Corporation has five major operating segments and operates in both domestic and foreign markets. Mer is organized internally on an industry basis. Information about its revenue from operating segments and foreign operations for 2011 is as follows (in thousands):

SALES TO UNAFFILIATED CUSTOMERS

Domestic

Foreign

Total

Foods

$ 150

$ 30

$ 180

Soft drinks

650

250

900

Distilled spirits

500

50

550

Cosmetics

200

200

Packaging

110

110

Other (four minor segments)

240

240

$1,850

$330

$2,180

SALES TO AFFILIATED CUSTOMERS

Domestic

Foreign

Total

Foods

$ 30

$ 30

Soft drinks

160

160

Distilled spirits

$20

20

Cosmetics

Packaging

10

10

Other (four minor segments)

$200

$20

$220

A Japanese subsidiary of Mer operates exclusively in the soft drink market. All other foreign operations are carried out through Canadian subsidiaries, none of which are included in the soft drink business. Only the soft drink and distilled spirits segments are reportable segments under the asset and operating profit tests for segments.

REQUIRED

1. Determine which industry segments are reportable segments under the revenue test for segment reporting. Assume no further aggregation is possible. Would the possible aggregation of smaller segments change your response?

2. Prepare a schedule suitable for disclosing Mer’s revenue by segment for 2011, assuming no further aggregation is possible.

3. Prepare a schedule suitable for disclosing Mer’s revenue by geographic area for 2011.

selected information which is reported to the chief operating officer for the five s 576647

Apply threshold tests—Disclosure

Selected information, which is reported to the chief operating officer, for the five segments of Rad Company for the year ended December 31, 2011, is as follows:

Food

Tobacco

Lumber

Textiles

Furniture

General Corporate

Consolidated

Revenue Data

Sales to unaffiliated

$12,000

$10,000

$7,000

$18,000

$7,000

$ 54,000

customers

Sales to affiliated

5,000

7,000

8,000

20,000

customers

Income from equity

3,000

$ 6,000

9,000

investees

Total revenue

$17,000

$17,000

$7,000

$29,000

$7,000

$ 6,000

$ 83,000

Expense Data

Cost of sales

$10,000

$ 9,000

$4,000

$16,000

$4,000

$ 43,000

Depreciation

1,000

2,000

2,500

3,000

500

9,000

expense

Other operating

2,000

2,000

1,000

2,000

1,000

8,000

expenses

Interest expense

2,000

2,000

$ 3,000

7,000

Income taxes

1,000

2,000

( 250 )

3,000

750

1,500

8,000

Net income

$ 1,000

$ 2,000

$ (250 )

$ 3,000

$ 750

$ 1,500

$ 8,000

Asset Data

Segment assets

$18,000

$19,000

$ 6,000

$22,000

$7,000

$ 72,000

Investment in

20,000

$40,000

60,000

affiliates

General corporate

4,000

4,000

assets

Intersegment

1,000

2,000

advances

Total assets

$19,000

$21,000

$6,000

$42,000

$7,000

$44,000

$136,000

The lumber segment has not been a reportable segment in prior years and is not expected to be a reportable segment in future years.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare schedules to show which of the segments are reportable segments under:

a The 10% revenue test

b The 10% operating profit test

c The 10% asset test

2. Which of the segments meet at least one of the tests for reportable segments?

3. Must additional reportable segments be identified?

4. Prepare a schedule for appropriate disclosure of the above segmented data in the financial report of Rad Company for the year ended December 31, 2011.

the 10 000 interest income is not related to any industry segment consolidated total 576648

Apply threshold tests—Disclosure

The consolidated income statement of Tut Company for 2011 is as follows (in thousands):

TUT CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2011

Sales

$360

Interest income

10

Income from equity investee

30

Total revenue

400

Cost of sales

$180

General expenses

40

Selling expenses

50

Interest expense

10

Noncontrolling interest expense

15

Income taxes

45

Total expenses

340

Income before extraordinary loss

$ 60

Extraordinary loss (net of income taxes)

10

Consolidated net income

$ 50

Tut’s operations are conducted through three domestic operating segments with sales, expenses, and assets as follows (in thousands):

Chemical

Food

Drug

Corporate

Sales (including intersegment sales)

$160

$140

$120

Cost of sales (including intersegment cost of sales)

80

70

60

General expenses

15

10

10

$ 5

Selling expenses

20

15

15

Interest expense (unaffiliated)

5

5

Identifiable assets

200

180

$150

200

Investment in equity investee

300

The $10,000 interest income is not related to any industry segment. Consolidated total assets are $1,000,000. The chemical and food segments had intersegment sales of $35,000 and $25,000, respectively.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule of required disclosures for Tut’s industry segments in a form acceptable for reporting purposes.

prepare a schedule to allocate the 25 000 reported 2012 partnership income to mel an 576667

Partnership income allocation—Salary allowance

Mel and Dav created a partnership to own and operate a health food store. The partnership agreement provided that Mel receive a salary of $10,000 and Dav a salary of $5,000 to recognize their relative time spent in operating the store. Remaining profits and losses were divided 60:40 to Mel and Dav, respectively. Income of $13,000 for 2011, the first year of operations, was allocated $8,800 to Mel and $4,200 to Dav.

On January 1, 2012, the partnership agreement was changed to reflect the fact that Dav could no longer devote any time to the store’s operations. The new agreement allows Mel a salary of $18,000, and the remaining profits and losses are divided equally. In 2012 an error was discovered such that the 2011 reported income was understated by $4,000. The partnership income of $25,000 for 2012 included this $4,000 related to 2011.

REQUIRED : Prepare a schedule to allocate the $25,000 reported 2012 partnership income to Mel and Dav.

prepare a schedule to allocate partnership net income of 28 000 for 2011 576668

Partnership income allocation—Salary allowance and interest

The partnership agreement of Dan, Hen, and Bai provides that profits are to be divided as follows:

  • Bai receives a salary of $24,000, and Hen receives a salary of $18,000 for time spent in the business.
  • All partners receive 10 percent interest on average capital balances.
  • Remaining profits and losses are divided equally among the three partners.

On January 1, 2011, the capital balances were Dan, $200,000; Hen, $160,000; and Bai, $150,000. Dan invested an additional $40,000 on July 1 and withdrew $40,000 on October 1. Hen and Bai had drawings of $18,000 each during the year.

REQUIRED : Prepare a schedule to allocate partnership net income of $28,000 for 2011.

prepare a statement of partnership capital for the bird cage and dean partnership at 576669

Partnership income allocation—Partnership capital statement

On December 31, 2011, the total partnership capital (assets less liabilities) for the Bird, Cage, and Dean partnership is $186,000. Selected information related to the preclosing capital balances as follows:

Bird Capital

Cage Capital

Dean Capital

Total Capital

Balance January 1

$ 60,000

$ 45,000

$70,000

$175,000

Investments 2011

10,000

10,000

20,000

Withdrawals 2011

(15,000)

(15,000)

(30,000)

Drawings 2011

(5,000 )

(5,000 )

(5,000 )

(15,000 )

40,000

50,000

$60,000

$150,000

REQUIRED: Prepare a statement of partnership capital for the Bird, Cage, and Dean partnership at yearend 2011, assuming that no specific profit or loss sharing agreement exists.

determine the capital balances of fax bel and rob after rob rsquo s admission to the 576671

Recording new partner investment

The capital accounts of the Fax and Bel partnership on September 30, 2011, were:

Fax capital (75% profit percentage)

$140,000

Bel capital (25% profit percentage)

60,000

Total capital

$200,000

On October 1, Rob was admitted to a 40 percent interest in the partnership when he purchased 40 percent of each existing partner’s capital for $120,000, paid directly to Fax and Bel.

REQUIRED

1. Determine the capital balances of Fax, Bel, and Rob after Rob’s admission to the partnership if goodwill is not recorded.

2. Determine the capital balances of Fax, Bel, and Rob after Rob’s admission to the partnership if goodwill is recorded, assuming that the book value and fair value of recorded assets are equal.

prepare journal entries for the admission of joh into the partnership assuming that 576672

Recording new partner investment—Revaluation case

Bow and Mon are partners in a retail business and divide profits 60 percent to Bow and 40 percent to Mon. Their capital balances at December 31, 2011, are as follows:

Bow capital

$90,000

Mon capital

90,000

Total capital

$180,000

Partnership assets and liabilities have book values equal to fair values. The partners agree to admit Joh into the partnership. Joh purchases a one third interest in partnership capital and profits directly from Bow and Mon (one third of each of their capital accounts) for $75,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries for the admission of Joh into the partnership, assuming that partnership assets are revalued.

prepare the journal entry or entries to record walk rsquo s admission to the partner 576673

Recording new partner investment—Revaluation and nonrevaluation cases

The capital balances and profits and loss sharing percentages for the Sprint, Jog, and Run partnership at December 31, 2011, are as follows:

Sprint capital (30%)

$160,000

Jog capital (50%)

$180,000

Run capital (20%)

$140,000

The partners agree to admit Walk into the partnership on January 1, 2012, for a 20 percent interest in the capital and income of the business.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Walk’s admission to the partnership assuming that he invests $100,000 in the partnership for the 20% interest and that partnership capital is revalued. Assume that the book value of partnership assets equals the fair value.

2. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Walk’s admission to the partnership assuming that he invests $140,000 in the partnership for the 20% interest and that partnership capital is revalued.

determine the capital balances of the four partners immediately after the admission 576674

Recording new partner investment—Nonrevaluation case

Capital balances and profit sharing percentages for the partnership of Man, Eme, and Fot on January 1, 2011, are as follows:

Man (36%)

$140,000

Eme (24%)

100,000

Fot (40%)

160,000

$400,000

On January 3, 2011, the partners agree to admit Box into the partnership for a 25 percent interest in capital and earnings for his investment in the partnership of $120,000. Partnership assets are not to be revalued.

REQUIRED

1. Determine the capital balances of the four partners immediately after the admission of Box.

2. What is the profit and loss sharing ratio for Man, Eme, Fot, and Box?

determine the capital balances of beck and lynn immediately after dee rsquo s retire 576676

Partner retirement entries—Fair value adjustment

A balance sheet at December 31, 2011, for the Beck, Dee, and Lynn partnership is summarized as follows:

Assets

$800,000

Liabilities

$200,000

Loan to Dee

100,000

Beck capital (50%)

300,000

$900,000

Dee capital (40%)

300,000

Lynn capital (10%)

100,000

$900,000

Dee is retiring from the partnership. The partners agree that partnership assets, excluding Dee’s loan, should be adjusted to their fair value of $1,000,000 and that Dee should receive $310,000 for her capital balance net of the $100,000 loan. The bonus approach is used; therefore, no goodwill is recorded.

REQUIRED: Determine the capital balances of Beck and Lynn immediately after Dee’s retirement.

create the journal entries to update the equity accounts at the end of the year 576677

Partnership income allocation—Salary allowance, bonus, and additional contributions during the year

Kathy and Eddie formed the K & E partnership several years ago. Capital account balances on January 1, 2011, were as follows:

Kathy

$496,750

Eddie

$268,250

The partnership agreement provides Kathy with an annual salary of $10,000 plus a bonus of 5 percent of partnership net income for managing the business. Eddie is provided an annual salary of $15,000 with no bonus. The remainder is shared evenly. Partnership net income for 2011 was $30,000. Eddie and Kathy each invested an additional $5,000 during the year to finance a special purchase. Year end drawing account balances were $15,000 for Kathy and $10,000 for Eddie.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare an income allocation schedule.

2. Create the journal entries to update the equity accounts at the end of the year.

3. Determine the capital balances as of December 31, 2011.

bill and ken enter into a partnership agreement in which bill is to have a 60 intere 576679

Recording new partner investment and partner retirements—Various situations

Bill and Ken enter into a partnership agreement in which Bill is to have a 60% interest in capital and profits and Ken is to have a 40% interest in capital and profits. Bill contributes the following:

Cost

Fair Value

Land

$ 10,000

$20,000

Building

100,000

60,000

Equipment

20,000

15,000

There is a $30,000 mortgage on the building that the partnership agrees to assume. Ken contributes $50,000 cash to the partnership. Bill and Ken agree that Ken’s capital account should equal Ken’s $50,000 cash contribution and that goodwill should be recorded. Goodwill should be recorded in the amount of:

a $10,000

b $15,000

c $16,667

d $20,000

gini is retiring from the partnership and the partners agreed that she should receiv 576683

The balance sheet of the Fred, Gini, and Peggy partnership on December 31, 2011, together with profit sharing ratios, revealed the following:

Cash

$240,000

Fred capital (30%)

$ 200,000

Other assets

360,000

Gini capital (30%)

170,000

Peggy capital (40%)

230,000

$600,000

$ 600,000

Gini is retiring from the partnership, and the partners agreed that she should receive $200,000 cash as payment in full for her share of partnership assets. If the goodwill implied by the settlement with Gini is recorded on the partnership books, total partnership assets after Gini’s withdrawal should be:

a $566,667

b $500,000

c $430,000

d $400,000

the partners share profits and losses as follows ben 20 percent car 30 percent and d 576688

The December 31, 2011, balance sheet of the Ben, Car, and Das partnership is summarized as follows:

Cash

$100,000

Car loan

$100,000

Other assets, at cost

500,000

Ben capital

100,000

Car capital

200,000

Das capital

200,000

$600,000

$600,000

The partners share profits and losses as follows: Ben, 20 percent; Car 30 percent; and Das, 50 percent. Car is retiring from the partnership, and the partners have agreed that “other assets” should be adjusted to their fair value of $600,000 at December 31, 2011. They further agree that Car will receive $244,000 cash for his partnership interest exclusive of his loan, which is to be paid in full, and that no goodwill implied by Car’s payment will be recorded.

After Car’s retirement, the capital balances of Ben and Das, respectively, will be:

a $116,000 and $240,000

b $101,714 and $254,286

c $100,000 and $200,000

d $73,143 and $182,857

prepare the entries to record 1 the collection of the accrued commissions on january 576566

On December 31, the adjusted trial balance of Oslo Employment Agency shows the following selected data.

Accounts Receivable

$24,000

Commission Revenue

$92,000

Interest Expense

7,800

Interest Payable

1,500

Analysis shows that adjusting entries were made to (1) accrue $4,500 of commission revenue and (2) accrue $1,500 interest expense.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the closing entries for the temporary accounts shown above at December 31.

(b) Prepare the reversing entries on January 1.

(c) Post the entries in (a) and (b). Rule and balance the accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(d) Prepare the entries to record (1) the collection of the accrued commissions on January 10 and (2) the payment of all interest due ($2,500) on January 15.

(e) Post the entries in (d) to the temporary accounts.

thomas magnum began operations as a private investigator on january 1 2010 the trial 576567

Thomas Magnum began operations as a private investigator on January 1, 2010. The trial balance columns of the worksheet for Thomas Magnum, P.I. at March 31 are as follows.

THOMAS MAGNUM, P.I.
Worksheet
For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2010

Trial Balance

Account Titles

Cash

11,400

Accounts Receivable

5,620

Supplies

1,050

Prepaid Insurance

2,400

Equipment

30,000

Notes Payable

10,000

Accounts Payable

12,350

T. Magnum, Capital

20,000

T. Magnum, Drawing

600

Service Revenue

13,620

Salaries Expense

2,200

Travel Expense

1,300

Rent Expense

1,200

Miscellaneous Expense

200

55,970

55,970

Other data:

1. Supplies on hand total $380.

2. Depreciation is $1,000 per quarter.

3. Interest accrued on 6 month note payable, issued January 1, $300.

4. Insurance expires at the rate of $200 per month.

5. Services provided but unbilled at March 31 total $530.

Instructions

(a) Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the quarter and a classified balance sheet at March 31.T. Magnum did not make any additional investments in the business during the quarter ended March 31, 2010.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries from the adjustments columns of the worksheet.

(d) Journalize the closing entries from the financial statement columns of the worksheet.

the adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for porter company are as follow 576568

The adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for Porter Company are as follows.

PORTER COMPANY
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account

Account Titles

Cash

18,800

101

Accounts Receivable

16,200

112

Supplies

2,300

126

Prepaid Insurance

4,400

130

Office Equipment

44,000

151

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

20,000

152

Notes Payable

20,000

200

Accounts Payable

8,000

201

Salaries Payable

2,600

212

Interest Payable

1,000

230

B. Porter, Capital

36,000

301

B. Porter, Drawing

12,000

306

Service Revenue

77,800

400

Advertising Expense

12,000

610

Supplies Expense

3,700

631

Depreciation Expense

8,000

711

Insurance Expense

4,000

722

Salaries Expense

39,000

726

Interest Expense

1,000

905

Totals

165,400

165,400

Instructions

(a) Complete the worksheet by extending the balances to the financial statement columns.

(b) Prepare an income statement, owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet.

$10,000 of the notes payable become due in 2011. B. Porter did not make any additional investments in the business during 2010.

(c) Prepare the closing entries. Use J14 for the journal page.

(d) Post the closing entries. Use the three column form of account. Income Summary is account No. 350.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

the completed financial statement columns of the worksheet for woods company are sho 576569

The completed financial statement columns of the worksheet for Woods Company are shown below.

WOODS COMPANY
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Income Statements

Balance Sheet

Account No.

Account Titles

101

Cash

8,200

112

Accounts Receivable

7,500

130

Prepaid Insurance

1,800

157

Equipment

28,000

167

Accumulated Depreciation

8,600

201

Accounts Payable

11,700

212

Salaries Payable

3,000

301

Woods, Capital

34,000

306

Woods, Drawing

7200

400

Service Revenue

4400

622

Repair Expense

5,400

711

Depreciation Expense

2,800

722

Insurance Expense

1,200

726

Salaries Expense

35,200

732

Utilities Expense

4,000

Totals

48,600

44,000

52,700

57,300

Net Loss

4,600

4,600

48,600

48,600

57,300

57,300

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement, owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet.

S.Woods made an additional investment in the business of $4,000 during 2010.

(b) Prepare the closing entries.

(c) Post the closing entries and rule and balance the accounts. Use T accounts. Income Summary is account No. 350.

(d) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

disney amusement park has a fiscal year ending on september 30 selected data from th 576570

Disney Amusement Park has a fiscal year ending on September 30. Selected data from the September 30 worksheet are presented below.

DISNEY AMUSEMENT PARK
Worksheet
For the Year Ended September 30, 2010

Trial Balance

Adjusted Trial Balance

Cash

41,400

41,400

Supplies

18,600

1,200

Prepaid Insurance

31,900

8,900

Land

80,000

80,000

Equipment

120,000

120,000

Accumulated Depreciation

36,200

42,200

Accounts Payable

14,600

14,600

Unearned Admissions Revenue

3,700

2,000

Mortgage Note Payable

50,000

50,000

L. Disney, Capital

109,700

109,700

L. Disney, Drawing

14000

14000

Admissions Revenue

277,500

279,200

Salaries Expense

105,000

105,000

Repair Expense

30,500

30,500

Advertising Expense

9,400

9,400

Utilities Expense

16,900

16,900

Property Taxes Expense

18,000

21,000

Interest Expense

6,000

10,000

Totals

491,700

491700

Insurance Expense

23000

Supplies Expense

17400

Interest Payable

4000

Depreciation Expense

6000

Property Taxes Payable

3000

Totals

504700

504700

Instructions

(a) Prepare a complete worksheet.

(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet. (Note: $10,000 of the mortgage note payable is due for payment in the next fiscal year.)

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries using the worksheet as a basis.

(d) Journalize the closing entries using the worksheet as a basis.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

laura eddy opened eddy rsquo s carpet cleaners on march 1 during march the following 576571

Laura Eddy opened Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners on March 1. During March, the following transactions were completed.

Mar. 1 Invested $10,000 cash in the business.

1 Purchased used truck for $6,000, paying $3,000 cash and the balance on account.

3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,200 on account.

5 Paid $1,200 cash on one year insurance policy effective March 1.

14 Billed customers $4,800 for cleaning services.

18 Paid $1,500 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

20 Paid $1,800 cash for employee salaries.

21 Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on March 14.

28 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $200.

31 Withdrew $700 cash for personal use.

The chart of accounts for Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners contains the following accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No.

157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 301 L. Eddy, Capital; No. 306, L. Eddy, Drawing; No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense, No. 634 Cleaning Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize and post the March transactions. Use page J1 for the journal and the three column form of account.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at March 31 on a worksheet.

(c) Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet.

(1) Earned but unbilled revenue at March 31 was $700.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $250.

(3) One twelfth of the insurance expired.

(4) An inventory count shows $400 of cleaning supplies on hand at March 31.

(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $500.

(d) Prepare the income statement and owner’s equity statement for March and a classified balance sheet at March 31.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.

(f) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process. Use page J3 for the journal.

(g) Prepare a post closing trial balance at March 31.

joe edmonds cpa was retained by fox cable to prepare financial statements for april 576572

Joe Edmonds, CPA, was retained by Fox Cable to prepare financial statements for April 2010. Edmonds accumulated all the ledger balances per Fox’s records and found the following.

FOX CABLE
Trial Balance
April 30, 2010

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,100

Accounts Receivable

3,200

Supplies

800

Equipment

10,600

Accumulated Depreciation

$ 1,350

Accounts Payable

2,100

Salaries Payable

700

Unearned Revenue

890

A. Manion, Capital

12,900

Service Revenue

5,450

Salaries Expense

3,300

Advertising Expense

600

Miscellaneous Expense

290

Depreciation Expense

500

$23,390

$23,390

Joe Edmonds reviewed the records and found the following errors.

1. Cash received from a customer on account was recorded as $960 instead of $690.

2. A payment of $65 for advertising expense was entered as a debit to Miscellaneous Expense $65 and a credit to Cash $65.

3. The first salary payment this month was for $1,900, which included $700 of salaries payable on March 31.The payment was recorded as a debit to Salaries Expense $1,900 and a credit to Cash $1,900. (No reversing entries were made on April 1.)

4. The purchase on account of a printer costing $290 was recorded as a debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Payable for $290.

5. A cash payment of repair expense on equipment for $95 was recorded as a debit to Equipment $59 and a credit to Cash $59.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an analysis of each error showing (1) the incorrect entry, (2) the correct entry, and (3) the correcting entry. Items 4 and 5 occurred on April 30, 2010.

(b) Prepare a correct trial balance.

prepare an income statement and owner rsquo s equity statement for the month of marc 576573

The trial balance columns of the worksheet for Sasse Roofing at March 31, 2010, are as follows.

SASSE ROOFING
Worksheet
For the Month Ended March 31, 2010

Trial Balance

Account Titles

Cash

4,500

Accounts Receivable

3,200

Roofing Supplies

2,000

Equipment

11,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

1,250

Accounts Payable

2,500

Unearned Revenue

550

J. Sasse, Capital

12,900

J. Sasse, Drawing

1,100

Service Revenue

1,300

6,300

Salaries Expense

400

Miscellaneous Expense

23,500

Other data:

1. A physical count reveals only $650 of roofing supplies on hand.

2. Depreciation for March is $250.

3. Unearned revenue amounted to $170 at March 31.

4. Accrued salaries are $600.

Instructions

(a) Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of March and a classified balance sheet at March 31. J. Sasse did not make any additional investments in the business in March.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries from the adjustments columns of the worksheet.

(d) Journalize the closing entries from the financial statement columns of the worksheet.

the adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for rachel company owned by toni 576574

The adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for Rachel Company, owned by Toni Rachel, are as follows.

RACHEL COMPANY
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account Titles

101

Cash

8,100

112

Accounts Receivable

10,800

126

Supplies

1,500

130

Prepaid Insurance

2,000

151

Office Equipment

24,000

152

Accumulated Depreciation—Office

5,600

200

Notes Payable

15,000

201

Accounts Payable

6,100

212

Salaries Payable

2,400

230

Interest Payable

600

301

T. Rachel, Capital

15,800

306

T. Rachel, Drawing

7,000

400

Service Revenue

61,000

610

Advertising Expense

8,400

631

Supplies Expense

4,000

711

Depreciation Expense

5,600

722

Insurance Expense

3,500

726

Salaries Expense

31,000

905

Interest Expense

600

Totals

106,500

106,500

Instructions

(a) Complete the worksheet by extending the balances to the financial statement columns.

(b) Prepare an income statement, owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet.

(Note: $9,000 of the notes payable become due in 2011.) Toni Rachel did not make any additional investments in the business during the year.

(c) Prepare the closing entries. Use J14 for the journal page.

(d) Post the closing entries. Use the three column form of account. Income Summary is No. 350.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

the completed financial statement columns of the worksheet for muddy company are sho 576575

The completed financial statement columns of the worksheet for Muddy Company are shown below and on the page/p>

MUDDY COMPANY
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Account Titles

101

Cash

17,900

112

Accounts Receivable

10,800

130

Prepaid Insurance

2,800

157

Equipment

21,000

167

Accumulated Depreciation

4,500

201

Accounts Payable

9,000

212

Salaries Payable

2,400

301

Melissa Muddy, Capital

28,500

306

Melissa Muddy, Drawing

11,000

400

Service Revenue

56,000

622

Repair Expense

1,600

711

Depreciation Expense

2,100

722

Insurance Expense

1,800

726

Salaries Expense

30,000

732

Utilities Expense

1,400

Totals

36,900

Net Income

19,100

56,000

63,500

44,400

56,000

19,100

56,000

63,500

63,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement, an owner’s equity statement, and a classified balance sheet.

(b) Prepare the closing entries. Melissa did not make any additional investments during the year.

(c) Post the closing entries and rule and balance the accounts. Use T accounts. Income Summary is account No. 350.

(d) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

rockford management services began business on january 1 2010 with a capital investm 576576

Rockford Management Services began business on January 1, 2010, with a capital investment of $120,000.The company manages condominiums for owners (Service Revenue) and rents space in its own office building (Rent Revenue). The trial balance and adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet at the end of the first year are as follows.

ROCKFORD MANAGEMENT SERVICES
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Trial Balance

Adjusted Trial Balance

Cash

13,800

13,800

Accounts Receivable

28,300

28,300

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

2,400

Land

67,000

67,000

Building

127,000

127,000

Equipment

59,000

59,000

Accounts Payable

12,500

12,500

Unearned Rent Revenue

6,000

2,000

Mortgage Note Payable

120,000

120,000

R. Neillsen, Capital

144,000

144,000

R. Neillsen, Drawing

22,000

22,000

Service Revenue

90,700

90,700

Rent Revenue

29,000

33,000

Salaries Expense

42,000

42,000

Advertising Expense

20,500

20,500

Utilities Expense

19,000

19,000

Totals

402,200

402,200

Insurance Expense

1,200

Depreciation Expense—Building

3,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Building

3000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

4,700

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

4700

Interest Expense

11,000

Interest Payable

11000

Totals

420,900

420,900

Instructions

(a) Prepare a complete worksheet.

(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet. (Note: $20,000 of the mortgage note payable is due for payment next year.)

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries.

(d) Journalize the closing entries.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

you are presented with the following list of accounts from the adjusted trial balanc 576580

You are presented with the following list of accounts from the adjusted trial balance for merchandiser Gorman Company. Indicate in which financial statement and under what classification each of the following would be reported.

Accounts Payable

Interest Payable

Accounts Receivable

Land

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Building

Merchandise Inventory

Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

Notes Payable (due in 3 years)

Advertising Expense

Office Building

Depreciation Expense

Property Tax Payable

B. Gorman, Capital

Salaries Expense

B. Gorman, Drawing

Salaries Payable

Cash

Sales Returns and Allowances

Freight out

Store Equipment

Gain on Sale of Equipment

Sales Revenue

Insurance Expense

Utilities Expense

Interest Expense

the adjusted trial balance columns of falcetto company rsquo s worksheet for the yea 576581

The adjusted trial balance columns of Falcetto Company’s worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2010, are as follows.

Debit

Credit

Cash

14,500

Accumulated Depreciation

18,000

Accounts Receivable

11,100

Notes Payable

25,000

Merchandise Inventory

29,000

Accounts Payable

10,600

Prepaid Insurance

2,500

Larry Falcetto, Capital

81,000

Store Equipment

95,000

Sales

536,800

Larry Falcetto, Drawing

12,000

Interest Revenue

2,500

Sales Returns and Allowances

6,700

673,900

Sales Discounts

5,000

Cost of Goods Sold

363,400

Freight out

7,600

Advertising Expense

12,000

Salaries Expense

56,000

Utilities Expense

18,000

Rent Expense

24,000

Depreciation Expense

9,000

Insurance Expense

4,500

Interest Expense

3,600

673,900

Instructions

Prepare a multiple step income statement for Falcetto Company.

determine which segments are reportable segments under both the 10 percent and the 7 576618

Apply threshold tests—disclosure

Vic Corporation operates entirely in the United States but in different industries. It segments the business based on industry. Total sales of the segments, including intersegment sales, are as follows:

Concrete and stone products

$ 400,000

Construction

1,000,000

Lumber and wood products

1,800,000

Building materials

1,000,000

Other

100,000

Further analysis reveals sales from one segment to another as follows:

Lumber and wood products

$800,000

Building materials

400,000

REQUIRED

1. Determine which segments are reportable segments under both the 10 percent and the 75 percent revenue tests.

2. Prepare a schedule suitable for disclosing revenue by industry segment for external reporting.

3. Prepare a reconciliation of segment revenue with corporate revenue.

determine the reportable segments of sur corporation 576619

Apply threshold tests

Sur Corporation’s internal divisions are based on industry. The revenues, operating profits, and assets of the operating segments of Sur are presented in thousands of dollars as follows:

Sales to Non affiliates

Intersegment Sales

Total Sales

Operating Profit (Loss)

Assets

Food service industry

$150,000

$20,000

$170,000

$ 20,000

$100,000

Copper mine

40,000

40,000

(5,000)

30,000

Information systems

10,000

7,500

17,500

2,500

20,000

Chemical industry

65,000

10,000

75,000

15,250

108,500

Agricultural products

24,000

24,000

(7,750)

25,000

Pharmaceutical products

10,000

10,000

4,000

9,000

Foreign operations

7,500

7,500

2,500

10,000

Corporate assets *

$306,500

$37,500

$344,000

$ 31,500

16,500

$319,000

REQUIRED: Determine the reportable segments of Sur Corporation.

in its segment information for 2011 how many reportable segments does coy have 576621

Apply threshold tests

1. Coy Corporation and its divisions are engaged solely in manufacturing operations. The following data (consistent with prior years’ data) pertain to the industries in which operations were conducted for the year ended December 31, 2011 (in thousands):

Industry

Total Revenue

Operating Profit

Assets at December 31, 2011

A

$10,000

$1,750

$20,000

B

8,000

1,400

17,500

C

6,000

1,200

12,500

D

3,000

550

7,500

E

4,250

675

7,000

F

1,500

225

3,000

$32,750

$5,800

$67,500

In its segment information for 2011, how many reportable segments does Coy have?

a Three

b Four

c Five

d Six

the intersegment interest is not reported by the divisions on internal reports revie 576623

The following information pertains to Ari Corporation and its divisions for the year ended December 31, 2011 (in thousands):

Sales to unaffiliated customers

$4,000

Intersegment sales of products similar to those

sold to unaffiliated customers

1,200

Interest earned on loans to other industry segments

80

The intersegment interest is not reported by the divisions on internal reports reviewed by the chief operating officer. Ari and all of its divisions are engaged solely in manufacturing operations. Ari has a reportable segment if that segment’s revenue exceeds:

a $528

b $520

c $408

d $400

use the following information in answering questions 5 and 6 gum corporation a publi 576624

The following information pertains to revenue earned by Wig Company’s operating segments for the year ended December 31, 2011:

Segment

Sales to Unaffiliated Customers

Intersegment Sales

Total Revenues

Ames

$ 10,000

$ 6,000

$ 16,000

Beck

16,000

8,000

24,000

Cyns

8,000

8,000

DG

86,000

32,000

118,000

Combined

120,000

46,000

166,000

Elimination

(46,000)

(46,000 )

Consolidated

$120,000

$120,000

In conformity with the revenue test, Wig reportable segments were:

a Only DG

b Beck and DG

c Ames, Beck, and DG

d Ames, Beck, Cyns, and DG

Use the following information in answering questions 5 and 6: Gum Corporation, a publicly owned corporation, is subject to the requirements for segment reporting. In its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, Gum reported revenues of $50,000,000, operating expenses of $47,000,000, and net payroll costs of $15,000,000. Gum’s combined identifiable assets of all industry segments at December 31, 2011, were $40,000,000.

prepare a schedule to calculate ent corporation rsquo s net income by quarter 576636

Interim tax

The estimated and actual pretax incomes of Ent Corporation by quarter for 2011 were as follows:

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

3rd Quarter

4th Quarter

Estimated pretax income

$30,000

$30,000

$40,000

$50,000

Actual pretax income

30,000

40,000

40,000

40,000

Ent calculated its estimated annual effective income tax rate to be 27.8333 percent, based on estimated pretax income and existing income tax rates.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule to calculate Ent Corporation’s net income by quarter.

decrease in the first quarter by the amount of the market price decline and increase 576637

Interim accounting for various situations—tax

1. An inventory loss from a market price decline occurred in the first quarter, and the decline was not expected to reverse during the fiscal year. However, in the third quarter, the inventory’s market price recovery exceeded the market decline that occurred in the first quarter. For interim financial reporting, the dollar amount of net inventory should:

a Decrease in the first quarter by the amount of the market price decline and increase in the third quarter by the amount of the decrease in the first quarter

b Decrease in the first quarter by the amount of the market price decline and increase in the third quarter by the amount of the market price recovery

c Decrease in the first quarter by the amount of the market price decline and not be affected in the third quarter

d Not be affected in either the first quarter or the third quarter

the mound view motel opened for business on may 1 2010 its trial balance before adju 576499

The Mound View Motel opened for business on May 1, 2010. Its trial balance before adjustment on May 31 is as follows.

MOUND VIEW MOTEL
Trial Balance
May 31, 2010

Account

Number

Debit

Credit

101

Cash

$ 3,500

126

Supplies

2,200

130

Prepaid Insurance

2,280

140

Land

12,000

141

Lodge

60,000

149

Furniture

15,000

201

Accounts Payable

$ 4,800

209

Unearned Rent Revenue

3,300

275

Mortgage Payable

35,000

301

Kevin Henry, Capital

46,380

429

Rent Revenue

10,300

610

Advertising Expense

600

726

Salaries Expense

3,300

732

Utilities Expense

900

$99,780

$99,780

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Mound View Motel also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 142 Accumulated Depreciation—Lodge, No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Furniture, No. 212 Salaries Payable,No. 230 Interest Payable,No. 619 Depreciation Expense—Lodge,No. 621 Depreciation Expense—Furniture, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 718 Interest Expense, and No. 722 Insurance Expense.

Other data:

1. Prepaid insurance is a 1 year policy starting May 1, 2010.

2. A count of supplies shows $750 of unused supplies on May 31.

3. Annual depreciation is $3,000 on the lodge and $2,700 on furniture.

4. The mortgage interest rate is 12%. (The mortgage was taken out on May 1.)

5. Two thirds of the unearned rent revenue has been earned.

6. Salaries of $750 are accrued and unpaid at May 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on May 31.

(b) Prepare a ledger using the three column form of account. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries. (Use J1 as the posting reference.)

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on May 31.

(d) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

poblano co was organized on july 1 2010 quarterly financial statements are prepared 576500

Poblano Co. was organized on July 1, 2010. Quarterly financial statements are prepared. The unadjusted and adjusted trial balances as of September 30 are shown below.

POBLANO CO.
Trial Balance
September 30, 2010

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Cash

$ 8,700

$ 8,700

Accounts Receivable

10,400

11,200

Supplies

1,500

900

Prepaid Rent

2,200

1,300

Equipment

18,000

18,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 500

Notes Payable

$ 10,000

10,000

Accounts Payable

2,500

2,500

Salaries Payable

725

Interest Payable

100

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,900

1,050

Rikki Poblano, Capital

22,000

22,000

Rikki Poblano, Drawing

1600

1600

Commission Revenue

16,000

16,800

Rent Revenue

1,410

2,260

Salaries Expense

8,000

8,725

Rent Expense

1,900

2,800

Depreciation Expense

500

Supplies Expense

600

Utilities Expense

1,510

1,510

Interest Expense

100

$53,810

$53,810

$55,935

$55,935

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries that were made.

(b) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the 3 months ending September 30 and a balance sheet at September 30.

(c) If the note bears interest at 12%, how many months has it been outstanding?

a review of the ledger of obi company at december 31 2010 produces the following dat 576501

A review of the ledger of Obi Company at December 31, 2010, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.

1. Prepaid Insurance $9,900. The company has separate insurance policies on its buildings and its motor vehicles. Policy B4564 on the building was purchased on April 1, 2009, for $7,200.

The policy has a term of 3 years. Policy A2958 on the vehicles was purchased on January 1, 2010, for $4,500.This policy has a term of 2 years.

2. Unearned Subscriptions $45,000.The company began selling magazine subscriptions in 2010 on an annual basis. The magazine is published monthly. The selling price of a subscription is $45. A review of subscription contracts reveals the following.

3. Notes Payable $100,000.This balance consists of a note for 9 months at an annual interest rate of 9%, dated November 1.

4. Salaries Payable $0.There are eight salaried employees. Salaries are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive a salary of $700 each per week, and three employees earn $500 each per week. Assume December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends.

All employees worked the last 2 days of December.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2010.

prepare an income statement and an owner rsquo s equity statement for november and a 576502

On November 1, 2010, the account balances of Morelli Equipment Repair were as follows.

Debits

Credit

101

Cash

$ 2,400

154

Accumulated Depreciation

$ 2,000

112

Accounts Receivable

4,250

201

Accounts Payable

2,600

126

Supplies

1,800

209

Unearned Service Revenue

1,200

153

Store Equipment

12,000

212

Salaries Payable

700

301

V. Morelli, Capital

13,950

$20,450

$20,450

During November the following summary transactions were completed.

Nov. 8 Paid $1,700 for salaries due employees, of which $700 is for October salaries.

10 Received $3,420 cash from customers on account.

12 Received $3,100 cash for services performed in November.

15 Purchased store equipment on account $2,000.

17 Purchased supplies on account $700.

20 Paid creditors on account $2,700.

22 Paid November rent $400.

25 Paid salaries $1,700.

27 Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $900.

29 Received $600 from customers for future service.

Adjustment data consist of:

1. Supplies on hand $1,200.

2. Accrued salaries payable $400.

3. Depreciation for the month is $200.

4. Unearned service revenue of $1,250 is earned.

Instructions

(a) Enter the November 1 balances in the ledger accounts.

(b) Journalize the November transactions.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts. Use J1 for the posting reference. Use the following additional accounts:

No. 407 Service Revenue, No. 615 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 726 Salaries Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at November 30.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for November and a balance sheet at November 30.

happy camper park was organized on april 1 2009 by amaya berge amaya is a good manag 576504

Happy Camper Park was organized on April 1, 2009, by Amaya Berge. Amaya is a good manager but a poor accountant.From the trial balance prepared by a part time bookkeeper, Amaya prepared the following income statement for the quarter that ended March 31, 2010.

HAPPY CAMPER PARK
Income Statement
For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2010

Revenues

Rental revenue

$90,000

Operating expenses

Advertising

$ 5,200

Wages

29,800

Utilities

900

Depreciation

800

Repairs

4,000

Total operating expenses

40,700

Net income

$49,300

Amaya thought that something was wrong with the statement because net income had never exceeded $20,000 in any one quarter. Knowing that you are an experienced accountant, she asks you to review the income statement and other data. You first look at the trial balance. In addition to the account balances reported above in the income statement, the ledger contains the following additional selected balances at March 31, 2010.

Supplies

$ 6,200

Prepaid Insurance

7,200

Notes Payable

12,000

You then make inquiries and discover the following.

1. Rental revenues include advanced rentals for summer occupancy $15,000.

2. There were $1,700 of supplies on hand at March 31.

3. Prepaid insurance resulted from the payment of a one year policy on January 1, 2010.

4. The mail on April 1, 2010, brought the following bills: advertising for week of March 24, $110; repairs made March 10, $260; and utilities, $180.

5. There are four employees, who receive wages totaling $300 per day. At March 31, 2 days’ wages have been incurred but not paid.

6. The note payable is a 3 month, 10% note dated January 1, 2010.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a correct income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2010.

(b) Explain to Amaya the generally accepted accounting principles that she did not recognize in preparing her income statement and their effect on her results.

you qualify for the mortgage loan but just barely how would you address each of the 576506

Companies must report or disclose in their financial statements information about all liabilities, including potential liabilities related to environmental clean up. There are many situations in which you will be asked to provide personal financial information about your assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses. Sometimes you will face difficult decisions regarding what to disclose and how to disclose it. Instructions Suppose that you are putting together a loan application to purchase a home. Based on your income and assets, you qualify for the mortgage loan, but just barely. How would you address each of the following situations in reporting your financial position for the loan application? Provide responses for each of the following questions.

(a) You signed a guarantee for a bank loan that a friend took out for $20,000. If your friend doesn’t pay, you will have to pay.Your friend has made all of the payments so far, and it appears he will be able to pay in the future.

(b) You were involved in an auto accident in which you were at fault. There is the possibility that you may have to pay as much as $50,000 as part of a settlement. The issue will not be resolved before the bank processes your mortgage request.

(c) The company at which you work isn’t doing very well, and it has recently laid off employees.

You are still employed, but it is quite possible that you will lose your job in the next few months.

the following are the major balance sheet classifications 576546

The following are the major balance sheet classifications:

Current assets (CA)

Current liabilities (CL)

Long term investments (LTI)

Long term liabilities (LTL)

Property, plant, and equipment (PPE)

Owner’s equity (OE)

Intangible assets (IA)

Match each of the following accounts to its proper balance sheet classification.

Accounts payable

Income tax payable

Accounts receivable

Investment in long term bonds

Accumulated depreciation

Land

Building

Merchandise inventory

Cash

Patent

Copyrights

Supplies

javier vasquez recently received the following information related to vasquez compan 576550

Javier Vasquez recently received the following information related to Vasquez Company’s December 31, 2010, balance sheet.

Inventories

$ 2,900

Short term investments

$ 120

Cash

13,400

Accumulated depreciation

5,700

Equipment

21,700

Accounts receivable

4,300

Investments in stock (long term)

6,500

Prepare the assets section of Vasquez Company’s classified balance sheet.

the following accounts were taken from the financial statements of crofoot company 576551

The following accounts were taken from the financial statements of Crofoot Company.

Interest revenue

J. Crofoot, Capital

Utilities payable

Accumulated depreciation

Accounts payable

Machinery

Supplies

Salaries expense

Bonds payable

Investment in real estate

Trademarks

Unearned rent

Match each of the accounts to its proper balance sheet classification, as shown below. If the item would not appear on a balance sheet, use “NA.”

Current assets (CA)

Current liabilities (CL)

Long term investments (LTI)

Long term liabilities (LTL)

Property, plant, and equipment (PPE)

Owner’s equity (OE)

Intangible assets (IA)

enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet 576552

The trial balance columns of the worksheet for Briscoe Company at June 30, 2010, are as follows.

BRISCOE COMPANY
Worksheet
for the Month Ended June 30, 2010

Trial Balance

Account Titles

Cash

$2,320

Accounts Receivable

2,440

Supplies

1,880

Accounts Payable

$1,120

Unearned Revenue

240

Lenny Briscoe, Capital

3,600

Service Revenue

2,400

Salaries Expense

560

Miscellaneous Expense

160

$7,360

$7,360

Other data:

1. A physical count reveals $300 of supplies on hand.

2. $100 of the unearned revenue is still unearned at month end.

3. Accrued salaries are $280.

Instructions

Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet.

the adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for goode company are as follows 576553

The adjusted trial balance columns of the worksheet for Goode Company are as follows.

GOODE COMPANY
Worksheet (partial)
for the Month Ended April 30, 2010

Adjusted trial Balance

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Account Titles

Cash

13,752

Accounts Receivable

7,840

Prepaid Rent

2,280

Equipment

23,050

Accumulated Depreciation

4,921

Notes Payable

5,700

Accounts Payable

5,672

T. Goode, Capital

30,960

T. Goode, Drawing

3650

Service Revenue

15,590

Salaries Expense

10,840

Rent Expense

760

Depreciation Expense

671

Interest Expense

57

Interest Payable

57

Totals

62,900

62,900

Instructions

Complete the worksheet.

assuming the adjusted trial balance amount for each account is normal indicate the f 576554

The adjustments columns of the worksheet for Mears Company are shown below.

Adjustments

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

Accounts Receivable

600

Prepaid Insurance

400

Accumulated Depreciation

900

Salaries Payable

500

Service Revenue

600

Salaries Expense

500

Insurance Expense

400

Depreciation Expense

900

2,400

2,400

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries.

(b) Assuming the adjusted trial balance amount for each account is normal, indicate the financial statement column to which each balance should be extended.

prepare the adjusting entries that were made 576555

Selected worksheet data for Nicholson Company are presented below.

Account Titles

Trial Balance

Adjusted trial Balance

Accounts Receivable

?

34000

Prepaid Insurance

26000

20000

Supplies

?

Accumulated Depreciation

12000

?

Salaries Payable

?

5000

Service Revenue

88000

97000

Insurance Expense

?

Depreciation Expense

10000

Supplies Expense

5000

Salaries Expense

?

49000

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.

prepare closing entries at june 30 2010 576556

Emil Skoda Company had the following adjusted trial balance.

EMIL SKODA COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
for the Month Ended June 30, 2010

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account Titles

Debits

Credits

Cash

$3,712

Accounts Receivable

3,904

Supplies

480

Accounts Payable

$1,792

Unearned Revenue

160

Emil Skoda, Capital

5,760

Emil Skoda, Drawing

300

Service Revenue

4,064

Salaries Expense

1,344

Miscellaneous Expense

256

Supplies Expense

2,228

Salaries Payable

448

$12,224

$12,224

Instructions

(a) Prepare closing entries at June 30, 2010.

(b) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

post to b j apachi capital and no 350 income summary accounts use the three column f 576557

Apachi Company ended its fiscal year on July 31, 2010. The company’s adjusted trial balance as of the end of its fiscal year is as shown at the top.

APACHI COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
July 31, 2010

Account Titles

Debits

Credits

101

Cash

$ 14,840

112

Accounts Receivable

8,780

157

Equipment

15,900

167

Accumulated Depreciation

$ 7,400

201

Accounts Payable

4,220

208

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,800

301

B. J. Apachi, Capital

45,200

306

B. J. Apachi, Drawing

404

Commission Revenue

65,000

429

Rent Revenue

6,500

711

Depreciation Expense

4,000

720

Salaries Expense

55,700

732

Utilities Expense

14,900

$130,120

$130,120

Instructions

(a) Prepare the closing entries using page J15.

(b) Post to B. J. Apachi, Capital and No. 350 Income Summary accounts. (Use the three column form.)

(c) Prepare a post closing trial balance at July 31.

josh borke has prepared the following list of statements about the accounting cycle 576558

Josh Borke has prepared the following list of statements about the accounting cycle.

1. “Journalize the transactions” is the first step in the accounting cycle.

2. Reversing entries are a required step in the accounting cycle.

3. Correcting entries do not have to be part of the accounting cycle.

4. If a worksheet is prepared, some steps of the accounting cycle are incorporated into the worksheet.

5. The accounting cycle begins with the analysis of business transactions and ends with the preparation of a post closing trial balance.

6. All steps of the accounting cycle occur daily during the accounting period.

7. The step of “post to the ledger accounts” occurs before the step of “journalize the transactions.”

8. Closing entries must be prepared before financial statements can be prepared.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

prepare a classified balance sheet assume that 13 900 of the note payable will be pa 576561

The adjusted trial balance for Karr Bowling Alley at December 31, 2010, contains the following accounts.

Debits

Credits

Building

$128,800

Sue Karr, Capital

$115,000

Accounts Receivable

14,520

Accumulated Depreciation—Building

42,600

Prepaid Insurance

4,680

Accounts Payable

12,300

Cash

18,040

Note Payable

97,780

Equipment

62,400

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

18,720

Land

64,000

Interest Payable

2,600

Insurance Expense

780

Bowling Revenues

14,180

Depreciation Expense

7,360

$303,180

Interest Expense

2,600

$303,180

Instructions

(a) Prepare a classified balance sheet; assume that $13,900 of the note payable will be paid in 2011.

(b) Comment on the liquidity of the company.

the following are the major balance sheet classifications 576562

The following are the major balance sheet classifications.

Current assets (CA)

Current liabilities (CL)

Long term investments (LTI)

Long term liabilities (LTL)

Property, plant, and equipment (PPE)

Owner’s equity (OE)

Intangible assets (IA)

Instructions

Classify each of the following accounts taken from Roberts Company’s balance sheet.

Accounts payable

Accumulated depreciation

Accounts receivable

Buildings

Cash

Land

Roberts, Capital

Long term debt

Patents

Supplies

Salaries payable

Office equipment

Inventories

Prepaid expenses

Investments

the following items were taken from the financial statements of r stevens company al 576563

The following items were taken from the financial statements of R. Stevens Company. (All dollars are in thousands.)

Long term debt

$ 943

Accumulated depreciation

5,655

Prepaid expenses

880

Accounts payable

1,444

Property, plant, and equipment

11,500

Notes payable after 2011

368

Long term investments

264

R. Stevens, Capital

13,063

Short term investments

3,690

Accounts receivable

1,696

Notes payable in 2011

481

Inventories

1,256

Cash

$ 2,668

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2010.

prepare an income statement and an owner rsquo s equity statement for the year the o 576564

These financial statement items are for B. Snyder Company at year end, July 31, 2010.

Salaries payable

$ 2,080

Note payable (long term)

$ 1,800

Salaries expense

51,700

Cash

24,200

Utilities expense

22,600

Accounts receivable

9,780

Equipment

18,500

Accumulated depreciation

6,000

Accounts payable

4,100

B. Snyder, Drawing

4,000

Commission revenue

61,100

Depreciation expense

4,000

Rent revenue

8,500

B. Snyder, Capital (beginning of the year)

51,200

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year. The owner did not make any new investments during the year.

(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet at July 31.

the ledger of hammond inc on march 31 2010 includes the following selected accounts 576429

The ledger of Hammond, Inc. on March 31, 2010, includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

Office Supplies

2,800

Office Equipment

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

5,000

Unearned Revenue

9,200

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $100 per month.

2. Supplies on hand total $800.

3. The office equipment depreciates $200 a month.

4. One half of the unearned revenue was earned in March.

Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.

skolnick co was organized on april 1 2010 the company prepares quarterly financial s 576431

Skolnick Co. was organized on April 1, 2010.The company prepares quarterly financial statements. The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown below.

Debits

Credit

Cash

$ 6,700

Accumulated Depreciation—

$ 850

Accounts Receivable

600

Equipment

Prepaid Rent

900

Notes Payable

5,000

Supplies

1,000

Accounts Payable

1,510

Equipment

15,000

Salaries Payable

400

Bob Skolnick, Drawing

600

Interest Payable

50

Salaries Expense

9,400

Unearned Rent

500

Rent Expense

1,500

Bob Skolnick, Capital

14,000

Depreciation Expense

850

Commission Revenue

14,200

Supplies Expense

200

Rent Revenue

800

Utilities Expense

510

Interest Expense

50

Total debits

$37,310

Total credits

$37,310

(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.

(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2010.

(c) Determine the amount for Bob Skolnick, Capital at June 30, 2010.

queenan company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at 1 000 for the month o 576442

Queenan Company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at $1,000 for the month of June. The adjusting entry to record this depreciation is as follows:

a. Depreciation Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Queenan Company

1000

b. Depreciation Expense

1000

Delivery Equipment

1000

c. Depreciation Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Delivery Equipment

1000

d. Delivery Equipment Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Delivery Equipment

1000

the ledger of buerhle inc on march 31 2010 includes the following selected accounts 576475

The ledger of Buerhle, Inc. on March 31, 2010, includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

2,400

Office Supplies

2,500

Office Equipment

30,000

Unearned Revenue

10,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following:

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.

2. Supplies on hand total $900.

3. The office equipment depreciates $500 per month.

4. 2/5 of the unearned revenue was earned in March.

Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.

danks co was organized on april 1 2010 the company prepares quarterly financial stat 576477

Danks Co. was organized on April 1, 2010.The company prepares quarterly financial statements.The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown below.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 5,360

Accumulated Depreciation—

$700

Accounts Receivable

480

Equipment

Prepaid Rent

720

Notes Payable

4,000

Supplies

800

Accounts Payable

1,200

Equipment

12,000

Salaries Payable

300

John Danks, Drawing

500

Interest Payable

40

Salaries Expense

7,520

Unearned Rent

400

Rent Expense

1,200

John Danks, Capital

11,200

Depreciation Expense

700

Commission revenue

11,360

Supplies Expense

160

Rent revenue

690

Utilities Expense

410

Total credits

$29,890

Interest Expense

40

Total debits

$29,890

(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.

(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2010 for Danks Company.

(c) Determine the amount that appears for John Danks, Capital at June 30, 2010.

jo seacat has prepared the following list of statements about the time period assump 576478

Jo Seacat has prepared the following list of statements about the time period assumption.

1. Adjusting entries would not be necessary if a company’s life were not divided into artificial time periods.

2. The IRS requires companies to file annual tax returns.

3. Accountants divide the economic life of a business into artificial time periods, but each transaction affects only one of these periods.

4. Accounting time periods are generally a month, a quarter, or a year.

5. A time period lasting one year is called an interim period.

6. All fiscal years are calendar years, but not all calendar years are fiscal years.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

emeril earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transact 576481

Emeril Corporation encounters the following situations:

1. Emeril collects $1,000 from a customer in 2010 for services to be performed in 2011.

2. Emeril incurs utility expense which is not yet paid in cash or recorded.

3. Emeril’s employees worked 3 days in 2010, but will not be paid until 2011.

4. Emeril earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transaction.

5. Emeril paid $2,000 rent on December 1 for the 4 months starting December 1.

6. Emeril received cash for future services and recorded a liability until the revenue was earned.

7. Emeril performed consulting services for a client in December 2010. On December 31, it billed the client $1,200.

8. Emeril paid cash for an expense and recorded an asset until the item was used up.

9. Emeril purchased $900 of supplies in 2010; at year end, $400 of supplies remain unused.

10. Emeril purchased equipment on January 1, 2010; the equipment will be used for 5 years.

11. Emeril borrowed $10,000 on October 1, 2010, signing an 8% one year note payable.

Instructions

Identify what type of adjusting entry (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued expense, accrued revenue) is needed in each situation, at December 31, 2010.

drew carey company has the following balances in selected accounts on december 31 20 576482

Drew Carey Company has the following balances in selected accounts on December 31, 2010.

Accounts Receivable

$ 0

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

0

Equipment

7,000

Interest Payable

0

Notes Payable

10,000

Prepaid Insurance

2,100

Salaries Payable

0

Supplies

2,450

Unearned Consulting Revenue

40,000

All the accounts have normal balances.The information below has been gathered at December 31, 2010.

1. Drew Carey Company borrowed $10,000 by signing a 12%, one year note on September 1, 2010.

2. A count of supplies on December 31, 2010, indicates that supplies of $800 are on hand.

3. Depreciation on the equipment for 2010 is $1,000.

4. Drew Carey Company paid $2,100 for 12 months of insurance coverage on June 1, 2010.

5. On December 1, 2010, Drew Carey collected $40,000 for consulting services to be performed from December 1, 2010, through March 31, 2011.

6. Drew Carey performed consulting services for a client in December 2010. The client will be billed $4,200.

7. Drew Carey Company pays its employees total salaries of $9,000 every Monday for the preceding 5 day week (Monday through Friday). On Monday, December 29, employees were paid for the week ending December 26. All employees worked the last 3 days of 2010.

Instructions

Prepare adjusting entries for the seven items described above.

the ledger of piper rental agency on march 31 of the current year includes the follo 576484

The ledger of Piper Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

$ 3,600

Supplies

2,800

Equipment

25,000

Accumulated

Depreciation—Equipment

$ 8,400

Notes Payable

20,000

Unearned Rent Revenue

9,900

Rent Revenue

60,000

Interest Expense

–0–

Wages Expense

14,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. The equipment depreciates $400 per month.

2. One third of the unearned rent revenue was earned during the quarter.

3. Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.

4. Supplies on hand total $700.

5. Insurance expires at the rate of $200 per month.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly.

Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense.

andy wright d d s opened a dental practice on january 1 2010 during the first month 576485

Andy Wright,D.D.S., opened a dental practice on January 1, 2010. During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred.

1. Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $875 of such services was earned but not yet recorded.

2. Utility expenses incurred but not paid prior to January 31 totaled $520.

3. Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for $80,000, paying $20,000 in cash and signing a $60,000, 3 year note payable.The equipment depreciates $400 per month. Interest is $500 per month.

4. Purchased a one year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for $12,000.

5. Purchased $1,600 of dental supplies. On January 31, determined that $400 of supplies were on hand.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Account titles are: Accumulated Depreciation— Dental Equipment, Depreciation Expense, Service Revenue, Accounts Receivable, Insurance Expense, Interest Expense, Interest Payable, Prepaid Insurance, Supplies, Supplies Expense, Utilities Expense, and Utilities Payable.

the trial balances before and after adjustment for garcia company at the end of its 576489

The trial balances before and after adjustment for Garcia Company at the end of its fiscal year are presented below.

GARCIA COMPANY
Trial Balance
August 31, 2010

Before Adjustment

After adjustment

Cash

$10,400

$10,400

Accounts Receivable

8,800

9,800

Office Supplies

2,300

700

Prepaid Insurance

4,000

2,500

Office Equipment

14,000

14,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

$ 3,600

$ 4,500

Accounts Payable

5,800

5,800

Salaries Payable

–0–

1,100

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,500

600

T. Garcia, Capital

15,600

15,600

Service Revenue

34,000

35,000

Rent Revenue

11,000

11,900

Salaries Expense

17,000

18,100

Office Supplies Expense

–0–

1,600

Rent Expense

15,000

15,000

Insurance Expense

–0–

1,500

Depreciation Expense

–0–

900

$71,500

$71,500

$74,500

$74,500

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.

determine the amount of cash received by the club with respect to fees during 2010 576490

The following data are taken from the comparative balance sheets of Girard Billiards Club, which prepares its financial statements using the accrual basis of accounting.

December 31

2010

2009

Fees receivable from members

$14,000

$ 9,000

Unearned fees revenue

17,000

25,000

Fees are billed to members based upon their use of the club’s facilities. Unearned fees arise from the sale of gift certificates, which members can apply to their future use of club facilities.

The 2010 income statement for the club showed that fees revenue of $153,000 was earned during the year.

Instructions

(Hint: You will probably find it helpful to use T accounts to analyze these data.)

(a) Prepare journal entries for each of the following events that took place during 2010.

(1) Fees receivable from 2009 were all collected.

(2) Gift certificates outstanding at the end of 2009 were all redeemed.

(3) An additional $35,000 worth of gift certificates were sold during 2010. A portion of these was used by the recipients during the year; the remainder was still outstanding at the end of 2010.

(4) Fees for 2010 for services provided to members were billed to members.

(5) Fees receivable for 2010 (i.e., those billed in item [4] above) were partially collected.

(b) Determine the amount of cash received by the club, with respect to fees, during 2010.

colin mochrie company has the following balances in selected accounts on december 31 576491

Colin Mochrie Company has the following balances in selected accounts on December 31, 2010.

Consulting Revenue

$40,000

Insurance Expense

2,100

Supplies Expense

2,450

All the accounts have normal balances. Colin Mochrie Company debits prepayments to expense accounts when paid, and credits unearned revenues to revenue accounts when received. The following information below has been gathered at December 31, 2010.

1. Colin Mochrie Company paid $2,100 for 12 months of insurance coverage on June 1, 2010.

2. On December 1, 2010, Colin Mochrie Company collected $40,000 for consulting services to be performed from December 1, 2010, through March 31, 2011.

3. A count of supplies on December 31, 2010, indicates that supplies of $800 are on hand.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries needed at December 31, 2010.

tony masasi started his own consulting firm masasi company on june 1 2010 the trial 576493

Tony Masasi started his own consulting firm, Masasi Company, on June 1, 2010. The trial balance at June 30 is shown below.

MASASI COMPANY
Trial Balance
June 30, 2010

Account Number

Debit

Credit

101

Cash

$ 7,150

112

Accounts Receivable

6,000

126

Supplies

2,000

130

Prepaid Insurance

3,000

157

Office Equipment

15,000

201

Accounts Payable

$ 4,500

209

Unearned Service Revenue

4,000

301

T. Masasi, Capital

21,750

400

Service Revenue

7,900

726

Salaries Expense

4,000

729

Rent Expense

1,000

$38,150

$38,150

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Masasi Company also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 244 Utilities Payable, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 732 Utilities Expense.

Other data:

1. Supplies on hand at June 30 are $600.

2. A utility bill for $150 has not been recorded and will not be paid until next month.

3. The insurance policy is for a year.

4. $2,500 of unearned service revenue has been earned at the end of the month.

5. Salaries of $2,000 are accrued at June 30.

6. The office equipment has a 5 year life with no salvage value. It is being depreciated at $250 per month for 60 months.

7. Invoices representing $1,000 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of June 30.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of June. Use J3 as the page number for your journal.

(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances and place a check mark in the posting reference column.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at June 30, 2010.

neosho river resort opened for business on june 1 with eight air conditioned units i 576494

Neosho River Resort opened for business on June 1 with eight air conditioned units. Its trial balance before adjustment on August 31 is as follows.

NEOSHO RIVER RESORT
Trial Balance
August 31, 2010

Account Number

Debit

Credit

101

Cash

$ 19,600

126

Supplies

3,300

130

Prepaid Insurance

6,000

140

Land

25,000

143

Cottages

125,000

149

Furniture

26,000

201

Accounts Payable

$ 6,500

209

Unearned Rent Revenue

7,400

275

Mortgage Payable

80,000

301

P. Harder, Capital

100,000

306

P. Harder, Drawing

5,000

429

Rent Revenue

80,000

622

Repair Expense

3,600

726

Salaries Expense

51,000

732

Utilities Expense

9,400

$273,900

$273,900

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Neosho River Resort also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 144 Accumulated Depreciation—Cottages, No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Furniture, No. 212 Salaries Payable,No. 230 Interest Payable,No. 620 Depreciation Expense—Cottages,No.

621 Depreciation Expense—Furniture, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 718 Interest Expense, and No. 722 Insurance Expense.

Other data:

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $400 per month.

2. A count on August 31 shows $600 of supplies on hand.

3. Annual depreciation is $6,000 on cottages and $2,400 on furniture.

4. Unearned rent revenue of $4,100 was earned prior to August 31.

5. Salaries of $400 were unpaid at August 31.

6. Rentals of $1,000 were due from tenants at August 31. (Use Accounts Receivable.)

7. The mortgage interest rate is 9% per year. (The mortgage was taken out on August 1.)

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on August 31 for the 3 month period June 1–August 31.

(b) Prepare a l dger using the three column form of account. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries. (Use J1 as the posting reference.)

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on August 31.

(d) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the 3 months ending August 31 and a balance sheet as of August 31.

salaries payable 0 there are eight salaried employees salaries are paid every friday 576495

A review of the ledger of Remington Company at December 31, 2010, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.

1. Salaries Payable $0.There are eight salaried employees. Salaries are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive a salary of $800 each per week, and three employees earn $600 each per week. Assume December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends.

All employees worked the last 2 days of December.

2. Unearned Rent $324,000. The company began subleasing office space in its new building on November 1. At December 31, the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.

Term

Number of

Date

(in months)

Monthly Rent

Leases

Nov. 1

6

$4,000

5

Dec. 1

6

$8,500

4

3. Prepaid Advertising $15,000.This balance consists of payments on two advertising contracts.

The contracts provide for monthly advertising in two trade magazines.The terms of the contracts are as follows.

Contract

Date

Amount

Number of Magazine Issues

A650

May 1

$5,400

12

B974

Oct. 1

9,600

24

The first advertisement runs in the month in which the contract is signed.

4. Notes Payable $120,000.This balance consists of a note for one year at an annual interest rate of 9%, dated June 1.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2010. (Show all computations.)

performed services on account and billed customers for services provided 1 500 576496

On September 1, 2010, the account balances of Rand Equipment Repair were as follows.

Debits

Credits

101

Cash

$ 4,880

154

Accumulated Depreciation

$ 1,500

112

Accounts Receivable

3,520

201

Accounts Payable

3,400

126

Supplies

2,000

209

Unearned Service Revenue

1,400

153

Store Equipment

15,000

212

Salaries Payable

500

301

J. Rand, Capital

18,600

$25,400

$25,400

During September the following summary transactions were completed.

Sept. 8 Paid $1,400 for salaries due employees, of which $900 is for September.

10 Received $1,200 cash from customers on account.

12 Received $3,400 cash for services performed in September.

15 Purchased store equipment on account $3,000.

17 Purchased supplies on account $1,200.

20 Paid creditors $4,500 on account.

22 Paid September rent $500.

25 Paid salaries $1,250.

27 Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $1,500.

29 Received $650 from customers for future service.

Adjustment data consist of:

1. Supplies on hand $1,200.

2. Accrued salaries payable $400.

3. Depreciation is $100 per month.

4. Unearned service revenue of $1,450 is earned.

Instructions

(a) Enter the September 1 balances in the ledger accounts.

(b) Journalize the September transactions.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts. Use J1 for the posting reference. Use the following additional accounts: No. 407 Service Revenue, No. 615 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 726 Salaries Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at September 30.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for September and a balance sheet at September 30 on the next page.

may 31 is a wednesday and employees are paid on fridays hambone consulting has two e 576498

Ken Ham started his own consulting firm, Hambone Consulting, on May 1, 2010. The trial balance at May 31 is as follows.

HAMBONE CONSULTING
Trial Balance
May 31, 2010

Account

Number

Debit

Credit

101

Cash

$ 5,700

112

Accounts Receivable

6,000

126

Supplies

1,900

130

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

149

Office Furniture

10,200

201

Accounts Payable

$ 4,500

209

Unearned Service Revenue

2,000

301

K. Ham, Capital

17,700

400

Service Revenue

7,500

726

Salaries Expense

3,400

729

Rent Expense

900

$31,700

$31,700

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Hambone Consulting also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Office Furniture, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 229 Travel Payable, No. 631Supplies Expense, No. 717 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 736 Travel Expense.

Other data:

1. $900 of supplies have been used during the month.

2. Travel expense incurred but not paid on May 31, 2010, $250.

3. The insurance policy is for 2 years.

4. $400 of the balance in the unearned service revenue account remains unearned at the end of the month.

5. May 31 is a Wednesday, and employees are paid on Fridays. Hambone Consulting has two employees, who are paid $800 each for a 5 day work week.

6. The office furniture has a 5 year life with no salvage value. It is being depreciated at $170 per month for 60 months.

7. Invoices representing $1,200 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of May 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of May. Use J4 as the page number for your journal.

(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances and place a check mark in the posting reference column.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at May 31, 2010.

josh borke recorded the following transactions during the month of april 576404

Josh Borke recorded the following transactions during the month of April.

April 3

Cash

3,400

Photography Revenue

3,400

April 16

Rent Expense

600

Cash

600

April 20

Salaries Expense

300

Cash

300

Post these entries to the Cash T account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash.The beginning balance in cash on April 1 was $1,600.